A SYNTAX 
 
 OF 
 
 ATTIC GREEK 
 
 BY 
 
 F. E. THOMPSON, M.A. 
 
 ASSISTANT MASTER AT MARLBOROUGH COLLEGE 
 
 RIVING TONS 
 
 WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON 
 
 MDCCCLXXXIII 
 
 nib 
 
Oo 3/ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 
 § I -13. Introduction to the Simple and Compound Sentence, 
 and Definitions of Terms. 
 
 The Statement, Question, and Petition, Subject, Copula, and Predicate, 
 page 1 — The Predicate and its Supplementary Adjuncts, or Sup- 
 plementary Predicates, 2 — The Object, Direct and Remote, 5 — 
 The Predicate, Attributive or Epithet, and Apposition, 5 — Simple 
 and Compound Sentences, 5 — Principal 6.nd Subordinate Sentences, 
 6 — Co-ordinate Sentences, 7 — Classification of Subordinate Sen- 
 tences into : A. Substantival. B. Adverbial. C. Relative, 7 — Oratio 
 Recta, 10 — Oratio Obliqua, 10-^u«b-direct and Sub-oblique, 11 — 
 Virtually Oblique, 11. 
 
 PAET I. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 CB AFTER L 
 
 § 14-34. Subject and Predicate — Attributive and Apposition. 
 
 The Subject, page 12 — The Copula, 12 — Omission of the Copula, 12 — 
 Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the Accusative, and in 
 the Nominative, 13 — Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the 
 Genitive and Dative, 13 — Omission of the Subject, 13 — The Predi- 
 cate, 14 — Peculiarities in the Agreement of Subject and Predicate, 
 15 — Neuter Plural and Verb Singular, 15 — Neuter Plural and 
 Verb Plural, 15 — Adjective-Predicate in Neuter Singular with 
 Plural Subject, 15 — Schema Pindaricum, 16 — Agreement of Predi- 
 cate with several subjects, 16 — 6de, oCros, iKcTvos, as Subject and 
 Predicate, 18 — Peculiarities of Number, Singular, Dual, and Plural, 
 
iv CONTENTS. 
 
 18— The Dual Number, 19— The Plural used for the Singular, 21 
 — The First Pers6n Plural used of a Singular Subject, 22 — 
 Peculiarities of Person, 22 — Supplementary Predicates, 22 — 
 Peculiarities in the construction of the Attributive or Epithet, 
 23 — Peculiarities of Apposition, 24. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 § 35-66. J'he Article. 
 
 Origin and Development of the Article, page 27 — Survivals of the older 
 usages of 6, 17, rb, and 6's, ■^, 6 in Attic Greek, 28 — The Article in 
 Attic Greek, 29 — The Article with Participles, 31 — The Article 
 with Numerals, 31 — Fluctuating Use and Omission of the Article, 
 31 — With Objects of external nature, 32 — With material objects, 
 32 — With familiar places, things, and persons, 32 — With abstract 
 and other words, 32 — With names of arts, trades, and sciences, 33 
 — The Article with proper names of persons and places, 33 — 
 With geographical names, 33 — The noun-making power of the 
 Article, 34 — The Article distinguishes the Subject from the Predi- 
 cate, 36 — The Article with the Predicate, 37 — Position of the 
 Article : A . The Predicative Position. B. The Attributive Position, 
 37 — Position when a Genitive follows, 39 — Predicative Position 
 when used, 40 — Attributive Position when used, 41 — Words which 
 vary their meaning according to the position of the Article, 41 — 
 Oblique or Dependent Predicates, 43 — Idiomatic Phrases with the 
 Article, 46. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 § ^I'll' Pronouns. 
 
 Personal Pronouns, page 47 — Possessive Pronouns, 48 — Eeflexive Pro- 
 nouns, 49 — Demonstrative Pronouns, 51 — The Pronoun ai>r6s, 53 — 
 Interrogative Pronouns, 56 — Relative Pronouns and Attraction, 57 
 — Attraction, 58 — Miscellaneous instances of Attraction, 59 — In- 
 definite Pronouns, 61. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 § 78-126. The Cases. 
 
 Preliminary note on the cases, page 64 — The Nominative, 65 — The Vo- 
 cative, 66 — The Accusative. Preliminary Note, 66 — 1. The Internal 
 Accusative, 67 — 2, The External Accusative, 67 — Conspectus of 
 the Internal Accusative, 67 — The Internal Accusative, 68, includ- 
 ing : — (a.) Accusative of Respect, 69 — {&.) Accusative of Space 
 and Time, 70 — (c.) Accusative of Motion, 71 — {d.) Accusative of 
 the Object and Predicate in agreement or in apposition with the 
 Object, 71 — Double Accusative, 71 — The External Accusative, 
 74 — Verbs which take an External Accusative, 75 — The Genitive 
 78 — Preliminary Note on the Genitive, 78 — Possessive Genitive, 79 
 — Genitive of Material or Contents, 80 — Genitive of Amount, 
 81 — Genitive of Plenty or Want, 82 — The Partitive Genitive (so 
 called), 83 — Genitive of Connection, 86 — Subjective and Objective 
 Genitive, 90 — Genitive of Time and Place, 91 — Genitive of Value, 
 92 — Causal Genitive, 93 — Genitive with Verbs of Judicial Proceed- 
 ings, 95 — Genitive Absolute, 96 — Genitive with Comparatives, 97 — 
 Genitive with Verbs containing a Comparative Notion, 97 — 
 Genitive of Separation, 98 — Free and Miscellaneous Uses, 
 100 — Genitive with Compound Verbs, 100 — Double Genitive, 100 — 
 The Epexegetical Genitive, 100 — Genitive of the Agent (so called), 
 101 — Free use of the Genitive of Connection, 101 — The Genitive 
 with Adjectives and Adverbs, 102 — Free use of the Genitive vsdth 
 Substantives, 104 — Preliminary Note on the Dative Case, 104 — 
 Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105 — Miscellaneous 
 examples of the Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105 — 
 Dative of Interest, 106 — Free use of the Dative of Interest, 
 106— Dative of the Possessor, 108— Ethic Dative, 108— Dative of 
 Community or Contact, 108 — Dative of the Instrument or Means, 
 Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, 110 — Dative of Circum- 
 stance, 113 — Dative of Time and Place, 114 — List of Verbs which 
 take a Dative, 116 — List of Adjectives and Adverbs which take 
 a Dative, 119. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 §127. Comparative and Superlative. Page 120 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 § 128-134. Voices and Moods. 
 
 The Active Voice, page 124 — The Middle Voice, 125 — The Passive Voice, 
 130 — The Mood, 132 — Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and 
 Optative, 132 — The Subjunctive in Independent Sentences, 134 — 
 The Optative in Independent Sentences, 135 — The Imperative, 136. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 § 135-143. The Tenses. 
 
 Classifications of Greek Tenses, page 138 — Time how far observed 
 throughout the Moods, 139 — The Kind of Act or State denoted by 
 the Tenses, 140 — Ideal division of Tenses, 141 — The Present and Im- 
 perfect Indicative, 142 — The Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative, 144 
 —The Aorist, 145— Note on the Aorist, 148— The Future, 149— 
 Gnomic and Iterative Tenses, 151 — The Tenses in the Moods, 152. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 § 144-162. The Three Verbal Nouns. 
 
 1. The. Infinitive {a Substantive), page 153 — 2. The Participle {an Adjec- 
 tive), 153 — 3. The Verbal Adjectives in ros and reos, 153 — Note on 
 the Infinitive, 153 — The Infinitive, 153 — The Supplementary Infini- 
 tive, 154 — The Subject before and the Predicate after the Infinitive 
 (commonly called the Accusative with the Infinitive), 157 — The 
 Infinitive as a Noun, 160— The Participle, 162 — The Participle as 
 an Attributive, 163 — The Genitive Absolute, 165 — The Genitive 
 Absolute in Greek and Latin, 166— The Accusative Absolute, 167 
 — Verbals in -reos, 168 — Their personal construction, 168— Their 
 impersonal construction, 169 — The Supplementary Participle, 169 
 
 The Supplementary Participle in agreement with the subject 
 
 of the Verb : A. With Verbs of Saying and of Perception, 169 — 
 B. With Verbs of Emotion, 170— 0. With Verbs of Beginning, 
 Continuing, and Ending an Action, 170—2). With Verbs of making 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 vu 
 
 or becoming Manifest, and of escaping Notice, 170 — Note on 
 Special Verbs which take this construction, e.g. &pxoiJ.ai, (pddvu, 
 \avddvij3, etc., 171 — The Supplementary Participle in agreement 
 with the Object of the Verb : A. With Verbs of making to 
 cease, finding, detecting, overlooking, 174 — B. With Verbs of 
 Perception, 175 — The Tenses of the Participle, and time in the 
 Participles, 175— The Future Participle, 176. 
 
 PAKT II. 
 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 § 163- 170. Substantival Sentences. 
 
 1. The Indirect Statement, page 178 — 2. The Indirect Question, 178 — 
 3. The Indirect Petition, 178— The Indirect Statement, 178 : ^. The 
 Infinitive in the Indirect Statement, 178 — B. on and cl>s with the 
 Indicative and Optative in the Indirect Statement, 181 — C. The 
 Participle in the Indirect Statement, 186 — The Indirect Question, 
 188 — Deliberative or Dubitative Indirect Questions, 190 — The 
 Indirect Petition, 191. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 § 171-206. Conditional Sentences. 
 
 The Particle <xv, page 193 — Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194 — Con- 
 ditional Sentences, 195 — Distinction of Conditions, 196 — Division 
 of Conditional Sentences, 197— Ordinary Conditions, 197— Ordinary 
 Conditions in Greek and Latin, 200— General or Frequentative 
 Examples, 200 — The Negatives in Conditional Sentences, 201 — 
 Relative Conditional Sentences, 201 — Participles in the Protasis, 
 202— Position of &v, 203— Repetition of 6.v, 203— "A?/ with the Future 
 Indicative, 204— Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of the Verb, 
 205 — Ellipse of the Protasis, 205 — Ei and Hv both in the Protasis, 
 206 — A^ in Apodosis, 207 — ^"Edv seemingly interrogative, 207 — 
 Kv with the Participle seemingly in Protasis, 208 — Conditional 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Particles and their Combinations, 208 — Examples of Conditional 
 Sentences, el with Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis, 209 — [A.) 
 Ordinary Present Conditions, 209. [B. ) Ordinary Past Conditions, 
 209. [G.) Present and Past in Combination, 210 — Ordinary Future 
 Conditions, edv {i^v) with Subjunctive, 210 — Less Vivid Future 
 Conditions, el with Optative, 211 — Most Vivid Future Conditions, 
 ei with Future Indicative, 212 — Mixed examples illustrating the 
 connection between and interchangeability of the Subjunctive, 
 Optative, and Future Indicative in Conditional Sentences, 213 — 
 The Optative and Indicative with &v without a Protasis, 214 — 
 Unfulfilled Conditions, el with Historic Tenses of Indicative in 
 Protasis, av with the same in Apodosis, 215 — The omission of dv in 
 Apodosis with the Indicative, 217 — 'Edv (-^j/) with the Subjunctive, 
 and ei with the Optative in General or Frequentative Suppositions, 
 220 — Mixed Examples, 222 — Examples of the Conditional Parti- 
 ciple in a Protasis, 224 — Examples of a Conditional Relative 
 Sentence, 225 — Relative Conditional Sentences expressing General 
 Suppositions, 226 — Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with &v, 
 226 — Examples of Participle in Apodosis with av, 227 — Supple- 
 mentary Note on edv with the Subjunctive, and el with the Optative, 
 227. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 § 207-224. Temporal Sentences. 
 
 "When" in Definite Time (Past), eTret, eweih-r] {ijviKa, Sre), page 233 — "As 
 soon as," "Directly," in Definite Time, ^Trel {eTreidrj), rdxio'Ta, ws, 
 234 — "Whenever," "As often as," in Indefinite Time, iirel, eireLbi], 
 ijviKa, ore, dirdre, {eTrrjv, erretddv, orav, etc.), 235 — "Since" in Definite 
 Time, e^ 06, 236— "Whilst" in Definite Time, ^'ws, ^are, kv (?, h 
 oaw, 8aov xpivov, TjvcKa {fx^xpc), 237 — "Whilst " in Indefinite Time, 
 ^ws, etc., with &v and Subj., without &v and Opt., 237 — "Until" 
 in Definite Time, ecps, eare, fiixP'- ^XPh 238 — " Until " in Indefinite 
 Time, ews, etc., with dv and Subj., without dv an Opt., 239 — The 
 Conjunction irpiv, 240 — Upiv with the Infinitive, 241 — JIpiV with the 
 Indicative in Definite Time (Past), 242 — Upiv with the Subjunc- 
 tive and Optative in Indefinite Time, 242 — Upiv with the Infinitive 
 after Negative Sentences, and with the other Moods after Affirma- 
 tive Sentences, 243-^'Ai' omitted with the Subjunctive, in Temporal 
 and other Subordinate Sentences, 245— ^Av retained with the Opta- 
 tive, 246 — The Subjunctive instead of the Optative or co-ordinate 
 with the Optative in Historic Sequence, 246 — The Participle as a 
 Substitute for a Temporal Sentence, 247. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 § 225-226. Concessive Sentences. 
 
 Concessive Sentences, page 249 — Note on d kuI, /cat d, etc., 250. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 § 227-239. (i) Final Sentences^ (2) oVw? with the Future 
 Ifidicative, aiid {3) Verbs of Fearing with iitj, etc. 
 
 Final Sentences, page 253 — Final Particles with the Subjunctive and 
 Optative, 253 — Final Sentences with Past Tenses of the Indicative, 
 257 — Final Sentences with the Future Participle, 258 — Relative 
 Final Sentences, 258 — Final Sentences with the Infinitive, 259 — 
 "Ottws, Sttws /-"7, modal with the Future Indicative, etc. : and Vari- 
 ant Constructions, 259 — Elliptical use of Sttws, ottws /x?7 with the 
 Future Indicative, 262— ^'Ottws, Sttws fx-q with Verbs of Commanding 
 and Forbidding, 262 — Verbs of Fearing with {i-f} and ix-q ov, 262 — 
 Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative, 266 — Note on Dawes' 
 Canon, 267. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 § 240-244, Consecutive ajid Limitative Sentences. 
 
 Oo-re with the Indicative and the Infinitive, page 270— Consecutive Sen- 
 tences in Greek and Latin, 273— Relative Consecutive Sentences, 
 273— Limitative or Restrictive Sentences, 274. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 § 245. Causal Sentences. 
 
 (a.) Causal Particles and a Finite Mood, page 276— (6.) Relative Sen- 
 tences, 278— (c.) Participles, 278— (c^.) Miscellaneous ways, 279. 
 
X 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 
 §246. 
 
 Expressions of a Wish. 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Page 280 
 
 §247. 
 
 Relative Sefitences. 
 PART III. 
 
 Page 284 
 
 PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO OBLIQUA, AND 
 FIGURES. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 § 248-252. Prepositio7is. 
 
 Introductory Note on Prepositions, page 286 — The Prepositions and 
 their meanings with the three cases, 289 — Collected Usages of 
 Prepositions, 289 — Prepositions and the cases they go with, 291. 
 
 /. — Prepositions with one Case only : 
 § 253"255* M With Accusative only. 
 
 'Avd, page 291— Eis or es, 292— cus, 294. 
 
 § 256-264. (p.) With Genitive only. 
 
 dvTi, page 294— d7r(5, 295— e/c, i^, 297—irp&, SOO—dvev, 301— '^veKa, heKev, 
 301 — e/cart, 301 — x^^P^^i 301 — Old Cases used as quasi-Prepositions 
 with the Genitive, 302. 
 
 § 265-268. {c.) With Dative only. 
 
 iv^ page 302 — a^iv, 305 — Note on aijv and /xerd, 306 — dfia, 6fxov^ etc., 306. 
 
 //. — Prepositions with two Cases. 
 § 269-272. With Accusative and Genitive. 
 
 5td, page 307— /card, 310— i^Tr^p, 314— /xerd, 316. 
 
 Ill— Prepositions with all three Cases. 
 § 273-278. 
 iiiiipi, page 317— eTrf, 319— Trapd, 328— Trep/, 332— 7rp6s, 336— )}7r6, 341. 
 
CONTENTS. xi 
 
 CHAPTER 11. 
 § 279-310. The Negatives. 
 
 Introductory Note, page 345—0(5 Privative, 346— Oi) and ii-i] with Adjec- 
 tives, Participles used as Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substantives, 
 348— Oi) and /xiy with Participles, 350— Ou and y.-!] with the Infini- 
 tive, 351 — Ox) and yA] with Direct and Indirect Statements, 354 — 
 Oi) and \xr] with Indirect Statements in the Participle, 354— Oy and 
 ixx] with Direct Questions, 355 — Ou and /at? with Deliberative Ques- 
 tions, 356 — Ou and iiA] with Indirect Questions, 356 — Ou and iiA] 
 with IndirectPetitions, 357 — Ou and [li] with Conditional Sentences, 
 358 — Ou and iii] with Concessive Sentences, 359 — Ou and /A97 with 
 Causal Sentences, 359 — Ou and ijA] with Consecutive and Restrictive 
 Sentences, 360 — Ou and ixi] with Temporal and Local Sentences, 361 
 — Ou and ix-T] with Final Sentences, etc. , 361 — Ou and ijA\ with Rela- 
 tives, 362— Mi^ with Wishes, 364— M?; and Mr? ov with the Infinitive, 
 365 — Mt/ OX) with the Participle, 368 — Mi; and jjJt] ov with the Sub- 
 junctive, 369 — Ou fi-q with the Subjunctive and Future Indicative, 
 371— Further examples of ov ixi] with: A. Subjunctive, 372—5. 
 Future Indicative, 373 — Repetition of the Negative, 375— OuSei's, 
 firjoeis, ovMv, ixrjSiv, etc., 376 — Mt? with Oaths and Assertions, 378 
 — M/^ where ov might have been expected, 378 — Miscellaneous 
 instances showing the power of ov to make a downright Negative 
 Statement, 379 — Note on ijlt], /jltj ov with the Infinitive and Parti- 
 ciple, 380 — Note on /x-n and firi ov with the Subjunctive, 382 — Note 
 on ov fjt,^ with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative, 382. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 § 311-327. Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 Introductory, page 387 — Rules for Sub-direct Clauses in Oratio Obliqua, 
 389 — Types of Sub-direct Clauses in Historic Sequence, 390 — Rules 
 for Sub-oblique Clauses in Oratio Obliqua, 392 — Types of Sub-direct . 
 and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua, 393 — The Apodosis in the 
 Participle in Oratio Obliqua, 395 — Relative Sentences in Oratio 
 Obliqua, 395 — Some real examples of Oratio Obliqua analysed, 396 
 — The Infinitive, and on. or ws with Finite Moods in Sub-direct 
 Sentences of Oratio Obliqua, 398 — Assimilation of Optatives, 402 
 — Non- Assimilation, 403 — Examples of Mixed Graphic and strict 
 Obliqua, 404 — Virtual Oratio Obliqua, 404 — Past Tenses of the 
 Indicative in Oratio Obliqua, 405— Apparently Abnormal Obliqua, 
 406 — Long Speeches in Obliqua, 407. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER IK 
 
 § 328-347. Figures of Rhetoric, etc. 
 
 Alliteration, page 410 — Anakoluthia, 411 — Antiptosis, 412 — Asyndeton, 
 413 — Binary Structure, 413 — Brachylogy, 414 — Zeugma and Syl- 
 lepsis, 415 — Oonstructio Praegnans, 415 — Brachylogy of Com- 
 parison, 416 — Catachresis, 416 — Ellipse and Aposiopesis, 416 — 
 Euphemism, 417 — Hypallage, 418 — Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hys- 
 teron Proteron, 418 — Litotes, 419 — Oxymoron, 420 — Periphrasis, 
 421 — Pleonasm, 421— Prolepsis or Anticipation, 422 — Puns, 422. 
 
 Ejiglish Index, . Page 425 
 
 Greek Index, . 428 
 
 Table of References, . . . . . . -434 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Some explanation, perhaps apology, is necessary for 
 publishing a new Greek Syntax, when so many similar 
 books by really great Greek scholars are in use. My 
 object has been to write a Greek Syntax arranged on the 
 analytical method, i.e. by sentences, simple and com- 
 pound ; to attempt for Greek what Dr. Kennedy's in- 
 valuable Grammars have done for Latin. Dr. Donaldson's 
 once well-known Greek Grammars are so arranged : they 
 are the works of a very able man and a ripe scholar, but 
 no one would now accept the local theory of the Cases, 
 or the treatment of Conditionals as set forth in them. 
 
 I may perhaps be allowed to explain how I came 
 to write this Syntax, and the plan adopted in it, as the 
 book, such as it is, is not a mere compilation from other 
 Grammars. I have for many years been in the habit of 
 jotting down marginal references to constructions. When 
 three years ago it was suggested to me that I should 
 draw up a Greek Syntax, I began by writing out these 
 examples, under their different headings. I thus had an 
 outline of rules with many hundred examples, an outline 
 which has not been materially departed from. I then 
 read or re-read several books bearing on the subject. I 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 need hardly say that my views had to be modified on 
 several points of principle, and still more of detail. With 
 regard to the examples I do not suppose that I have 
 used or referred to one quarter of the original supply. 
 For several of my own, again, I have substituted others, 
 either because these latter were so familiar as to have 
 acquired vested rights with teachers and learners or 
 because they were handier. My original outline began 
 with Homeric instances, but, as I proceeded, I cut these 
 out, and confined myself solely to Attic, chiefly because 
 it was represented to me that, when boys write Greek 
 Prose or Iambics, they have such a fatal perversity for 
 bringing in an Epic word or construction. I need hardly 
 say that, when I read Mr. Monro's masterly Homeric 
 Grammar, I felt exceedingly glad that I had suppressed 
 my ow^n attempt to deal with so difficult a subject. A 
 monumental Greek Grammar should of course begin with 
 Homer, and end certainly not before the Hellenistic period, 
 proceeding with the grand march of the historic method. 
 In a book meant for boys or undergraduates the object 
 would, I think, be most practically secured by adding 
 appendices, Homeric, Hellenistic, and so forth. But this 
 suggestion need not be discussed here. 
 
 The analysis which I have followed is, with some 
 variations, the logical method made familiar by Dr. 
 Kennedy's Latin Grammars. Tor instance, I begin the 
 Introduction with a piece of formal logic : the Proposi- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 tion contains three parts, Subject, Copula, and Predicate. 
 Had I introduced Homeric examples, I should have pro- 
 bably commenced with the Verb {'la-TT^-ai, BcSco-ac, Predi- 
 cate -h Subject), connecting the thought with the form, 
 and have attempted to trace thence the gradual growth 
 and development of the Sentence. Indeed I might have 
 begun earlier with the blunt, but perfectly intelligible 
 expression of judgment : i/t^tt^o?, fool (Predicate only). 
 But though the historical method is unquestionably more 
 scientific, yet I deliberately adopted the logical for 
 several reasons, chiefly because teachers and boys are 
 alread)^ familiar with it in learning Latin : a double 
 advantage, for there is thus no new method to acquire, 
 and Greek and Latin can be worked together. 
 
 But, whichever method we pursue, it is equally unwise 
 and impossible to be rigidly consistent. Take the Cases, 
 for instance. The Nominative is used both as Subject 
 and as Predicate. The Accusative and Dative qualify a 
 Verb, and so may be regarded as supplementary Predi- 
 cates. The Genitive qualifies a Substantive, and thus is 
 Adjectival or Attributive : but it may also qualify, a Verb, 
 and so becomes a supplementary Predicate. It would 
 however be absurd to split up the Cases, and range their 
 uses under different Chapters. When we come to the 
 Compound Sentence one of two courses is open : either 
 (1) to treat all the usages of the Moods together, giving 
 one chapter to the Indicative, another to the Optative 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 and so on ; or (2) to take the different kinds of Subordin- 
 ate Sentences, and show how they are expressed by the 
 different Moods. Most Grammars adopt the former 
 method, and there is much to be said for it, the same, it 
 might appear, as for the Cases. This method brings to- 
 gether the different usages which often vary so slightly, 
 and shade off into one another ; it makes the learner see 
 that there are not so many distinct Optatives, but one 
 Optative. But experience convinces me that the method 
 of sentences is incomparably the most practical and 
 easily remembered, while in the hands of a careful teacher 
 the unity of each Mood may constantly be pointed out. 
 It is far easier for a boy to learn how to express the 
 different kinds of Temporal Sentences by treating them 
 all together than by dividing them among the Moods. 
 All grammars do this for Conditional Sentences, and why 
 not for other kinds of Subordinate Sentences which are 
 almost equally difficult ? However, in order to supple- 
 ment the plan adopted in the text, I have in the Index 
 given a full register of the uses of each Mood. I 
 have to a considerable extent adopted Dr. Donaldson's 
 theory of Predicates with some change of nomenclature. 
 His division into Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary 
 suggests three progressive and co-ordinate stages, whereas 
 a Secondary Predicate is simply an extension and part 
 of the whole Predicate, and a Tertiary Predicate is no- 
 thing but an ordinary Predicate (Adjective or Participle), 
 
PREFACE. xvii 
 
 not in the Nominative Case. I prefer therefore the terms 
 Supplementary, and Oblique (or Dependent). But what- 
 ever names we use, I believe that there is nothing which 
 gives the learner a greater grasp of a Greek passage 
 than a thorough assimilation of this doctrine of Predica- 
 tion. Take the Participle for instance, one of the com- 
 monest forms of supplementary Predicates, in a Platonic 
 paragraph, e.g., the Carpenter who is out of sorts and 
 calls in the Doctor, or the Parable of the Captain and the 
 mutinous Crew : a knowledge of the exact force of the 
 Participle in qualifying the main Predication is essential 
 towards picking our way through the paragraph, and 
 rendering the Greek into adequate English. 
 
 To come to details. The treatment of the Cases 
 must be unsatisfactory, in far abler hands than mine. 
 The usages of the Accusative and Dative fall easily 
 enough under fairly distinct heads. But the Genitive 
 seems a wilderness of cross- divisions. I do not see 
 how it is possible to assign its usages to the two distinct 
 heads of Connexion (Genitive), and Separation (Ablative). 
 To take only one case : who shall decide whether the 
 Genitive of Value and Price is the true Genitive de- 
 noting Connexion, or an Ablative denoting Exchange, i.e. 
 Separation ? Comparative Syntax often is quite power- 
 less to help us. Thus the Greek Genitive Absolute 
 seems unquestionably to be, as Kriiger pointed out long 
 ago, a real Genitive denoting " the sphere within which," 
 
 I 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 and so the Class, {e.g, Oeov ScSdvro^, within the sphere of 
 divine providence) ; but in Sanskrit the Absolute Case is 
 the Locative, in Latin it is Circumstantial, i.e. Instru- 
 mental, in Old English it was originally a Dative, and 
 subsequently a Nominative, in German a Genitive. I 
 have with misgivings retained the familiar but unsatisfac- 
 tory " Accusative of Eespect ; " it is anyhow as intelligible 
 as Professor Goodwin's " Accusative of Specification." 
 
 The Aorist requires more courageous treatment than it 
 usually receives, if we are anxious to render Greek into 
 correct and idiomatic English, and vice versa. The 
 Aorist- Stem denotes an act, single, complete, and summed 
 up. In the Indicative this act belongs to the past, 
 whether occurring a thousand years ago, or a moment 
 ago. When the past is not recent, the Aorist is trans- 
 lated by the English past tense, rfkOovy I came. But, 
 when the act is recent and bears on the present, the 
 Greeks could use the Aorist where we use a Perfect, e.g. 
 Od. V. 172, vvv 3' evOdhe Kafi/SaXe BacfJbcov, hut now a god 
 hath cast me on this shore: Luke v. 26, etBa/nev TrapdBo^a 
 G-rifjLepov, we have seen straTige things to-day. Again, where 
 the act has occurred a moment ago, the Greeks often used 
 the Aorist where we use a Present. Familiar instances 
 occur in the Tragedians, eirrjveaa} I commend ; yaOrjv,^ 
 I am pleased ; eBe^d/nrjv,^ I hail. Once more the gnomic 
 
 1 Soph. Ai. 536. 2 pj^n^ 1314 
 
 ^ Elektr. 668. Similarly airiirTvaa, i^ixw^a, ^vvrjKa, etc., etc. 
 
PREFACE. xix 
 
 or iterative Aorist is represented by the English Fast, 
 Perfect, or Present Tenses. And lastly in similes we must 
 translate the Aorist by a Present, e.g. II. v. 161, w<i h\ 
 Xemv Oopwv a^j), as a lion springeth and hreaketh. So far 
 with regard to Principal Sentences. In Subordinate 
 Sentences our rendering must be still more elastic, as we 
 shall see if we have to turn into Greek the following : 
 when I come, have (am) come, shall come, shall have come, 
 cTreiBav eXOco : if I had knoivn, el eyvojv : when they had 
 gone, eireihr] airrfkOov : I do not believe what you have said, 
 a e\e^a^, not necessarily a eXptjKa^ (in past Obliqua what 
 he had said, the Pluperfect in English, but the Aorist still 
 in Greek). 
 
 Thus, startling as the statement seems, the Greek 
 Aorist is translateable into almost every English tense 
 except the Imperfect.^ Mr. M. Arnold's dictum is as 
 wise as it is witty : '' the Aorist was made for man, and 
 not man for the Aorist." 
 
 ^ Our English, narrative Past Tense is by no means parallel with 
 the Greek Aorist. It often is the idiomatic and correct equivalent for 
 a Greek (or Latin) Imperfect, i.e. it is descriptive as well as narrative. 
 A few minutes' attention to any ordinary conversation, or almost any 
 page of a standard author, would prove this, e.g. Macaxjlay, History 
 of England, vol. i. ch. 2. (fin.): — "Still, however, the contest con- 
 tinued. He [Charles] assured the Duke of York that Halifax should 
 be dismissed from office, and Halifax that the Duke should be sent 
 to Scotland. In public he affected implacable resentment against 
 Monmouth, and in private conveyed to Monmouth assurances of un- 
 alterable afiection. " A boy set down to translate these tenses into 
 Greek would probably use the Aorist, because he has been required 
 to translate the Greek Imperfect by a clumsy, often unnecessary and 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 In dealing with the Moods I have probably (p. 133) 
 expressed myself too unhesitatingly that the Optative 
 cannot be a past form. Its Secondary endings, and the 
 possible loss of the separable augment, make it at least 
 conceivable that the Optative was originally past. If 
 this were so, a past form would (as in Hebrew, I believe) 
 be used to denote a wish. 
 
 I could not treat the Prepositions briefly, and did not 
 wish to do so. Nothing seems to me more conventional 
 than to pick out two or three uses of tt/oo? for instance, 
 and to make the learner believe that these are the dom- 
 inant and typical usages. Such a course seems to me a 
 great snare. I do not believe that the use of the Preposi- 
 tions can be taught in a few formal lessons, they must be 
 gradually acquired, like those of the Particles, by con- 
 stant observation. 
 
 In the Oratio Obliqua I have introduced the two 
 technical terms, Suh-direct and Suh-ohlique. Personally, 
 I prefer names to periphrases when dealing with facts of 
 constant recurrence, and I do not find the pupil puzzled. 
 But the teacher need not employ the terms if he objects 
 to them : the treatment of the chapter does not depend 
 on the terms. 
 
 I had prepared a chapter on Particles, but have sup- 
 
 Tinidiomatic, periphrasis, "he was affecting," "kept on conveying," 
 etc. Much more correctly T. K. Arnold of old taught us on p. 1 that 
 "the dog howled all night" required an Imperfect in Latin. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 pressed it, as the book already has outrun its intended 
 length. 
 
 It only remains for me to acknowledge my special 
 obligations, to authors and to friends. 
 
 Of books, besides old guides such as Jelf and Donald- 
 son, Liddell and Scott, I have found the following most 
 useful : — 
 
 (1) Kriiger's Griechische S'prachlehre. This is, all 
 round, the most useful Greek Grammar I know. It is 
 a vast treasury of well- chosen instances covering the 
 whole range of so-called classical Greek Literature. 
 Even if you do not always agree with his arrangement 
 or conclusions, Krtiger always furnishes ample materials 
 for induction. In substituting a better example for the 
 one which I had originally noted, I have found Kriiger 
 incomparable. 
 
 (2) Madvig's Syntax of the Greek Language, especially 
 of the Attic dialect. It would be impertinent in me to 
 praise this well-known work by the great scholar. There 
 seems to be nothing at second-hand in it. 
 
 (3) Goodwin's Moods and Tenses, and Greek Grammar. 
 The first-named book by this accomplished scholar is of 
 the greatest value. He has revolutionised the treatment 
 of the Conditionals; his treatment of Final and semi- 
 rinal Sentences is hardly less striking. I have ventured 
 to embody the substance of two of his papers in the 
 Journal of Philology in a note on edv and el. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 (4) Curtius's Student's Greek Grammar, and Elucida- 
 tions to the Greek Grammar. Both books are most 
 instructive ; the great philologer's Syntax is singularly 
 vigorous, fresh, and suggestive, 
 
 (5) Notes on Constructions in Mr. A. Sidgwick's In- 
 troductio7i to Greek Prose Com^position. Most practical and 
 incisive. 
 
 (6) Eiddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms, in his edition 
 of the Apology. I must record my great gratitude to 
 this lamented author. No book that I know of bearing 
 on Greek Syntax is so suggestive : no Greek scholar of 
 our time seems to me to combine, in so marked a degree, 
 fine taste, subtlety, and sound judgment. 
 
 I wish also to express my gratitude for the help afforded 
 in Professor Jebb's editions of the plays of Sophocles 
 and selections from the Attic Orators. 
 
 I have sparingly alluded to books of reference, and 
 then only to such as are easily procurable, such as 
 Professor M. Miiller's Essays. It would be useless to 
 refer boys, or most imdergraduates (I suppose), to Del- 
 briick's Syntaktische Forsdiungen for the comparative 
 treatment of Greek Syntax, and the probable evolution 
 of usages and constructions. But while the latter part 
 of this Grammar was in the press, Mr. D. B. Monro pub- 
 lished his long looked-for Homeric Grammar. It is a 
 book with which every teacher of Greek should be 
 thoroughly familiar, and to parts of which he may con- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 veniently refer his pupils for the origin and explanation 
 of Greek constructions. Mr. Monro has kindly per- 
 mitted me, in my Index, to refer to certain paragraphs 
 in his work. 
 
 T have to thank several friends for much help. 
 Mr. A. Sidgwick has been kind enough to go through 
 the whole of the proofs. I am deeply sensible that in so 
 doing he has most materially added to any value which 
 this book may possess. I have also to thank two old 
 friends for reading through some chapters with me, 
 and giving me the advantage of their views, — Professor 
 Butcher of Edinburgh, and Mr. F. Storr of Merchant 
 Taylors. And, lastly, I am much indebted to several 
 of my colleagues here for help and sympathy. 
 
 Some little slips, such as wrong accents, have inevitably 
 escaped several pairs of eyes. They, however, can be 
 easily rectified, and will cause no serious harm. If any 
 one who may use this book cares to point out more 
 important errors, I shall be extremely grateful. 
 
 F. E. THOMPSON. 
 
 Cotton House, Marlborough, 
 August 1883. 
 
NO TE. 
 
 The book is practically divided into — 
 
 I. An Elementary Syntax. 
 II. An Advanced Syntax. 
 
 The following distinctions have (with a few unimportant 
 exceptions) been observed : — 
 
 In I. \stly^ The type is large. 
 
 'indly, The headings are in Italics. 
 
 Srdly, The name of the author is given without reference to 
 line or chapter, etc. 
 II. Istly, The type is small. 
 
 2ndly, The headings are in thick black type. 
 Srdly, Reference is given to the line or chapter, etc., of the 
 author quoted. 
 
 Errata. 
 
 p. 12, § 16. "Omission of Copula " should be in Italics. 
 P. 79, § 92. * ' Possessive Genitive " should be in Italics. 
 P. 80, § 93. "Genitive of Material or Contents" should be in Italics, 
 
Iuniversity) 
 
 INTEODUCTION TO 
 
 THE SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCE, 
 
 AND DEFINITIONS OF TEEMS 
 
 § I. THE STATEMENT, QUESTION, AND 
 
 PETITION 
 
 A SENTENCE assumes three forms — (1) the Statement 
 {Enuntiatio) ; (2) the Question {Interrogatio) ; (3) the 
 Petition, i.e. a com.mand, request, prayer, or wish (Petitio). 
 
 A sentence, logically considered, connects (positively or 
 negatively) two distinct conceptions. Thus in the sentence, 
 " The rose is sweet," the conceptions of a certain flower 
 and a certain quality are connected positively. Two con- 
 ceptions are connected negatively in the sentence, " The 
 nightshade is not wholesome." A sentence, logically and 
 fully expressed, may be represented by the formulas — 
 A is B ; A is not B. A sentence therefore necessarily 
 consists of three parts, neither more nor less : — 
 
 (1) The Stchject, i.e. that of which the statement is made ; 
 
 (2) the Predicate, i.e. the statement made of the Subject ; 
 
 (3) the Copula, i.e. the connecting or disconnecting 
 
 link, — is (when the sentence is positive), is 
 
 not (when it is negative). 
 These three parts are not always present in language. 
 The finite verb contains in itself a complete sentence — 
 crrpaTrjyo), I am general. The Copula is frequently 
 omitted, being contained in the verb, or understood — 
 Uep^rjf; ^aatXevet, Xerxes is king ; ar^ado^ 6 avrjp, The 
 man is good. Logically expressed, these sentences would 
 be — He/^f?;? ean ^aaiXev;, 6 avrjp ecxTiv ayadc^. 
 
 A 
 
2 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 The Statement, Question, and Petition differ from one 
 another simply in the relation of the Predicate to the 
 Subject. Thus we may say, " The door is shut " (State- 
 ment) ; " Is the door shut ? " (Question) ; " Shut the door " 
 (Petition). In the Statement we say that the Predicate 
 is applicable to the Subject ; in the Question we ask if 
 the Predicate is applicable to the Subject ; in the Petition 
 we request or command that the Predicate may be appli- 
 cable to the Subject. Whatever remarks are here made 
 with regard to a sentence apply equally to each of its 
 three forms, the Statement, the Question, and the Petition. 
 
 § 2. THE PREDICATE AND ITS SUPPLE- 
 
 MENTARY ADJUNCTS. 
 
 The Predicate is the whole statement made of the 
 Subject, whether that statement is short and simple, or 
 long and composite. It may be short and simple, con- 
 sisting of one word, as in the examples given above — 
 
 Subject. 
 
 
 
 Peedicate. 
 
 
 av'iip 
 
 (sc. 
 
 eaTLv) 
 
 dyado^, 
 
 
 or it may be a composit 
 words — 
 
 e expression made up of 
 
 many 
 
 Subject. 
 
 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 
 6 Trat? 
 The hoy 
 
 
 Xalpei 
 
 rejoices 
 
 v7rep<pvo)<;. 
 exceedingly. 
 
 
 ol A6r)valoL 
 The Athenians 
 
 
 airrjXdov 
 departed 
 
 TpiToiot, 
 1 on the third di 
 
 %y. 
 
THE PREDICATE AND ITS ADJUNCTS. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 {Jon:) 
 
 TLVO^ hthouTKaXoL rjKere ; 
 
 To he whose teachers are you 
 
 
 come ? 
 
 {Thou) 
 
 Lkeco^ avTcov k\v€. 
 
 Do thou hear them mercifully. 
 
 He 
 
 efiol TTfcAcpo? TedvrjKev. 
 is dead, a source of grief to me 
 (i.e. his death is grievous to me). 
 
 avTT) rj (TTparia 
 This army 
 
 e^etai oveLBo<s rrj iroKev. 
 
 will march out {so as to he, or, 
 
 and will he), a disgrace to the 
 
 state. 
 
 eTrefep^et | 6paav<;. 
 Thou advancest in holdness. 
 
 ayavaKTco | avajjtVTjadel*; efiav- 
 
 TOV. 
 
 I am vexed when I recollect my own 
 
 conduct. 
 
 eireTTT^yeL | ov ^e^ato<;. 
 
 had frozen not so as to he solid. 
 
 €i9 OavovTcov €p')(OfiaL Kara- 
 aKacjxif; | 6p7]fjL0(s 7rpo<; (j)iXa)v, 
 I ^(oo-a. 
 
 I, most unhappy maid, am descending to the cavernous 
 
 chamhers of the dead, | forlorn 
 of friends, | while living still. 
 
 Compare two Latin instances — 
 
 Corpora infinita | iactantur. 
 
 Atoms are tossed about | in unlimited 
 
 quantity. 
 
 KpvaraXko^ 
 
 Ice 
 
 T) Bvafiopc; 
 
4 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 Subject. Predicate. 
 
 Saxa pauUatim | anima mollia | calu- 
 
 erunt. 
 
 Stones gradually waxed warm with the 
 
 softness of life (ita ut mollia 
 fierent, so as to become soft). 
 
 Instances may be found on any page of a book in any 
 language. The first point to notice is that the whole 
 expression constitutes the Predicate. The second point 
 to notice is that, on analysing such compound Predicates 
 as the above, there is a word (generally a verb, but it may 
 be a noun or participle), which by itself, if all the rest 
 were away, might stand as a simple Predicate, and that 
 this simple Predicate is further extended or qualified by 
 an adjunct or adjuncts. Thus in the sentence, ol 'AOrjvaloL 
 airriXOov Tpiraloi, airrfkOov TpLToloL is the Predicate : 
 aTrrjXdov alone as a Predicate would, with its Subject, 
 have made a complete sentence ; but airrjXOov is extended 
 by stating the time of departure. There may be many 
 supplementary adjuncts which swell out the Predicate. 
 It is most important in Greek to notice them, and 
 discover their special force, for they often convey the real 
 pith and gist of the predication, denoting manner, degree, 
 cause, time, condition, purpose, the anticipated result, etc. 
 etc. 
 
 In Greek, adverbs, adjectives, and participles (some- 
 times substantives) constantly occur as supplementary 
 adjuncts,^ or, as they will be called throughout this book, 
 Supplementary Predicates. 
 
 ^ Dr. Donaldson called these supplementary adjuncts secondary 
 Predicates. Thus he would have said that dirijXdov was the primary 
 Predicate, and rpiraioi the secondary. 
 
PREDICATE, EPITHET, AND APPOSITION. 5 
 
 § 3. THE OBJECT, DIRECT AND REMOTE. 
 
 The direct Ohject is that which is immediately acted on 
 by a transitive verb. The remote or remoter Ohject is that 
 to which the direct object is transferred, or that which is 
 interested and concerned in the verbal action. Joocro) 
 heKa fiva<;, I will give ten minae. Here fjbvaq is the direct 
 object. Au)o-o) Bexa fjbva<; rat hihaaKoktp, 1 loill give ten 
 minae to the teacher. Here toS BiBaa-KoXa) is the remoter 
 object. 
 
 § 4. PREDICATE, ATTRIBUTIVE OR EPITHET, 
 AND APPOSITION. 
 
 The following instances will show the difference be- 
 tween a Predicate and an Attributive : — avr)p {Igtiv) 
 dyaOo^, the man is good — aya66<i, good, is a Predicate : 
 6 ayado'i dvrjp, the good man — dya6o<;, good, is an Attri- 
 butive. The Predicate gives new information of the 
 Subject, the Attributive uses information assumed to be 
 known already, and thus forms one notion with a Sub- 
 stantive. Ajpposition does not form one notion with a 
 Substantive, but is a further description appended to a 
 Substantive, e.g. ^p6vo<;, 6 Kocvo<i LaTpo<;, ae Oepairevaei, 
 Time, the common physician, will heal thee. 
 
 § 5. SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 AvTo^ aTparrjja), I myself am general, is a Simple 
 Sentence. NlkU^ ecprj, Nikias made a statement, again, is a 
 Simple Sentence. But if we join the two together, thus— 
 
6 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 NiKLa<^ 6(1)7] avTO<^ o-Tparrjyelv, Nikias stated that he himself 
 was general, we have a Compound Sentence. A Compound 
 Sentence is thus a sentence consisting of two (or more) 
 sentences compounded into one. Logically, i.e. so far as 
 thought goes, there is no difference between a Simple and 
 a Compound Sentence. Each is an expression containing 
 the three necessary elements of a sentence, i.e. Subject, 
 Copula, and Predicate ; e.g. — 
 
 NcKLa'i (Subject) e^y (Copula and Predicate). 
 
 auT09 (Subject) o-Tparrjya) (Copula and Predicate). 
 
 NtKia<; (Subject) e^?; avro<; arpan^yelv (Copula 
 
 and Predicate). 
 
 For the last sentence, so far as thought goes, simply 
 amounts to this : Nikias | stated something. 
 
 Xa{,p6(f)a)v, 6i<; AeX^ovi eX6cov, rjpero el tv<; eirj ifiov 
 ao(patT6pof;. 
 
 Chaerephon, going to Delphi, asked if any one were wiser 
 than I. 
 
 Here we have three sentences compounded into one, of 
 which Xacpecpaw is the Subject, and the rest is the Predi- 
 cate, with the Copula contained in ^pero. So far as 
 thought goes, it amounts to saying, Chaerejohon | asked a 
 question on a certain occasion. 
 
 § 6. PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 In every Compound Sentence there must be one on 
 which the rest depend in construction. Such a sentence 
 is called the Principal Sentence. Those which depend 
 
CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 
 
 k 
 
 iPmm 
 
 in construction on it are called Subordinate 
 Thus, in the first example above, NcKca<: eiprj is the 
 Principal Sentence, avro^ arpar-qyeiv is the Subordinate 
 Sentence. The dependence of tlie latter on the former is 
 easily shown ; if we remove NiKia^; e<f)7j, then auro? arpar- 
 Tjyeiv cannot stand alone as a sentence. In the second 
 sentence, Xaipe(l>wv rjpero is the Principal Sentence ; the 
 dependent question, et tl<; etrj e/juov crocf)coT€po<i, and the 
 temporal participial sentence, eU JeX^ou? eXOcov, are the 
 Subordinate Sentences. 
 
 § 7. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 
 
 Co-ordinate Sentences are of the same rank, i.e. con- 
 struction, as those to which they are joined. Thus, if a 
 sentence is co-ordinate with a Principal Sentence, it is a 
 second Principal Sentence : if with a Subordinate Sen- 
 tence, it is Subordinate, and of the same nature (whether 
 an Indirect Statement, Question, Petition, Adverbial or 
 Relative Sentence). (See below.) 
 
 Beo/jbai, Kol 7rapL6fjLaL v/jLcov fir^TC Oavfia^ecv fjLrjre Oopv^elu. 
 I beg, and entreat you, neither to wonder, nor to interrujpt. 
 
 Here kclI irapUfxaL is co-ordinate with the Principal 
 Sentence ^eo/xai, and therefore is a second Principal 
 Sentence : while jjLrjre Oopv/Secv is co-ordinate with the 
 Subordinate Sentence Oav/id^eLv (an Indirect Petition), 
 and therefore is Subordinate, and an Indirect Petition. 
 
 § 8. CLASSIFICATION OF SUBORDINATE 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 Subordinate Sentences are classified according to the 
 relation in which they stand to the Principal Sentence. 
 
SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 Let the three following groups be taken. 
 
 A. Pkincipal. 
 
 (a) 1. ov pahiov eart 
 It is not easy 
 
 Nihms said 
 
 (y8) 1. aBrjXov ecTTLV 
 It is uncertain 
 
 8a 
 
 ^. OVK Oi 
 
 I do not know 
 
 (y) 1. TrepLTjyyeXKero 
 
 Orders were being sent round 
 
 2. BeofjLai aov 
 I heg yoit 
 
 S. KareyvayKa^; /jlov 
 
 You have condemned me 
 
 KareyvcoKa^; jjbou 
 
 You have condemned me 
 
 €VTV'^7](T6L<; 
 
 You ivill he fortunate 
 
 C. aviXapov ra TTOirj/jLaTa 
 I took up the poems 
 
 Subordinate. 
 
 Tavra jxaOelv. 
 to learn this. 
 
 o-TpaTTjyelv. 
 
 that he was general. 
 
 €L Tavra ^vvltj^. 
 
 lohether you understaTid 
 this. 
 
 r/ J f 
 
 OaTlfS €(TTL. 
 
 who he is, 
 
 Trava-TpaTLa ^orjdetv. 
 to march in full force. 
 
 ravTa fiaOelv. 
 to learn this. 
 
 ahiKw^i. 
 unjustly. 
 
 hiOTL 'X^pvdov eXa/369. 
 
 because you took a bribe. 
 
 rjv Tavra rroLricrrjf;, 
 if you do this. 
 
 a erroLTja-e JS'o^o/cX?}?. 
 which Sophocles composed. 
 
 In group A it will be seen that the Subordinate Sentence 
 supplies (1.) the Subject, (2.) the Object of the Compound 
 Sentence. Now the chief function of a Substantive is to 
 express the Subject or the Object. Such Subordinate 
 Sentences as those in group A are therefore called Sub- 
 stantival Sentences. 
 
CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES. 9 
 
 In group B the Subordinate Sentence is a supple- 
 mentary Predicate to the Principal Sentence (see above, 
 § 2). Now an Adverb is the type of a Supplementary 
 Predicate. Subordinate Sentences of this group are 
 therefore called Adverhial. They are Conditional (the 
 Protasis or Condition), Concessive, Final, Modal, Con- 
 secutive, Limitative, Temporal, Comparative. 
 
 In group C the Subordinate Sentence stands like an 
 Attributive or Epithet to the noun {iroirnxaTa) in the 
 Principal Sentence. That noun is the antecedent to the 
 relative, and the relative sentence is used like an adjective 
 used attributively. Subordinate Sentences of this group 
 therefore are generally called Adjectival Sentences. 
 This, however, as we shall soon see, is too narrow a use 
 of the term, and too inadequate a name for Eelative Sen- 
 tences. It would be better simply to call them Eelative 
 Sentences. 
 
 For with regard to Eelative Sentences a fundamental 
 distinction must be noticed. Some are (1) Attributive, 
 others again are (2) virtually Adverbial. 
 
 (1) Attributive (or really Adjectival) : — 
 dveXajSov ra TroL-^fiara a eiroLrjae So(J30K\rj<;. 
 
 I took top the poems which Sophocles wrote (or the 
 Sophoclean poems). 
 
 (2) Virtually Adverbial : — 
 
 T^9 ovT(o<i evT]6r}^ bari,^ ayvoel ; 
 
 Who is so simple that he does not know ? 
 
 Here the Eelative Sentence oarcfi dyvoel — coare dyvoecif ; 
 
lo SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 § 9* W® ^yx.^ arrive at the following Classification 
 and Table of Subordinate Sentences : — 
 
 A. Substantival. 
 
 The Subordinate ( 
 Sentence is the Sub- I a. Indirect Statement, 
 ject or Object of the^ /3. Indirect Question. 
 Principal Sentence, I 7. Indirect Petition, 
 whether V 
 
 B. Adverbial. 
 The Subordinate ( 1. Introduced by a Subordinate 
 Sentence like an Ad- J Conjunction (such as et, evretS^ 
 
 verb is an adjunct j wo-re, etc. etc.). 
 
 of the Predicate. \ 2. Introduced by a Eelative. 
 
 0. Eelative. 
 The Subordinate Sentence is either an Attributive, or is 
 equivalent to an Adverbial Sentence (see B Adverbial, 2). 
 
 § 10. ORATIO RECTA. 
 
 By Oratio Recta is meant the words of a person given 
 at first-hand, as from his own lips. 
 
 ^Q., Bwaco a 6X(^' I ^^^^ ^^^'^ what I have. 
 
 TL \ey6L<; ; What do you mean 1 
 KoiTTe TTjv dvpav. Knock at the door. 
 
 § II. ORATIO OB LI QUA, 
 
 By Oratio Ohliqua is meant the words or thoughts of a 
 person given at second-hand, by some one else. 
 
 €07/ owaeiv a e^ot. 
 
 He said he ivould give what he had. 
 
SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE SENTENCES. \ i 
 
 r/pofjLTjv avTOv rl Xeyoc. 
 
 I asked him what he meant. 
 
 elire tu) iratSL KOTrreiv rrjv dvpav. 
 He told the hoy to knock at the door. 
 
 § 12. SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE. 
 
 A Subordinate Sentence is Subdirect when it depends 
 on a Principal Sentence in the Recta. 
 
 Principal. Subdirect. 
 
 (oorco a eyco. 
 
 It is SiiboUique when it depends on a Principal Sentence 
 which itself is Subordinate. 
 
 Principal. Subdirect. Suboblique. 
 
 €<p?; cxocreiv a e'^oL. 
 
 In this last example Bcocreiv is subordinate to its Principal 
 Sentence ecfyrj, but it is the Principal Sentence to a e%o^. 
 See further under Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 § 13. VIRTUALLY OBLIQUE. 
 
 A Subordinate Sentence is said to be mrtually Oblique 
 when it alludes to the words or thoughts of another, the 
 actual verb of saying or thinking on which it depends 
 having to be mentally supplied from the context. 
 
 eKUKL^ov TOP UepLKkea ore ovk eire^ayoL 
 They were abusing Pericles because (so they said) he did 
 not lead them out. 
 A verb like eXeyov is contained in eKaKc^ov. 
 
CHAPTEK I. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PEEDICATE. 
 ATTRIBUTIVE AND APPOSITION. 
 
 § 14. The Subject is (a) a noun, or pronoun, or (0) the 
 equivalent of a noun : 
 
 (/S) ol wyaOoiy the good; to hUaLoVy justice; to 
 hehievaL, fear ; 6 <j)6vycov, the defendant ; to SeSio?, fear ; 
 ol vvvy the present generation. 
 
 § 15. The Copula is a verb which merely serves as a 
 link to join the Subject and Predicate, without containing 
 in itself the predication. 
 
 The commonest Copulas are elfii and rylfyvojjbau Many 
 others, however, serve as Copulas, vTrdp'^Wy ire^vKay 
 KaOcaTafjuat. 
 
 Note. Other Copulas are ovo/xa^o/xat, KaXov/xaL, ^aivo/iat, 
 Tvyxdvd), and Kvpio (even without a participle), k\v(o and 
 oiKovit) (I am called, or, spoken of), ttcXio in poetry. 
 
 dfiL, expressing existence, may be more than a copula, it 
 may be a predicative verb, e.g. eo-rt ^eo?, there is a God. 
 
 § 16. Omission of the Copula. 
 
 The Copula is often omitted in Greek, in fact, where- 
 ever the distinction between Subject and Predicate is 
 clearly marked without it : 
 
 TO fMavTCKov yevo<; (pCkapyvpov. SoPH. Antig. 
 
 The tribe of seers is covetous. 
 
 ^^(Opwv aBcopa Bcopa kovk ovr]aifia, SoPH. Antig. 
 
 , Gift less the gifts of foes, and profitless. 
 12 
 
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF AN INFINITIVE. 13 
 
 And sometimes the Copula, in a freer way, is omitted in 
 dependent clauses where we might have expected it to be 
 expressed : 
 
 ecog It' kv ocrc^aAet, (fivXd^aarOe. Dem. 19. 26. 
 WTiile you are still in safety, he on your guard. 
 
 €0)5 sub. €(TT€. 
 
 Cf. Eur. Hipp. 659. Thuc. i. 91. 1. 
 
 § 17. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF 
 AN INFINITIVE. 
 
 The Subject and the Predicate of an Infinitive are in 
 the Accusative. 
 
 But the Subject and Predicate of an Infinitive are in 
 the Nominative when they refer to the Subject of the 
 Principal Verb. 
 
 The same two rules apply to the Subject and Predicate 
 of a Participle. 
 
 For further rules, and for examples, see Compound 
 Sentence, Indirect Statement. 
 
 § 18. The Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive (or 
 Participle) may be in the Genitive or Dative, if the principal 
 verb governs either of those cases. 
 
 ycrdofxrjv avrwi/ olojxeviov cro^WTaTWv eTvat. PlAT. Ap. vi. 
 / noticed that they fancied they were the wisest of mankind. 
 The subject to dvai is omitted, a-oKJiOiTartav is the Predicate. 
 TravTt Trpocn/jKet ap^ovTt cfypovifxo) eivai, Xen. Hip. 7. 1. 
 It behoves every rider to he prudent 
 
 The Subject and Predicate, however, in such a construction 
 may stand in the Accusative. 
 
 ^VfKJiepei avTOL<s <f>L\ovs eTvai. XeN. Oik. ii. 23. 
 
 It is expedient for them to he friendly. 
 Cf. Xen. Hell. iv. 8. 4. 
 
14 SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE. 
 
 §19. Omission of the Subject. 
 
 The Subject is omitted in the third person in a great 
 number of indefinite phrases and impersonal verbs. 
 
 {a) In terms of the weather, or natmal phenomena. The 
 Subject is a vague indefinite agent {e.g. Zev?, 6 B^os). vei, it 
 rains; vt^et, it snows; /Spovra., it thunders; da-TpdrrTeL, it 
 lightens; yjeipid^ei^ it is stormy; crva-KOTd^ei^ it grows dark; 
 €(T€Lcr€, there was an earthquake. 
 
 Sometimes the agent is expressed — vu p-lv 6 Zevs. Alcaeus, 
 Fragm. 
 
 (b) The Subject is not expressed when the action alone is 
 worth noticing, and the Subject is well known. craATrtfet, the 
 trumpet sounds (i.e. 6 craXTnyKTyjs craATTi^et, the trumpeter sounds 
 the trumpet); a-Qfxatvec (sc. 6 KTJpv^, or o araXTriyKT-js), the signal 
 is given; Krjpvcra-eL (6 KTJpv^), proclamation is made; dvayvoja-erai 
 (6 ypafjLfxarevs), tJie reading will follow. 
 
 (c) Passive Verbs — Aeyerat, it is said ; eiprjraL, do. ; Trapea-Kcv- 
 aarai., preparation has been made. Cf. Latin, itur, ventum est. 
 
 Active Verbs — w? Xeyova-iv, as men say, as they say ; ^ao-i, 
 it is said; otovrai, people think. Cf. Ju2itm, ferunt, tradunt. 
 
 Tt5, Ttves, dvOpo)7roi, in phrases like the last, may be 
 expressed (like the French on) — e.g. yjv ra aSiK^J, if one commits 
 injustice. 
 
 (d) Ordinary impersonal verbs and expressions — ev e^ei, 
 IxkXei, etc. 
 
 Note. The Latin rule that only transitive verbs which are 
 followed by an accusative in the active can be personal in the 
 passive does not hold in Greek. Thus we may say — 
 
 Kar-qyopo) HtDKpdrovs, I accuse Socrates ; and 
 ^(OKparrj^ Karijyo/oeiTat, Socrates is accused. 
 
 Tnarrevofxev Soj/cparet, we believe Socrates (Socrati credi- 
 
 mus) ; and 
 ^o)Kpdrr]s Triorreverai, Socrates is believed (Socrati creditur). 
 
 § 20. THE PREDICATE. 
 
 The Predicate is usually contained either (1) in a Verb, 
 or (2) an Adjective or Participle. In the former case the 
 
PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT. 15 
 
 Predicate agrees with the Subject in numher and person ; 
 in the latter case in numher, gender, and case. 
 
 (1) evLK7]6rjaav ol A6r)vaioL. 
 The Athenians y:ere defeated. 
 
 (2) r) aX7]6eLa ecrriv opOi], 
 Truth is straightforward. 
 
 In the former case the Copula is contained in the in- 
 flection of the verb. In the latter the Copula is expressed 
 or understood. 
 
 §21. Peculiarities in the Agreement of Subject 
 and Predicate. 
 
 A neuter plural Subject takes a verb singular. 
 TCL avSpdiroSa a7re(pvy€, the slaves escaped. 
 ra KaXa rrjv '\lrv')(7jv evcfjpaivei, good deeds gladden the soul. 
 
 § 22. A plural verb with neuter plural Subject occurs 
 rarely (chiefly in Thucydides, Xenophon, and Plato). In such 
 cases (often when persons are implied) the distributive character 
 of the noun is brought out. Thus in Thuc. i. 58, there are 
 two readings, — rot reA^^ xntkcrxero and VTrecr\ovTO. If vTrka-^ero, 
 Thucydides is following ordinary usage : if virka-xovro, he is 
 thinking of the persons (the magistrates promised). 
 
 kvravda rjcrav tol Svevi/ecrtos /Saa-iXeta. XeN. An. 1. 2. 23. 
 There were the (several) palaces of Syennesis. 
 
 Obs. The phrase So^av Tavra, When it had been thus resolved, 
 which occurs as well as So^avra ravra, follows in the participle 
 the construction of SoKct ravra. 
 
 § 23. -^^ Adjective-Predicate in the neuter singular 
 may be used with a plural Subject. The Predicate sums 
 up collectively the character of the Subject. 
 
 KoXov T) aX7]6eLa /cal fjLovifiov. Plat. 
 
 Truth is noble and abiding. 
 
 €pcoT6<; KaKov fxeya. EuRIP. 
 
 Loves are a great curse. 
 
i6 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 Note. Cf. Eur. El. 1035; Ar. Ecc. 236 ; Plat. Phaed. 242 
 (fiavTLKou Tt rj ^vxrj). The stock quotation is from HoM. //. 
 ii. 204, ovK dyadov iroXvKOLpavLy], €is Koipavos Icrra), No gOod 
 thing the rule of the many, one ruler he there. 
 
 Compare with this the use of the phrases, iravra eTvat, to he 
 all in all (i.e. of prime importance) ; ra -n-pcora crmt, to he the 
 head and front of; ttolvt '^v 'A\€^av8pos, Alexander was every- 
 all in all. Dem. 23. 120. 
 
 § 24. Ill ^^ poets, and in Plato, a singular verb is 
 occasionally found with a plural Subject. From the occur- 
 rence of this construction in Pindar it is called the Schema 
 Pindaricum. 
 
 €(TTL yap epLotye Pdip^oi PlAT. Euthyd. 302. 
 
 / have altars. 
 The verb generally comes first in this construction. 
 
 Cf. PiND. Frag. 344; Pyth. x. 7; Eurip. Ion, 1146; 
 Helen. 1358; Aesch. Pers. 49. Compare in French, " il est 
 cent usages;" and Bacon, Advancement of Learning, ii. ii. 7, 
 " a portion of the time wherein there hath been the greatest 
 varieties." Shakspere, Macbeth, v. iii. ^^ Serv. There is ten 
 thousand — Mac. Geese, villain? Serv. Soldiers, sir." In 
 some cases, however, the apparent singular in English is a 
 real dialectic plural. 
 
 § 25. Agreement of the Predicate when there are 
 several Subjects. 
 
 The Dual Subject is considered separately. 
 
 (1) the first case is where the Subjects are persons. Here 
 {a) with regard to number, the Predicate may be either correctly 
 plural, or singular in agreement with one prominent subject ; 
 (b) with regard to gender, the masculine is preferred to the 
 feminine ; (c) with regard to person, the first is preferred to the 
 second, the second to the third. 
 
 Kttt rj yvvrj Kal 6 dvr)p dya9ot elcnv. PlAT. Men. 73. 
 
 Both the ivife and the husband are good. 
 
 Lcrois dva/S-qcrcTai ^tXnnros nal ^AvTtyevrjs Kal 6 dvTiypa<f)€v^. 
 
 Dem. 22. 38. 
 Perhaps tliere will appear Philip, and Antigenes, and the 
 controller. 
 
PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT 17 
 
 a.^ov veors Ka6 veas o/xtAovi/ras aXXr\\oi%. PlAT. Leg. 835. 
 / saw young men and women associating together. 
 
 lyo) Kttt ot aXXoi TT/oecr/^ets TreptrjXdoixev. DeM. 129. 72. 
 / «?i(i o/A(?r envoys went round. 
 
 (TV Te"EX\r]v el.Kal r)fM€L<s. Xen. Anal. ii. 1. 16. 
 You and we are Greeks. 
 You are Greek, and (so are) we. 
 
 Observe the emphatic position of the verb when it is in the 
 singular. 
 
 (2) The second case is where the several Subjects are 
 things. Here {a) with regard to number, we frequently find the 
 Predicate in the singular, in agreement with one prominent 
 Subject ; frequently also in the]plural ; (h) with regard to gender, 
 the Predicate, when plural, is generally neuter, when singular 
 it agrees with the prominent Subject. 
 
 Twv KaKiJiV rj a-rdo-is kol 6 TroXefios airios ea-TLV. Dem. 
 
 Sedition and war are the cause of our troubles. 
 
 X-qOr) KOL Sva-KoXia Kal fiavia TroXXaKLS els rrjv Sidvoiav ifx- 
 
 ■jriTTTovo-Lv. Xen. Ap. iii. 12. 6. 
 
 Forgetfulness, and discontent, and madness often attack the 
 mind. 
 
 TO vyLatveLv Kal to vocretv dyaOd dv €ly). 
 
 Xen. Ap. iv. 2. 36. 
 Health and sickness might be" 
 
 The singular Predicate is not unknown in English : 
 
 Destruction and unhappiness is in their ways. Ps. xiv. 7. 
 So great an affinity liath fiction and belief. Bacon, 
 Advancement of Learning, i. 4. 8. 
 
 (3) The third case is where, in the Subjects, there is a com- 
 bination of persons and things. Here the person will generally 
 in gender over-ride the thing; in number, as before, both 
 singular and plural are used. 
 
 Ittv^cto tov 2T/oo/x^t^i8>^v KOI Tcts vav<5 aTreXrjXvdoTa. 
 
 Thuc. viii. 63. 1. 
 
 He heard tJmt Strombichides and his fleet had sailed away. 
 
 V '^^XV '^^^ ^tXiTTiros ■^aav tmv epycDv Kvptoi. 
 
 Aeschin. 12. 181. 
 Fortune and Philip were masters of circumstances. 
 B 
 
1 8 SUBJECT A ND PREDICA TE. 
 
 Great variety is allowable where there is a plurality of 
 Subjects. The leading principles only have been indicated in 
 the above rules. 
 
 With disjunctives, rj — r/, ovt^ — ovt^^ the Predicate generally 
 agrees with the nearest Subject. 
 
 § 26. The demonstrative pronouns oSe, oSrog, eKetvos, 
 when used as Subjects to a Predicate, or as Predicates to a 
 Subject, either (1) are assimilated to the gender and number 
 of their subject or predicate, or (2) are in the neuter singular 
 or plural. 
 
 (1) eK€ti/o? IffTiv 'kX^yyo^ fxcyiCTTOS. Lys. 16. 6. 
 
 This is the strongest proof. 
 
 Oifxat €{xrjv Tavrrjv Trarpcda ecvau XeN. Anab. iv. 8. 4. 
 
 / think that this is my country. 
 
 Cf. Verg. Ae7i. vi. 129, hoc opus, hie labor est. 
 
 (2) tovt' elarlv ol Aoyot. DeM. 8. 7. 
 The statements are these {come to this). 
 
 ov Aoy tov KOfXTTO'S rdSe. ThuC. ii. 41. 1. 
 This is no boastful talk. 
 
 Cf. the use of rdSe, ovk "Iwv€9 TctSe elcTLv, Thuc. vi. 77. 1. 
 These are not lonians, we have no lonians here. Cf. EuR. 
 Androm. 168. 
 
 Also cf. Tt, oTi, (interrogative) : — 8r]fj.oKparLav oTcrOa rt eo-rtv ; 
 Bo you hioiv tvhat democracy is ? SovXcvofxev Oeois 6 n ttot' 
 etViV 01 ^€06. Eur. Or. 418, we are slaves to gods, whatever these 
 gods may be. 
 
 So the phrase 7ovto dXrjOrj Aeyets, what you say is true. 
 
 § 27. Peculiarities of Number — Singular, Dual, 
 and Plural. 
 
 (a) The singidar is used for the plural (a) with collective nouns, 
 (6)* with nouns of material, (c) with nouns denoting nationality, 
 (d) in several military expressions, etc. 
 
 (a) o exOpos, the enemy ; 6 TreAas, one's neighbour. 
 
 (b) Kc/oa/xos, tiles ; rrXtvOos, bricks ; a/xTreAos, vines ; Icrd-js, 
 
 clothes. 
 
THE DUAL NUMBER. 19 
 
 (c) 6 'IAAi5/)to?, the IllyrianSy 6 XaAKtSevs, the CJialcidians 
 
 (cf. the Latin Foenus, Eomanus). But sometimes, as 
 in Latin, of the general, king, or prince. 
 
 (d) 6 tWo?, the cavalry ; dcnris (=67rAtTat), hojpliteSj heavy- 
 
 armed infantry. 
 
 (/?) A collective noun singular (ttXtjOos, yevos, a-rpdTevfxa, etc.) 
 may agree with a plural dedicate. Often there is a mixture of 
 singular and plural. 
 
 fiepos Tt dv9pio7r(i>v ovk -qyovvrat deovs. PlAT. Leg. 948. 
 A portion of mankind do not believe in gods. 
 
 TO crTpdrevfxa iiropL^ero trtrov, kotttovtcs rov<s f^ov<s koI ovovs. 
 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 1. 6. 
 The army provided itself tvith food by cutting up the oxen 
 and asses. 
 
 § 28. The Dual Number. 
 
 L The Dual is a kind of plural, an unnecessary kind. It 
 is not used in Aeolic, and it has disappeared in Modern Greek. 
 The agreement between a dual subject and its verb or 
 adjective is irregular. We may say that the strict dual agree- 
 ment is adhered to only where the idea of duality (of there 
 being a pair of things) is prominent. 
 
 The first person dual does not exist in the active voice. It 
 is very doubtful whether it occurs in the middle. II. xxiii. 
 485, Soph. Phil. 1079, Soph. El. 950, seem to be about the 
 only three placeg, and in all of them the plural may be the 
 correct reading. 
 
 viii Oeaa-iofiea-da. Ar. Av. 664. 
 
 Let us two see. 
 
 (2.) Dual of the Article and of Pronouns. — The feminine dual 
 is defective, especially in the nominative and accusative 
 forms. (See Kriiger, p. 235.) 
 
 Tw is the regular prose form for all genders, rd is rare in 
 poetry, tolv is much commoner than ratv. 
 
 TwSe is used, not rdSe, but ratvSe is used. 
 
 TovTio not ravra. Both tovtolv and ravratv for the feminine. 
 
 avTco and avrd are both used for the feminine, also avrolv 
 and avraiv. 
 
20 SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE. 
 
 aAA-T^Ao) and aXXrjXa^ aXXy]\oLv and aXX-qXaiv are found 
 equally with feminine nouns. 
 
 Similarly e/xw, /xovw, /xarato), d^to) occur with feminine nouns. 
 
 (3) The strict dual agreement is shown in the following 
 examples : 
 
 TO) dSeA^o) auro) wttc/) iyevecrO'qv ajj,(fj(x) ctTratSe eTeXevTrjordrrjv. 
 
 ISAEUS, 6. 6. 
 
 TAe two hvthers themselves who were born both died childless. 
 Similarly when there are two Subjects : — 
 
 "^Sovrj Kttt Xvirr) kv Trj ttoXcl jSaa-LXevoreTov. PlAT. Hep. 607. 
 
 Pleasure and pain shall reign in the State. 
 
 A good instance occurs in SoPH. El. 977-985, where the 
 effect is heightened by the dual form. 
 
 ^vo ef evos aydvo'i yey evyjcrdov. AnTIPH. HerOD. 85. 
 Two trials have been made out of one. 
 
 (4) The following miscellaneous instances show the irregu- 
 larity of agreement both in gender ^ and in number : — 
 
 a/M(f)(j) TOVTd) TO) 'qjxepa. XeN. Cyr. i. 2. 11. 
 
 Both these 
 
 KaTTjyop-qcrev d/x<^oiv roiv TroAcotv. Is. xii. 9. 7. 
 
 He accused both the states. 
 
 TO) x^^P^ ^^ ° 0€os €7roi7]crev. Xen. Ap. ii. 3. 18. 
 
 The hands which God made. 
 
 Twv avTMV Seovrai Kal ^ yvvrj kol 6 dvi/^p. PlAT. Men. 73. 
 The wife and the husband need the same things. 
 
 N.B. — 8vo agrees with a dual or plural noun, or verb — 
 a/i^o) and dfjLcfiOLv, generally with the dual ; dfjb<f>6T€po<s, more 
 commonly with plural than dual. 
 
 ejSovXeTO ot tw Trat^e d/x^oTe/oto Trapebvai. Xen. An. i. 1. 1. 
 He wished both his sons to be present. 
 
 dirkdavov ot (TTparrjyol dfxcfiOTepot. ThUC. V. 74. 2. 
 
 Both the generals ivere slain. 
 
 (5) A dual verb is found joined to a plural subject, or 
 several subjects, when the subjects are arranged or contrasted 
 
THE PLURAL USED FOR THE SINGULAR. 21 
 
 singly or in pairs. This construction occurs several times in 
 Homer. (See Jelf, § 388. 1.) 
 
 SvvdjJL€L<s dfji<f>6T€pai icrrov Sd^a kol iTricTT'qix'q. 
 
 Pl. Bep. 478, B. 
 Both are faculties, opinion and certain knowledge. 
 
 So Aesch. Eum. 256, Xevcra-erov, of the chorus divided into 
 riixi\6pia. 
 
 § 29. The Plural for the Singular is used — 
 
 (1) With proper names — ot 'HpaKAees re koI O-qa-ces, Plat. 
 Theaet. 169, B. Cf. Latin, Scipiones et Laelii ; English, Our 
 Burkes and Chathams. Cf . Aesch. Ag. 1439; Xen. An. iii. 2. 31. 
 
 (2) Very freely with abstract nouns, i.e. names of qualities, 
 denoting (as in Latin) instances or kinds of the quality — e.g. 
 fidviai, fits of madness ; cvvotat, instances of benevolence ; a-Toa-eis, 
 instances of revolution ; avSpCat, deeds of valour. 
 
 Some words are repeatedly used in this way — /3ioi, ddvaroi., 
 modes or forms of life, death ; aK/xai, prime of life (flos aetatis) ; 
 vTTvoi, sleep, etc. 
 
 Tots ix€rpLOL<s ^rjXoL T€ Kttfc <j>66voL ovK kyylyvovTai. 
 
 Plat. Leg. 679. 
 Self-controlled persons are not subject to rivalry and envy (or 
 fits of rivalry, etc.). 
 
 (3) Terms of weather and time — BdXiry], depfioTrjns, heat; 
 \pv^€Ls, cold; x^^^C^h ^^^^y ojjL^poL, rain; avx/xot, drought; 
 7ra;(vat, f7'0St ; kpva-tfiai, mildew ; fxea-at vvktcs, midnight, vvktcs, 
 hours or ivatches of the night. 
 
 (4) Material Nouns — irvpot Kal KpiOai, wheat and barley. 
 But here a distinction is commonly made between singular 
 
 and plural, e.g. Kpeas, apiece of meat, Kpka,meat; ^vXov, a piece 
 ofivood, stick, cudgel, ^vXa, timber ; rjXLos, the sun, -qXioi, rays of 
 the sun; aXs, salt, aAes, salt-toorks ; Xoyia-fios, a reckoning, 
 XoyiTixoi (also Xoyta-jjios), arithmetic. 
 
 (5) The plural is often used for the singular in poetry to 
 heighten the effect by the vagueness of the expression — aifxaTa, 
 <f>6voi, blood or bloodshed; ttXovtoi, riches; dpovot, royalty, royal 
 
22 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 commands; Sw/xara, a house; TrvAat, agate; avAat, a dwelling ; 
 yXit)(raai, the tongue. 
 
 (6) The neuter plural of verbals in -t€os, iTnxctprjTta, 
 dSvvara, and Trorepa, and many adjectives. See Verbal Adjec- 
 tives. 
 
 § 30. The First Person Plural is used of a 
 Singular Subject 
 
 when (a) the author of a book refers to himself ; (b) especially 
 in the poets, often when a person speaks of himself as acting 
 with or for others. 
 
 (a) TovTO Treipaaofxeda Styj-yiqcracrOai. XeN. Cyv, viii. 1. 48. 
 This ive ivill endeavour to describe. 
 
 (&) ovK av yvvaiKiav y^cra-oves KaXotfied' av. SOPH. Ant. 680. 
 ]Ve should not be called inferior to women. 
 
 In Plat. Symjpos. 186, b, one physician speaks in the plural 
 as representing the profession. 
 
 In tragedy a woman may speak of herself in the plural 
 masculine, sometimes in the singular masculine. 
 
 7recrov/xc^', et XPli '^^'^P^^ TifXiopovfievoL. SOPH. El. 399. 
 We will fall, if fall we must, avenging a father. 
 (Elektra is speaking). 
 
 In Eur. Hippol. 1103, the female Coryphaeus speaks of her- 
 self in masculine singular. 
 
 § 31. Peculiarities of Person. 
 
 The second person singular is used, as in Latin, in an inde- 
 finite way like an impersonal expression. 
 
 efSes av, you might have seen ; rjy^a-a) av, you would {or might) 
 have thought ; YjyrjcraLo av, you would think (credideris). 
 
 For peculiarities of the third person, see Omission of the 
 Subject. 
 
 § 32. Supplementary Predicates {See Introduction). 
 
 Certain adjectives are constantly so used. Such are {a) 
 TToXvq, ao-/x€vos, Ikwv, kKoxxTLos, aKdiv {invitus) ; {b) adjectives of 
 number, irporepos, tt/dwtos, SevTcpos, vcrrepos, ixTTaros, Sevrepatos 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY PREDICATES, 23 
 
 (on the second day), Tpiraios (on the third day) ; (c) words refer- 
 ring to time or place, 6pdpio<s, in the morning ; xp^vloSj late ; 
 at^viSto?, suddenly ; o-Koraios, CTKOTtatos, in the dark ; Troa-Talos, 
 in how many days ? 
 
 6 'A(r(07ros TTora/xos cppvT] fieyas. ThUC. ii. 5. 2. 
 The river A sopus flowed imth a strong stream. 
 dcfiLKvovvrat al^viBioL. ThUC. viii. 14. 1. 
 They arrive suddenly. 
 
 KaKos €KO)v ovScis. Plat. Tim. 86, 
 
 No one is deliberately wicked. 
 
 CTTTOvSas Xvovcrtv ol Trporepoi iTrtovres. ThUC. i. 123. 3. 
 The breakers of treaties are the first aggressors. 
 
 Observe the following distinctions (Kriiger, p. 229) : — 
 
 TrpoJTOs M.r]dvfxvrj irpocrk^aXe. 
 
 He was the first who attacked Methymne. 
 irpcaTy M.rj6vfivy Trpoa-e^aXe. 
 Methymne ivas the first place he attacked. 
 TrpwTOV M-qOvpivy TT/oocre^aAe. 
 His first act v)as to attack Methymne. 
 
 The Greek adjective is more freely used in this way than 
 the Latin, but see Roby, Lat. Gr., 1069. 
 
 § 33* Peculiarities in the Construction of the 
 
 Attributive or Epithet. 
 
 A Substantive is sometimes used as an attributive to another 
 Substantive — 
 
 (1) Commonly with dvrip, avOpmiros, yvvrj, e.g. dvrjp oTrXiTrjs, 
 a heavy-armed soldier ; dvrjp Tvpawos, a despot ; ypavs ywrj, an 
 old woman; avdpuiTros TroXtrr^s, a citizen; dvrjp ^TrapriaTr^s, a 
 Spartan citizen. So dvSpes 'A^r^vatot, avS/aes StKao-rat, Athenians, 
 jurymen. 
 
 (2) Many miscellaneous Substantives are thus used as 
 Adjectives, especially in the poets, but some in prose also : 
 oXedpos MaKeSwv (ypa/A/xarevs), Dem. 9. 31. 18. 127, a scoundrel 
 of a Macedonian, or a pestilent Macedonian, cu pestilent scribe ; 
 oirXiTrjs (TTparos, K6(rp.os, EUR. Her. 699, 800. ; ykptav 6(fi6aXp,6s, 
 Eur. Or. 529 ; irapOkvo^ x^^P} ^^R. Phoen. 838 ; Xoyos e-n-aivos, 
 Plat. Phaedr. 260, B. 
 
24 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 "EAAr^v for 'EAAt^vikos is often found, e.g. ol "EAAt^vcs 
 TreArao-Tat, Xen. An. vi. 5. 26. EuR. Eer. 130, o-toA^v 
 "EAAr^i/a, 
 
 Kai f>J Tvpavvov crx^j/^t' e'xwv. SoPH. ^?z^. 1169. 
 
 (3) When there are several attributives to one Substantive 
 the adjectives may be added one after another without con- 
 junctions (Asyndeton). 
 
 a.AAa Sopara €T)(^ov Tra^ea, fxaKpd, ocra dvrjp dv (jikpoi /xoAt?. 
 
 Xen. An. v. 4. 24. 
 
 They had other spears, stout, long, such as a man could with 
 difficulty carry. 
 
 Kal, however, often joins two adjectives, especially ttoXvs 
 with another adjective, where in English we omit the con- 
 junction, as one combined notion is formed : TroAAa Kal xa^^Tra, 
 TToAAci Kal ScLvd, many difficult things, many dangers; dyadot Kal 
 iraXaiol vofxoderat, good lawgivers of old, Plat. Fro. 326. Cf. 
 KaAos Kdyados (KaXo Kay ados), an aristocrat (in a political sense), 
 a perfect character (in a moral sense). 
 
 (4:) An adjective or participle may agree with the sense rather 
 than the form of the ivord. 
 
 (5 irepia-a-d TLfxr)del<s tckvov. EuR. Tro. 735. 
 Oh son, honoured exceedingly. 
 
 TO, fieipaKLa irpos dW'qXovs SiaXey6fi€V0i. Pl. Lach. 180. 
 The lads conversing together. 
 
 Cf. DeM. 21. 117, K€(j>aXrj, i^eXrjXvdm. Is. 6. 49, (fiva-eoa, os. 
 
 § 34. Peculiarities of Apposition. 
 
 1. Partitive Apposition (or Sx^jfta KaO' oXov Kal fxcpr], i.e. the 
 ^gure, or construction, of the whole and its parts). 
 
 In this construction the whole comes first, and afterwards in 
 apposition with it are its parts. The noun which contains the 
 whole should strictly be in the genitive, but it is desirable 
 at once to state it as the Subject or the Object of the sentence. 
 
 [The really logical construction with the whole in the 
 Genitive is seen here — 
 
 TWi/ TToAcwv at fi€v TvpavvovvTai, at Se SrjfiOKparovvTaL, at Se 
 dpuTTOKparovvTai. PlAT. Rep. 338. 
 
 Of states, some are despotic, others democratic, others aristo- 
 cratic.i 
 
PECULIARITIES OF APPOSITION. 25 
 
 Awat ai yaev xpqa-rai eiVtv, at 8e KaKai. PlAT. Oorg. 499, 
 
 With regard to pains, some are good, others had. 
 
 ovTOi aAAos aAAa Aeyet. XeN. Anob. ii. 1. 15. 
 
 These men say some one thing, some another. 
 
 TTOXTiV epyov ti eKacTTO) Trpoa-TiraKTai. PlAT. Rep. 406. 
 
 To all and each some task is appointed. 
 
 KaOriixiS' aKpiov iK Trdyoiv . . . 
 
 iyepTL Kiviov dvSp^ dvrjp emppodois 
 
 KaKovcTLv. Soph. Ant. 411. 
 
 We ivere seated on the hill-top . . . 
 
 eagerly provoking each his fellow with bandied threats. 
 
 With a singular whole : — Xkyerai 4'^XQ V f^^^ ^°^^ ^X^''^? V ^^ 
 avotav. Plat. Phaedr. 93. 
 
 2. A Substantive (with adjuncts) either in the Nominative 
 or Accusative may be in apposition to the verbal action. This 
 is known as the Nominative or Accusative in Apposition to 
 the Sentence. 
 
 KecvraL irecrovTe^, ttlo-tls ov crixLKpa TroAet. EUR. Rhes. 415. 
 {Some) have fallen and lie buried, no slight proof of loyalty 
 to the realm. 
 
 evSaifJiovoirfs, fxia-dov rjSLarrayv Xoytov. EUR. El. 231. 
 
 Blest be thou, the reward of sweetest tidings. 
 
 The stock example is — 
 
 'EAevT^v KTctvw/xei/, Mei'cAc^ Avttt^ v Trt/cpav. EUR. Or. 1098. 
 Let us slay Helen, sharp pain to Menelaus (i.e the death of 
 Helen will be a cruel blow to Menelaus). 
 
 3. A substantive is very often found in apposition to a pre- 
 ceding pronoun, or pronominal phrase, which draws attention 
 to what follows. Certain idioms of this kind are of the 
 commonest occurrence : 
 
 (a) Tovro, eK€ivo, avro tovto, a^ro preceding a substantive. 
 
 €K€Lvo KepSatvecv "qyetraL, t^v i^Sovt^v. PlAT. Rep. 606. 
 This it regards as gain (namely) pleasure. 
 
 TOVTO ye avTOf 17 ev/SovXia. PlAT. Rep. 428. 
 This particular quality, prudence. 
 
 In the same way must be explained the usage of aAAo rt, 
 ravr' dpa, tovto fxkv^ cva Tt, and many other expressions of 
 constant recurrence in Plato. 
 
26 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 Some constantly recurring Platonic phrases with aiVo. 
 
 avTo SiKaiocrvpr}, ideal justice, or justice in the abstract ; avro 
 fjieyeOos, abstract greatness as opposed to to h rjfxiv 
 fieyedosy concrete greatness. 
 
 (b) The numerals, eV, 8vo, rpia, Svolv Bdrepov [one of tiro), 
 Svoiv ra erepa, Svolv Set Odrepov (one of two things is necessary). 
 
 Svoiv Set ddrepoVj ^ 7r/0WTev6tv ^ dvyprjcrOai. Is. 6. 89. 
 One of tivo things we must do, either be first, (yr 'perish. 
 
 (c) TO Aeyo/Aevov {qiiod dicunt, quod dicitur), as the saying is ; 
 TO TTJs TrapoLjxtas (quod aiunt), according to the proverb ; KecjidXatov 
 (denique, ad summara) to sum up : a-rjixctov Se, TCKfxrjpcov 8e, as 
 an instance, in proof of this ; and many others. 
 
 TO Xeyofxevov, KdroTriv Trjs eoprrjs rJKOfxev. PlAT. Gorg. 477. 
 We are come too late for the feast, as the saying is. 
 
 'AOrjvaLOi irepl 86^r]<5 fidXXov icnrovSa^ov rj irepl )(^pr]fidTOiv. 
 
 TCKfxrjpiov Se' y^prjixara yap TrXeia-ra vTrep ^tAoTt/xta? 
 
 dvrjXoKrav. DeM. 20. 10. 
 The Athenians used to care more for reputation than money. 
 
 As a proof of this assertion, they spent vast sums of money 
 
 for a noble ambition. 
 
 (4.) Sometimes a genitive is found in apposition to a genitive 
 which is implied in a possessive pronoun or adjective : e.g. rd 
 Vfxerepa avTiov for tcI vfJLWv avTwv, 6 ifibs tov raXaiiroipov fHos, 
 the life of me, wretched one, tov TaXanr6pov agreeing with an 
 €fAov implied in l/x6?. 
 
 (5 dpUTTe dvSpiov, 'Adrjvaios wv, TroAews rrjs fxeyia-r-qs, etc. 
 (ttoAcws in apposition to 'AOifviov implied in 'A6r]vato<s). 
 
 Plat. Ap. xviii. 
 My excellent friend, you an Athenian, a citizen of the greatest 
 city, etc. 
 Cf. Aesch. Pers. 162, where a genitive and a possessive are 
 combined. 
 
CHAPTEB 11. 
 THE AETICLE. 
 
 § 35' Origin and Development of the Article. 
 
 *0, rj, TO (as well as 6s, 17, o) was originally a demonstrative. 
 Besides being a demonstrative it supplied the place of the 
 third personal pronoun, the relative, and the definite article. 
 
 The first point to bear in mind about 6, rj, to, is its 
 essentially demonstrative character. 
 
 In Homer 6, 7}, to is a demonstrative, both substantive and 
 adjective : 
 
 (a) Substantive : rdv vvv ixlv fivQcraa-a, of those things noiv 
 putting him in mind. 
 
 (b) Adjective : <f)di(T€i o-e to o-ov fxkvos, that thy courage 
 
 tvill mar thee. 
 
 It also takes the place of the third personal pronoun. 
 
 Try V 8' eyo) ov Xvcro), but that One (her) / will not free. 
 Tov Se kXv€. ^oLpos 'AttoAAwv, and Phoebus Apollo heard 
 that one (him). 
 
 It also does the work of the relative. 
 
 ai/aKTt, tov 'qvKofxos Te/ce Ayjtm, to the king, whom fair- 
 haired Leto bare. 
 
 The following examples show the transition in Homer from 
 the demonstrative to the definite article. 
 
 6 6' if^pa^e ^aAfceos "Apyjs. 
 And he, brazen Ares, roared. 
 
 Here the noun is in apposition to the demonstrative 6. 
 
 avrap 6 tolctl ykpmv 68bv 'qyofxovevev. 
 
 But he, the old man (or the old man), was leading the way. 
 
 a A A' oVe 5r) rr^v vqijov a^tKCTO. 
 
 But when now he came to that (the) island. 
 
 TO T€ (rdeV0<5 'Q,ptli)VO<S. 
 
 And the might of Orion. 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 So ol aXXoL, the rest ; rd t' eovra tol t ecroaevay the present 
 and the future. 
 
 The last examples show that the use of 6, 17, to as the 
 definite article is to be found as early as Homer. 
 
 It must be borne in mind however that such a use of 
 6, 17, TO in Homer is exceptional. According to old Greek 
 (Homeric) use, nouns stand without the article as in Latin. 
 
 ScLvr) Se KXayyrj yever' dpyvpkoio [Slolo. 
 And terrible arose the twang of the silver bow. 
 
 In Attic Greek prose 17 KXayyrj, tov /Slolo would be required. 
 To sum up therefore — 
 
 (a) OS, 7], o, originally demonstrative, became the relative 
 (with occasional traces in Attic of its older use). 
 
 (b) 6, rj, TO, originally demonstrative, became the definite 
 article (though instances occur in Attic of its use as a demon- 
 strative and as a relative). 
 
 (c) ovTos, 6Se, €K€Lvos took the place of 6, 17, to, as demon- 
 stratives in Attic. The third personal pronoun was in Attic 
 expressed by 
 
 (d) the oblique cases of avTos and (when necessary) in the 
 nominative by the demonstratives. 
 
 Obs. The origin and development of the definite article 
 from the demonstrative may be illustrated by English, German, 
 and French. 
 
 Thus in English the relatives who, what, which were 
 originally interrogatives only. The demonstrative still is 
 constantly used by us as a relative, e.g. I know the person that 
 you speak of 
 
 In German der is still demonstrative, definite article, and 
 relative. 
 
 In French the personal pronoun il and the definite article 
 le both come from the demonstrative ille. 
 
 § 36. Survivals of the older usages of 6, 07, to, and 
 
 OS, rjy o, in Attic Greek. 
 
 I. 6, rj, TO as a demonstrative : 
 
 With [xev and Se, 6, 17, to is freely used in all its cases. 
 6 [M€v — 6 Se, the one, the other ; ol /xev — ol 8c, some, others ; with 
 
THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK. 29 
 
 Tis, 6 /xev Tts — 6 Se ; to (to,) [jXv — to (toI) 8e, to ^k tl, partly ; 
 TJ fx€v — rfj 8€, this way, that way ; to Se, whereas ; tov Kal t6v, 
 this one and that one ; to koX to, this and that. 
 
 cSet yap to Kai to iroLrjcrai /cai to /x-^ iroirjcrai. Dem. 9. 68. 
 /Fe ought to have done this and that, and not to have done 
 the other. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 557. 
 
 Observe the constant use of 6 (ot) iikv at the beginning of 
 a sentence, instead of repeating the noun. 
 
 *lva/3ws 'A6r]vaLov<s eirrjydyeTO. ol 8e rjXOov. ThUC. i. 104. 
 
 Inarus invited the Athenians. So they came. 
 
 II. 6, 17, TO as a personal pronoun (a rare use). 
 
 Kal TOV KeXeva-aL Sovvai (AeycTat). XeN. Cyr. i. 3. 9. 
 And it is said that he ordered. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 1199. 
 
 III. As a relative (a not uncommon use in the tragedians). 
 
 SiTrXfj /xao-Ttyt ttjv "Ap-qs (fitXci. AeSCH. Ag. 642. 
 
 With the twofold scourge that Ares loves. 
 
 IV. OS, rj, 6 used as a personal pronoun with Kai 
 ovSets dvreXeye' Kal 6s rjyciro. Xen. 
 
 No one opposed, and so he acted as guide. 
 
 It is rare, except in the common phrase ^ 6' os. 
 
 IcTTfc T6S, 'icfirjv eyw ; ttolvv ye, ■^ S' 6s. PlAT. Ap. iv. 
 Is there any one ? said I. Certainly, said he. 
 
 THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK. 
 § 37» '^'^0 points must be remembered : 
 
 1. The Article is essentially demonstrative. 
 
 2. The old usage was to omit the Article with definite 
 objects (see § 35). This old usage survived in many 
 instances, and hence to a great extent the fluctuating use 
 of the Article in Attic. 
 
 The Article corresponds generally to the English 
 definite article fhe. It marks off objects as known and 
 definite whether (A) individuals or (B) classes. 
 
30 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 - (A) The Article denotes individual persons or things 
 which are definite, because — 
 
 (a) Already known ; 
 
 (6) Already mentioned ; 
 
 (c) Distinguished from other objects, often by some 
 accompanying description ; 
 
 {a) Twv eirra ao(l>(OTaTO<; rjv ^o\(ov. Plat. 
 Of the seven sages Solon was the wisest. 
 
 (h) BovXevofiev 6eol<; b tl ttot eiaLv ol OeoL EURIP. 
 We are slaves to gods, whatever these gods may he. 
 
 (c) TTpea^VTepo^ aSeXc^o?. 
 The elder brother. 
 
 r] 7ro\fc9 r)V TToXtopKovfiev. 
 
 The city vAich we are investing. 
 
 €\a/3ov T^9 ^(ovrjf; rov Opdvrrjv. Xen. 
 They seized Orontes hy the girdle. 
 
 This last example shows how the Article is used where 
 in English we employ a possessive pronoun. 
 
 €Ka(TTO<; Tcov B7]/jbLovp<ycov T7]v re'^vrjv Ka\a)<i 
 
 e^€ipyd^€To. Plat. 
 Each one of the artisans (just mentimied) used to 
 
 practise his art well. 
 
 Obs. The English article the was so used for the possessive 
 in old English. See Bacon's Advancement of Learning, ed. 
 Wright; Glossary — The. 
 
 (B) The Article denotes the whole of a class, with 
 substantives or adjectives, in singular or plural. 
 
 prjTcop, the {'professional) speaker ; ol linrel^, the 
 knights ; ol ao^oL avhpe^;, luise men; 6 (j>poi/ifjLo<;y 
 the prudent man ; ol Trovrjpol, bad men. 
 
THE ARTICLE WITH PARTICIPLES. 31 
 
 7rat9 TravTcov Orjptcjv BvafieTa')(^eipi(7TOTaTov. 
 
 Plat. 
 
 A hoy (i.e. hoys) is of all creatures the most difficult to 
 manage. 
 
 § 38. The Article with Participles. 
 
 The article used in this way with a participle has the force 
 of a general statement, e.g. 6 /JovAo/xevo?, any one who wishes 
 (quicunque vult) ; 6 tvx^J^j (^ny chance comer or person. 
 
 a-KavB' 6 rov ^-qTOvvros evpta-Kei ttovo?. 
 
 The toil of one ivho seeketh findeth all. 
 
 It is synonymous with the use of 7ras 6 (with adjective or 
 participle). 
 
 Tras 6 ijJq <})povMv aXiaK^raL. MeN. 714. 
 Every one who does not think is exposed. 
 
 § 39' T^^ Article with Numerals. 
 
 The article may be used with cardinal numerals either to 
 mark a definite whole, or the definite parts of a whole, e.g. ra 
 8vo peprj, two-thirds (cf. Thuc. i. 10 and iii. 15); a/A</>t tov<s 
 eiKoa-L, about twenty in all. 
 
 Twv iracrCiv rpirjpoiv ras ScaKOcrias 17 iroAis 7rapecr\€To. 
 
 The state furnished two hundred of the whole number of ships. 
 
 § 40. Fluctuating use and omission of the Article. 
 
 Either (a) The ancient usage has survived when the use of 
 the article had not become established. 
 
 Or (b) The word is sufficiently definite by itself from 
 familiar reference, so that it does not need 
 the article. 
 
 Or (c) The article is omitted because the vague and 
 general conception of a word, the mere idea 
 of a thing, is entertained apart from its mani- 
 festation in a person or event, or its relation 
 to persons, things, and facts. 
 
 The equally fluctuating use of the article in English will go 
 far to explain and illustrate the Greek usage. 
 
32 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 41. The Article with Objects of external nature. 
 
 6 ovpavos, rj yrj, 6 ijXios, 17 BdXacro-a, 6 wKeavos. But also 
 ovpavos, yrj, wKeavds. 
 
 So eirl daXaTTT), 071 sea (sur mer) ; vSwp ej ovpavov, rain from 
 heaven; Trepl rjkiov Svar/jids, at sunset. 
 
 § 42. The Article with Material objects. 
 
 TO yaAa, 6 XP^'^os, also yaAa, ^/o^cros (KaOaipeLV xpvcrov, PlAT. 
 Po/i/5. 303). 
 
 § 43. The Article with Familiar places, things, 
 and persons. 
 
 Here the article is generally omitted according to ancient 
 usage. 
 
 €K TToXews, Trpos dcTTV, to toiun (but also 7r/)os TO ao-Tv) ; e^w 
 'laSp^ov (and €v tw 'lcrdfx(^), kv aKpoiroXei. 
 
 oLTTo Se^ia?, eg dpLo-repas, on the right, on the left; dpxri, 
 reXevry], evpos, fxrJKOS, fSddo^, p^yJKOS, fJLeyedos, vxj/os. 
 
 Many military phrases : 
 
 €7rt 80/ov, to the right {sjpearwards) ; kwi or Trap' dcnrl^a, to the 
 left (shieldwards) ; em -rroSa, backwards, facing the enemy. So 
 (TTpaTOs, a-Tpdrevfia, crTpaTOTreSov, Kepas cvwvv/xov, Se^tov, left 
 wing, right wing. 
 
 ISaa-iXevs is the (Persian) king; /Saa-iXevs 6 /xeyas, 01 
 irpoyovoi, ol /Saa-iXeuis. So TrpvrdviLs, the Presidents of the 
 Council 
 
 § 44. The Article with Abstract and other words. 
 
 Here the use is very fluctuating. 
 
 rj dperi^, virtue ; 17 dvSpeia, courage ; -^ hiKaiocrvvq, justice ; 
 rj <T(ii^po(Tvvr], temperance ; rj eVteiKeia, equity. 
 
 But abstract terms often occur without the article. 
 Kemark (c) above especially applies. In the same section in 
 Plat. Eep. i. 354. we have 
 
 ovScttot' dpa XvcriTeXcG'Tepov dSiKia SiKaLOcrvvrjs, 
 Never, therefore, is injustice mm'e profitable than justke, 
 and 
 
 XvcTLTeXea-Tepov dpa rj dSiKia T7J<s SiKatoa-vvr]<s. 
 
WITH PROPER NAMES. 33 
 
 § 45. The Article with Concrete Words. 
 
 So with concrete words, the article being omitted either 
 because of the mere idea of the thing or its familiarity : o-w/xa, 
 injxj, body, soul ; Oeos, God (no special divinity) ; av9poi7ros, 
 man; TraiSe? Kal yvvaiKes, women and children; iraT pis, father- 
 land; TToAts, state or country. 
 
 § 46. The Article with names of Arts, etc. 
 
 Names of arts, trades, and sciences do not take the article : 
 fiova-LK-q, yvfxvaa-TLK'q, education, mental and physical; 
 
 pTjToptK-q, rhetoric; dpiOprjTLK'q, Xoyia-fioL, arithmetic,. 
 
 numeration. 
 Similarly, Bo^a, vov<s, re^vr;, vo/xos, opinion, mind, art, law. 
 
 § 47. The Article with Proper names of persons 
 and places. 
 
 Names of persons and towns do not require the article unless 
 previously mentioned, or spoken of as well known. 
 
 'ZojKpaTYjs, but 6 ^oiKpaT'r]^, either Socrates already men- 
 tioned, or the well-known Socrates, Socrates ille. So G^j/^at, 
 at (drj^at. 'AXe^av8o<s 6 MafceSwv, 'AXe^avSpos 6 ^iXiinrov, 
 Alexander son of Philip. Also in short business-like notices, 
 HiiDKpdrrjs 2(o(/)/oovt(rKov, Socrates, son of Sophroniscus. 
 
 The same rule applies to names of nations, but ol '^EXXrjves 
 
 always when opposed to ol BdpPapoc When nationalities are 
 
 opposed (as we say " French and English ") the article is not 
 
 \ised,e.g. 'AOrjvaioL, AaKeSaLpLovioi (so repeatedly in Thucydides). 
 
 ot A.r)fxocr6€V€L<s, orators like Demosthenes (as we say, our 
 
 Burkes, our Chathams). 
 
 § 48. The Article with Geographical names. 
 
 With geographical names the use and position of the article 
 are extremely fluctuating. The following collocations are 
 generally given as the rule, and may safely be employed. 
 
 6 'E,v(f)pdTrjs TTorafios, the river Euphrates ; to Iovvlov dnpov, the 
 promontory of Sunium ; 17 Geo-Trptoris 777, the land of Thresprotis ; 
 r) ArjXos vrjo-os, the island of Delos ; rj MevStj itoXls, the city of 
 Mende. 
 
 ns^ c 
 
34 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 But the following are given as a caution against dogmatism : 
 
 o TTora/Aos o ^v(j)pdTy]S, "AXv<s Trora/xos. ThTJC. 
 
 TO AiyaXecov opos (the hill of Aegaleum) ; Ildpvrj<s to opos, 
 rj Altvt] to opos, TO opos r] 'lo-TWvr;, to opos ttJs 'Io-twvt^s, Ilti/Sos 
 opos (all in Thucydides). 
 
 So r] ^iqOvs TO ovofxa, to ovofxa ot Saifioves (PlATO) ; ovofia 
 ^dyKXr), ThUC. 
 
 Cf. rj BovXrj 01 TrevraKocTiOL, the Council of the Five Hundred. 
 Thuc. viii. 86. 
 
 Note. The preposition seems to exercise an influence on the 
 omission of the article. Thus Itti a-Krjvyjv rjca-av, Xen. An. 
 vi. 4. 19. €7rt /SXdfSrj rrjs TroXeois, ThUC. viii. 72. Trept dpiorrQV 
 
 wpav, Thuc. vii. 81. h apxy rov Xoyov, Dem. 37. 28. 
 
 § 49. THE NOUN-MAKING POWER OF THE 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article, when prefixed to any word or set of words, 
 makes a noun of the word or words thus brought within 
 its grasp. 
 
 {a) Adjectives ; 
 
 o\ a^aQoi, good, men, to ayaOov, the highest good, 
 
 summum bonum. 
 ot TToXXoL, the popular party, populares. 
 ot oXiyoi, the oligarchical party, optimates, optimus quisque. 
 
 (V) Participles; 
 
 ol l3ov\6fjL6voc, all ivho will, quicunque vult ; ol irpwTOL 
 ep')(piJbevoi, first- comers. 
 Observe the indefinite force which the Article gives to 
 a Participle. 
 
 (c) Preposition and case ; 
 
 ol eirl Tcov Trpay/jLaroyv, the government. 
 Ttt ets Tov TToAe/xov, preparations for vjar. 
 Tct €cf> r^puv, ivJmt is in our power. 
 
 (d) Genitive; 
 
 TCI T^9 Tv^rj^, the dispensations of fortune ; tcl t7]<; 
 
NOUN-MAKING POWER OF ARTICLE. 35 
 
 7roXeft)9 (without irpd^iiaTo), the affairs of the state ^ 
 politics. 
 
 TO Tov Qe/xiCTTOKXeovsj the words of Themistocles, Themis- 
 toclis illud. 
 
 (e) Infinitives ; 
 
 TO jjLva-elv, hatred; to tu^v \a\etv, rapid talking 
 (rod Ta'^v XaXelv, etc.). 
 So with a sentence, to ifie tovto Trpa^ac. 
 
 (/) Adverbs; 
 
 ol evdaZe, the living ; ol eKelj the dead ; ol TrdXac, the 
 
 ancients, ol t6t6, ol vvv, ol olkol = ol ev o'lKfo t6t€. 
 
 •rj TrapavTLKa rjSovjj momentary pleasure ; r\ ayav eXevdepia^ 
 
 excessive '" 
 
 Note 1. So with a word or even a letter used materialiter, 
 TO eyw, the word I (similarly in French — le moi est haissable) ; 
 TO aXcfia (Plat. Crat. 405), the letter Alpha. 
 
 vpeL<S, (J) avSpes ' Kdi)vaiOL. — to 8' v/xets OTav ecTro) ttjv ttoXlv 
 Xeyii). Dem. 255. 4. 
 
 You, Athenians, and ivhenever I say you, I mean the state. 
 
 vTrepejSr] to kol lav aX<^ cjiovov. DeM. 23. 220. 
 
 He omitted the words, " and if he be convicted of murder." 
 
 TO yvojOi cravTOV TravTaxov 'cttl xp-ja-tpov. 
 
 Menander, Fr. 730. 
 The adage, know thyself, is useful ever. 
 
 Note 2. Instead of repeating a noun it is enough to repeat 
 the Article. 
 
 01 Twv TToXiTiov TratSes Ko,t ol Ttoy aXX(x)v (sc. TratSes). 
 .The children of the citizens and those of the others. 
 
 Note 3. When two or more terms are joined so closelj'- 
 together as to form one notion, or when they may be brought 
 under one head the article is put only once. 
 
 ot (TTpaTrjyol kol Xoxayoi. 
 
 The chief officers, namely generals and captains of companies. 
 
 6 o^Atos KOL creX'qv'q kol axrTpa. 
 
 The heavenly bodies, sun, moon, and stars. 
 
36 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 §50. THE ARTICLE DISTINGUISHES THE 
 SUBJECT FROM THE PREDICATE. 
 
 The Subject takes the Article, the Predicate is without 
 the Article. 
 
 o jjuev hiKaio^ evSaLficov, 6 B aBcKOf; adXto<;. Plat. 
 
 The just man is hajppy, the unjust man is miserable. 
 
 This function of the Article belongs to it in conse- 
 quence of its demonstrative character. All demonstratives 
 mark the Subject. 
 
 €V UepcraL^ vojjlo^ ecmv ovto<;. 
 
 Among the Persians this is law (this Subject, law 
 Predicate). 
 
 KLvr](TLS yap avTrj ix^yia-rrj 8r) tois "YtXXrja-Lv eyevero. 
 
 Thuc. i. 1. 
 
 For this proved to be quite the greatest movement in the Greek 
 world. 
 
 The Subject and Predicate, in whatever case they are, 
 can always be detected immediately by the presence of 
 the Article or Demonstrative with the Subject. 
 
 o /jbdvTL<; Tov<;- X070U? ^/reuSeZ? XeycL. 
 
 The words which the seer speaks are false. 
 
 Tov(i \oyov<;, Subject ; -i^euSet?, Predicate. 
 TavTT) (Subject) airdXoyia (Predicate) '^prJTat. 
 He makes use of this as an excuse. 
 
 Tov^ Be \6yov^ jxaKporepov^ fjbrjKvvov/JLev. Thuc. iv. 1 7. 
 We will extend our speech to a greater length. 
 
 Ohs. With a Superlative Predicate in English we use the 
 Article where Greek does not. 
 
 ovroi el(ri -KOvqporaTOi dvOpatTTiov. 
 These are the most worthless of mankind. 
 
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 37 
 
 §51. The Article with the Predicate. 
 
 Sometimes the Predicate itself is definite, or denotes a class, 
 and in this case takes the Article. 
 
 ovToi ot Setvot eto-fc /aov Kwrr^yopoi. PlAT. Ajpol. ii. 
 These are those {really) formidable accusers of mine. 
 
 §52. POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 A. THE PREDICATIVE POSITION. 
 
 B. THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION. 
 
 A. The Predicative Position. An Adjective or Par- 
 ticiple placed outside the Article and its Noun, whether 
 before or after, is a Predicate. 
 
 (TO(j>o<; 6 avTjp \ 
 
 or >- the man is wise. 
 
 avrjp ao<po^ J 
 
 B. The Attributive Position. Any word or set of words 
 placed either (a) between the Article and the Noun, or 
 ih) after the Noun, with the Article repeated, is an Attri- 
 butive. 
 
 cro(^})<s avrip, the wise man. 
 6 avrjp 6 <TO<j>o<;, do. 
 
 The first form is the most natural, and the most common. 
 In the second form the attributive is often used as a further 
 explanation. 
 
 TO Tel')(p<i TrepielXov to Kaivov. Thuc. 
 
 They dismantled the wall, the new one I mean. 
 
 Any word or set of words thus placed becomes attri- 
 butive to the Noun. 
 
 6 Trdvv IlepoKXrj^. Xen. Mem. iii. 5. 1 (cf. Thuc. viii. 
 
 1 and 89.) 
 The consummate Pericles. 
 
38 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 If] irapavTiKa r)Bovr]. 
 Momentary pleasure. 
 
 rj ayav ekevOepua. 
 
 Excessive liberty. 
 
 al avev Xvttcjv 7]Sovai. 
 Painless pleasure. 
 
 TO Tel')(p<; TO irapa tov iroTafxov, 
 
 The wall alongside the river {the river vmIT). 
 
 6 TravToov KaWcaTO^ Kau iracn <^i\TaTo^ avrip. 
 The handsomest and hest-heloved man in the world. 
 
 Note 1. This attributive or epithet- making power of the 
 Article is shown by the following examples : — 
 
 ot ofJLoXoyovixevois SovXol. DeM. 29. 39. 
 Those who confessedly are slaves. 
 
 TO, Ti^s Twv TToAAwv xj/vx^js ofxfxaTa. Plat. Soph. 254. 
 The eyes of the soul of the many. 
 
 2oXwV ijXLCTGi rOVS oToS OVTO-S dvOpCOTTOVS. DEM. 19. 254. 
 
 Solon used to hate men such as this person. 
 
 kv T<J) Trplv Koi yevecrOat ^fMa<s XP^^^' PlAT. Fhaed. 88 a. 
 In the time before we came into being at all. 
 
 Note 2. When such collocations as the following are found, 
 — avOpoiTTOL ol Tore, dSiKLa r] aKparos, the Substantive, without 
 the Article, is generally first used in an indefinite way and 
 therefore without the Article; the Attributive follows with 
 the Article as an explanation. 
 
 (TK€7rT€0V TTtOS TTOTC 7] aKpttTOS SlKaiOCrVVq TT/OOS dSlKtaV TTjV 
 
 aKparov ex^t. Pl. Eep. viii. 535. 
 
 We must consider how pure justice is related to an injustice 
 which is pure (sheer, unmixed). 
 
 Note 3. A Predicate may occur inside an attributive phrase. 
 
 at dpicrrai SoKovcrai eivai c^vo-ei?. XeN. Ap. 4. 1. 3. 
 
 Those natures which appear to be the best, or which appear to 
 be the best natures. 
 
FORMS USED WITH GENITIVE. 39 
 
 So especially with 6 Aeyo/>tevo?, ovo/Aa^o/xevo?, KaXov/xei/os. 
 
 TO KoTvAatov ovojaa^o/zevov o/aos. AeSCHIN. 3. 86. 
 
 jT/i^ hill of Cotylaeum as it is called. Mons Cotylaeus qui 
 dicitur. 
 
 And regularly ol ^AOrjvatoi KaXovjxevoi. 
 
 §53. WHEN A GENITIVE FOLLOWS, SEVERAL 
 FORMS ARE USED. 
 
 1. 97 Tov iraToo^ oitcia. 1 m-i , c 
 
 ; , , \ , \ The commonest forms. 
 
 2. 9; oi/cta Tou Trarpo^. ) 
 
 3. 97 ot/c/a 97 TOV iraTpo^. Less common. 
 
 r This form is used when the 
 V , , , I Genitive has been used 
 ^ ' just before, or is empha- 
 
 ^ sised. 
 
 In accordance with the last position, — tov x^ptov rj airopia, 
 ThUC. iv. 29 ; 776/31 TOV ixia-dov TTJs aTToSoa-eios. Thuc. viii. 85. 
 
 Note. Where there are two or more Attributives, some one 
 or other of the above arrangements is employed. 
 
 (a) According to the first position — 
 
 fjLefJLvrjorde Trjs €V 2aAa/xivt tt/jos tov Tiepa-Tjv vav/Aa^tas. 
 
 Aesch. 2. 74. 
 
 (b) According to the third position, which renders the 
 Attributes more distinct — 
 
 17 (repLvrj avrrj kol OavpacrTr] y) t"^? TpaywSi'as Trotrja-is, 
 
 Plat. Gorg. 502. 
 
 One Attributive, however, is often put after the Article and 
 Substantive. 
 
 TO, Ik rrjs 'lao-ov peyaXa ^py^fiara StapTracrdevra. 
 
 Thuc. viii. 36. 
 
 6 KaTetAry^o)? klvSvvos ttjv ttoXlv. DeM. 18. 220. 
 at TToAAot fSpovTal StaTeAcis. SOPH. O.C. 1513. 
 
40 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 54. THE PREDICATIVE POSITION IS USED BY 
 
 (a) 0VT09, 6Se, eKGLvo^. 
 
 ovTO<; 6 avTjp \ 
 
 or V this man, 
 
 6 dvTjp ovTO<;, ) 
 
 rjSe 7) TToXf? "I 
 
 or Kthis state. 
 
 T) TToXt? rjSe, } 
 
 Kara rov^ vofjLov<; eKeivov^ \ 
 
 or y according to these laws. 
 
 Kar eK6LVov<^ tov<; i^o/xof?, J 
 
 (&) eKarepo^, a/ji(f)co, a/jLCJ^orepof;. 
 
 ev eKarepa rrj iroXet, in each state. 
 
 a/jLcf>a> Tco %et/3e, hoth hands. 
 
 eir dfi^orepoL^ to2^ Xijieo-L, off hoth harbours. 
 
 Note. Where there is an Adjective also the usage varies. 
 
 07 o-Tcvr) avTY) 080s. Xen. Anob. iv. 2. 6. 
 This narrow way. 
 
 But €K€Lvr] rj vipr]XoTdTY) irXdravos. PlAT. Fhaed. 229. 
 That most lofty plane. 
 
 (c) €KaaTo<; is variable. 
 
 6v eKaaTTj ry iroXei Kara rrjv rj/juepav eKaajTjv 
 
 or ev eKaaTTj TroXet. or kuO rnxepav eKaaTTjv. 
 
 In each state. Day hy day. 
 
 Note. The Demonstratives, especially oSe, are often used in 
 the poets without the Article. 
 
 yvi'aiKos rrja-Se. AeSCH. Ag. 1438. 
 ^vv rySe x^P^- SoPH. Antig. 43. 
 And also in their deictic use. 
 
 K/otTcuv KpLTo/BovXov TovSc TTaTrjp. Plat. Apol. xxii. 
 Crito, father of Critobulus, here {in court). 
 
THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION. 
 
 § 55. THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION IS USED BY 
 
 (a) TOLOVTO^f TOLO^Se. 
 
 77 roLavTT) e7rccrT7]/jL7}, such knowledge, 
 ev T7J TOLaBe avayKrj, in such a difficulty. 
 
 Note. 6 TOLovTos, such a person; Iv tw tolovto), in sv/^h a case. 
 The Article is also so used with ttolos: Tyj<s iroias ijl€pl8o<5; 
 Dem. 246, 10, of what division ? OeXw o-ol t^s ywaiKos €pya 
 Strjyqa-aa-dai. ret TTota ; Xen. Dec. X. 1, I want to describe to 
 you the deeds of the woman. What deeds ? 
 
 So 6 TotovTos, 6 TotosSe : 6 r^XtKovros, 6 rr^AiKosSe : 6 
 Toa-ovros, o rocrdsSe : e.^. 6 toioiJtos avi^p, S2iC^ ft man ; Xafik to 
 
 Totd;/8€, Plat. Phil. 29, ^a^e a c^^se of this kind. 
 
 (h) Possessives, efJLo<;, ao^^ rjfjuirepo^, vfierepo^, at^erepo^. 
 
 6 i/jLO<; BovXo<; or o BovXo<; fiov (fjbou 6 Bov\o<; when 
 My slave, servus meus. [words have preceded). 
 
 o i^fjU6T6po<; '7raT7}p or TraT7)p rjfiwv (tj/jLwv 6 Trarrjp). 
 Pater noster. 
 
 Note, e/xos SovXos, a slave of mine, one of my slaves^ unus ex 
 servis meis. 
 
 For the position, p.ov 6 SovXos, see Arist. Ach. 12, Neph. 
 1368, Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 2, Andok. de Myst. 50. os e^et a-ov 
 rrjv dSeXfjirjv, who is married to your sister. 
 
 (c) Reflexives. 
 
 6 6/jLavTov 7raT7]p, my oivn father. 
 
 oa-a 8rj SeS-qyfxai rrjV epLavrov KapSiav. ArIST. Ach. 1. 
 How oft have I fretted this heart of mine. 
 
 Cf. Andok. de Redit. 10, 
 
 § 56. Words which vary their meaning according 
 to the position of the Article. 
 
 (a) Tras and oAos. 
 
 6 Tras xpo^os = eternity. Apol. xxxii. 
 
42 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. Tracra ttoAi?, every state (but in plural, iravr^<s av9po)7roL, 
 
 all men). 
 
 2. Tracra i} ttoAis, a// the state. 
 
 3. 17 Trao-a ttoAis, ^A^ ?i;Ao/e s^a^e, ^Ae state as a whole. 
 6 Tras dpidfios, the sum total. 
 
 There seems to be no appreciable difference between 2 
 and 3. 
 
 4. TO. iravra [xepr], all the parts together. 
 
 5. Tovs Trai/ras SicrxtAtov?, two thousand in all, or all told. 
 ^vfjLTravres eTrraKocnoL oTrAtrat, seven hundred heavy-armed 
 
 all told. 
 
 6. €v Trda-Yj TToXefiLi} ^LKeXi<^, in Sicily altogether hostile. 
 
 7. XvTrr) Trds iXrjXaTai KaKrj, SOPH. Ai. 275 (cf. //. xi. 65), 
 he is altogether harassed (all vexed) vnth ill grief. 
 
 t) ttoXls oXr], J 
 
 rj o T] TTo^ ts I ^j^^ whole state, the state as a whole. 
 
 rj TToAi? r] oArj, J 
 
 oAt^ TToAfcs, a whole state. oAat TroAet?, whole states. 
 
 (b) fXGcros, oLKpos, 'icrxaTO<s. 
 
 rj fxea-rj dyopd, the central market. 
 fxecrr] rj dyopd, the centre of the market. 
 
 Forum medium for both in Latin. 
 err' aKpoLs toU kwAois, at the extremities of the limbs. 
 6 aKpos TToXirrj^, the perfect {tip-top) citizen. Donaldson. 
 rj kcrxdrrj vrjcro?, the furthest island, 
 icrxdrrj rj vrja-os, the end {or verge) of the island. 
 
 (c) a-UTOS. 
 
 avTos 6 dvrjp, the man himself, ipse vir. 
 6 avTos dvyjp, the same man, idem vir. 
 
 Note, diras, (TVjXTras, all, the whole ; o-u/xTrao-a TroAts, dper'q, the 
 state, virtue as a whole, or the whole of, etc. (ttcis is sometimes so 
 used in poetry). Observe the predicative use of Tra? — 
 
 ov TToiv dyaOov rjSovrj eo-rt. PlAT. Phil. 27. 28. 
 Pleasure is not altogether a blessing. 
 
OBLIQUE OR DEPENDENT PREDICATES. 43 
 
 § 57' Oblique or Dependent Predicates. 
 
 An Oblique or Dependent Predicate is simply a Predicate 
 which is not in the Nominative case, but in the Genitive, 
 Dative, or Accusative, most often in the Accusative. 
 
 This is an exceedingly common construction in Greek, and 
 one which has to be rendered in many different ways into 
 English. The essential point to notice is that the Predicate, 
 in whatever case, is the really important statement, or 
 emphatic word. 
 
 The simplest case is where the Accusative is used with 
 Transitive Verbs of making, naming, appointing, deeming, 
 etc. 
 
 01 KoAa/ces 'AAe£avS/oov Q^ov (hvofia^ov. 
 Flatterers used to call Alexander a god. 
 ot Tlkpa-at Tov l^vpov €i\ovTO jSaaiAea. 
 The Persians chose Cyrus king {to he king). 
 
 6 TOV I^TTCi) XoyOV KpeiTTCi) TTOIWV. PlAT. 
 
 W^ho makes the worse reason (appear) the better. 
 
 § 58. Very often the Greek language expresses a Prolepsis 
 {i.e. an anticipation of the result) by this construction. 
 irapacTKevda-avTes evreXrj Traa-av Trjv Svvafjiiv. 
 
 Dem. Phil. 1. 9. 
 Providing all your force so that it shall be complete. 
 
 {bicrre evreXrj etvai. Of. ThUC. iv. 17, fxaKporcpovs.) 
 
 Cf. Latin — paullatimque anima caluerunt mollia saxa {=ita ut 
 mollia Jierent), Juv. i. 83. 
 
 So av^dvo) TLva fxkyav. Cf. AeSCH. Ch. 262, fieyav. 
 
 So SiSdcTKO) Tivd linrka (sc. eivai), I teach one to be a horseman. 
 
 § 59* With the verb e'xw by an idiomatic usage, similar to 
 the French, the properties of persons or things are described 
 by this construction. 
 
 KaXovs e'x^^ Tovs 6cjiOaXfjLov<s. 
 
 He has fine eyes, his eyes are fine. 
 
 II a les yeux beaux (so il a le front large, etc. etc.) 
 
 In such examples, e'x^^ (like xp^I^oll with Dative) is merely 
 an alternative for the copulative verb elfxi. The use of habeo 
 
44 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 in Latin is parallel; {e.g. cum haberet collegam in praetura 
 Sophoclem, Cic. Off. !, when S. was his colleague in command). 
 
 TO o-w/xa dvrjTov aTravres '^xofiev. ISOCR. Fhil. 134. 
 W^e all have mortal bodies. 
 
 § 60. Sometimes we must, in translating, make the Oblique 
 Predicate the real Predicate, turning the rest of the sentence 
 into a relative sentence, or using some such device, 
 a^ttoaare Sltto'vs fJ'OV tovs KaTr]y6pov<s yeyovevai. 
 
 Plat. A_pol ii. 
 Consider that my accusers who have a;p]peared fall under two 
 
 heads, 
 ov yap efxbv ipio tov Aoyov, dAA' els a^to^/aewi/ vfJLiv rbv 
 
 Xeyovra dvotcro). PlAT. Apol. V. 
 
 The words which I shall use are not mine: the speaker to 
 
 whom I shall refer you is trustworthy. 
 
 LKavov irapkyo}xaL tov fidpTvpa. PlAT. Apol. xviii. 
 Competent is the witness whom I produce. 
 
 ov yap ^dvavcrov tyjv T€)(yr]v iKT-qcrdfJLrjv. SOPH. Ai. 1121. 
 Ay, for 'tis no mechanic art that I acquired. (Of. Electra.) 
 
 rovpyov ov fiaKpdv Aeyets. SoPH. Fhil. 26. 
 The task thou settest is not far to seek. 
 
 § 61. Very often, especially in the poets, o8e is the subject 
 to an Oblique Predicate. The Predicate is often an interro- 
 gative. We may often translate this demonstrative in English 
 by " here," " herein." 
 
 (XTro/a^ ye TwSe f v/xTrcTrAey/xc^a ^evo). EUR. Bacch. 800. 
 Truly an unmanageable stranger this we have come across. 
 (aTTopo) Predicate, T$8e Subject.) 
 
 TTOtatcrt ToA/xats ratsSe Kal <^pevQ>v OpdaeL ; SoPH. Ai. 42. 
 }Fith what hardihood herein, and boldness of soul ? 
 (TToiata-t the Predicate, raUSe the Subject.) 
 
 Of. Ant. 1295, rSSe—Sevrepov. 
 So, like the last — 
 
 TTOO-ov dyet to (rrpdrevfjia ; 
 
 Holo many battalions does he bring into the field .? 
 
 Tavry aTToXoyi,^ ^prJTaL. DeM. 49. 63. 
 He makes this an excuse. 
 
WITH GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 45 
 
 Many excellent instances of the Oblique Predicate occur in 
 Antiph. TetT. B. B. 10. 11, 1. a. 2, Eerod. 1, 9, 11, 16, 18, 
 84, 93; Ant. 1178. 
 
 § 62. Oblique Predicates are found in Latin, but they 
 can be detected only by the emphatic or artificial position 
 of a word. 
 
 Omnem crede diem tibi diluxisse supremum. 
 
 HOR. Ep. I. iv. 13. 
 
 Live every day as though thy last. 
 
 Compare the example below, § 65, a^Ua-av rr^v Sokoi/, with a 
 line in Propertius — 
 
 Fidaque suggesta castra coronat humo. Prop. v. 4. 8. 
 
 He enrings a trusty camp by throwing up the soil. 
 
 § 63. Oblique Predicates in the Genitive and Dative. 
 
 rjyovfJLevoi avrovofxiov to tt/owtov ^vixfid)(0)v. ThUC i. 97. 
 At the head of allies who at first were independent. 
 
 TOVTiDV Ticrl (fivXa^iv ixpyJTO. 
 
 Some of these he was using as guards. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Antig. 556. 
 
 § 64. Free use of the Oblique Predicate. 
 
 Sometimes it expresses a mere emphasis. 
 fieydXy rfj <f)(j)vfi i/Soa. 
 He cried with a loud voice. 
 
 KaravrX-qcras ttoXvv rov Xoyov. PlAT. Rep. 1. 344. 
 Having deluged us ivith a long sermon. 
 
 § 65* Sometimes we shall have to translate more freely. 
 
 (xtt' 6pdrj<s Kal SiKatas rrjs ^V)(rjs rot Travra fiot TreTrpaKrai. 
 
 Dem. 18. 298. 
 JFith uprightness and integrity of heart I have done all (in the 
 uprightness and integrity of my heart). 
 
 d(j>U(Tav Tr)v Sokov xa^ct/oat? TCtiS dAvo-ecrt. ThUC. ii. 76. 
 
 They were lowering the team by loosening the chains (with the 
 chains loosened). 
 
46 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 66. Idiomatic Phrases with the Article. 
 
 TToXAot, many, ot TroAAoi, ^Ae many, the iJeople. Populares. 
 TrAeoves, more. 01 TrAeoves, ^Ae majority. Maior pars. 
 oXtyoL, feiv. 01 oXiyoi, the oligarchical party or faction. Opti- 
 mates, optimus quisque (also ot dyadot, etc.) 
 
 aAAot, others. ol aAAot, the others, the rest. Ceteri. 
 
 TO (rot) vvv, TO Tijfxepov, the present ; to avriKa, the present. 
 (6 avTLKa (^o^osr), momentary terror ; rj avpiov, the morrow. 
 to fxeXXov^ TO hreiTa, the future ; 6 CTretTa ySios (PlAT.), /^g 
 
 TO AotTTov, Tot XoiTTo^ for thc futwe, for the rest. 
 
 TO TTpiV, TO Trdpos, TO TTpoddev, the past or former time 
 (chiefly poetical phrases) ; to a/axaiov, to -n-aXaiov, of 
 old ; TO, irapeXBovTaj Tot TrapeXrjXvdora, the past (in prose). 
 
 TO TOT€, €v TO) TOT€, cit that timc / ev Tw TT/Jo Tov, prcviously. 
 
 TO 7r/3WTOV, ft^ j^rs/ / TO TcAevTaiov, at last (so TO SevTcpov, 
 TO rpLTOv). 
 
 Tct TToAAa, /or ^Ae ??zos^ ^ar/ (so to ttAcov, to, irAeiw) ; to 
 fxeyLo-Tov, for the greatest part, or the chief point ; to. 
 fxaXia-ra, in the highest degree ; tos i-n-l to ttoAv, for the 
 most part ; to -k^v, I? to Tzdv, on the whole. 
 
 rd Tijs Tvx^?, Fortune and her dealings (a periphrasis for 
 
 1 Tvx^'). 
 Tot T^s TToAews, politics. 
 6 (oi) Trdvv, the excellent, on: famous ; ot -n-dw twv o-rparLio- 
 
 Tiov, the pick of the troops ; 6 ttccw IleptKA^s, /Ae admirable 
 
 Pericles. 
 
 Iv Tots irpdrovy first of all. Omnium primi. 
 
 €/c Tov €7ri Odrepa, from the opposite direction; €k tov Itt' 
 dpL(TT€pd, from the left. 
 
 ot re/ot, ot d{xcfiLj ol dwo, Ik. See Prepositions. 
 
CHAPTEE III. 
 PEONOUNS. 
 
 § 67. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1st pers., 7, we. l-yw, ^^cts. 
 
 2d pers., Thou, yon. o-v, vjicts. 
 
 ou pers., XI 6, 6//,e, zt, t/Z/e?/. ^ heginning of sentence. 
 
 ( 1. Ik€ivos, oStos, t«7ie?i empJiatic. 
 J 2. 6 
 
 V 3. Oblique cases of avT<Js. 
 
 The personal pronouns in the nominative are not 
 generally used unless there is a contrast expressed or 
 implied, or more or less of an emphasis. 
 
 e'jreo Oavovra^ avTc^etp v/jLa<; eyco 
 ekovaa. SoPH. 
 
 Seeing that luhen ye died, with my own hands I 
 lathed you. 
 
 eyco crcf) uTrelpyco. SoPH. 
 7, even /, withhold him. 
 
 <7V Be fioL avTov<; KaXei. AndoK. 
 Clerk, summon the witnesses. 
 
 Note 1. — or<^€ hiniy her, it, them (sing, and pi. accus.) is used 
 in tragedy. 
 
 viv (Doric), Do., do. 
 
 fxiv (Ionic), Do., do., but only as accus. sing. 
 
 Note 2. — €fjLov is more emphatic than {xov. When the 
 pronoun is emphatic it is accented, e.g. efie /cat o-e, not c/xe 
 
 Kttt ere. 
 
 47 
 
48 PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 68. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1st pers. my, mine, ours. ijios, TjiJieTcpos. 
 
 2d pers. thy, thine, yours. <r6s, vp-crepos. 
 
 3d pers. his, her, its. Wanting in Attic. 
 
 The possessive of the 3d pers. 6? (eo?) is Epic : a<^eTepo^ 
 is reflexive (suus). The genitive of avro^ supplies the 
 possessive to the 3d person. 
 
 Besides the possessive pronouns there are the following 
 synonymous usages : — (1) the genitives jjlov, aov, avrov ; 
 
 (2) the reflexive genitives ejjbavrov, aeavrov, iavrov; 
 
 (3) the Article. 
 
 Thus, for " I sent my slave," we may write — 
 
 1. eirefi-yjra top e/jLov BovXov, or tov BovXov top ejiov. 
 
 2. eirefjb'y^a tov BovXov fjbov. 
 
 3. €7refjb'\jra tov efiavTov 8ov\ov, or tov SovKov tov 
 
 e/juavTov. 
 
 4. eTrefiyfra tov SovXov. 
 
 And so with the other persons, e.g. eTre/juyjre tov BovXov 
 
 avTov. 
 
 After a preceding word the order may be yJKei fiov 6 SovAos, 
 my slave is come; e.g. aaro^k^aa-Bk fiov tyjv diroXoyLav, Antiph. 
 Tetr. B. B. 2, listen to my defence. 
 
 Note 1. The personal pronoun is sometimes used for the 
 reflexive. 
 
 lyo) v[xa<s KeXevo) e/xe /xt/xcwr^at. Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 13. 
 / beg you to imitate me. 
 
 And as the subject of an Infinitive, with a reflexive object. 
 Set rjjxas IJerao-ac ij/xas avTOV<s. PlAT. Gorg. 514, A. 
 /Fe must examine ourselves. 
 
 And often in the phrase : /xoi or efxol 8oko) (eSofa). 
 
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 49 
 
 Note 2. The possessives are sometimes used for a genitive, 
 which is usually subjective, but occasionally objective. Thus 
 i} kiL-t] cvvoia {=rj evvoid fiov)^ the good-mll which I feel. But 
 also evvoL(;L ry (rrj, from good-will towards thee : r/ diaPoXr] rj efi-q, 
 the prejudice against me. Plat. 
 
 An adjective in the genitive may qualify a possessive 
 a^eeing with the personal genitive implied in the possessive; 
 rafia 8v(rrrjvov /caKa, the woes of me, wretched mauy mea miseri 
 mala. Cf. Latin, mea ipsius culpa; nostros vidisti flentis 
 ocellos. Ov. Her. v. 43; (cf. HoR. Sat. i. iv. 23). 
 
 § 69. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1st pers. of myself, 
 
 (TcavTOv, cravTOv, vficov avrwv. 
 
 IpXlVTOV, TJfJ.WV avTuv. 
 
 2d pers. of thyself, \ 
 yourselves. \ 
 
 3d pers. ofhim-Mr-, , \ ^^'J*"^ *^^"^ 
 
 u 7j^ \c*^ 7 MavTov, oiTov< and 
 
 zt- self of themselves. ) ( iavT«v. 
 
 Eeciprocal pronoun : dXX^\«v, of one another. 
 
 fiaKc(TTa TTjv aavrov (ppovrjaov aa-Kec. ISAEUS. 
 Ahove all things cultivate self-knowledge. 
 
 Ka& iavTov^ povXevaaixevoL Ta bifka TrapeBoaav koI 
 cr(j)a<; avTOV^. ThUC. 
 
 After deliberating apart hy themselves, they surren- 
 dered their arms and themselves (their persons). 
 
 Note 1. The separation of the word in the singular makes 
 the expression stronger, especially if avros comes first, e.g. 
 
 aVTOV /X€. 
 
 Kal Tovs TTtttSas Tovs €fiov<s y(rxvv€ kol ifxe avrov v/^purev. 
 
 Lys. i. 4. 
 
 He disgraced my sons and outraged me myself. 
 
 avTos often strengthens the reflexives. 
 
 KaraXeXvKe tyjv avTo<; avrov dvva(TT€Lav. AeSCHIN. 3. 233. 
 He destroyed his own power. 
 Ipse suas evertit opes. 
 
 D 
 
50 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Note 2. A reflexive pronoun in a subordinate clause may- 
 refer — 
 
 1. To the subject of its own clause. 
 
 2. To the subject of the principal clause. When 
 
 so used it is called an Indirect Reflexive. 
 
 , 1. K.vpo<s TracTi TraprjyyeXXev KaOicrrao-daL c^s rrjv 
 
 eavTOV Ta^6v eKao-rov. XeN. 
 Cyrus was issuing orders to all that each man should 
 stand quietly in his own rank. 
 
 2. 6 TVpaVVOS VOfXL^€i TOVS TToXlTaS V7nf]p€T€iV laVTW. 
 
 Plat. 
 
 The despot thinks that the citizens are his own 
 servants. 
 
 Note 3. As indirect reflexives may also be used (1) the oblique 
 cases of a^ros ; (2) the datives of, cr^iLa-t (o5 and e are very 
 rarely thus used : they are found chiefly in poetry, and in 
 poetical passages of Plato). 
 
 (1) ^^X ^^^'•^ tJ/Aas o,Tt xpi^a-ea-de avT(^ vo/xt^et. DeM. 
 He thinks you won't know what to do with him. 
 
 (2) If^-q crvat av^paTTohov ot kirl Aavpit^. AnDOK. de Myst, 38. 
 He stated that he Imd a slave at Laurium. 
 
 ot 'AOrjvaiOL ovSev cr<jiL(Tiv e(f>a(rav TrpodrjKciv. ThUC. 
 The Athenians maintained that it was no concern of theirs. 
 
 Thucydides and Xenophon are partial to this use of ol and 
 (T^idi. 
 
 Note 4. lavTov, lavTwi/ are sometimes used of the first and of the 
 second person. 
 
 TOL ai'Twi' afxa iKiropi^c^fieOa. ThUC. 
 Let us at the same time furnish all our own resources. 
 ovSe yap rrjv eavrov crv ye xpvxrjv opcts. XeN. 
 ^hy you anyhow do not even see your oum soul. 
 
 Antiph. Herod. 11. 
 
 Note 5. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal 
 dXXrjX(j)v. 
 
 jSovXearOe TrepuovTes avTwv irvvBdveadai ; DeM. 
 Do you wish to be running about and inquiring one of 
 another 2 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 51 
 
 Cf. S. Luke xxiii. 12, "for before they were at enmity 
 between themselves." 
 
 Note. — o-</)a)v avTwi/ %s also ttsed like suus and not se, meaning 
 their own men, their own side. 
 
 wpfxrjvTO ot €v ^djxo) 'AOrjvaLOL rrA-eiv €7rt cr^a? avrov?. 
 
 Thuc. viii. 86. 
 The Athenians in Samos were lent on sailing against their 
 own countrymen. 
 
 So T^/iwi/ {vfi(j}v) avTwi' partitively. 
 
 TO rpiTOV /xe/30S i^juwv avrwi/. ThUC. iii. 54. 3. 
 
 -4 ^Air^Z of our own numbers. 
 
 § 70. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 { ^ ( TOOrOVTOS, 
 
 This -J gg]"®^' ^0 gre-at, so many < tantus, tot. 
 
 ( ' I T0oros8€, 
 
 rm , , So old, so young ( ttiXCkos. 
 
 That IkCIVOS, , \.\ •{ TTlXlKOVTOS. 
 
 {so great) ( tti\ik<5s8€. 
 
 SuchizTir't^s. 
 
 I TOl<$sS€, 
 
 Toios is Epic and poetical. 
 For hepo^i see Indefinite pronouns. 
 
 oS/, ovToat are emphatically deictic forms, this here; 
 0UT09 and ohe point to something near in space or time ; 
 eKetvo<;, to something more distant ; ohe points to something 
 present; o5to9, to something mentioned, though o5to9 
 also has the deictic force of oSe. 
 
 7] TpayayBla eari Tr]<;Be ttJ? ttoXcg)? evprj/iia. Plat. 
 Tragedy is the invention of this city, 
 
 TovT exelv ovyco '\eyov, Ak. 
 
 This is that ivhich I was speahing of, 
 
 ovTO^ OTTLo-Bev 'n-poaip')(eTaL. PlaT. 
 Here he is coming behind. 
 
52 PRONOUNS. 
 
 TovT iar eKelvo, tovt eKelvo=^as the saying is, illud 
 quod dicitur. 
 
 Note 1 . — ovTos and oSe for first and second person. oSe is often 
 used in poetry of the first person, dvrjp oSe is common in 
 Trag. for eyw. 
 
 oS' eijx' 'Op€(rTri<s, McveAew?, ov IcTTopeis. EuR. Or. 374. 
 I am Orestes J Menelaus, whom thou seekest 
 
 ct Tov veKpov ^vv rySe Kovfjaeis X^P'* SOPH. Ant. 43. 
 (Consider) whether thou wilt uplift this corpse together with 
 this my hand. 
 
 ris ovTocrl tI<s ovTO(rt; Ar. Ach. 1048. 
 WTio's this here ? i.e. who are you ? 
 
 Note 2. — TaSe, TaSe Travra, ravra Trai'Ta are used in prose and 
 verse of something near. 
 
 ovk"Io}V€<s rdSe elcrlv OTjSe *EAA'>;cr7rovTiofc. ThUC. vi. 77. 1. 
 The people here are no lonians or Hellespontines. 
 Cf. Eur. Androm. 168. 
 
 Note 3. — ovTos and 6Be contrasted, ovros generally refers to 
 what has preceded, oSe to what follows. So with all demon- 
 stratives in -ros and -Se. But the rule is by no means 
 invariable. 
 
 TO 8e ovK ecTTL roLOVTOV dAAot TOLOvSe fiaXXov. PlAT. 
 
 However, it is not so as you think, but rather as follows. 
 
 TOtaSe e'Ae^ev, ) j y r n rocravra ) , , j., 
 
 „. ^ ,% ^ )■ he spoke as follows, - > inriov, after 
 
 €A€^e Totaoe, J -^ ./ ' roiavra J ' '' 
 
 speaking thus, are common phrases in Thucydides. 
 
 Note 4. — o^To<; (not o8e) and avros (the latter especially in 
 Plato) are the usual antecedents to the relative, like is in Latin. 
 
 ovros and €K€Lvo's contrasted. Like hie and ille in Latin, 
 sometimes, but not always, ovros means this nearer {i.e. the 
 latter), IkcIvo^, that distant (i.e. the former), in space or time. 
 
 Note 5. — oSros and cKctvos in the neuter, like hoc, illud in 
 Latin, often draw attention to and point the coming word 
 or phrase. See Peculiarities of Apposition 3. 
 
 They also gather up and emphasise what has preceded. 
 d dv ct7rr/s efifxeve tovtol<s. PlAT. 
 Whatever you say, keep to that. 
 
THE PRONOUN AIt6s. 53 
 
 Note 6. — ovTos, oSe, eK-etvos, compared with Latin. 
 
 oStos often denotes contempt like iste; ck€ii/os, praise 
 (the famous or illustrious), like ille. 
 
 ovTos is the opponent (plaintiff or defendant) =^s/e, hie 
 being the client, ovtol^ the judges, the court, or the 
 opposite party. 
 
 ovTos, as antecedent to the relative = is (qui). 
 
 ovTO(rL=hicce, celui-ci, this man here. 
 
 oSe is much like hie, this man here, marking simply the 
 presence of something, e.g. olktyj filv ijdi, here is the shore, 
 voici la plage. 
 
 § 71. THE PRONOUN Avtos. 
 
 AvTd<; has three usages which must be very carefully 
 distinguished. 
 
 1. It is a definitive adjective pronoun, like ipse, 
 
 meaning self. 
 
 2. With the article, avTo^i means the same, idem. 
 
 3. In its oblique cases it is the pronoun of the third 
 
 person, him, her, it, them. 
 
 1. AvTo<; in all its cases may mean self, myself, thyself, 
 himself, herself, itself, themselves. It has this meaning 
 when it occurs : — 
 
 a. In the nominative case. 
 
 h. In any case in agreement with a pronoun, or with 
 a noun and article w^hen placed outside the 
 article. The pronoun or noun must often be 
 supplied from the context, avro^; occupying an 
 emphatic position. The pronoun to be supplied 
 may be the indefinite t^?. 
 
 avTOL 8 brav crcpaXco/jLev ov ycyvaa-KOfiev. EuR. 
 Wheneer ive trip ourselves ive mark it 9iot. 
 
54 PRONOUNS. 
 
 auTo<; eycoye ererapdyfnjv. Plat. 
 
 / myself was quite upset. 
 
 avTov yap ere 8el npofirjOeco^. AesCH. 
 
 Thou thyself needest a Prometheus. 
 
 avrrj ttj '^V'^rj Oeareov avra ra irpdyfxaTa. Plat. 
 
 With the soul itself (i.e. apart from the hody) we must 
 
 hehold things in themselves (i.e. actual realities). 
 BpaaiSa^; tt) QecraaXSiv yrj kclI avTol<^ (f>tko<^ rjv. 
 Brasidas vjos friendly to the land of the Thessalians, 
 
 and to (the Thessalians) themselves. 
 
 Cf. Xen. Anah. vii. -8. 22. 
 ov^ OLov re earcv a/xeXr} avrov ovra a\kov<i iroieiv 
 
 eTTt/xeXet?. Xen. 
 It is not possible that one who himself is careless should 
 
 make others careful. 
 "With a proper name the article is not necessary. 
 avTO<; X^vOr}<; ave/cpayev. Xen. 
 Seuthes himself exclaimed. 
 So avTo<; ^aaiXevf}, the Great King himself. 
 
 2. auro^, rj avrr], to avro, and in Attic ai^ro?, avTi], 
 ravTo and ravrov, genitive tuvtov, etc., means the same. 
 
 Tou? avTov<; irepL tcov aurwv Xoyov<; Xiyovai. AntIPH. 
 They make the same statements about the same things. 
 
 3. AvTo^ in its oblique cases only, and never at the 
 beginning of a sentence, is the third personal pronoun, 
 him, her, it, them. 
 
 airoTrefiTTOvo'LV avrov irplv aKovcai. ThuC. 
 They dismiss him before hearing him. 
 7roWov<i avTfov arreKTecvap. Xen. 
 They killed many of them. 
 Trecpaaofiai ^vfiixa')(elv avr^. Xen. 
 / will endeavour to help him. 
 So we should write ^v/uL/jiaxelv avrrj, avrah» 
 
THE PRONOUN AirSs. 55 
 
 Note 1. — Like the Latin is, avros (!) recalls a noun which 
 has been mentioned, and (2) it is used, instead of the more 
 usual ovTo<s or €K€lvo<5, as the antecedent to a relative sentence. 
 This second usage is uncommon, except in Plato. In most 
 instances the relative sentence precedes. 
 
 (1) erpaTTovTO IttI tov /Syevo^wvro. Kal eXeyov avrio. 
 
 Xen. Anab. vi. 1. 21. 
 They turned to Xenaphon, and said to him. 
 
 (2) avTo ovK eLprjTau o /xaAwrra c8et p'qdrjvac. 
 
 Plat. Bep. 362. 
 The very point, which above all ought to have been stated, 
 
 has not been stated. 
 avkXapov avra ocra v-rrrjpx^v eTTiT'qSeLa. THUC. vil. 74. 
 They took with them just whatever was necessary. 
 Cf. Eur. Tro. 662, /. A. 1025. 
 
 Note 2. — Avt6<s meaning self will have to be rendered in 
 many different ways. 
 
 (a.) In or by oneself, unaided, 
 
 TO \(y>piov avTo Kaprepov V7rrjp)(€. ThUC. 
 The spot in itself was strong (i.e. without artificial forti- 
 fication). 
 avTos eTTOLTjcra, I did it myself (without help). 
 
 (b) Voluntarily, sponte. 
 
 ■t]^€L yap avrd. SoPH. 
 
 Words will come of themselves {unhidden). 
 
 (c) The great man himself, the Master. 
 
 Tt9 ovro'i ; avTO?. ris avros ; ISw/cparr;?. 
 
 Wilds this ? the Master. Who's the Master ? Socrates. 
 
 avTos €(f>r], Ipse dixit. 
 
 (d) With Ordinals. 
 
 ka-TpariqyeL Ile/jtKATjs rkrapro^ avros. 
 Pericles was general with three others. 
 
 (e) The neuter avro is used by the philosophers with sub- 
 stantives of all genders to express the abstract idea of a thing : 
 avTo ^LKaioa-vvr], ideal justice, or justice in the abstract ; avTrj 
 a^LKta, avTo to KaXov, avTo KaXov constantly in Plato. 
 
 In Aristotle avro forms one compound word with the sub- 
 stantive avTodvdpo)7ro<i, the ideal man ; avToayadov, the highest 
 good, summum bonum, etc. 
 
56 PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 72. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Who, what (Direct), tCs, tC ; (Indirect), 8<rTis, 8ti. 
 
 Whether of two (uter) irdreposj 6Tr<jT€pos. 
 
 How muchy how great ") , 
 How many (quantus). J 
 
 Of what sort (qualis) irotos ; oirotos. 
 
 How old, how great ir^XCKos ; otttiXCkos. 
 
 The pronouns in the second column are also relatives. 
 The Direct pronouns are however constantly used instead 
 of the Indirect {see Indirect Question). 
 
 (TV el t/9 dvSpcov ; oaTL<i elfi eycD ; Mercop, AriST. 
 What man art thou ? (ask you) what man am I? Meton. 
 
 See Ack 106. 959. 
 
 Note 1. — TToios; is often used in a sarcastic repetition. 
 
 ol 7rp€(T/3€i<s Oi Tra/oct /3acnXe(as. ttolov /Jao-tAews; 
 
 The envoys from the King I King quotha I {King indeed !) 
 
 So TTo^ev, An. Ban. 1455 j Ach. 109; Nub. 366 (a good 
 instance). 
 
 Observe that in asking a question the article is generally- 
 used with TTotos when there is no noun. 
 
 otixai ere 6/xoAoyiycretv to roiovSe. to ttoloVj 
 
 Plat. Rep. 475, e. 
 / think you will make the following admission. What 
 admission ? 
 
 So TO Ti; Arist. Batr. 40. Cf. Ar. Ach. 418. 
 
 Note 2. — Observe the idiomatic use of double interrogatives. 
 
 Tts TTodev jxo\(i)V (Toi jxapTvpr^(Tii ', Soph. Tt. 421. 
 
 Who is he, whence comes he, who will hear thee record ? 
 
 So TTws Tt toi^t' cr-TTcs ; Plat. So^h. 261, c. Soph. Ant. 401. 
 
 Rarely os is used like oo-tis in a' question. eyiSS' 6s etrrt, 
 I know who he is, Ar. Ach. 118. The Greeks said olSa (avrov) 
 
 OS CO-Tt or OtSa Tts (oO-Tts) CCTTt. 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION 57 
 
 § 73. RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION, 
 
 XIT7 / -x f whosoever 
 
 W/w 6s (qui) SoTis i / . 
 
 ( {quicunque), 
 
 /'(esp. poet.) 
 
 0/ i(;^^ sort otos, oirotos (qualis) fiorr* •< , 
 
 \ like goTis. 
 
 5'ot^ great, f 8<ros, oiroo-os (q-uantus ^ I ,, 
 
 , ^ > ^ In 6o-ir€p, -< oTie, exactly 
 
 h^manyj quotquot) LAeo«.«;J. 
 
 TF^a^ numher in a series 6ir<5<rTos (quotus). 
 
 How old or ) 6irdT€pos, which- 
 
 7 , > -AXCkos otttiXCkos j, . 
 
 flow great J soever of two. 
 
 Ohs. arra, Attic (ao-cra, Ionic) for artva, Tie?^^. ^/. 0/ oVri?. 
 ttTTtt, Attic (oo-o-a, Ionic) for rti/a, neut. pi. of tU. 
 
 09 is definite. 
 
 €(TTLv ^CK7)<; o(j>Oa\fio^f 09 ra rrravO' 6pa» MenANDER. 
 There is an eye of justice which sees all things. 
 
 ocTTi^ is indefinite. 
 
 aveXevdepo^ '7ra<; oaTC<; €t9 ^d^av ySXeTre*. 
 
 Cleanthes, the Stoic. 
 Slavish the man whoever looks to fame. 
 
 For other usages of o<ttl<; see Index. 
 
 oairep is particularly definite (irep adds this force to 
 other pronouns and adverbs, e.g. &a7rep, elirep, eireLhri- 
 irep, etc.). 
 
 ravTov e^ovaiv d/xapTijfjLa birep koI ol TrotTjrai. 
 
 Plat. 
 They are making exactly the same mistake which 
 the poets make. 
 
58 PRONOUNS. 
 
 XvaireXel fiot wairep e;j^ce) e')(eLV. Plat. 
 It is good for me to he just as I am. 
 
 So jjirep Ar. Ach. 364. 474. 
 
 Note. — ovv [Srj, SrjTTore, Stjttotovv), added to relative pronouns, 
 alters them from relatives, and makes them indefinite, oo-tlctovv, 
 any whosoever; ovS' onovv, not even anything whatsoever, ne 
 tantillum quidem; oTroa-ocrovv, how great soever, quantuscun- 
 que ; ottoloctovv, qualiscunque ; brroa-Toa-ovv, quotuscunque ; ot 
 oTTotoiSiyTTore a-rpaTrjyot, generals of any sort whatsoever, no 
 matter ivho. 
 
 §75. ATTRACTION. 
 
 A Eelative which would be in the Accusative is often 
 attracted into the case of its Antecedent, if that Ante- 
 cedent is in the Genitive or Dative. This attraction 
 sometimes, but rarely, takes place when the Eelative would 
 have been in the Dative. 
 
 '^(pco/jLaL ^L^LOL<; ok exd^' 
 I iise the hooJcs which I have. 
 For a e')(03. 
 Tok ayaOok oh e%o/iei/ KTCjfieda Kai Ta<; aXKa<;. 
 
 ISAETJS. 
 
 By means of the advantages which we possess we gain 
 our other advantages also. 
 
 The Antecedent is often attracted into the clause of 
 the Eelative. 
 
 '^wfjuai ol<; e^ft) fii/3\L0i^ for y^payfiai I3l0\i,ol<; a e%ft>. 
 dfjuaOearaTol eare tav eyo) olBa^EXK7]vcov. Thuc. vi. 39. 
 You are the most ignorant of the Greeks wlwm I know. 
 For EWr}V(ov ov? olBa. S 
 
 Note. — The attraction takes place even where the antecedent 
 is omitted. 
 
 TT/Do? w etx^ ^vveXeye crTpdrevpa. XeN. Hell. iv. 1.41. 
 He was collecting an army in addition to that which lie already 
 had. 
 
 For Trpos TovT(^ o €?x€. Cf. EURIP. 3Ied. 753. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES OF A TTRACTION. 59 
 Adverbs of place are thus attracted. 
 
 SiCKOfXL^ovTO odcv VTTe^WcVTO TTtttSa?. ThUC. i. 89. 
 
 They now conveyed across their children from the places where 
 they had sent them for shelter. 
 
 For ivrevB^v . . . ou 
 
 § 76. Miscellaneous instances of Attraction. 
 
 T>)v ovcTLav 7yv KaTeXiTTev ov TrAetovos a^tct iarriv. 
 
 Lys. 19. 49. 
 
 The property which he left is not worth more. 
 rj ova-ia, the subject, is attracted into the case of the 
 relative. 
 
 So ov 06 Oeol <f>i\ovcriV OLTrodvi/^a-Kei veos. Men. 128 
 (He) whom the gods love dies young. 
 
 The demonstrative subject, o^tos, is omitted. 
 
 So TToXXol dvaXia-KovcTLV ovk eis a Set. XeN. Oik. 3. 5. 
 
 Many spend money on objects which they ought Twt (to spend 
 it on). 
 
 For €is ravTtt €ts a. 
 
 So a^w v/zas ivOa to 7r/)ay/xa kykvero. XeN. Cyr. V. 4. 21. 
 / will bring you where the affair took place. 
 For kKela-e cvOa. 
 
 Several common idioms come under this head of 
 Attraction. 
 
 [a) ovSets o(TTL'i ov (i.e. ovSets ecmv oo-rts ov) is declined as 
 
 one word in Ace. Gen. Dat. 
 Topy tas ovScvL ot^ ovk aTreK/otvero. PlAT. Men. 70. 
 Gorgias was replying to every single questioner. 
 
 In Soph. Ai. 725, ovtls ea-9' os ov. 
 
 (b) 6aviiaa-To<s 00-09, vTrepcfivrjs 00*0? are similarly declined, 
 
 and their adverbs davfxaa-Tios, vTrepcfivQs. 
 <s)fJLoX6yir](T€ raura /xera l8pu)Tos davfJiacTTov oarov. 
 
 Plat. Rep. 
 He made these admissums with an astonishing amount 
 of perspiration. 
 
 vTTcpcpvQs o)? x^tp(j). Plat. 
 / am surprisingly glad. 
 
 (i.e. V7r€p(f>v€<s ea-TLV ws). 
 
6o PRONOUNS. 
 
 (c) ofo?, and aAAos oo-os, ct rts. 
 
 cAeye Trpos aySpas roXfL-qpovs oiovs Kal ^AdrjvaLOV?. 
 
 Thug, vii 21. 
 ^(2 ^i;as speaking to hold men like the Athenians. 
 
 For otot ctcrt Kttc 'Adrjvaioi, 
 avidTT) 'Ay/otavas Kat aAAa oVa e^vr; IlatoviKa. 
 
 Thug. ii. 96. 
 He was raising the Agrianes and all the other Faeonian 
 
 lyyvu>/JLe9a ^fieis, eyw, ^opucwv, aXXov €l Tii'a 
 
 fSovXerai. 
 
 Dem. 20. 100. 
 Let us promise, I, Phormio, any one he likes. 
 
 For aAAos Tts €i nva aXXov /^ovXerai. 
 
 otos T€ for ToiovTos ofos T€ ID. the scnsG of " able," like BwaTos, 
 is exceedingly common. 
 
 otos T€ €lfu ravTa Trotetj/. 
 / am able to do this. 
 
 0V\ OtOV T€ k(TTLV, 
 
 It is not possible ; it cannot he. 
 
 In the same way, by the omission of the Antecedent, 
 are formed many indefinite pronouns and verbs. 
 
 io-TLv oL, commoner than cto-iv ot (sunt qui). 
 €VLOL (evt, there are . . . ot, those who) ; hiore, sometimes. 
 ccTTtv oS, somewhere; ^o-tlv J, in some way ; €(ttlv ottws, 
 so7nehow. 
 
 The Eelative preceding the Demonstrative throws great 
 emphasis on the Demonstrative (as in Latin). 
 
 a TTouLv aicr^pov, ravra v6fXL^€ firjSk Xeyetv ilvai KaX6v» 
 
 ISAE. 1. 15. 
 
 Quae factu turpia sunt ea ne dictu quidem honesta habe."^ 
 
 Observe the phrases : o Aeyw, as I say, ot as I was saying , 
 oTTcp, or 6 apTL cAeyov, oVe/) etirov. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 77. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Some, any, 1 none, nothing, ovUi% ovZiv {o^\.%) poet. 
 
 A kind or J>tis, n 
 zortof, J R8.Cs,^t,8^v. 
 
 /S'ome (2^zY^ r ^^;JJJ^ Ss ^(,;^e (emphatic) J o^s^ els. 
 emphasis), \ tia-Xv oi (less common). \ R^^ ds. 
 
 5sTis o5v. 
 
 &me . . . others, | jiTfrJ^i 
 
 Each, 
 every, all 
 
 * I ?Ka<rTOs, iras ns, iras, &iras (stronger than -iras) 
 
 orvjjnras (all together). 
 
 Other 1 
 
 ' \ &\Xos (alius) oi &\\oi, ^Ae re5^, ceteri. 
 
 One of two 1 „ /^ if >. ^^^'^^^^' ^^^ \ ov8^T€pos. 
 (different), J * ^ * '^ ''' nor other J (i.T]8^T€pos. 
 
 Note 1. TTOTcpos, and its indirect form, oTrore/oo?, = ut&)-, 
 whether, or which of two ? But they may also = alteruter, one, 
 m' either of two. In this latter sense irorepos is sometimes 
 written oxytone. 
 
 TTotos, of some sort ; irocros, of some size or number (observe 
 the accents). 
 
 €T€pos should perhaps be classed among Demonstratives, 
 but it is put here in contrast to aAAos. 
 
 Note 2. Idiomatic uses of tls. 
 
 (a) TLS means sometimes many a one. 
 
 fjiL(T€l Tts €Keivov, (S ttvS/oe? 'A6y]vaL0i, /cat SeSiev. 
 
 DE3I. 
 There are those (there are many) who hate him and 
 fear him, Athenians. 
 
62 PRONOUNS. 
 
 (b) It means, like aliquis, some great, some important person, 
 
 or thing, 
 
 r)v)(eLS TLs etvai, tolctl yjprniaa-i crdeviov. EUR. El. 939. 
 Thou ivast boasting thyself to be some great one, trusting 
 to thy riches. 
 
 Cf. S. Paul, ad Gal. ii. 6. 
 So ^pav TL, to do some great thing. SoPH. M. 305. 
 Si vis esse aliquis. Juv. i. 74. 
 
 (c) It is constantly joined to adjectives, numerals, and 
 
 pronouns, sometimes to strengthen, sometimes to 
 weaken the expression, in a way for which, in 
 English, we have frequently no equivalent : — 
 
 fieyas tls, ttols tls, cKa(rros Tts. ovSct? rts, oAiyot 
 Ttves. f^pa')(y ri, ovBev ri, o^^j^cSov Tt, rpets tlv€<s, 
 etc. etc. TTOtos ns ; ttoctos rts ; a-xeSov TL, eyyv rt, 
 
 OV TToXXot TtVCS, TptOLKOVTa TIV€S, TfcVCS StJO VrjcS, 
 
 Thuc. viii. 100. 
 
 (t/) i] Tts ^ ovSets — 7] Ti ^ oTjSev, hardly any on£, hardly 
 anything. 
 
 ovTOL ix€V ovv 7] TL rj ovSev dXr)6h elp-qKac-L. 
 
 Plat. Jp. 1. 
 
 These men then have spoken hardly a iwrd of truth. 
 
 (e) TLS also covertly alludes to some known person. 
 7]S' ovv OaveLTaL kol Oavova-' oAct rtva. 
 
 Soph. Antig. 751. 
 She then must die, and dying slay another (hers will 
 not be the only death.) 
 
 (/) TL<s=here and there one. 
 
 Tiov ev oXiyap-x^L^ diro6av6vT(j}v iVcos tls "^v irovqpos. 
 
 Lys. 30. 13. 
 
 Note 3. aAAos must often be rendered adverbially, besides, 
 mmeover, as well, adding as well as opposing. This is very 
 common in Attic. 
 
 TTC/XTTTOS TTOTapLOS aXXoS. HDT. V. 54, 
 
 Yet a fifth river. 
 Cf. Soph. El. 707; Aesch. Sept. 481. 
 
 OV yap tJv xopTOS ov8e dXXo ShSpov ovSh. XeN. An. i. 5. 5. 
 There ivas no grass, no, nor any tre^ at all. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 63 
 
 Of. Plaustra iumentaque alia. Liv. iv. 41. Wagons and 
 beasts of burden also. 
 And there were also two other, malefactors, led with him to he 
 
 •put to death. S. Luke, xxiii. 32. 
 All these (vices) are poniahle, with other graces weighed. 
 
 Shakspere, Macbeth, iv. iii. 90. 
 6 aAAos may often be rendered in general or usual. 
 
 irapa rov aXXov rpoirov. AnTIPH. Tetr. B. B. 1. 
 Contrary to my general disposition. 
 
 Note 4. irav like quidvis, quidlibet, may mean anything, no 
 matter what. 
 
 ov6eva Set ixrjxavacrdaL oVws dTro^ev^erai irav Troidv Odvarov. 
 
 Plat. Ap. 
 No man should endeavour to avoid death by every means. 
 Toiavra dXXa, cf. alter idem. Soph. El. 337. 
 
 Obs. TO TTOLov, quality ; to ttoctov, quantity. 
 
CHAPTEE IV. 
 THE CASES. 
 
 § 78. Preliminary Note on the Cases. 
 
 Greek is developed from a language which had eight cases, 
 or nine, if we regard the separate meanings of the last as 
 belonging to two distinct cases. Of these eight or nine Greek 
 retained only five, although comparative philology shows that 
 traces of the others survived. The work of the lost cases was 
 carried on by the remaining five, as the following table will 
 explain, 
 
 Indo-European. Greek. 
 
 Nominative Nominative 
 
 Vocative Vocative 
 
 Accusative Accusative 
 
 ^tw-""^ I Genitive 
 
 Ablative j 
 
 Dative S 
 
 Locative ( Dative 
 
 Instrumental f 
 
 Comitative or Sociative ) 
 The Greek Genitive and Dative have been called mixed 
 cases because they have assumed the functions of the lost 
 cases.^ 
 
 1 The following declension of an Indo-European noun, taken from 
 Schleicher, will show the cases. 
 
 Stem Vak (voice, Fo7r(s), voc(s) i.e. vox.) 
 Singular Nom. Vak-s the voice 
 Voc. Vak- voice. 
 
 Ace. VAK-am the voice. ^ 
 
 Gen. VAK-as of the voice. 
 Abl. VAK-at from the voice. 
 Dat. VAK-ai for the voice. 
 Loo. VAK-i at or by the voice. 
 
THE NOMINATIVE. 65 
 
 The Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative form one group, 
 the Genitive and Ablative a second group, the Dative, Loca- 
 tive, Instrumental, and Comitative (the latter being perhaps 
 another aspect or shade of the Instrumental) a third group. 
 
 The Nominative is the case of the siibject 
 
 The Vocative is the case of the person or thing addressed. 
 
 The Accusative is the case of the object. 
 
 The Genitive is the case of the class (yevos, genus) to which 
 a thing belongs. 
 
 The Ablative is the case of that from which another thing is 
 separated^ the case of separation. 
 
 The Dative is the case of the person or thing remotely connected 
 with an action (the remoter object), for whom or which anything 
 is done. 
 
 The Locative is the case of the place where an action takes place. 
 
 The Instrumental is the case of the instrument by which an 
 action is performed. 
 
 The Comitative (or Sociative) is the case of the accompanying 
 circumstances. 
 
 The details of each case will show that the five Greek cases 
 retain their original meanings, while the mixed cases (Genitive 
 and Dative) acquire in addition the meanings of the lost ones. 
 But nearly all the cases, especially the mixed ones, have 
 assumed other shades of meaning and other uses, from analogies 
 which we cannot safely trace now. In treating of any case 
 therefore we may distinguish between (1) its primary and 
 distinct use, (2) its freer, looser use. Attempts to explain and 
 classify the freer uses must necessarily be more or less 
 arbitrary. 
 
 § 79. THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and of the 
 Predicate or Apposition in agreement with the Subject. 
 
 ^ikiinro^ KaOlaTaraL ^aaiXev<;, 
 
 Fhilip is appointed King, 
 
 The Nominative is often used for the Vocative. 
 
 L$L ix€V ovv (TV, 6 Trpecr/SvTaTOS. XeN. 
 Come then, you, the elder one I 
 
66 THE CASES. 
 
 oStos especially is so used. 
 
 5 oSros Atas. SoPH. ^i. 89. 
 /F/i^/ ho ! Ajax ! 
 
 Cf. Oed. Col. 1627. 
 
 6 'AttoAAoSw/oos oSto9, ov 7r€piii€V€L<s ; Plat. Symp. 
 Apollodorus, you Sir / stop, won't you ? 
 
 §80. THE VOCATIVE. 
 
 In Attic Prose oi is generally added. 
 
 cTKOTrei Tocvvv, CO ^coKpare^;, e(j)7]. PlaT. 
 Consider therefore, Socrates, said he. 
 
 jjLT] 6opv06LT6, w avSp6(; A$r]valoi. Plat. Apol. 
 Do not interrupt, Athenians. 
 
 The omission of the w makes the address curt, tart, or 
 businesslike, as aKovei^ Ala'^lvrj ; d'ye hear, Aeschines? 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 § 8l. Preliminary Note on the Accusative. 
 
 The Accusative, unlike the Genitive and Dative, is formed 
 with no suffix which in itself gives the case a special applica- 
 tion. But it came to denote the object of the sentence, as 
 the Nominative denotes the subject. In speaking of the ob- 
 ject, however, we must very carefully distinguish between 
 two distinct significations of the Accusative. Thus Antiphon 
 writes, Tv-rrrei rov avSpa TrXrjyds^ he strikes the man blows. 
 Here 7rAr;yas, blows, is already contained in the meaning of the 
 verb TVTTTet. This Accusative has been called the Internal 
 Accusative. On the other hand, rov avSpa, the man, is not 
 contained in the meaning of TvirreL. This is called the External 
 Accusative. The Internal Accusative is of much freer and 
 wider application than the External, varying from the Cognate 
 Accusative, p-a-xw fJ^^^X^f^^h ^fyht a fight, to any word which 
 is substituted for the Cognate Accusative, such as, a-n-ovSas 
 TTOLovp^aij I make a treaty ; eTrca-ToXrjv ypd(fi(D, I write a command ; 
 
THE ACCUSA TIVE. X^/, r^Q p^-g^ 
 
 tX¥i 
 
 irXkiii OdXaara-av, I sail the sea ; jxkyaXa o-<^aA.Ao/xat, I am greatlf 
 disappointed. The External Accusative is a natural extension, 
 not of the meaning, but of the direction of the verb. The 
 Accusative is naturally associated with a verb, and, when it is 
 not an External Accusative, qualifies the verb almost as an 
 adverb. Thus Trata-ov SittA^v (Soph. El. 1415), strike a double 
 blow, strike twice ; aK-qv ecrav, or eyevovro (HoM. H.) they were 
 or became silence^ i.e. silent. Hence the many quasi-adverbs of 
 Accusative form, OLpxqV) aKfi-qv, Tr/oo^ao-tv, X^P''^^ rrpoiKa, etc., 
 and the wide use of neuter adjectives used adverbially, 7roAA,a, 
 TTVKvdj TO XoLTTov, etc. TLpoiTov, TTpoTcpov, again are Accusative 
 forms. Indeed we may say that all Accusatives fall under 
 two heads, either — (1) the Internal Accusative, or (2) the 
 External Accusative, 
 
 § 82. Conspectus of the Internal Accusative. 
 
 The Internal Accusative denotes either the state or the 
 operation of the verb (the state of neuter and passive verbs, 
 the operation of active verbs). 
 
 It is either 
 
 A. A word kindred in stem or meaning to the verb (the 
 Cognate Accusative), e.g. 
 
 fxd)(r]v fid)(€(T6aL. 
 ^rjv fStov. 
 
 B. A word substituted for the Cognate Accusative, and 
 limiting or defining the verbal notion. 
 
 xlz-qcfaa-ixa viKoiv, to win, i.e. carry, a meamire. 
 
 Accusatives of this class denote 
 
 {a) That with respect to which the state or operation occurs, 
 often the part affected (Accusative of Eespect). 
 
 davpiaa-Tos €tmt to KaAAo?, to be remarlcdble in respect of 
 
 beauty. 
 ^v)(rjv vo(T€Lv, to be ill in mi'nd. 
 
 (b) The extent of the state or operation in degree, space, or 
 time. 
 
 ovT€ pkya ovre crpuKpov oroc^ds ei/xi. 
 In no degree, great or small, am I wise. 
 
THE CASES. 
 
 d7re)(€i crTaStovs I/^So/xt^kovto. 
 It is seventy stades distant. 
 TToXvv xpovov Trapcfieiva, 
 I waited a long time. 
 
 Two further remarks may be made : 
 
 (1.) The Accusative follows Adjectives (and Adverbs) as 
 well as verbs, e.g. 
 
 dyaOos rracrav 'dpcTYJv. 
 an fJLOi drLfJLtav rotavSe. 
 
 (2) Adjectives, especially neuter Adjectives and Pronouns 
 in agreement with the Accusative, are freely used instead of 
 the Accusative, which is unexpressed. 
 fxeyaXa KivSvveveL, 
 
 TOVTO KLv8vV€V€L. 
 
 § 83. The Internal Accusative. 
 
 The Internal Accusative is, 
 
 A. A word kindred in stem or meaning to the verb. 
 This is called the Cognate Accusative. 
 
 t/ fjLo'^Oov ovBev ovaa fio')(6el<; ; EUR. And. 134. 
 Why, being naught, toilest thou with toil ? 
 
 ^T^o-et? ^lov KpaTL(TT0V rjv Ovfiov Kparrj^. Menand. 186. 
 Thou wilt live the test life if thou wilt control thine 
 anger. 
 
 ^w€(fivy€ <f>vyriv, he sJmred the flight, Pl. Ap. v. ; ttovovs 
 TTovelv, to undergo labours, Pl. Ap. vii. ; dpx-qv rjp^a, I held office, 
 Pl. Ap. XX. j oj/€t8os ovttSto-ae, to upbraid with reproaches, Soph. 
 PhU. 623. 
 
 voo-eis aXyos, thou art sick with grief, SoPH. Phil. 1326; 
 ypa(f)rjv StioKeiv, to bring an indictment against (cf. ypa<f)rjv 
 ypdcftea-dai, cognate in stem) ; TroAe/zov crrpareveLv, to engage in 
 war, ThUC. i. 112 (cf. TroXefxov TroXefi^LV and o-Tpareiav 
 (rTpaTev€LV.) 
 
A ecus A TIVE OF RESPECT. 69 
 
 B. A word substituted for the Cognate Accusative, 
 and limiting or defining the verbal notion. 
 
 ^Tepov yjn^cjyicrfJLa vlko, Arj/jL0(76ev7](;. AesCHIN. 
 Demosthenes carries a second decree (or measure). 
 
 iqycovi^ovTo a-TaBiov, nTa\7]v, Kau irvyjJbTiv. Xen. 
 They were contending in the race-course, in wrestling, 
 and in boxing, 
 
 8iKY]v ocfiXeLVf to lose a lato-suit ; 'OXv/nna vt/cai/, to win an 
 Olympic victory ; ydfMovs eo-rtav. to give a wedding feast, EuR. ; 
 xp-qfjua-ixa. viK^, he carries (or wins) a decree, Aeschin. 
 
 Note. An extension of this Accusative is found in the Poets. 
 This Accusative denotes the result of the verbal operation. 
 Practically the verb yields an epithet in agreement with the 
 Accusative. 
 
 IAkos ovrdcrat, HoM. //. V. 361, to stab (and so make) a wound. 
 Goodwin compares "to break a hole." Tpo-n-as Karapprj-yvva-L, 
 Soph. Ant. 675, breaks to pieces (and so causes) a rout; Ta/ccts 
 oifjuaydv, SoPH. El. 123, thou meltest a (makest a melting) 
 lamentation; ireipav €ixa>pavev, Aesch. Fers. 715, he made a 
 foolish attempt; reyyeiv Sa/cpva, PiND. Nem. x. 141, he wetted 
 (i.e. shed wet) tears. 
 
 In Soph. Ant. 973 the passive of this construction occurs. 
 eA/cos TV(fi\a)dev, a blinded wound^ i.e. wound inflicted which 
 caused blindness ; the active form would be TV(f>\ovv cAkos, to 
 inflict a blinding wound. 
 
 § 84. Accusative of Respect. 
 
 An Accusative is constantly joined to a verb, adjective, 
 noun, or even a sentence, to denote that in respect to which 
 the state or operation of the verb, etc., takes place. Very 
 often the Accusative denotes the part affected, e.g. 
 
 Kcifivco or dXyo) T7]v fce(f)a\r]v (ra ofifiaTa, tov<; TroSa?, 
 
 Tou? BaKTvXovsi). 
 I have a pain in the head (eyes, feet, fingers). 
 
70 THE CASES, 
 
 ^iXTLov lari awfia y y ylrvxvv voaelv, Menand. 
 Better to ail in body than in mind. 
 TV<j)Xo<; rd r ayra, top re vovv, rd r ofifxar el SOPH. 
 Blind art thou both in ears, and mind, and eyes. 
 'E^aKoaiot TOP dpiBfiov, six hundred in number. 
 "E\\'r]ve<; TO yevo^ (to wofia), Greeks in race (in name). 
 Compare this Accusative with the Dative of Circum- 
 stauce. 
 
 § 85. Accusative of Space and Time. 
 
 The Accusative denotes extension of space and duration 
 of time. 
 
 ifkelv TTjv Oakacaav, Andok., to sail the sea. 
 TTopeveadat oSov, yrjv, oprj, Xen., to travel over a road, 
 land, mountains. 
 
 al airovhcLi eviavrov eaovraL. Thuc. 
 The truce shall be (i.e. last) for a year. 
 
 aTTe^^et rj IlXaraia rcov ©rj^wv (TTaBLOV<: e^So/jL7]- 
 
 Kovra. Thuc. 
 
 Plataea is seventy stades distant from Thebes. 
 
 Tr]V TpLTTjv rjfiepav ecpya^ovTO koI rrjv TerdpTrjV, 
 
 Thuc. 
 They were working throughout the third day and the 
 fourth. 
 
 K€\€v6ov IpTTtiv, to CTdwl olong a road, SoPH. Phil. 1224; 
 6801/ <f>avrjvai^ to appear on a road, Soph. El. 1274; ttjv (opav 
 Tou €Tovs, Dem. Phil. i. 8, during the season of the year. 
 
 Note. An Accusative with ordinal numbers means how long 
 since, or ago. 
 
 k^-qXdofxiv rpirov eros rovri DeM. 54. 3. 
 We came out three years ago. 
 
 Cf Plat. Protag. 309. 
 
A ecus A TIVE OF MO TION. 71 
 
 § 86. Accusative of Motion. 
 
 The Accusative denotes motion to a plax^e, without a 
 preposition in Poetry ; but in Prose a preposition is 
 required. 
 
 ouTTO) vevoa-T-qK^ oLKov. Eur. /. T. 534. 
 
 Not yet hath he returned home, 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 152, Phil 244; Eur. Bacch. 1, 5. Cf. 
 Julius Caesar — Ere we could arrive the point proposed. 
 
 Very seldom motion to a person. EuR. Bacch. 847, 1353. 
 at vrJ6<i a(f)CKvovvTai. eirl UvXov, ThuC. 
 The ships arrive against Pylos. 
 
 evrevOev e^eXavvei 6t9 KoXoo-aa^;. Xen. 
 From this place he marches to Colossae. 
 
 § 87. Accusative of the Object and Predicate in 
 agreement or in apposition with it. 
 
 For this construction, a very common and easy one, see 
 
 Oblique Predicate. 
 Verbs of naming (/caAw, ovo/xafoo), addressing (Trpoo-ayo/oevw), 
 dividing and distributing (vefxio, Karai/e/xa), Staipio, reixvu)), take 
 this construction both in the active and passive. 
 KaXovoTL fie TOVTO TO ovofia. XeN. Oik. 7. 3. 
 They call me (by) this name. 
 6 Kvpos TO crrpaTevfxa KaTeveifxe Sio8€Ka p^ep-q. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 13. 
 Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts. 
 'q yrj to, avTa /xe/017 8iav€/x€Tat. Pl. Leg. V. 737. 
 The land is divided into the same parts. 
 
 § 88. Double Accusative. 
 
 Certain classes of Verbs in Greek regularly take 
 a double Accusative. 
 
72 THE CASES. 
 
 Verbs of : — 
 
 asking, i.e. interrogating : epwrw, r^pofx-qv. 
 
 asking, i.e. petitioning : atVw (and compounds), Trpdcra-o), els- 
 
 irpdcra-b), 7rpd(T(T0fjLaL, I demand, 
 exact. 
 
 concealing : k/ovtttw {airoKpxmTisi). 
 
 teaching : BiSda-Kw. 
 
 putting on or off: evSvo), ckSvoi, d[X(^LkvvvjXL, irepLpdX- 
 
 Kofxai. 
 
 depriving : d(fiaipovfiaLj diroa-Tepia, (TvXQi. 
 
 saying or doing anything dyaOov (KaKov, rt, rovro, ev, KaAw?, 
 
 good or ill : KaKWs), Aeyw, Ipw, eTTrov, 8pQ, 
 
 TTOtw, epyd^ofiat (rarely Tr/oaa-crw). 
 
 Similarly : evAoyw, eTratvw, xj/^vBofxai, 8taj8aAA(t>, v^pi^ai^ 
 dScKW, avTtTTOtw, f^XdiTTdiy KwAuco, avayKa^o). 
 
 OU TOVTO (T6 epCOTM. ArISTOPH. 
 
 That's ?io^ ^Ae question I'm asking you. 
 
 TToXKoi fie alrov aiTOvai, iroXKoi Be Ifiaria. Xen. 
 Many are asking me for food, many for clothes. 
 
 aWov<i ravra ravra BiSaaKco. Plat. 
 I teach others these self-same suhjects. 
 
 ovBev (76 Kpy-yfrQ). SoPH. 
 Naught will I hide from thee. 
 
 Uiov o AiroWoiv avTO<; eKovayv efie 
 
 ^pTjo-TTjpcav eadrjra. AescH. 
 
 And lo I Apollo's self divesting me 
 
 Of garb oracular. 
 
 aWrjXov^ ra €a')(aTa Xeyovcrtv. Xen. 
 
 They say the most atrocious things of one another. 
 
 OL ficp 7rov7)poc KaKov TL cpya^ovTai tov<; av6 pwirovf;, 
 
 Ofc S' ayaOol ayadov. Plat. 
 Bad men do harm to others, good men good. 
 
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 73 
 
 Note 1. The construction of the Double Accusative is much 
 commoner in Greek than in Latin. Almost any Greek transi- 
 tive verb can take an Accusative of the External Object, and 
 some one of the many varieties of the Internal Object. The 
 Internal Accusative is often a neuter pronoun, or an adjective 
 agreeing with a suppressed substantive. 
 
 MeAiyTO? jote eypd^aro rrjv ypdcfirjv ravrrjv. PlAT. 
 Meletus brought this indictment against me. 
 
 In the Passive — 
 
 TO,? aAAas /xa^a?, ocras Tlcpcrat "^TrTJOrjcrav, Iw. IsOCR. 
 / ])ass over all the other battles in which tlie Persians were 
 
 The poets, as might be expected, use great freedom with this 
 construction, from Homer downwards. 
 
 Xpoa vtfero dXfxrjv. Od. vi. 224. 
 He was washing the brin£ off his skin, 
 
 (He was washing his skin : he was washing off the brine.) 
 
 aAA' ovK edcni tovto y -q Slky) ore. SoPH. Ant. 538. 
 Kay, Justice will not suffer thee to do this. 
 
 TOtovTOV Opdcros 
 avrri 6' birXi^n. SOPH. El. 996. 
 
 Thau arm'st thyself in such boldness. 
 
 Note 2. In the passive Construction one accusative becomes 
 the subject. E.g. — 
 
 TToAAot imrorjs aTrecTTeprjvraL. 
 
 Many have been deprived of their horses. 
 
 The passive of cv, KaKw?, ttouIv is not ev etc. Trouia-Oai but €v 
 etc. Trd(T\€LVj and of €v etc. Xeyeiv not XeyearOat but aKovetv 
 (cf. beTie, male audire), e.g. /xeyaAa, cv, iraddv, iroXXa KaKo. 
 aKoveiv. 
 
 Note 3. Many of these verbs take other constructions, e.g. 
 dvafiLlxvi'^crKOi Tivd Ttvos, atrw Tt Ttapd t6vos, a<^ai/30v/jiat rt Ttvo?, 
 aya^ov Trotw (rot. Xoi^opelv takes an accusative, AotSo/aeitr^at a 
 dative : ftc/xc^o/iat an accus. of thing and dative of person, tovto 
 a-oL ; also an accusative of person ; also a dative alone of 
 person. 
 
74 THE CASES. 
 
 § 89. The External Accusative. 
 
 The Accusatives denote the direct object of a transi- 
 tive Verb. 
 
 Tiyv i^n-X^v TOf 9 pap^apov<; eviKfjaev. AeSCHIN. 
 He conquered the barbarians in battle. 
 
 fid')(rjv internal Acciis., ^ap^dpov^ external Accus. 
 
 Note 1. The Accusative depends almost universally on a Verb. 
 But there are few cases in which it depends on a noun (gene- 
 rally a verbal adjective, or a noun of verbal character). 
 
 Kat (re (jiv^Lfios ovSeis dOavdroiV. SoPH. Antig. 789. 
 And none of the immortals is able to escape thee. 
 
 TToAe/AOS diropa iropLfjios. AeSCH. F. V. 904. 
 
 TO irav pJqxap ovpios Zevs. AeSCH. Suj)p. 594. 
 
 Perhaps we may add e^apvoi rd MfioXoyrjfieva, IsAEUS V. 26 ; 
 eTTLo-T-qpoves rd Trpoa-qKovra, XeN. Cyr. 3. 3, 9 ; SwK^arrys rd 
 fterew/oa (fypovna-T-qs, Pl. Apol II. ; unless we regard the accu- 
 satives here as accusatives of respect. 
 
 The construction is not unknown to Latin — 
 
 Quid tibi banc digito tactio est, Plaut. Foen. v. 5. 29. 
 Reditum domum in patriam. Liv. xxx. 32. 
 
 On this construction see Peile, Frimer ofFhilology, ch. vii. 5. 
 
 Note 2. An Accusative stands in apposition not to the 
 object of the verb, but to the state or act jointly denoted by 
 the verb and its object. Very often this Accusative in 
 Apposition has a proleptic force. See Feculiarities of Apposi- 
 tion. 
 
 alal, KaKiov v\pi(na Brj kXvo) raSc, 
 
 aL(r)(T] T€ Ue/jcrats Kat Atyca KiOKvpara. AeSCH. Fe7'S. 331. 
 
 TFoe ! woe ! the top of sorroiv hear I now, 
 Shame to the Fersians, arid shrill lamentations. 
 
 Other instances occur, Aesch. Ag. 225, Cho. 200, EuR. 
 Bacch. 29, 250. 
 
 Cf. Verg. Aen. xi. 381, Proinde tona eloquium, soli turn tibi. 
 
THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE, 75 
 
 § 90. Verbs which take an External Accusative. 
 
 The following classes of Verbs should be noticed as taking 
 an Accusative of the External Object. 
 
 1. Many Verbs of Emotion : 
 
 alSovfiai, I revere. l/cTrA-Tyo-o-o/xai, ) I am alarmed 
 
 aKTxyvo fxai, I feel awe or shame KaraTrX-qa-crofiai, ) at. 
 
 in the presence of. <f>pL(T(ro), I shudder at. SoPH. 
 
 OappCij I feel confidence in. Ant. 997. 
 
 atcr^vvojuat tov TroXvvfxvov Oeov. EUR. Ion, 1074. 
 
 / am abashed in the presence of the god renowned in song. 
 
 TO TOLovTov (Tw/xa 01 €xOpol dappovfTiv. Pl. Phaed. 239. 
 The enemy feel confidence in such a body. 
 
 [xr] dvyafMLV TCov'AOrjvaioyv KaraTrXayrJTe. ThUC. vi. 76- 
 Do not be dismayed at the power of the Athenians. 
 
 2. Many Verbs of Motion compounded with Prepositions, 
 such verbs taking the meaning of their kindred transitives. 
 
 5ia/3atva), jj^^,^^^ ficrecfiL, )I pursue, go in 
 
 Supxop'ai, \ ' fi€T€p)(OfJiaL, ) quest of. 
 
 Stair Xco), I sail across. cK^aiVw, / exceed. 
 
 TrepiepxopLai, I go about. i^ia-T-qixL, I avoid. 
 
 TTcpiTrXko), I coast along. v7r€pl3dXX(D,I cross over, surpass. 
 
 aTTOOiOpouTKO), ) ^"^ VTTOovoixaL, ) cipio). 
 
 vTro(f>€vyco, I avoid, shirk. 
 
 ra eTTiT'^Seta gk '2rj(TT0V juertovTe?. XeN. Hell. ii. 1. 25. 
 Going in search of provisions from Sestos. 
 
 virepkf^aXov ra oprj. XeN. An. iv. 4. 23. 
 
 They crossed the mountains. 
 
 orav ot avSpe's eK^wcrt tyjv rjXtKLav, d(j>rj(roixev ttov avrovs 
 
 eXevOepovs. Pl. Bep. 461. 
 As soon as the men exceed the prescribed limit of age we shall, 
 
 I presume, set them free. 
 ol irpoyovoi ovSeva TrwTTOTe klvSvvov l^kcr'qo'av. DeM. 20. 10. 
 Our ancestors never shirked any danger. 
 Cf, Verg. Aen. v. 438, vim viribus exit {i.e. evitat). 
 TO rov<s rvpdvvovs elcnevaL. DEM, 418. 13. 
 To act the part of tyrants. 
 
76 THE CASES, 
 
 3. Many Compound Verbs, which in their composite form 
 are equivalent to transitive Verbs : 
 
 8r)fMayo)y€L tov5 dvSpas. XeN. An. vii. 6. 4. 
 He wins men by popular acts. 
 Tr)V €avTov irarepa yr]porpo<^el. DeM. 24. 203. 
 He nurses his father in his old age. 
 fir) TO, x^^P^ cf>LXov€LKrj(Tai. Thug. v. 111. 
 Not through contentiousness to choose the worse. 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 994, Schneidewin, w. note. 
 So oLKovofxCi (tov JBlov), I manage, or regulate. 
 (TVKocfiavTio (tivo), I calumniate, or accuse falsely. 
 AoyoTTotw (a-v 11(^0 pd<s), I make up tales (of troubles). 
 Karavaviiayfo, I overpower in naval warfare. 
 KarairoXefxio, I overpower in war. 
 
 4. Special Verbs. 
 
 •yeAw, / ridicule (rtva); ^aKpv(a, I weep for (<^tAov?, friends), 
 
 Eur. Frag. 
 <f)6dvoi, I anticipate (tov? /xeXXovras, those who are purposing). 
 ^r)XQ, I emulate (tovs dyaOov<i, the good). 
 
 M ^^^^f^^''* L / heware of (tov Kvva, the dog). 
 ivAapov/xaL, ) *' ^ ' ^' 
 
 dfivvofxat, I defend myself against (tov<s TroXefiiovs). 
 
 TLiMojpovjxaL, I take vengeaTice on {tov ^oi/evo-avra, the mur- 
 derer). 
 
 Pid^oixaL, I force, win by force (tov eanrXovi/, the entrance, 
 Thug. vii. 22). 
 
 (TtwTrw, I pass over in silence (ra SiKaia, what is right). 
 
 XavOdvd), I elude the notice of (tov SicoKovra, the pursuer). 
 
 TTpodvfxovixaL, I promote {rrjv ^v/x/Jao-tv, the treaty, Thuc. 
 v. 17). 
 
 06 'Ad-qvaioL rovs twv '2vpaK0(ri(DV linreas icfto/Si^Orjcrav. 
 
 The Athenians were afraid of the Syracusan cavalry. 
 
 dBvvara ^v tovs AoKpovs d/jLvveo'dac. ThuC. iv. 1. 
 
 It was impossible to keep off the Locrians. 
 
 Tt (jiuXd^aa-QaL <firjpu Setv 17/xas ; Dem. de Pace iv. 
 
 WTiat do I maintain we must guard against ? 
 
 6 KXecjv V7r€(f>€vy€ tov ttXovv . . . V(j>i<TTaTai tov ttAovv. 
 
 Thug. iv. 28. 
 Clean was trying to back out of the expedition : he undertakes 
 the expedition. 
 
THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE, 77 
 
 5. "O/jLvvixL and expressions of swearing^ fid, ov fxd, vat 
 
 fxd, v-q. 
 
 fxa Ata, nay, hy Zeus. 
 
 vr) or val rov Aia, yea, by Zeics. 
 
 ov Tov Aia, ov fia rov Ata, nay, hy Zeus. 
 
 6]jiO}fxoKO)s Tovs deov's, having sworn hy the gods, Dem. 301. 1. 
 
 ov fxa Tov At', ov (in answers), No, by Zeus, not, etc. 
 
 ov fia TOV At', ov fiev S-q, No, by Zeus, not so indeed. 
 
 Note 1. The poets use great freedom in making Verbs 
 transitive. 
 
 TOVS fap €V(T€(3€iS deol 
 Ovqa-KovTas ov yaipovcn. 
 
 At a good man^s death 
 The gods rejoice not. See Peile, Primer of Philology^ p. 1 3 ] . 
 
 So y^€v x^po^? Soph. Ai. 44 (J ebb's note); x^P^"^^ ^^o^j Ic^^^ 
 brate the god in the dance, PiND. Isth. i. 7, Soph. Ant. 1152; 
 Xopev€LV ydfiovs, EUR. /. A. 1047. So ^atvttv (7r/oo/?atv€iv) 
 TToSa. 
 
 Note 2. An Accusative is found after a compound expres- 
 sion which is equivalent to a Verb. Many accusatives in the 
 poets may be thus explained. 
 
 Kttt Travvv^ot 8r) SictTT Aoov Kadio-racrav 
 
 vawv avttKTCS iravra vavTiKov Aewv. AeSCH. Pers. 384. 
 
 So all night long the captains of ships were keeping afloat (or 
 
 sailing in and out) the whole naval host (Starr. — KadUrraaav 
 
 =one verb). 
 
 Ttv' act TttKets oljusiydv 'Ayafxefivova ; SOPH. El. 
 With what melting lament hem.oanest thou Agamemnon ? 
 (TttKets — oljxiMydv = one verb. ) 
 
 ct 8e /a' tuS' aet Aoyovs 
 ^^IPX^^ {^oyovs €^y]px^'S=7rpo(r€(liiov€Ls, Jebl)). 
 
 Soph. El. 556. 
 If thou hadst been ever accosting me thus. 
 
 Cf. Aesch. Ag. 788 ; Soph. O.C. 583. 
 See Schneidewin on SoPH. Ant. 212. 
 Cf. Terence, Hauton, Prol. 41, Mea causa causam hanc 
 iustam esse animum-inducite. 
 
78 THE CASES. 
 
 Note 3. Poetical and comic use of the Accusative with verbs 
 of looking (an Internal Accusative). 
 There are many Homeric phrases. 
 
 TTvp 6cf)9aXfjiOL(rL ScSopKws, Od. xix. 446 (looking, i.e. flash- 
 ing fire). 
 ^a'Ap-qv pXkTTUVj BcpKea-daLj dXKrjv opav, 
 
 "Apr] SeSopKOTuyv. Aesch. Se^t. c. Theb, 553. 
 
 Aristophanes is very fond of this idiom. 
 
 Tvpos Twv ^ewi/, avOpoiire, vav<j>paKTOV /JAeTrets. 
 
 Arist. Ach. 95. 
 'fo7X heaven, fellow, thou looh'st an ironclad. 
 
 So pXcTTCLv vairv (mustard), o/x<^aKas (sour grapes). 
 
 Cf. " to look black," " look daggers," and Hamlet, " I will 
 speak daggers." "He speaks holiday, he smells April and 
 May," Merry Wives, iii. 2. 
 
 § 91. THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Preliminary note on the Genitive. 
 
 The Greek Genitive is the case of Connexion and its op- 
 posite, dis-Connexion or Separation. The Genitive proper 
 denotes the class (yevos) to which a thing belongs. Thus 
 vofxio-fjia dpyvptov, a coin of silver; the coin belongs to the 
 class silver. Both in etymology and signification the Genitive 
 is akin to an adjective. (See Max Muller, Lectures on the 
 Science of Language, i. 105; second edition.) The Ablative, 
 on the other hand, denotes that from which a thing is re- 
 moved. The signification of the lost Ablative has passed 
 into the Genitive. But in the Greek Genitive we can never, 
 perhaps, be sure where we have a strictly Ablative meaning, 
 for as the Genitive denotes Connexion, by a natural law of 
 association, it also denotes the opposite, dis-Connexion, i.e. 
 Separation. Further, Connexion (or Eelation) is so elastic a 
 conception, that the usages of the Genitive have, by a series 
 of loose analogies, been almost indefinitely extended. This 
 is what we should expect when we consider the popular and 
 unscientific growth of Syntax. It is not possible to tabulate 
 all the usages of the Genitive, or to avoid cross-divisions. 
 
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 79 
 
 The Partitive Genitive so-called is a misnomer, due to a 
 confusion of thought. The Genitive denotes the whole, that 
 on which it depends denotes the part. Lastly, as the Accu- 
 sative essentially depends on a Verb or Verbal notion, so the 
 Genitive essentially depends on a Substantive or Substantival 
 notion, 
 
 § 92- Possessive Genitive. 
 
 The Genitive denotes the Possessor, that to which a 
 thing belongs ; with 
 
 A. Nouns and Adjectives, ot/ceio?, tStos [own, peculiar, or 
 belonging to); ie/)o?, consecrated to; and their opposite, dAAo- 
 T/)ios. These also (Up6s very rarely) take a Dative. 
 
 Nouns, etc. 
 
 T) Tov irarpo^ OLKta or r) olklcl tov irarpo'^. 
 
 The father s house. 
 
 7) TToXt? diraVTCdV TCOV TToXlTCOV K0LV7] eCTTlP. ANDOK. 
 
 Tlie city is common to all the citizens. 
 
 ipo<; yap ovto<; twv Kara '^Oovo^i OeSjv. EUK. 
 Consecrated is that one to the nether gods. 
 
 B. Verbs. 
 
 OL Uepaai ttjv Aaiav eavTcov nroLovvrai,. Xen. 
 The Persians are claiming Asia as their own. 
 
 TL'^ ead' 6 ^copo?; tov Oecov vofjul^eTai; SoPH. 0. C. 38. 
 What spot is this .^ To which of the gods is it held 
 sacred {considered to belong) ? 
 
 Note 1. The Neuter Article with the Genitive is freely 
 used : to, tiov ^ewv, ra t(ov 'EAA^^vov (to. 'EAAr^viKct), the affairs, 
 coTicerns, lands, history, etc., of the Greeks; to rrjs oXiyapx^s, 
 tlie nature of oligarchy, or oligarchy. 
 
 Note 2. In certain familiar phrases there is an ellipse of the 
 word on which the Genitive depends : ei/'AiSov, in Hades ; h 
 "AlSov, to Hades ; eis StSaa-KaXov, to the master's {sc. house). 
 
8o THE CASES. 
 
 Note 3. The Genitive denotes the person or thing to which 
 something is suitable or becoming (it is a sign of, a mark of, 
 it requires, etc.). 
 
 TovTO ccrrt 7ra tfovro?. PlAT. Apol. 14. 
 
 This is {the coriduct) of one who is jesting {this is mere banter). 
 
 ecTTiv apa SiKatov dvSpbs f^Xdimiv /cat ovrivovv dv$p(07r(i)v ; 
 
 Plat. Bep. 1. 335. 
 Is it the part of a just man to {will a just man) injure any 
 
 one whomsoever ? 
 TToXXyj'S dvotas kol to Orjpaa-dai K€vd. SOPH. El. 1054. 
 It shows {it is) great madness eun to engage in an idle qusst. 
 
 In expressions of sonship the substantive on which the 
 Genitive depends may be omitted : UtaKpar-qs 6 ^(Dcfipovio-Kov, 
 NtKtas 6 NtK>//)aTov, OovKvSlSrjs 6 'OXopov. More briefly, Mt'A- 
 TiaSrjs Ki[x(avos. Poet. , Atos " Apr € fits, Artemis daughter of Zeus ; 
 'OtXrjos rax^s Atas, Aias swift son of Oileus. HoM. 
 
 Ohs. — This is sometimes called the Genitive of Origin, or 
 Descent, or Source. It is a genitive of the possessor, or of the 
 class, for, as Max Miiller points out, it is equally correct to say 
 o vlos Tov Trarpos, as to say 6 TraTrjp rov vlov. 
 
 Trarpbs Aeyerat Kvpos yevecrdaL Ka/A^vcrov, 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 1. 
 It is said that Cyrus was the son of Cambyses. 
 
 So in poetry, ^vvat, f^Xaa-reLv, rpa(j>rjvai tivos. 
 
 § 93* Genitive of Material or Contents. 
 
 The Genitive denotes the Material of which a thing 
 consists, or the Contents of a thing. 
 
 With Nouns, etc. : — 
 vofiidfia apjvpcov { = vofJii,(rfia apyvpovp). 
 A coin of silver (Old Eng. adj. a silvern coin). 
 
 opcoat acopov^ crlrov, ^vXcov, \l6cov. Xen. Hell. iv. 4. 12. 
 ThcT/ see piles of grain, timber, stones. 
 
 acofia SetAaias (tttoSov. SoPH. Elect. 758. 
 A body of pitiable ashes. 
 
GENITIVE OF AMOUNT. 
 
 B. With Verbs:— 
 
 01 (TTe(f>avoL pohwv rjaav aX\! ov '^pvalov. Dem. 
 The wreaths were of roses, and not of gold. 
 BeixekioL iravTOLODv XiOcov VTroKeivrai. Thuc. 
 The suhstr lections were made of stones of all sorts. 
 Free and poetical uses : — 
 
 cftoivq opdiOiv KiOKVfxaToyv. SOPH. Antig. 1206. 
 A voice of shrill laments. 
 
 TTVorj (fiOLVtov o-TaXdyixaros. SoPH. Antig. 1239. 
 A gasp of bloody deiv. 
 
 Expressions such as 'K6rjvQ>v ttoAis, the city of Athens {con- 
 trast with "urbs Roma") ; Tpotrjs TrroXUOpov, the city of Troy, 
 are poetical. 
 
 § 94. GENITIVE OF AMOUNT. 
 
 Another aspect of the Genitive of Material is where it 
 denotes the Amount of Space, Time, Money. 
 
 OKTco aTaBicov rel'^of;. ThuC. 
 
 A wall of eight stades. 
 
 Tpiwv r]fjbepcov 6B09. XeN. 
 
 A journey of ten days (a ten days' journey). 
 
 TpiaKovra raXavrcov ova La. 
 
 A property of thirty talents. 
 
 eTTLTT^Seia TpiCtv rjfxepoyv eXa^ov. XeN. Cyr. V. 3. 35. 
 
 They took provisions for three days. 
 
 yapcLV Set eTretSctv irojv y tls TpLOLKOvra. PlAT. Legg. 721. 
 
 A man should marry when he is thirty years old. 
 
 TTvpapls XiOivYj TO pkv evpos kvo'5 irXkdpov, to Se v\pos Svo 
 
 irXkOpoiv. Xen. Anab. 3. 4. 9. 
 A stone pyramid in breadth on£, plethron, in height two 
 
 plethra. 
 yiXioiV ^pa\pQ>v 8tK7;v (fievyco. DeM. 55. 25. 
 / am defendant in a suit involvim^g a thousand drachm^e.^ 
 
 ^ With the Genitive of Amount may be connected the Genitive of 
 Value. 
 
82 THE CASES. 
 
 § 95. GENITIVE OF PLENTY OR WANT 
 
 With the Genitive of Material may be associated the 
 Genitive after words of Plenty or Want. 
 
 A. Adjectives and Adverbs : /aco-tos, TrXrjprjs, e^TrAews, 
 
 TrXovcTLOS, evSe-qs, Trevrjs, K€v6s^ cprj/xos, yvjxvos, Kadapos, aAts. 
 7roTafio<; 7r\r]p7]<; l'^Ovodv. Xen. 
 A river full of fishes. 
 
 TO Trj<; Ar]0)]<; nrehiov Kevov ean Zivhpcov. 
 
 Plat. 
 The plain of Lethe is hare of trees. 
 
 rvpavvos ttoXXcov cfiofioyv Kal ipcjroyv /xecTTOs. 
 
 Plat. Eep. 579. 
 A despot filled with many fears and desires. 
 
 So with a Substantive : airopia a-trov, scarcity of provisions. 
 
 B. Verbs : Tri/XTrAr^/xt, e/XTTt/XTrAiy/xt, TrAr^/OW, TrX-qdio, ye/xw, 
 /xeoTTW, evTTopo), 8eo/xat, Sei, (nravt^ia {Kk\pr]ix.aLj Ke^p-qp^kvos, Epic 
 and poetical). 
 
 ra ^L^Xia Ava^ayopov yifiei tovtcov twv Xoycov. 
 
 Plat. 
 The hooks of Anaxagoras teem ivith these statements. 
 
 eairdvL^ov rpo(f)rj(; rol^ ttoXXoU. Thuc. 
 
 They were in want of 'provisions for the majority, 
 
 Travo-ai, Trplv opyyjs KapX p,€crro)(raL. SoPH. Ant. 28. 
 Feace ! ere thou fill Trie too with wrath. 
 
 6 Trapwv Kaipos rroXXrjs (f>povTi8o<s kol ^ovXrj's Seirat. 
 The present occasion requires mu^h thought and counsel, 
 ov iroviov Kexp'qp^eda. EuR. Med. 334. 
 We have no lack of troubles. 
 
 Ohs. XcKTpa TrifMrXaraL 8aKpvp.acriv. AeSCH. Pers. 100. 
 
 Their couches are filled {watered) with tears. 
 Here the dative of Instrument is used. 
 
THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 83 
 
 Note, The constructions of Set, Sew : — 
 ov "KoWov Tcovov fie Set, 
 I have no Tieed of much troiAle. 
 TTOta? ixoi Set <:j)povTt8o<s ; SoPH. Elect. 612. 
 TFhat care need I? 
 
 TToXXov Sew ejJLavTov ye dSiKT^aretv. PlAT. Apol. 17. 
 / am far from intending to ivrong myself. 
 
 Common phrases with Set are ttoXAov Sel, far frcmi it ; or, 
 TToAAov Sew (personally used) {nothing of the sort) ; oXiyov Set, 
 there wants little, all but ; oXtyov, (alone) almost ; oXiyov ifiavrov 
 eTreXadofxrjv, Plat, Apol. i., I wellnigh forgot myself {who I was). 
 So ixiKpov, within a Utile, almost, 
 
 OKTW (XTToSeovTes T/otaKocrfcot^292. ThUC. iv. 38. 
 
 Svolv Seovres 7revT7JK0VTa = 4:8. 
 
 § 96. THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE {SO CALLED). 
 
 The Partitive Genitive so called (the Genitive is the 
 whole, the word on which it depends is the part) is 
 used : — 
 
 A. With any part of speech denoting participation. 
 
 TToWoc Twv Adrjvaccov. 
 
 Ma7iy of the Athenians. 
 
 TO. Bvo fjL€p7j T7]<; aTpaTLa<i. 
 
 Two-thirds of the army. 
 
 A6r]vac(ov 6 ^ovXo/jL€vo^. 
 
 Any one of the Athenians who wishes. 
 
 TCDV TToXe/jLicov ol /JL€V aTTOjXovTO, ol Be ecjivyou. 
 
 Of the enemy some fell, while others escaped. 
 Twv TToAtTwv Ttg, oi)Tts cTTpaToy. Soph. Ai. (twice.) 
 O'm of the citizens, na one in the host. 
 dvrjp TWV pr]T6p(j)V (ArIST. Eq. 423, dvrjp = rts). 
 One of the speakers; so, S'qfxov dvrjp, a man of the people 
 (Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 22). 
 
 1^ vavs dptcTTa eirXet Travrbs tov crTparoTreSov. LyS. 
 The ship loas the best sailer in the whole squadron. 
 
84 THE CASES. 
 
 B. Especially after adjectives denoting participation 
 and their opposites : — [xero'x^o^;, afieTo^o<;, icrofjLoipo^, 
 aK\7}po<;, ajJLOipo^, ayeuaro^;. 
 
 /jb€TO')(^o<; av ecr)<; rod (J3ovov Spacra<; raSe. EuR. 
 Thou wouldst this bloodshed share shouldst thou do 
 this — {partice'ps sis caedis). 
 
 C. With Verbs, especially with those of giving or 
 taking a share. 
 
 /xerexw, fierecTTi (//.ot), fieraXafifidvo), I have, or take, a shai^e ; 
 fxcTaTTOLOVfJiaL, I claim a share ; /xeraStSw/xt (tlvl), Koivdyvoi) (tIvl), 
 I give a share (to a person, tlvl), irpoa-r^Kei /xot, / have a con- 
 cern in. 
 
 avOpcoTTov '>{rv')(rj rod detov fJueTeyei. Plat. 
 The soul of man partakes of divinity. 
 
 ov fieraBcoo-ovai, rjfMv t?}? apXV'^ AaKeBai/JLOvLoc. 
 
 Herod. 
 ITie Lacedaemonians will not give us a share in the 
 empire. 
 
 ovBev •Trpoa7]K€L fioL Trj<; aLrla^; ravrr)^. Antiph. 
 T have nothing to do tvith this accusation (i.e. it does 
 not concern me). 
 
 D. Also Verbs of eating, tasting, or drinking, or any 
 Verb denoting participation in a thing : — ttivco, eaOlco, 
 yevw, yevofiai. 
 
 iTLVco Tov Oivov, eadlo) Kpewv. 
 I drink wine, I eat meat. 
 
 T7J9 77)9 erejjLOv. 
 
 They ravaged (some of) the land. 
 
 nrepbTrei twv AvBwv. 
 
 He sends some (of the) Lydians. 
 
 ocroL €<f>ayov t(ov Krjptojv iravTes' acjipoves iyiyvovTO. Xen. 
 All who ate of tJie hoTieycomhs soon became mad. 
 
THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. . 85 
 
 The partitive rt may be inserted, cf. h:o\a.miv rl Ttvo?, to 
 
 enjoy some advantage from some source. 
 
 Note 1. Many of these verbs are used transitively and take 
 an Accusative (denoting " an object completely overpowered," 
 J. Grimm). Trtvco olvov, Xayy^avm rt, / attain something J rivds, 
 a share of something ; so irXda-Tov jxepos nvos iierk^uv^ to have 
 the greatest part of something (where i^kpos is a whole). 
 
 Note 2. Instead of a neuter singular with a partitive Geni- 
 tive the adjective of certain words {-qixia-vs, ttoAvs, TrAeto-ro?, 
 AotTTos) often agrees in gender with the genitive : 6 ijfMLavSj or 
 6 AotTTo?, Tov )(^p6vov ; Tov )(fi6voi^ 6 TrAetcTTos, TToAAr) rrjs ^w/aa? 
 (Xen. Cijr. iii. 2. 2). Cf. Thuc. i. 2, -njs y^s 07 dpta-TY). 
 
 Note 3. Many Adverbs of place are joined with a partitive 
 Genitive : ttov yrjs ; ubi terrarum 1 Travraxov yrjs, ovSa/jLov yrjs' 
 aAAofc dAAr} TYJs TTo Aews, ThUC. ii. 4 ; TTTjVLKa rrjs rnxkpas ', at 
 what time of day ? Troppto r^s -qfjiepas, tc3v vvktiov, 6\pe tiJs 
 iopas. 
 
 Many such phrases pccur in the poets : — 
 
 TTOV yviofXYjs ttot' el; SoPH. Antig. 42. 
 What is thy purpose ? 
 
 irov ttot' €l cfipevw ; SoPH. Elect. 390 (see 404). 
 What is thy mAjsterious intent ? 
 
 TTol Aoycov '4X6(0', Soph. Elect. 1174. 
 What ivords shall I utter ? 
 
 yatas opv^as ev9a, k.t.X. SoPH. Aiax 659. 
 Hiding it in the earth where, etc. 
 
 OL fx' GLTLULas ay€Ls ', Soph. Elect. 1035. 
 To what infamy art thou leading me ? 
 
 Note 4. The neuter of a pronoun or adjective, or adverb, 
 is not unknown to Greek, but not so common as in Latin 
 (paullum sapientiae, parum sapientiae, aliquid divitiarum, 
 quicquid deorum, etc.). n o-Tao-tacr/xov, Thuc. iv. 130; 
 ajxrixo-vov eijSat/xovtas, PlAT. Apol. ; aroira rajs (TfXLKpoXoyias, 
 Plat. Thaeaet. 175; kirl fikya Swa/xew? x^P^^^^ Thug. i. 118; 
 €7rt TrActo-Tov dvdpiOTTMv, Thug. i. 1 ; €v 7ravT6 KaKov, Plat. Bep. 
 679; €v T(o crvfxijiopds ; Soph. Antig. 1229. 
 
86 THE CASES. 
 
 Note 5. The word on which a partitive Genitive depends 
 has often to be supplied : — 
 
 €/X€ des Tt3i/ TreTreia-fxeviov. PlAT. Bep. 424. 
 
 Set me down as one of those who are convinced. 
 
 2oAwv TW]/ Ittto, (ro<liL(rTOJV CKX'qdrj. ISOCR. Antld. 235. 
 
 Solon was called ons of the Seven Sages. 
 
 § 97. GENITIVE OF CONNEXION. 
 
 The following Verbs denoting Connexion take a Geni- 
 tive : — 
 
 A. Verbs signifying to aim at, hit or attain, miss. 
 
 o-Toxafo/xat, aim, at ; opeyofxat, reach out towards, strive for ; 
 Tvy-^dvo), Kvpo), e<j)iKvovfj,aL, hit, secure^ obtain, attain ; oltto- 
 Tvy^avw, afxaprdvoi, miss, lose ; xp€v8o/xai, crcfidWofJiai, I am 
 disappointed, balked of {N.B. klxolvo) generally takes an 
 Accusative.) 
 
 B. Catch hold of, touch, cling to (he separated from, see 
 Gen. of separation). 
 
 XafjLJSdvofiai (and compounds with eTrt, avrt), aTrro/xat, 
 etfydTTTOfiaL, diyydvta, I catch hold of, touch, grasp ; e'xojuat, / 
 cling to, etc. (see examples), avrcxo/zat, / cling to, uphold. 
 
 C. Make trial of, begin, have experience in, 
 
 TTcipQi, Treipw/xai, / try, attempt ; dpyyi, dpyopiai, I begin ; l/A- 
 Tret/ows e'xw, / am experienced in. 
 
 D. Verbs of the senses : hear, smell, taste, touch (see B.), 
 enjoy. (But verbs of seeing take an Accusative.) 
 
 aKovoi, I hear ; aKpocofxat, listen to, attend lectures ; oacfipaLvofxai, 
 smell (trans.) ; o^w, sniell (neut.); yevn), give a taste of; yevofiai, 
 taste ; aTroXavo), enjoy. (The last two verbs more often meta- 
 phorically than literally.) 
 
 E. Perceive, understand, remember, forget. 
 
 alcrddvofMai, I perceive ; TTwOdvo/jiai, learn by inqui/ry ; ^vvirjfiif 
 wnderstand ; iiipivrio-KOjxai, remember ; iTriXavOdvo/xat, forget. 
 
GENITIVE OF CONNEXION, 87 
 
 F, Care for, long for, desire, neglect, desjpise. 
 
 fieXcL (jtxoi), iirLfxeXovfjuiL, I care for ; ttcivw, St^Ay, hunger ^ 
 thirst after (literally and metapliorically) ; epw, love, long for ; 
 ivTpkirofxat, respect ; oAtyojpw, a/xeAw, disregard^ neglect ; k(xt<x- 
 cf)povo), despise. 
 
 A. Examples : — 
 
 Set o-ro^aaaadac Biavola^. ISAEUS. 
 We ought to aim at intellect. 
 
 Tov cr/coTTov djiiapTcoi' ruv TraiBoi; erv^ev. Antiph. 
 Missing the mark, he hit the child. 
 
 . e^LKvelraL Tr]<; aperrj^i. IsOCE. 
 He attains unto virtue. 
 
 7ravT€? wcrre To^orcit (tkottov 
 To^emr dvSpos TodSe. SoPH. Antig. 1033. Cf. 1084. 
 
 Ye all, as archers at a mark, 
 Are shooting at this heart. 
 
 Tt p.OL rdv 8v(r<f)6p(t)v icftUt ; SoPH. Elect. 141. 
 Why art thou aiming at the insupportable ? 
 (jitX-qs yap Trpo^evov KaT-qwcrav. SoPH. Elect. 1451. 
 They met with a kind hostess. 
 
 (TTpaTos Kvp-qa-ei voa-rifiov (riorrjpias. AeSCH. Fers. 793. 
 The host shall meet with returning deliverance [i.e. a safe 
 return). 
 
 Ohs. iTnrvyxo-vdi, Trpocrrvyx^^^} l^ ^^^"^ across^ fall in with 
 one, take a Dative. 
 
 B. Examples : — 
 
 A^.jS. — XapL^dvcD, Kparco take an Accusative of the per- 
 son or thing seized, and a Genitive of the thing seized. 
 
 TOV \VK0V TWV COT(DV KpaTCO. 
 
 I get hold of the wolf by the ears. 
 So dyecv ^etpo?, to lead by the hand. 
 
 eXafSov rrjs ((ovrjs Tov'Opovrrjv. XeN. An. i. 6. 10. 
 I%ey seized Orontes by his girdle. 
 
THE CASES. 
 
 C. Examples : — 
 
 Kvpo'!; ^px^ '^^^ \oyov (oBe. Xen. 
 
 Cyrus began the conversation as follows (i.e. was the 
 
 first to speak). 
 ^evocpcov Tov \oyov rjpx^ro w8e. Xen. 
 Xenophon hegan his speech as follows. 
 
 N.B. — apx^i'V y^oycov, to he the first to speak; apx^o-^a,'' 
 Xoycou, to begin one's speech. 
 
 aTTOireipco/jLevo^; tj/mcov eypa-^jrco ttjv ypa(j>r]v ravrrjv. 
 
 Plat. 
 Tou were making trial of me when you brought this 
 indictment. 
 
 D. Examples : — 
 
 l3povTrj<; aKovaa<; fJbrjSafJLoo^; iroppw (pvyrj^. Philemon. 
 When you hear thunder by no means run aivay. 
 
 TL Brjra Kkdei<^ ; KpofjL/jbvcov oacfypaivo/JLaL Ak. 
 Why are you iveeping then ? I smell onions. 
 So 6<T<j>palv€cr6ai, rr}? rvpavviBo^i. Ae. Lys. 619. 
 
 ^vdv<s 8e Setcras kp.irvpoiV eyevop-qv. SoPH. Ant. 1065. 
 Straightway in terror I made trial of burnt-sacrifice. 
 
 OTTOt av eXdoDj XeyovTOS kpov aKpoacrovTai ot vkoi. 
 
 Plat. Ap. xxvii. 
 Wherever I go young men will listen to my words. 
 
 Note. With aKpocofxai cf. the use of aTroSexopat (/ accept from, 
 approve): pi] ravra diroSex^a-de 'Ayvpdrov (Lys. 13. 83), do not 
 accept this statement from (a Genitive of Separation) Agyratus. 
 So (XTroSexecr^at tivos AeyovTOs. diroXavui rtvos {I enjoys literally 
 and figuratively). 
 
 ofo), / smell of. 
 
 aSrat pkv o^bvcr' dpfSpo(ria<s Kal veKrapos. Ar. Ack. 196. 
 
 These smell of ambrosia and nectar. 
 
 Verbs of perception also mean to hear from, as well as to hear. 
 rotavTa tov Tvapovro^ 4'kAvov. SoPH. £Jl. 424. 
 Thus much was I heading from one who was present. 
 
GENITIVE OF CONNEXION. 89 
 
 See Ai. 318. So— 
 
 ■ el^kvai aov TT/owrtCTTa XPVC^' SoPH. El. 668. 
 Fain would I first and foremost know from thee. 
 So with a sentence : — 
 
 rovTOiv aKov€ ri Xkyov(TLV. 
 
 Hear from these men what they say. 
 
 But more usually a preposition (irapd, irpos, e^) is added. 
 
 E. Examples : — 
 
 avdpco7ro<; oiv fiefjuvrjao Trj<; /coLvrj<; tv')(7)<^. MenAND. 
 Being a man, rememher the co7nmon lot. 
 6Xt,<yov efiavTov eireKaOofJUT^v. PlaT. 
 / almost forgot myself {who I was). 
 ovK rjaOavovTO Trpoaiourcov rcov iroXefjuKOV. Xen. 
 They were not aware of the a'pproach of the enemy. 
 eirvOovTO Trjf; IlvXov KaTeCkT^fjuixevrj^, ThuC. 
 They heard of the capture of Pylos, 
 
 P. Examples: — 
 
 rl r)/jblv rrj^ rcov iroWcov Bo^rj<; pueXeL ; Plat. 
 
 What care we for the opinion of the world ? 
 
 irecdco vfjba^ pLTjre acopLarcov eTrifieXelcrOac purjre '^prjpua- 
 
 Tcov. Plat. 
 I try to persuade you to care neither for the body nor 
 for money. 
 
 Tretvw xprjpLaTOiv, kiratvov, XeN. aya^wv, PlAT. 
 I hunger after (i.e. long for) money, praise, good things. 
 So ht^pCi, Plat. Rep. 562 c. 
 
 Tov Oavarov Kai, klvSvvov coXcycoprjae. Plat, 
 
 He disregarded death and danger. 
 
 Note 1. peXcL and p^rap^kXa take a genitive of thing, and 
 dative of person. 
 
 /xeAct poi rovrov. 
 
 I care for this, hoc mihi curae est. 
 
 /xera/xeAet /xot tovtov. 
 
 I repent of this ; huius rei me 
 
90 THE CASES. 
 
 Note 2. Adjectives with these significations are found with 
 the Genitive : — 
 
 Ihpav TravTos cvdyrj (rrparov. AeSCH. Fers. 465. 
 A throne in full view of all the armada. 
 
 €7rrj/3oXo<s (fipeviov. SoPH. Antig. 492. 
 Possessed of reaso7i (compos mentis). 
 
 Note 3. In the following examples observe the various 
 meanings of e'xo/xai : — 
 
 Ta>v 'Evvea oBcov eKparrjaav. 
 
 They obtained possession of the Nine Roads. Thug. 
 
 T'^S fxkv yvw/xry?, w 'AOrjvaiOi, del Trj<s avT7]<s e'xo/xat. ThUC. 
 / hold, Athenians, to tlie same unchanged opinion ever. 
 
 eTTOvrai e^o/Aevot twi/ dpfidrcDV. XeN. 
 They follow, coming next to the chariots. 
 
 6 TrAryyeis det t^§ TrXr]yr]s ^x<ETat. DeM. Phil. 1, 10. 
 The boxer who lias been struck ever follows the blow. 
 
 TrdvTes KOLvfj rrj<s croyrrjpias ex^a-Oe. XeN. Anab. vi. 3. 17. 
 All together provide for your safety. 
 
 With e'xo/xat compare the parallel meanings of dpLi. t^'Js 
 avTTys yvMfxrj^ elvai, ThuC. V. 46. rdv avrtav Aoycov elvai, PlAT. 
 Gorg. 489 (to keep to the same tale). 
 
 § 98. SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. 
 
 o ^0^0'^ Tcjp TToXefilcov. 
 The fear of the enemy. 
 
 This Genitive of Connexion is naturally ambiguous. 
 It may mean either (1) the fear which the enemy feels. 
 Here rwv TroXe/jilcov is Subjective, being equivalent to the 
 subject of the verb, and the sentence = ol irdXe^Lov <f>o- 
 Povvrat (jJyLta?) : or (2) the fear (which we feel) of or for 
 the enemy. Here tc3z^ irokejjbiwv is Objective, being equi- 
 valent to the object of a transitive verb, rjixeh (potSorj/jbeOa 
 TOV<; 7ro\€/JLcov<;. 
 
GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 91 
 
 ot avOpioTTOL 5ta to avroiv (Subjective Gen.) 8io<s rov Oavd- 
 Tov KaraxpevSovTaL, PlAT. Phaed. 85 ( = ai;TOt SeSiores 
 Tov Bdvarov). y 
 
 Men, hy reason of their fear^ of death, tell lies. 
 
 8ta T-qv rov dvcfjLov (Subjective) aTrwo-iv twi/ vavayiwv (Ob- 
 jective). Thuc. vii. 34. 
 In consequence of the wind driving tJie wrecks into the open sea. 
 
 The Objective Genitive represents usually an object in the 
 Accusative or Genitive after a verb, more rarely a Dative. 
 Ace. Sta Uava-avLov fxicros, ThUC. i. 96. irodos rov aTro- 
 
 OavovTOS' 
 Gen. liriOvixla yji-qixaTiav, iTTifxeXeia twv Trpay/xdrcdV. 
 Dat. €fMfJioi/r] rov KaKOv, PlAT. Gorg. 479. Cf. iixfieveiv T^ Ka/co). 
 Trarpos npnapos KapLov TaXaivT]s, SoPH. Elect. 811. 
 
 The following may be regarded as free uses of the Objective 
 Genitive : — XvpLrj j3iov, Soph. Elect. 1195, outrage on life / Svcr- 
 pb€v(ov $7] pa, Soph. Ai. 564, hunting the foe. So 7r€ipa k^dpOiv, 
 Soph. Ai. 2, an atterajpt on, or against, one's enemies ; to twv Mc- 
 yapkoiv xp-qcfao-pia, Thuc. i. 140, decree against the Megarians 
 (where the preposition irepi would have been more usual.) 
 
 § 99. GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 
 
 The Genitive denotes the time within which anything 
 takes place. The Genitive is the whole, the time is 
 either indefinite, or recurring, vvkto^, hy night; r^? 
 r][jbepa<iy hy day ; rov avrov depov^, during the same sum- 
 mer ; rov XoiiTov, for the future ; eKciarov erov<i, each 
 year ; rpl<; rov evtavrov, thrice in the year. 
 
 N.B. — With the Article the Genitive is distributive. 
 
 ScoKparr}<; to avro l/jbarcov '^pLCptearo 6epov<} re Kav 
 
 'X^eipLcovo';. Xen. 
 Socrates tvore the same mantle summer and winter. 
 
 SpaxfJ'W eXdfjL^ave rrj<; rjfiepa^ (or r^? r)/j>epa<; 
 
 eKa(Trr}i). 
 He used to receive a drachma a day {each da,y). 
 
92 THE CASES. 
 
 Note 1 . Trys avTTjS rjfjiepas or nj avrfj rifJ^cpa (often with small 
 difference, MadvIG) ; tov avrov dcpovs and Iv r^ avrc^ depet 
 (Thuc. iv. 133); tov Xolttov or to Xonvov^ for the future. 
 
 So aXXrj<5 r)fi€pa<s, SoPH. El. 690, on another day : ov fxaKpov 
 Xpovov, Soph. El. 478, within no long while : tov Xolttov xp^vov, 
 Soph. El. 817, for the future: aKpas wktos, Soph. Ai. 285, at 
 dead midnight: rrjs Trdpocdev evcf)p6vr]s, Aesch. Pers. 182, 
 during the past night. 
 
 Note 2. The Genitive also denotes the space within which 
 anything takes place (a very rare and poetical, chiefly an 
 Epic, usage). 
 
 "^fxcpcvovTas ^evovs 
 fxaKpas KcXevOov. AesCH. Ch. 705. 
 
 Guests who have been spending the day 
 On a long journey. 
 
 Cf. the Homeric TreSiOio tevat, TrpT^o-o-etv, etc. 
 
 Note 3. The ordinary prose Genitive of place is either the 
 possessive, or the (so-called) partitive Genitive. Observe that 
 it takes the Article : — 
 
 ia-TpoLTeva-au t^s 'ApKaSias Is JJappacrLov<;. ThUC. V. 33. 
 They marched against the Farrhasians in Arcadia. 
 
 Note 4. To the genitive of place, however, belong certain 
 prose usages. 
 
 eTrera^vyov r^s 68ov tovs crxoXaiTepov 7rpo(rLovTa<5. 
 
 Thug. iv. 47. 
 They were hastening on the way those who zuere advan/^ing 
 slowly. 
 
 €iropevovTO tov Trpocrii). Xen. An. v. 4. 30. 
 They were marching onwards^ forwards. 
 
 Cf. irpoKOTTTeiv Trjs OLpxrjs, ThUC. iv. 60. VTrdyeiv ttJs oSov, 
 etc. irpoXap^pdveiv t^s (l>vy7J<s, ThUC. iv. 33. 
 
 § 100. GENITIVE OF VALUE. 
 
 The Genitive of Value goes with Verbs of Estimating, 
 Buying, and Selling (cf. Genitive of Amount). 
 
GENITIVE OF VALUE. 93 
 
 Value or Estimate : aftw, judge worthy ; Taa-a-u), rate or 
 
 value; rt/xw, value, assess {rifxtofxat). 
 Buy: TrpLa/xai, I buy ; Uivovfxai,' I buy. 
 Sell : TTcoAw, I offer for sale; dTroSiSoixaiy I sell. 
 
 Bo^a ')(^p7]fjbaT(ov ovK covrjrr}. ISAEUS. 
 Reputation is not to be purchased with mon^y. 
 
 OVK av aTreBo/jLTjv 'ttoWov ra? eXTrlBa^;. Plat. 
 / would not have sold my hopes for mioch. 
 
 Ti/juarac jjlol 6 avrjp davarov. Plat. 
 My accuser proposes death as my penalty. 
 
 Xpv(ra )(aXK€L(ov Sta/xet^eo-^at voets. Pl. Symp. 218 C. 
 You are intending to exchange golden for copper. 
 
 Note. Verbs of buying more rarely, and only in poetry, 
 take a dative of the price paid. See EuR. Hel. 885, Med. 233. 
 
 Free use of the Genitive of Value. 
 
 Tts fMera/SaXoLr' (uSe o-cyav Xoyayv. SoPH. El. 1262. 
 
 (Of. Aesch. F. V. 987.) 
 Who would change thus silence foi' words .? 
 
 avT L(Tr aO ixov rov 6r]pos Kop-qv. SOPH. El. 571. 
 A daughter weighed in the balance against a wild beast. 
 Kairoi TaXdvTov ravr'' €/xa^ev'Y7re/)^oAo9. AriST. Nub. 876. 
 And yet Hyperbolus was taught this for a talent. 
 
 iCTTL p.OL 6vydr7]p ydfiov wpaia. XeN. Cyr. iv. 6, 9. 
 / have a daughter ripe for marriage. 
 
 Under the Genitive of Value may come the Adjectives with 
 their Adverbs : — d^ios, ava^tos. 
 
 § lOI. CAUSAL GENITIVE. 
 
 The Causal Genitive (so called) goes with verbs (and 
 other words) denoting emotion. It is probably a Geni- 
 tive of Connexion or Eelation, meaning with regard to, 
 in connexion with. 
 
94 THE CASES. 
 
 Oavixd^oi^ I wonder at or admire; evSaiixovL^o), I congratu- 
 late; oiKTeipd), I pity ; opyt^o/xai, I am angry; cfiOovc^, I envy 
 or grudge ; irjXw, I envy (in good sense) or praise; /AaKa/otfw, 
 I felicitate ; aya/xat, / wonder at, admire. 
 
 ^rjko) ae rod vov, Trj<; Be BecXta^; aTvyco. SoPH. 
 I praise thee for thy wit, hut for thy cowardice Iloathe 
 thee. 
 
 evBatfjLOVi^co ae rod rpoirov. Plat. 
 I congratulate you on your disposition. 
 
 <f>€V, Trj<s dvoias w? cr' iTroiKTetpo) Trdkai. SOPH. El. 920. 
 Fie ! how I have been pitying thee this long while far thy 
 folly. 
 
 (t^s dvoias may go with </)ei;.) 
 
 Opdxrovs TouS' ovK dXv^ei's. SoPH. El. 627. 
 For this daring thou shall not escape. 
 
 €L7r€p TL KXdeis Tiov 'O/JCCTTetwv KaK(x)V. Soph. El. 1117. 
 
 If thou hast a tear for the woes of Orestes. 
 
 Note 1. A similar Genitive is used in exclamations : — 
 
 cfiev rov avSpo?, woe for, or, Jie on the man ! S> Zev fSaa-LXev 
 Tijs XeTTTOT-qros Twi/ <f)peviov, Ar. Nuh. 153, Eoyal Zeus! what 
 subtlety of wit ! ot/xot t'^s ''"^X'?^) ^ fxaKaptov ttjs cf^va-ews, etc., 
 a-yerXia roXjxrjs, EUR. Al. 741. w raXatv' iyo) crWev, SOPH. 
 El. 1210, ah, woe is me on thy account. w/xot yeAwros, Soph. 
 Ai. 367, ah me for the mockery. Curtius compares des Leides. 
 
 Note 2. Tov, with the Infinitive, denoting the Aim or Purpose 
 of an action (Final), seems to be a Causal Genitive. 
 
 Mtvcos TO XycTTLKov €K TYjS 6aXd(T(Trj<s rov rots 7rpo(r68ovs 
 
 fxaXXov livat avT(p. ThuC. i. 4. 
 Minos used to sweep piracy from the sea for the sake of his 
 
 revenues coming in to him. 
 
 Cf. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 40; Soph. Phil. 197. This construction 
 occurs frequently in late Greek (LXX. and N. T.) 
 
GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS. 95 
 
 § 102. GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF JUDICIAL 
 PROCEEDINGS.^ 
 
 The Genitive is used with Verbs (and words) meaning : 
 
 A. To accuse : atnw/xat, StwKO), Karrjyopo), <f)€vy(i) (/ am pro- 
 
 secuted) ; 6 (fiivyoiv, the defendant ; 6 StwKwv, the 
 prosecutor. 
 
 So also TrpoKaXovfiai, kirk^eLfxi. 
 
 B. To acquit : a^tr;/xt, / acquit ; a7ro<^evya>, / am acquitted. 
 
 \j. To condemn : alpio^ I convict; KaraKpivo), KaTaytyi/wcrKW, 
 KaTaxfrjcfiL^OfxaL [blj vote)^ I condemn ; (xAiO-KO/xat, / 
 am convicted ; 6<j)XL(rKdv(j)j I am cast in or lose 
 my suit. 
 
 Slcokco fiev KaTTjyopia^, <f>6vov he (pevyco. Lys. 
 / am prosecuting for libel, hut am prosecuted for 
 murder. 
 
 7ravT€<; K\o7rrj<; rj Bcopcov eaXcocrav (or ct)(p\ov). 
 
 All ivere convicted of theft or hrihery. 
 
 So aktovau XiTrora^iov, yjrevBofiapTVpiayv, to be convicted 
 of desertion, perjury, passim. 
 
 (Tvyyiyvwa-Koo tlvl Trj<; €7n6vp.La<;. PlaT. 
 I pardo7i any one his desire. 
 
 ypa(f)6cr6ac riva irapavop^cov. 
 
 To indict a person for proposing unconstitutional 
 
 measures. 
 
 In the passive : — 
 
 ra fiov rpevSrj Kar'qyopiqp.kva. Pl. Apol. ii. 
 
 The false accusations which have been brought against me. 
 
 Note. The case in which the person or thing is put varies 
 greatly. The charge is generally in the Genitive, the accused 
 
 1 According to Curtius, a Genitive of Cause : perhaps a Genitive of 
 Connexion. 
 
96 THE CASES. 
 
 in the Accusative : e.g. Slmku) tlvo, <f)6vov. But with soma- 
 verbs it is the reverse : KarrjyopC) ri nvos, /carayiyi/wo-Kw 
 (KaraKptvo)) cj)6vov arov. Other verbs take a dative of the per- 
 son, kTna-KrjiTTO [xai crot <^6vov, ey/caAw cf)6vov (Tol. The suit or 
 sentence is in the Accusative, (ftevyo) Slktjv, Slkol^o) <j6^<^icr/xa, 
 "^voxos Tov cfiovov Tots eTTLTLULOLs, Uoble (o tJic penciUies for 
 murder. 
 
 § 103. GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 The Genitive of a noun with a participle, not con- 
 nected with the main construction of the sentence, denotes 
 time^ cause, condition, etc. 
 
 6eov hi^ovTO'^ ovSev co-'^vet ^Oovo^;, 
 
 Kol fjbTj BlBovto(; ovBev layyei 7rdvo<;. Menander. 
 
 If God should grant, ill-will availeth naught ; 
 Nor, if he grant not, toil availeth aught. 
 
 ovTO^ '^IrevSov; eaTLV airarr]. Plat. 
 Where is falsehood there is deceit. 
 
 The participle alone is sometimes found : — 
 
 cfTTOt/, e/3WTi^(ravTos (sc. avrov) on MdKp(i)ve<s elcriv. 
 
 Xen. An. iv. 8. 5. 
 
 They said, on his asking them, that they were Macrones. 
 
 So €^ayyeXOevTo<s, on its being announced; vovto<s, ivhile it 
 was raining ; a-va-KOTa^ovTos., when it was growing dark; reXov- 
 fi€vi»v eiTToi/x' av, SoPH. El. 1334, when the end is come I will 
 tell thee. See Participle (Genitive Absolute). ^ 
 
 ^ It is difl&cult to decide whether this usage belongs to the Genitive 
 or comes from the lost Ablative. A comparison with Latin seems to 
 favour the latter view. On the other hand, German uses the genitive 
 Absolute (see Curtius, Elucidations 197, note). In old English the 
 Dative was thus used. Each language seems to have proceeded inde- 
 pendently in its own way. 
 
GENITIVE OF COMPARISON. c^-j 
 
 § 104. GENITIVE WITH COMPARATIVES. 
 
 The Genitive is joined to ComJ)aratives. 
 
 E.g. fiei^cov tov dB6X<j)ov, i.e. fiet^cov rj 6 a8eX<^09. 
 
 TTovTjpla dcLTTov davuTov del. Plat. 
 
 Wickedness runs more siviftly than death {flees faster 
 than fate). 
 
 Note 1. The Greek Comparative, like the Latin, often 
 is rendered into English, " too great," " too good," etc. 
 K/)£iTTOi/ rjv Aoyov TO KaAXos T^s yvvaiKos. 
 
 Xen. Mem. iii. 11. 1. 
 TJie beauty of the woraan was too great for description (lit. 
 greater than ivords). 
 
 Note 2. Adjectives in -TrXao-tos, -a-ro^ take the same con- 
 struction as Comparatives. 
 
 €K <^€tSa)Xtas KarkdeTO fxtcro<; SiTrXdanov ttJs ovarias. 
 
 In consequence of stinginess he incurred a hatred double (that 
 
 of) his property. 
 TToXXoa-Tov fiepos ^v to, \pripiaTa wi/ t^/zet? TrpocreSoKaTe. 
 
 Lys. 19. 39. 
 His property vms a very little part of what you were expecting. 
 
 Sevre/aos, second (ovScvos) to none; vcrrepo?, later than; erepos^ 
 other than ; 8i.d(jiopos, different from or excelling, similarly take a 
 Genitive ; so vcrrc/oatos, TrpoTcpaLos. 
 
 § 105. THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS CON- 
 TAINING A COMPARATIVE NOTION^ 
 
 The Genitive is used with many Verbs which imply 
 better than, worse than ; greater than, less than. 
 
 Such verbs are : — Kparo) (J prevail over), irepi^^i^voyLai, 
 irapLeipiL, virepexf^ (^^ superior to), Bcacpepo), hLa(f>€p6vT(D<; 
 Ip^o) {excel, diff'er from), vcKcojjLai, rjTTodpLat {am conquered 
 by, inferior to). 
 
 ^ The Genitive used with Comparatives may be an Ablative use (cf. 
 Latin), or it may denote a general connexion, "greater in regard to." 
 
 G 
 
98 THE CASES. 
 
 Verbs of ruling :—'^you fiat, (also with dative), apxcy> 
 Tvpavveuco, TVpavvw, (rrpaTrjyco. 
 
 Many others : — irXeoveKTWy fiecoveKTco, v(rT€pa>, varep- 
 1^0), eXaTTco, ekarTovfiai, Xecirofiai,. 
 
 Many take a dative (tlvl) in respect of which the 
 superiority or inferiority is shown. 
 
 MB. — BLa(j>6pofjbai, I quarrel withy takes a dative. 
 
 €p(o<; Tcov Oecov ^aaikevei. Plat. 
 Love is king of the gods. 
 
 TOVTO BLa<l>ep(o rwv iroXkwv. Plat. 
 In this respect I differ from (or excel) the rest of 
 mankind. 
 
 yvvaiKO'i ovSa/JLco^ r)(T<r7}Tea. SoPH. 
 We must in nowise yield unto a woman. 
 
 yXcoaarjf; ixuXLcrra TravTw^ov Treipoo Kparelv. MenaND. 
 
 Strive ever chief est to control thy tongue. 
 
 ap'^ovTL TTpoanqKei KapTepia t(dv iBlcotcov irepielvaL. 
 
 Xen. 
 A commander should in endurance surpass private 
 men. 
 
 § I06. GENITIVE OF SEPARATION.^ 
 
 A Genitive denoting that from which anything is 
 separated is used with many verbs expressing removal, 
 distance, separation, loosing, delivering, and the like. 
 
 1 The Genitive here is the representative of the Ablative. It is im- 
 possible to group the usages of the Genitive under two distinct headings 
 (1) Genitive or Connexion, (2) Ablative or Separation. Many Ablative 
 or Separative uses have already been noticed (e.g'. Partitive afiiroxos, 
 Connexion afxaprdvu)). Any attempt at too rigid symmetry would 
 violently put asunder usages which are closely connected. See Intro- 
 ductory Note. 
 
GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 99 
 
 Such verbs are — Stex^, / am 'Instant ; x^P^C^t I separate ; 
 (Xdip^Cofiai), etpyo), I exclude ; arexw (^X*^)? I withhold; crrcpi- 
 (TKOfxaL, I am deprived of; cXevdepio, I set free ; ^tAw, / strip ; 
 d<f>t(rTrjfxL (with its intransitive tenses), I cause to revolt; Travw, 
 I make to cease (from); Travo/xai, Xrjyta, I cease; aTraXAao-o-w, / 
 deliver from ; dTraWaara-ofiai, I escape ; itKco, Trapax(t)p(ii, lyield ; 
 ^eiSo/xat, / spare. 
 
 7] vrjao'; ov iroXv Bte^ei, T179 rjireLpov. Thuc. 
 ITie island is not far distant from the mainland. 
 
 'EWtjvlkov TToXe/JLOV e(T')(pv oc 'AdrjvatoL. 
 The Athenians desisted from the Greek war. 
 
 ^rjTeLTe avTwv vvvt aTraWayrjvaL Plat. 
 Tou are seeking nxfw to be set free from them. 
 
 fi€ra ravTa ^vvel^-q Oacriovs twv 'Adrjvaiiov aTrocTTrjvaL. 
 
 Thuc. i. 100. 
 After this it happened that the Thasians revolted from the 
 Athenians. 
 
 Orjcrcvs Ttts 'A^ijvas Setvov Trpoarrdy pharos T^XevOepcacrev. 
 
 ISAE. 10. 28. 
 Theseus delivered Athens fro-m a terrible tax. 
 
 eiirov TU) Ilavcravt^ tou KijpvKos p-rj XeiireorOaL. 
 
 Thuc. i. 131. 
 They told Pausanias not to leave the herald (see Soph. El. 4:79). 
 
 Similarly with nouns, Trava-Trjp rwi/Se (ttovojv), Soph. El. 384; 
 XvTrjpia (fiOvoVf El. 447. 
 
 Many Adjectives may be brought under this head, as 
 yv/j>vo<;, >|ri\o9, Ka6apo<;, op(f)avo<;, eXevOepc^ : and all 
 words compounded with a privative, d/jbvrjfzcov, dfieXrlf;, 
 apLoipo<;, ayevaro^;. Most of these have already been 
 brought under other rules. 
 
 7) eTTidvfiLa dfivrj/jLcov twv klvBupcov. Antiph. 
 Desire is forgetful of dangers. 
 
 ev^^rjf; BiKaia<; ov/c avT}Koo<; 6eo^. MenaND. 
 God is not deaf unto a righteous prayer. 
 
[oo THE CASES. 
 
 § 107. Genitive with Compound Verbs.^ 
 
 The Genitive is used with many Verbs compounded with 
 Prepositions, especially aTrd, e^, tt/oo, virkp^ Kara. Sometimes 
 the Preposition seems to demand the Genitive, sometimes the 
 signification of the Compound Verb. 
 
 Such verbs are drroTpeTro), cK/^ati/w, e^LcrrrjjJiL, Trpo/cet/xat, Trpo- 
 ridkvai^ TTpOTifJiio, virepopCi (also with Accus.), virepaXyOt, Kara- 
 ycAw, Karacf)povio, KarayLyviocrKOi^ and many others. 
 
 TTpoa-T^vai, Tvx^5, SoPH. Ai 803 ; mrepta-Taa-dai (as, in whose 
 defence), Soph. El. 188. 
 
 § 108. A Double Genitive. 
 
 Sometimes there are two Genitives in the same sentence. 
 In such cases the first generally refers to the agent, the 
 second to the object of his action. 
 
 Ttts Twv oiKctcov 7rpo7rr]XaKL(TeL<s rod yi^pdis. PlAT. Bep. 329. 
 The insults by relations on old age. 
 
 6ta TO avTiov Seos rov davdrov. PlAT. Phaed. 85 A. 
 In conseqitence of their fear of death. 
 avTwv Subjective, Oavdrov Objective. 
 
 TO kAcivov 'EAAaSo? 
 TTpoa-xW aywvos. SoPH. El. 682. 
 The glorious pageant of Greece, consisting in a contest. 
 
 Here the Genitives are freer ; *EAAaSos is possessive, dyiavo<i 
 epexegetical. 
 
 § 109. The Epexegetical Genitive. 
 
 What is called the Epexegetical {i.e. explanatory) Genitive 
 is a free application of the Genitive of Material. 
 
 dfiadia avrr] ^ €7rov€tStcrTos 17 tou ouddai elSevai a ovk otiSc. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xvii. 
 This culpable ignorance of (which consists in) thinking one 
 knows what one does not knxm. 
 
 1 Some freer and miscellaneous uses of the Genitive are added. They 
 have been brought together at the end of this Section in order not to 
 lengthen previous headings with notes on less common constructions. 
 
GENITIVE OF THE AGENT. 
 
 6 8e €yK€(f>aX6<s icrriv, 6 ras ato-^T^crets Trapk-^^iav rov aKovnv 
 KOL op^v KOI 6(r<f>paiv€(Tdai. Pl. Fhaed. xlv. 
 
 It is the brain which furnishes the sensations of hearing, and 
 sight, and smell. C ^^^ 
 
 § 110. Genitive of the Agent (so-called). 
 
 In Poetry passive Verbs and passive Verbals sometimes 
 take a Genitive which practically is like an Agent, and which 
 in Prose would be expressed by a Preposition with vtto, or 
 some such construction. It is not possible to refer these 
 constructions to one explanation. Many look like a Genitive 
 of the source whence, like the old English "of" (i.e. off) with 
 the Agent (aTro, ab). In some cases it is possible that the 
 governing word is used like a Substantive on which the 
 Genitive depends. 
 
 airavra yap crot ra/xot vov9 eTrj/JiaTa 
 K€LVYJ<S SlSaKTO,. SOPH. El. 344. 
 
 For all these thy admonishings of me are taught by her (come 
 from her). 
 So TrXrjyels Bvyarpos Trjs cfJLrjs. EUR. Or. 497 (cf, Electr. 123). 
 Smitten by my daughter. 
 ovT(i)<s ari/xos clfii rov redvrjKOTos ; 
 
 aTLfios ov8€vos o-v. Soph. El. 1214:. 
 
 = dTLfxd^oiJLai Trpos tov reOvrjKoroS' 
 
 The connexion of arifios with words of value may influence 
 the constmction. 
 
 And am I thus dishonoured of the dead (i.e. by the dead) t 
 Thou art by none dishonmired. 
 0. T. 1437 Trposrjyopos, and cf. Ai. 807, <^a>Tos '^QTrarrjfievrj. 
 
 §111. Free use of the Genitive of Connexion. 
 
 "^ l^kpKvpa T^s 'IraAias koX StKeAias KaAws irapdirXov Kcirat. 
 
 Thuc. i. 36. 
 
 Corcyra is Ml situated for a coasting voyage to Italy and- 
 Sicily. 
 
 frapdirXov is a Genitive of Connexion, 'IraAtas a sort of 
 Objective Genitive. 
 
 Tt Se LTnrdiv otei 17 rwi' aXXtav ^(ixnv ; Pl. Bej). 459 (cf. 470). 
 WTiat do you think about horses or other animals 1 
 
I02 THE CASES. 
 
 In Plato a Genitive thus introducing a Subject is often 
 thus introduced at the beginning of a sentence ; see Kiddell, 
 Digest f p. 126. 
 
 rv(f>Xov Tov fiiWovTOS avdpiDTros. PlAT. SoL 12. 
 
 Man is blind concerning the future. 
 
 d)S €t Tts avTiov cXttlo-lv K€vaU 7rdpo<s 
 e^ripcT dvSpos rovSe k.t.A.. SoPH. JEl 1460. 
 That if any of them hitherto were buoyed up tvith hopes con- 
 cerning (centred in) this man, etc. 
 
 TOV KacriyvqTOv ri <f>yj^ ; SoPH. El. 317. 
 JFhat say'st thou of (about) thy brother ? 
 
 Cf. Antig. 11 ; fxvOos «^4A.(i>v, news of friends; cf. Antig. 633, 
 1182, 0. a 317. 
 
 a Se /xeyto-r' e^Aao-re vofxifxa, twvSc <j>€po/x€vav 
 apia-ra. SoPH. El. 1095. 
 
 But as to the mightiest of ordinances that exist, in respect of 
 these, prospering right nobly. 
 
 T'^S fir^rpos T^KO) rrjs efxrj<s <f)pdor(av iv oTi vvv Icttiv. 
 
 Soph. Tr. 1122. 
 J am here to tell thee of my mother, what her present plight. 
 
 ovSa/xws €fiavTrj<s ovcr^ dSet/xavTOS (j>iXoL. AeSCH. Pers. 164. 
 Being by no means without fear far (concerning) myself, my 
 
 The a privative in dSetfiavro^s does not here take a genitive 
 of want or separation (like TreTrAcov dfxotpos, without a share of 
 robes). But by a loose analogy common in all language, it 
 may help to account for the use of the genitive. 
 
 §112. The Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs. 
 
 Partitive, fxhoxos, dfiho^os : la-6p.oLpos, dfiotpos, dKXrjpoq, 
 
 ayevcTTOS. 
 
 Perception, (dKovio) : KariyKoos, vti^koos, IttiJkoos, (rvvTjKOOs, 
 
 dvqKoos : VTTT^KOov SiL elvat tcHv yov€(ov. 
 
 Plat. Bep. 463. 
 These are also found with the Dative. 
 
 Trj TToXec Kar-qKooi iyevovro. PlAT. Bep. 499. 
 They became obedient to the state. 
 
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND AD VERBS. 103 
 
 Caring for^ 
 neglecting, 
 remembering, 
 for getting, Qtc, 
 
 eTTtfxeXrjs, dfX€\y]<s: fiv^/xoiv^ dfivqfioiv, ^inX'qa-fJUOv. 
 (fnkoixadrjs, fond of learning ; oxj/iixad-qs, late in 
 learning (serus studiorum). 
 
 Experienced in, efxTreipos, aireipos : eTncrr-qjjLwv, Tpi/3(av (versed in). 
 
 8txr€/3ws (perdite amans), love-sick for ; Itttj^oAos 
 (compos), possessed of, or having succeeded in 
 gaining. 
 
 MecTOS, 7rA,€<os, TrXrjprj^ : irXova-ios, airX-qa-Tos. 
 
 irev'q's, Kevos, evSerjs, ^inScrjs, cXXi-n-qs, yvfivos, 
 rpiXos, Kadapos. 
 
 €pr}fios, o/)0avos, eXevOcpos, ayvo? (pure from), 
 <}>€i8(aX6<s (sparing of). 
 
 TipLLos, d^tos, (oi/?^Tos (purchaseable) : wpalos, 
 ripe for (Xen. Cyr. iv. 6. 9). 
 
 lyKpaT-qs, aKpari/js, OLKpariap : Kvpios, avTOKpdroip. 
 
 dXXoS, dXXotOS, €T€pOS, 5ta^O/)09, 8La(f)€p6vT(i)S. 
 
 pecros (e.g. €vo<s Kal irX-qOovs to oXtyov pkaov, 
 Plat. Politicus, 303, a), kvdvri6<s tlvos, the 
 reverse of a thing ; €vdvTi6<s tlvl, opposed to a 
 thing. 
 
 Aiming at, 
 
 Plenty, 
 Want, 
 
 Separation, 
 
 Value, 
 
 Comparative 
 notion : — - 
 Better, stronger 
 than, and the 
 
 reverse. 
 Different from., 
 
 Connexion vTrevOwos (responsible for a thing, but vttcvOwos 
 generally, some tlvl, responsible to a person) ; vttotcA^s (<f>6pov, 
 objective, liable to pay a tribute); kirUovpos, assisting 
 
 or serviceable against (e.g. \pvxpvs, cold) ; 
 Tv<^Aos (rov pkXXovTos, blind with regard to the 
 future) ; a-vyyviopotv (dpapTrjpdriov, forgiving 
 of wrongs) ; KaKovpyo<s (eavrov), inflicting 
 wrongs on ; <j>LX68(opos (fond of giving). 
 
 Ending in -k6s, irpaKTLKos, TrapacrKCvaa-rLKos, SiSaa-KaXiKos, Troptcr- 
 
 TLKOS, K(i)XvTLk6s (tTJS dp€T1]S). 
 
 All words com- dirad-js, aSwpos, dvrJKOOS, dOkaTOS, dyvpvaxTTOS, 
 pounded with da-Kcvos (unfurnished) ; arcA^js (immunis) ; 
 a privative. art/xos, etc. etc. 
 
 Others have been given under previous Rules. 
 
I04 THE CASES. 
 
 § 113. Free use of the Genitive with Substantives. 
 
 A few instances are given to show how the Genitive lends 
 itself to the loosest connexion. Some may be regarded as 
 free Objective Genitives, some as Genitives of Separation, 
 others can only be regarded as Genitives of Connexion. 
 
 TTpog^oAij 2tK€A.ias, Thuc. iv. 1, means of approaching Sicily, 
 road to Sicily ; ZikoX ttoAAwi/ raXcivTwi/, a lawsuit involving many 
 talents (cf. Genitive of amount) ; Kpdros twv SpiDfievwv, SoPH. 
 EL 85, victory in our enterprise; Trarpos Xovrpd, Soph. El. 84, 
 libations in memory of a father ; apyj^ts irTjfxdrtov, Soph. El. 875, 
 help in or against troubles (cf. eTrUovpos) ; -n-arpos rifiuypos, Soph. 
 El. 811, an avenger whom a father has (Subjective), an avenger 
 of a father (Objective) ; ai twv KaKiov o-vvova-tai, intercourse with 
 had men (freely Objective) ; ^i^ ttoAitwi/, in spite of citizens 
 (freely Objective) ; aTroa-raa-ts rdv 'AOrjvaiiov, revolt from the 
 Athenians (separation) ; Xvoris davdrov, deliverance from death 
 (separation); yOds /xv^wv, SoPH. El. 372, schooled to words, 
 accustomed to (cf. iTrKrT-qfxtov, etc.); ijo-vxta k^Opiav^ rest from 
 enemies (freely Separative) ; dcj)opp.r] epyiov, Xen. Mem. ii. 7. 11, 
 means of setting about, or stimulus to, deeds. 
 
 THE DATIVE CASE. 
 Preliminary Note on the Dative. 
 
 § 114* The Dative denotes generally the person or thing 
 more remotely connected with the action than is the Accusa- 
 tive. It thus denotes that to which the direct object is made 
 over or transferred (Dative of the Eemoter Object) after verbs 
 and adjectives which seem necessarily to require such a case 
 in order to complete the information they have to give {e.g. 
 BlS(i)/xl paa-dov — t$ a-TpaTnaTy. By a natural extension the 
 Dative also denotes the person or thing, affected beneficially 
 or injuriously, interested in the action (Dative of Interest), 
 and can be added at pleasure to any verb whose meaning does 
 not necessarily demand it {e.g. ot Kaipoi irpoilvraL rrj ttoAci, our 
 opportunities have been let slip, to the injury of the state). The 
 Dative of Interest includes the Dative of the Possessor, and 
 the Ethic Dative. Next to the Dative of Interest, as akin to 
 it in sense, although probably the use of the case has been 
 
DATIVE OF COMMUNITY. 105 
 
 transferred from the old Instrumental, may be placed the 
 Dative expressing Contact with or Community, one of the most 
 important and extensive rules belonging to the case. Further, 
 the Dative has inherited the meanings of two lost cases, first 
 the Instrumental, including not only the Instrument and 
 Means, but also the Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, and 
 the accompanying Circumstances ; secondly, the Locative in its 
 double reference to Place and Time. The Dative of Place, 
 however, is used as a rule only in Poetry ; in Prose, to express 
 motion to, not the Dative, but a preposition with the Accusa- 
 tive, is required. 
 
 § 115. THE DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT 
 TO WHOM ANYTHING IS SAID, DONE, 
 OR GIVEN 
 
 17 fjLwpla BiBcocnv avOpoairoi^ KaKa, MenANDER. 
 Folly hringeth troubles on men. 
 
 T) yeyevTjfjLevT] fJ'axV "^^ ^aaiXel dyyeXkerai, Xen. 
 The battle which had taken place is reported to the 
 king. 
 
 BlBoyai fjiio-dov rw arpaTevfiari. Xen. 
 He gives pay to the army. 
 
 With a substantive — 
 
 fXTj €^afxdpTy]T€ ircpl rrjv tov GeoO 86(riv vixtv. Pl. Apol. xviii. 
 Lest you commit some great error in regard to the gift of the 
 god to you. 
 
 § 116. Miscellaneous examples showing certain verbs 
 which in Greek take a Dative of the Remoter Object. 
 
 oXiyapxCa riov kiv8vv(ov rots 7roAA.ors ixeTaSiSaxri. 
 
 Thuc. vi. 39. 
 Oligarchy gives a share of its dangers to the many. 
 
 SiavefJLiu ^prifxara tois TroXirais. 
 
 I distribute money among the citizens. 
 
 5taAAao-(ret TlcpBLKKav to?? ^ Kdr]vatot<s. Cf. ThUC. ii. 95. 
 He reconciles Perdiccas unth (to) the Athenians. 
 
io6 THE CASES. 
 
 I bring a lawsuit (accusation) against Demosthenes. 
 Demostheni litem intendo. 
 
 Ax^povTi vvix(fi€V(r(a. SoPH. Ai. 816. 
 I shall marry Acheron. (Cf. nuho in Latin.) 
 (TV 8' etK^ dvdyKy kol Oeolcri firj jxd^ov. EtJRIP. Tel. Frag. 
 Yield thou to necessity, and war not with the gods. 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 718. 
 
 €iK€iv Tivt Tijs oSov. Herod. ii. 80. 
 To get out of the way for anybody (or to yield the way 
 to anybody). 
 
 § 117. THE DATIVE OF INTEREST, INCLUDING 
 THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR, 
 ETHIC DATIVE, etc. 
 
 The Dative of Interest denotes the person or thing 
 interested in the action (Dativus cominodi et incom- 
 modi). 
 
 TTOb^ av7]p avTW iTovel, SoPH. 
 Every man labours for himself, 
 
 flKTO) aO^LOTTJV 0(TTL<i OV^ aVTM CTO^O?. MENANDER. 
 
 / hate a wise man who is not wise for himself. 
 
 KaipoL Trpoeivrat ttj TrdAet. DeM. 19. 8. 
 
 Opportunities have been sacrificed, to the injury of the state. 
 
 Good instances occur in Soph. Elect. Q^ (^x^poLs), 496 (^fttv), 
 979 (exOpoLs), Antig. 618 (eiSort), Dem. 18. 205 (t^ Trarpi), 
 
 § 118. Free Use of the Dative of Interest. 
 
 KairoL <T eyo) 'rifirjaa rots <}>povov(rLV ev. 
 
 Soph. Ant. 904 (cf. 25). 
 And yet I did honour thee in the judgment of the right-minded. 
 (TX^Sov Tt /xwpw fnopiav ocfiXurKdvo). SOPH. Ant. 470. 
 Belike I incur the charge of folly in the eyes of a fool. 
 
DATIVE OF INTEREST. 107 
 
 €X€t TcAos ^. Aesch. p. r. 12. 
 
 For you (i.e. 50 /ar as you are concerned) the hest of Zeus 
 hath ending here. 
 
 ovSev elfu kol rkOvrfy^ vfiiv TraAat. SoPH. Phil. 1030. 
 Naught am I, dead to you long since. 
 (i.e. you thought me dead.) 
 
 VTroXafi^dveiv Set t^ tolovtc^ on €VT^6r)s ecrrt. PlAT. 
 
 We must assume in the case of such a person that he is simple. 
 
 XayxoivcL Tov KX'qpov rrj yvvaiKi. ISAEUS, 3. 32. 
 He claims the inheritance in behalf of the woman. 
 The usual construction would be virep r^s ywaiKos. 
 
 (rT€cf)avov(r6ai, t^ Oe^. XeN. Ages. U. 15. 
 To he crowned in honour of the god. 
 
 So K€Lp€(r9ai o-oi, to be shorn in honour of thee, EURIP. 
 Hip. 1425. 
 
 Note. Several idioms with participles should be noticed : 
 
 T^ TrX'qOcL Tiov nAarataJy ov /SoyXofxevi^ -^v riov 'Adrjvamv 
 d<f>L(rTacrdai. ThUC. ii. 3. 
 
 The Plataean democracy did not wish to revolt from the 
 Athenians. 
 
 Cf. Tag. Agr. 18, quibus volentibus bellum erat. 
 
 rjfxcpai fidXta-Ta ^(rav rrj MiTvX'qvy eaAwKvt^ ore, k.t.X. 
 
 Thug. iii. 29. 
 Seven days had passed since the capture of Mitylene when, etc. 
 See Temporal Sentences, § 211. 
 
 Tcp fiev e^oiOev d7rrofX€V(Ji crt3/>ta ovk dyav Oep/xov ^v. 
 
 Thug. ii. 49. 
 
 To the outward touch the body was not very hot. 
 
 'ETTtSa/Avos €(rTt TToAts €V Sc^t^ i(rTrX€ovTL TOV 'loviov KoXirov. 
 
 Thug. i. 24. 
 
 Epidamnus is a town on your right as you enter the Ionic Gulf. 
 
 So a-vveXovTL {(Twr^ixvovTi) ciVetv, or simply (tvv^Xovtl, to 
 speak shortly, concisely, in brief, in short. 
 
io8 THE CASES. 
 
 § 119. THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR. 
 Especially with €t/-t/, ^l^voybai, vTrdp')((o. 
 
 VTje^ ovK eicrlv rjfilv. 
 
 We have no ships. 
 
 aWoL<; iiev ')(^p7]fiaTa earc TroWa, rjfuv Be ^Vfjufia-^OL 
 ayaOoL. ThuC. 
 
 Some have plenty of money, hut we have good allies. 
 
 ovSev kjxoi Koi ^t\i7nr(^. 
 
 Philip and I have nothing to do with each other. 
 
 Ti €fiol Kal (TOL ; 
 
 What have I to do with thee ? What have we in common i 
 
 § 120. THE ETHIC DATIVE, DENOTING THE 
 PERSON WHOSE FEELINGS SYMPATHISE 
 WITH THE A CTION. 
 
 o) TeKVov, 77 ffe^rjKev tj/mv 6 f 6I/09 ; SoPH. 
 My child, say (tell me), is the stranger departed ? 
 
 fi€fivrj(T6€ fJLOi fJLrj OopvPeiv. PlAT. Apol. XV. 
 
 BememheTf I pray you, not to interrupt. 
 
 TTWS ^fxiv e^cis ; 
 
 How are you ? 
 
 iyo) crtcoTTw r^Se ; Ar. Batr. 456. 
 
 WTiat, I hold my tongue at this fellow's bidding ? 
 So, elliptically — 
 
 firj fioi fivpiovs ^evovs. DeM. iv. 19. 
 
 Talk not to me often thousand mercenaries. 
 Sometimes a mere interjection expresses the Ethic dative, 
 e.g. Soph. Elect. 272, rip.Lv, fie onH! 
 
 THE DATIVE OF COMMUNITY OR CONTACT 
 WITH. 
 
 § 121. The Dative of Community or Contact with is 
 words (Verbs, Adjectives, and Adverbs) which denote 
 likeness or unliheness ; agreement or disagreement ; meeting, 
 encountering, following. 
 
DATIVE OF COMMUNITY. 109 
 
 A. With Verbs. 
 
 KaKoi^ ofuXcov Kavro^ eK^rjorr} KaKo<;. Menand. 
 
 If thou associate with the had, thyself too wilt turn 
 out bad. 
 
 OeS ixa')(ea6av heivov eo-n Kal Tv^r). MenaND. 
 'Tis terrible to fight with God and Fortune. 
 
 ovK €(f>r] Ttt epya tols Aoyots 6f*oX.oy€iv. ThUC. V. 55. 
 
 He said that their deeds did not correspond with their words. 
 
 OVK alcr^pov kcnX rots Trovrjpocs Suacficpea-Oai. 
 
 Xen. Mem. ii. 9. 8. 
 It is not wrong to quarrel with (differ from) bad men. 
 Contrast the use of 8ia(j>€po) with a Genitive. 
 
 hvx^ov TTpoaeXOwv KaXXCa,. Plat. j4p. iv. (cf. xviii., €v- 
 
 Tvyxdvto). 
 I chanced to meet Callias. 
 So TrpocTvy^ydvia, €VTvy^ai/(u, aTravrw, irpoaKpovia^ tivl. 
 
 T$ ^AXklPiolS-q Ttv€s cs Xoyovs -^XOov. Thuc. viii. 48. 
 Certain persons had a conference with AlciUades. 
 So SiaXeyofjiai tivl. 
 
 /3ovX€<rd(i) eveXTTis o/xoa-e )(^ii)prj(rai rots ivavriOL<s. 
 
 Thuc. iv. 10. 
 
 Let him with good heart resolve to close with the foe. 
 Cf. fxd)(OfiaLj TroXefXb) tivl. 
 
 Xpr) cTTCcr^at to) vo/*y. ThUC. ii. 35. 
 
 One must follow the custom. 
 
 B. With Adjectives. 
 
 o aya6o<; rat ayaOa> (f)l\o<;. Plat. 
 The good ma'^ is dear to the good man. 
 
 T0t9 Tvpavvoi*; ael BLacl)opol eafiev. Thuc. 
 We are ever hostile to tyrants. 
 
 avOpaMTOLf; pXa^epov pukv "^^evhof;, ^7]<Tifio<; B ae 
 aXrideia. 
 
 To men falsehood is injurious, truth is ever useful. 
 
no THE CASES. 
 
 Note 1. Constructions of o avros, idem: — 
 
 a. Tovro ravTov ( = to avTo) kcrriv €K€ivii). 
 This is the same as that. 
 
 Hoc idem est quod illud. 
 
 TO. avTO. (jipovia ArjuocrdeveL (really = ols (ppovet A.) 
 
 Dem. 18. 30. 
 / hold the sam£ opinions as Demosthenes. 
 
 b. TavTOi 7rao-X€ts aTrep Kal eyw. 
 You experience the same as I do. 
 
 This is a very common construction of 6 avros in Demosthenes. 
 €i Tis SiurxvpL^OLTO T(^ avT(^ Xoyoi uxnrep (tv. 
 
 Plat. Phaedr. xxxvi. 
 If any one were to affirm positively {with) the same statement 
 as you {that you make). 
 
 C. HovSlvoi §€ ov Ty avrfj yXiocrcry )(fi€(0VTai Koi TeXcovoi. 
 
 Herod, iv. 109. 
 
 The Budini do not use the same speech as the Geloni. 
 Cf. idem atque {ac) in Latin. This is not so common a con- 
 struction in Attic. 
 
 Brachylogy is very frequent in the construction of o avrds. 
 
 (oTttv) €icrtS(o 8' ecrO'qfxaTa 
 
 (f)OpOVVT' €K€tVOi TaVTOL {=a7r€p Kal €K€lVO? C(f>€p€). 
 
 Soph. Elect. 269. 
 Whenever I behold him wearing the self-same robes as my 
 dead father {as those of my father). 
 
 Note 2. L(To<s, TrapairX'qa-Los, o/xoios have the same construc- 
 tions as 6 avTos. 
 
 ov Kal (TV TVTTTCt TttS tcras TrAryytts efiOL ; Ar. Ban. 636. 
 Shan't you be beaten with the same number of blows as I? 
 
 § 122. DATIVE OF THE INSTRUMENT, 
 
 INCLUDING MEANS, AGENT, CAUSE, 
 
 MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE. 
 
 The Dative in expressing these meanings has inherited the 
 work of the lost iiistrumental case. 
 
 A. Instrument or Means. 
 ')(pr](TTO<; irovrjpoli; ov TcrpcoaKeTaL \6yoL<;. MenAND. 
 A good man is not wounded by had words. 
 
DA TIVE OF THE A GENT. 1 1 1 
 
 e^aXkov avTov; Xt^ot? re /cat To^eufiacrc kcu clkov- 
 
 tIoi<;. Thug. 
 They were attacking them with stones, and arrows, and 
 
 javelins. 
 
 eaff 0T(p av t,hoL^ ^ 6(j>6aXfio2^ ; Plat. 
 
 Is there anything you would see with hut eyes ? 
 
 Hate. xpCifxai, I use (and sometimes vofii^ta in the same sense) 
 takes this dative. (Cf. ufm- in Latin.) 
 
 XpiofJ'Oii' dpyvpttj), ^Ll3Xiois<) etc. 
 I use silver, books, etc. 
 
 lit. / get service done (with), or, / employ myself {with). 
 
 aySxTi Koi OiXTiaLS vopLL^ofiev. ThUC. ii. 38. 
 
 We use festivals and sacrifices. 
 
 Cf. dfiet/Soiv /?a<^>J, a dat. of instrument, Aesch. Pers. 319. 
 Pi<}, by force (per vim); dvdyKr), do., are instrumental datives. 
 
 B. Agent (cf. viro with Gen.). 
 
 The Dative denoting the Agent is used in Prose chiefly with 
 the perfect and pluperfect passive. In Homer the same case 
 may refer both to things (Instrument) and persons (Agent). 
 (Compare II. iii. 428 with 436, and see Peile, Primer of 
 Philology.) In Attic, however, the so-called Dative of the 
 Agent oftener appears to be a Dative of Interest. 
 
 ravra dTTOTereXea-Tai. crot. XeN. 
 
 Those things have been finished by you (ifor you). 
 
 cttciSt) TrapecTKevacTTO KopcvdiOLS. ThUC. 
 
 When preparations had been made by the Corinthians {1 for). 
 
 Cf. Thug. iii. 64 CEXXtjo-l). Eur. Eec. 1085 (a-ot) : Dem. 844 
 1. (tovt^). 
 
 rjcrcrdcrOaL, vcKoia-Oat tlvi, to be beaten by any one, are used as 
 well as rjcrcrdcrdaL, VLKoicrOai Tii/09, or vtto tivo<s. 
 
 Verbals in -Teo<; regularly take a Dative of the Agent 
 (see Participles). 
 
112 THE CASES. 
 
 C. Cause. (This may, in some cases, be a Dative of 
 Circumstance.) 
 
 evirpaylai^ ovk e^u^pi^ofjuev. Thuc. 
 We do not break out into insolence in consequence of 
 prosperity. 
 
 OVK elfju TOis 7r€7rpayfJL€VOL<s 
 
 Sva-evfjios. Soph. EL 549. 
 
 I am not despondent because of what has Jmppened. 
 Cf. Thuc. i. 95, exe^i. 
 
 So <^tXt^, through friendship ; €vvol<^, through goodwill (volun- 
 tate) ; ayi^ot^, through ignorance ; tw ixio-clv, through hatred (Dem. 
 45. 30) ; and c^wret, naturally. 
 
 avOpiDTTOs <f)V(T€i ttoXltikov ^wov. AriST. Eth. 
 Man is by nature a creature adapted to social life. 
 
 The Dative of Cause is joined to many verbs express- 
 ing Emotion (ax^o/xat, / am vexed ; xaXiiraivio, I am vexed ; 
 d^v/1,0), / am despondent ; yj^ofiai, I am pleased; ayaAAo/iat, 1 
 exult ; €7raipofiaL, I am elated ; ala-xvvoixai, I am ashamed (also 
 with Accus.), (TTepyu), ayaTTw, I am content). Cf. ctti with the 
 Dative after such verbs. 
 
 ^609 €pjoL<; rot? StKaioLf; rjSerai. Philemon. 
 God is pleased with righteous deeds. 
 
 Ava-avBpo^ /3ayO€a)9 €<j)€p6 rrj arLfiia. Xen. 
 Ly Sander was offended at the affront. 
 
 TOis crots a^co-t Ka0vj3pi^(i)v. SoPH. Ai. 153. 
 Mocking at thy woes. 
 
 k'Traipop.ivos y] ttAovt^ rf lcr\vL rj aAA^ toJ toiovto). 
 
 Plat. Bep. iv. 434. 
 Elated either by wealth or strength, or some other such ad 
 vantage. 
 
 So xaAcTTws (t)€p€Lv. Both phrasBs also take the Accus. (EuR. 
 Med. 1018). 
 
DA TIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE. 1 1 3 
 
 D. Measure of Difference, especially with Comparatives. 
 
 eT6po<; erepov KecfiaXrj fjuet^cov eart. Plat. 
 One man is taller than another hy a head (i.e. is a 
 head taller). 
 
 8€Ka eT€0"6 Tvpo TYJ<5 €V ^aXafMLVi vavfJ,a\La<s, etc. 
 
 Plat. Leg. 698. 
 Ten years before the sea-fight at Salamis {before by ten years). 
 
 TocrovTio 't]8iov ^w 00-^ fiaXXov KCKT-qtiai. Xen. Cyr. viii. 3. 40. 
 / live the more pleasantly the more I possess, i.e. by so much 
 the more pleasantly. 
 
 So iro\\(Z, oXiyo), P'^xp^, paKpto (pct^ov, fikXriov^ etc.). A 
 neuter accusative is also used with comparatives, especially 
 TToXv, oXiyov, Qv8kv, prjSkv (^ttov, poiXXov, etc.). See Com- 
 parative and Superlative. 
 
 § 123. TffE DATIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE. 
 
 The Dative expresses the accompanying circumstances. 
 
 The Dative has taken on the meaning of the lost Sociative 
 or Comitative Instrumental Case. 
 
 In mentioning details of military or naval forces this Dative 
 is constantly used ; e.g. etKoo-t vavcri, ttoAAw crraT^vpaTi, 
 o-ToA(p, etc. 
 
 €(j)o^ovvTO pLT) pLel^ovL TTapaaKevj} eireXOayaiv. Thuc. 
 They were afraid that they luoidd come against thein 
 with a greater force. 
 
 oi ^AOrjvaloL dreXei ry vUrj dvecrrrjaav. TlIUC. 
 
 The Athenians retired with the victory incomplete. 
 
 KaKouTiv ocTTt? prjSev e^aXXda-arerai. SoPH. Ai. 474. 
 
 Whoso hnoweth no change in respect of ills. 
 
 €KTos €^ AtrwAtas 
 ^avOaiCTL 7r(oXoL<s. SoPH. El. 705 (see 1343). 
 
 A sixth out of Aetol'm 
 with bright bay mares. 
 Cf. Soph. Antig. 589 (7rj/oa?s). 
 
 H 
 
114 THE CASES. 
 
 Note 1. The preposition which would be used in such a 
 construction, and which is sometimes used, is avv. 
 
 e.g. eVAeov ^vv iravrl tw err par ^vfiaTi. ThUC. vi. 62. 
 
 Note 2. Many adverbial Datives are thus used : 8p6/x(^^ at 
 full speed ; kvkXo), round about ; (nyfj, silently ; tovtm tw t/dotto), 
 in this way, thus ; Brj/jLoarL^, publicly ; ISia, privately; 7re^>y, on 
 foot ; ravTy, thus ; y, in which way ; to) ovrt, in reality. 
 
 fierd with Genitive, a-vv with Dative, or adverbs proper, are 
 synonymous expressions : e.g. orvv Slkyj^ fxera. SUris, SiKaiois 
 (for the Dative of Circumstance). 
 
 In Soph. Ai 767, deot^^crvv Oeots, deo favente. 
 
 In Pl. Apol. XV. ev Tw emdoTi rpoTroy, in my usual way. 
 
 Note 3. The use of avros with the Dative of Circumstance 
 is specially to be noticed. 
 
 fxiav vavv 'iXafSov at'rots dv8pdcrL. ThUO. 
 
 They captured one ship, with the men themselves (crew and all). 
 
 aVTOLS TTOt/AVtWl/ CTTtCTTaTatS. SoPH. Ai. 27. 
 
 Together ivith the masters of the flocks. 
 Cf. Eur. Bacch. 946, 1134. 
 a-vv and a/xa are rarely used. 
 
 etTTCTO Tw Aoxayw ^vv avT(^ t^ OwpaKL Kal rfj kottlSl. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 9. 
 He was following the captain with breastplate and v:ith bill. 
 
 So a/xa, Soph. Antig. 115. 
 
 § 124. DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 
 
 The Dative, as representing the defunct Locative, denotes 
 Time when and Place where. 
 
 A. Time. The Dative denotes a definite point of time 
 when something occurs, in certain phrases without the 
 Preposition ev. 
 
 It is used chiefly of day, night, month, year, and 
 festivals. 
 
 T^Se TTj r]fjL6pa:= (rr]fjb€pov, T7]pbepov, on this day, to-day. 
 
 rrjhe rfj vvktl airidavev, he died to-night. 
 
DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 115 
 
 TTj TTporepala, the day before. (So rf) va-repala, 
 irporepa, Bevrepa.) 
 
 ol ev IOco/jLT} rerapra) erei ^vve^rjo-av. Thuc. 
 ' The (Helots) in Ithome surrendered in the fourth year. 
 
 T/)ayw8ots Katvot?, Dem. 243. 17, at the representation of the 
 neiv tragedies; aOXoia-i HvOlkolo-l, at the Pythian games, Soph. 
 El. 49. So QeafJLOcfiopLOLSj tols 'Eittlvlklol^, Alovvct L0L9, Ilava- 
 drjvaiois, etc. 
 
 So in reckonings of the month : evy Kal vect, on the last day 
 of the month (see Lexicon) ; BoT^Spo/xtwvos fxrjvos reTapTy 
 tcTTa/xevoi', on the fourth day of the first decade of Boedromion. 
 
 A prose instance of this Dative of Time occurs in IsocR. 
 Evag. QQ. 
 
 TtVa evp-qcroixev twv rots TpwtKois xpovois y€vofx€vo)v ; 
 Whom shall we find of those who were horn in the Trojan age ? 
 
 A poetical one in Soph. El. 193. 
 oiKTpa fX€v vocTTOLs av8d. 
 A voice of woe on the return. 
 
 Note. As a rule ev is added with other expressions, though 
 sometimes it is omitted. Sometimes kv is found with the 
 above expressions, except in names of festivals. 'Ev is more 
 likely to be omitted when an adjective is used, e.g. ev wkti, 
 but /xt^t vvKTi. In Thucydides ev is sometimes omitted where 
 we should have expected it, e.g. iKecvrj rfj ia-poXfj^ Thug. ii. 
 20, in this invasion. So ry irporepa Tra/aovcri^, ThuC. i. 128, 
 during his first stay ; ry irpoTkpq. (eKKkya-iijf), Thuc. i. 44, at the 
 former meeting of the assembly. 
 
 XpovM, in time, or at last; Kauptp, in season, =€? Kaipov, (ev 
 Katpw is extremely rare) ; x^''H'^^^'^ ^P^ without ev ; ol ev w/D^t, 
 men in the prime of life. 
 
 B. Place. This use of the Dative without the Pre- 
 position ev is poetical. 
 
 ert /xeya? ovpavi^ Zevs. SoPH. El. 174. 
 
 Still is Zeus great in heaven. 
 
ii6 THE CASES. 
 
 Prose writers, however, use this case with names of towns. 
 
 Ma/oa^wvt /cat 2aAa/>ttn koX IIAarat'afc?. PlAT. 
 
 At Marathon, and Salamis, and Plataeae. 
 N.B. — lAapadOivi and 'ZaXafiivi are real Locatives. 
 So 'Kdr)vr](TL, Qi^^rjCTL, 'OkvfXTrLaGrL, IIAaTatacrt. 
 
 Veritable Locatives are otKot, at home (domi) ; x^H-^-h ^^ ^^^ 
 ground (humi) ; aypoio-t, in the country (ruri) ; Ovpaa-t, at the 
 door (foris) ; HvOot, at Pytho ; 'la-OfMOL, at the Isthmus. 
 
 These are all, except aypoLcn, used in Prose. In Prose 
 aypois. 
 
 § 125. Lists of Words which take a Dative. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 1. Verbs of telling, promising, advising. 
 
 <t>Wh say. irapaiv^, ^ ) advise. 
 
 Aeyw, tell. arvfJi/^ovXevo}, ) 
 
 d-yyeAAw, report. v7ro/3d\\a}, dictate. 
 
 [XYfvvio, inform. viroTtOefxaL, suggest. 
 
 vTTKTyyov pLai, proraise. 
 
 They take an Accusative of the nearer object, e.g. Tavrd o-ot 
 TrapatvCj, I give you this advice. 
 
 Obs. KcAevo) ore Uvai, I bid you go, Accus. and Inlin. 
 
 2. Verbs of obeying, trusting, and the contrary. 
 Tretdo/jiai, be persuaded by, com- avrtcrTw, disbelieve. 
 
 ply. vTraKovo), serve (and genitive). 
 
 TTtxrrevoi, trust (also intrust), Xarpevo), serve (Oeols). 
 
 olttclOo), disobey. 
 
 Obs. TTcidov fjLOL, be persuaded by me, hearken to me ; ttlOov fxoi, 
 obey me. 
 
 3. Verbs of helping and hindering. 
 
 oLfx-vvix) (in Act.), \ v7rr)p€T0), serve. 
 
 dprjyii) (poet), >help. yapi^ojxai, gratify. 
 
 pO',)dQ>,^ ) ejM7ro8i(ofxai, ) j^-^^^^ 
 
 hriKovpOf, help. €fX7ro8ct)v elvai, j 
 TLfiMpo) (in Act.), avenge. 
 
 For dfxvvoixai and TtfjLOjpovfxat see Middle Voice. 
 
WORDS WHICH TAKE A DA TIVE. 
 
 117 
 
 4. Verbs of heing angry with, blaming, threatening. 
 
 dyavaKTio, ] 7 
 
 „' n } vexed or v, 
 
 ipyL^ofiaL, angry. 
 XaAeTratvw, angry, annoyed. 
 eyKaAw, charge, accuse. 
 iin^pedlo}, threaten abusively, 01 
 treat clespitefully. 
 
 eTTLTLfjio}, censure, 
 XoiSopovfxai 
 fxe/j.(f)oixat, blame. 
 (f>Oov(o, envy. 
 
 /Sapeois (f)€poj (aegre, graviter, 
 XaAcTTws <^e/oa>, fero), / am 
 , annoyed, vexed. 
 
 N.B. — XoL^opd Act. takes the Accus. 
 
 Ixe/jLipofxaL TiVL, or Tt TiVL (jLva or TtVos), / complain of a 
 person or ' ' 
 
 XvcTLTeXet /xoL, it is profitable for 
 
 me. 
 ixkrecrri fxoi TOVTbiv, I have a 
 
 share of this. 
 jueAet /xot dpeTrjs, I cai'e for 
 
 virtue. 
 /xera/xeAet /xot tovtwv, / rej^ent 
 
 of this, jpoenitet me huius rei. 
 
 fjLicrcj, hate, takes the Accus. 
 
 5. The Impersonal Verbs. 
 SoKet fioL, mihi videtur. 
 (8oK0i fioi, mihi videor. ) 
 
 ov fjLOL 80KO), I think not. 
 TrpeTTCL fxoL, me decet. 
 Trpoa-qKei /jlol, it concerns me. 
 ovSev fjiOL TzpocrriKu, nihil ad me 
 
 attinet. 
 Sei /xot Ttvos, opus mihi est ali- 
 
 qua re, but 6et /xe kXdelv. 
 
 6. Likeness or unlikeness. 
 
 toLKa (impers. ioiKe), am like, 
 la-io, make equal. 
 o/i04(o, make like. 
 
 7. Agreement, disagreement. 
 
 dfx(f)L(rl3r}T0), dispute. 
 (XTrex^avo/xat, am odious to, 
 
 hated by. 
 evavTiOvfiat, oppose. 
 kivirWiixai, attack. 
 €pt((i), quarrel with. 
 
 (TvvaXXd(r(r<j) tovtov (tol, I re- 
 concile this man to or with you. 
 
 TToXefiio, at war with. 
 
 o-rao-i a^o), revolt, rebel, quarrel 
 
 (rv/x(f>o)vC), agree with (opp. to 
 a-vva.8o), agree ivith (opp. to 
 
 ofjLoXoyo), agree with, 
 ixdypiiai, fight. 
 
 Like TToAc/xw, Stot izoXkpov Ikvat Tivi, to be at war with one; 
 h x^^P^'^ eXdetv, or bixocrc yj^pdv rivi, to come to blows, close 
 quarters, ivith one. 
 
 djxffaa-jSrjTOi (tol rov ctltov, I dispute ivith you about the food. 
 
i8 
 
 THE CASES. 
 
 8. Meeting i following. 
 
 aKoXovOoj, I follow. 
 
 eVo/xafc, / follow (also o-i'V Tivfc, 
 
 and /xera nviov). 
 diravTO), meet with, come across. 
 €VTvyxoLy(^, fned with, come 
 
 across. 
 TTposrvyxoivo), meet with, come 
 
 across. 
 
 TTpocTKpoviD, kuock up against. 
 SiaXeyofxai, converse with. 
 ofxiXw, associate with. 
 TTpoa-eLfXL, ajpproach. 
 (TvveifxL, associate with. 
 kirkpxop'O.i, advance against. 
 Traparacra-oiiaL, stand beside 
 battle. 
 
 am friendly dis- 
 
 9. Many verbs compounded with Prepositions, especially 
 with eVt, 7r/5os, (Tvv, 7re/ot, chiefly denoting contact. Some have 
 already been given. 
 
 dvrexio, hold out against. 
 dfKJiLa-prjTio, dispute with. 
 
 (or Trpos 
 
 Ttra) or 
 SLaTidcfxaL or 
 Trpos<f>€pofJLaL 
 ifi/SaXXo), throw in. 
 i/xixevo), abide by. 
 ifiTTOLU), introduce, p'oduce. 
 €7rdyio, lead in. 
 iTTLCTTpaTevo), make war on,. 
 eTTLTaTTO), impose. 
 €7rL(f)€p(D, bring up or against. 
 TrpospdkXoi, put, apply to. 
 
 Trapa/SdXXo), set beside, compare 
 
 (also Ti Ttapd, or TTpos rt). 
 TraparaTTOfiaL, stand beside in 
 
 battle. 
 TrepidirTO), fasten round. 
 irepipdXXofxai, throw round, cir- 
 
 cumfundere, circumdare, 
 
 e.g. rfj vqcro) relxo^, or vrja-ov 
 
 reix'^i. 
 TrepiTidrjfjiL, place round. 
 TrepLTTLTTTO), fall rouud or on. 
 7rp6s€LixL, come before, e.g. tc^ 
 
 S^/itp, address the assembly. 
 (Tvyx'^'^p^i rejoice with. 
 (TvXXafxfSdvo) TLVL TIV09, (tl, 
 
 or €ts Tt) assist any one in 
 
 am 
 
 7rpos<p€p(j}, ) -^^ '^ 
 
 (TvvoiSa, am conscious; e/xavrw ^vv-qSciv ovSev kirKTrapikvi^ 
 (or €7rto-Ta/x€vos) / was conscious that I knetv nothing for certain. 
 
 Ph. Apol. 
 
 ^vvLo-ao-L MeXrJTip ^cvSo/xevy, they are aware that Meletus is 
 speaking falsely (i.e. they know as well as he knoivs). lb. 
 
WORDS WHICH TAKE A DATIVE. 
 
 119 
 
 §126. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 And their cognate Adverbs and Substantives, e.g. /3o7]66s, 
 /So-qdeta, TrpeiTov, 7r/)€7rovTco?. 
 
 Useful^ fit^ becoming, friendly, like, near, and their contraries. 
 
 dSeXcfios (and Gen.), akin or kolvos (and Gen.), common. 
 
 answering to. 
 aKoXovdos (and Gen.), follow- 
 
 ing after, agreeing with. 
 
 aAAoT/Dtos (and Gen.), foreign, 
 or different. 
 
 dvTio-Tpocfios (and Gen.), corre- 
 sponding. 
 
 6 avTos, the same. 
 
 Sia^o/oos (and Gen.), different. 
 
 '4fiiJLovo<s, abiding by. 
 
 €jxcf>vTos, imj)lam,ted. 
 
 iTTLT-qSeios, suitable. 
 
 eX^po5) hostile. 
 
 evvovs, well-disposed. 
 
 Sva-vovs, ill-disposed. 
 
 tStos (and Gen.), private, per- 
 sonal. 
 
 toros, e(^ 
 dvi(To<5, unequal. 
 IdoppoTTos (and Gen.), equally 
 matched. 
 
 ofxoios, nice. 
 
 dvofjLOios, unlike. 
 
 6fxc!}vviJ.o<s (and Gen.), called by 
 
 the same name. 
 irapairXricrtos, similar. 
 TTLcrvvos, relying on, fretus. 
 aTTtcTTog, not to be trusted, or 
 
 not trusting. 
 7rpos<f>iX.'qs, beloved. 
 TToAe/xios, hostile. 
 crvfjifxaxo's, in alliance, friendly. 
 crvp(f)opos, ) 
 o-vp,<j>€pov, j 
 d(rvfx(jiopos, inexpedient. 
 XaXeiros, difficidt, unfavourable, 
 
 iniquus. 
 
 XPWTo<s, J serviceable. 
 Xp-qa-Liios, j 
 
 O'XPW'^^'^) ( unserviceable. 
 axpeLos, j 
 
 Obs. Several take also a Genitive (especially those denoting 
 correspondency) sometimes with a slight difference of meaning, 
 for which the Lexicon should be consulted. Compare par, 
 proprius, similis, alienus, etc. in Latin. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 a/xa, generally temporal. Xoifios a/xa ttoAc/xo) 
 
 same time as war. 
 o/xou, local. v8(Dp ojxov Tw TTrjko), water and mud 
 
 €<ji€^7]^, TO. TOTJTois ctjbe^Ty?, wkat comcs next to this. 
 €yyvs, Dat and Gen. ; see Lexicon. 
 
 at the 
 r. 
 
CHAPTEE V. 
 § 127. COMPAEATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 The Comparative is followed by 
 
 A. A Genitive : — 
 
 vioL<i TO (TL'yav Kpelrrov ean tov XaXeov, MeNANDER. 
 Silence is tetter for young folk than speech. 
 
 B. By^:- 
 
 Kpelrrov (TLCCTrav eariv rj XaXelv /JLarrjv. Menander. 
 
 'Tis better to keep silence than talk idly. 
 
 Instead of rj the prepositions avri, irpo (with Genitive), or 
 irpos, irapd (with Accusative), sometimes. 
 dvTt, Soph. Antig. 182. 
 TT/oo, Plat. Crit 54, b. 
 TT/aos, ThuC. iii. 37. 1 ; -rrapa, ThuC. i. 23. 3. 
 
 TrAeov, e'AaTTov, /xetov, may omit the 17 (like plus, amplius, 
 minus, in Latin). 
 
 oLTrWavov oAtyw eAao-crovs irevr-qKOVTa. ThUC. i. 44. 5. 
 There fell rather less than fifty. 
 
 Instead of ttoAAw with a Comparative marking the measure 
 of difference, ttoAv may be used. Thus we may say ttoAAw 
 apLuvbiv or TToXv a/xetVwv, far, much better. 
 
 Note 1. The Comparative is constantly used, without the 
 other object compared, to denote a degree too high or too low, 
 a considerable degree or a degree greater or less than usual 
 {very, rather, someivhat) \ not seldom it is used as a matter of 
 idiom, where the Positive would be more natural. 
 
 k\B\ p.k\o% dypOLKorepov w? e/xe XaPovcra. ArIST. Ach. 675. 
 Hie thee (Muse), and bring to 7)ie a right rural melody 
 (dypoiKorepov, countrified). 
 
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 121 
 
 /xet^ocriv epyoi? €7rL)(€ipovvT€s ov jxtKpoiS KaKoi^ TrepiTnTnov- 
 
 crtv. Xen. Mem. iv. 2. 35. 
 By attempting tasks too great they encounter no slight troubles. 
 
 Tt veixirepov, S> 'ZioKpare'i, yeyovev ; PlAT. 
 TFliat new thing has happened, Socrates ? 
 
 ov xetpov iroXXoLKLs aKovetv. PlAT. Phaed. 105. 
 It is no had thing to hear often. 
 
 Note 2. To denote too high or too low a degree, r^ Kara is 
 used with the Accusative, or 17 w?, ^ lairre with the Infinitive. 
 (Cf. Latin, quam pro, quam ut, quam qui.) 
 
 elSe vcKpov fxei^o) rj Kar avOpwirov. PlAT. Mep. 360. 
 
 He saw a corpse of superhuman size. 
 
 01 'AOrjvaLOL ev StKeAta jxei^oi 7] Kara SaKpva eireirovOecrav. 
 
 Thuc. vii. 75. 
 
 The Athenians in Sicily had endured sufferings too great 
 for tears. 
 
 ipo^ovfxaL ii-q rt fxel^ov rj locrre (pepetv Svva(r6aL ^vfxfSrj. 
 
 Xe^. Ap. iii. 5. 17. 
 I fear that some evil, too great for us to be able to bear, may 
 happen. See EuR. Bacch. 840. 
 
 The Positive is sometimes so used with locne. 
 
 TO v^oip \pv^pov wcrre Xova-aaSai ecrriv. XeN. Ap. iii. 13. 3. 
 
 The tvater is too cold for bathing. 
 Cf. Thuc. ii. 61. 2; kyKaprepdv, without wo-re. 
 
 Note 3. fxaXXov r] (for which irXkov r/ may be substituted) 
 is used after a Comparative. 
 
 alp€T(i>T€pOV OLTTodviqcrKiLy fiaXXoV i] (fi€Vy€LV. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 51. 
 It is more desirable to die than to run away. 
 
 Seei TO irXeov r| ^tAt^ ThUC. iii 12. 
 Through fear more than friendship. 
 
 So with a Positive. 
 
 uivyijr) 'Ad-nvauiov ri Swa/xts fxaXXov r) otKcia. 
 
 Thuc. i. 121. 2. 
 
 The power of the Athenians is purchased rather than their own. 
 
122 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 Note 4. Two adjectives or adverbs compared with each 
 other may both be in Comparative. 
 
 Tr]V €lp-jvr]v avayKaiQTepav yj KaAAiw vrreXdixf^avov ^Ivai. 
 
 Aeschin. iii. 69. 
 
 They were regarding the ^eace as inevitable rather tha7i 
 honourable. 
 
 So (rvvToiic^repov rj a-a<^k(TT€pov, curtly rather than clearly. 
 
 Is. 6. 24. 
 
 tw a-TpaTrjyol TrAetove? rj ftcXrioves. AriST. Ach. 1078. 
 Ho ! GeneralSj more numerous than brave. 
 
 Cf. Latin — PauUi Aemilii contio fuit verior quam gratior 
 populo. Liv. xxii. 38. 
 The speech of Paullus Aemilius was more true tlmn 
 acceptable to the people. 
 
 Note 5. Both the Comparative and Superlative may be 
 used with a reflexive pronoun to denote a comparative or 
 superlative degree reached by the person himself within his 
 own experience. 
 
 TToXXiu \(dpov kavrOiv Xkyovcriv. AnTIPH. V. 7. 
 They speak much worse than they generally do {much heloiv 
 their real powers, or their average). 
 
 o^vrara avTOS avTov opa. PlAT. Leg. 715, <?. 
 His sight is at its keenest. 
 
 Note 6. The Superlative is used, where the Comparative 
 would logically be correct, to denote a supereminent degree 
 of superiority. 
 
 KaXXiCTTOv Twv Trporepov ^aos. SoPH. Ant. 100. 
 Light most glorious of all former lights. 
 Cf. Jntig. 1212; Fhiloct. 1171. 
 
 khkdvfV irapavofXMTara aTrdvTiov dvOpiorrtav. 
 
 Antiph. Herod. 17. 
 / was thrown into prison in a far more unconstitutional way 
 than ever man was. 
 
 Note 7. The Superlative is strengthened by ^, ttoXXm, 
 TToXv : — 
 
 /xeyto-Tos 8i}, quite the greatest; iroXXw, woXv dpca-Tos, far, 
 much the best. 
 
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 123 
 
 (OS, oTi, and olov strengthen the Superlative : — 
 (OS p^a-ra, as easily as possible (quam facillime); (os or 6tl 
 IxaXiCTTa, raxio-Ta (quam maxime, quam celerrime). 
 
 oTi iv PpaxordTw, in as short a time as possible. Thuc. iii. 46. 
 (OS YjSvvavTo dSrjXoTara, as secretly as they were able. 
 
 Thuc. vii. 50. 
 olov ddXLioraTQv, in as miserable a plight as possible. 
 
 Arist. Ach. 384. 
 
 Note 8. The phrase eh durjp with a Superlative denotes an 
 unique personal pre-eminence. 
 
 €tS dvYJp TrAetCTTOV TTOVOV 
 
 ex^pots TTapaa-x<^v. Aesch. Pers. 329. 
 
 Wreaking^ beyond all else, 
 Most mischief to his foes. 
 (Or, with his single arm, what one man might). 
 
 Cf. Soph. 0. T. 1380; Ai. 1340; Thuc. iii. 39. 
 
CHAPTEK VI. 
 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 § 128. THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 (1.) The Active Voice includes transitive and intransitive 
 verbs. On the other hand the Middle Voice includes deponent 
 verbs which are active and transitive, such as aiSov/xat tovs 
 ^eovs, / reverence the gods ; ot/xat, / think. 
 
 (2.) Some verbs are both transitive and intransitive. 
 
 eXavvG), I drive, and / ride (so. ap/xa, linrov). 
 e^o), I have, „ I am (with adverbs only). 
 
 irpdaacoy I do, „ I fare. 
 BrjXa), I show, „ I show myself, am moMifest (sc. 
 
 ejJLavTOv). 
 reXevTO), I end, „ I die (sc. ^lov). 
 
 So in English / turn, I join, I move, I change, etc. 
 
 Both transitive and intransitive tenses are found in the 
 same verb. 
 
 E.g. caTr)fjLi,, I set (tip) ; earrjKa, I stand. 
 So <f)vcD, ^alvo), and others. 
 
 (3.) Some simple verbs become intransitive when com- 
 pounded with a preposition. 
 
 C fjL€Ta/3aWci), 1 change. 
 ), I throw. ) ea^dWco, 1 1 rush in, 
 ( efx^aXkeL, ) (of rivers 
 
 , / cut. TTpOKOTTTCO, I mO 
 
 (bepcD, I hear. hia<hep(o, \ 
 
 ^dWo), I throw. I ea^dWco, ) 1 rush in, attack, or 
 
 (of rivers) floiv in. 
 
 KOTTTCi), I cut. TTpOKOTTTCO, I make progress. 
 
 differ from, am su- 
 
 nor to. 
 
 ^ f r J ( eWecTTco, 1 / fail ; 
 
 XecTTCD, Heave. { , ^ , h r j- S • ^ 
 ( €K\eLTT(o, J I die, faint. 
 
 124 
 
THE MIDDLE VOICE. 125 
 
 (4.) The Active is sometimes Causative, i.e. it means 
 " I get, or allow, a thing to be done," not " I do it myself." 
 
 o Kvpo<; KarcKavcre ra ^aatXeia. 
 
 Caries had the palace burnt dovjui. 
 
 So in Latin — 
 
 Verres ad palum alligavit piratas. 
 
 yerres had thepirates hound to a post. Cic. Ver. iv. 29. 
 
 § 129. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 In the Middle Voice the action of the verb refers in 
 some way or other to self. In some verbs, however, the 
 notion of self is so much lost that the Middle differs from 
 the i\.ctive only in giving a different meaning to the verb. 
 
 The chief uses of the Middle Voice are — 
 
 A. Eeflexive,! ; *^^ ..^^^^ *!^i 
 
 ' ( (2.) Indirectly. 
 
 B. Causative. 
 
 C. Reciprocal. 
 
 D. The notion of self is so blurred or lost that the 
 
 Middle must be regarded as giving a new and 
 different meaning to the Active ; in some cases 
 there is no Active. 
 
 Note. The Aorist Middle is never passive. 
 
 The Future Middle is — 
 
 (1) sometimes apparently passive, but really middle, e.g. Xeixp- 
 
 ofxai, I will not leave (a-ov) ; Aet^^^Jo-o/xac, / sJmll be left ; 
 V] dpxq KaraXva-eTai, tvill fall to pieces; KaTaXvOrjcreTaL, be 
 destroyed. 
 
 (2) really passive with certain verbs : TL/Mrjo-ofxai, I shall be 
 
 honoured ; orTvyr^a-oiiaL, I shall be hated ; StSd^ofxaL, I shall 
 be taught ; o-TcpTJo-o/xat, / shall be bereft ; (rj/xLc^a-ofMai, I slmll 
 be fined ; wc^eAiJoro/xat, I shall be helped ; dSLKrja-ofxaL, I sJiall 
 be wronged. 
 In these cases the Future passive is rarely or never used. 
 
126 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 > rr^-. -^ n ' ^ir-ini fl- Directlv Rcflexwe. 
 A. The Reflexive Middle. < ^ t j- ^i t, ^ • 
 
 '' (2. Indirectly Reflexive. 
 
 (1.) The Directly Reflexive Middle. Self is the direct 
 object or accusative. 
 
 \ov(o, I wash. Xovofiai, I wash w.yself. 
 
 Tpe'TTQ), I turn (trans.). rpeirofMai, I turn (intrans.), i.e. 
 
 / ti07m myself. 
 
 B7)Xa), I show. BrjXovfjbai,, I show myself. 
 
 The Middle is very rarely used in this way. It is 
 more usual to employ the Active with a Eeflexive Pro- 
 noun : — 
 
 E.g., / hire out myself, fjno-Bw e/juavrdv, not iJnaOoviiaL, 
 which means / hire for myself : so aireKreLveu eavjov, not 
 aireKTeLvaro : eiraivelf; aeavrov, not eiraivel. 
 
 (2.) The Indirectly Reflexive Middle. Self is the Dative 
 of the Indirect Object, or of Interest. 
 
 Tropica), I jprovide. Tropl^ofiai (o'jrXa), I provide for 
 
 myself. 
 aTTOTidrj/jLL, I put off or aTTOTtOe/xai (top vo/jlov),I piot away 
 away. from myself, i.e. disregard. 
 
 aTTOTiOe/jLaL paOv/xiav, I put aivay 
 from myself, i.e. / overcome, lazy 
 habits. 
 airoTiOefiai Tpocj^rjv, I put away 
 for myself, i.e. hoa^^d or store 
 food. 
 Xovco, I wash. Xovofiac ra l/jbaria, I wash rfiy own 
 
 clothes (i.Q. for myself my clothes). 
 irapi')((id, I offer or pre- irape'^o/jiaL (BaTrdvrjp), I furnish 
 sent. my own expenses, from my own 
 
 resources ; /jbciprvpa, I bring for- 
 ward a witness for myself, my 
 oivn witness, in my support. 
 
THE MIDDLE VOICE. 127 
 
 The chief notions are — (1.) for self. 
 (2.) from self. 
 (3.) ivJiat belongs to self. 
 But the notion of for self pervades and easily explains 
 all the uses. 
 
 B. The Causative Middle. 
 
 As the Active means / cause or allow others to do, so 
 the Middle means / cause or alloio others to do something 
 for myself or on myself. 
 
 irarrjp hihaaKeTai rev viov. 
 The father has his son taught, 
 ypdcpco, I write; (ypa(f)OfjLaL rcvd, I get one written doton, 
 i.e. / indict. 
 Cf. Latin euro, permitto, with ut and subjunctive, or with 
 Gerundive. 
 
 0. The Reciprocal Middle. Each agent acts for self, and 
 so the action is reciprocal. Verbs compounded with Bed 
 especially have this force. 
 
 dfjLelffco, I change, dfiei^o^eda, we a7iswer each other. 
 BtdXeyo/jLeda, we converse together. 
 BtaKeXevovTac, they en/^ourage one an- 
 other. 
 ScaKTjpeuovTaL, they negotiate by a herald. 
 D. See the following Miscellaneous list. 
 
 Note. A miscellaneous list of Verbs for reference showing the 
 difference in meaning between the Active and the Middle. In 
 some cases the Eeflexive meaning of the Middle is obvious ; 
 in some it is dubious ; in some it has practically disappeared. 
 For construetions with the Cases the Lexicon must be used. 
 
 dydXXoi, I adorn. dydWofxaL,I pride myself, exult. 
 
 ayw, / bring, lead. dyofxaL yvvaiKa, I Tnarry a wife, 
 
 alpo), I take. alpov/xat, I choose. 
 
 d^ai/Dw, / take away. dcfiaipovnaL riva Tt, / depri/ve a 
 
 person of something (for my 
 
 oum sake). 
 
128 
 
 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 aipo), I take tip. 
 
 dfji€Ll3(x), I change (trans.). 
 
 aTrexw, / keep off, deter. 
 
 a7ro8t8a)/xt, / give back. 
 (TrtTrpacr/cco, I sell). 
 dfxvvia (see TLfMiopuj). 
 arraXXdo-a-O}, I set free. 
 
 dpx(o (ttoAc/xov), / am the first 
 of two parties to make (war) ; 
 so with Xoyov. 
 but 
 
 a/Q^w, / rule. 
 
 ^ovXevo), I 
 
 ya/xw, / marry (duco). 
 
 yeijo), I give a taste of. 
 ypd(f)(}), I write down (cf. rt- 
 
 6r]fj,i). 
 
 Savei^o), I put out at interest, 
 
 lerid. 
 8i8d(rK(j), I teach. 
 
 SiKd^o), I decide. 
 
 cTTcty (o, / urge on, hasten (trans. ). 
 kinridy)p,i, I put OT place upon. 
 €xw, / have (neuter, I am or 1 
 
 am able). 
 kirayykXXdi, I proclaim. 
 
 €7rL\pr)(f>iC(o, I put to the vote (of 
 the President). 
 
 aipofxai, I take on myself, un- 
 dertake (suscipio), begin, gain, 
 (Ace.) 
 
 dfxdjSea-dai, to do by turns, 
 answer, requite. 
 
 dirk^ojxai tlvos, refrain from, 
 hold aloof from. 
 
 dTrcBofLrjv, I sold. 
 
 dTraXXdu-croixai, I escape, I de- 
 part from, I leave off. 
 
 dpxopLOLL {iroXkixov), I begin war- 
 like operations. 
 
 dpxofxai (Passive), / am ruled. 
 
 povXevop^aL, I deliberate, con- 
 sider. 
 
 yapLovuai, (1) / marry (nubo) ; 
 (2) I give in marriage, betroth. 
 
 y€vop,aL, I taste. 
 
 y pd(f>o pat, I get written down, 
 
 8av€i(opiaL, I borrow at interest 
 (so xpricaa-dai). 
 
 SiSdcTKopiaL Tov vlov, I get my 
 son taught. 
 
 8L8darKopai {iTTO nuos, I am 
 taught by a person. 
 
 SiKa^opiai {8lk7]v (TOl), I go to 
 law with you, conduct a case : 
 especially of the prosecutor, 
 opposed to (fievyetv. 
 
 kireLyopai, 1 hasten (intrans. ). 
 
 €7nTL0€fjLai, I attack, TLVI. 
 
 e^o/xat, 7 cling to, I come next to, 
 I am eager for (with Gen.). 
 
 kirayyeXXopat, I promise, I pro- 
 fess, I denounce. 
 
 kTrt\j/y]4>i^opaL, I vote, decree by 
 vote (of the Assembly). 
 
THE MIDDLE VOICE, 
 
 129 
 
 Ovm {of tJie priest), I sacrifice. 
 
 iTjfXL, I send. 
 KaTa(TTp€(jno, I overturn. 
 Koifxio, I lull to sleep. 
 Ko/xi^w, I transport. 
 
 XaixfSdvco Tt, / take, 
 kavddvu), I escape observation. 
 
 Travo), I make to cease, I stop 
 
 (trans.). 
 TrdOo), I persuade. 
 
 TToiw, / do or make. 
 
 TTOiw \6yov, I compose a speech. 
 
 6S0V TTOLiOj I make a road. 
 
 TT/aoo-TToiWj I hand over (trado). 
 irovrjpevoi, I am vicked. 
 TToAiTevw, / am a citizen. 
 o-KOTTw, I look at, examine. 
 <To<f)L^(o, I make wise, I teach. 
 
 (TTrhSio, I pour out a libation. 
 TtdrjCTL vo/JLOv 6 vofxoOeTTjS, the 
 
 lawgiver makes a law. 
 6 6€Ls, the mortgager. 
 
 TifKopoj TLvd Tivi, / punish A 
 for B's satisfaction. 
 
 And so — 
 
 TLfxoypcj o-ot, / avenge or assist 
 thee. 
 
 Similarly — 
 
 dfxvvio Tt TLVL, I keep off some- 
 thing from B. 
 
 Ovofiai (of the general), I get a 
 sacrifice offered, I take au- 
 spices. 
 
 UpLai, I hurry, rush. 
 
 KaTa(TTp€(fiO/xat, I Subdue. 
 
 KOLixQfiaL, I sleep. 
 
 Kojjii^ojiiaL, I recover, get back 
 what was lost. 
 
 Xaiifidvo[xaL Ttvos, I lay hold of. 
 
 Xavddvo/xaL, emXavOdvop-ai, I 
 forget. 
 
 Travo fxai, I cease, stop (intrans. ). 
 
 Tveidoiiai, I obey. {iTiidov, be 
 
 persuaded ; ttlOov, obey.) 
 Troiovjxai, I consider. 
 TTOLovfxai Xoyov, I deliver a 
 
 680V TToiovfiai, I make a journey. 
 
 TTOLOVjxaL (TTTOvSds, ^Ip-qvqv, crvv- 
 drjKr]v, (TVfi^aa-LV. 
 
 7roL€L(rdaL TratSas, to beget chil- 
 dren. Crito, V. 
 
 TrpocnroLovfxaL, I claim, I aim at. 
 
 TTov-qpevofxai, I behave wickedly. 
 
 TroXiTevofjLat, I act or live as a 
 
 o-KoTTovfxaL, I reflect. [citizen. 
 
 (To<f)t^onat, I act the sophist, I 
 quibble, contrive. 
 
 (TTrevSopLai, I make a truce. 
 
 TLderai vo/jlov 6 8^/xos, the people 
 makes laws for itself. 
 
 6 defievos, the mortgagee (also 
 the depositor in a bank, etc.). 
 
 TLfjuopovfiat TLvd Tivi, I revenge 
 myself on A for wronging B. 
 
 TLfxtDpovixat (Tc, I m'eak venge- 
 ance on or punish thee. 
 
 (1) dfjLvvofxaL Tt, / defend my- 
 self against a thing. 
 
I30 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 Hence — 
 
 (1) a/xTJi/o) TToAe/Aov, / he&p off (2) dfjLvvofxai nva, I requite or 
 war. punish aperson, — to h ofio tot?, 
 
 (2) dfjLvvo) 'AO-qvatoLs, I help with retaliation, Trept or vTrep 
 the Athenians. rtvos, for a certain thing. 
 
 TiviJ}8LK7]v,poenasdo,pendo,luo, rcvofiai 8lk7]v, poenas sumo, I 
 I pay a penalty. exact a penalty or vengeance. 
 
 <f>aiV(o, I show (trans.). <^atvo/xat, I appear, am seen, 
 
 X/3W, (1) I give an oracle. xP^f^^h 1 9^^ ^^ oracle given, f 
 
 (2) I furnish, lend. xp^ixai, I use. 
 
 Note. An examination of the above list will bring out two 
 
 points. 
 
 1. The Active is often transitive, while the Middle is 
 neuter. 
 
 2. The Middle is often used of mental rather than of 
 bodily actions. 
 
 § 130. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 The Syntax of the Passive Voice is much freer in 
 Greek than in Latin. 
 
 Thus, besides the constructions noticed in the Notes 
 below, Verbs which take a Genitive or a Dative can be 
 used personally in the Passive, unlike the Latin. 
 E.g. KaTa(j)pov(o avrov, I despise him. 
 
 KaracppoveiTai vtt epLov, he is despised hy me. 
 
 TTLcFTevovaL Tc3 ^aaCKel, they trust the king. 
 
 6 ^aai\€v<; TncneveTai vtt avrcov, the king is trusted 
 
 hy them, 
 irax; av eTTC^ovkevaaLpLL avrw, ei firj Kat eirepov- 
 
 \ei>dr]v vtt' avTov ; Antiph. 
 How could I plot against him, sinless also I had been 
 plotted against hy him ? 
 
 Note 1. Neuter verbs can form passive participles. 
 dpx<f>, I rule ; dp^op-evos, ruled over. 
 This is chiefly the case with neuter participles. 
 
 TO. rjcrefS'qp^ha avTols (vtt'' avrwv), impious acts committed hy 
 them. 
 
THE PASSIVE VOICE. 131 
 
 Tct Kiv^vv^vQkvTa, risks run. 
 
 ra rjiiapr-qfxha^ errors committed. 
 
 rot GrrpaTevofxeva, warlike measures. 
 
 rd (TOL 7re7roXiT€VfX€va, your political acts. 
 
 Or with impersonal passives. 
 
 irapea-Kevao-TaL, preparation has been made. ^ 
 
 afxapTaveraL, error is being commuted. 
 
 ov8ev do-e/SeLTat, no impiety is being committed. 
 
 Cf. Lat. ventum est, erat ; factum est, etc. 
 
 Note 2. Deponent Verbs are those which have no Active 
 Form, e.g. Sexofxai, I receive; oifxat, I think. Passive Deponents 
 are those whose Aorist has a Passive (not a Middle form), e.g. 
 fSovXofxai, I ivish, kpovX-qdrfv. The exclusively Passive forms 
 of Deponents are sometimes Passive not Middle in sense, e.g. 
 pid^ofxac, I force; e/Sida-Orju, I ivas forced. Even the Middle 
 form of a Deponent may be Passive in meaning, e.g. Pcd^ofmt 
 I am forced, or suffer violence. In such cas^s there was an 
 original Active form, e.g. Ptd^o). See further, Jelf, § 368. 
 
 Note 3. It will be remembered that the Aorists in -r^v and 
 -Oy)v, with their corresponding futures in --qa-ofxai, -O-qcropLat, are 
 the only Passive forms of a Greek verb. The Middle forms, 
 except the Aorists, and as a rule the Futures, are of course 
 Passive as well as Middle in meaning. 
 
 Note 4. The direct object of the Active becomes the sub- 
 ject of the Passive, and the subject of the Active, the agent, is 
 expressed by vtto and the Genitive, 
 6 (f)LX6<TO(f)o<i StSdcTKei Tov TratSa. 
 6 Trats StSacTKerat wo tov <f)L\6(TO(fiOV. 
 
 The Agent is also expressed, but much less commonly — 
 
 (a.) By the Dative. See Dative of Agent. 
 
 (b.) By the Prepositions (xtto, I^, irapd, 7rp6<s. See these 
 Prepositions. 
 
 The object of the Active may however remain the object of 
 the Passive, and the dative of the Active become the subject 
 of the Passive. This is an extension of § 130. 
 
 ot eiTLTerpap^pievoL tyjv ^vXaK^v, ThuC. i. 126, cf. V. 37, Tavra 
 e7reo-TaA/x€vot, and EuR. Rhes. 5. So in English, / leave him a 
 fortune, He has been left a fortune. 
 
132 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 § 131. THE MOODS. 
 
 Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and Optative. 
 
 The Indicative is sharply contrasted with the Subjunc- 
 tive and Optative. 
 
 The Indicative simply and directly makes a state- 
 ment or asks a question without any qualification. 
 
 ^aaiXev^ reOurj/cev, 
 The king is dead. 
 
 iroOev 7]K€i^ ; 
 
 Where do you come from ? 
 
 It is commonly said that the Indicative states facts, 
 but the statement need not express a fact actually true ; 
 e.g. ol TLepaai evLK7]aav tov<; ' A6r)vaLOV<; Mapa6(ovi>, the 
 Persians defeated the Athenians at Marathon. 
 
 The Subjunctive and Optative, on the other hand, 
 make assertions, not as real, but as conceptions present 
 to the speaker's mind. 
 
 The Subjunctive and Optative are two aspects of one Mood. 
 In the oldest Greek they represented originally the Willing 
 or Wishing Mood, the Subjunctive being the more peremptory, 
 JFill ; the Optative, the fainter and more remote, f^Tish. This 
 was soon modified into a second use, the Subjunctive express- 
 ing a more vivid, the Optative a fainter, remoter Expectation 
 or Possibility. Hence they soon came to be used in Sub- 
 ordinate Sentences, expressing Purpose, Condition, Indefinite 
 Frequency, etc. And though in Subordinate Sentences the 
 general rule is for the Subjunctive to follow Primary, the 
 Optative Historic tenses, yet there is no such fundamental 
 distinction between the two Moods as to prevent the Subjunc- 
 tive being used for the Optative, the two Moods sometimes 
 alternating in the same paragraph. 
 
THE MOODS. 133 
 
 One or two instances from Homer will illustrate the 
 difference between the Subjunctive and Optative : — 
 
 M77 (je KLyeiw, II. i. 26, let me not find thee. 
 
 Mr] /X7]v aickeLw<; aTroXotfjuriv, 11. xxii. 304, let me not 
 fall ingloriously. 
 
 ovK eau ovTO^ ai/7]p, ovo eaaeTat, ovoe yevrfrai. 
 
 HoM. Od. xvi. 437. 
 Lives not that man, nor e'er will live, nor e'er is like 
 to he (born). 
 
 Here the Subjunctive differs from the Future Indicative 
 in stating what is thought likely to occur, not positively 
 what will occur. 
 
 pela Oeo<; 7' edeXcov Kav rrjXodev avBpa aacoaai. 
 
 HoM. Od. iii. 231. 
 Lightly a god, an he will, might save thee e'en at a 
 distance. 
 
 The Optative gives a more remote representation than 
 the Subjunctive of a future possibility. 
 
 Note. The Subjunctive and Optative (with two excep- 
 tions to be noticed in the Optative) refer to future time. 
 The reference to the future, however, is more vague in the 
 Optative, so vague that the notion of time is often scarcely 
 apparent in this mood. This, perhaps, may be why the 
 Optative lent itself to a connexion with past tenses in historic 
 sequence. But there is nothing in the form of the Optative, 
 neither its connecting vowel nor its suffixes, which per se 
 denotes past time. And the only two usages in which the 
 Optative really refers to past time are: (1) in General Sup- 
 positions (see Conditional Sentences) ; and, (2) in Oratio 
 Obliqua, where occasionally it represents a past tense of the 
 Indicative (see Oratio Obliqua). 
 
 The Subjunctive and Optative are both used (1) in Inde- 
 pendent, (2) in Subordinate Sentences. Their uses in Sub- 
 ordinate Sentences are given in the Syntax of the Compound 
 Sentence. 
 
T34 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 § 132. THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 The Independent Subjunctive is used : — 
 
 A. In Exhortations. First person often with (j)epe, aye, 
 ay ere, Wc (hri or vvv added). 
 
 <j)epe Br] enrw irpo^ vfia^. Dem. 
 Come now, let me speak before you. 
 
 aAA' r^t, twjxev. 
 
 Come then, let us go {suppose we go). 
 
 In Soph. Phil 300 the 2d Person (fMaOys). 
 
 B. In Prohibitions (with /atJ). 
 
 (a) First person plural (singular very rare, of. EuR. 
 Hipp. e567, Heracl. 559). 
 
 (h) Second and third person with aorist subjunctive. 
 
 {a) fir] <po^(ofjbe6a, let us not he afraid. 
 
 fxr] arek?) rov Xoyov KaraXiirwixev. Plat. 
 Let us not leave our argument incomplete. 
 
 (h) fir] ravra iroLr\<Tri<^. 
 Do not do this. 
 Ne haec feceris. 
 
 firjSevl o-Vfi(popav 0V6lBl(T7)<;. IsOCR. 
 Taunt no 07ie with a misfortune. 
 
 C. In Questions of doubt (Deliberative Questions) 
 with the First Person. ffovXec, ^ovKeaOe (OeXcK}, diXere 
 in poetry) are often added. 
 
 ebirayjiev, rj acyw/iev, rf tl Bpaao/iev ; EUR. 
 Are we to {should loe, must we) speak, or keep silence, 
 or what shall we do ? 
 
OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. 135 
 
 Ti jBovXeade Spaa-co ; 
 Quid vultis faciam ? 
 What would you have me do ? 
 
 oifiOL Tt 8pdcr<a; Trot 4>vy(i) ix-qrpos X^pa's; EUR. Med, 1271. 
 Ah me, what must I do? whither escape a mother's hands ? 
 
 Note 1. — The third person, however, occurs pretty often, 
 especially in Plato and Demosthenes. 
 
 TTOTcpov fT€ Tt9 Trjs TToAecjs k^dpov Tj ifiov €Lvai (jyrj; 
 
 Dem. 18. 124. 
 Should one mil you the enemy of the state, or my enemy ? 
 •jTodev TL<s ap^YjTai; PlAT. 
 Where is one to begin ? 
 rt etTT^ Tts/ 
 JVlmt must one say ? Plat, and Dem. 
 
 •jTol Tis ovv <j>vyrj; 
 
 TTot /xoXmv p€vu); Soph, At. 403. 
 Here this rts refers to the first person. 
 
 Note 2. — The Subjunctive, expressing a future possi- 
 bility, common in Homer, is not wholly unknown, though 
 rare in Attic. 
 
 ovt' kcTTLv ovre Trore yevr^rai KpeiTTOv. PlAT. Leg, 942. 
 
 It is not, nor is it ever likely to get letter. 
 
 § 133. THE OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT 
 SENTENCES, 
 
 The Independent Optative is used : — 
 A. To denote a Wish (without av). 
 
 CO iral yevoLo Trarpo? evyevecTTepof;. SoPH. 
 
 Boy, rwayst thou prove more fortunate than thy 
 
 father. 
 
 In the first person a wish often conveys an exhortcUion. 
 See Subjunctive in Exhortations. 
 
 fjLT) ^(pTjv fi€T a/jiovcrca<i. EUR. 
 
 Let me not live without culture. 
 
136 VOICES AND MOODS. 
 
 In the third person a command or permission may be 
 conveyed. 
 
 ephoL Ti^ rjv e/cacrro? eLSecr] Te')(yr)v. Ar. 
 
 Let each man keep to his trade, whateer he knows. 
 
 elBeiT) is assimilated to the mood of principal verb epBoL 
 
 Cf. Xen. An. iii. 2. 37, yyolro (al. rir/elo-Qco) : Aesch. P. V. 
 1047, where two Optatives are co-ordinate with preceding 
 Imperatives. 
 
 B. In Deliberative Questions. The Optative differs 
 from the Subjunctive in the same questions only in ex- 
 pressing a less vivid and more remote possibility. 
 reav, Zev, hvvacnv Tt<; avBpcov 
 vireppaala Karda'^oi ; SoPH. Ant. 605. 
 Thy power, Zens, what mortal man 
 By overstepping might control ? 
 Cf. Aesch. Ch. 392 ; Ar. Flut. 438 ; Soph. 0. 0.170; Plat. 
 
 Bep. 352 C (aKoro-ats). 
 
 Note. Several places, especially in the Tragedians, are 
 quoted where the Optative without av occurs in its Homeric 
 potential sense (e.g. Od. iii. 231, quoted before). In most of 
 these places, however, if not all, the reading is doubted. 
 Jelf (§ 418, I. a) quotes two passages from Plato, Fhaedo, 
 87 E, eTTtSetKvuot — Slolxolto, where Heindorf would insert av : 
 and Bep. 362 o, dSeA^os dvSpl irapdr], where to Aeyd/zevov shows 
 that the phrase is a quotation, probably from the Epic. 
 
 § 134. THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 The Imperative is used in Commands, Entreaties, 
 Prayers, and Prohibitions. It denotes future time. 
 
 In Prohibitions we must use fir] either (1) with 2d Person 
 Present Imperative (continued act), or (2) 2d Person 
 Aorist Subjunctive (single act), thus : — 
 
 fXT) KkiiTT6, or p,7) K\6yfrrj<;, do not steal ; but neither fir) 
 K\€7rT7]<; nor KXeyjrov. 
 
THE IMPERATIVE, 137 
 
 Ak. Thesm. 877 {fxr] ^jrevaov) is a rare exception in Attic. 
 
 Mrj, TTpo? dewv, fiatpeofjueOa, fjuTjB' aL(T'^p(o<; airoXw/jbeda. 
 
 Xen. 
 Let us not, hy the gods, he mad, nor die shamefully. 
 
 But iiTj with the 3d pers. Aorist Imperative is admis- 
 sible both in poetry and in prose. 
 
 firjBel^ vfjbwv ravra vofiiaarco. Xen. 
 Let none of you think so. 
 
 Note 1. For the Infinitive used as an Imperative, see 
 Index. 
 
 Note 2. ota-d' o Spaa-ov. The Imperative is sometimes used 
 in relative clauses depending on an Interrogative, 
 a A A' 060-^' o Spacrov; tw o-/<eAet 6€V€ ttjv Trkrpav. 
 
 Ar. Av. 54. 
 
 Do you know what to do 1 Kick the rock with your leg. 
 
 oTcrdd vvv a yaot yeviO-Ooj ; Sea/xa rots ^evoicrt TrpocrOes. 
 
 Eur. /. T. 1203. 
 
 Knowest thou ivhat must he done for me ? put chains on the 
 strangers. 
 
 Logically it would be a Set yevkcrdai; 
 
 And as the Future is used in Greek as an equivalent for 
 ■^c Imperative, we find 
 
 ota-d' ovv 6 Spdcr€Ls . . . oSrjcrov -qixlv (tltov. ^VR. Cycl. 133. 
 Dost knoiv what thou must do ? provide us victuals. 
 
 The Imperative in Greek is subordinate in the above idioms. 
 As this is impossible in English, we have to substitute a 
 periphrasis. Do you know what (you must do = do) ? 
 
CHAPTER VIL 
 
 THE TENSES. 
 
 § 135* Grreek tenses may be classified in two ways. 
 
 A. With regard to the Order of Time. 
 
 B. With regard to the Kind of A ct or State. 
 
 A. ORDER OF TIME. 
 The Time of a Tense must be either 
 
 1. Past (Imperfect, Aorist, Pluperfect). 
 
 2. Present (Present, Perfect). 
 
 3. Future (Future, Future Perfect). 
 
 PRIMARY AND HISTORIC TENSES. 
 
 Tenses in Present and Future Time are called Primary. 
 Tenses in Past Time are called Historic. 
 
 SEQUENCE OF MOODS. 
 In Compound Sentences the theoretical rule is that — 
 
 A Principal Sentence in Primary Time is followed by 
 the Subjunctive in the Subordinate Sentence. 
 
 A Principal Sentence in Historic Time is followed by 
 the Optative in the Subordinate Sentence. 
 
 This sequence however is purely theoretical; for, as 
 will be seen in the Compound Sentence, a Subjunctive 
 constantly takes the place of an Optative in Historic 
 Sequence. 
 
 138 
 
TIME OBSERVED THROUGHOUT MOODS. 139 
 
 § 136. Time how far observed throughout the 
 
 Moods. 
 
 {a) The only mark of Past Time in Greek is the Augment. 
 The distinction between Past and Present therefore is strictly 
 observed only in the Indicative. 
 
 Absolute and Relative Time. — The distinctions of Time, how- 
 ever, are observed in the Optative, Infinitive, and Participle, 
 when these Moods are used in Indirect Discourse or Oratio 
 Obliqua, i.e. when they represent indirectly the words or 
 thoughts of another. This is most clearly seen in the Indirect 
 Statements and Questions. 
 
 €cf)r) ravra TTOieLV — TroiTjcraL — TTOLrjcreiv. 
 He said that he was doing, did or had done, would do this. 
 TToceLv =7roit3 in Recta, and therefore is relatively present ; 
 TTOLTJcraL =: eTToCrja-a „ ,, relatively past / 
 
 7roL7](r€Lv = 7roiT^cro) ,, „ relatively future ; 
 
 relatively, i.e. to the Principal Verb present, past, and future : 
 but TToielv, TTOLTJcraL, TTOL-qtreLv are all absolutely past, because 
 €</)T7, the Principal Verb, is past. 
 
 eAe^av otl ire/ixpeLe o-<^as 6 ^acriAev?. 
 They said that the king had sent them. 
 
 In Kecta eVe/x^ev rj[xa<s. 
 i]p€TO et Kevo5 6 <f>6f3os etrj. 
 He asked if his fear was groundless. 
 
 In Recta kcvos co-t6 ; 
 
 'QcdoVTO TOVS TToXcfXLOVS TTpoo'TrXeovTa's. 
 
 They discovered that the enemy were advancing. 
 Recta, 06 TToXefiiOL irpoa-TrXkovcrLv. 
 
 (h) The Aorist Participle denotes an action past relatively to 
 the principal verb. 
 
 BotWTOi 01 e^ 'Apurjs dva(rTdvT€<s rrjv Boiwrtai/ wKrja-av. 
 
 Thuc. 
 
 Boeotians who had been driven out of Arne settled in Boeotia. 
 See further however under the Aorist Participle, which in 
 itself does not denote time. 
 
 (c) With regard to the Future in the Moods it seems always 
 express future time, for 
 
 (1.) The Future Optative is only used to represent in the 
 Obliqua a Future Indicative of Direct Discourse. 
 
I40 THE TENSES. 
 
 (2.) The Future Infinitive is most commonly used after verbs 
 of saying and thinking, and therefore like the Optative, repre- 
 sents a Future Indicative of the Eecta. Whenever the Future 
 Infinitive is used after other verbs, instead of the usual 
 Present or Aorist Infinitive, the idea of futurity still seems 
 to be emphasised, e.g.: — 
 
 He delays to do his duty, /zeAAet Trotetv or Trot^o-at rot 
 
 Seovra. 
 fxeXXei TToirja-eiv (with emphatic 
 reference to the future). 
 dvapdWeraL is similarly used. 
 
 (3.) The Future Participle denotes a future relative to the 
 principal Verb. 
 
 avXXafi/Bdvei J^vpov, cu? (XTroKreviov. 
 
 He seizes Cyrus ivith the intention of killing him. 
 
 B. THE KIND OF ACT OR STATE. 
 
 With regard to the Kind of Act denoted Tenses are 
 divided into 
 
 1. Continued (Present, Imperfect). 
 
 2. Finished (Perfect, Pluperfect). 
 
 3. Indefinite or Single (Aorist Strong and Weak). 
 
 1. A continued Tense mentions an act as still going on, 
 or in progress, whether in past, present, or future, an act 
 in which the agent is still engaged, / was writing, I am 
 writing, I shall he writing (the letter). 
 
 2. A finished Tense mentions an act as one which is 
 perfect, complete, in a finished state, I have written, 
 I had written, I shall have written {the letter). 
 
 3. An indefinite Tense mentions the mere act itself, 
 a single act, without any such limitation of its con- 
 tinuance or completion, / wrote, I write, I shall write 
 {the letter). Hence the Stoic grammarians called such a 
 Tense an Aorist {i.e. aopiarov or unlimited). 
 
IDEAL DIVISION OF TENSES. 
 
 141 
 
 The distinction between the Kinds of Act is observed 
 throughout all the Moods, and is therefore a more univer- 
 sal and abiding distinction than that of Time. 
 
 Note, The kind of act is denoted in Greek by the Tense- 
 stem, AY-, AYC-, AYCA-, AEAY-. 
 
 The Present Tense-stem (Present and Imperfect Tenses) 
 denotes a continued act. 
 
 The Perfect {i.e. reduplicated) Tense-stem (Perfect, Plu- 
 perfect, and Future Perfect Tenses) denotes a finished act. 
 
 The Aorist Tense-stems (Strong and Weak Aorist tenses) 
 denote an indefinite or single act. 
 
 The Future is ambiguous, denoting either a continued or 
 an indefinite act. 
 
 § 137. Ideal division of Tenses. 
 
 An ideal twofold division of Tenses may be thus con- 
 structed, to be read horizontally and vertically. 
 
 k 
 
 
 Continued. 
 
 Finished. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Present 
 
 / am writing 
 ypd<})(i), strictly 
 used, scribo 
 
 / have written 
 ykypa<^a 
 scripsi 
 
 I write 
 ypdcfiio 
 scribo 
 
 Past 
 
 / was tvriting 
 €ypacj)ov 
 scribebam 
 
 / had written 
 iyeypdcfir) or -€iv 
 scripseram 
 
 / wrote 
 eypaxfa 
 scripsi 
 
 Future 
 
 I shall be writing 
 ypd\pisi 
 scribam 
 
 ■ 
 
 / shall have written 
 Periphrasis in 
 Active yeypa- 
 cfxos €(rofMaL 
 scripsero 
 
 / shall write 
 ypd\j/(ii 
 scribam 
 
142 THE TENSES. 
 
 Note. A very rare poetical periphrasis occurs with Aorist 
 Participle, o-ituTryjo-as eo-o/xat, XvirrjOeLS €(ro/x.at, SoPH. 0. T. 
 1146, 0. a 816. 
 
 This scheme, however, is purely ideal, and does not corre- 
 spond to the Greek tenses, however well it corresponds with 
 our analytic English tenses. 
 
 In Greek the kind of act, as has been observed already, is 
 denoted by the Present, the Perfect, and the Aorist Tense- 
 stems : the Future Tense-stem has to be left out. 
 
 The most important distinction is that between a Continued 
 and an Indefinite act. 
 
 § 138. THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT 
 INDICATIVE. 
 A. The Present Indicative denotes : — 
 
 1. An act in which a person is engaged in present 
 time ; <ypd(pco, I am writing now. 
 
 2. An act which is habitual or repeated, or a general 
 truth, without being limited to the present moment. 
 
 f)0)/jL7] afiaOr]^ TroXXa/ct? tlkt€l fi\d^7]v. EuE. F7'ag. 
 Strength untrained oft hrings forth harm. 
 Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. Horace. - 
 
 Note 1. The Present has also certain idiomatic uses of which 
 the following are the commonest : — 
 
 {a) The Historic present denotes a past event. In Compound 
 Sentences it reckons as an historic tense. This historic pre- 
 sent seems sometimes equivalent to an aorist (narrative), 
 sometimes to an imperfect (descriptive). 
 
 a-vXXaixf3dv€L Kvpov ws diroKTevioi/. XeN. 
 
 He seizes (seized) Cijrus with the intention of hilling him. 
 
 (h) The Present, as it denotes an unfinished act, often 
 denotes an attempted act. 
 
 Tovs AaKeSaLfioviovs dvaipei, rov<s Si $a>/ceas o-wfet, DeM. 
 
 He is trying to destroy the Lacedaemonians, and to save the 
 Phocians. 
 
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICA TIVE. 143 
 
 This is especially the case with SiSw/xt, I offer, i.e. try to give, 
 and ireiOix), I try to persuade. The present participle also has 
 this meaning. 
 
 (c) The Present as a Perfect : — 
 
 1. With TraAat or riZri {all this while, this long while, not now 
 for the first time), like iam, iamdudum, in Latin with the 
 Present. 
 
 efiotye vvv re koI TraAat SoKei. EUR. Frag. 
 I think so now, and I have long been thinking so. 
 vocret 7^87) SeKtt 'irrj. 
 He has been ill these ten years. 
 
 Esp. in the poets TraAat may refer to a statement made only a 
 moment ago (as we say hyperbolically — ever so long ago). Cf. 
 Soph. Fl. 676. 
 
 2. Certain presents have the force of perfects : i7ko>, / am 
 come, adswm; ot'xo/xai, / am gone {quickly)-, vlkCj, I am victo- 
 rious ; Kparo), I am victorious ; o^Trw/xat, / am defeated ; aStKw, 
 I have done urrong, I am unjust ; oAAv/xat, aTroAAv/^at, in Tragedy, 
 / am lost, or undone. 
 
 3. Verbs of hearing and learning, aKovto {nXvoi, poet.), ttdv- 
 Odvojxai, ala-Bavofxai, fxavddvo). dpri is often used with these 
 
 verbs. 
 
 0e/xi(rTOKAea ovk aKoi'ets dvSpa dyadov yeyovoTa ; PlaT. 
 Have you not heard that Themistocles proved himself a patriot ? 
 
 {d) The Present Infinitive and the Present Participle may 
 represent the Imperfect Indicative in English. 
 
 ot crvixTrpecrlSevovres Kal napovres Kara/xapTvpTJcrova-i. 
 
 Dem. de F. L. 381. 5. 
 
 Those who were his fellow-colleagues in the embassy, and who 
 were present, will bear witness, 
 
 B. The Imperfect is the past of the Present. It 
 describes a past action as (a) still going on, or (h) as going 
 on along with other actions, or (c) as frequently recurring. 
 For {a) and (5) see Aorist. 
 
 c. IlcoKpaTT]^ coairep eyLr^v(oaKev, ovtod^ eXeye. Xen. 
 Socrates used to speak exactly as he used to think. 
 
144 THE TENSES. 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect shares most of the idiomatic uses of 
 the present. 
 
 (a) The Imperfect of an attempted ad, like the present of 
 the same. 
 
 6/<acrTos Tts eireiOev avrov virocrTrjvaL rrjv ap^T^i/. XeN. 
 Each one was trying to persuade him to undertake the command. 
 The present participle also often has this sense. 
 
 (b) When the present has a perfect force its imperfect is a 
 pluperfect. rJKov, I had come ; <}x^M^} ^ ^'^^ ^^^^ / ivUiDv, I 
 had won the victory, I was victorious, etc. 
 
 (c) The Imperfect is used for the present when what is seen 
 now to be the case has been in the past inquired about, or 
 sought for, or thought of. 
 
 ov tout' TjV evSatfxovLa, KaKov drraXkayq ; PlAT. 
 
 Is not this happiness (which we were talking about or trying to 
 
 discover) deliverance from evils ? 
 68' rjv apa 6 ^vAAa^wv fxe. SOPH. 
 This then, 1 see, is he who seized me (this was and is). 
 To this belongs the famous Aristotelian phrase,To rt tJv efvai. 
 
 (d) In the use of the Imperfects eSei, XPI^^ w</)€Aov, ciko? ^v, 
 like the Latin debebam, oportebat, decebat, denote what ought 
 to have been done, but what was not done. 
 
 ovSev aXXo eSet Aeyctv. Dem. 
 
 He need have said nothing else. 
 
 Nihil aliud dicere oportebat. 
 
 ovK etKos ^v ovTWs eav. SOPH. 0. T. 255. 
 
 It would not have been right to leave it alone. 
 
 Non decebat praeterire. 
 
 On these constructions see Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 139. THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 A. The Perfect denotes an act which is in a finished 
 state. The act must have been begun in the past, but 
 it stands finished in the present. The Perfect therefore 
 is reckoned as a Primary tense, yeypacpa, I have written, 
 my luriting is in a finished state ; BeSerai, he is in a state 
 of imprisonment. 
 
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 145 
 
 Not only in the Subjunctive and Optative, but also in the 
 Indicative, a periphrasis with et/xt is used for the Perfect. The 
 abiding nature of the result is then emphasized. 
 
 eis o8e iLOVo^^vr\<i ovpavos yeyovws eo-rt tc Kal eV eo-rat. 
 
 Plat. Tim. 31. 
 This one sole-created heaven hath been created^ and shall still 
 endure. 
 
 Cf. e'xo) with Aorist Participle. 
 
 The Perfect of many verbs is equivalent to a Present : 
 rWvrjKev, he is dead; KCKXrjfiai, I am called; yeyova, I am be- 
 come, i.e. I am; fMefxvrjfjiaL, I remember ; oTSa (crwoiSa), T know, 
 novi. The Pluperfect is then an Imperfect, iTedvrJKei, he was 
 dead, etc. The Perfect Imperative of such verbs is a simple 
 Perfect. 
 
 Note. A great number of Perfects in Homer describe present 
 
 acts or states : aVwya, pkf^pida, K€K€v6a, fikii-qXa, ixcfxova, epptya, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 B. The Pluperfect is the Perfect carried back to past 
 time. e<ye<y pd(f)rj, I had written, my writing was in a 
 finished state in the past. 
 
 Per the Future Perfect, see Future. 
 The Perfect Imperative (3d singular Middle and Passive) 
 issues a decisive command which is to be executed at once, 
 and there an end. 
 
 fie^pL TOvSe MptcrOo) VfJLOiV 17 /SpaBvr'js. ThUC. i. 71. 
 At this point let your slowness find a limit (come to an end). 
 Hactenus progressa (terminata) esto (finem habeat) vestra 
 tarditas. Poppo. 
 
 § 140. THE AORIST. 
 
 1. The Aorist denotes the mere occurrence of an act in 
 past time. Apart from difference of time the Aorist is 
 always distinguished from the Imperfect (and in the 
 Oblique Moods from the Present) by noticing the mere 
 doing of the act, and not describing the act as in pro- 
 gress. The Aorist has been likened to a point, the Im- 
 perfect (and Present) to a line. 
 
 K 
 
146 THE TENSES. 
 
 Note. As the Aorist notices the mere act or state itself, three 
 aspects of this are observable. 
 
 1. The commencement of the act, the beginning, not the* con- 
 tinuance. 
 
 This has been called the Ingressive or Inceptive Aorist. 
 
 c/?ao-iAevo-e, he came to the throne (e/Saa-iXevev, he was king). 
 €77XovTr](T€v, hc bccamc rich (iTrAovret, he was a rich man), 
 evocnycre, he fell ill (evocret, he was ill). 
 
 2. The act as done and over, not as doing. 
 
 AYCmnOC EnomCE denotes the simple fact that 
 Lysippus was the maker of the statue. 
 
 AYCinnOC EnOIEI denotes the labour spent on the 
 making. 
 
 eSeiTTvrjo-av, they supped, i.e. ended supper. 
 
 eSeiTTvovv, they were at supper. 
 
 vv^ lyevero, night came on, i.e. it was night. 
 
 vv^ €yiyv€To, night was coming on, i.e. it was twilight. 
 
 3. The act as instantaneous and momentary, not as occupying 
 a long time. 
 
 cyo) Se '^A.^ov, etSov, evLKrjcra. 
 
 " Caesar's brag of ' came, and saw, and overcame.' " Shail 
 
 2. The Aorist is narrative, the Imperfect is descriptive ; 
 i.e. the Aorist is used when we merely mention a past act 
 as having occurred, while the Imperfect is used when we 
 wish to describe or paint (so to speak) past acts as still 
 going on. 
 
 Oi fxev airrfKOov, KkeavBpo^ Be eOvero, /cat, crvvrjv 
 "aevo^covTi <^i\iKw<;, kcu ^eviav avpe/SaXovro. Xen. 
 
 So they went away. Meanwhile Oleander was en- 
 gaged in sacrificing, and in friendly intercourse 
 with Xenop)hon, and they formed a friendship. 
 Note 1. Other uses of the Aorist : — 
 
 The Aorist is also distinguished from the Imperfect by the 
 mere mention of an act without reference to other acts, while 
 the Imperfect often describes an act as going on side by side 
 with another act. 
 
THE AORIST. 147 
 
 Ilauo-avias l/c AaKeSat ixovo<s crrpaTr]yo<s vtto twv 'EA.At^i'wv l^e- 
 TTCfKfidr) fxera €lko(tl vewv dwo HeXoTrowqcrov, ^weTrAeov §€ Kai 
 'AOrjvaLOL TptaKovTa vaval, Kal ecrrpdrevcrav Is KvTrpoVj Kal 
 avrrj'i rot ttoAAo, KaTecrrpexJ/avTO. 
 
 Fausanias was sent out from Lacedaemon hy the Greeks as 
 admiral with twenty ships from Peloponnese. The Athenians also 
 accompanied him with thirty ships, and they proceeded to Cyprus, 
 and subdued the greater part of it. 
 
 Note 2. The Aorist is used (esp. in Tragedy) where we use a 
 Present. The moment of past time is but an instant before. 
 Something an instant ago has evoked the act. 
 
 cTTT^vecr' epyov Kal Trpovoiav rjv Wov. SoPH. Ai. 586. 
 
 / commend the act, and the forethought thou didst show. 
 
 Elect. 668. 677, Eur. Hec. 1275, El. 248, Philoc. 1289, 1314. 
 
 ^vvrJKa, I understand, and yja-Orjv, I am pleased, are of constant 
 occurrence. 
 
 €(f)pt^' €p(t)TL 7r€pL)(o.prjs 5' avcTTTo/xav. Soph. Ai. 692. 
 / thrill with love and flutter overjoyed. 
 Here the act is instantaneous also. 
 
 Note 3. English often uses the Pluperfect where Greek uses 
 the Aorist ; this is especially the case in Oratio Obliqua : — 
 ot 'IvSot e'Ae^av ort Tr^fxxpeu (T<jids 6 ^aa-iXev^. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 7. 
 The Indians said that their king had sent them. 
 
 Eecta e7re/xi/'€v, where we should say " has sent " (not sent). 
 This in Obliqua becomes had. 
 
 And with temporal and local sentences — 
 
 cTTCtS^ IreAevTv^cre Aa/aetos kol Karea-Trj ' ApTa^ep^-qs. 
 
 Xen. An. i. 1. 3. 
 After D alius had died and Artaxerxes had been established 
 
 in the kingdom. 
 Quum mortuus esset Darius, etc. 
 
 erpaTTOVTO €s Udvopfiov odev dvr]yd'Yovro. ThuC. i. 92. 
 They turned towards Panormus whence they had set sail. 
 
 Note 4. The Greek Aorist and English Perfect. 
 
 Though we have an Aorist in English corresponding to the 
 Greek, yet Greek uses the Aorist even more constantly than 
 English. We use a Perfect sometimes where Greek uses an 
 
148 THE TENSES. 
 
 Aorist, Thus — / am shocked if these are the orders which you 
 have given, Savov Troiov/xat et roiavra Tra/DT^yyetAas. Here an 
 act rather than a finished state is denoted, and the Greek 
 Aorist is more correct than the English Perfect. See example 
 above, Soph. Ai. 586, edov would naturally be rendered into 
 English, thou hast shown. Again a Gnomic Aorist in Greek 
 may be rendered by an English Perfect. 
 
 Note 5. The Aorist Participle generally expresses time prior 
 to its principal verb, but not always so, and, when so, not from 
 its own inherent meaning, but only from its connexion with 
 a principal verb. 
 
 Thus yeAao-as (ot/Awfas) €</)r;, JFith a smile, laugh {sigh) he 
 said. 
 
 (V kiroi-qcraq dva/xvricras fJbc. PlAT. Phaed. 60. 
 You did well to remind me. 
 
 Here the two acts are contemporary and identical. 
 So ev eTToiYjora^ dffuKOfxevos. HdT. V. 24. 
 Cf. Curtius, Elucidations, p. 211. 
 
 Note 6. The following verbs show the contrast between the 
 Present and the Aorist in the kind of act denoted. It will 
 be noticed that several are Ingressive Aorists. 
 
 voo-eiv, to be ill. voa-yja-at, to fall ill. 
 
 cj^evyetv, to run away. (f^vyelv, to escape. 
 
 (fio p e L(r 6 ai, to be in fear. (fyojSrjOrjvat, Sciorai, to take fright. '^ 
 
 7rpd(T(r€Lv, to be busy about. Trpd^ai, to accomplish. 
 
 yeXav, to be laughing. yeXda-at, to burst out laughing. 
 
 apx^i-v, to ride. ap^at, to obtain dominion or office. 
 
 L(Txv€Lv, to be strong. la-xva-at, to become strong. 
 
 (Tiydv, to be silent. cnyrjo-at, to become silent. 
 
 exeiv, to have. o"X^''^> ^^ obtain. 
 
 <^atv€o-^at, to appear. cfiavrjvai, to become apparent. 
 
 TToXefxetv, to be at war. TroXep-rjcraL, to begin war. 
 
 bellum gerere. bellum inferre. 
 
 /3a(TiX€V€iv, to be king. paa-tXevcraL, to come to the throne. 
 
 Note on the Aorist. 
 
 The Aorist is often called the momentary tense. It is 
 doubtful, however, whether momentariness is its essential 
 meaniuff. We should use the aorist if we translated The 
 
THE FUTURE. 149 
 
 Pharaohs built the pyramids, ol /JaorcAets twi/ AlyvyrrrLwv mkoSo- 
 fxrjcrav ra<s 7rv/)a/>ti8a9, though the pyramids, like Eome, were 
 not built in a day. We should equally use it in translating 
 He burst out laughing, lyeAao-e, or He fell ill, evoo-yja-e. And 
 again we should use it of such an instantaneous shiver of 
 emotion as is contained in €</)/otJ' epwTL, I thrill with love. 
 
 The mere mention of the act (or state) itself, without regard 
 to its duration, seems to be the one description of the Aorist 
 which suits it all through. Aorist and indefinite are not very 
 satisfactory words, but they have been retained as familiar, 
 for want of a better. Simple and Isolated have been suggested. 
 
 § 141. * THE FUTURE. 
 
 The Future denotes an act which will take place here- 
 after. 
 
 Its action is either continued or indefinite (see above). 
 
 Note 1. Idiomatic uses of the Future : — 
 
 The second person of the Future both affirmatively and 
 negatively resembles an imperative. 
 
 {a) Afiirmatively (either as a statement, or as a question 
 with ov Interrogative) — 
 
 Trpos Ta{;Ta Trpd^eis ocov av deXys. SoPH. 0. C. 956. 
 Thou wilt do therefore {do therefore) whatever likes thee, 
 ovx €A^€t', ov TratT^o-er', ovk apq^ere ; Ar. Ly. 459. 
 
 The expression is not so abrupt in form as an imperative. 
 A suggestion is made, or a permission given, which, however, 
 is an unmistakeable Imperative. 
 
 (b) Negatively with ov — 
 
 Aey' €t Ti /SovXei, X^'-P'' ^' ^^ i^avcrets ttotc. EuR. Med. 1 320. 
 
 Speak if thou wilt, but with the hand thou must touch me never. 
 
 Observe (1) that in Euripides ov with the Future is a state- 
 ment, in Aristophanes a question ; (2) that in both passages ov 
 with the Future is co-ordinate with an Imperative. 
 
I50 THE TENSES. 
 
 Note 2. A 'periphrastic Future is formed by /xeAAw with the 
 Present or Future (more rarely the Aorist) Infinitive. 
 fxiXXd) ypd(fi€LV, ypaxj/eiv (rarely ypdxpai). 
 I am going to write, I mean or intend to write. 
 
 /xeAXw v/JLas ayetv els 'Acriav. 
 
 / am going to lead you (am on the point of leading you) into 
 
 Asia. 
 In Asiam vos ducturus sum. 
 
 8€T^(rei Tov TOLOVTOV el jueAAei o] TroAtTeta crixt^earOai. 
 
 Plat. Eep. 412. 
 There will he need of such a ruler if the constitution is to he 
 
 efieXXov in the same way is used — 
 
 efiiXXov or' apa KLvrjaeiv lyw. Ar. Ahth. 1301. 
 Ahaf I thought I should tickle you. 
 
 €VTav6a e/xeXXov KaraXvcreiV. XeN. 
 There they were intending to rest. 
 Ibi deversuri erant. 
 Sometimes /xeAAw, e/xcAAov, means I am doomed, destined. 
 irOts ov /xeAAw, ri ov fxeXXio ; mean Wliy should I not ? 
 
 2. The Future Perfect denotes a finished act or state 
 in the Future : — 
 
 r) irokireia reXecoq KeKOO-firjaerat. Plat. 
 Oicr state shall have been perfectly constituted. 
 
 Note. The Future Perfect, like the Perfect, sometimes de- 
 notes what will take place instantly. 
 
 Compare 
 
 Kciv TOVTO viKiofiev irdvB^ rjp.iv TrcTTotrjrai. XeN. An. L 8. 1 2. 
 
 If we secure this victmy we have done everything. 
 
 with 
 
 4>pa.^€ Kttt TreTTpd^erai. Ar. Plut. 1027. 
 Speak, and it shall he done instanter. 
 
 A periphrastic future perfect active is formed with eiyut — 
 
 TO, Seovra eaopeOa eyvioKores, k.t.X. DeM. Phil. i. 54. 
 H^e shall have determined to do our duty. 
 
GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 151 
 
 § 142. Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. 
 
 Almost any tense in Greek, as in English, can express a 
 customary or a repeated act, or a general truth. 
 
 1. The Present — 
 
 pisijxr^ dfiadrj<s 7roWdKL<s TiKrei pXdfSrjv. EUR. (See above.) 
 Strength ivithout science often causeth harm. 
 Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. 
 
 2. The Perfect^ 
 
 TToWol Scot So^av Kal TroXLTiKrjv Svvafiiv KaKO. TreTrovOaanv. 
 
 Xen. 
 Many have come to trouble (and do come to trouble) in conse- 
 quence of reputation and political power. 
 
 (This perfect alternates with presents in the text.) 
 
 3. The Aorist called GnomiCf as expressing a yv^yL-q, sentiment or 
 general truth — 
 
 dOviiovvres dv8p€<s ovirio rpoiralov ecTTrjcrav. PlAT. 
 Half-hearted men never yet set up a trophy. 
 So in English — "Faint heart never won fair lady." 
 Becviuv' t' drjjxa TrvevfJiOLTUiv l/coi/xtcre (Trevovra ttovtov. 
 
 Soph. Ai. 674. 
 And the breath of dreadful winds husheth ever the moaning 
 
 The present and perfect, the present and aorist, the perfect 
 and aorist, often alternate in the same paragraph. 
 
 The Imperfect and Aorist with dv denote a repeated act. 
 
 dvaXafilSdviDV ovv avTcov to. TroL'qfiaTa Sti^pwrtov dv avTov<s 
 Tt Aeyotev. Plat. Apol. ch. viii. 
 
 Taking up their poems then I used to ash them {I would ask 
 them) what their meaning was. 
 
 €t Tti/€S 'iSotev Trrj rov'i (T<^€rkpovs eTriKparovvras dveddpa-rja-av 
 
 dv. Thug. vii. 71. 
 
 If at any point they saw their own side winning they picked 
 up their courage (as often as this happened). 
 
 For an excellent passage see Soph. Phil. 289-297. 
 
152 THE TENSES. 
 
 § 143- The Tenses in the Moods. 
 
 The distinction previously explained between the Present, 
 the Perfect, and the Aorist, is observed in all the moods, — 
 the Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, Optative, Infinitive, 
 and Participle. Some instances are given to show the differ- 
 ence, especially between the Present and the Aorist. 
 
 Imperative — 
 
 /xT^Sev (f)of3ov, Don't be timid : fxrjSev (jyoPrjOrjSf Don't have 
 
 any fear of this. 
 €L TTYj e^ets avTtAeyetv, dvTtAeye* et Se fxr], Trava-ai TroXXaKts 
 
 Aeywv Tov avrov Xoyov. PlAT. Crit. 
 
 If you have anything to say in objection^ say on {at length, in 
 
 a continued speech), hut if not, give over {at once) repeating 
 
 the same argument. 
 
 Subjunctive or Optative — 
 
 criofxaTi y, ^y, orav 8e tovtov d7raAAayi7, rWvyKev. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 19. 
 
 He never believed that the soul, so long as it exists in this 
 
 mortal body, lives, but that as soon as it is separated from 
 
 it, it dies {y denoting continuance, d-jraXXayy the instant 
 
 act of death). 
 
 Infinitive — 
 
 OV PovXevecrdai eVt w/oa dAAot /BePovXevcrOaL. PlAT. Crit. 
 It is no longer the moment to be making up one's mind, but to 
 
 have it made up. 
 yaXeTTov to Troietv to Be KeXeva-ai paSiov. 
 It is difficult to do {to be engaged in doing), but easy to com- 
 mand {to say ' do this '). 
 
 So with the other Moods. 
 
CHAPTEE VIII. 
 THE THEEE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 1. The Infinitive (a Substantive). 
 
 2. The Participle (an Adjective). 
 
 3. The Verbal Adjectives in -to? and -reo^. 
 
 § 144. Note on the Infinitive. 
 
 The Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Substantive in the 
 Dative case. Though subsequently its uses diverged so widely 
 from this limited signification, yet its origin gives us a clue to 
 its diff'erent meanings. ' 
 
 Thus— 
 
 w/oa aTTievat would mean time for going away. 
 
 Svvaros yev€(r6aL, able for becoming. 
 
 fxavddvecv yJKo/xev, we are come for learning. 
 
 Trapk^bi ifiavTov T^iiveLv koI KauLv, I offer myself for cutting 
 
 and hirning. 
 davfia ISecrdai, a wonder for the vieioing. 
 
 For full information consult Professor Max Midler's 
 Inaugural Oxford Lecture. 
 
 § 145. THi: INFINITIVE. 
 
 The Infinitive is a Verbal Substantive denoting action. 
 Compare to Troteiv with 17 Trotrjcris. 
 
 It has therefore points in common both with (1) the Verb, 
 (2) with the Noun. 
 
 1. Like the Verb 
 
 (a) It has tenses and voices — Xveiv, Xva-eiv, Xva-ai, etc., 
 
 Awat, Xva-aadai, XvdrjvaL. 
 
 (b) It takes a subject before and a predicate after it. 
 
 153 
 
154 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 (c) It governs the same case as its verb. 
 
 (d) It is qualified, like a verb, by adverbs, and not like 
 
 a substantive by adjectives. 
 
 (e) It forms subordinate sentences, the indirect statement, 
 
 a temporal sentence (with Trpiv), a final sentence, 
 a consecutive sentence, with ioa-re and w?, and in 
 connexion with av it is a substitute for the in- 
 dicative and optative moods with av. This last 
 use gives it a sort of right to be called a mood. 
 
 2. Like a Substantive 
 
 (a) It stands as the subject to a verb. 
 
 (b) It is declined with the article as a nominative, accusa- 
 
 tive, genitive, or dative. 
 
 (c) It is connected with Prepositions. 
 
 § 146. tjhe supplementary^ lnfinitive. 
 
 1. The Infinitive supplements the meanings of verbs 
 and nouns (especially of verbs) which in themselves are 
 incomplete. 
 
 e/xaOov TOVTO Troirjcrai. 
 They learned to do this. 
 
 ov 7re(^VK6 BovXeveLV. 
 
 He is not horn to he a slave. 
 
 07j/jLiaTOK\7]<; l/cav(OTaTo<; rjv enrelv kclI yvwvaL kcll 
 irpa^ai. Lys. 
 
 Themistocles was eminently able to speak, to decide, 
 and to act. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the article is added. 
 
 TO /?t^ TToAtTWi/ 8pav e^vv a/xTJxavos. SoPH. Ant. 78. 
 / am by nature incapable of acting in defiance of my fellow- 
 citizens. Cf. Track. 545, 0. C. 442, Aesch. P. F. 865. 
 
 ^ Also called the Complementary, or the Prolate, Infinitive. The 
 term Supplementary seems more simple and intelligible. 
 
THE SUPPLEMENTAR V INFINITIVE. 1 55 
 
 The article marks the Infinitive more distinctly as an 
 object. The Infinitive is not always the Supplementary 
 Infinitive, see Soph. Ant. 265. 
 
 Note 2. It is impossible to give a complete list of all such 
 verbs. They are fairly the same as in English and in Latin, 
 though this Infinitive is much more extensively used in Greek 
 than in Latin. 
 
 The chief verbs perhaps are those expressing — 
 
 (a) Wish and desire (as in Latin), /SovXofiai, deXo), eTriOvfxQ. 
 
 (h) Caution, fear, shame, evXa/Sovnai, okvw, okvos ecrrt, 
 (pojSov/xai, SeSoLKa, ala-yyvoixai. 
 
 For Verbs of Fearing see also Index. 
 
 (c) Intention, determination, ipr](f>t^ofMai (/ vote), eSofe, 
 
 SeSoKTaL, SLavoovfxai, €v vw e'x^* 
 So statuo, constituo, with infinitive in Latin. 
 
 (d) Ability, capability, Jitness, Bwdfiai, oTos re ct/xt, t^^a-n, 
 
 Tre^vKa, as in Latin. 
 
 (e) Duty, necessity, compulsion, Sei, xp-q, avayKrj ka-n, 
 
 6cfi€iXio. So in Latin, except that oportet and 
 necesse est in certain senses take a subjunctive. 
 
 (/) Custom, habit.) chance, €io)6a, v6/xos ia-n, ^vixpaivu, etc. 
 Many of these in Latin, mos est, consuetudo est, 
 contingit, accidit, etc., take ut with subjunctive ; 
 soleo, consuesco, etc., an infinitive. 
 
 The adjectives with which this Supplementary Infinitive 
 goes are of a similar meaning, e.g. Swaros, iKavos, irpoOvfios, 
 
 eTTLTT^SeLOS, OL^LOS, dvOi^LOS, CtC. 
 
 Sometimes the Greek Infinitive with an adjective corresponds 
 with the Latin adjective and the supine in u, e.g. xa^^^Trov 
 Ae^at, difficile dictu. 
 
 2. The Epexegetical (i.e. Explanatory) Infinitive is added 
 to verbs of giving and taking, and to adjectives. This 
 Infinitive further explains the purpose of the verb, or the 
 character of the action, or of the adjective. 
 
156 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 avr)p p^aXeTTO? orv^rjj/. PLA.T. 
 A difficult person to live with. 
 
 Trape'^co hfiavrov tq) tar pea re^veiv Kai Kaieiv. Plat. 
 I offer myself to the physician to cut and hum (me). 
 
 Note 1. Even where the construction is already complete 
 this explanatory Infinitive is sometimes added. 
 
 KaKOV OLOfXaL TTOULV OL OVTO<S TTOtCl, OLvSpa (xSlKCOS i'Tn^'ElpilV 
 
 airoKTivvvvai. PlAT. A][)ol. xviii. 
 
 It is an evil^ I think, to he doing what my opponent is now 
 doing, trying, that is, unjustly to put a man to death. 
 
 T7J^ orrj^ ovK l/ow TLiiyj<s rvx^^v. SoPH. El. 364. 
 
 / am not in love with thy honours — to obtain them. 
 
 ilicne with this infinitive and adjectives helps out this ex- 
 planatory force. 
 
 xpv^pov TO v^iup &(rT€ Xovaraa-Oai. XeN. Mem. iii. 13. 3. 
 
 The wafer is cold to hathe in. 
 
 Ohs. This use should be compared with that of the English 
 gerundive (or to with the dative of the infinitive), a house to let, 
 a letter to write, etc. Both in Latin and Greek the passive 
 infinitive is very unusual, and probably incorrect. 
 
 Note 2. The comparative with rj, or wo-tc tJ, and infinitive. 
 
 TO voar-qfxa fiet^ov ^ <j)kpeiv. SOPH. 0. T. 1293. 
 
 The plague is too great to hear. 
 
 Pestis maior quam quae (ut) tolerari possit. 
 
 fiec^ov 7] wcTTC (fi€p€Lv 8vva(T9aL KaKOV rrj iroXet crvfj-Patvci. 
 
 Xen. Mem. vi. 5. 17. 
 A calamity befalls the state too great for it to bear. 
 
 Note 3. w§, ws ye, with the infinitive limit the application. 
 
 aoTrXoL ws €K x^'pos pdx^crOai. Xen. Cyr. vi. 4. 16. 
 Unarmed so far as fighting hand to hand goes (i.e. if they 
 come to close quarters). 
 
 eS Xeyet 6 avrfp w? ye ovTiocrl dKovcrai. XeN. Cyr. vi. 14. 6. 
 The man speaks well enough just to listen to in this ivay (i.e. 
 if that is all you consider). 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 157 
 
 To this head belong certain idiomatic infinitives. 
 
 , . ^ \so to say. 
 
 ws enreiv, J / 
 
 (OS eVt Trav ciVetv, speaking gen- 
 erally. 
 
 (OS aTrAws etTretv, "j to speok 
 
 (OS crweAovTt > briefly , con- 
 eiTretv, ) cisely. 
 
 €s TO (XK/ot/?€s etTTeiv, strictly 
 speaking. 
 
 (OS eUda-aL, to make a guess. 
 
 (Tvv OeQ eiVeii/, in God's name. 
 
 (Tx^^ov etTreiv, almost, SO to say, 
 paene dixerim. 
 
 Ikcoi/ €?vat (in negative sen- 
 tences), willingly. €K(ov is 
 the predicate to etVat. 
 
 oXL-yov Setv, all but. 
 
 Kara tovto etvat, in this respect. 
 
 00-01/ ye fx eiSevat, so /(2?* as / 
 know. 
 
 § 147. The Subject before and the Predicate after 
 the Infinitive (commonly called the Accusative 
 with the Infinitive). 
 
 The Infinitive, like other parts of the verb, takes a Subject 
 before and a Predicate after. The Predicate is, of course, in 
 the same case as the Subject. The Predicate may often be 
 the Supplementary Predicate, in which case the Infinitive is, 
 of course, part of the Predicate. The following examples will 
 explain this construction. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Verb. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 omitted. 
 
 ilflL 
 
 'Adrjvatos 
 
 / 
 
 am 
 
 an Athenian. - 
 
 omitted. 
 
 iTrrjXdov 
 
 aKXrjTOt 
 
 they 
 
 advanced 
 
 unbidden 
 
 Kvpos 
 
 €y€l/€TO 
 
 Trp69vfxos 
 
 Cyrus 
 
 showed himself 
 
 willing 
 
 omitted. 
 
 yevov 
 
 7rp6dviio<s 
 
 
 show thyself 
 
 willing 
 
 omitted. 
 
 eyevovTo 
 
 evSaifjioves 
 
 they 
 
 became 
 
 happy 
 
158 
 
 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Verb. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 il^ri) 
 
 omitted 
 
 etvaL 
 
 'A6r)vaio<s 
 
 lie said 
 
 that he 
 
 was 
 
 an Athenian 
 
 (ecfiacrav) 
 
 omitted 
 
 eireXOetv 
 
 aKXlJTOi 
 
 they said 
 
 that they 
 
 advanced 
 
 unbidden 
 
 (e(f)aarav) 
 
 Kvpov 
 
 yevka-Bai 
 
 Trpodvfxov 
 
 they said 
 
 that Cyrus 
 
 showed himself 
 
 willing 
 
 (Seo/xai) 
 
 <TOV 
 
 yevecrdat 
 
 irpodvixov 
 
 I beg 
 
 you 
 
 to show thyself 
 
 willing 
 
 m-) 
 
 aVTOLS 
 
 yeveardaL 
 
 ev^ai 1X0(7 LV 
 
 it was permitted 
 
 them 
 
 to become 
 
 happy 
 
 1. Predicate in Nominative. 
 
 eyfrrjcpLaaade e^eXOelv l3o7]6r](70VT6<;. Dem. 
 You resolved to march out to the rescue. 
 
 2. Genitive. 
 
 eheovTo Kvpov «9 TrpoOv/jLorarov yepeaOac. 
 
 They were 
 as possible. 
 
 Xen. 
 Cyrus to show himself as energetic 
 
 3. Dative. 
 
 evhaip^oaiv vjmv e^eart ylyvecrdac. Dem. 
 It is permitted you to become happy. 
 
 Note 1. Just as in Latin we may use the Accusative for a 
 Dative, e.g. licet esse beatum, for licet esse beato, so in Greek 
 an Accusative Predicate sometimes takes the place of a 
 Genitive or a Dative Predicate. 
 
 e^ecTTLV vfJLiv \af36vTa<s oirXa fSorjdGiv. 
 For Xaf^ovcTLv 077 Aa. 
 
 tdeovTO fxov TrpocrTaTrjv yivkadai. 
 For Tvpoa-rdrov. 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 159 
 
 The explanation is that the mind has inserted the Accusa- 
 tive Subject before the Infinitive, licet mihi me esse beatum, 
 l^ecTTiv v\}lv v/xas XajSovras oVAa ^oyjdetv. 
 
 Note 2. The personal passive construction is used in Greek 
 side by side with the impersonal passive followed by the 
 Accusative and Infinitive, the former being the commoner. 
 
 6 Kvpos rjyykXOr] VLKTJcraL. XeN. 
 
 Cyrus was reported to have conquered. 
 
 Aeyerat 'AA/ci/JtaSryv UepLKXel SiaXexOrjvai irepl voficov. 
 
 Xen. 
 It is said that Alcibiades conversed with Pericles about the 
 laws. 
 
 This construction should be compared with the Latin 
 (traditur, fertur, dicitur, existimatur, videtur, creditur, etc., 
 etc., with an Infinitive); e.g. existimatur errare, probus esse, 
 he is thought to be mistaken, to be upright {it is thought that 
 he, etc.) See Zumpt § 607 and note. But the Greek con- 
 struction is much freer, and follows many adjectives. 
 
 Certain adjectives, SUaLos, agio's, worthy ; eTrtr^JSeios (fit), 
 i-n-iSo^os {probable), dvayKatos {necessary), may take either a 
 personal or an impersonal construction with the Infinitive. 
 Thus we may say either SUaLos cIijll ravTa ttoulv or SUaiov 
 ecTTiv i/xe ravTa ttoulv, I am justified in SO doing or it is right for 
 me so to do. 
 
 Instances of SUaios occur in Plato's Apology ii. 1, Crito iv., 
 Soph. Ant. 400. 
 
 Note 3. SoKio is generally personal : 
 
 cS Aeyetv jjlol 8ok€lt€, I think you speak well. 
 Cf. TO IS vrAeto-Tots ^Sokovv, most people thought (they seemed to 
 most). 
 
 cSo£a oLKova-aL, I thought I heard. 
 
 BoKb) jxoi Tov ovov cjctyetv, lam determined to lead out the ass. 
 The impersonal SoKct tlvl is rare : 8ok€l, eSo^e, it is decreed, 
 is diff'erent. With Sokoj, 8oKd, cf. the use of eotKa, / seem, 
 varying with eotKe, and the Latin, videor mihi, videtur mihi. 
 
 Note 4. The Infinitive is used for the imperative in formal or 
 solemn language, in poetry more freely. 
 
i6o THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 {a) In legal orders or official commands. 
 
 OLKoveTe Aco) . . . TTLveiv vtto ry]<s (rdXTnyyos. Ar. Ach. 1000. 
 Hear ye, good people all I drink to the trumpet's sound. 
 With aKovtre compare yes ! 
 {h) In prayers. 
 
 Oeol TToXirai, fx-q fxe SovAeta? tu;)(€?v. AeSCH, 
 Gods of my country, let me not meet with slavery (grant 
 that, etc.). 
 
 Examples occur in Soph. Elect. 9, Ant. 1080 (where a king 
 speaks), Thuc. v. 9, vi. 34. 
 
 Note 5. The Infinitive is used in expressions of surprise. 
 (Cf. Lat. *Mene incepto desistere victam.') 
 
 rrjs fiiDptas, to Ata vo/>ti^eiv, oVra rrjXLKOvrovL. 
 
 Ar. Nub. 819. 
 TfTiat folly I to think of a man of his years believing in Zeus ! 
 
 Note 6. The tenses of the Infinitive correspond to the tenses 
 of the Indicative throughout in the character of the action (as 
 continued, finished, or indefinite). 
 
 They only express distinctions of time when representing 
 the Indicative of the Recta in indirect statements or direct 
 questions. 
 
 But the Present Infinitive sometimes represents an Imper- 
 fect and not a Present Indicative. 
 
 Tivas ovv €vxa<s VTroXafi/SdveT €v\<e(T6ai rov ^lXlttttov ot' 
 
 €(T7rev8€v ; Dem. de F. L. 381. 10. 
 
 Wliat vows do you suppose Philip was offering when he was 
 making libations ? 
 
 This is often the case after t<l>y)v. So in Latin, memini 
 me dicere means / remember I was saying (also accepimus, 
 scribit). See Zumpt, § 589, note. 
 
 Madvig first pointed out this, § 171. 6, Rem. 1. It is fully 
 discussed in Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 15. 
 
 § 148. THE INFINITIVE AS A NOUN. 
 
 1. The Infinitive, like a Substantive, may stand either 
 as the Subject or the Predicate of a sentence. 
 
THE INFINITIVE AS A NOUN. i6i 
 
 Subject. Predicate. Predicate. 
 
 TO BiKijv BiBovat irorepov Traa'^eiv ri earLv rj irotelv ; 
 
 To pay a penalty 1 is it ( to suffer or ( to do something ? 
 
 Paying a penalty j \ suffering \ doing. Plato. 
 
 So in English " to see is to believe" seeiug is believing. 
 
 Rarely but sometimes without the article, a-io^ypovdv KaAov, 
 Soph. AL, discretion is a virtue. 
 
 2. The Infinitive with the Article is declined throughout 
 like a Substantive. Its cases then follow the construc- 
 tions of the Nominative, Accusative, Genitive, and Dative. 
 Its oblique cases are connected with Prepositions. 
 Unlike ordinary Substantives, however, it (1) can govern 
 the same case as its verb, and (2) can be qualified by an 
 adverb. It corresponds to the Latin Infinitive and 
 Gerund. 
 
 Nom. TO KoXax; ^rjv, a noble life, honeste vivere. 
 Ace. TO KoXax; ^rjv, a noble life, honeste vivere (with 
 
 preposition), honeste vivendum. 
 Gen. Tov KoXax; ^rjv, of a noble life, honeste vivendi. 
 Dat. tS Ka\a)<; ^rjv, for or by a noble life, honeste 
 vivendo. 
 
 So Bia TO KaXa)<; ^rjv, €V (tt/oo*?) tw /caXco? ^rjv, uvtI 
 (eveKo) TOV KaX(o<i ^rjv. 
 
 Note, (a) Infinitive Nominative : 
 
 It is used like the Latin quod with Indicative (the fact or 
 circumstance that). 
 
 TO HeXoTrovvr^(TLOV<s avrots fir] /^orjOrjcraL Trapecryjiv vp.iv 
 Sa/Atwv KoXaa-iv, ThUC. i. 41. 
 
 The circumstance that the Feloponnesians did not help them 
 enabled you to chastise the Samians. 
 
 (b) The Dative is often a Dative of means, cause, or circum- 
 stance, instrument, like the Gerund in -do. 
 
 K€KpdTrfK€ ^tXnnros to) TrpoTcpos yevecrOaL. Dem. 
 Philip has succeeded by being foremost in the field, 
 L 
 
i62 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 (c) The Genitive is very often Objective. 
 
 rjiretyovTO Trpos rov Trorafxov tov ttuIv eTrcOvfiia. 
 
 Thuc. vii. 84. 
 
 They were hurrying to the river im, their desire to drink {of 
 
 drinl 
 
 The Genitive of the Infinitive sometimes expresses the aim 
 or purpose (usually in this sense it takes IveKo). The idiom 
 is considered either a genitive of value or a genitive of cause. 
 
 (See Causal Genitive.) 
 
 kruxiady] ^ AraXavTrj rj vrjcros tov /xf; XycrTas KaKovpyetv 
 
 rrjv EvBoiav. ThUC. ii. 32 (cf. i. 4). 
 
 21ie island of Atalante was fortified in order that the pirates 
 
 might not injure Euhoea {with a view to their not, etc.). 
 
 The construction is not very common, but thoroughly estab- 
 lished, in Attic Prose. The only thing in Latin like it is the 
 genitive with the Gerundive, a construction which frequently 
 occurs in Livy : haec prodendi imperii Romani, tradendae Hanni- 
 hali victoriae sunt, xxvii. 9 ; aequandae libertatis esse, xxxviii. 50. 
 See Zumpt, § 662, note 2. 
 
 § 149. THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The Participle has three different uses. 
 
 A. It is an attributive to a Substantive. 
 
 6 Trapcjv '^povo'i, the ]present time. 
 
 B. It qualifies the principal Verb of a sentence like a 
 Supplementary Predicate, or Adverbial Sentence. 
 
 ravra eirparre (tt parity oov. 
 
 He was doing this while he ivas general. 
 
 C. It supplements the meaning of a verb, the meaning 
 of which would otherwise be incomplete (cf the Supple- 
 mentary Infinitive). 
 
THE PARTICIPLE AS AN ATTRIBUTIVE. 163 
 
 (a.) The Participle agrees with the Subject. 
 
 TTavofjuat (j)LXo<TO(pa)v, 
 I leave off philosophising. 
 
 (b.) The Participle agrees with, and is the Predicate 
 to, the Object. 
 
 Travco ae ^Ckoa-o^ovvra, 
 
 I make you leave off philosophising. 
 
 § 150. TBE PARTICIPLE AS AN ATTRIBUTIVE. 
 
 A. 1. The Participle when joined to a Substantive cor- 
 responds to an Adjective, or more frequently to a Eelative 
 sentence. 
 
 at AioXov vrjaoL Ka\ov[xevai. Thuc. 
 The so-called islands of Aeolus (or, the islands of 
 Aeolus, as they are called). 
 
 6 KaTei\7j(j>(o<i KLvSvvo<; ttjv ttoXlv. Dem. 
 The danger which has overtaken the state. 
 
 2. The Participle with the Article, when the Substan- 
 tive is omitted, becomes itself a Substantive. 
 
 ol \eyovT6^, the speakers. 
 
 ol BpdaavTe<i, the doers. 
 
 6 TV)(u)v, the first-comer. 
 
 6 /SovX6fX€vo<s, any one who will (see Article). 
 
 ot Trpoa-rjKovTes, relations, propinqui. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Participle with the Article signifies, in 
 a sort of final sense, one who is ready, p-epared or willing, to do 
 so and so. 
 
 Tj X^P^ dyaOrj ^v Kal €i'T](rav ol epyaaofxevoi. 
 
 Xen. An. ii. 4. 22. 
 
 The soil teas rich and there loere people to till it. 
 
i64 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 Note 2. Many neuter Participles are Substantival. 
 
 TO <rvix<p€pov, expediency, utile, utilitas. With an Adjective 
 in agreement, ra fXLKpa o-v/x^epoi/ra rrjs ttoAcws, Dem. The 
 small interests of the state. 
 
 TO. Seovra, duties or duty, officia. 
 
 Thucydides and the poets use a neuter present participle as 
 a Substantive, where an Infinitive would be more usual. 
 
 €v T(j) fXT) //cAeTwvTt, by Want of training ( = €y rep ixrj fxcXerav). 
 TO ScStd?, fear=TO SeStevat, TO daparovv = to 6apcr€iv=To 
 
 Odpa-os. Thug. 
 TO voa-ovv=:To vo(T€iv=rj vocros. Soph. Phil. 674. 
 
 In the poets ot reKovrcs, parents ; 6 tckwv, the father • 
 rj T6/covo-a, the mother {rj TiKTovaa also. Soph.). 6 cKetVov 
 T€K(ov, his father, to Trrorjdev cry ^vxVi ^^^ icild fluttering in thy 
 heart, EuR. Bacch. 1269. 
 
 B. The Participle qualifies the Principal Verb like 
 a Supplementary Predicate or an Adverbial Sentence, 
 (Conditional, Temporal, Causal, etc.). 
 
 These usages of the Participle are very common in 
 Greek, and are most important to notice. The particles 
 which bring out the special significance of the Participle 
 in each case should be carefully noticed. The different 
 usages are given under the heads of the different sentences 
 in the Compound Sentence. (See Index) 
 
 Note 3. The Participle in a Sentence expresses circumstance 
 or manner generally. 
 
 The particles ovtws, totc, en-a, Kara [koI ilra), CTretTa are 
 put before the Principal Verb. The sense hovers between 
 that of time and of circumstance. 
 
 To this head belong the phrases (as old as Homer), ti /xa^wv ; 
 XL TraOiov ; in the obliqua oTt jxaSuiv, Tra^wv. 
 
 Tt /u,a^oi/T€s IfxapTvpeiTi vfjL€i<s ; Dem. 45. 38. 
 fVhat induced you to give evidence ? 
 
 Tt Tra^ovcrat dv-qrais ei^acrt yvvat^t ; Ar. Nub. 341. 
 JVliat has hapj^ened to {the clouds) that they look like mortal 
 women? 
 So Ti cxwv ; Ti Pov\6fjL€vo<s ; Plat. Phaed. 236, e. 
 
THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 165 
 
 All these phrases are periphrases for whyl wherefore? to 
 liaOuiv ; learning what, on what inducement ? denotes an internal 
 motive; ti nadiov ; ailing or experiencing what? denotes an 
 
 external cause (on what compulsion 1). 
 
 « 
 
 Note 4. Under this head comes also the peculiar use of 
 exoiv in colloquialisms, 
 
 TTota vTroSr^/xara (j)\vap€i<s €\(j)v ; PlaT. 
 
 JFhat sort of shoes do you keep on chattering about ? 
 
 ri \r]p€Ls €X(^y ; lit. talk nonsense in so behaving. 
 Why do you incessantly trifle ? 
 
 ri KVTTTd^ets exwv irepl rrjv Bvpav ; ArISTOPH. 
 JVhy do you keep on poking about at the door ? 
 
 Note 5. The Participle in a Comparative sense with the 
 Subjective particles ws and cocnrep, as if, as though, as thinking. 
 SeStacrt tov ddvarov o)s ev etSores otl fi^yicrTov twi' KaKwj/ 
 
 la-TL. Plat. Apol. xvii. 
 Men fear death as though they knew for certain that it is 
 the greatest of evils. 
 
 § 151. THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 The Genitive Absolute {i.e. a Participle agreeing with 
 a Genitive which is not in the main construction of the 
 sentence) is equivalent to an Adverbial sentence, either 
 Conditional, Temporal, Causal, Concessive, or expressing 
 Circumstances generally. 
 
 The same particles which accompany the simple Par- 
 ticiple {e.g. fjb6Ta^v, m, etc.) go with the Genitive Absolute. 
 
 ravra eirpa^drj Kovcovo^ (TTpaT7jryovpTo<;. ISOCR. 
 These operations were carried out when K. was general. 
 
 ovK dv rjXOov Sevpo v/jliov prj K€\€Vovt(x)V. 
 
 I sho'uld not have come here if you had not ordered me. 
 (OS toS' kypvTiov TtovS' eTTta-TaarOai ere xp-q. SoPH. Ai. 
 On the understanding (as knowing) that this is so, thou must 
 form thy judgment (i.e. thou must knoiv that it is even so). 
 
i66 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 Note. The Participle alone, without the Genitive being 
 expressed, occurs (see Genitive Case, Genitive Absolute) — 
 
 (a.) Where the Genitive is easily supplied from context — 
 
 ol h\ TToXefiLOL, TrpocTLovTiav (sc. Ttuv 'EAAt^vwv men- 
 tioned just before), rews jxev rjcrvxoi^ov. 
 
 Xen. An. V. 4. 16. 
 The enemy, as they were approaching, for a while were 
 remaining quiet. 
 Cf. iv. 8. 5, c/9WT)JcravTOs (sc. avTOv). 
 
 (b.) In certain impersonal expressions — 
 
 ovTiDs exovTwv. Xen. An. v. 4. 16. 
 Such being the case, quae quum ita sint. 
 
 €(rayy€\0€VTMv on at vrJ€<s irXkova-i. ThUC. i. 116. 
 On the neivs arriving that the ships ivere sailing. 
 
 vovTos TToAA'o (sc. Alos). Xen. Hell. i. 1. 16 (cf. Ar. 
 Vesp. 774). 
 
 Cf. ThUC. i. 74 (Sr)X(i)ehro<s), XeN. Cyr. i. 4. 18 (a-rjfiav- 
 OevTiov). Compare the Latin Ablative Past Participle Passive 
 (cognito, edicto, etc.) agreeing with the whole sentence. 
 
 The Participle is very rarely omitted. 
 
 MS €fJ.ov fi6v7]S TreAas (sc. ovcrrjs). SoPH. 0. C. 83. 
 Since I alone am at thy side. 
 
 § 152. The Genitive Absolute in Greek and the 
 Ablative Absolute in Latin. 
 
 Great care must be taken not always to use one where we 
 should use the other. The Greek has a perfect series of 
 active participles, the Latin has no past participle active 
 except in the case of Deponents. 
 
 Therefore in Latin we may write — 
 
 His verbis editis egressi sunt. 
 So saying they went out. 
 But in Greek this would be — 
 
 TavTa eLTTOvTts l^yecrav, 
 and not 
 
THE A ecus A TIVE ABSOL UTE. 1 67 
 
 which would mean vchen this had been said (by others) they went 
 out. 
 
 Nor, on the other hand, would Latin tolerate such an 
 apparently slovenly structure as the following : — 
 
 Sia^€j8ryKOTOS "qSyj Ile/otKAeovs, rjyyeXdr] avT<^. 
 
 After P. had already crossed, neivs was brought him. 
 
 In Latin we should write — 
 
 Pericli iam transgresso nuntiatum est. 
 
 S 153- ^^^ ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE, 
 
 Instead of the Genitive Absolute the Accusative 
 Absolute is used with Participles of Impersonal verbs and 
 certain other expressions.-^ 
 
 A. Impersonal Verbs : Beov, ef oV, irapov, TrpoarJKov, 
 fjLeXov, /jb6Ta/jbe\ov, Bokovv, tv^ov, So^av or So^avra (jaifTo). 
 
 B. Passive Participles used impersonally : Trpocrrax^ev, 
 eiprjiJbevoVy yeypufjufievovy BeBoyfjuevov, rrpoarerayfjuevov. 
 
 C. Adjectives with ov used impersonally ; ahifvarov ov, 
 aicT'^pov ov, etc. 
 
 The particles w?, w^irep (as though, as thinking that), 
 etc., may accompany the Accusative Absolute. The 
 Accusative Absolute is equivalent to an Adverbial Sen- 
 tence, Causal, Temporal, Circumstantial, and especially 
 semi-Temporal and semi-Concessive. 
 
 ouSet? e^ov eip7)vr]v ayeiv iroXepbov alprjaeTac. 
 JS'o one will choose war when it is in his power to be 
 at peace. 
 
 QL Be TpLaKovra, «9 e^ov ^Brj avroi^ rvpavvelv aBe(c<; 
 
 irpoeiiTov. Xen. 
 The Thirty thinking it was now m their power to 
 
 play the despot with impunity, issued a,n edict, etc. 
 
 ^ Ohs. — This is doubtless an Internal Accusative, probably of respect. 
 Compare for instance rhv avrbv rpoirou with So^au T]fxiu ravra. 
 
1 68 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 ov^^L Be eawaa^ev otov re ov kclI Buvarov. Plat. 
 We did not save you when {though) it was feasible and 
 possible. 
 
 ho^avra v/juv ravra, eikeaOe apBpa<i htcarov. Andok. 
 On coming to this resolution {decree), you appointed a 
 hundred men. 
 
 (nanrfi eBecTrvovv, oi^irep tovto Trpo^rerayfievov. 
 
 Xen. 
 They luere taking their meal in silence, as though they 
 had been ordered to do so. 
 
 For other examples see Thug. i. 126 (vn-dpxov), viii. 79 
 (So^ai/). For passive participles see Thuc. i. 125 {SeSoyfievov), 
 V. 30 {elprjpevov), V. 5Q {yeypapp^kvov). 
 
 Sometimes a personal verb is found with the Accusative 
 Absolute, but then usually with the subjective particles w?, 
 cos7re/o. 
 
 eVtot Twv d8eX<f)0iv d/xcAovcrtv utsTrep ov yiyvofxevovs (J)lXov<s. 
 Some men neglect their hvthers under the impression that they 
 do not become friends. 
 
 Xen. Mem. ii. 3. 3 (quotation shortened). 
 
 Cf. Mem. i. 2. 20. But Xen. Hell. iii. 2. 19 {So^ayra ravra 
 
 Koi TTcpavOevra), ThUC. iv. 125 {Kvp(i)$kv ovSev). 
 
 § 154. VERBALS IN -reo^;. 
 
 Verbals in -Teo^; imply necessity. They take the same 
 case as the verb to which they belong. The agent is 
 generally in the Dative (but see below). The verbal has 
 two constructions, the Personal and the Impersonal. 
 
 § 155. A. THE PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 aaKTjrea eari not, rj aperrj. 
 
 You must practise virtue, 
 Colenda est tibi virtus. 
 
THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. 169 
 
 § 156. B. THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 Here the verbal is either singular or plural. 
 ' aaKriTeoVi 1 ^ / ^ > f 
 
 , / V e(TTL CrOi T7]V ap6TT}V. 
 
 acTKrjTea, ) 
 
 €7ndvtjbr}Teov,l > v ^ > ^ / « > « 1^^. 
 
 > /I / i ^^'^^ '^^^^ avupwiTOLf; tt?? aperm* UEM. 
 
 eTnuvfjbtjTea, j 
 
 Men must covet virtue. 
 
 Note. The agent, however, in Attic, is fairly often in the 
 Accusative, instead of the Dative. 
 
 ovSivl TpoTTO) (f)d/jL€v c/covTtt? dStKYfTcov iTvai. PlAT. Crit. 
 We maintain that in no way must we deliberately commit in- 
 justice. 
 
 And the Dative and Accusative are both found together. 
 Eur. Phoen. 710, 712. 
 
 § 157. C. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The Supplementary Participle is used, much like the 
 Supplementary Infinitive, to complete the meaning of 
 many verbs and verbal phrases. It agrees either (1) with 
 the Subject, or (2) with the Object of the verb. 
 
 § 158. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE LN 
 AGREEMENT WITH THE SUBJECT 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 The Participle is used wdth the following classes of 
 Verbs : — 
 
 * Verbs marked thus have peculiar usages which are ex- 
 plained in the notes. 
 
 A. Yerhs of Saying and Perceiving (see Indirect 
 Statement). These verbs differ from the following 
 because they can equally take a finite mood with otl or 
 «9, thus showing the substantival character of the con- 
 struction which thev introduce. 
 
I70 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 B. Verbs of Mental Emotion. 
 
 Xaipo), 1780/xat, ax^oixat, dyavaKTio (I am vexed), xaAcTrw? (fi€pu) 
 (I am vexed), /Aera/x-eAo/xat, juera/xeAet fioL (/ repent, regret), avk- 
 XOfiai (I endure), p^Si'w? ^epw (/ easily bear). 
 
 ycLLpova-iv aKovovTe<; e^era^ofievtav rwv av6p(07ra)v. 
 
 Plat. 
 
 They like to hear people cross-questioned. 
 
 Xp7]p.dTii)v ovK ato-^vvet eTrt/xeAov/tevos ; PlAT. 
 
 Are you not ashamed to be devoting yourself to money-making ? 
 
 /D^Stws <^e/0€fcs 1^/xas aTToAetTTWV. PlAT. 
 
 You donH mind leaving us behind (you make light of doing so). 
 
 C. Verbs of beginning, continuing, and ending an action 
 (including persevering and growing weary). 
 
 *dpxopai, *v7rdpxo>, (jiOdvio, SiaTcAw, Bcdyta, SLaytyvofxaL (7 
 continue), iravofiaL, direiprjKa, and KdfjLvio (I grow tired). 
 
 Tov XoLTTOv fiiov Ka6ei>8ovT€<; ^lareXolr av. Plat. 
 
 You would go on sleeping for the rest of your lives. 
 
 ov fiT) TravcTcofiao (pc\o(TO(f)cov. PlaT. 
 
 Never will I give over the pursuit of ivisdom. 
 
 OVK dvk^opai ^wcra. EURIP. 
 
 / will not endAire to live, 
 
 D. Verbs of being manifest, being detected {convicted), 
 
 and of escaping notice. 
 
 *8^Aos €t^tt (Sr^Aw, intrans.), *cf>av€p6s elp^i, *<f)aivop,aL, SeU- 
 vviu, XavOdvo), dAtcTKo/xat (the active form is alptj). 
 
 S^Xo9 el KaTa^povwv. Plat. 
 It is clear that you despise me. 
 8eL^(o avTov a^tov ovra. Dem. 
 / will prove that he is worthy. 
 eBec^av kroLpLOL ovTe<;. ThuC. 
 They showed that they were ready, 
 (pavepoi, €LaLv aycovL^dpLevoc iravre^. Xen. 
 It is evident that they all are contending. 
 
NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 171 
 
 TIifKeco^ 'yap a^ta 
 7raTpo<; r A^CXXeco^; ep'ya Bpcov <^av7](TeTai. Euu. 
 
 He shall he seen to do great deeds 
 worthy of Peleus, and his sire Achilles. 
 <j)ov€a eXavdave P6(tk(ov. Hdt. 
 He was entertaining a murderer unawares, 
 eav Se aXco9 eTi tovto Trparrcop, airoBavel. Plat. 
 ^ If you are caught again in this 'pursuit, you shall die 
 
 {if you are convicted of folloioing it any longer). 
 
 So 8r;Aw, Soph. 0. C. 556, and Ai. 472, Ant. 20 (in nomina- 
 tive attraction). SeiKw/xi (see third example above) may be 
 intransitive, EuR. /. A. 436, Thuc. 72. The above verbs, 
 however, have several other constructions, for which see 
 below. 
 
 § 159. Note on Special Verbs. 
 
 1. apxop^aL takes both the Infinitive and Participle, more 
 usually the Infinitive. The Participle seems to denote, more 
 than the Infinitive, that the act is going on. 
 
 yjp^avTO oiKoSo/Mcii'. 
 
 They began to build (of the intention). 
 
 'qp^avTO oiKoBofiovvTCS. 
 They began the building (the act going on). 
 See Thuc. i. 107. 
 
 2. vTrdp)(^u). 
 
 eav T15 17/xas ev Trotwv vTrdpxrj. XeN. 
 
 If any one first confers a kindness on us. 
 
 Otherwise virdpxoi is used almost like Tvy^dvia. 
 
 virdpyei kydpo^ wv. DeM. 
 He is an enemy {to begin with). 
 
 3. (f>ddvo). 
 
 {a) €(}>6a(r€ {€<j)6if)) dfjuKOfXiVOS. 
 He ivas beforehand in arriving. 
 
 ovK av <f>ddvoL<s Aeywv (gen. of 2d person). 
 
 Make haste, speak — or, quick, quick speak. (Lit. you could 
 not anticipate {my icish, or your duty) in speaking.) 
 
172 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 The phrase forms an urgent command. Cf. Eur. Or. 936, 
 Ale. 662, Arist. Fl. 1133. 
 
 Cf. Aeye (fiddcras, speaJc 
 Quin statim loquere ! 
 
 In the last example cfiSdvo) is in the Participle. 
 
 So dv€(p^ds /xe (f)Odcra<g. ArIST. 
 
 You opened the door before me (got the start of me). 
 
 Cf. Thuc. iv. 8. 
 
 4. dvvT(j} (/ achieve) is used like (ftddvto. 
 avvcrov viroSvcrdiievos. AriST. 
 
 Look sharp and put your shoes on. 
 
 dvvaas dvoiye. 
 
 Look alive and open the door. 
 
 5. alaxyvofxaL. 
 alcr\yvofxai Xeywv. 
 
 I am ashamed of saying (while I do say). 
 
 ai(r)(yvoixaL Aeyetv. 
 
 / am ashamed to say (and generally, / refrain from saying). 
 
 6. dTTOKdjJLVO). 
 
 drroKdfivd) tovto TroLiov. 
 I am weary of doing this. 
 
 aTTOKdflVO) TOVTO TTOietv. 
 
 I leave off doing this through weariness. 
 
 7. S^Aos €t/xt. Several constructions. 
 (a) The personal construction tvith participle. 
 
 SrjXos '^v olofievos. Xen. 
 It was evident that he thought. 
 
 The personal construction with ws and participle. 
 8rj\6<i icTTiv tos Tt Bpaa-euov KaKov, SOPH. Ai. 
 It is plain that he is craving to do some ill (hpaa-dta, de- 
 siderative). 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 242 ; ^\oU (verb) ws. 
 
 (h) The personal and the imperso7ial construction with oti and 
 finite mood. 
 
 hrjXoL elcriv otl €TnKii(T0VTai. XeN. 
 It is clear that they will attack us. 
 
NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 173 
 
 S^Aoj/ koniv OTt 7rav(rojxai. PlAT. 
 It is evident that I shall give over, 
 
 8. <f>av€p6<s elfJii, and (f>avep6v l(TTi : d/OKw (J suffice), apK€L, it is 
 
 sufficient (Soph. Ant. 547) : tKavos et/^t, iKavov ian, are simi- 
 larly constructed either with the participle (personally) or 
 with OTt and a finite mood. 
 
 9. cf)aLvo[xaL takes the Participle and the Infinitive. 
 (jiaiveTai dvrjp dyaOos ecvac' 
 
 He seems to he {is considered) a brave man. 
 Videtur esse fortis. 
 The appearance or opinion may be groundless. 
 
 c^aiVcrat dvrjp dyaOos wv. 
 
 He shows himself (proves himself, manifestly is) a brave rmin. 
 Cf. appareo in Latin. 
 
 Apparebat certaraen fore. Liv. It was evident there would 
 
 be a struggle. 
 Apparebat utilis. Suet. So ^/erS*)? </>aivcTat (utv omitted). 
 
 (rrjfiiLa <f>atv€is { = (f>aLV€L) ycyws. SoPH. El. 24. 
 You show proofs that you are. 
 
 10. XavOdvd). 
 
 \iXrj6a ifiavTov eiSw?. XeN. 
 
 / know without myself being aware of it. 
 
 Horace (Od. iii. 16. 32) and Propertius (i. 4. 5) imitate 
 this Greek construction. 
 
 e.g. HoR. Fallit sorte beatior=.Xa.v$dvei oXpaarfpa ovaa. 
 
 Rarely in Attic Xadiav is used participially with a \erb=r 
 ^secretly, clam. 
 
 11. Tvyxavm, and (in poetry) kv/ow. 
 Itv\ov TrpocrcXOoyv dvSpt. PlAT. 
 / chanced to meet a man. 
 
 7rpo<s TL tovt' eiTTWv Kvp€i<; ; SoPH. El. 
 JVhy is it thou speakest thus ? 
 
 The notion of chance is often almost lost in both verbs. 
 They often denote mere coincidence in time, just then. Botk 
 are used sometimes without a participle. 
 
 vvv dypota-L rvyxdvci. SOPII. El. 
 
 At this moment he happens to be abroad. 
 
174 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 12. oLxofxat denotes rapidity and completeness. 
 
 ot)(€Tai (j)€vy(ov. 
 Celeriter fugit. 
 
 Oi^OlXaL cf)€p<l)V. 
 
 Celeriter aufero. 
 
 ot\€TaL daviov. 
 
 He is dead and gone. 
 
 13. SrJAo? €t/zi (above), cliavepos €11X1, kavddvb) are also con- 
 structed with on and finite mood. For XavOdvo) oVt see 
 Plat. Crito, xii. 
 
 14. The Poets use this Supplementary Participle with 
 a great many verbs, e.g. verbs implying superiority and 
 inferiority (vtKw, i^TTw/xat, eXXecirofjLai) : doing right or wrong 
 (aSiKW, a/Aapravo), eS or KaAws ttoiw). 
 
 § l60. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN 
 AGREEMENT WITH THE OBJECT 
 
 Tlie Participle is the Predicate to the Object. 
 
 The Verbs which take this Participle are mostly the 
 active forms of those in the previous rule, but the cor- 
 respondence is not complete. 
 
 A. Verbs of stopping {making to cease), finding and 
 detecting, overlooJdng (i.e. allowing to be done). 
 
 Travw (/ make to cease, cf. Travo/xat), Tveptopcj and icfiopu), I 
 overlook {irepuiSov, eTretSor), but not €(3, SetKvvjjLi (I point out), 
 KaraXafi^dvo), alpC) (see aXia-Kofiai in previous rule), <f)iDpo), 
 I detect, catch, convict. 
 
 ry6X(Ji)VTa<i e'^Opov^ irava-o/jbev. SoPH. 
 We will check the merriment of our foes. 
 
 /JLJ] irepiiBcofiev v^ptaSelaav rrjv AaKeBaLfiova. ISAEUS. 
 Let us not look on and see Lacedaemon oviraged, 
 
 ov ;(ai/o>ya-et?* dXXd ae kXctttovO' alp-qcrtji. ArIST. 
 You shan't get off scot free. No, Til catch you thieving. 
 
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 175 
 
 B. Verbs of perception (see Indirect Statement, § 167). 
 
 Note. 1. Observe, however, that Verbs of Perception may be 
 used with a Supplementary Participle which is not equivalent 
 to an Indirect Sentence. 
 
 Thus opw ere yo^lpovro. may mean either / see you rejoicing, 
 or / see that you rejoice. 
 
 ya-dero Kvpov TreTrrw/cora, he heard that Cyrus had fallen ; but 
 yja-drjcraL TrwTrore fxov (TVKocfiavTovvTos ; have you ever noticed me 
 ^playing the part of an informer 7 aKovoi o-e r^Kovra^ I hear that 
 you are come; but a/covw a-ov SiaXeyofievov, I hear you con- 
 versing. 
 
 2. oiiSa, (TvvoiSa^ eTrta-Tafxai : 
 
 otSa Tavra ttoiwi/. 
 / know that I am doing this. 
 otSa TaCra ttolclv. 
 I know how to do this. 
 So with eTTto-ra/zai, I know for certain (scio) : 
 inavTM (rvvoiSa ov8ev cTrtcTTa/xeKi). 
 ifxavTio crvvocSa ovSev €7rL(TTdiJievo<s. 
 I am conscious that I know nothing for certain. 
 
 § 161. The Tenses of the Participle, and Time 
 
 in the Participles. 
 
 The Tenses of the Participle correspond with the Tenses of 
 the Indicative always in the character of the act, and some- 
 times in time. 
 
 1. The Present Participle denotes an act in progress, the 
 time of which is usually determined by, and therefore con- 
 temporary with, that of the principal verb. But the time 
 may be determined by some word in the sentence, such as 
 vvv^ Tore. Sometimes the context, without such a clew-word, 
 determines the time. 
 
 r-qv vvv BotWTiav KaX,ovfi€vr)V (^Kt^crav. ThUC. i. 12. 
 
 liiey occupied what is now called Boeotia. 
 
 61 KopcvdiOL [J'^XP'' TOVTOv irpoOvfJiOiS 7rpd(r(rovT€<s dveta-av t^s 
 <^tAovetKias. ThUC. V. 32. 
 
 The Corinthians, who up to that time had been energetically 
 at work, now abated their vehemence. 
 
176 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 ol (Tvix7rp€G-/3€-vovTes Kal TrdpovT€S KaTafxapTvprja-ova-LV. 
 
 Dem. de Fals. Leg. 381. 5. 
 Those who were then his fellow-envoys, and were present, will 
 testify against him. 
 Here rore would have made the time clearer. 
 
 2. The Aorist Participle generally refers to an act prior to 
 that of the principal verb. 
 
 ravra ctTrovres aTr^A^ov. 
 
 They said this and went away. 
 
 But in many cases there is no such priority of tima 
 
 €v €TroLr](Ta<s dvajj.vi^(ras />t€. 
 You did well to remind me. 
 
 § 162. The Future Participle. 
 
 1. The Future Participle, as a rule, denotes mere futurity 
 in time only after verbs of Perception. 
 
 oiSa ravra Spdcrwv. 
 
 I know that I shall do this. 
 
 rjSrj (re ravra Spdcrovra. 
 I knew that you would do this. 
 Here the Latin future in rus is the equivalent of the Greek 
 future participle (me, te haecfaciurum esse). 
 
 Oavovfxevr] yap i^rjSrj. SOPH. Ant. 460. 
 
 / knew well that I should (or must) die. 
 Here the Latin gerund (mihi 7noriendum esse) would be the 
 better equivalent. 
 
 2. But the Future Participle often denotes intention, 
 (a.) With a verb of motion. 
 
 ovK is \6yovs eXqXvO', aAA,a 0-6 KrevMv, EUR. Tro. 905. 
 / am not come to parley, hut to kill thee. 
 Cf. ThUC. i. 18, SovAwo-o/xevo?. 
 
 Here the Latin supine in -um after a verb of motion, rather 
 
 than the future in -rus would be used. We should translate 
 
 rjXde Oeaa-ofjLcvos by spectatum venit, not by spectaturus venit. 
 
 V 3. The subjective particle u>s is often added to the Future 
 
 Participles (as to other participles). It denotes the presumed 
 
THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE. 177 
 
 intention (as though) ; or the motive calculated (as thinking, on 
 the assumption that). 
 
 ^vXXafx^dvei J^vpov ws aTro/crcvwi/. XeN. 
 
 He seizes Cyrus with the intention of putting him to death. 
 
 fXLcrdov alrovcTLV ws ov)(l avToia-iv wt^eAeiav ka-ojxkvqv. 
 
 Plat. Rep. 345, e. 
 They demand pay on the assumption (ground) that no benefit 
 will accrue to them. 
 
 (o</)€Aciav ea-oixev-qv, Accusative Absolute. 
 
 4. With the Article the Future Participle denotes not 
 only intention, but what is likely, able, or calculated to do 
 anything. 
 
 TToXXa 8et Tov ev o-TpaT-qyyjorovTa €;(€tv. XeN. Ap. iii. 1. 6. 
 He who wishes (means) to be a good general must have many 
 qualifications. 
 
 ovT€ (TtTOS ^ dpexpofxeOa fjLevovr€<ij orre irXota ecrrt to, utt- 
 d^ovra. XeN. A71. vl 3. 20. 
 
 fFe have neither food to eat, if we stay, nor ships to convey us 
 
 hence. 
 Neque frumentum est quo vescamur, si manserimus, neque 
 
 navigia quibus vehamur. 
 
 The above may be expressed by a periphrasis with /xeAAw. 
 Thus 6 (rTpaT'qyij(T(i)v = 6 fieXXuyv o-TpaT-qy-qcreLV. 
 
 ovS^ 6 K<jiXv(ru>v Traprjv. SoPH. Ant. 260. 
 Nor was there at hand one who could stay them. 
 Neque aderat qui prohiberet. 
 
 5. The Future Participle may take the place of a direct 
 sentence. 
 
 Tov Kacriyvi]Tov ri <^Q'S, 
 ri^ovTos Tj fxeXXovTOs; SoPH. El. 317. 
 
 What say'st thou of thy h'other, 
 Will he be here, or ivlll he tarry ? 
 =7roT€/ooi/ TJ^eL ^ /xeAAet;. 
 
 The above examples will show how widely the Greek 
 Future Participle difters from the Latin future in rus, and how 
 much more elastic the use of the former is. Mr. Paley first 
 pointed this out in the Journal of Philology (viii. No. 15), from 
 which number much of the above is derived. 
 
 M 
 
PART 11. 
 THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 
 CHAPTEE I. 
 § 163. SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 1. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT. 
 
 2. THE INDIRECT QUESTION. 
 
 3. THE INDIRECT PETITION 
 
 § 164. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT. 
 
 The Indirect Statement quotes words or thoughts not 
 at first-hand {i.e. directly), but at second-hand {i.e. indi- 
 rectly). It therefore follows verbs and phrases of saying 
 and thinking. 
 . The Indirect Statement is expressed in three ways. 
 
 A. By the Infinitive. 
 
 B. By OTL or w? with the Indicative or the Optative, 
 never with the Subjunctive. 
 
 C. By the Participle. 
 
 § 165. A. THE INEINITIVE IN THE INDIRECT 
 STATEMENT. 
 
 1. The Infinitive follows expressions of saying and 
 thinking. The Subject before the Infinitive and the 
 
 178 
 
INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT STA TEMENT. 1 79 
 
 Predicate after it are in the Accusative (but see next 
 rule). The usual negative is ov (see second example). 
 
 N.B. 1. </)iy/xt and (^ao-Kw regularly take the Infinitive. 
 
 2. Aeyo) (active) generally takes on or ws, Xeyercu (it 
 
 is said) takes either the Infinitive, or 6tl, ws with 
 a finite verb. 
 
 3. etTTov takes on and ws. (Observe that efTrov, I said, 
 
 introduces a Statement ; eTirov, I bade, a Petition. 
 I told has the same double sense in English. 
 
 TOP BiKaiov avBpa evSatfiopa elvai (prjfii,. Plat. 
 I assert that the just man is happy. 
 ovSeva ol/jLat, Bai/xovcov elvat KaKov, EUEIP. 
 I think that none of the deities is evil. 
 
 2. But if the Subject of the Infinitive is the same as the 
 Subject of the Principal Verb, it is usually not expressed 
 at all. The Predicate is in the Nominative. This is 
 called the Infinitive Attraction. 
 
 ^770-6 (TTpaT7)f^eiv, 
 
 He says that he is general, 
 
 vofj,i^ei<; etvat <f>poviixo<s. 
 
 You fancy that you are prudent. 
 
 cj)povLfio<; the Predicate. 
 
 o AXe^avBpo'^ ecf^aaKev Alo^ vlo<; elvai. 
 
 Alexander used to pretend that he was the son of Zeus. 
 Am 1/109 the Predicate. 
 
 AiKT) elvac (f)7]aL. AesCH. 
 
 She saith that she is Justice. 
 
 If the Subject needs to be expressed, airo^; is used in 
 the Nominative (in all genders and numbers). 
 
 KXecov ovK e<^ri avTO<; aW eKclvov arparr/yeLV. 
 
 Thug. 
 Cleon declared that it was not himself hut Nikias who 
 tvas general. 
 
i8o SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 vojjLi^eTe ovv avroL ^Ivai ^povc/jLOi. 
 
 You fancy, then, that it is you who are prudent {that 
 you yourselves are prudent). 
 
 The Subject however, airo^;, must never be expressed 
 unless it is necessary to distinguish it from a Subject in 
 the Accusative, or to throw a special emphasis on it. 
 In nine cases out of ten the presence of a Predicate in 
 the Nominative is sufficient. 
 
 Note 1. Instead of avro? the personal pronouns lyw, o-v 
 occur (Dem. 52. 12, 9. 74, Lys. 25. 18), and the reflexive cr<^6ts 
 (Plat. Rep. 518). 
 
 Sometimes the accusative is used instead of the nominative 
 (l/AC, /xe, o-e, efxavTOV, (reavTov, eavrov). This construction, more 
 emphatically than the Infinitive Attraction, marks the Sub- 
 ject of the Infinitive as the Object of the main verb. 
 
 cf)r)fjA, Setv eK€LVOV<s aTroXecrOaL, ejJL€ Se crw^ecr^at. AnDOK. i. 30. 
 I hold that they ought to be condemned to death, and I he 
 acquitted. 
 
 For other instances see Plat. Gorg. 474, Xen. Cijr. v. 1. 21 
 (e/xavTov), HeROD. i. 34 and ii. 2 {koivrov). 
 
 Note 2. Verhs of hoping and promising (expecting, under- 
 taking, swearing). They usually take the Future Infinitive 
 (like the Latin). 
 
 ■37 Arrive V juax^^ ea-ecrdo.i. 
 
 He was expecting that there would be a battle. 
 
 xnrecrxov ravTa ^rjr'qa-eLV. 
 
 You promised to search into this. 
 
 But with little or no change of meaning they also take a 
 Present, or an Aorist Infinitive sometimes, the future time 
 being expressed not by the Infinitive, but the principal verb. 
 
 eXTTi^ei Svvaro^ etvai ap^ecv. PlAT. 
 He hopes to be able to rule. 
 
 vTrkcr^eTo fioi fBovXeva-acrOai.. XeN. 
 He undertook to advise me. 
 
r/rt AND ^9 WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. i8i 
 
 Also an Aorist Infinitive with aV. 
 
 QVK '^Xttl^ov cKTrecreti/ dv IleptKAea. ThUC. 
 
 They were not anticipating that Pericles would he banished. 
 €K7r€(reLv av is an Oblique Apodosis, representing kKirka-oL av in 
 the Eecta. See Note 3. 
 
 The sort of verbs that come under this head are : — 
 eA,7rt^a>. vTrLcr)(^vov/Mai. 6/xoAoyw, ) j- 
 
 e'ATTtSa (lATTiSas) e'x^* ofjLVVfJiL. a-vvTideixai, J "^ 
 
 SoKiOy ) J- , VTToSexo/Aat (/ etc., etc. 
 
 TT/aoo-SoKO), j ^ * undertake). 
 
 Note 3. The Infinitive with av. If the Indicative of the Becta 
 had an av, the Infinitive will retain it in Indirect Discourse, 
 but not otherwise. 
 
 oTfiai yap av ovk dxapi(TT(DS fJ'Ot ex^tv. DeM. 
 
 / think it would not be a thankless task. 
 In Becta, ovk dv ^x^'" 
 
 Note 4. The Tenses of the Infinitive, in Indirect Dis- 
 course, represent the corresponding Tenses of the Indicative 
 or Optative in the Becta, and therefore denote the same time. 
 See § 147, Note 6. 
 
 § l66. B. oTi AND a»9 WITH THE INDICATIVE 
 AND OPTATIVE. 
 
 (1) The Indicative (in Primary or 
 „ rf .,, J Historic Sequence). 
 
 (2) The Optative (in strict Historic 
 Sequence). 
 
 N.B. Never the Subjunctive as in Latin. The Negative 
 is ov. 
 
 To understand this construction it is well to see first 
 what the Direct Statement is. 
 
 avTol jjbdpTvpis ecTfiev, we ourselves are witnesses, is a 
 Direct Statement. 
 
 This, in an Indirect Statement of Primary Sequence, 
 becomes Xejovaiv W9 avrol fiapTvpe<i eiaiv. Observe that 
 
1 82 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 tha person alone is changed, "they say that they them- 
 selves are witnesses." The tense and 7nood remain 
 unchanged. 
 
 In an Indirect Statement of Historic Sequence it may 
 be expressed in either of two ways, both being equally 
 common : 
 
 ,/ r f (1) avTol aapTvpe<i elev (Optative) ; 
 
 ' [ (2) avTot fMapTvpe^ eiatv (indicative) ; 
 
 i.e. either the Optative is used, and this is the really 
 Indirect Statement, or no change is made in the mood in 
 consequence of the Historic Sequence, the Indicative being 
 used. This retention of the mood and tense of Direct 
 Discourse is a well-known practice, pervading all Greek 
 syntax. 
 
 Again, a Direct Statement is, KparrjaofMev rcov AOyvaicov, 
 we shall heat the Athenians. 
 
 The Indirect Statement is — 
 
 (1) Primary, Xeyovaiv on Kpan^aovai twv AOrivatwv, 
 
 They say that they will heat the Athenians. 
 
 (2) Historic, eXeyov on { 1. fcparrja-ocev rSyv Adrjvaccov. 
 
 They said < they loould heat tlie Athenians, 
 that \2. Kpari^aovai Tcov 'A67}vaL(ov. 
 
 The two constructions, the Optative and the Indicative, 
 are often found alternating in the same paragraph. 
 
 The rules therefore in passing from the Direct to the 
 Indirect Statement are : — 
 
 1. The Person is always changed. 
 
 2. The Tense is never changed. 
 
 3. The Mood may be changed from the Indicative 
 
 to the Optative when the Sequence is Historic, 
 but constantly the Indicative remains un- 
 changed in Historic as in Primary Sequence. 
 
on AND cbs WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 183 
 
 In case of a difficulty as to tense and mood, the learner 
 should practise turning back the Indirect to the original 
 Direct Statement. 
 
 Thus in the sentence eroXfjia Xeyeiv w? iravra^s rov^; 
 e'xjdpov'i €vIk7](T6v, he made hold to say that he had conquered 
 all his enemies, the original Direct was nravTa'^ rov^ 
 €j(dpov<; evLKrjo-a, I conquered all my enemies. The tense 
 and mood of the Direct Statement are retained. 
 
 Again, rjKe S* dyyeWcov tU co9 'Exdreca Kareikrjirrai,, 
 there came a messenger announcing that Elateia had been 
 captured. The messenger said in the Direct, 'Exdreta 
 KarelXTjiTTaLy Elateia has teen captured. In the Indirect 
 therefore the original tense and, in this case, the mood 
 are retained. It might have been KareiXrjfjLfjLevr] etrj, 
 
 Xeyec «? ovBev ecmv aSiKcorepov (f)7]/jL7j<^. AeschiN. 
 He says that there is nothing more unjust than 
 rumour. 
 
 Recta : ovBev ean k.t.X. 
 XoytcraaOo) tovto on et'^o/jLev TroVe IIvBvav. Dem. 
 Let him reflect that we once possessed Pydna. 
 
 Recta : el'^o/jiev k.t.X. 
 ^av6pa)<; elirev on rj it 6X1^ TereL^co-Tat tjStj. Thuc. 
 He told them openly that the city had already heen 
 fortified. 
 
 Recta : Tere/^to-rat k.t.X. 
 aTTeKpcvdfMrjv otl jjlol XvacTeXol coairep e^w e^euv. Plat. 
 / answered that it was good for me to he exactly as 
 I am. Recta : XvaiTeXel k.t.X. 
 
 Kvpo^ eXeyev, otl rj 0S09 ecroiTO 7rpo<; ^acriXea fieyav 
 et9 Ba/SvXcova. Xen. 
 
 Gyrus told them that the march would he to Bahylon 
 against the great King. 
 Recta : 'iaTaL k.t.X. 
 
1 84 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 elirev ore 6 avrjp av dXuiaifjLO<; elr]. Xen. 
 He said that the man might he captured. 
 The av of course belonged to the Direct. 6 dvrjp 
 aXdiacfiO'i av eirf. 
 
 The Indicative and the Optative are sometimes found 
 in the same paragraph. 
 
 eXejov on Kvpo<; fiev reOvrjfcev Apialo^ he ev T<p 
 
 araO/ii^ eoTj. 
 They said that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus 
 
 tvas in the camp. 
 
 It might have been reOvqKm el'q and eVr/. 
 
 €<yv(D on ecroLTO irept t?;? tov AXKL^caSov KadoBov 
 X0709, /cac on ol 'A6r)va2oc evSe^ovrac avTr]v. 
 
 Thuc. 
 
 He saw that there would he a proposal for the recall 
 of Alcihiades, and that the Athenians would 
 approve of it. 
 
 For eyvo) on see 3. The Participle in Indirect Discourse, Note 1. 
 
 Note 1. on and ws. ws being a subjective particle, i.e. ex- 
 pressing what is in a person's mind, is used, more than on, of 
 opinions, of pretexts, sometimes of untrue statements, and 
 with negative expressions, ov Aeyw ws. ws is used rather than 
 oTfc after verbs of thinking. 
 
 T t(Tara<j)epvr]<5 Sia^aAAet tov Kvpov Trpos tov dSeXcfiOV o)S 
 €7nf3ovXevoL avT(^. XeN. A71. i. 3. 
 
 Tissaphernes accused Cyrus to his hrotheVf alleging that he 
 was plotting against him. 
 
 lAeyov CO? XPV ^H'^'S evAa/?€tcr^at, PlAT. x4pol. 1. 
 They were telling you that you ought to he on your guard 
 {against me), 
 
 vofxi^ovfTLv eK€L ws *H<^atorT09 xct^'^^ret. ThUC. iii. 88. 
 
 The local belief is that Hephaestus is working at his forge. 
 
 In Soph. Elect. 43, ort is used of an untrue statement. 
 
^oTi AND «? WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 185 
 
 Note 2. Instead of on and ws other particles are used in 
 poetry, e.g. ovi/eKa (SoPH. El. 1476), oOovveKa (Soph. El. 1308), 
 oTTws (Soph. ^ti^. 685, PAi/. 169). 
 
 ov yap alcrOdvet TraAat 
 (cjvTas davova-LV ovv€k dvravSjls «ra ; SoPH. El. 1476. 
 
 And hast thou not marked long since 
 that thou hast been accosting the living as the dead ? 
 
 KXvets 
 oOovveK KlyLa-Oos fi€V ov Kara crreyas. SOPH. El. 1308. 
 
 Thou hearest 
 That Aegisthus is not beneath his roof. 
 oTTOJs also is used. 
 
 ava^, l/OW fX€V OV^ OTTiDS Td)(OVS VTTO 
 
 Svcnrvovs cKavw. SoPH. Ant. 223. 
 
 My liege, I will not say that by reason of speed 
 I come scant of breath. 
 
 Cf. Soph Ant. 685, Phil. 169. 
 
 As the Watchman is a clown we might be tempted to 
 translate, " I won't say as how." We use '• how " just in the 
 same way. 
 
 So ut is often used in Latin poetry : 
 
 Quid referam ut volitet crebras intacta per urbes 
 
 Alba Palaestino sancta columba Syro : 
 Ut que, etc. 
 
 TiBULL. I. vii. 17, and the ^oets passim. 
 
 Note 3. dv with the Optative. If dv is found with the 
 Optative in the Indirect Statement it is because it was there 
 in the Eecta. In such cases the Optative with av in the 
 Indirect is the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence which in 
 the Eecta was in the Optative with dV. 
 
 eAe^av ws Travr av tOot, 
 
 They said that he wotdd see everything. 
 
 Direct : Trdvr^ dv I'Sot (sc. ct iXOoi). 
 
 eXe^av ws Travr' l8ol. 
 They said that he saw everything. 
 Direct : TrdvTa ei8€. 
 
 Note 4. If in the Direct the Imperfect or Pluperfect In- 
 dicative were used, they should be retained in the Indirect 
 
1 86 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 (both Primary and Historic). The reason of course is that 
 there is no Optative Imperfect or Pluperfect. 
 
 rJKev (xyyeAos Aeywv on rpirjpeis yJKove TrapaTrXeovcras. 
 
 Xen. An. i. 2. 21. 
 There came a messenger saying that he Jmd heard that triremes 
 were sailing round. 
 Direct : r^Kovov, I was hearing. 
 
 For further rules see Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 Note 5. Verbs and phrases of emotion, ^av/xafw, I wonder ; 
 ayavaKTW, / am indignant ; Setvov Trotov/xai, do. ; c{>dovio, I 
 grudge; ala-\vvo}iai, I am ashamed; ala-xpov ko-n (Setvov 
 ecTTt, it is a shame) ; //.e/x^o/^ai, / blame, etc. , usually are fol- 
 lowed not by 0T6 but by the conditional et. 
 
 ToSe WavpLacra el kv dperrjs Ti9rj<s p^epcL rrjv dScKiav. 
 
 Plat. Bep. 348. 
 I was surprised at your setting injustice in the light of a virtue. 
 Setvov TTOiovvrat el pbrj €L(rovrai. ThUC. 
 They think it abominable (if) they are not to know. 
 
 These phrases also take oti. Cf. miror si (mirum si) as well 
 as miror qiix)d. 
 
 §167. C. THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT 
 DISCOURSE. 
 
 The Participle is used in Indirect Discourse after Verbs 
 of Perception {see, perceive, hear, learn, mark, know, remem- 
 her) and some others. The usual Negative is ou. 
 
 opo), I see. otSa, I know (crvvoL^a e/xavrw, I 
 
 ala-ddvopLai, I perceive. ' am conscious). 
 
 aKovd), I hear. cTrto-ra/xat, I know for certain. 
 
 TTvvddvopLai, I learn by in- /xe/xv/i^/xai, / remember. 
 
 giiiry. eTnXavddvop,aL, I forget. 
 
 jmvddviM, I learn. yiyviaa-KO), I get to know. 
 
 ol ' EXKrjve^i ovk fjheaav Kvpov reOpTjKOTa. XeN". 
 The Greeks did not know that Cyrus was dead. 
 
 r]BeQ)<; aKovco ^ot)KpaTov<; BtaXeyopievov. Plat. 
 / love to hear Socrates conversing. 
 
THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 187 
 
 €fJLavT^ ^vvi^Seiv ovSev €7n(rra/xevo). PlAT. Apol. viii. 
 / was conscious that I knew nothing for certain. 
 
 ovT€ fieya ovre (rfxiKpov ^vvotSa ifiavTUt cro^o? wv. 
 
 Plat. Jpol vi. 
 / am conscious that in no degree, great or small, am I wise. 
 
 The rules about the Subject and the Predicate of the 
 Infinitive equally apply to the Participle. 
 
 ecopcov ou fcaTop6ovvT€<;. Thuc. 
 
 The^ saw that they were not succeeding. 
 
 aKrOavojJLeOa yeXotoi ovTe<^. Plat. 
 We jperceive that we are ridiculous. 
 
 Note 1. The Indicative (and Optative) with on and ws are, 
 however, often used with Verbs of Knowing, especially yty- 
 
 ViOCTKCj), and olSa (t'(T^' OTt). 
 
 eyvo) OTt ol ^AOrjvaioL ovSeu ivScoo'ovcnv. ThUC. 
 He saw that the Athenians would not give in at all. 
 
 Note 2. If the Principal Verb itself is a Verb of Perception 
 the Indirect Sentence will be in the Infinitive to avoid the 
 clumsiness of two participles close together, if both Participles 
 refer to the same person. 
 
 alcrdofJLCvos ovk av TreiOetv avrovs. ThuC. 
 Perceiving that he should not convince them. 
 
 ala-dofxevos ovk dv TTiiOtov would have been intolerable. 
 
 Note 3. dyyeXXo), I report, sometimes takes a Participle. 
 TTpidTO? f^adiXei Yivpov iTTLJSovXevovTa -^yyetAa. XeN. 
 I first reported to the king that C. was plotting against him. 
 ofxoXoyQ, I agree, assent ; i^eXeyxio, iiriScLKwixL, I point out 
 (see Eule), may almost be regarded as verbs of statement. 
 These take a Participle. 
 
 Note 4. The remarks made about dv with the Infinitive 
 apply equally to the Participle. 
 
 Note 5. The Tenses of the Participle in Indirect Discourse 
 represent the Corresponding Tenses of Indirect Discourse, and 
 therefore the time which they denote. 
 
SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 § l68. THE INDIRECT QUESTION 
 
 The Indirect Question may be regarded as the Indirect 
 Statement put interrogatively. All the rules given as to 
 person, tense, and mood for the Indirect Statement apply 
 equally to the Indirect Question. The Subjunctive must 
 never be used, as in Latin, in an ordinary Indirect Ques- 
 tion. (See Deliberative Questions.) 
 
 The !N"egative is ov. 
 
 For the Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs see Pro- 
 nouns. Their Indirect (or Eelative) forms are used in 
 Indirect Questions, but it is just as common to use the 
 Direct Forms. Et, like the English if, is the regular 
 indirect interrogative, meaning ivhether (in a single ques- 
 tion — Lat. niim). 
 
 Direct : tl<; earu ; 
 
 Who is he i 
 
 Indirect Primary : ovk olSa octtl^ (or r/?) eVr/. 
 I do not know ivho he is. 
 
 Indirect Historic : ovk rjSrj oaTi<; (or rh) \ ' » / 
 / did not know who he ivas. 
 
 Direct : ravra e7roi.rjaa<; ; 
 
 Did you do it ? 
 
 Indirect Primary : ipcora avrov ei ravra eTrocTjo-ev. 
 He asks him if he did it. ■ 
 
 , V \ 1. eL ravra TTOiricjeiev. 
 
 Indirect Historic : ripoariiaev avrov . ^ , ^ . . 
 
 '1^ ' 12. €0 ravra eTrocrjaev 
 
 He asked him if he had done it 
 
 o,rc ireiTovOare ovk olBa. Plat. 
 What you ham felt I know not. 
 Eecta : re rreirovOare ; 
 
THE INDIRECT QUESTION. 189 
 
 ipcoTcocTLV et Xrjo-raL eicnv. Thuc. 
 
 They ask them if they are pirates. 
 
 Eecta : Xr^araL eare ; 
 
 l(TT6 oto^ rjv Xaip€(j)(t)v. Plat. 
 You know what sort of a man Chaerephon was. 
 Eecta : oto<; r^v ; 
 
 BiTjpcoTcov av avTOv^ tl \eyoL6v. Plat. 
 / losed to ask them what they meant. 
 Eecta : ti Xeyere ; 
 
 ripero, et Tt9 eirj efiov o-ocjxoTepof;, Plat. 
 He asked if there loas anyhody wiser than I. 
 Eecta : eaTL ti<; ; 
 
 rjiropovv to ttots Xeyet, 6 6eo<;. Plat. 
 I was at a loss to understand what the god Tneant. 
 Eecta : rt irore Xeyei ; 
 
 e^ovkevovTo rtva KaraXetyfrovcriv. Dem. 
 They were considering whom they should leave behind. 
 Eecta : Tiva KaTaXecsfrofiev ; 
 
 '^pcoTcov avTov ei avairXevaeLev. Dem. 
 / was asking him if he had set sail. 
 
 Eecta : aveifkevaa^ ; did you set sail ? 
 
 Observe in examples 6 and 7 that the Historic 
 Sequence is disregarded. 
 
 Good examples will be found in Soph. El 32, 679, 974, 
 1348, Ai. 557, Ant. 239, 1190. 
 
 If the Direct uses the Imperfect Indicative, e.g. tis tjv 6 
 fjLvOo^ ; what was the tale? the Indicative will be retained in 
 Indirect Historic for reasons explained on p. 182. It would 
 become gIttov oo-rt? ^v 6 fivdos. eTTrov OQ-Tts €Lr] 6 fxvdo^s would 
 represent a Direct ri? ea-nv 6 fxvdos ; See a good instance in 
 Soph. Ant. 239. 
 
I90 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 § 169. DELIBERATIVE OR DUBITATIVE 
 INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 
 
 These questions, when Indirect, are in the Subjunctive 
 (Primary or Historic Time), or the Optative (Historic 
 Time). 
 
 The Subjunctive is retained in the Indirect because it 
 was the mood of the Direct. 
 
 Direct : rl (j)co ; 
 
 What am I to say? 
 
 * 
 
 Indirect Primary : ovk e^co o,ti (ji) (/>«. 
 
 / know not what 1 am to say. 
 Non habeo quid dicam. 
 
 T J- i- TT- 4. • ' 9 \^' 0,Tt (t/) 6ai7]V, 
 
 Indirect Historic : ovk elyov { ^ rf / /( 7 « 
 
 ^ (2. OyTi {rt) (po). 
 
 I knew not what I was to say. 
 Non habebam quid dicerem. 
 
 ' V <•/ V </ '- T)t Am 
 
 OVK 6^0), OTTG)? aOC 64770) a VOW. irLAT. 
 
 / don't know how I am to tell you my thoughts. 
 Direct : ttoj? (701 etTra) ; 
 
 rjiropet o re y^priaaiTo toS Trpaj/jLari,, Xen. 
 He was at a loss to know how to deal with the question. 
 Direct : tc ')(p7]G-(opbai ; 
 
 eiTTipovTo el KopLv6loi<; TrapaBolev t-^z/ ttoXiv. Thuc. 
 They asked whether they were to deliver over the city 
 to the Corinthians. 
 
 Direct : TrapaBco/juev ; 
 
 r}'jr6pr)aav ottt) KaOop/JLtacjvTat. Thuc. 
 They were at a loss where to come to anchoi\ 
 Direct : tttj Kadop/jLto-cofieOa ; 
 
THE INDIRECT PETITION. 191 
 
 ra Se eKirtJfxaTa ovk otS' €t tovto) 8(o. XeN. C?/f. viii. 4. 16. 
 / donH know whether I am to give the cups to this man. 
 Ohs. €t with Subjunctive, and see Note. 
 
 'iXiyes oTfc OVK av e^ots e^eXOwv o,Tt X/^^o aavrw. 
 
 Plat. Crit. iv. 
 Zim were saying that if you escaped you would not know what 
 to do with yourself. 
 
 cfSovXevovTO €LT€ KaTaKav<T(ii(Tiv etT€ Tt aAAo xpridoivrai. 
 
 Thug. ii. 4, 6. 
 They were deliberating whether they should burn the men to 
 deaths or do something else to them. 
 Observe the etre — erre with the Subjunctive again. 
 
 § 170. THE INDIRECT PETITION. 
 
 The Indirect Petition (a command, a request, or a 
 prayer) follows verbs of commanding, requesting, praying, 
 advising, and the like. 
 elirovy I hade or ordered dyyeWco, I hid. 
 
 (TrpoecTTOv). irapaKaXo), I exhort. 
 
 KeXevco, I order. aficw, / request, call upon, 
 
 BiaKeXevo/jbat, I order, ex- expect. 
 
 port, direct. irapaLvo), I advise. 
 
 TrapayydXXot), I order, in- airayopeixo, I forbid. 
 
 struct. . 
 
 All these take the Infinitive, which is the common 
 Greek construction for the Indirect Petition. The Nega- 
 tive is firi. 
 
 The difference between the Greek and Latin construc- 
 tions here should be carefully noted. 
 
 elirov Tc5 Havaavia top K7]pvico^ jjltj XeiireaOat,. 
 
 Thug. 
 
 Tliey ordered Pausanias not to leave the herald. 
 
 ^ el is interrogative as well as conditional, and so goes with the Sub- 
 junctive as well as with the Optative. 'Edv {i^v) is not interrogative 
 where it appears to be so, as in a few phrases with aKdirei {e.g. cKbirei 
 idy aoi SokQ et/ X^et;'). idv means not whether but i/ perchance (si forte). 
 
192 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. 
 
 eKeXevcre rov^ EWrjva^i et? /jua'^Tjv ra^dTjvat. Xen. 
 He ordered the Greeks to he drcmvn iip for battle. 
 
 heofjuai vfiwv avyyvwixT^v /jlol e^eti/. Plat. 
 / beg you to pardon me. 
 
 TrapaLPOV/iev croc irebdeaOai tol^ ^ekriocn. 
 We urge {advise) you to listen to your betters. 
 
 a^iw ae dXijOrj Xeyecv. Antiphon. 
 
 / call upon {require) you to tell the truth. 
 
 The Subject or Predicate will be in the l^ominative if 
 necessary, as in the Indirect Statement : — 
 
 npofjLTjdea irapaLTeLTaL ^HirifirjOev^ avTo^j velfxai. 
 
 Plat. 
 
 Epimetheus begs Prometheus that he himself may 
 distribute. 
 (" Let me distribute," says Epimetheus.) 
 For verbs of forbidding see Index. 
 
 Note 1. Some of these verbs take ottws (oVws pj) with the 
 Future Indicative and Optative. ScaKekevofiai, Trapa/caAw, / 
 exhort ; dyyeAXw, TrapayyeAAw, I tell, order ; aTrayopevu), I for- 
 bid ; TTpoeiTToVj I proclaimed, ordained; d^tw, I heg, call upon. 
 
 SiaKcAewvrat ottws ripdiprideTaL TrdvTa? tovs toiovtovs. 
 
 Plat. Rep. viii. 549, e. 
 They exhort him to take revenge on all such people. 
 
 K€iv(j} 8' i/JL-qv dyyeiAar' evTo\r]v ottws 
 
 Tov TratSa 8et^€i. SoPH, Ai. 567. 
 
 And bear to him 7/iy message that he show the boy. 
 dTr7jyop€V€S oVws prj tovto ojroKpLVoip'qv. 
 
 Plat. Rep. i. 339, A. 
 
 You told me not to give this answer. 
 
 oTTws p-qhlv ipd after past tense in Rep. i. 337, E. 
 For the Construction of ottw?, ottws prj, see Final Sentences, etc. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 § 171. THE PAETICLE ^Kv, 
 
 "Av (and the Epic kci/, k€, Doric ko) were originally Demon- 
 strative Adverbs meaning there, then, so, in that case, perchance, 
 possibly, contingently. They were Adverbs qualifying the Posi- 
 tive Statement of the Verb. This part of the subject belongs 
 to Philology rather than Syntax. 
 
 ''Av in Attic Greek may be regarded as having practi- 
 cally two distinct uses. 
 
 1. It is joined to Verbs, the Indicative (Historic Tenses), 
 Optative, Infinitive, and Participle. It denotes a Con- 
 dition on which the fulfilment of the verbal action 
 depends. 
 
 2. It is joined to Pronouns and Particles with the 
 Subjunctive Mood. Such are 09, oaTi.<i (69 av, oaTi^ av) : 
 0T€, eirei, eireior}, nrpiv, ew?, etc. [prav, eirav, eireboav, irpcv 
 av, €ft)9 av) : the Conditional el (edv, rjv) : sometimes the 
 Einal &)9, oiray^, o^pa (m av, etc.). In this use av (but 
 not in Einal Sentences) makes the meaning of the Pronoun 
 and Particle indefinite, who-so-ever, when-so-ever, if ever (in 
 one very common use of eav), though this meaning cannot 
 always be expressed. When Historic Sequence requires 
 a change from the Subjunctive to the Optative av must 
 be dropped, e.g. 69 av fiovXrjrai but 09 ^ovXolto, 
 
 N 
 
194 THE PARTICLE &p. 
 
 § 172. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 Before dealing with Eelative, Conditional, and Temporal 
 Sentences it is most important to understand the difference 
 between a Definite and an Indefinite Sentence. 
 
 In the Sentence ravTa a ^ovKovrai, e^ovaiy they have 
 those things which they want, the antecedent Tavra is 
 definite (those particular and known things), and the 
 Eelative Sentence which follows refers to a definite act. 
 But in the Sentence a av ^ouXcovrac e'^ovcnv, the Ante- 
 cedent is indefinite and the act is virtually Conditional : 
 they have whatsoever things they ivant, anything they want, 
 anything if they want it. This second sentence in Historic 
 Sequence becomes a PovKolvto el'^^ov. Similarly in the 
 sentence eTrecBrj Be oXiyap'^ia eyeveTo ol rpiaKovTa /lere- 
 irifJb'y^avTo /ne, when an oligarchy was estahlished the Thirty 
 Tyrants sent for me, Socrates is speaking of a definite 
 time (B.C. 404) and of a definite act. But eireiBdv oXcy- 
 apy^la yevrjrai, whenever, or as often as, an oligarchy shall 
 he estahlished, or is estahlished, an indefinite time and act is 
 spoken of. The sentence is virtually conditional again, 
 if ever, or if at any time, etc., and might be expressed 
 thus, idv TTore yevqrai. In Historic Sequence the sen- 
 tence would be eireiBr] yevoiro. 
 
 It will be seen therefore that when the Antecedent is 
 definite the Indicative is used; where indefinite, the 
 Subjunctive with dv, or the Optative without dv : 
 
 e.g. 0S9 elBev eiryveae, those whom he saw he praised. 
 ow? dv 'ISy eiraLvel, whomsoever he sees he praises. 
 01/9 I'Boc eTTTjvec, whomsoever he saw he used to praise. 
 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 195 
 
 Note. Further instances of — 
 
 1. Definite sentences. 
 
 l^vpov /xeraTre/ATrerat aTro Tvjg a/>X'^5j ^5 avTov craTpdTrrjv 
 
 iiroirjcre. XeN. 
 
 He sends for Cyrus from the province of which he had made 
 him governor. 
 
 6(09 l^ea-Tiv ravTa v/xlv eTrtSet^at OeXo). PlAT. 
 ffTiile it is permitted I desire to explain this to you. 
 
 liroXiopKei Tovs "EAAr^vas f^^XP'' ®^ ^rjpdvas rrjv Snopvxa 
 
 eiXe Tr)v vyj(rov. ThuC. 
 He was blockading the Greeks until he drained the ditch and 
 
 took the island. 
 
 2. Indefinite sentences. 
 
 e^ecTTt OTL av f^ovXrjrat ^lireiv. AnTIPH. 
 He may say whatever (or anything) he likes. 
 
 fJ'^XP'' S' dv eyo) t^kw, al cnrovSal fX€v6vT(DV. XeN. 
 Until I return let the armistice be observed. 
 ews TTcp dv kjXTTvkoi ov fir] Trava-cofMac cf>LXo(TO<fiiov. PlAT. 
 So long as I breathe I will never give up philosophy. 
 KaTk(Trr](ra Se iTrLfieXetcrOaL et rt Scot tw X^P^ ^avoa-Tparov. 
 
 Antiph. 
 
 / appointed Fhanostratus to provide whatever the choi-us 
 required. 
 
 § 173. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 A Compound Conditional Clause consists of two 
 Correlative sentences, one of which contains the Con- 
 dition, and is called the Protasis ;^ the other contains the 
 
 ^ Protasis {irpbTaais) means Premiss. Apodosis {d7r65o<rtj) means 
 Consequence. The Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasis the Sub- 
 ordinate Sentence. Whether originally a clause with e^ was a Sub- 
 ordinate Sentence, is a point which need not be discussed in Attic 
 Syntax. How far the Apodosis, as being the Principal Sentence, 
 influences the construction of the Protasis, is an interesting question, 
 which is alluded to under the Oratio Obliqua. Professor Goodwin 
 {Journal of Philology, viii. 15, p. 33) strongly maintains the assimi- 
 lating force exerted by the principal verb on the subordinate verb. 
 
196 THE PARTICLE Slv. 
 
 Consequence, and is called the Apodosis. Such a clause 
 reduced to its simplest form may be thus expressed : 
 
 If ^ is 5, G is i), 
 
 or G is D, if ^ is 5 ; 
 
 i.e. the fulfilment or truth of the Consequence depends 
 on the fulfilment or truth of the Condition. This depen- 
 dence of the Consequence (the Apodosis) on the Condi- 
 tion (the Protasis) is the essential point of a conditional 
 clause. 
 
 § 174. DISTINCTION OF CONDITIONS. 
 
 I. The most obvious distinction of Conditions is that of 
 Time. Some refer to the present, others to the past, others 
 to the future. This distinction is universally present in all 
 Conditions. 
 
 II. A second distinction concerns the opinion implied as to 
 the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. In two 
 forms, and two forms only, the expression in itself conveys 
 information on this point. ^ 
 
 III. A third distinction is that between Particular and 
 General Conditions. A Particular Condition refers to a 
 definite act or set of acts : e.g. " If the windows up-stairs are 
 
 ^ There is, as Professor Groodwin tells us, no special form implying 
 that the condition is or was fulfilled. That is to be decided by the 
 context. This is true, though of course a fact may be clearly implied, 
 and in some cases narrated. Such is the case chiefly in past General 
 Suppositions, e.g. et tls avTeiiroL, evdbs iredvriKec, Thuc. viii. 66, which is 
 the same as saying, ' ' Every one who spoke against them was at once 
 got rid of." A General Supposition may also be expressed in an 
 Ordinary Past form. Thus, ef rt dXko i-rrcKipdwou iy^pero airdvTOjv 
 iierkax'^i^^^ 1 Thuc. iii. 54, which is only a way of saying, "We took 
 part in every danger as it arose." Indeed a fact is narrated here 
 under a conditional form, though not by virtue of the form itself, 
 which need only denote a connexion between Condition and Conse- 
 qnence. With regard to General Suppositions in present time, they 
 may refer to facts, but usually are generalisations from observed facts 
 or habits. 
 
DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. i()7 
 
 open, the rain is coming in;" "If you receive a telegram 
 send it on to me;" " If he had a five-pound note he would 
 lend it me." A General Condition refers to any act which 
 may occur or have occurred any number of times : ** If ever 
 a candidate is convicted of bribery he loses his seat;" "If 
 (ever) he were left to himself he used to waste his time;" 
 " If (ever) he had a shilling in his pocket ^_ 
 first beggar he met." y^^^>^''^-^ 
 
 § 175. DIVISION OF COIVD/7]^^^^^^^^ 
 SENTENCES, ^^ " 
 
 Conditional Sentences accordingly may be divided into : — 
 I. Ordinary Conditions ; II. General or Frequentative Condi- 
 tions. Ordinary Conditions again may be subdivided into 
 A., those with regard to which no opinion is expressed 
 whether the Condition is fulfilled or unfulfilled, probable or 
 improbable, true or false ; B. , those in which the form of 
 expression implies that the Condition is unfulfilled. There is 
 no form to express an opinion that the Condition is fulfilled. 
 The context alone could suggest this. In General Conditions 
 again no opinion is expressed concerning the fulfilment or 
 non-fulfilment of the Condition. Thus in Ordinary Conditions 
 of the second class alone is any such opinion expressed. 
 
 § 176. ORDINARY CONDITIONS. 
 
 For Real Examples see further on. 
 
 A. All that is stated is that a Consequence did, does, 
 or will follow from a Condition. The expression in itself 
 does not tell us whether the condition was, is, or will be 
 fulfilled. That is beside the question : the stress is 
 wholly on the if. The sole difference between the three 
 forms (1, 2, 3) is one of time. 
 
198 THE PARTICLE &v. 
 
 1. Present.^ 
 
 Any Primary Tense of the Indicative. 
 
 et ravTa Trotet? aSt/cet?.^ 
 
 If you do this (strictly you are doing wrong, 
 if you are doing this) 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 Any Historic Tense of the Indicative. 
 
 ev ravra i > / U , 
 
 1^ €7roL7]aa^ rjoiKT^aa^. 
 
 J. ( were doing this you were doing wrong. 
 
 \ did this you did wrong (aorist, a 
 
 single act). 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 To express a Condition in future time there are three 
 forms, differing, but differing only, in distinctness of ex- 
 pression. 
 
 (a) The ordinary future form. 
 
 eav vnv) ravra < '/ > aoiKinaeL^, 
 y 7roL7}ar)^ J 
 
 If you do this (strictly you will do wrong. 
 
 if you shall do this) 
 
 ^ There are endless varieties of present and past conditions, and the 
 two are constantly combined. Present and future may be combined, 
 e^ ravra ireTroirjKas dSt/cas, TjdiKrjKas. 
 
 If you have done this you are doing wrong, you have done 
 
 wrong (the Apodosis might be an 
 Imperative). 
 el ravra doKc? aoi irK^wfxev. 
 
 If you think so let us set sail, 
 
 ei ravra TroieTs dXy/jaeis. 
 
 If you are doing this you will he sorry. 
 
 €l ravra iirolec^ or eiroirja-as dSt/ceZs or dSiKifiaeis. 
 
 If you were doing, or did this you are doing, will do, vrrong. 
 And so on. 
 
 * It is hoped that no difficulty will arise from the selection of the 
 verb dStKcD in these special examples. 'A5t/ctD, of course, means, / am 
 an &81KOS, a vrrong doer, and also / do vrrong, or injure. 
 
GENERAL OR FREQUENTATIVE CONDITIONS. 199 
 
 {h) The less vivid future form. 
 
 €t Tavra 
 
 7roLOirj<; 
 [^ 7rot7]<7eta9 
 1/ you should do this 
 
 (c) The most vivid future form. 
 
 €L ravra 7roLr}a6L<^ 
 If you shall do this 
 
 55. / y 
 aOLKoi7]<; av. 
 
 aBiK7](T6La<; av, 
 
 you would do wrong. 
 
 aBLK7}cr6L<;. 
 
 you will do wrong. 
 
 B. Besides a difference of Time, the form of expression 
 implies that the condition is unfulfilled either in Present 
 or in Past Time. This is implied by the presence of av 
 in the Apodosis, and not by any peculiarity of the 
 Protasis. 
 
 1. Present (but see note). 
 
 €L Tama 67rocev<i 
 If you did this (strictly if 
 you were now doing this) 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 €L ravra €7roL7jaa<; 
 If you had done this 
 
 >5./ y 
 
 rjOLKei^ av. 
 
 you would he doing 
 wrong. 
 
 >5./ y 
 
 T)otKrjcra^ av. 
 
 you would have done 
 
 wrong. 
 
 Note. — The Imperfect, however, very often refers to a 
 descriptive, habitual, or continued past. 
 
 €1 TaiJTa €7rpa(T(T€S Idavixd^ofxcv av ere. 
 
 If you had been acting thus we should have been admiring you. 
 
 The Pluperfect denotes a state or condition in the past. 
 e.g. el eXeXvfirjv, if I had been set free (in a state of liberty). 
 
 iraXai av aTroXuiX-q, I should long ago have been a dead 
 man, • 
 
200 
 
 THE PARTICLE &u. 
 
 § 177. Ordinary Conditions in Greek and Latin. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 A. 
 
 Protasis. 
 
 €t Tavra, ttoicis 
 Si haec facis 
 ct Tavra TreiroL'qKas, 
 Si haec fecisti. 
 
 i r. ( €7rOt€lS 
 
 ei Tavra < , / 
 
 ( €7roLr)(ras 
 
 Sihaec (^r^!^ 
 
 \ fecisti 
 
 3. Future, (a) €^v (^v) ravra | '"'"'J'^ X 
 Si haecfeceris (int. perf.) 
 
 /7.\ » -^ f TOtOtMS 
 
 (0) €t Tavra < , ' 
 ^ ' ( 7roLrj(T€La<s 
 
 Si haec facias 
 (c) el ravra ttoitJctcis 
 
 /Si Aaec fades 
 
 B. 
 
 1. Present (or el ravra kiroUis 
 Continued Past). 
 
 Si haec faceres 
 
 2. Past. ct raGra eiroirjCTa^ 
 
 Si haec fecisses 
 
 Apodosis. 
 
 a8tK€ts. 
 iniuste facis^ 
 
 -qSiKt^a-as. 
 
 iniuste faciebas. 
 iniuste fecisti. 
 
 d8tK^0"CtS. 
 
 iniuste fades. 
 dStKOLrjs av. 
 aSiKT^creta? av. 
 iniuste facias, 
 d8LKrjcr€L<s. 
 iniuste fades. 
 
 ?)8iK€ts av. 
 
 iniuste faceres. 
 
 'q8iK7](ras av. 
 iniuste fecisses. 
 
 11. 
 
 § 178. GENERAL OR FREQUENTATLVE 
 
 CONDITIONS. 
 
 These are best taught by real examples. Observe the 
 Apod OSes, distinguishing these uses of the Subjunctive 
 
 ^ The normal Latin equivalents of the Latin of Cicero, Caesar, 
 and Sallust are here given. The variety of Latin forms is far greater 
 than the Greek, and varies more according to the period of the writer. 
 The above are given only as a guide in comparing the two languages, 
 not as an attempt at a full division of the Latin Conditional Sentences. 
 
NEGATIVES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 201 
 
 and Optative (in the Protasis) from their uses in Ordinary- 
 Conditions. In the Apodosis any frequentative tense 
 denoting respectively present and past time may be 
 employed. 
 
 1. Peesent (a generalisation true now or for any future 
 occasion). 
 
 avrip TTOvripo^ ZvaTV')(el, Kav evTV^^fj. MenAND. 
 A bad man is in evil state, 
 Even if he e'er is fortunate. 
 
 2, Past. 
 
 €L Tt9 avTeiTTOL 6vOv<; eTeOvrjKec. Thuc. 
 If ever any one sjooJce against them he was promptly 
 put to death. 
 eT€6v7]K€L is, of course, a virtual Imperfect. 
 
 § 179. THE NEGATIVES IN CONDITIONAL 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 The Negative of a Protasis is yLr\, of an Apodosis ov. 
 
 €v 1X7) Tavra Trotet? ov/c /caX&)9 ep^^e*. 
 
 If you are not doing this it is not well. 
 For exceptions see the chapter on the Negatives. 
 
 Relative Conditional Sentences. 
 
 Real Examples are given further on. 
 
 As has been explained, a Eelative Sentence with an In- 
 definite Antecedent is equivalent to a Conditional Sentence. 
 Any form of the Protasis with et or lav may be expressed 
 by a Relative Sentence. Both 6s and 00-7 ts are used, but 
 oo-Tts, as being the indefinite form, is preferred, especially in 
 affirmative sentences. In negative sentences firj is sufficient 
 to show that the Relative is indefinite. 
 
202 
 
 THE PARTICLE ^v. 
 
 A. 
 
 Protasis. 
 
 1. Present. a (a nva) e'x^' 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 a (a Ttva) < v ^ 
 
 Apodosis. 
 
 SiSwo-i. 
 
 
 eStSov 
 
 
 eSwKe. 
 
 
 8ax7ct. 
 
 
 6t5otr;, 
 
 Soil) av. 
 
 8axr€t. 
 
 
 eStSoi' 
 
 ai/. 
 
 cSwKev 
 
 av. 
 
 = €1 Tt et^f. 
 
 3. Future, {a) « (a rtva) av lx>/ 
 
 = €av Tt 6X27. 
 (6) a (a Ttva) c'xot 
 
 = €1 Tt 'kyoi. 
 (c) a (a Ttva) €^€i 
 
 = ct Tt e^et. 
 
 1. Present a (a Ttva) eTx^v 
 (or Impf. Past). 
 
 2. Past. a (a Ttva) eo-xev 
 
 § l8o. Participles in the Protasis. 
 
 Any form of a Protasis may be expressed by a Participle. 
 For real examples see further. 
 
 A. 
 
 Protasis. Apodosis. 
 
 1. Present. TauTa Trotcuv aSiKcis. 
 
 = €t TavTa TTOiets 
 
 2. Past. TavTa Trotwv -^StKCts. 
 
 = €t TttVTa eTTOlftS 
 
 3. FUTURK (il) TavTtt Trotwv aSi/c^o-cts. 
 
 r=€av TttVTa TTOLTJS 
 
 (b) ravTa Trotwi/ aSiKotiys a v. 
 
 = €t Tavra iroioL'qs 
 
 B. 
 
 1. Present (or TavTa Trotwv 
 Imperf. Past) 
 
 2. Past 
 
 = €t TttVTtt €7rOl€lS 
 
 TavTa TTOtrJcras 
 
 = ct TarTtt eTTOti^cras 
 
 
POSITION OF ^v. 203 
 
 Note, The present participle alone is given (except in B. 
 2). Of course the aorist participle, denoting a single as 
 opposed to a continued act, may be used in any of the forms, 
 while the present participle denotes an imperfect act (i.e. an 
 act in progress). 
 
 § 181. Position of o.v, 
 
 av of an Apodosis can never begin a sentence. Its natural 
 position is after its verb, but, as it possesses a power of 
 emphasising the word it follows, it often comes before the 
 verb and after some word which is to be emphasised. Almost 
 any word may be so emphasised, especially an interrogative or 
 a negative. 
 
 ovK av \ypi\ii y elireiv on ov irpoa-^l^ov tov vovv. PlAT. 
 
 / could not say that I was not attentive. 
 
 ;r(us av rts, a ye fxr^ kTvia-Tano^ ravra (ro4>o<s cir) ; XeN. 
 
 How could a man be wise in matters of which he knew nothing 
 certainly ? 
 
 TToXXrj av Tis evSaifMOVia €ir] Trepl tovs veov?. 
 
 Plat. Jpol. xii. 
 Great would be the good fortune in the case of the young, 
 cip ovv av fJL€ OL€(T$€ TocTaSc €T7) Siayevecrdai. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xxi. 
 Think you then that I should have lived all these years ? 
 av belongs to Siayevea-daL. 
 
 €7rL€LKrj av fxoi SoKii) irpos tovtov Xeyeiv. PlAT. Apol. XXIU. 
 / think I should be adopting a conciliatory tone towards him. 
 av belongs to Aeyetv and emphasises kiriciKy\. 
 
 As in the last two examples av when separated from its 
 verb often comes near otoixat^ SokC), <f>r]fj,L, otBa, so much so as 
 to look as if it belonged to them. But we must be careful 
 to connect the av with its proper verb, ovk oTSa av el, or ovk 
 av oi8a et for ovk otSa el — av should be especially noticed, e.g. 
 OVK ol8' av d Treto-at/xt (EuR. Med.), I know not whether I should 
 persuade him, where av belongs to TretVai/xi. 
 
 § 182. Repetition of dv. 
 
 "Av is often used more than once in the same sentence. For 
 this repetition there may be two reasons. 
 
204 THE PARTICLE &v. 
 
 1. In a long paragraph, which is complicated by interrupt- 
 ing clauses, av occurs at the beginning. It thus strikes the 
 keynote of the whole so to speak, and gives warning that the 
 whole coming statement is conditional. It occurs again later 
 on near the verb. 
 
 2. It may be repeated, more than once, even in a short 
 sentence, if any special word is to be emphasised. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 I. In long paragraphs — 
 
 v//.€is 5' t(ra>s Tax' ^^ 6,yd6^^voi^ wcrirep oi vixTxa^ovTCS 
 eyetpoyaevot, Kpovaavres OiV /xe, TretOofxevoi 'Avvtw, p^Stws 
 av d7roKT€LvaiT€. PlAT. Apol xviii. 
 
 But you very possibly in annoyance, just like people when they 
 are being roused from a nap, might listen to Anytus, and, 
 with a tap, put me to death, and think nothing more of it 
 
 N.B. — TOLxa, perhaps, often attaches an av to itself. 
 
 In Plat. Apol. xxxii., a good instance. The sentence begins 
 with cyo) yap av oT/xai — then seven lines later on oi/xat av 
 recurs, followed by av evpetv, (all the av's belonging to evpetv). 
 
 II. For emphasis — 
 
 OVK av aTToSoLrjv ov^' av ojSoXov ovSei/t. ArIST. Nub. 118. 
 
 I'll not give — no not a copper to any man. 
 
 ri StJt' av ws ck r(^v^^ av oi^eXotp-i ere ; SoPH. Ai. 536. 
 
 How then, knowing what has happened, could I assist thee ? 
 
 ovt' av K^Xeva-aip! ovV av, et OkXoL<i en 
 
 irpdva-etv, ipov y av rjSeios Spcotjs pera. SOPH. Ant. 69, 
 
 / would not urge thee, no ! nor shouldst thou now 
 
 Desire to help me, would I have thy help. 
 
 Good instances occur in SoPH. Ant. 4QQ, 680, 884 j Aesch. 
 Persae, 431. 
 
 § 183. "Av with Future Indicative. 
 
 "Av with the Future Indicative, Infinitive, and Participle. 
 Many critics have maintained that this construction does 
 not occur in Attic Greek. Many instances have been 
 removed by revision of texts. Mr. Eiddell (Apology, p. 67, 
 and Digest, p. 139) regards the construction as abundantly 
 established, and cites seven instances from Plato, e.g. Rep. 
 
ELLIPSE OF THE APODOSIS, ETC. 205 
 
 615 D, ovx riKei, ovS' av rj^et Sevpo. Other cases are ApoL 
 xvii., Leg. 719 E, Symp. 222 A, etc. Also Xen. An. ii. 
 6. 13, av KoXdarcarOe. In Phaedr. 227 B, OVK av oiei fi€ 
 TroLrjo-ea-dai. In Crito. XV., ovk ocei av <^av€to-^at, av with 
 the future infinitive occurs, av occurs with the future parti- 
 ciple in Plat. Apol. xvii. (end of chapter), ovk av 7rot>}aovTos. 
 Madvig denies, Kriiger defends, the existence of this last 
 construction. 
 
 § 184. Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of 
 
 the Verb. 
 
 "Av of an Apodosis is sometimes found without its verb. 
 The verb however (an Indicative or an Optative) may be 
 easily supplied from the context. 
 
 ot 8' otKcrat peyKovcTLV' dXX' ovk av irpo rov. Ar. Nub. 5. 
 The domestics are snoring, hut they wouldn't (have been doing 
 so) once, ovk av (sc. cppeyKOv). 
 
 Where two verbs are connected or opposed, it is enough to 
 use av once only, with the first, unless some lengthy com- 
 plication of clause renders it necessary for the sake of clear- 
 ness to repeat it, or unless some word is to be emphasised. 
 
 ovSels av ^v crot os efxov KarenapTvprjcrev (sc. av). 
 
 Antiph. Her. X5. 
 
 You would have found no one who would have given evidence 
 me. 
 
 rl €7rotryo-ev av ; -^ 8^Aov on w/xocrcv (sc. av) ; DeM. 31. 9. 
 
 Wliat would he have done 1 Is it not clear that he woidd have 
 taken an oath f 
 
 § 185. Ellipse of the Protasis. 
 
 Sometimes the Protasis, as in all languages, is wholly 
 omitted. It can be easily supplied from the context. 
 
 ovBev yap dv k^Xaf^-qv (sc. €t irifxrja-dfxrjv, from what has 
 
 preceded). Pl. Apol. xxviii. 
 I should have received no harm {had I done so and so). 
 
 Trav ydp dv KarcLpydcro). SOPH. LJl. 1022. 
 So hadst thou compassed all (sc. et roiaSe ^a-Oa), supplied 
 from a preceding wish. 
 
2o6 THE PARTICLE av. 
 
 § l86. Et and av both in the Protasis. 
 
 In several instances d and ai/ are both found in the Pro- 
 tasis (nearly always an Optative). One of the best-known 
 instances is from Plat. Protag. 329 B., koI lyw, direp aAAw t$ 
 dvOpiOTTiiiV 7r€iOoifi7}v av, Kal crol Treidofiac, for myself, if I would 
 trust any other man, I trust you. Here it is considered that av 
 belongs to the verb TreiOoLfxyjv, which does double duty, both as 
 a Protasis with d, and also as an Apodosis with av to another 
 unexpressed Protasis, thus : el 7r€i6'otju,r^v, if I would trust (i.e. 
 TretOotixrjv av, I would trust, el ttlo-tlv Solt], if he should give me his 
 word). This is an established Attic idiom, e.g. Dem. Phil. i. 
 18, ovTOL TTai/TcAws, ovS' el ixrj Trotr^cracT' av tovto, evKaracfipovrj- 
 rov ecTTi, it is not lightly to he despised, even if you should not do so 
 (do so — if the occasion should arise). Isoc. Archid. 120, el he 
 ixr)8els av vjxtov d^Lioarete (rjv aTroa-repov/Jievos TrarpiSos, Trpocr'qKei 
 K.T.X., if none of you should care to live — if deprived of his country, 
 it behoves you, etc. In this last example the Second Protasis is 
 given in the participle diroa-Tepovixevos, as it is also in Dem. 
 Meid. 582, €6 ovrot -y^prniara e^ovTe<i fxr) Trpoolvr dv, if these men 
 woidd not spend money — if they had it. 
 
 Other instances occur (perhaps) in Aesch. Ag. 930, and 
 Sept. 513. See also EuR. Hel. 825, Dem. Meid. 1206, de 
 Pais. Leg. § 190 (with Shilleto's note), Antiphon, 6. 29, Xen. 
 Cyr. iii. 3. 35 (Oav/xd^oifx^ dv — el dv (u^eA.'^crete). 
 
 An essential point to notice is that in all these instances 
 (except Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35) the Apodosis is in the Indicative, 
 generally in the Present, sometimes the Future. The Opta- 
 tive with €t and dv, therefore, does not denote a remote future 
 supposition except so far as it refers to the unexpressed 
 Protasis. Hence in their notes to Aesch. Ag. 930 (reading el 
 TTpda-a-oLfi dv) both Mr. Paley and Mr. Sidgwick consider et 
 Trpdcra-oLp.' dv a variant not for el irpdo-a-OLfii, but for €1 Trpd^o), 
 translating not, if I should prosper, but, if I have a chance of 
 prospering. 
 
 Jelf (§ 860) and Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, 107) 
 compare the Homeric et Kev with the Optative. But in all 
 the Homeric instances an Apodosis with the Optative and Kev 
 is joined, e.g. II. 273, el rovno ne Xd/Sot/xev dpoi/JieO' kAcos 
 eo-OXov, if, in the case given, we should take them, we should win 
 goodly renown. 
 
 In Dem. Timoth. 1201. 19, et dv occurs with a Past Indicative : 
 
Ae IN APODOSIS. 207 
 
 €t roivvv rovjo l(T\vpov rjv av tovtio reKfx'qpLov^ Ka/xot y^vkadu) 
 T€Kfj,rjpLov. Observe the Apodosis in the Imperative : if this v:ould 
 have been strong evidence for him (i.e. if he had been able to adduce 
 it), let it be evidence for me too. Here, as Professor Goodwin ex- 
 plains (p. 101), the Protasis means : if it is true that this would 
 have been, so that reference is really to the present, and only to 
 the past so far as the unexpressed Protasis requires. Dem. de 
 Cor. 260. 2, is another instance if d eTrex^tprjcr' av is read ; only 
 the Apodosis which follows is rts ovk av aTrcKTeive. 
 
 Note. There is no difficulty in connecting an Apodosis with 
 more than one Protasis referring to different times, e.g. Dem. 
 de Cor. 274. 28, iTrev^opiai Traon tovtols, d dXrjSy] tt/dos vfia? 
 
 €L7roLjxt Kal etTTov, I pray to all these, if I should speak, and did 
 speak the truth before you. 
 
 § 187. Ae in Apodosis. 
 
 Se sometimes introduces an Apodosis as if it were co- 
 ordinate with, or followed, the Protasis. This is instructive 
 as showing that the logical importance of the subordinate 
 sentence (Protasis) may assert itself over the grammatical 
 importance of the Principal Sentence (the Apodosis). Such 
 cases, however, are very rare in Attic. 
 
 el ovv lyo) ytyvwo-KO) firjre ra ocrta jxrJTC to, SiKaia, vfieis 6e 
 SiSd^are fie. Xen. Hell iv. 1. 33. 
 
 If therefore I know neither what is wholly nor what is just, do 
 you then teach me. 
 
 Cf. Soph. 0. T. 1267 ; Seiva S' ^v. 
 
 § 188. idv seemingly Interrogative. 
 
 ct is interrogative as well as conditional, but edv is only 
 conditional, and must not be used in Indirect Questions. 
 Where it appears to be interrogative, as in two places cited 
 by Liddell and Scott, it comes after o-KOTret or o-Ke^at, and 
 clearly means, "if by chance," e.g. Xen. Mem. iv. 4. 12. 
 a-Kkxpai, kdv roSe crot fiaXXov dpea-Ky, consider if perchance you 
 like this better (si forte tibi placuerit). 
 
2o8 THE PARTICLE &v. 
 
 § l89» oil/ with Participle seemingly in Protasis. 
 
 A Participle with dv must always be in Apodosis. But 
 sometimes examination and explanation are necessary. 
 
 Though I have much to say, yet I hold my tongue. 
 
 €xwv is a concessive participle, and is itself an apodosis, 
 the sentence being equal to e'xot/xt av (ei /BoyXoi/jL-qv), o-iyoy 8k 
 (or eyco osTrep ttoXA,' av e;(ot/Afc). dv emphasises 7roA,Aa. 
 
 orvdets t' av ovk av d\.yvvaL<s irXiov. SOPH. 0. T. 446. 
 
 If thou speed hence thou wouldst not vex me more. 
 
 Here a-vdik is itself the Protasis followed by av, which 
 really belongs to dXyvvais. 
 
 ^iXnnros IToTiSatav IXwv Kai Svvrjdels av avTos ^X^''^} ^^ 
 
 ijSovXi^Orj, 'OXvvOlols TrapeSwKcv. DeM. 23. 107. 
 P. after taking Potidaea, and though he might, if he had 
 wished, have kept it himself, yet handed it over to the 
 Olynthians. 
 
 Svvqdels av is the Apodosis (rjSwT^drj dv — €1 kpovXridri), the 
 participle having a concessive force. 
 
 § 190. Conditional Particles and their 
 combinations. 
 
 1. €t Sc fvq, if not, sin minus, sin aliter, has become so 
 stereotyped a phrase, that it is used where eav Se /xi} would 
 be more correct. 
 
 lav (f)aivr]TaL StKauov, Trctpwjae^a. €t 8e firj ecj/xev. 
 
 Plat. Crito ix. 
 If it appears right, let us make the attempt ; but if not, let us 
 abandon it. 
 
 2. eav, €1, meaning " if haply " (" in case," " in the event of," 
 " in hope that," " thinking that "). It contains sometimes a 
 virtual oratio obliqua (i.e. the thought of the subject). Cf. si 
 forte in Latin. 
 
 aKova-ov Kal i/nov, eav crot ravra Sokyj. PlAT. Rep. 358. 
 Hear me too, in case you may agree. 
 
 Trpos TYjV TToXiv, €1 €7ri/3oy]9oi€V, kxiiipovv. ThuC. vi. 100. 
 They were marching on the city, on the cJiance of the citizens 
 advancing against them (thinking that they might, etc.). 
 
EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 209 
 
 3. (So-TTc/) av 61 : also written ojo-jrepavei. The phrase 
 is compressed from aKnrep dv (Apodosis) — el (Protasis), e.g. 
 bxrirep av ct ctVot (Plat. Apol. ix.), just as if he were to say, 
 (Sxnrc/) dv ttololto el ctTroi. 
 
 4. Trws yap dv ; (sc. eir)), with a Protasis (ei with Optative) 
 omitted. How would it be, if it were so ? How is it possible ? 
 How so 9 
 
 5. Kav €i : vvv fiOL SoK€i Kav da-cjSeLav el KaraytyvtucrKOt ris 
 MeiStov TO. irpo(rr]Kovra ttoulv. DeM. 21. 51 = Kat dv troielv — 
 el Karaytyv ioa-KOL. But Kav el comes to be used for the simple 
 Kttt ei, even if. 
 
 6. Kav^Kal edv. 
 
 § 191* Examples of Conditional Sentences. 
 
 (A.) Ordinary Present Conditions. (B.) Ordinary Past 
 Conditions. (C.) Present and Past in combination. 
 
 Observe that the condition may be general as well as 
 particular. 
 
 (A.) €t Tt xj/evhopLai e^eorrtv k^eXey^ai fxe. AnTIPH. de Cher. 14. 
 If I am making any false statements, you may confute me. 
 
 el OeoL Tt Spiocriv alaxpov, ovk elalv BeoL 
 
 EURIP. Bell. Frag. 294. 
 If the gods do aught immoral they are nx) gods. 
 
 el ovv roiovTOV 6 ddvaros ecTTi, KepSos lycoye Xeyo). 
 
 Plat. A^ol. xxxiii. 
 If therefore death is such a state as this, I for my part count 
 it gain. 
 
 (B.) el aTroa-TrjvaL 'A6rjvaL0)v ovk rjOeXT^Gafiev, ovk rjSiKoviJLev. 
 
 Thug, iii 55. 
 
 If we refused to desert the Athenians, we were doing no wrong. 
 
 OVK because ovk €^eAa)=nolo. 
 
 
 
2IO THE PARTICLE &p. 
 
 €t fX€V 'Ao-kAt^ttios Oeov T^v, ovK "^v ai(rxpoK€p8r]<s, et 8' 
 al(rxpoK€p8r)s, ovk ^j/ ^eov. PlAT. i?ej?. iii. 408 C. 
 
 If Asclepius ivas the son of a god, he was not covetous ; if he 
 was covetous, he was not the son of a god. 
 
 €1 Tt aXXo kykvero kiriKtv^vvov, TravTCOv irapa Bvvafiiv 
 
 fieTia-xofJiev. ThUC. iii. 54. 
 If any other danger arose, we took our share in all beyond 
 
 our strength. 
 
 (C) <f>pd^€Te o^v OL\\rjXoL<s el TrwTroTc rt yJKOvcre tl<s. 
 
 Plat. Apol. iii. 
 Explain then one to another, if at any time any one heard 
 
 €L irov T6 eirpa^a toiovto? <j>avovjxai. PlAT. Apol. xxi. 
 If ever I engaged in any business, I shall be found to be such 
 as I have described myself. 
 
 el 8e 8vo e^ Ivos dywvos yeyevrjaOov ovk eyto dtrios. 
 
 Antiph. de caed. Herod. 84. 
 If two trials have been made out of one (or instead of one), it 
 is not my fault 
 
 § 192. Ordinary Future Conditions. 
 
 Protasis edv (rjv, dv) with the Subjunctive. 
 
 -qv dvaireia-Oi tovtovi, (rioOrja-Ofxat. ArIST. Nub. 77. 
 If I (shall) persuade this person here, I shall escape. 
 
 edv ifiol TreiS-qcrde, <f>€L(re(r6e p.ov. PLAT. Apol. xviii. 
 If you are {will be) persuaded by me, you will spare me. 
 
 edv epie dTroKTetvrjTe, ovk epe pei^aa jSXdrpere yj vpds avrovs. 
 
 Plat. Apol. 
 If you put me to death, you will inflict no greater injury on 
 me than on yourselves. 
 
 KOI iraiS', edvirep Sevp* epov TrpoorOev poXy, 
 TraprjyopeLTe. AesCH. Fers. 529. 
 
 And for my son, if he return before me. 
 Comfort ye him. 
 
ORDINA R Y FUTURE CONDITIONS. 2 1 1 
 
 6t8(ocr' tKwi/ 
 KT€iv€iv eavTov, y]V TctSe xj/evcrdy Xeyoiv. 
 
 Soph. PJiil. 1342. 
 Freely he offers himself 
 To the death if, speaking thus, he lie. 
 
 8i8io(TL, he offers, practically means, he says tliat he will, is 
 ready, and thus implies a future. 
 
 Trapol Tov ayadov deov, av Oebs kSkX-Q, avriKa treov. PlAT. 
 / must go at once, to the good God, if God will. 
 
 10. KOVK dv ye Ae^at/*' Itt' dyadotat crois KaKa. 
 AV. rjv fxyj ye (fi€vyo)v iK<f>vyrjS Trpbs aWepa. 
 
 Eur. Fhoen. 1215. 
 Yea, and I would not speak of ill close on thy happiness. 
 Yea, but thou shall, unless thou escape in thy flight to the 
 firnfiaraent. 
 
 Cf. Eur. Orest. 1593. 
 
 N.B. — A physical impossibility is here spoken of. Observe 
 that it follows an Apodosis with Optative and dv: rfv with 
 the Subjunctive realises vividly the impossibility of the 
 situation. 
 
 T6 ovv, dv etTTOXTtv 01 vofxoL K.T.X. PlAT. Crit. xii. 
 PFhat then, if the laws should say to us, etc. 
 
 A physical impossibility again is brought home as a vivid 
 argumentum ad hominem. 
 
 § 193. Less Vivid Future Conditions. 
 
 In English we render el with the Optative in a variety of 
 ways : el 7rot>io-at/zi, if I should do, if I were to do, should I do, 
 were I to do, if I did, supposing I were to do, etc. 
 
 ov TToXXri dv dXoyla ein] el (fiojSoiTO tov ddvarov 6 toiovtos. 
 
 Plat. Fhaed. 68. 
 Would it not be the height of inconsistency if such a man were to 
 fear death ? 
 
 e'i iwt CTTt TovTois d4>L0LTe, etTTOLfx dv vfiLV. Plat. Apol. xvii. 
 If you should dismiss me on these conditions, I ivoidd reply to 
 you, etc. 
 
212 THE PARTICLE Hv. 
 
 oLKO<s 8' av avT09, €t cfidoyyrjv \dfSoL, 
 
 cra<^€o-TaT' av Xe^eiev. AeSCH. Ag. 37 
 
 Nay, the very house, if gifted with a voice, would tell the tale 
 most 
 
 A physical impossibility represented as supposable ; of. CiC. 
 Cat. 1, haec si tecum patria loquatur, nonne impetrare debeat 1 
 
 eyo) ovv Seiva dv eirjv clpyaa-fievos ct AtVoi/jti rrjv tol^lv. 
 
 Plat. Apol 
 I should then be in position of one who has committed dreadful 
 sin, were I to desert my post. 
 
 The perfect denotes the state. 
 
 § 194. Most Vivid Future Conditions. 
 
 1. Et with the Future Indicative sometimes refers plainly 
 to the future, and is used much as edv with the Subjunctive, 
 only the latter is more common and less positively and 
 vividly future. ^ 
 
 aTTOKTei/eis yap, €t /xr] yrjs e^O) ^aAcis. EUR. Phoen. 1621. 
 Thou wilt slay me, if thou wilt thrust me from the land. 
 
 el fxrj Kade^eis yAwcraav, eo-rac crot KaKa. 
 
 EuRiP. Aeg. Fr. 5. 
 If thou wilt not curb thy tongue there will be ills for thee. 
 
 •iqv kOkXtafxev dTToOvrjCKeiv — et Se cfiofSrjcroiJLeda klvSvvovs. 
 
 IsocR. Archid. p. 138, A. § 107. 
 If we are ready to die — but if ive shall fear dangers. 
 
 Observe the co-ordination of the two forms. 
 
 ct Tovro TTOcqcroiJLev, paStoiS ra CTrtTT^Seta e^ofxev. 
 If we do this we shall easily find supplies. 
 
 2. But et with Future Indicative in Protasis is found with 
 a present (or virtual present) in the Apodosis. 
 
 et TTOtrja-eis then = et /xeXXeLS TroLrjcretv, if you are going to do, 
 if you mean to do, if you are for doing, and this et with the 
 Future is used of a condition now imminent, and even existing, 
 e.g. if youWe for fighting, Pm your man, et /xaxet o8e eycu crot. 
 
 ^ Mr. Monro {Homeric Syntax, p. 239) considers that el with the 
 Future (in Homer) generally expresses suppositions of an obvious or 
 familiar kind. 
 
MIXED EXAMPLES, 213 
 
 atpc ttA^kt/oov, €t ixa\€.L. ArIST. Av. 761. 
 
 Up with your spur if you mean fighting. 
 Cf. Arist. Ach, 316. 
 
 ^ vvv eyo) /x€v ovk av-qp^ avTY) 8* di/T^p, 
 
 €L ravT dvarl rfjSe KeiVcTat Kparrj. SoPH. Ant. 484. 
 
 Xo, you now ! I am no man, but she is the man, if with impunity 
 these my commands are to count as naught in her eyes. 
 Si iacebit imperium nostrum, cf. 461. 
 
 The periphrasis with /acAAw and Infinitive (Present or 
 Future) is commoner in prose. There is a Hfe about the expres- 
 sion which recommends this et with the Future to poetry. 
 
 § 195. Mixed examples illustrating the connection 
 between and interchangeability of the Sub- 
 junctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in 
 Conditional Sentences. 
 
 TTWS odv au opdm 8iKd(raiT€ irepl avrwi/ ; el tovtov<s eacrcTe 
 Tov vo/XL^ofxevov opKOv SLOfMocrafXiVovs KaTqyoprjcraL, k.t.A. 
 irws Se €a(reT€ ; eav vvvl dTroifrjKJiicnrja-de fjLov. 
 
 Antiph. de Caede Herod. 90. 
 
 How then would you rightly judge on these points ? if you 
 shall allow my prosecutors to take the prescribed oath and 
 accuse me. And how will you allow this 1 if you acquit me 
 on this present trial. 
 
 N.B. — et with the Future Indicative, and idv with Subjunc- 
 tive, have a modal force, " by permitting." 
 
 Plat, de Rep. 359 c (of the ring of Gyges), etr; 8' dv 
 
 Tj k^ovQ-ia r^v Xkym TOidSe fidXio-Ta el avTots yevotro 
 ol'av TTOTC ^aort SvvajJiLV t^ Tvyov tov AvSov irpoyovt^ 
 yevecrOai. 
 They would enjoy this liberty which I am speaking of most 
 completely, if they should possess such a power as we are 
 told the ancestor of Gyges the Lydian once possessed. 
 Compared with 
 
 PlA.T. Hep. 612 B, Troiryreov eTvaL avry rot diKaca, edv t' e)(y 
 
 TOV Tvyov Sa/CTvAtov, edv re fx-q. 
 {we concluded, evpofxev) that the soul must do what is righteous, 
 
 whether it possesses the ring of Gyges or no. 
 
214 THE PARTICLE <%. 
 
 « 
 
 ovSels rjiXMV twv i/o/xwv l/x7ro8wv eo-rtv, eav re Tts fSovXr^rai 
 vfxwv €ts aTToiKiav levat, el fxrj dpecrKoifxcv rjfxeLS re Kat i^ 
 TToAt?, eav re fieTOiKelv aAAotre Trot eA^wv, tevat eKCtcre 
 OTTOt ai/ /3ov Ararat, 6^(0 vra to, at^rov. PlAT. Cn^. xiii. 
 
 None of ow^ laws ^prevents any of you, if he wishes to go to a 
 colony, supposing we and the state should not give him 
 satisfaction, or if he wishes to go and reside anywhere else, 
 {none prevejits him) from going wherever he wishes with all 
 his belongings. 
 
 The Optative here, Professor Goodwin says, simply marks 
 a less prominent clause. But, it is to be noticed, idv with the 
 Subjunctive here, which is thus joined with el and the Optative, 
 is a general supposition. 
 
 § 196. The Optative and Indicative with av 
 without a Protasis. 
 
 The Optative with dv is freely used without a Protasis in 
 a variety of modified statements. In some cases it is easy to 
 supply a Protasis ; in others no Protasis appears to have been 
 thought of (This is Madvig's Optativus Potentialis or DuUta- 
 tivus, § 136.) 
 
 1. As a modified statement in present or future time, very often 
 drawing an inference from ivhat has preceded. 
 
 w/aa av i^/ztv a-va-Kevd^ecr 6 at etiq. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 41. 
 
 It is time for us then to be packing up. 
 Of. AntiPH. Tetral. B.B. 6, eXeyxOeirj. 
 
 tovt' dv etrj o eyw (f>r][XL ere alvLTTea-dai. PlAT. Apol. XV. 
 
 Herein then would consist what I hold to be your riddling. 
 Of Antiph. de Chor. 15, oTos r' dv et-q. 
 Often /SovXoifjLfjv dv, I could wish, I wish, velim. 
 
 ovK dv fJLedeLfxrjV rov Opovov, fxr] vovOerei. ArIST. Ran. 830. 
 I'll not resign the throne, don't counsel me. 
 Cf. Arist. Ach. 1055. 
 
 2. A modified command or prayer, sometimes put as a ques- 
 tion. 
 
 (TV ixev KO/xi^oi<s dv aeavrov y Oekeis. SoPH. Ant. 444. 
 Thou may'st betake thee where thou likest, i.e. get thee gone. 
 
UNFULFILLED CONDITIONS. 215 
 
 a/0 ovv WeX'qa-aLs av ; 
 
 Should you feel disposed ? Would you mind ? Please do so 
 and so. 
 
 3. A wish, expressed interrogatively. An interrogation equiva- 
 lent to a wish. 
 
 TTw? 0,1/ oXoifxrjv ; EURIP. 
 
 How could I perish ? i.e. would I might perish ! 
 
 Arist. Ach. 991. 
 
 Similarly, but not so fi^eely, the Imperfect Indicative is 
 used. The time is past. 
 
 €f3ovX6ixrjv av. 
 
 I could have wished, vellem. 
 
 ■^v S' av ovros riov Ittttlkiov ns. PlAT. Apol. iv. 
 This man accordingly would he one of those who 
 horses. 
 
 {jiv av is Apodosis of an unfulfilled condition.) 
 
 § 197. Unfulfilled Conditions.^ 
 
 1. Et with the Imperfect Indicative. The time of the 
 Imperfect Indicative is either present or a past of description, 
 habit, or iteration. 
 
 KOL T08', €iTr€p €(Td€VOV, 
 
 e8p<ov av. Soph. El. 604. 
 
 Had I the strength, 
 I ^d do the deed. 
 
 The time is present (/ should now have been doing). 
 
 ^ We have in English several ways of expressing an unfulfilled con- 
 dition in present time, some of which resemble the Greek. Thus we 
 may render, d ravra eiroleis rjdiKeis dp, if you were doing this (or, if you 
 had been doing this), you would be doing wrong (or, would have now been 
 doing wrong). These are not, however, the forms always used in every- 
 day speech. U. g. A tramp, meeting me on the road, asks me for a copper. 
 I put my hand in my pocket, but, finding nothing there, I shake my 
 head and say, "Very sorry, if I had anything, 1 would give it" {et rt 
 elxov ididovv &p). A Shakspereanj unfulfilled condition, referring to 
 present time, may be given. Constance says to Arthur : "If thou 
 that bid'st me be content, loert grim," etc., "/ would not care, I then 
 would be content, for then I should not love thee, " etc. ' * But thou art 
 fair." 
 
2i6 THE PARTICLE Si/. 
 
 €1 ^€i/os k-Tvy^avov wv, ^uvcytyvtikrKCTe St^ttov av />iot. 
 
 Plat. ^^o?. i. 
 If I happened to he a foreigner {which I am not), you would 
 surely pardon me. 
 
 The time is present. 
 
 ^ €t iir] tot' arovovv vvv av ovk evcfypaivofJLrjv. PhILEM. 159. 
 If I had not been toiling then, I should not be rejoicing now. 
 
 The force of the Imperfect Indicative (referring to both 
 kinds of time) is well shown in the above example. 
 
 eyo) o^v eKaXXvvofJLrjv kol rjf3pvv6fA'qv av, el -qir LCTTdixrjv ravr a. 
 dXy ov yap iTTLa-Tajxai. PlAT. Apol. iv. 
 
 / anyhow should plume and pride myself if I possessed this 
 knowledge. But — you see, I dorUt possess it (or, I should 
 have been pluming, etc.) 
 
 The time is present, or it may refer to a habit in the past. 
 
 SrjXov ovv 6tl ovk av irpokXeyev el {xrj eiricTTevev dXr)$evcr€iv^ 
 
 Xen. Mem. i. 1. 5. 
 It is plain accordingly that Socrates would not have publicly 
 
 made these statements had he not felt confident that he 
 
 should speak the truth. 
 
 The Imperfect here expresses customary or habitual acts in 
 the past. 
 
 Similarly in Latin the Imperfect is used, and not the 
 Pluperfect. The poets are fond of it as a descriptive past. 
 Several instances, not much noticed, occur in Horace. Ille 
 non inclusus equo Minervae, etc. ; falleret aulam, etc. ; sed, 
 etc. ; ureret flammis ; He would not have been deceiving, but 
 burning. Thou hadst not seen Achilles deceiving, but burning. 
 Non ego hoc ferrem calidus iuventa consule Planco. I had 
 not brooked this in the heat of youth when Flancus was consul. 
 
 Sometimes av with the Aorist Indicative in Apodosis is 
 joined to el with the Imperfect Indicative, not to denote a 
 past unfulfilled condition, but a single act, e.g. Plat. Euthyph. 
 12 D, el fxev ovv (tv fxe 'qpioras Tt, eirrov du, if you were asking 
 me any question I should instantly say. Here elirov dv really 
 refers to the present, and denotes the instantaneousness of the 
 single act in a way which the Imperfect could not express. 
 
OMISSION OF ^v. 217 
 
 2. Et with the Aorist or Pluperfect Indicative. The time 
 is past, denoting a single act (Aorist), or a state (Pluperfect). 
 6.T:kBa.vov o.v el jMr] "q twv rpiaKovra dp)(r] KarekvOrj. 
 
 Plat. Ajpol. xx. 
 I should have been put to death if the government of the 
 Thirty had not been overthrown. 
 
 €t fx-q dv€/3rj "Avvtos kolv w^Ae ^(lAias 8pa)(fj,d<s. 
 
 Plat. Apot. xxv. 
 If Anytus had not come into court he would even have 
 incurred a fine 0/ 1000 drachmae. 
 
 el fXY) vfieis rjXSeTe iTTopevofxeda dv iirl ^acnXka. 
 
 Xen. An. ii. 1. 4. 
 If you had not come (past) we should now be marching 
 against the King (or have been now marching). 
 
 Protasis a single act in Past ; Apodosis a continued act in the 
 Present. 
 
 €t Tore ifSor^O'qcraixev or/c dv "qviJ^Xu vvv 6 ^lXlttttos. 
 
 Dem. 30. 6. 
 If we had then given help Philip would not be annoying 
 us now. 
 
 Here vvv is added to mark the present. 
 
 ovK dv Trap€fX€Lva €t eXeXv/x-qv. AnTIPH. Herod. 13. 
 I should not have stayed if I had not been set free on bail. 
 €t, o (T€ rjpMTiov, a7r€/c/3tVa), iKavws dv 'qSr) i/x€p,a9rJK€iv. 
 
 Plat. Euthyph. 14 c. 
 If yau had answered my question, I should already have 
 finished my learning. 
 
 The pluperfect denotes a past state. 
 
 § 198. The omission of av in Apodosis with 
 Indicative. 
 
 1. Sometimes a past tense of the Indicative is found in 
 Apodosis without dv. Such a construction is necessarily 
 rhetorical. A statement which would have been true if 
 certain conditions had happened is spoken of as actually true. 
 The instances are rare, and many are disputed, but some 
 occur both in poetry and prose. 
 
2i8 THE PARTICLE &v. 
 
 TTvpyovs TTeorovras ya-fxev ^^XXrjvcov Sopl 
 (fio^ov Trapk(T\€V ov (xecrios oSe ktvttos. EuR. Hec. 1111. 
 (for Trapka-\€v av). 
 
 Had we not known 
 That Phrygians towers had fallen 'neath the spear 
 Of Hellas, no slight fear this din had caused. ' 
 
 Cf. Nee veni nisi fata locum sedemque dedisset. 
 
 Verg. Aen. xi. 112. 
 
 The Imperfect by itself almost bears this meaning without 
 requiring an av. Indeed the intrinsic meaning of the Im- 
 perfect {e.g. in the following example, " I was not by way of 
 sending,") is closely allied to a conditioned statement. 
 e.g. KatTOL ov SrJTTOV ye Kar' ifiavrov fjLTjvvTrjv €7r€jx7rov etSw?. 
 
 Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 24. 
 And yet I surely was not sending an informer against myself 
 with my eyes open (/ should not have been sending). 
 See especially a paragraph too long for quotation in Andokides 
 ' " L 58. 59. Cf. also EuR. Bacch. 1312. 
 
 The construction is commoner in Latin (cf. Liv. xxxiv. 29, 
 Difficilior facta erat oppugnatio ni T. Quinctius supervenisset. 
 Tag. Ann. iii. 14, Effigies Pisonis traxerant ac divellebant ni 
 iussu principis repositae forent. HoR. Od. II. xvii., Me 
 truncus illapsus cerebro sustulerat nisi Faunus ictum dextra 
 levasset. Verg. Georg. ii. 132, Et, si non alium late iactaret 
 odorem, laurus erat. 
 
 2. This omission of av is almost the rule with the Im- 
 perfect of verbs denoting necessity, duty, possibility, propriety, 
 etc. : XP^^ 0^ ^XPV^^ ^^^S ^iv^i ivrjv, eiKos '^v, TrpocrrJKev, ^v or 
 virrjpx^u (it was possible), KaXbv rjv, alcrxpov rjv, KaXws ei^^ev, 
 (xxpeXov, efxeXXe^, i/SovXoixrjv. Also with verbals in -reos, e.g. 
 TTpoaipereov rjv (satius erat). All these phrases denote an un- 
 fulfilled condition (present or continued past). 
 
 This construction is parallel with the Latin — debebam, de- 
 cebat, oportebat, poteram, gerundive with eram, par, satis, 
 aequum erat, etc. See Madvig, L. G. § 348 e., and Obs. 1. 
 
 KaXov '^v TOtaSe, el Kal '^fxapTavo/xev, ei^at rfj rjixerepa opyrj. 
 
 Thug. i. 38. 
 
 It would have been well for them, even if we had been 
 wronging them, to give way to our anger. 
 
 I 
 
OMISSION OF Siv. 219 
 
 i/SovXofirjv fxkv ovk kpi^etv ivddSe. ArIST. Ban. 866. 
 / could have wished I was not wrangling here. 
 
 t(rov rjv fxoi {x-q iXdetv (as apodosis to el fxr^Sev Siecfiepe). 
 
 Antiph. Eerod. 13. 
 It would have been all the same to me not to have come. 
 For M(f)eXov, kpovX6}xy]v, see Wishes. 
 
 3. Observe similar constructions of eSec and ^XP^^ iXPl^')- 
 XP'^v (eSet) (re ravTa ttolclv. 
 
 You ought to be doing, or, to have been doing (but you are 
 not, or were not, doing the act). Compare kiroUis av. 
 Xpyjv (eSet) ere ravTa Troirja-aL. 
 You ought to have done (but you did not do) the act. 
 
 Compare kirol-qcras dv. 
 Oportebat and oportuit facere. 
 For xPl^i '^it^ Present Infinitive and Aorist Infinitive, see 
 Plat. Apol. xxii., Arist. Ach. 562. eSei, Dem. 112. 6. But 
 Xpri o-e Tfoidv (Trot^crai), you ought to do this (of what can still 
 be done), oportet te facere. 
 OVK gSgl ere ravra Trotetv. 
 
 You ought not to be doing (what you are doing). 
 XP'^v, eSet, etc. , however may take an dv. 
 
 ei jxlv rjina-TdfieOa o-a^w?, ovSev dv eSec &v /xeXXio Aeyetv. 
 
 Xen. Anab. v. 1. 10. 
 If we had all known for certain, there would be no need foo' 
 me to say what I am going to say. 
 So in Latin possem may be used and not poteram, oporteret 
 and not oportebat. 
 
 4. KLvSvvevo), fxeXXo). 
 
 Tj ttoXls €KLv8vv€V(re Trdcra Siacfidap-qvai, el dvefios eTreyei/ero. 
 
 Thug. iii. 74. 
 
 The city was in danger of being entirely destroyed if a wind 
 had not arisen (we might say, but a wind arose), a 
 periphrasis for buc^Odpy] dv. 
 In eo erat ut consumeretur urbs nisi, etc. 
 fieXXb) in the Imperfect is a periphrasis for an Aorist 
 with dv. 
 
 ov arva-TpareveLv efxeXXov. DeM. de Fals. Leg. 391. 11. 
 They would not have joined forces {ovk dv crvvea-Tpdreva-av). 
 Vires non collaturi erant. 
 
220 THE PARTICLE &v. 
 
 § 199. 'Eaz/ (r\v) with the Subjunctive, and Et 
 with the Optative in General or Fre- 
 quentative Suppositions.^ 
 
 Many of the four forms already given may express general 
 as well as particular suppositions, but to express a supposition 
 which refers not to a particular act, but to customary acts, fre- 
 quently repeated acts, general truths or maxims, there are two 
 common forms which are given below. They are parallel with 
 Indefinite Relative Sentences, and Frequentative Temporal 
 Sentences (see Index). 'Eav and et here mean " if ever " (eav 
 ;roTc, et Trore). 'Eai/ and ei, however, in themselves, with the 
 Subjunctive or Optative, are not Frequentative, but the Tense 
 of the Apodosis (the Principal Sentence) makes the whole 
 compound clause so. It is the Apodosis which distinguishes 
 these uses of eav with the Subjunctive, and et with the Optative 
 from their ordinary uses. 
 
 1 The Latin equivalents to Greek General Suppositions should be 
 noticed. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Si quis eorum decreto non stetit, sacrificiis interdicunt. 
 
 Caesar, B. G. vi. 12. 
 If yet any one does not abide hy they exclude him from the 
 their decree^ sacrifices. 
 
 Sin autem etiam libidinum intern- duplex malum est. 
 
 perantia accessit, Cic. Off. i. 123. 
 
 But if ever in addition there he the mischief is doubled, 
 
 want of control over the desires, 
 
 (The Present Indicative is also used in Latin. ) 
 
 Past. 
 
 Si a persequendo hostes deterrere disiectos a tergo circumvenie- 
 
 nequiverant, bant. Sallust, lug. 50. 
 
 If ever they could not deter the they kept inclosing them in the 
 
 enemy from pursuit, rear. 
 
 Si quod erat grande vas, laeti adferebant. Cic. Verr. 
 
 If they came across any large they used to bring it to him in 
 
 vessel, triumph. 
 
 Observe the tenses of the Protasis : the Perfect Indicative in Present 
 Time, the Pluperfect in Past. These are the commonest forms accord- 
 ing to the Latin strictness in representing one action as prior to another. 
 
'Edv {fjv) WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 221 
 
 I. Keferring generally to present or future time. 
 Protasis. Apodosis. 
 
 'Eai/ (ijv, av) with Subjunctive. Present Indicative or any 
 
 present Iterative Tense 
 (gnomic Aorist). 
 Parallel with 
 kdv TTore ^ 
 
 !'"''. VandSubj. 
 
 orav, etc. / 
 II. Keferring to past time. 
 
 €t with Optative. 
 Parallel with 
 
 ctTTOTc ^ Imperfect Indicative, or 
 
 OS, oo-Tts >-with Opt. any past Iterative Tense 
 
 0T6, etc. ) (Aor. or Imperf. with av). 
 
 Examples of I. 
 
 riv eyyvs eX^i] BdvaTOS o^Sets povXerai 
 OvrjorKeiv. EUR. Alc. 671. 
 
 If (when) death draws nigh none wish to die. 
 
 /xey' lo-Tt K€p8os rjv SiSda-Kecrdai diXys. MeNAND. 
 
 Tis great gain if thou carest to be taught. 
 
 arras Xoyos, dv dTrrj rd Trpay/xara, ixdraiov Tt (^auverai koi 
 
 K€v6v. Dem. dl ii. 21. 20. 
 All talk, if deeds are wanting, seems idle and empty. 
 
 riv 8' dpa (T^aXda-LV, ^TrXrjpoio-av rrjv y^pdav. ThUC. i. 70. 
 If ever by chance they fail, they always make good the loss. 
 
 eirXripaxrav, Gnomic Aorist, 
 Of. Plat. Apol. ix. ; dv TLva oTw/xat. Ibid. xxi. ; idv Tis 
 jSovXrjTai. 
 
 Examples of II. 
 
 €? Si Tis /cat avretVot evOvs kredvriKiL. ThUC. viii. 66. 
 If {as often as, whenever) any one did speak against them, 
 he was promptly put to death. 
 
 dXX' €i Tt jX-q ^kpOifX€V, 0>TpVV€V <f)€peLV. EUR. Alc. 755. 
 
 But if ever we did not fetch him a thing, he would order 
 (i.e. kept m'dering) us to fetch it. 
 
222 THE PARTICLE aV. 
 
 et Ttves iSoiei/ tti; tovs or<f>€T€povs kTriKparovvras dveOdpcnrja-av 
 
 dv. Thug. vii. 71. 
 
 If any of them saw their own side winning in any part of the 
 battle, they would pluck up courage. 
 
 dveddpa-rja-av dv, iterative. For the iterative (or indefinite) 
 use of dv with the Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, see § 142. 
 This use must be carefully distinguished from that of dv in 
 unfulfilled conditions. The iterative use of dv may have 
 arisen from its being used without definite application, e.g. 
 lAef € dv, he came — in any given case, whereas in an unfulfilled 
 condition the dv may have been of special application, e'Ae^e 
 dv, he came — in that case, i.e. he would have come. 
 
 Obs. — That here in connection with a past Apodosis, the 
 Optative really refers to past time. It is only when thus 
 used, and in the rare instances in oratio obliqua where the 
 Optative represents a Past Indicative of the recta, that the 
 Optative denotes past time. 
 
 § 200, Mixed Examples. 
 
 For Examination and Reference. 
 
 Not seldom the Protasis and Apodosis do not strictly 
 correspond. No one rule can be laid down for explaining 
 all the irregularities. Sometimes the mind really shifts its 
 ground in the passage between Protasis and Apodosis, making 
 the conclusion depend upon a condition which the expressed 
 Protasis only suggests. But mostly the irregularity is one of 
 expression only. This is chiefly the case with the Optative 
 with dv in an Apodosis, connected with a Protasis in the 
 Indicative or Subjunctive. The Optative with dv may, as we 
 have seen, express a modified Indicative drawing an inference, 
 or an Imperative, or a Future. Sometimes again there are 
 two Protases actually expressed (Ex. 9). Sometimes Preposi- 
 tion and Case, or a Particle supplies the. place of the Protasis 
 (Ex. 11 and 12). 
 
 1. €t pXv yap TovTO Xeyova-Lv, dfxoXoyoi-qv dv eywye ov Kara 
 rovTOvs eTvat pyJTtop. PlAT. Apol. i. 
 If this is what they mean, I mu^t admit that I am an orator 
 of a far higher order than they. 
 
MIXED EXAMPLES. 223 
 
 The Protasis, d Xk-yovaiv^ refers to the present; the Apo- 
 dosis is partly a remote supposition, and partly an inference. 
 
 2. TOVTo ye /xot SoKet koXov efi/ai, €6 rts ords r €L7) TraiSeveLV 
 
 dv6pioTrov<s. Plat. Apol. iv. 
 This does appear to me to he a grand thing — supposing one 
 were able to teach men. 
 
 Here, So/cet, a verb of thinking, almost makes the Apodosis 
 like an Optative with a v. 
 
 3. Koi €ya) Tov Eviyrov l/xaKaptcra, €4 tus aXr]B(a<s €)(0l ttjv 
 
 rexvrjv. PlAT. Apol. iv. 
 Lucky Evenus, thought I, if really and truly he were to possess 
 the art. 
 et exoi is the Protasis to an Apodosis implied in ifxaKapta-a. 
 
 4. el Tovs dvaLTiovs SicjKOifxev . . . Seivovs dXLTrjptovs e^ofAeVy 
 
 . . . (.voypi T€ Tou ({>6vov Tois €7riTifiL0LS eo-fiev. 
 
 Antiph. r, A. 4. 
 If we should indict the innocent, we shall find dread avengers, 
 and we are liable to the penalties for murder. 
 
 A series of pictures more and more vividly presented, 
 passing from the Optative to the Future Indicative. 
 
 5. TTWS av €Lrj SeivoTcpa firj^avrjixara ct vfxiv KaTelpyacTTai d 
 
 povXea-de; Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 16. 
 How could there be more terrible practices, if you have 
 (a present ordinary condition) achieved your object ? 
 
 6. €t TOLvvv iieydXinv dyaOiav atrta vfids elpyda-avro, €K€lvol, 
 
 fiepo? cyo) ovK dv iXd-)(^L(rTOV SiKatios ravTrjs Trj<s atrtas 
 
 cxoi/Ai. Andok. de Bed. suo. 12. 
 If then those men accomplished what secured your great 
 advantages (an ordinary past Protasis), / might justly 
 claim not the least share of the merit (a future Apodosis, 
 also marking an inference). 
 
 7. €t ovv TLvl vjxiov yvwfiT] TOLavry] Trapeicm^Kei Trporepov Trepl 
 
 ifiov, crKOTreurde e^ avTwi/ twv yeyevrjixevtDV. 
 
 Andok. de Myst. 54. 
 If, therefm'e, any of you previously used to entertain such an 
 opinion of me (an ordinary past condition in the Imper- 
 fect), examine the case by the actual facts {ie. now in the 
 immediate future). 
 
224 THE PARTICLE &v. 
 
 8. €1 ■^v SvoLV TO €T€pov cXecrOaL, rj KaXtas aTroXk(rdai ^ atcrxpws 
 
 (Ttadrivai, €)(ol dv tls eiTretv KaKiav cfvat rot yevofxeva. 
 
 Andok. de My St. 57. 
 If it had been possible to choose one of two alternatives, either 
 an honourable death or a dishonourable escape, then ymi 
 might stigmatize my conduct as cowardice (a past unful- 
 filled condition, a future Apodosis with an inference). 
 
 9. cyo) ovv Beiva av etrjv ci/ayacr/Aevo?, ei, ot€ jx€v fte ot ap)(ovr€? 
 
 €Tarrov . . . totc fiev ov ckcivol IraTTov cfxevov . . . tov §€ 
 
 Oeov TOLTTovTos . . . AiVoi/it Trjv Ta^iv. Plat. Apol. xvii. 
 
 / accordingly should be in a position of one who is guilty of 
 
 fearful sin if, when your rulers were assigning me a post, 
 
 etc., — if then, I say, I was remaining at the post which 
 
 they assigned me, but if, when now God is assigning me a 
 
 post, I were to desert that post. 
 
 Here there is one Apodosis, av €tr]v elpyacrixevos, and two 
 
 Protases, el efxevov, el AiTTot/At. The two Protases make up the 
 
 combined conditions which produce the Apodosis. 
 
 Cf. also ch. XV. 
 
 10. €6 yap o^TOL opOias eTrea-rrjcrav, v^eis av ov xpcwv ap^oire. 
 
 Thuc. iii. 40. 
 If they were right in revolting, then your rule is unlawful 
 {it would follow that you are ruling). 
 
 11. Sta ye vfias avTovs irdXai av aTroXc^Xeire. Dem. de Cor. 242, 
 So far as you yourselves were concerned, you would have been 
 
 ruined long ago. 
 8id ye vjxds avTovs=el v/j.ei<s avTOi fiovoi ■^crav, if you had been 
 left to yourselves, had it depended on you alone. 
 
 12. ovTio yap ovKeri tov Xoittov irda-xoifiev dv KaKws. 
 
 Dem. Phil. 1. 44. 
 For in that we should never again get into trouble. 
 ovT(jo = el TavTa yevoiTO. 
 
 § 201. Examples of the Conditional Participle in 
 a Protasis. 
 
 6Xovp.ai fxri fxaOiov. ArIST. Nub. 792. 
 / shall be ruined if I don't learn. 
 
 Z=€aV IMT] fiddo). 
 
CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 225 
 
 Se6 yap Ivos ov fJirj rv)(ibv 
 a7roA(oA.a. Arist. Jch. 466. 
 
 Owe thing I need whichf if I fail to getj 
 Tm a lost man. 
 ov fir) Tvxiov=€av firj tvx<^ • . • a^oA.a>Aa being a vivid future. 
 
 TO oLTrodavelv av Tts €K(f)vyoL oirXa dcfyeis. Pl. Apol. xxix. 
 A man might escape death if he were to fling away his arms. 
 d^eis = ct d<f>€Lr]. 
 
 fiiTayvovs yap ( = €t fieTayvoirj) €tl dv 6p9o)S /SovXevcratTO. 
 
 Antiph. de Caede Herod. 91. 
 For if he should repent he yet might come to a right decision, 
 
 ov yap dv kf^X-qdi] aT/)e/xt{"o>v Ka\ firj Starp€;(a>v ( = €t •^Tpefii^e 
 Kal fiT) 8t€T/3€X€). Antiph. 2 Tctral. B. B. 5. 
 
 He would Tiot have been struck if he had been standing stilly 
 and not running across. 
 
 § 202. Examples of Conditional Relative Sentences. 
 
 a fxr) olSa, ovSe oLOfxai ctSevat. PlAT. Apol. vi. 
 What I do not know I do not fancy that I know, 
 = ei Ttva fir) olSa. 
 
 Twv Se dXXiov ^evitiv octtis TrwiroTC Y)OkXr)<Te KaTaa-Trjcrat 
 kyyvr)rd<s, ovSets TrioiroTe k^kdr). AnTIPH. Herod. 17. 
 
 Of all the other foreigners who ever at any time chose to furnish 
 securities J n^ne ever was thrown into prison. 
 oo-Tis iq6eXr)(r€=€L tls 'q6€Xr)a-€, an ordinary past Condition. ' 
 
 a yap ns P'T) irpo(Te^6Kr)(T€.Vy ov^e (fivXa^acrOat kyyoipel. 
 
 Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 19. 
 JFhat one does not expect, it is not even possible to guard 
 
 An instructive instance ; 7rpo(TeS6Kr)o-€v is a Gnomic Aorist, and 
 so this is a General Supposition in Present time. The Aorist, 
 however, may here simply imply priority of time. 
 
 L(rr)v ye Bvvafitv l^et oo-tls re dv Trj x^tpt aTTOKTUvr) dStKiDS 
 
 /cat oo-TLs TYJ \//rj(f>o}. Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 92. 
 
 The effect is the same whether a man takes life with his hand, 
 or with his vote. 
 A General Supposition again in Present time. 
 
 P 
 
226 THE PARTICLE &p. 
 
 § 203. Relative Conditional Sentences expressing 
 General Suppositions. 
 
 {See also the last two examples in the previous section. ) 
 
 I. Present Time. 
 
 (Tviiixa\dv rovTOLS iOeXovcnv a7ravT€5, ovs av opioa-L Trape- 
 
 (TK€Va(TfX€VOVS. DEM. FMl. 1. 42. 1. 
 
 All men are ready to be in alliance with those whom ever they 
 see prepared. 
 *=€ai/ Tivas=OTav, oirorav Tivd^* 
 
 II. Past Time. 
 
 ot §€, KaiOfievov aAAov, €7ri/3aAovTes ov <^€potei/, aTrrjea-av. 
 
 THUC.'ii. 52. 
 Continually, while one body was burning, they kept throwing 
 
 on {the funeral pile) any one they were bearing, and then 
 
 going away. 
 
 § 204. Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis v/ith dv. 
 
 el Tlyca ct^kti irpocryevoLTO, evopa^ov a-jraorav av e)^€Lv 
 HekoTTovvrjcrov. Thuc. V. 32. 
 
 They thought that, if they could get in addition Tegea, they 
 would possess the whole Peloponnese. 
 
 av €)(€LV = (e)(Oi€V av. 
 
 But in the recta they would say : lav rjplv Trpoa-yhrjTai . . . 
 e^op€V. 
 
 ovSets ai/TeiTTC Sia to p^ ava(T\k(Tdai av rrjv €KKXr)(riav. 
 
 Xen. An. i. 4. 20. 
 No one contradicted, because tlie assembly would not have 
 permitted it. 
 
 el avTCiTTC — ovK av rjV€(r\^eTO i^ eKKkrjcria. 
 
 aXA,' el Trerravrat, Kct/ar' av evrvx^v SokQ. SoPH. Ai. 263. 
 Nay, if he hath ceased, methinks all may be well. 
 evTvxotpev av an Optative of inference. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ON 'Eai; AND n. 227 
 § 205. Examples of Participle in Apodosis with av. 
 
 dvTia-Taa-LMTiov. Xen. A71. i. 10. 
 
 He asked for mercenaries aiid pay^ representing that thus he 
 would get the better of his opponents. 
 
 ovTit) Tre/otyevotTo av, but as it is in Historical {Virtual) obliqua 
 the original recta would be kav Se^w/xat ^kvovs — ovTm irept,- 
 yevqcrofiaL. 
 
 opiov TO Trapa.rei\i(rixa, el eTTLKpar-qa-eLi rts, pjiStws av XrjtfiOiv. 
 
 Thuc. vii. 42. 
 
 Seeing that the cross-wall, if any one carried the heights, 
 would easily he captured. 
 
 =/j^Sta)s av X-qc^ddt], In the Participle after opCiv, a verb of 
 Perception, which takes a Participle. 
 
 (5 Trdvra ToA/iwv, KaTro Travros av (fieptav 
 
 koyov SiKaiov firjxdvrjixa ttoiklXov. SoPH. 0. C. 761. 
 
 Bold wretch, who out of every cause wouldst bring 
 
 Shifty device of righteous argument. 
 
 f})€po)v = OS (ficpoLS av (et Kaipov Xdf3ois). 
 
 § 206. Supplementary Note on idv with the Sub- 
 junctive, and el with the Optative. 
 
 'Eav with the Subjunctive is the ordinary form for stating 
 a supposition in future time. By the term ordinary it is not 
 meant that this form occurs oftener than et with the Optative, 
 but that if, for instance, we had to say, ^^If it is fine to-morrow, 
 we will go for a walk," we should naturally translate this by 
 edv with the Subjunctive. That is to say, eav ravra yev-qTat 
 means if this shall happen. Modem English renders it difficult 
 for us to grasp this very simple explanation, because we 
 equally render et ravra ylyverai and kdv ravra ykvf\Tai by if 
 this happens. Et ravra ytyverat should correctly be translated 
 if this is (now) happening, and kav ravra yevrjrai, if this shall 
 happen. So in the instance first given we ought strictly to 
 say " If it shall be fine to-morrow." In older English it would 
 have been "^/ it be fine to-morrow," which is an exact 
 parallel to kdv with the Subjunctive. The difficulty is 
 aggravated by not bearing in mind that the Apodosis is the 
 
228 SUPPLEMENTAR V NO TE 
 
 Principal Sentence, and, as such, sets the time of the whole 
 Compound Conditional Sentence. 'Eav with the Subjunctive 
 (in ordinary particular conditions) is regularly accompanied 
 by an Apodosis in the Future Indicative, e.g. ravra Trotijo-w 
 cav Tt 8%, / will do this if it is necessary; kdv n Sey thus 
 refers to the future. 
 
 Et with the Optative also refers to the future. Ei ravra 
 yevotTo means if this should happen, as opposed to eotv ravra 
 yevYjrai, if this shall haj)]pen. AH scholars now seem agreed 
 that the difference between kdv with Subjunctive and €t 
 with Optative is the same as that between if I shall and 
 if I should in English. 
 
 In opposition to long-received explanations Professor 
 Goodwin has shown in a series of papers (see especially 
 Journal of Philology, Vol. v. No. 10, and Vol. viii. No. 15) 
 that kdv with Subjunctive and et with Optative are inter- 
 changeable expressions, alternating sometimes in the same 
 paragraph, and when referring to the same condition. There 
 can thus be no fundamental distinction between them, nor, we 
 must add, between them and d with the Future Indicative. 
 All these are variant expressions for a future condition. 
 
 The most generally received theory hitherto of kdv with 
 Subjunctive has been that of Buttmann, according to which it 
 denotes " an uncertain but possible case with the prospect of 
 speedy decision." Professor Goodwin pertinently asks how 
 we should turn into Greek the proverb, " If the sky falls, we 
 shall catch larks." Of course by kdv with the Subjunctive. 
 But what is the " prospect of speedy decision " here 1 Furthej 
 he asks whether Demosthenes {Phil.A. p. 43, § 11) implies 
 any nearer prospect of decision about Philip's death when he 
 first refers to it in the words av oSros rt TrdOy, than in the 
 very next sentence, when he says ct rt TrdOoi. Again, kdv with 
 Subjunctive has been stated (by Dr. Donaldson and others) to 
 denote " uncertainty with some small amount of probability." 
 This theory, however, is destroyed by such conditions as the 
 following, all with kdv and Subjunctive. In Plat. Crito, 50, 
 of the laws speaking to Sokrates. In Euthyd. 299, of a man 
 swallowing a cartload of hellebore. In Rep. 612, of the soul 
 wearing the ring of Gyges. In EuR. Phoen. 1216, and Orest. 
 1593, of a human being flying on wings to the aether. 
 
 How then do these three Future Conditions differ 1 'Edv with 
 the Subjunctive gives a vivid and distinct representation of 
 
ON 'Eav AND El 229 
 
 a supposition in the future. Et with the Future Indicative is 
 more vivid still; a condition is brought home as of imminent 
 and immediate interest. Et with the Optative, on the other 
 hand, conjures up a future supposition less graphic, vivid, and 
 life-like, a supposition less distinctly conceived, more faintly- 
 sketched, a supposition of less immediate concern, one which 
 moves the mind with a more languid interest. We may com- 
 pare the three forms to three sketches or pictures differing in 
 greater or less distinctness of outline. Or we may say that et 
 with the Future Indicative moves the mind with the immedi- 
 ate interest of the next hour or minute, eav and the Subjunc- 
 tive with the natural and lively interest of the morrow, ct and 
 the Optative with the fainter and remoter interest of next 
 week. But the whole effect in each case is rhetorical, the 
 expression itself does not imply that the fact denoted in the 
 condition is to be decided, or that it is likely or unlikely ; it is 
 all a question of realising a conception more or less vividly, 
 or, as Mr. Monro in his Homeric Syntax puts it, the difference 
 depends on the tone assumed by the speaker. 
 
 When, therefore, is kav with the Subjunctive chosen rather 
 than et with the Optative ? Professor Goodwin shows that 
 there may be several reasons for choosing the more vivid ex- 
 pression. The following instances are most instructive. 
 
 1. The speaker may have an actual case present to his mind. 
 In Bep. vi. 494, Sokrates is thinking of Alkibiades ; in Bep. 
 vii. 517, of himself. In both cases edv with the Subjunctive 
 is the form employed. 
 
 2. The speaker may he dreading thefidfilment of his supposition. 
 Dem. Aphob. i. 67 (p. 834), an adverse vote is referred to in 
 these terms, iav aTro<^vyrj fxe ovtos, 6 firj yevoiro. 
 
 3. The speaker may be treating an improbable and ridi- 
 culous supposition with scorn. Plat. Bep. x. 610 A, of 
 bodily depravity causing mental depravity (iav firj kfnrotf] — 
 rovTo ye ovSets Trore Sct^ei) : PlAT. Gorg. 470 C, of Polus con- 
 victing Sokrates of talking nonsense (eav /^e ^Xey^ys). 
 
 There may be other reasons besides the above. Sometimes 
 idv with the Subjunctive seeiiis to single out a supposition for 
 special emphasis : sometimes an unfamiliar conception has been 
 introduced by ct with the Optative, which, when we have 
 become familiarised with it, is expressed by eav with the Sub- 
 junctive. Or again, and this is a point worth further atten- 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 
 
 tion perhaps, different writers, from temperament or style, 
 have a habit of using one expression rather than another. 
 Thus Aeschylus very rarely uses eav with the Subjunctive 
 in an ordinary future supposition. He oftener uses et with 
 the Future Indicative ; thrice he uses d with the Subjunctive. 
 But his partiality for the Optative is remarkable. Thucy- 
 DIDES again often uses d with the Future Indicative. 
 
 In all the above cases (1) the time is future, (2) the picture 
 is designedly conceived and drawn in a lively graphic manner. 
 (3) In many cases such as the above €ai/ with the Subjunctive 
 alternates with ei and the Optative. Thus in the example 
 from Dem. Aphoh. the same condition is alluded to later on 
 (ii. § 18, p. 841) by the words d ifyjcj^Lcraia-de, then three lines 
 further on by eav ocjyXwfxcv, and yet again (§ 21, p. 842) by el 
 yv(xxT€a-d€. Similarly in Plat. JRep. 517 A, where Sokrates is 
 referring to himself, the Optative is used. 
 
 The inferences from the above premises are inevitable. 
 
 (1) edv with the Subjunctive, and el with the Optative, 
 
 both refer to future time. 
 
 (2) They are interchangeable, differing only in greater 
 
 or less clearness of conception and vividness of 
 expression. 
 
 (3) As expressions they can in themselves imply no 
 
 opinion of the writer that the fact denoted by the 
 
 condition is more or less likely to occur, the one 
 
 and only thing stated being the dependence of the 
 
 consequence upon the condition. 
 
 The interchangeability of the Subjunctive and Optative is 
 
 one of the regular and most characteristic features of Greek 
 
 Syntax. We find it constantly in Indirect Statements and 
 
 Questions, and throughout the Oratio Ohliqua^ in Temporal, 
 
 Final Sentences, in Sentences with ottws. In all these 
 
 cases we do not hesitate to accept the explanation that one 
 
 expression is more or less direct and vivid than the other, and 
 
 that the two varieties are interchangeable. Conditional 
 
 Sentences do not stand apart by themselves: they follow 
 
 the principles which rule Greek Syntax. 
 
 Two points may be added : 
 
 1. If it is asked whether the writer may not hold an 
 opinion that the fact denoted is more or less probable, we 
 may reply that of course he may, and that holding such an 
 opinion he may choose one form of expression rather than 
 
ON 'Efii/ AND n. 
 
 231 
 
 another. But this covers only some instances and not all. 
 Probability cannot be made the basis of a division, since the 
 fact denoted varies from what is in itself natural and probable 
 to what is physically impossible. 
 
 (2) The notion of future time is sometimes very indistinctly 
 marked by etwith the Optative, the faintness of the con- 
 ception being the chief effect intended in such cases. Still d 
 ravra ovrios €Lrj cannot (as sometimes in Homer) be past, if 
 this had been so ; it cannot be translated, if it were now so ; it 
 can only be rendered, if this were to he so, tvere so, should be so. 
 The Apodosis also must always be examined in connexion 
 with the Protasis. 
 

 CHAPTEE III. 
 
 § 207. TEMPOEAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Temporal Sentences are constantly expressed in Greek 
 by Participles in agreement with the Subject, by the 
 Genitive Absolute, and by the Accusative Absolute. 
 
 When the time of the Temporal Sentence is definite the 
 Indicative is used; when indefinite the Subjunctive and 
 Optative.^ This is the one clew to the use of the moods 
 in Temporal Sentences. 
 
 See § 172, Definite and Indefinite Sentences. 
 VTime is indefinite in three ways : — 
 . n 1. Indefinite Futurity , i.e. when the action will 
 occur in the indefinite future. 
 
 ^ 2. Indefinite Frequency, i.e. when the action may 
 recur an indefinite number of times. 
 
 3. Indefinite Duration, i.e. when the action may 
 continue for an indefinite period. 
 
 All Temporal Sentences in the Subjunctive and Opta- 
 ''tive will fall under one of the above three heads, the first, 
 
 ^ This principle of Indefinite Time may be most usefully applied to 
 the Latin Subjunctive as opposed to the Indicative, e.g. — 
 
 Donee labantes consilio 'patrea ^rmaret (Hor.)- Indefinite Futurity. 
 
 Opperire quoad scire possis quod tibi agendum sit. Indefinite 
 Futurity. 
 
 Dum Priami Paridisque busto insultet armentum. Indefinite Duration. 
 
 It is usual to explain many such sentences in Latin (and in Greek) 
 by saying that they express a purpose. So they do, but this is not con- 
 tained in the Temporal Particle and its Sentence, but in the nature of 
 the principal verb combined with the indefiniteness of time in view. So 
 probably with Temporal Sentences which are described as Conditional 
 (dum). 
 
 Indefinite Frequency is so differently treated by Latin writers that 
 it is not touched on here. 
 232 
 
 t^-^ i 0« a. ^ 
 
WHEN'' IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST). 233 
 
 Indefinite Futurity, being the commonest, and the third. 
 Indefinite Duration, being the rarest. More than one 
 kind of Indefiniteness may be denoted by the same 
 expression. 
 
 The Subjunctive is used in Primary, the Optative in 
 Historic sequence, though, as in other Sentences, the Sub- 
 junctive occurs in Historic sequence, and sometimes is 
 co-ordinate with the Optative. 
 
 A Temporal Particle with the Subjunctive takes av 
 {irpiv av, €0)9 avy eireihav, orav, etc. etc.). 
 Thus eft)9 av yevrjTaL. 
 
 A Temporal Particle with the Optative drops the av 
 (irpLVi eo)9, eirecSrj, ore, etc. etc.). 
 €0)9 yevocTO, 
 
 For the omission ofav in Subjunctive clauses see § 221. 
 
 For the retention of av with the Optative see § 222. 
 
 § 208. " WHEN'' IN DEFINITE TIME {FAST). 
 
 I. cTre/, eireihri {r]VLKa less common), when, after, with 
 Indicative Aorist (an action prior to principal sentence), 
 Indicative Imperfect (contemporary with principal 
 sentence). 
 
 Latin : cum with Pluperfect and Imperfect Subjunc- 
 tive, postquam with Indicative. 
 
 €7reiBrj 3e oktyapx^o. eyevero, ol rpiaKovra fAereirefju- 
 yjravTo /jue. Plat. 
 
 When an oligarchy had been established, the Thirty 
 sent for me. 
 
 Cum vero paucorum dominatio constituta esset, 
 Triginta illi me arcessiverunt. 
 
234 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 eirel ycrdevei Aapelo^, e^ovkero ol tco iralBe a/jbcftorepCD 
 irapelvaL. Xen. An, 
 
 WJien Darius was ill, he vjished hoth his sons to 
 a'p'pear hefore him. 
 
 Darius, cum moreretur, filios ambo ad se venire 
 volebat. 
 For rivLKa see Plat. Apol. xxxi., Soph. El. 32, 423, Ai. 272. 
 
 Note, ore, " when," cannot introduce a clause in Attic Greek 
 like €7r€t, €7r€i8/}. Being a relative it must be connected with 
 some sort of antecedent, though, like all relative sentences, 
 the clause in which it stands may come first, rore is its strict 
 antecedent. 
 
 T^v 7roT€ XP^vos, 0T€ $€01 fxkv rjcTav, Ovrjra Se yevr] ovk 'rjcrav. 
 
 Plat. Frot. 
 
 There was a time once when the gods were in existence, but 
 when the races of mortal creatures were not. 
 
 ore fie ol ap)^ovTes eraTTOv, rore ov e/ceivot erarTov ejxevov. 
 
 Plat. Apol. 
 When the rulers were assigning me a post, then I remained at 
 the post which they assigned me. 
 
 § 209. ''AS SOON as;' ''directly;' in de- 
 finite TIME. 
 
 Eirel, eireihr] take rdxi'a'ra when they mean directly, 
 immediately, as soon as, no sooner — than. 
 
 0)9 (Latin ut) has the same meaning even without 
 rd'x^icrTa, but more markedly with rdxtcTTa. 
 
 [Latin : ubi, ichi primum ; ut, ut primum ; simul, siw.ul 
 ac (atque) ; postquam ; with the perfect indicative.] 
 
 ft)9 rd'^i-ara em V7r6(t>acvev, eOvovro. Xen. 
 
 As soon as day began to dawn, they set about taking 
 
 * the auspices. 
 
" WHENEVER^ ETC., IN INDEFINITE TIME. 235 
 
 01 rpLaKovra rjpedrjo-av eirei rdxio-ra ra recyrj 
 Kae7)pe0v Xen. 
 
 The Thirty were appointed directly the walls were 
 rased. 
 
 In poetry oVws has this sense. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 200, Soph. 
 El. 736, 749, ottws 6p^ (present indicative) ut vidit. For ws 
 (often with evOvs, evOeoys) see Aesch. Fers. 363, Arist. Ban. 
 504. 
 
 § 210. " whenever;' ^^AS often as," IN IN- 
 DEFINITE TIME. 
 
 The same particles, eVe/, IituIt], 7]vUa, ore, and also 
 oTToVe, denoting Indefinite Futurity, or Indefinite Fre- 
 quency, take the Subjunctive and Optative. 
 
 [Latin : usually a Temporal Conjunction with Future 
 Perfect Indicative. But for Frequentative Sentences see 
 the caution given § 207, footnote.] 
 
 A. With Subjunctive in Primary sequence, eireihav, 
 orav, oirorav {rjViK av, eirriv and eirdv rarer). 
 
 N.B. — cus av is said never to be Temporal, but see Soph. 
 Phil. 1330, Ai. 1117, with Jebb's note oii the latter passage. 
 
 eireihav he BiaTrpa^cofiai,, a heopLai, rj^co. Xen. An. 
 When I have (shall have) accomplished my ohject I 
 
 will return. (Indefinite Futurity.) 
 Cum vero confecero quod in animo est, redibo. 
 ovKovv, orav hrj fjur] aOevoj, TreiravaopLai. SoPH. Ant. 9 1 . 
 So, when my power shall fail, I will give o'er. 
 
 (Indefinite Futurity.) 
 avTTj rj (fxovrit orav jevrjTaL,ael airoTpeireL fie. Plat. 
 This inward voice, whenever it comes, ever checks me. 
 
 (Indefinite Frequency.) 
 fiaivo/jLeda irdvTe^, oiroTav op<yt^o)/jLe6a. PHILEMON. 
 We are madmen all, ivhenever we are angry. 
 
 (Indefinite Frequency.) 
 
236 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Note. For orav (Indefinite Futurity) SoPH. El 386, 1038, 
 (Indefinite Frequency) Plat. Ajpol. xvi., xxiii., Soph. El. 267, 
 293, Aesch. Pers. 602. oirorav (Indefinite Futurity) SoPH. 
 Phil. 146. All these particles may often be rendered, as soon 
 as, when once, but the time is still indefinite in the Future. 
 
 oTTOTttv (Indefinite Frequency) Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 26, al. ottov 
 ay) : €7ret8dv (Frequency) Plat. Apol. xxxii. 
 
 For evre av, poetical. Soph. El. 627. 
 
 With the Subjunctive expressing Indefinite Frequency com- 
 pare edv (rjv) with Subjunctive in General Suppositions. 
 
 B. With Optative in Historic Sequence, eVe/, eireihri, 
 oTToje {oT6 very rarely). 
 
 01 ovoi, eirec ti<: Blcokol, 7rpoBpa/jLOVT6<; av ela-rrjKeaap. 
 
 Xen. 
 The asses, ivhenever any one chased them, would gallop 
 ahead and then halt. (Indefinite Frequency.) 
 
 OTTOT ev TTpacro-OL 7roXt9 
 e^aipe, \v7rpa)<; 8' e<f>€pev, ei, ri. BvaTv^pl. 
 
 Eur. Supp. 897. 
 
 Wheneer the state fared well, 
 He would rejoice, and mourn if aught it suffered. 
 
 oTTore is =€t 7roT€, as much conditional as temporal. See 
 Plat. Apol xxxii., oTrore evrvxot/xt IlaAa/A^Sei. In ThUC. i. 
 99 a good instance. 
 
 Note. €7r€6, eTretSTJ, ottotc with the Optative appear always 
 to denote Frequency rather^ than Futurity, except when they 
 represent an cttjji/, eTretSav, birorav, ordv turned from Primary 
 to Historic sequence. 
 
 Compare et with Optative in General Suppositions. 
 
 § 21 1. '' SINCE " IN DEFINITE TIME. 
 
 e^ ov (ex quo with Indicative), since, ever since, in 
 Definite Time with Indicative. 
 
" WHILST'' IN INDEFINITE TIME. 237 
 
 €| ov ra ^eviKa o-TpaTeverai, tov^ (j)LXov<i vlkS,, 
 
 Dem. 
 Ever since mercenaries have been serving, he has been 
 conquering his friends, 
 
 k^ ovT€ Aesch. Pers. 761, for ws (like ut in Latin) Thuc. iv. 
 90 (Poppo), €^ (5v, a</)' ov are also used. 
 
 For ut in Latin cf. Ov. Trist. v. \0.\,ut sumus in Pmto, etc. 
 This may be expressed participially in the Dative, see § 118, 
 note. 
 
 § 212. " WHILST" IN DEFINLTE TLME. 
 
 iliCt)?, €aT€y ev ft), ev oaw, oaov '^povov, rfVLKa (^rarely 
 fjiexpi), whilst, denoting Definite Duration with Indicative. 
 
 [Latin : dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad with Indicative.] 
 
 €0)9 €Tt VeO^ eiflt, TT^Z/ '\jrV)(7]V ryVfJLVa^Q). 
 
 While I am still young, I train my mind. 
 
 paBi(o<i TO, eiTLTTiheLa k^o^ev, oaop '^^povov ev jrj 
 
 TToXe/jLta earo/xeda. 
 We shall easily find supplies so long as (during all 
 
 the time that) we are in the enemies' country. 
 
 dvTjp eKeivdj rjvi/c rjv ev rrj voao), 
 
 avrh fiev ^Sero. * SoPH. Ai 271. 
 
 Yon chief, so long as he was set i' the plague, 
 
 Himself was happy. 
 Donee morbo versabatur. 
 eo-re with past tense, Xen. An. iii. 1. 19. 
 ecus e^eo-Tiv (dum licet), Plat. Apol xxxi. cws eX-n-is ^v (past 
 tense) dum spes erat, Thuc. viii. 40. fiex/ot, Thuc. iii. 10. 2. 
 
 § 213. " WHILST'' IN INDEFINITE TIME. 
 
 The same particles denoting Indefinite Duration take 
 A, Subjunctive in Primary sequence with av. 
 
238 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 ecodTrep av e/juirveayj ou fir] iravacofiaL <f>c\oao(l>(ov. 
 
 Plat. 
 Just so long as I breathe, I never will give up 
 philosophy. 
 Bum spirabo hand desinam philosophari. 
 Cf. Aesch. ^^. 1435. 
 B. Optative in Historic Sequence, without av. 
 
 cftTJa-o/xev jxrjSeTTOT^ av fiet^ov yevka-dai, cws i(TOV etr) avTo 
 
 €avT$. Plat. Theaet. 155 A. 
 
 JFe shall admit that it never would become either greater or 
 less, so long as it should remain equal to itself. 
 
 [Latin : dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad, with Future In- 
 dicative, or, when purpose is connoted, Subjunctive.] 
 
 § 214. " UN-TIL " IN DEFINITE TIME. 
 
 ecL>9, eo-re, fiey^pi, axP'' Q^^XP'- ^^» ^XP^ ^^)' '^^^^^^> denot- 
 ing Definite Time with Indicative. 
 
 6VT6 poetical, /■lexpi'^, a^i^ before a vowel in later writers. 
 
 [Latin : donee, quoad, with past Indicative.] 
 
 ravTa eiroiovv, yLte%/ot aKOTo<; e'yivero. Xen. 
 This they were doing until darkness came on. 
 
 quoad or donee nox oppressit. 
 
 Cf. Thuc. i. 109, iv. 4, pui'x^pt ov and fiexpt. 
 
 Traiovat rov ^coTrjpcBrfv, ecrre rjvd'yKaaav iropeveaOai. 
 
 Xen. 
 They beat Soterides till they compelled him to move on. 
 quoad progredi coegerunt. 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 415. 
 
 exwpovv 8ia twv ^lk€\o!)v^ ews a^LKOvro h KaTavrjv. 
 
 Thuc. vi. 62. 3. 
 
 They marched through the country of the Sicels, till they came 
 to Catane. 
 
" UNTIL'' IN INDEFINITE TIME. 239 
 
 Tratovcrt, KpeoK07rov(Tt 8v(TTirivu)v IJ'^^y), 
 
 ews aTravTwv e^aTrk(^6eipav piov. AeSCH. Pers. 466. 
 
 They hack, hew mincemeal the poor wretches^ limbs, 
 Till they had crushed outright the lives of all, 
 
 kTn(T\o)v av, Iws ot TrAetcrTot twv eitu^orwv yvc^fxrjv aTre^^- 
 vavTO, K.T.X., rifTvyiav av yjyov. Dem. Phil. i. 1. 
 
 / should have waited until r)iost of the regular speakers had 
 expressed their views, and have been keeping quiet. 
 
 In this example the Indicative denotes Indefinite 
 Futurity thrown back into the past, and consequently 
 now Indefinite only to the original thought of the chief 
 subject. This is parallel with a Final Sentence in the 
 Indicative (see Index). 
 
 § 215. " UNTIL'' IN INDEFINITE TIME. 
 
 The same Particles, denoting Indefinite Futurity, take 
 
 A. Subjunctive in Primary Sequence. 
 
 pi'^XP^ ^ ^^ ^y^ ^/^ft), at aTTOvBal fievcvrcov. Xen, 
 Until I return, let the armistice continue. 
 
 67r/o-;j^e9 ear av Kal ra Xonra 7rpo<ifiad'p^. AescH. 
 Pause till thou further learn what yet remains. 
 
 dvdyKrj ravra del irapk^etv, etos av x^P^^ XdfSy. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. iv. 5. 37. 
 It is necessary to furnish continually the same things untU he 
 (shall) take the country. 
 €vt' dv Aesch. Pers. 366. • 
 
 B, Optative in Historic Sequence. 
 
 7repc€/jL€V0fjL€v eKaaTorey eo)? avoL'^decr] to BeafJLCorrjpiov. 
 
 Plat. 
 We used to wait about on each occasion, until the 
 prison was (should be) opened, 
 
 irepiefxevofiev is Frequentative, but ews dvouxOeir) expresses 
 Indefinite Futurity, and expresses indirectly the thought of 
 the chief subject. 
 
240 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 (TTTOvha^ e7roL7}(TavTO eo)? aTrayyeXdecrj to, Xe^devTa. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 They made an armistice (to last) till the terms were 
 (should he) announced. 
 
 Here again the thought of the chief subject is clearly seen. 
 Their original words would be o-ttovSoIs TroiovfieOa ew? av 
 oLTrayyeXdrj. The moods in the two last examples are thus 
 due to Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 ^ote. It may be generally laid down that €o>?, etc., with the 
 Subjunctive and Optative after Affirmative Sentences corre- 
 spond to Trpiv with the same moods after Negative Sentences. 
 €u>s, etc., do occur, but very exceptionally, after Negative 
 Sentences. 
 
 ovK ava/Aevo/xey, ews av rj Tjfxerepa X^P^ KaKwrat. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 18. 
 /Fe do not remain until our country is being ravaged. 
 
 When -n-piv is used with any finite mood the action of its 
 verb will not begin until the action of Trpiv with its verb has 
 occurred. The difference here consists in the meaning of the 
 verb dvafX€V(o, to continue. 
 
 § 2l6. TlfjE CON/UNCTION UpCv, 
 
 TIplv with the Indicative, Subjunctive and Optative is 
 used after Negative Sentences where eo)?, eVre, fjudxph etc., 
 are used after Affirmative Sentences. ' 
 
 Uplv ri is used like Trpiv. irporepov, irpoa-eev, irdpo^, 
 another irplv (used as an adverb), frequently are used in 
 the Principal Sentence as forerunners of irplv. 
 
 TIplv differs from other Temporal Particles only in 
 being joined to an Infinitive as well as to other moods. 
 The following table will show the ordinary Attic usage. 
 Exceptions are given subsequently. 
 
 A. After Affirmative Prin- \ irpiv with the Infinitive, 
 cipal Sentences. f 
 
Upiv WITH THE INFINITIVE. . 241 
 
 B, After Negative Principal 
 
 (\. When the Time is De- 
 finite, irplv with the 
 Indicative. 
 
 When the Time is Inde- 
 
 Sentences. ^ finite (Indefinite Fu- 
 
 turity), TTpiv with the 
 Subjunctive and Op- 
 tative. 
 
 The order in time of the Principal and Subordinate 
 Sentences in irplv clauses should be noticed. (1) When 
 irpiv is used with the Infinitive, the action of the Prin- 
 cipal Sentence takes place before that of the Subordinate 
 Sentence (the irpiv clause). (2) When irpiv is used with 
 a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative) the 
 action of the Principal Sentence had to wait (in the past), 
 or has to wait (in the future) for the decisive occurrence 
 of the irpiv clause. 
 
 § 217. n/3tV WITH THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 A. The Principal action takes place before the Sub- 
 ordinate action with irpiv. Upiv with Infinitive always 
 means hefore. The Infinitive in itself denotes the mere 
 verbal notion rather than a distinct fact, like the English 
 gerundive in ~ing (before coming, going, speaking). But 
 the fact is often implied. Cf. coare with Infinitive. 
 
 irpiv fjuev ireivrjv ea-Oiei^i, irpiv Be Scyjrrjv 7rivec<;. 
 You eat before being hungry, you drink before being 
 thirsty. 
 
 eTre/JLyfre irplv ev Te'yea avro^ elvai. Xen. 
 He sent before he was himself in Tegea. 
 
 Observe the Nominative attraction. 
 
 Q 
 
242 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 trplv y ivkcrO at r^ias rjv rifxiov ri ^vx^. PlAT. Fhaed. 77. 
 Before we were created our soul was in existence. 
 
 ^fJLiiS M.e(T(rrjvr]v eiXofxev irpiv Ile/ocras Xaf^eiv rrjv fBacnX^iav. 
 
 Isoc. Archid. 26. 
 We conquered Messene before the Persians took the kingdom. 
 
 kv T^i irpiv yevkcrdai '^fias XP^^^- PlAT. Phaed. 88. 
 In the days before we were born. 
 
 § 2l8. Upiv WITH THE INDICATIVE IN 
 DEFINITE TIME {FAST). 
 
 Tlplv with Aorist Indicative. (The Historic present 
 occurs in Thuc. i. 132, irplv <yl^v6Tat>.) 
 
 nplv may equally be rendered before, until. 
 
 OL AaKehaipbovLoi ov irporepov eiravaavro irplv Mea- 
 arjvLOV^ e^e^aXov eic T779 '^lopa^. ISAEUS 12. 
 
 The Lacedaemonians did not leave off until {before) 
 they had expelled the Messenians (and then they 
 did leave off). 
 
 ov irpoa-dev l^cveyKeii/ iroXp/iqcrav irpos rjfias iroXefiov irplv 
 Tovs (TTpaTrjyovs r)p.wv crvveXa^ov. Xen. An. in. 2. 29. 
 
 They did not dare to make war on us until (before) they seized 
 our generals. 
 
 See Aesch. P. K 481. 
 
 In IsocR. Panegyr. 19, irpiv eScBa^av where tt/jiV SiSd^eiav 
 would be expected. 
 
 § 219. Uptv WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND 
 OPTATIVE IN INDEFINITE TIME. 
 
 Tlplv av with Subjunctive in Primary Sequence, after 
 Negative Sentences, denotes Indefinite Futurity. 
 
 ov yjprt] fie aireXOelv irpiv av h(o BIktjv. 
 
 Xen. An.Y.7.b. 
 I must not depart before I suffer punishment. 
 
Uplv WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 243 
 
 Cf. also Aesch. p. F. 165, Eur. Heracl 179. 
 
 ovK airoKpivovfiai irpoTepov irplv av irvdcofiaL. Plat. 
 / will not answer hefore (until) I hear. 
 
 irplv alone with Optative may be described as irplv 
 av with Subjunctive converted into Historic Sequence by' 
 Oratio Obliqua, actual or virtual. 
 
 aTrrjyopeve fiTjSeva ^aWeiv, irpiv Kvpo<} efJLTrXrjcrOf.tT) 
 6r)pa)v. Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 14. 
 
 He forbade every one to shoot until Cyrus had had 
 {should have had) his fill of the chase. 
 
 The recta would be ixrjSeU paXXhio vplv av ifiirX-qady, 
 
 eTreix^tpovv eKaa-TOV ireiOeiv fit) irporepov twv eavrov firjSevos 
 €7ripeXeL<r6aL, irplv eavTOV €7rLfiiXr]9€iYj. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xxvi. 
 / used to try to persuade each one not to care for any of the 
 things belonging to himself before caring for himself. 
 
 Tlpiv is also used after another Optative (see Oratio 
 Obliqua, Assimilation of O^ttatives). 
 
 oXoio /jL7]7r(o irplv fiaOocp/ eu Kau irdXiv 
 
 yvcofiTjv /jueTol(rec<;. SoPH. Phil. 961. 
 
 Perish not ere I learn if yet again 
 
 Thoic wilt repent thy purpose. 
 
 § 220. lipiv with the Infinitive after Negative 
 Sentences, and with the other Moods after 
 Affirmative Sentences. 
 
 As stated above, the general Attic rule is that irpiv with 
 Infinitive follows Affirmative Sentences. But the rule is not 
 without exceptions. In Homer irpiv with Infinitive regularly 
 follows either Affirmative or Negative sentences. In the 
 Attic poets it very rarely follows a Negative. In Attic prose, 
 however, several instances occur of irpiv with Infinitive after 
 a Negative. 
 
244 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Instances in the Attic poets occur in Aesch. Ag. 1067, 
 Soph. A%. 1418, Eur. H. F. 605, and Arist. Av. 964. 
 
 In Thug, some cases occur (i. 68, i. 39) in both of which 
 the ov belongs rather to the Infinitive than to the principal 
 verb ; in V. 10 the Negative belongs to the principal verb 
 clearly. In all these three cases the abstract verbal notion 
 rather than the fact is stated, e.g. v. 10, Tvplv tovs /Sorjdovs 
 iJKeiv, before the arrival of his allies. But in vii. 50 rrpiv with 
 the Infinitive is found after a Negative where we should 
 certainly look for an Optative, occurring as it does in the 
 reported words of Nikias. 
 
 ovS' av SiafSovXevcraa-OaL en ec^ry, Trplv k.t.A., rpls ivvea 
 rip.kpa<s fxelvat, 6Tr(a<s av TrpoTcpov KLvqdeirj. 
 
 He declared that he would not even consider the making of a 
 move until he had waited thrice nine 
 
 Recta, ovB' av SiafSovXevcraifxrjV irplv fxetvai (for irplv fxeivai/xi 
 or wplv av /i€iVw). 
 
 Cf. also Antiph. Herod. 25, Andok. Myst. 43. 
 
 Hpiv, with a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta- 
 tive), is found when the Principal Sentence is affirmative in 
 form, but virtually negative. 
 
 a<j>piov v€o<s T "^v^ Trplv toI Trpdyixar' kyyvdev 
 a-KoirCiv €S€t8ov, k. t. A. EUR. /. A. 489. 
 where a<^/)(ov=ovK i^i^piav. 
 
 Similarly in Thug. i. 118. 2, ovre Uiakvov, aXX rja-vxaCov 
 irplv Srj rj SvvafxLs tmv 'A6r)vaL(j)v ripero, where, besides the true 
 negative otutc IkwAvov, tjo-vx^^ov means, they did not bestir them- 
 selves. See also Thug. iii. 29, XavOdvovcri irplv : viii. 105, 
 iipyov irplv. But in Thug. vii. 71. 4, irplv with the Indica- 
 tive occurs after a principal sentence truly affirmative: 
 irapairXrja-La €7racr;(ov, irplv ye Srj ol ^vpaKoonot erpetpav tovs 
 'Adrjvalovsj they were in the same state of excitement, until at last 
 the Syracusans routed the Athenians {eare Srj might have been 
 expected). With the Subjunctive and Optative irplv is very 
 rarely found even after quasi-negative sentences : — 
 
 rls av SIkyjv Kplvetev ^ yvolt) Xoyov, 
 
 irplv av irap dficfiOLV fivOov eKfxdOrj cra</)ws ; EUR. Herac. 179. 
 Tts av, however, is almost a real negative. 
 
"Kv OMITTED WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 245 
 
 alcrxpov rjyoviiai TrpoTcpov Travcrao-^at Trplv av vfxels, otl av 
 l3ovXr](rO€, xJ/rjcfiLcrricrde. LyS. 22. 4. 
 
 Here alaxpov is a virtually negative word, as its use before 
 fjt,rj ov with an Infinitive shows. (See Negatives.) 
 
 Uplv rj, irporepov rj, TrpocrOev 7], va-Tcpov ^, are used like irpiv 
 with an Infinitive. 
 
 Tov M.rj8ov avTol La-p.ev irporepov hXOovra rj to. Trap' v/iiov 
 TrpoairavTrja-aL. ThuC. i. 601 (and vi. 58). 
 
 For va-Tcpov 7] oirj(raL see vi. 4. 
 
 §221, ''Av omitted with the Subjunctive, in Tem- 
 poral and other Subordinate Sentences. 
 
 In all sentences with the Subjunctive (Indefinite Relative, 
 Conditional, Temporal), av is sometimes not used even in 
 Attic prose and poetry. It seems quite a mistake to say 
 that av is omitted. It is much more rational to treat this 
 construction (like that of the Optative without av), as a 
 survival of the older usage, so constantly found in Homer, 
 when the mood might or might not at pleasure be modified 
 by the adverb av. Instances of all the constructions are here 
 given, but it must be remembered that they are all excep- 
 tional constructions in Attic, except, perhaps, in the case of 
 the Temporal Particles. 
 
 iTidefinife Relative : — 
 
 y€povTa 8' opdovv <f>Xavpov os veos Trecry. SOPH. 0. C. 595. 
 
 iTTLXiopiov 6v yifxlv ov ix€V f3paxets apKtaa-i fxrj ttoXXols 
 
 Xprja-^ai XoyoLs. ThUC. iv. 17. 
 
 Cf. Soph. El, 771, 225, 1059; Ji. 496; Ant. 323. 
 
 Conditional: — (el with Subjunctive common in Homer, 
 Pindar, several in Herodotus). 
 
 Svo-TaXatva rap' €yw 
 
 €t <Tov (TTeprjO^. Soph. 0. C. 1441. 
 
 Cf. 509, Antig. 710, 0. T. 198 (Chorus). 
 Once in Thuc. vi. 21, el ^vo-rwo-tv at TToAcis, according to 
 the best MSS. See Kriiger and Poppo. 
 
246 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Tem/poral : — 
 
 TTpiv firj TTporepov diroKTiVVVvaL Setv irplv dvdyKrjv riva 6 
 deos G7ri7r€fxx//r). Plat. Phaedo, vi. 
 
 fxr) a-rkva^e irpiv p-dOys. 
 
 Soph. Phil 917, Antig. 619 (Chorus). 
 
 juevpt Ta9 (TTTOvSas la-ireia-dai P'^XP'- ov €Trav€ XOhxtlv. 
 
 Thuc. iv. 16 (also iv. 41 and i. 137), Soph. Ai. 571. 
 
 €0)5 €(os TO Ytttociv Kttt TO XvTTeicrdai pLd9r)<s. 
 
 Soph. iJ/. 555 (PhU. 764). 
 
 eVet €7r€t 8' dp.dpTrj, k.t.A. SopH. ^7i^. 1025. 
 
 With these Temporal Particles dv is commonly used in prose, 
 but it is fairly often omitted. They seem in themselves 
 sufficient to mark the indefiniteness of future time without 
 the addition of dv. 
 
 § 222. "Aj/ retained with the Optative. 
 
 In a few places dv is found with a Eelative and Optative, 
 and with a Temporal particle and the Optative, almost as if 
 the writer in changing from the Subjunctive had forgotten to 
 drop the dv. kkoyt^opuqv el ravra Trp69vp,6<5 (tol (rvXkd/3oipLij 
 w? otK€ios T€ (Toi caroLpTjv, KOI €^€(tolt6 p.01 8iaAey€(r^at o-ot oTTocrov 
 dv xpovov povXoip-qv^ Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 49. Here either 
 oTTocrov dv jSovXaypai or ottoo-qv povXoLp-qv would have been 
 expected. Of. Xen. Ap. i. 2. 6, Trap &v dv Xd^oLev. So 
 
 ovSeis oo-Tts ovx "^yeLTO Slktjv p.e Xi^xpecrdaL irapd Ttov eiTLTpoTriov, 
 eVeiSotv rdxi'O'Ta dvtjp eivai SoKtpLacrdeirjv, DeM. Onet. i. 865. 24. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Tr. 687, ews dv dpp,6aaLp,t. 
 
 § 223. The Subjunctive instead of the Optative, 
 or co-ordinate with the Optative in Historic 
 Sequence. 
 
 ef^ovXevaav 8€(Tp,ois avTovs (fivXd(r<Teiv p-^xpf' ov ri ^vpi(iCd(Ti. 
 
 Thug. iv. 41. 
 
 Theij decided to keep them in prison till some arrangement 
 was come to. 
 
 Observe that dv is omitted with the Subjunctive, for />texP* ^^ 
 Tt ^vp.paUv. Cf. i. 91, TTpXv dv Subjunctive after Historic time. 
 
THE PARTICIPLE AS A TEMPORAL SENTENCE. 247 
 
 TraprjyyeiXav CTretSr) Setirvqa-eiav Travras dvaTravea-dai, Kal 
 
 eVecr^at •j^vik' dv Tts Trapayy eXXrj. XeN. -4 71. iii, 5. 18. 
 
 They issued orders for all to rest as soon as they had dined, 
 
 and then to follow whenever any one issued orders. 
 
 This principle of the return to the Primary Sequence is so 
 
 common in Greek that it requires no further explanation here. 
 
 § 224. The Participle as a Substitute for a 
 Temporal Sentence. 
 
 The Participle is a regular substitute for a sentence ex- 
 pressed by €7r€t, eireiSiq, '^viKa with Imperfect and Aorist 
 Indicative, but is used still more freely, for it is joined to 
 Present and Future Time, whereas these Particles go with a 
 past Principal Verb. 
 
 1. The Present Participle denotes an action contem- 
 porary with that of the Principal Verb. 
 
 afia and fiera^v with the Participle bring out more 
 clearly the contemporary time. 
 
 dTrrjVTTjaa ^iXLTrirq) airiovri. 
 
 I met Philip as he was going away. 
 
 afia irpoicov eireaKoirelro, XeN. 
 
 Ashe was going forward he was considering. 
 
 TO Tov Oeov o-rjfietov iroXKa'Xpv Brj fie eVecr^e Xeyovra 
 IJLera^v, Plat. Apol. xxxi. 
 
 The sign of the god very often has checked me in the 
 midst of my talk— (while I have been speaking- 
 while the words were on my lips), 
 kirka-xe is here a gnomic aorist. 
 
 2. The Aorist Participle denotes an action prior^ to 
 that of the Principal Verb. 
 
 The Perfect Participle would express a completed state 
 before the action of the Pri ncipal Verb. 
 
 1 Never forgetting that the Aorist Participle does not always denote 
 an action prior to that of the principal Verb. See Participles. Where 
 the Aorist Participle denotes a contemporary action it expresses Cir- 
 cumstance, not Time. 
 
248 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 T0T6, T0T6 rjBi], eiTa, eiret^Ta, TrjviKavra, ovtox; often 
 accompany the Principal Verb, evdv^i with the Participle 
 is like ra'^LCTTa with a Conjunction. 
 
 Tvpavv6vaa<; errj rpia 'iTrvr/a? e'^copei, €9 Scyecov, 
 
 Thuc. 
 After ruling three years {when he had ruled), 
 Hippias retired to Sigeicm, or he ruled and then 
 retired. 
 
 cKeXevae ovv hia^avTa rov 'EWtjo-ttovtov eireiTa 
 airaKkdrTecrOaL Xen. An. vii. 1. 
 
 He induced him to accompany him over the Helles- 
 pont, and then withdraw {after he had accompanied 
 him, to withdraw), 
 
 ev6v<i j6v6fjL€Poi (primo ortu), immediately after lirth. 
 
 evdv<; airo^e^rjKoref;, directly they landed, no sooner 
 had they landed . . . than, etc. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 § 225. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 The chief Concessive Particle in Greek is Kal, with or 
 without the enclitic irep. 
 
 Concessive Sentences are most commonly expressed by 
 the Participle, especially with Kaiirep (more rarely Kai 
 alone). The Negative is ov, "Ofim (tamen) often 
 accompanies the Principal Verb. 
 
 Tov KXecovof}, Kanrep /iiavio)Br]<i ovaa, r) UTroV^ecrt? 
 
 dTrejSrj, Thuc. 
 Cleon's promise, insane though it was, was fulfilled. 
 Cf. Soph. Ai. 122. 
 
 ireidov yvvai^l, Kauirep ov (nepywv ofi(o<;. Aesch. 
 Listen to women though thou like them not. 
 The oyLto)? belongs to ireidov, though it often is drawn to 
 the Participle. 
 
 ofT09 oierai re eiBevac ovtc etSo)?. Plat. Apol. vi. 
 This man thinks he knows something though he knows 
 nothing. 
 Kayo) (T LKvovfMai, Kal yvvrj Trep oSo-' o/xoys. EUR. Orest. 680. 
 / too entreat thee, woman though I be. 
 Here Kat and irep are separated, and o/xios is dislocated from 
 its Verb. 
 
 Note 1. ovSe, ovSe Trep, fJ-rjSe, p.rj8€ Trep are also found with 
 Concessive Particles in Negative Concessive Sentences. 
 
 ovK dv TrpoSoLYjV, ov8e Trep Trpd(Ta-(ov KaK<as. lEiUR.Phoen. 1624. 
 I'd not betray, not even though in woe. 
 
 yvvaiKl TreiOov, prjSe rdXrjdrj kXviov. EuR. Hipp. Fr. 443. 
 Hearken to a woman, even if thou hearest not the truth. 
 
 249 
 
250 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 ovS' €1, ou8' eai/, /aiJ8' €i, /;i7i8' kdv are used in Negative Con- 
 cessive sentences {ne — quidem). 
 
 /XY] 6opvPrj(TY)T€, firjS' lav 86^(o n vixlv fieya Aeyetv. 
 
 Plat. Aj^ol v. 
 Do not interrupt, even if you shall think that I am speaking 
 presumptuously. 
 ov8' ci, Apol. xvii. 29. 
 
 lyo) /xev ow ov/c av ttot', ovS' eT ^oi to. era 
 fxeXXoi Tts oto-eiv 8(3/)' e<^' owrt vvv ;(Xi8as, 
 
 TovToi^ vTreiKaOoLfjLi. Soph. El. 360. 
 
 Ne^er then would I, not e'en if one were like 
 To bring me those thy gifts, wherein thou now 
 Art glorying, submit to these. 
 
 Note 2. KoX Tavra, and that too, is also used with a participle, 
 and also, but very seldom, Kairoi. For koI Tavra, Plat. Rep. 
 404 B, Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 16. For Kairoi, Plat. Prot. 339 c. 
 kyoi ov8\v Tovroiv Troirjcro), Kal ravra KLvBvvevayv. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xxiii. 
 / will do none of these things, and that too though I am run- 
 ning a risk. 
 
 Note 3. The Relative occasionally is used in a concessive 
 sense. 
 
 For oo-Tts, Soph. Ai. 434, otov irdrr^p : and Arist. Ach. 57, 
 ocTTi? riSeXf. : os e^e/3»7v, Antiph. Caed. Herod. 25. 
 
 Note 4. etTrep, edvirep, bear a sort of concessive force, or 
 perhaps rather a particularising force, that is to say, cf. if 
 really, EuR. Her. Fur. 1345, Lys. 12. 48; edvTrep, Plat. ^^o?. 
 xii. (a General Supposition). 
 
 § 226. Note on el /cat, icat €t, etc. 
 
 Kat added to the Conditional particles el, edv, y]v gives the 
 Conditional Sentence a concessive meaning. Kat is thus 
 added to any form of Conditional Sentence, which will there- 
 fore follow the rules of Conditional Sentences. A distinction 
 is generally made between el Kat and Kat el. Et Kat is said 
 (by Hermann and Kiihner) to concede a fact, although, Kal el 
 a supposition, even if (a supposition). It is impossible to sup- 
 port this theory. As Kat with el and edv occur with every 
 form of conditional sentence (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta- 
 tive) with ordinary and general suppositions, Kat cannot give 
 
NOTE ON el Kai, Ka\ fJ, ETC. 251 
 
 the €t or lav the power of turning any and every form of 
 supposition into statement of a fact. Hermann's dictum at 
 the most could hold good only of ct Kal and i<ai el with the 
 Indicative. And it is equally true here as with ordinary 
 conditions (without Kai) that if a fact is stated it is only by 
 virtue of the context. Madvig more cautiously states that 
 €1 Kai sometimes inclines more to the affirmation of the con- 
 dition, and that it is often only distinguished from /cat ct by 
 being less emphatic. This is the most we can say, the latter 
 part of his remark being very true. Kat in these phrases is 
 expletive, i.e. it emphasises the word it precedes (as in wplv 
 Kal yevko-Bai rjfias, Plat. Fhaed. 77. 6, before we came info being 
 at all). It is further clear that Kat €t with the Indicative 
 often leans to the affirmation of the condition as strongly as 
 €t K-at. Kat et, being more emphatic, may often mean that 
 even in spite of, under extreme circumstances, the Apodosis holds 
 good. 
 
 €t Kat, with Indie, Plat. La. 182, Soph. El. 547, 0. T. 302. 
 Ka t €t, „ Plat. Apol. xxix. , Aesch. Fers. 297, Aesch. 
 
 Cho. 290 (leans to the fact) ; Soph. Ai. 
 
 Mi (do.); Soph. Ant. 234 (fut. indie.) ; 
 
 Plat. Apol. xix. (Kat ct /zcAAct). 
 
 d Kai, „ in unfulfilled conditions, ISOCR. de permut. 
 
 (33), from Madvig. 
 Kat ct, „ Plat. Polit 276 (Apodosis cSct) ; Dem. 21. 
 
 199. 
 eav Kat, with Subj., Dem. 16. 24. 
 Kat lav, „ Menand. Fr. 19 (a General Supposition); 
 
 Plat. Symp. 185, Soph. El. 25 (a General 
 
 Supposition). 
 
 Kat ct, with Optat., Xen. Hell. vii. 1. 8. 
 
 ct Kat is used concessively with an ellipse of its verb in 
 Plat. Apol. xviii. 
 
 ct Kat ycAotoTC/oov elirelv. 
 Though the expression be ridiculous. 
 ct Kat, in Soph. Ant. 90, is not concessive at all; Kai 
 emphasises the ct. 
 
 d Kal Svvrja-ci y' * (a A. A.' dfxrjxO'Viav ipj-s). 
 Ay, if thou wilt be able. 
 
CHAPTEE Y. 
 
 ' §227. FINAL SENTENCES, otto)? WITH THE 
 rUTUEE INDICATIVE, AND VEEBS OF 
 FEAEING WITH fxi], etc. 
 
 Introductory Note. 
 
 Three more or less closely connected constructions are here 
 brought into juxtaposition. They are — 
 
 A. Final Sentences. 
 
 B. Modal Sentences with oVws and the Future 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 C. Verbs of Fearing with firj, firj ov. 
 
 These three constructions sometimes run into one another, 
 at other times they widely diverge. Verbs of Fearing wijbh 
 ixrj deprecate a result. Negative, Modal, and Final Sentences 
 consider or adopt means to avert a result. The connecting 
 links, therefore, are /Mrj and oinus. The resemblance is strongest 
 in three such types as the following : A. ravTa Trotw ottws fj^rj 
 aTToddvo), I do this that I may not die. B. eTnfieXovfjLaL ottws firj 
 aTTodavovfxaL, I take care that {strive how) I shall not die. 
 0. (jioPovixai fxr) diroddvo), I fear that I shall die.'^ The resem- 
 blance is even stronger when the construction of B. is iTrifxeXov- 
 fxac OTTWs fJi-y] aTroddi^a), and of 0. (fiof3oviJLaL ottcus />t^ diroBavovixaL 
 or d-Koddviii. On the other hand the divergence is greatest 
 between A. raura Trotw oTTtos iiy] drroddvoi (a true Final Sentence), 
 and C. (fio/Sovixac ws dTrop-qcrecs, I fear that you will be at a loss, 
 
 ^ The term Object Sentence is often applied to the second and third 
 forms of these Sentences. If by an Object Sentence is meant one which 
 stands as an Object to the Principal Sentence, then the term appears 
 too comprehensive to be of practical value. It would include Indirect 
 Statements, Indirect Questions, Indirect Commands, the Infinitive 
 after such verbs as /Soi^Xo/uai {e.g. ^oTjKoiiai iXdetv), besides Sentences with 
 dirojs, etc. More would be lost than gained by grouping together con- 
 structions so different as olSa a/xapTivv, ^o^Xofiat iXdeiv, and CKoireL diroos 
 ravra yev^aerat.. Further, if we use the term Object Sentence, why 
 not also Subject Sentence ? Syntax must be content sometimes to 
 sacrifice logical system to expediency. 
 
 252 
 
FINAL SENTENCES. 253 
 
 where ws aTropiJo-ets is practically a Substantival Sentence of 
 Indirect Statement, or cfiolSovfxat. aTrodavelv {to aTro^aveti/), which 
 is the same as (^o^ov fiai Bdvarov. 
 
 It is not easy to give the right name to sentences of class 
 B. They correspond with the Latin construction curo^ enitor, 
 efficio, with ut and the Subjunctive, which Dr. Kennedy assigns 
 to the Indirect Petition. By an extension of the usage of 
 oTTws, verbs of commanding and of requesting (which introduce 
 a true Indirect Petition) may take ottws with a Future Indica- 
 tive, just as impero smd postulo, etc., take ut (or ne). 
 
 "Ottws is a Eelative Modal Adverb meaning as, how, ws — oVw?, 
 (Epic) or ovT(jD<s — oTTws (Attic) thus — as or how, <Ss or ovtoj? being 
 the Antecedents to otto)?. It is also used in Questions, Kard- 
 Xe^ov oTTws y]VTr)(Ta<s (Od. iii. 97), tell me how thou didst meet with. 
 But one of the most characteristic usages of oVws is in Modal 
 Deliberative Questions with the Subjunctive or Optative, after 
 such verbs as <^/)afo/xat, fxepfirjpi^o), e.g. <f>pd(€(rdaL OTTTTWS K€ 
 fj.vY](TTrjpas KTeLVYjs {Od. i. 295) take counsel how thou shall slay 
 the wooers. The connection between this and a Final Sentence 
 is obvious, e.g. TrepLcjipa^cofxeda TrdvTcs vocttov, ottws eXdycTL (Od. 
 i. 77), let us all take good counsel touching his return how {so that) 
 he shall reach home. The Future Indicative is used much in 
 the same way as the Subjunctive, e.g. 4>pd(€v oVws aAe^^o-et? 
 KaKov yjfjLap (II. ix. 251), take counsel how thou wUt avert the evil 
 day. 
 
 § 228. FINAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Final Sentences denote an end, purpose, or intention to 
 achieve or avert a result. They are expressed in a variety 
 of ways, chiefly by (1) Final Particles with the Subjunc- 
 tive and Optative ; (2) by the Future Participle ; (3) by 
 Eelative Sentences ; (4) in certain cases by the Infinitive. 
 
 § 229. FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE 
 AND OPTATIVE. 
 The Final Particles are tva, «9, and oirm (p(j)pa is Epic 
 and Lyric only). In Negative Sentences iva firj, ©9 fJ'V* 
 oirm m* and sometimes /atJ only. In Primary Sequence 
 the Subjunctive is used, in Historic Sequence the Opta- 
 
254 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 tive, but the strict Sequence is often disregarded, and the 
 Subjunctive used instead of the Optative. 
 
 Tov KaKOv Set KoXd^etv Iv aixetvcov ff, Plat. 
 
 It is necessary to punish the criminal in order that he 
 
 may he reformed. 
 iKerevae tov? BiKaara^; fiera iroWcov BaKpucov iva 
 eXerjdeLT}. FLAT. 
 
 He entreated the jury with many tears in order that 
 
 he might he pitied. 
 irapaicdXeh larpoix; otto)? firj airodavrj^. Xen. 
 Yoit call in physicians in order that you may not die. 
 Ibva ol aXKoi jvytacn t(ov hiKatodv, ra vfiirep avjwv 
 
 dv7)\L(TKeT6. Dem. 
 
 In order that the rest might ohtain their rights, yoio 
 used to spend your own resources. 
 For ©9 see Eur. Tro. 714. For firi only Xen. Cyr. i. 
 4. 25 (XeyeraL elTretv ore airievai ^ovXolto, jutj o irarrip 
 TL axOoLTo). Mri truly final is however rare. 
 
 Note 1. The Subjunctive and Optative are sometimes found 
 alternating in Historic Sequence. 
 
 TO OLTToWllVai dvOpMTTOVS ^VfXlxd)(^OV? TTOAA-OVS SctVOV i(fiaLV€TO 
 
 €LvaLj jx-q TLva SiafSoXrjv crxoi^v Kal ol o-TparLwraL SvcrvoL 
 
 wo-t. Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 2. 
 
 'To put to death a number of allies was considered a dangerous 
 
 course, lest they should incur odium and the troops be 
 
 Trapavicrxov <f)pvKTOv<s ttoWovs, ottws d(ra(^rj ra crrjfxela tois 
 
 TToAe/xtots y, Kal p,rj jSorjOoLCv irplv (r<^a>v ol dvSpes 5ta- 
 
 (fivyoLciv. Thuc. iii. 22. 
 
 They were hoisting many beacons, in order that the enemies' 
 
 signals might be unintelligible to them, and that they might 
 
 not bring aid before their own men escaped (should escape). 
 
 Dr. Arnold in his well-known note on this passage explains 
 
 that the Subjunctive expresses the immediate, and the Optative 
 
 the remote, consequence (1 purpose), the second (Optative) being 
 
 a consequence upon the first (Subjunctive). Such an explana- 
 
l^TNAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 255 
 
 tion, however, clearly cannot apply, as Dr. Arnold thought, to 
 all cases, e.g. to passages where the Optative precedes the Sub- 
 junctive (see Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 2, above, and Thuc. vi. 96). 
 This interchange of moods, of the graphic Subjunctive and the 
 remoter Optative, is allowable in every variety of Greek sub- 
 ordinate construction. 
 
 For other instances cf. Hdt. i. 185 ; viii. 76 ; ix. 51 ; Thuc. 
 vii. 17.4; vii. 70. 1. 
 
 Note 2. av is sometimes joined to ws and ottws with the 
 Subjunctive {6(fipa kc Epic). It adds little, if any, meaning 
 Possibly av may refer to an implied condition, like our English 
 so {in order that so). 
 
 av is not found with the Subjunctive in Negative Final 
 Sentences. 
 
 "Iva av, when it occurs, is not final but indefinitely local 
 {wheresoever). 
 
 TTttT/ols yap ecTTi ttcio-' iV' av Trpdrrrj ns eS. 
 
 Arist. Pint. 1151. 
 The fatherland is any land where'er a man is prospering. 
 
 Examples of ws av with Subjunctive. 
 
 ws av fidSys, dvTaKOva-ov. Xen. An. ii. 5. 
 Listen in return, that you may know. 
 
 X^P^'' ^' €v6a7r€p KarcKTaves 
 irarkpa tov dp-ov, u)S av kv ra^TW ddvy^. SOPH. El. 1496. 
 On to the spot ev^n where thou slew'st my father. 
 That so on that same spot thou may'st be slain. 
 Cf. Aesch. P. V. 10; Soph. Phil. 825; Plat. Rep. 567 A, 
 Symp. 189 A, 
 
 Note 3. When dv is found with ws or ottws and the Optative 
 in a Final Sentence, ws and ottws are Modal, and the Optative 
 with av is an Apodosis. 
 
 d)S p.\v av eiTTOLTC SiKaCovs Xoyovs dp,€Lvov ^iXiTTTTOv irap- 
 €(TK€va(r6€, ois Be KwAtxratr' dv avTov dpyoys ^x^Te. 
 
 Dem. Phil. ii. 66. 
 
 As to the means by which you might express just sentiments 
 
 you are better prepared than Philip, but as to means of 
 
 checking him you are doing nothing. 
 
 PovXiva-op-eda ottws dv dpiara dymvL^oipLiOa. XeN. Cyr. ii. 1. 4. 
 
 Cf. Cyr. i. 2. 5. Plat. Symp. 187, d. 
 
256 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 In XeN. Hell. iv. 8. 16, ottws av, TrX-qptnO^VTO^ vavTLKOv k.t.X., 
 TTposSeoivTo, we must either explain that oVws av TrposSeoivro 
 is the Apodosis {in order that they might loant), and 7rX'qpo)$evTo<s 
 the Protasis, = et -n-X-qpiJidd-q {if the fleet ivere manned): or we 
 must consider that Xenophon is using an Epic construction (ws 
 oTTws av or Kev in Final Sentences with the Optative, e.g. 
 Od. ii. 53, xvii. 362). 
 
 The Optative with /xt) av occurs in Soph. Trach. 631, 
 Thuc. ii. 93. 
 
 Note 4. In a few places oVws with a Future Indicative is 
 strictly final rather than modal. And as the verb of striving, 
 or taking precaution, does not precede in these passages, they 
 are noticed here under Final Sentences. The Future Indica- 
 tive may be regarded as a vivid form of the Subjunctive. 
 ov^l 8l €V dXXo rpk^ovrai ■)} oVws iia^ovvrai. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. ii. 1. 21. 
 And they are maintained for no other single purpose except 
 
 for fighting (lit. how they shall fight). 
 €<f)Y) XPV^^'' oiva/3L/Sd^€LV Ittl rbv rpoxov tov<s aTroypa^evras, 
 OTTws fxrj Trporepov vv^ ccrrat Trplv Trvdka-Oai rovs dvSpas 
 diravTas. Andok. de Myst. 43. 
 He said that those who had been informed against ought to he 
 put upon the wheel {to the torture), in order to discover all 
 the perpetrators before night-fall. 
 Cf. Soph. El. 955 ; Arist. Ecc. 495. 
 
 It is doubtful whether the Future Optative, as the Obliqua 
 of the above, ever occurs. The MSS. appear to favour other 
 constructions where it has hitherto been read. In Plat. 
 Bep. 393 E, fxr) ovK kirapK^a-oi occurs as a virtual, rather than 
 literal, obliqua of /x^ ov xpaiV/xiy : cf. U. i. 25. See GoODWiN, 
 Moods and Tenses, p. 40. 
 
 Note 5. In a few places the Optative is found in a Primary 
 Sequence. The Optative carries back the purpose to its 
 original conception in the past ; the action, though still con- 
 tinuing in the present, was begun in the past. 
 
 TOVTOV 8' O^CO 
 
 iVa ixY] TaXaLTTwpoiTo. Arist. Itan. 23. 
 
 I'm carrying him, 
 that he mayn't be inconvenienced. 
 i.e. I took him on my back {and am carrying him) that he might 
 
 not be, etc. 
 
FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 257 
 
 TovTOv (.\^i rov rpoirov o vofios, tVa ixrjSk TrctcrdrjvaL firjS' i^a- 
 iraTrjOrjvat ykvotr^ kirl tw Sij/xw, DeM. 22. 11 (AnDROT. 596, 17), 
 i.e. the original intention of the law when first made was, etc. 
 Cf. Xen. Cijr. iv. 2. 45 (tVa, et ttotc ^koi, SvvatfieOa, in Primary 
 sequence). 
 
 In the same way Cicero uses the Imperfect Subjunctive to 
 recall the original intention : — Homines sunt hac lege generati 
 qui tuerentur ilium globum . . . quae terra dicitur, Cic. 
 Eep. vi. 15. Sic mihi perspicere videor ita natos esse nos ut 
 inter omnes esset societas quaedam, CiC. Lael. 5. Cf. de Off. i. 
 § 152, ii. § 1. 
 
 Cf. Eur. El. 58, and Hec. 1138 (Subjunctive followed by 
 Optative in Primary sequence). 
 
 § 230. Final Sentences with Past Tenses of 
 the Indicative. 
 
 A Final Sentence with tVa (less commonly ws and oVws) 
 and a Past Tense of the Indicative expresses a purpose unful- 
 filled either in the Present (Imperfect Indicative), or in the 
 Past (Aorist Indicative). The Principal Sentence is either an 
 unfulfilled Wish, or an unfulfilled Apodosis. 
 
 et yap wc^eAov olol re dvat to, fiiyia-Ta KaKa epya^ecr^at, tVa 
 OLOL re ^crav kol dyada to, /xeyto-ra. PlAT. Crito, iii. 
 
 JFould they had been able to do the greatest evil, in order tliat 
 they might be able (or might have now betn able) to do also 
 the greatest good (which they are not able to do). 
 
 KoX fi^v aAov y ^v OLKOva-aL. tl Bri ; tV i^Koixras dv^poiv 01 
 
 (TocfiWTaTOL dcri. Plat. Euthyd. 304 E. 
 JVell, I assure you it would huve been worth hearing, JFhy 
 so ? In order that you might have heard the ablest men. 
 
 a^iov riv of course = a Jioj/ av ^v, similarly we should say, 
 // icas worth hearing. 
 
 (OS w^eA-ov irdpoiOev iKXiTTilv /3tov, k.t.X. 
 
 oTTws 6avo)v iKcixTo Ty To^' 'qiJ'€p(}. Soph. El. 1134. 
 JFould God that I had first forsaken life, etc. 
 That death Imd laid thee low on that far day. 
 
 Other well-known examples are Aesch. P. V. 152 (after a 
 wish) : ib. 766 (after a question equivalent to a wish) : SoPH. 
 0. T. 1387, 1391; Dem. Aph. ii. 837. 11 ; iii. 849. 24^ 
 
 R 
 
258 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 § 231. FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE FUTURE 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 A Final Sentence is often expressed by a Future 
 Participle : co? is often added, denoting the thought, or the 
 .presumed intention in the mind of the Subject of the 
 principal verb. 
 
 irpea^ei'; e? AaKehaljiova eirefi'^av ravra re €povvTa<; 
 
 Kol Avaavhpov aorrjaovTa^. XeN". 
 
 The^ sent envoys to Lacedaemon to say this, and to 
 
 ask for Lysander. 
 
 irapearKevd^ovTO 0)9 '7Tpo<;^a\ovvT€<; tm rei'^co-fiaTi, 
 
 Thuc. 
 They were making preparations for an attack on the 
 fort {with the intention of attacking). 
 
 Note. Such a Participle is especially common after a verb 
 of motion. 
 
 •i\^r] Sipa oLTruvai, kjiol p\v aTroOavovixkvia, vfjLtv 8k jSnocrope- 
 
 vots. Plat. Apol xxxii. 
 It is high time to be going, for me that I may die, for you 
 that you may live. 
 
 § 232. RELATIVE FINAL SENTENCES. 
 
 A Pinal Sentence is expressed by octtl^ (less frequently 
 09) with the Future Indicative. In . Historic Sequence 
 the Future Optative would strictly be used, but the 
 Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is generally 
 retained. The negative is /atJ. 
 
 nrpeo-^etav ire/jLTrere rjTi<; ravr epel Kai Trapearat 
 
 Toh TTpdyfiaa-tv. Dem. 
 Send a deputation to hear this message, and to he 
 present at the operations. 
 Legatos mittite qui haec nuntient rebusque se immis- 
 ecant. 
 
FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 259 
 
 e^o^e Tft) t>T]^(jd TpiaKovra avBpa^ ekiaGab ol vo/mov<; 
 
 ^vyypayjrovai. Xen. 
 
 The assemUy resolved to appoint thirty men who were 
 
 to compile laws. 
 
 Cf. Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 3 ; An. ii. 3. 6. (ot a^ovacv). In 
 Thuc. vii. 25, the Subjunctive occurs, oWep (jipdacjo-i (in 
 Hisk>ric sequence). 
 
 § 233. Final Sentences with the Infinitive. 
 
 A Final Sentence is expressed by the Infinitive, chiefly after 
 verbs of cJwosing, appointing, or assigning. 
 
 3€V0(f>U)V TO TJfJLlCrV TOV (TTpaTCVlXaTOS /CareXtTTC (f)vXdTT€LV TO 
 
 CTT/aaTOTreSov. XeN. 
 Xenophon left half his force behind to guard the camp. 
 
 ot apxovTCS ov<5 etXea-Oe apy€iv fxov. PlAT. Apol. XviL 
 The rulers whom you chose to rule me. 
 
 Cf. Thuc. vi. 50, TrXcva-al re, K.T.X. 
 
 Note 1. As the Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Dative, 
 we have a natural explanation of this use of it : <f)vXdTT€Lv,for 
 the guarding. We may, of course, say that the Infinitive is 
 explanatory (epexegetical). 
 
 Note 2. For tov with the Infinitive in a Final Sense, see 
 Index. 
 
 § 234. ''0770)9, onm fJLT], MODAL WLTH THE 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE, ETC. 
 
 Ottoo^, o7rco<; firj are used with the Future Indicative 
 (usually the 2d person) after Verbs of taking means to an 
 end (considering, striving, and contriving). In Primary 
 Sequence the Future Indicative is used; in Historic 
 Sequence the Future Optative may be used, but the 
 Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is much com- 
 moner. 
 
26o FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 Such Verbs are : 
 
 PovXivo) fxkXu (fioi) TTpda-a-o) 
 
 opio fxiXerio /XT^xavw/^at 
 
 a-KOTTta (a-KOWOVfiai) evXapovfiac irapacrKevd^u) 
 
 cf>povTtlo) TrpoOvfxovfxaL cnrovSa^d) 
 
 eTTLaeXov/xaL cf>vXdor(r(j) tJvovp.aL (I manage by bribery). 
 
 Dem. de Cor. 236. 12. 
 
 And periphrases such as Trpovoiav e%a), firj'^avT) ecm, etc. 
 Cf. Latin euro, (curam, operam, negotium) do,^ studeo, id ago, 
 enitor, efficio, impetro with id (ne) and Subjunctive. 
 
 (ftpoVTi^e OTTO)? fJLrjSev avd^iov aavrov irpa^ei^;, ISOC. 
 
 Bee that thou do nothing unworthy of thyself. 
 
 Vide ne quid te indignum agas. 
 
 e7n/J>eX7]Teov otto)? co? aptaTij act earat rj ^jrv^xr}' 
 
 Plat. 
 You must strive that your sold may he as good as 
 
 possible. 
 Enitendum est ut tibi quam optimus sit animus tuus. 
 
 eirejieXecTo OTro)? /jLrjre aaLToc pLTjTe airoroL ecroivTO. 
 
 Xen. 
 He was taking precautions that they should he neither 
 
 vjithoutfood nor drink. 
 eiTpaaaov otto)? rt? ^orjdeia rj^et. ThuC. 
 They were arranging for the arrival of reinforcements. 
 
 Note 1. The 1st and 3d person are very rare. In Dem. 
 Chers. 99. 14 (ottojs edeXTja-ovo-L) ; in Ar. EccL (oVcds KaOeSov- 
 p^eda). 
 
 Note 2. Instead of the Future Indicative the Subjunctive 
 and Optative (Present and Aorist) less often occur, though 
 not uncommonly. 
 
 6pa OTTWS p,r) irapa So^av 6pLoXoyrj<s. PlAT. Crit. 
 
 See that you are not surprised into making an admission. 
 
 ip.ep.eX-qKiL avTols ottws 6 ImraypeTrjs etSetr^ ovs Scoc 7r€/i7rciv. 
 
 Xen. Hell. iii. 3. 9. 
 They had taken care that the Cavalry- Commissioner should 
 know who should be sent. 
 
'Ottcos, ottcos fXT), WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE. 261 
 
 In Lys. 12. 44 an Aorist Optative is followed by a Future 
 Indicative (iTrePovXevea-Oe oVws /xTJre \pr)(fii(raLcr9€, ttoAAwv re 
 €v8€€LS ecrecrOe). 
 
 Note 3. Variants, of rare occurrence for ottws with the 
 Future Indicative are oirrj (Thug. i. 65, yei/^o-erat) ; oto) rpoVw 
 (Thug. iv. 128,^v/x^?io-eTat); i^ 6tov rpoTTov (Dem. Megal 207). 
 
 ws is found instead of oVws with a Subjunctive or Optative 
 (Xen. Oec. XX. 8, Aesch. P. V. 203), but seldom with a Future 
 Indicative (Xen. Cyr. iii. 2. 13). 
 
 iVb^e 4. av is sometimes found with ottws and the Subjunc- 
 tive, cf. Plat. Gorg. 481 A (fx-qxe^v-qreov OTTWS av Stacfivyr)), but 
 never with otto)? and the Future Indicative. The Optative 
 (Present or Aorist) with av in this construction is an Apodosis. 
 Cf. Xen. Oec. ii. 9 (eTri/xeAeib-^at OTTWs av yevoiro). 
 
 Note 5. Mtj is found, instead of oVws /t*^, with the Subjunc- 
 tive (rarely with the Future Indicative) after o-kottw, 6pQ>, 
 evXaPovfxaij ^vAacro-o/>tat, just as after Verbs of Fearing. 
 Conversely ottws fj^rj, instead of the simple fxrj, is used after 
 Verbs of Fearing. Cf. the next section, page 265. Cf. Soph. 
 Phil, (opa 117] Trapfjg), 0. C. IISO ; Plat. Symp. 213 D. In Xen. 
 
 Cyr. iv. 1. 18 (Spa fir] 8e^o-et), evXa/Seia-OaL fj,rj, PlAT. Prot. 321 A; 
 evXa/SeiO-dat to jx-q, PlAT. Rep. 539 A ; cfivXaxroreadat pL-j is fairly 
 common. 
 
 Note 6. cTTt/xeAov/xat is found with an Infinitive in Thug. vi. 
 54. 6, Xen. Comm. iv. 7. 1, Appian, Civ. v. 73. So euro occurs 
 with the Infinitive in Cic. de Fin. iii. 19. 62 (natura . . . diligi 
 procreatos non curaret). Poppo, Thug. vi. 54. So also <fivXdcr- 
 (Top^aL p.r) TTotetv, to pirj TrouLv, I guard against doing, Dem. 773. 
 1,313.6. 
 
 Note 7. a-KOTTio is followed by el interrogative (Soph. ^71^. 41). 
 See similar construction with Verbs of Fearing, Note, p. 266. 
 
 Note 8. In one or two places Set precedes oVws with the 
 Fut. Indicative, e.g. SoPH. Ai. 556, Set o-e oVw? Sei^ei^ : Phil. 55, 
 o-c Set oTTws eKKXexpeis. Jebb (note to SoPH. Ai. 556) quotes 
 Cratinus {apud Athenaeum), Set a ottws dXeKTpvovos /xr^Sei' 
 StotVet? Tovs Tpoirovs. There seems to be a confusion between 
 two constructions ; Set with the Infinitive, and some verb like 
 opa, o-KOTret with oVws and the Future Indicative. In Arist. 
 Eg. 926 we have o-Treww o-e ottws av eyypa(j>y<s, which however 
 may be regarded simply as an instance of Antiptosis, i.e. a-e, 
 the Subject to iyypafjyfjs, is made the Object to (nreva-b), which 
 is a Verb just like o-TrovSafo) or Trpda-a-o). 
 
262 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 § 235. ELLIPTICAL USE OFoTrm, ottco^s (xtj, WITH 
 THE FUTURE INDICATIVE. 
 
 ''Otto)?, oTTft)? /AT] are used with the Future Indicative 
 in exhortations and prohibitions, when no principal 
 sentence has preceded. All three persons are found, 
 though the second is commonest. 
 
 a\V 0770)9 oLvr)p eaec. EuR. Cycl. 595. 
 Come, he a man ! 
 
 oTTft)? he TOVTO fjbrj StSafet? fjLTjBevl. Ar. Nuh. 
 Mind you don't tell this to anybody. 
 
 <})€p€ 87) oTTtos fi€fjLvqcr6{M€6a TavTa. Plat. Gorg. 495 D. 
 JFell, then, let us be sure to remember this. 
 OTTWS rarra firjSils dvOpiowoiv Treva-irai. LyS. i. 21. 
 See that not a soul hears of this. 
 Observe that this construction is generally introduced by a 
 word, dXXd, ovv, Se, sometimes by aye wv (Ar. Nub. 490). 
 
 Note. The Subjunctive occasionally is found : 
 
 6no)s ye ixrj i^aTrajT^crrj i^/xas. PLAT. Prot. 313 C. 
 Mind he does not deceive us. 
 
 § 236. "Ottoj?, ottcos fJLT] WITH VERBS OF COM- 
 MANDING AND FORBIDDING. 
 
 For this Construction, see Indirect Petition. It is, of 
 course, the same as otto)? after Verbs of taking means to 
 an end, although an extension of it. There is a natural 
 connexion between, " Take care to do so," and " I bid you 
 do so." But for the sake of convenience the rule and 
 examples are given elsewhere. 
 
 § 237. VERBS OF FEARING WITH fJit], AND 
 
 Verbs and phrases denoting fear are followed by /jlt^ 
 and fjurj ov with the Subjunctive (in Primary Sequence), 
 
VERBS OF FEARING WITH /xt; AND fx^ ol. 263 
 
 and the Optative (in Historic Sequence). The Subjunc- 
 tive may, by the graphic construction, of course be sub- 
 stituted for the Optative. 
 
 BeBocKa fiTj ravra yevrjTac. 
 I fear this will happen. 
 Vereor ne haec fiant. 
 
 BeBoiKa firj ov ravra fyevrjTai. 
 
 I fear this will not happen. 
 Vereor ut (ne non) haec fiant. 
 
 eBeBoLKeiv fjur) {/jltj ov) ravra 'yevocro or jevrjraL. 
 Verebar ne (ut) haec fierent. 
 
 Observe that firj does not negative the verb ; it expresses 
 a surmise that the result will occur. Ov on the other 
 hand is privative and negatives the verb. 
 
 oeooLKa fjLTj ov^ oatov rj. 
 
 I fear it will not he righteous (i.e. icwighteous). 
 
 For fiYj, fjLTj ov and the Subjunctive, etc., without a 
 principal verb see the Chapter on Negatives. 
 
 Verbs of fearing are : — 
 
 (f)o^ovfJLaL, Beo^ earl irecj^pcKa (mostly poet.) 
 BeBocKa, Beivov earv rpeco (mostly poet.) 
 
 BeBoiKa jjLT] e7riXad(i}jj,€da rrj<; oiKaBe oBov. Xen. 
 I fear we shall forget the way home. 
 
 ovKeri eirerlOevro BeBoLKore<i fir) wrror/JbTjOecija'av. Xen. 
 
 They ivere no longer attacking from fear of Icing 
 cut off. 
 
 BeBifiev fi7] ov ^e^aioL rjre. Thuc. 
 We fear you are not trustworthy. 
 
264 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 e(l)oPeLTO TO (TTpcLTev/jLa fJLT] eiTi TTjv avrov %w/3ai/ 
 aTpareurjraL Xen. 
 
 He was afraid that the army luould march against 
 his own country, 
 
 ovh\v heivbv firj ev efMol orrrj. PlaT. Apol. xv. 
 
 There is no fear (likelihood) of the rule hreaJdng doiV7i 
 in my case. 
 Ohs. In Xen. Mem. i. 2. 7, we have eOavfxa^e el ns (f)o/3oiTo 
 
 jXYj 6 yev6fX€V0S KaXbs KayaOos fJ^r) \dpLV e^ot, instead of [iri ov 
 Xa/)tv 6^01, an abnormal construction not found elsewhere. 
 
 Note 1. As these Verbs of Fearing denote doubt and appre- 
 hension as much as downright fear, their construction is 
 followed by many Verbs which in other senses take other con- 
 structions, but which when denoting apprehension, anxiety, 
 suspicion lest or whether, are followed by fxr^ and fxrj ov. 
 
 Such verbs are verbs of caution in the sense of anxiety 
 ((fipovTi^u), evvoM, 6p(o, (TKOTTCo, €vXafBovp.ai, (PvXdcrcro) (-o/xat) j 
 oKvo), I hesitate or scruple (from fear, or pity, o?' shame) ; 
 VTroTTTevw, / suspect, arrtCTTW (aTrtorrtav e'x^S irapk^ei) in the sense 
 of suspecting rather than disbelieving, klvSwos ko-Tt. 
 
 VTroTTTCvopev pr) ov kolvoI aTrof^yjre. ThUC. iii. 53. 
 
 We suspect that you will not prove impartial. 
 
 OKvoj p-q poL 6 Avo-ia<s TttTreivos ^avij. PlAT. Pol. 368. 
 
 (fypovTL^o) prj KpoLTLO-rov y pot or tyav. XeN, Mem. iv. 2. 39. 
 
 / am thinking that it may be best for me to say nothing. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Phaed. 70 a {dina-Tiav irapkyci prj ovSapov) ; PlAT. 
 Theaet. 183 E {alaxwopevos prj, a very rare construction with 
 this verb) ; Soph. Tr. 1129 (evAa/Jeto-^at pr] <^av^s) ; Thuc. iv. 
 11 ((jivXdacrea-Oai prj ^WTplxJ/ioa-Lv). 
 
 Consult the Index for other meanings and constructions of 
 these verbs. 
 
 Note 2. Instead of the Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing 
 the tenses of the Indicative are used. 
 
 (1) The Future Indicative as a graphic substitute for the 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 cfiofSovpai prj riras rjSovas 'qSovals evprju-opev kvavria<i. 
 
 Plat. Phileb. 13 a. 
 I app-ehend that we shall find some pleasures opposite to 
 pleasures. 
 
VERBS OF FEARING WITH fit] AND fi^ oi. 265 
 
 Cf. Plat. Bep. 451 a ((fio/Sepov re koI a-cfiaXepou fxr] Kcioro/xai). 
 In Aesch. Pers. 112, the Subjunctive and Future Indicative 
 are co-ordinate, fxrj TrvdrjTai Kal ccro-erat, Trecrrj (Se). See Choeph. 
 257. So Eur. H. F. 1054, Ar. Ecc. 493. 
 
 (2) oTTw? ii-q with the Future Indicative, Subjunctive, or 
 Optative, as after verbs of taking means to an end in the pre- 
 vious section. 
 
 arap rov 8atfj.ovo<s 
 SeSoLX OTTO)? fxr] rev^o/xai KaKoSat/xouos. Ar. Eq. 112. 
 
 But Im afraid 
 This genius tvill turn out my evil genius — (Frere). 
 
 SeSotx' OTTWS IJi-q dvdyKTj ykv-qrai. DeM. Phil. iii. 130. 14. 
 
 I fear that a necessity may arise. 
 
 (3) (OS with the Future Indicative, ws does not (like oVws) 
 appear to have a modal force, but to introduce an Indirect 
 Statement, as if SiSoLKa or cf>o/3ovfxaL meant I fear thinking that. 
 
 dvSpos fxr] cfio/3ov (0? aTropr^creLS d^tov. XeN. Cyr. V. 2. 12. 
 Do not fear that you ivill be at a loss for a worthy man. 
 
 Cf. Soph. El. 1309, Xen. Cyr. vi. 2. 30, Dem. Phil. 
 iv. 1. 141. 
 
 In Eur. Heracl. 248 (ottws, as ottws is occasionally used in 
 Indirect Discourse). 
 
 When ort follows a Verb of Fearing it seems to introduce 
 an ordinary causal (or rather explanatory) sentence. 
 
 oTfc 06 TToAA-wi/ dpxovcTi /JLT) (f>o/3r)6rJT€. Xen. Hell. iii. 5. 10. 
 
 Do not be afraid because they rule many. 
 
 Though we might translate, do not be afraid thinking that. 
 
 Note 3. The Infinitive, Future, Present or Aorist is also used. 
 
 ov (^o^ovpSa iXacrcriocrecrOaL. ThUC. V. 105. 
 fFe are not afraid that we shall be beaten. 
 The Future Infinitive is here = the more usual p-rj with 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 <{>o^ovp.aL SuXiyxciv (re /xr) V7ro\df3rj<i. PlAT. Goi'g. 457 E. 
 / am afraid to refute you lest you should suppose. 
 
 The latter construction (with the Present or Aorist) is 
 common enough, and is the ordinary objective construction 
 common to verbs of fearing with many of the verbs mentioned 
 
266 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 in Note 1, e.g. (f)o/3ovfmi aSiKciv, I fear to do wrong ; ala-xvvo^iai 
 aStKcti/, / am ashamed to do wrong ; Ktv^vvevia dStKeii/, / run a 
 risk of doing wrong ; cf)v\d(Tcr(i> ix-qSiva dSt/cetv, / take care that no 
 mie does wrong. Cf. Latin, culpari metuit fides; penna metuente 
 solvi etc., in Horace. 
 
 Note 4. Observe the following distinctions : — 
 
 1. <})0/30VfiaL d8LK€LV. 
 
 I fear to do wrong (and so refrain). 
 
 2. cfioftovfxaL fxrj olSlko). 
 
 I fear I shall do wrong. 
 
 3. (jiO^ovfxaL dSiK-ja-eiv. 
 
 I fear I shall do wrong (very rare for 2). 
 
 4. (po^ovfJLaL TO aSiKclv. 
 
 I fear wrong-doing (generally, by myself, or by another.) 
 
 Note 5. Verbs of Fearing are also followed by el interroga- 
 tive. 
 
 ov SeSoiKa el ^tXnnros CV' Dem. Fals. Leg. 434. 6. 
 I have no fear whether Philip is alive (i.e. / have no fear as 
 to that question). 
 
 Cf. Eur. Herac. 791, Xen. Hell. xi. 1. 4 (oVot). 
 
 Note 6. dv is not used with the Subjunctive after Verbs of 
 Fearing. When the Optative is found with dv it is an 
 Apodosis. 
 
 § 238. Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative. 
 
 When the result has actually occurred, or is occurring, thq 
 verb with firj is in the Indicative. 
 
 Thus : SeSoLKa jXY] dfxapTdvrjs (or dfidprys). 
 
 I fear you will make a mistake. 
 But SeSoLKa fXYj d/xapTdv€LS. 
 
 I fear you (actually) are making a mistake. 
 
 SiSoLKa fXY) '^fxdpTrjKas. 
 
 I fear you have made a mistake. 
 
 So SeSoLKa firj rjfidpTaves (you were making a mistake); fxri 
 yjfiapTf-s, that you made a mistake. 
 
VERBS OF FEARING, ETC., WITH INDICATIVE, 267 
 
 1. The Present Indicative : — 
 
 (fiopetade /xrj Sva-KoXiorepoi/ ri StaKeifJiaL. PlAT. Phaed. XXXY. 
 You are afraid that I am in a somewhat more fretful state of 
 mind. 
 
 kiria-^es, ws av irpov^epevvqa-o) arTifSov, 
 
 KUfioL fxev ^Xdrjj k.t.A. Eur. Phoen. 92. 
 Yet stay, that first I may explore the path, 
 Lest any citizen now is visible 
 Upon the road, and one shall come to me. 
 
 Cf. I<m, 1523, Soph. El. 580. Similarly 6pw/>t€v /at) NiKtas 
 oterat, PlAT. Lach. 179 B. ela-ofiecrda fxyj KaXvTTTei, SOPH. 
 Antig. 1253. SLcrrd^ofxev fxri rvyxo^v^i, Plat. Soph. 235 A. 
 CTKe^w/xc^a [xr] Xavddvei, PlAT. Ly. 216 C. 
 
 2. The Imperfect Indicative : — 
 
 opa jxr] TTttifwi/ lAeyer. Plat. Theaei 145 B. 
 Have a care that he was not speaking in jest. 
 
 3. The Perfect Indicative : — 
 
 <f>o/3ovfiaL firj a.fx<f>OT€p(ji)v dfxa 'qfxapTT^Kafxev, ThUC. iii. 53. 
 
 I fear that we have missed both objects at once. 
 Cf. Plat. Lys. 218 d, Dem. 19. 26 {Fals. Leg. 372. 1). 
 
 4. The Aorist Indicative does not appear to occur in Attic. 
 See HoM. Od. v. 300. 
 
 5. The Future Indicative may be regarded as a graphic 
 substitute for the Subjunctive (supra).^ 
 
 § 239, Note on Dawes's Canon. 
 
 Dawes laid down the rule that after qttw? /^itJ and ov fjirj, the 
 First Aorist Passive, and the Second Aorist Active, Middle, 
 and Passive may be used, but not the First Aorist Active or 
 Middle. Instead of the First Aorist Active and Middle, he 
 said that the Future Indicative must be used. Subsequent 
 
 ^ So at least in Attic. But if the original force of the Subjunctive 
 was imperative (denoting will) rather than future (a point on which it 
 is impossible to speak dogmatically), the Subjunctive in the oldest 
 Greek would mean shall rather than ivill, and would be more direct and 
 vivid than the Future. See Monro's Homeric Syntax, pp. 231 and 238, 
 
268 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 critics extended Dawes's Canon to oVcos (without fxr]), and set 
 about changing a First Aorist Active and Middle, wherever 
 they were found in a text, to a Future Indicative. The sole 
 ground for this arbitrary rule of Dawes is the resemblance in 
 form between the First Aorist Active and Middle and the 
 Future Indicative, e.g. KATOKNHCHIC {KaroKvria-riq, Soph. 
 El. 956) and KATOKNHCEIC {KaroKv^crei^) ; SYAAE^HTAI 
 {^vXXk^y^Tat) and ^H/YAAE^ETAI (^vAXeJerat). Naturally 
 this resemblance of form might incline a Greek writer to avoid 
 confusion by using a second Aorist (if it existed) rather than 
 a First Aorist. Dawes made no objection to a First Aorist 
 Subjunctive Passive, because it bears no resemblance in form 
 to a Future Indicative. But Dawes's Canon rests on no solid 
 foundation of grammar, and breaks down completely on 
 examination. Instances of the First Aorist Subjunctive 
 Active and Middle in which all the MSS. agree are ottw? /xt) 
 €ml3or]0rj(Tio(TL (ThUC. iv. 66) ; OTTCO? firj /SovXeva-qa-de (ThUC. i. 
 
 73); oTTMs fir) ipyda-'qa-de, Lys. 138. Secondly, in some cases 
 the First Aorist Active does not resemble in form the Future 
 Indicative, and therefore cannot possibly be changed. E.g. 
 Soph. Phil. 381, ov [xrj IkttAcvo-j^s : the Future is iKTrAei^crov/xat, 
 and the second person would be eK-rrXeva-et not eKTrXevareis. So 
 Plat. Bep. x. 609, aTroXka-y, the Future is airoXQi : Soph. EL 
 1122, KXavG-o), First Aorist Active, where the Future would 
 be KXavcroviiai. And, lastly, the change made would in some 
 cases spoil the metre. 
 
CHAPTEE VI. 
 
 §240. CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 A Consecutive Sentence may be expressed either by 
 A. wcrre with the Indicative, or B. wo-re with the In- 
 finitive. 
 
 A. wcTTe (JoaT€ ov) with the Indicative states the con- 
 sequence as an independent fact actually occurring. 
 
 e^w Brj 6t9 ToaovTOv afiaOta^i ^fcco coare KaKov eKwv 
 
 iroLw. Plat. 
 / it seems have reached such a pitch of ignorance that 
 
 I deliberately do wrong. 
 
 et9 TovTo rfkOov (o<Tr ov/c e^rjpKeaev avroi^ rj Kara 
 
 ^Yjv ap'^7]. ISOC. 
 To sicch a pitch they came that their empire hy land 
 
 did not satisfy them. 
 
 B. wo-re (wo-re /lctJ) wdth the Infinitive expresses 
 merely the consequence which would naturally result 
 from the Principal Verb without affirming or denying 
 its occurrence. 
 
 yva)/jir}(; yap ov/c aireipo^ coad' dfjLaprdveLV. SoPH. 
 He is not void of wit that he should err, 
 
 ra TrapaBecyfiara tcov djjLaprrjfiaTwv Ixava toc<; 
 
 (T(0(j)pocrL ci)(7T€ /JL7]K€TL dfiapTaveiv. ANDOK. 
 Examples of errors are sufficient for sensible people 
 
 that they should no longer err, i.e. sufficient to keep 
 
 them from erring. 
 
270 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 § 241. oidT^ with Indicative and Infinitive. 
 
 A. W0-T6 with the Indicative is parallel with oVt and the 
 Indicative, that is to say, it introduces the Indicative as 
 a statement almost, sometimes quite, independent of the 
 Principal Sentence. 
 
 Thus : TOdovTOv orv l/xov cro<f)(uTepo^ el, (oVre crv [x\v eyj/WKas — 
 lyw Se ayvod. Pl. Ajpol. xiii. 
 So much wiser are you than I, that (and so) you have 
 discovered, while I am ignorant, etc. 
 
 This introductory force of tio-re is best shown by its 
 familiar usage at the beginning of a sentence where it is a 
 synonym for ovv, tolvw, and may be rendered and so, conse- 
 quently, therefore. 
 
 CIS T'^v vcTTcpaiav ovx rjK€V TL(Tcra<f)€pvr]<s' wcrO' 01 "EWrjves 
 
 €<fip6vri^ov. Xen. An. ii. 3. 25. 
 On the morrow Tissaphernes did not appear. Consequently 
 
 the Greeks began to consider, etc. 
 
 So with an Imperative. 
 
 6v7]Tos S' ^Op€(TTr]s' wcrrc fxrj Xiav (rreve. SoPH. El. 1172. 
 
 Orestes was but mortal. Therefore grieve not too sore. 
 
 Occasionally this introductory force of cmttc is seen even 
 with an Infinitive. 
 
 io(TT^ €fx€ kixavrov aveptorav (after a colon or full stop). 
 
 Plat. Apol. viii. 
 And so I was questioning myself. 
 
 As ioa-re, like on, is merely introductory; it can be followed 
 by any construction which an independent sentence can take, 
 e.g. Imperative (supra): oio-re fxr) dTroKa/xr)^, Plat. Crit. 4:5. 
 toa-re av with Optative, loa-re av 6t8ao-KotT€, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35. 
 okrrc av iroXfJirjcrev, Lys. 7. 28. 
 
 B. wo"Te with Infinitive. 
 
 wo-T€ with the Infinitive is epexegetical, i.e. explanatory of 
 the Principal Verb. It is doubly so, for ^a-re is an explanatory 
 particle, and the Infinitive is in its own nature explanatory. 
 Indeed ioa-re with the Infinitive, as will be seen below, often 
 takes the place of the simple Infinitive. The consecutive use 
 of wcrre with the Infinitive is only one among several of these 
 explanatory usages. The result contemplated, i.e. the purpose, 
 
<SoTe WITH INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 271 
 
 may be denoted ; the condition or limitation ; the command or 
 advice. The character of the explanation or definition will 
 depend upon the nature of the Principal Verb or Sentence. 
 
 1. A Purpose, or Contemplated Result. 
 
 Trav TTOLOvcriv wo-tc fxrj StK-qv SiSovaL. 
 
 Plat. Gorg. 479 c. 
 They do anything to avoid punishment. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Phaed. 114, wo-re fieraa-x^'^v. 
 
 2. Limitation or Condition (cf. €<^' w, €<f> $ re). 
 
 ^vixixa\Lav €7roLy(ravTO eirl tol<s Sc, io(rT€ fxr] orrpaTCveiv 
 
 €7rl Il€Xo7rovvrj(TLov<s. Thug. iii. 14. 
 They made an alliance on these conditions, that they were 
 not to serve against the Peloponnesians. 
 
 3. A Petition or Command. 
 
 TreiBovcTLv ^crre "Apyei iTriX^i prjo-ac. ThUC. iii. 103. 
 TJiey try to induce them to attack Argos. 
 
 The Infinitive alone would be more usual here. 
 Cf. Thug. viii. 45, wo-tc aTroKTctmi. Soph. 0. C. 969, mttc 
 )dav€.lv, ordaining, requiring, to the effect, that he should die. 
 
 4. The definitive foixe (denoting the character, degi-ee, or 
 fextent) is well shown in the following : — 
 
 TreLcrofxaL yap ov 
 ro(TOVTOV ovSkv wcrre fXYj ov KaAws Oavelv. 
 
 Soph. Ant. 97. 
 / shall suffer naught 
 So great as not to die a noble death (i.e. nothing which 
 will prevent my dying, etc.). . 
 For firj ov see chapter on the Negatives. 
 
 5. wo-re is freely used with the Infinitive, where the Infini- 
 tive alone might be used. 
 
 Travv [xoL ifxeXrja-ev wctc elSevai. Xen. Cyr. vi. 3. 19. 
 
 / tvas greatly concerned to know. 
 
 TTorepa iralSes eicrt <f)povi[M(OT€poi wcrre fiaOetv 7) av8p€<s ; 
 
 Xen. Cyr. iv. 3. 11. 
 Are hoys more sensible at learning than men ? 
 
272 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Too great to hear. 
 
 Maius quam quod tolerari possit. 
 
 ij/vxpov v8(jdp io(TT€ Xova-aa-Bai. Xen. An. iii. 13. 3. 
 
 The water is cold /or bathing. 
 
 lirixO'VO-^f' TToXXal etVtv wo-tc Sta^evyetv Odvarov. 
 
 Plat. Apol xxix. 
 There are many shifts for escaping death. 
 lias is more rarely so used, cf. Xen. Cijr. iv. 5. 15, w? iyKparels' 
 
 €LVai. 
 
 Note 1. Can io(tt€ with the Infinitive state a facf? The Infini- 
 tive, of course, denoting as it does the abstract verbal notion, 
 cannot, like the Indicative, definitely state a fact. toa-Te, with 
 the Infinitive, is parallel with irpiv and the Infinitive, Sid with 
 the Infinitive, or any similar substantival use of the Infinitive. 
 The fact, though not stated, is not excluded. More than this, 
 the expression may evidently be a variant for ioa-re with the 
 Indicative, open for a writer to use. This occurs when there 
 is no demonstrative in the Principal Sentence requiring defini- 
 tion. In this way irplv aTrievat avTov, before his departure, may 
 practically mean, before he departed; Sta to fxrjSha Trapetvai, 
 because of the presence of no one, may mean, because no one teas 
 present. 
 
 KAeapxos r/Xavvcv ctti tovs Mevwvos, wcrre iKecvovs €K- 
 TreTrXyJxOai. XeN. An. i. 5. 13. 
 
 Clearchus was marching against Menon's men, so that they- 
 were in a state of amazement. 
 
 dficfil 81 
 kvkXovvto Ttaa-av vr\a-ov, ioctt' dfjLrjxav€iV' 
 OTTOL rpdiroivro. AeSCH. Pers. 460. 
 
 They round about 
 Encircled the whole isle, so that the foe 
 Knew not which way to turn them. 
 Cf. Eur. Hec. 730. 
 
 Note 2. loa-Tc with dv and the Infinitive. oxrTe with the 
 Infinitive may be an (oblique) Apodosis, and therefore dv will 
 go with the Infinitive. 
 
 iyio €7rt Tovo-Sc cAw &a-T€ dv dvayKacrdrjvai, K.r.X. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20. 
 For wa-T€ ov with the Infinitive, see Negatives. 
 
RELATIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 273 
 
 Note 3. (is is sometimes used for uio-re, generally with the 
 Infinitive. 
 
 6 TTorafxhs TO(rovTO<s to /SdOos, ws /xiySe rot Sopara VTrepexii-v 
 
 Tov /3d6ovs. Xen. Jfri. iii. 5. 7. 
 TAe rit;er is of so great a depth, that even the sj^ears could not 
 reach the bottom. 
 (Lit. rise above the depth). Cf. Xen. Cyr. L 5. 11. More rarely, 
 if ever in Attic, with an Indicative. 
 
 § 242. Consecutive Sentences in Greek 
 and Latin. 
 
 The nearest approach in Latin to the distinction between 
 the Infinitive and Indicative is to be found in the use of the 
 Imperfect Subjunctive and Perfect (Aorist) Subjunctive, e.g. 
 cecidit ut cms frangeret [oio-re KaTayvvvat), and ut cms fregerit 
 (wo-T€ Karea^c). But the Latin distinction, even supposing it 
 is always observed, a distinction expressed by two tenses of 
 the Subjunctive, is a very difi'erent thing from that expressed 
 by two moods, the Infinitive and the Indicative. 
 
 § 243. RELATIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Consecutive Sentences are also expressed by Eelative 
 Pronouns, olos, oa-os with Infinitive. 
 
 For TOLovTo<s o)(TT€ 2iiQ used TotovTo? otos or 0*05 aloHC. 
 
 „ TOcrovTov w(rT€ „ ToaovTov ocrov or ocrov. 
 
 The Negative is firj. 
 
 TOLovTOf; €Lfu 0109 fiTjBevc aW(p ireiOeaOat, tj Xoyo). 
 
 Plat. 
 I am of such a character as to yield to nothing hut reason. 
 Is (or eiusmodi) sum ut nuUi alii rei nisi ration! 
 paream. 
 
 ovK ^v (opa oTa dpSeiv to TreStov. XeN. An. ii 3. 13. 
 It was n^t the season for irrigating the plain. 
 vefJLOixevoL to, lavrwv iKaaTOt, ocrov diro^y^v. ThUC. i. 2. 
 Each tribe cultivating just enough of its land to obtain a svh- 
 sistence from it. 
 Cf. ThUC. iii. 49, too-oOtov oo-ov av«yva>K€vat. 
 
 S 
 
274 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES. 
 Toiavra elirovres ola koX tovs ndpovras axOea-Oat. 
 
 Plat. Gorg, 457. 
 Saijing such things that even the company was annoyed. 
 
 "OaTL^ (more rarely 09), with tlie Indicative, is Con- 
 secutive (parallel to ware with Indicative). ISTegative ov. 
 
 t/? ouTft)9 €v-q07]<; earlv v/jlwv barc^; aypoel ravra ; 
 
 Dem. 
 
 Who of you is so simple that he is ignorant of this ? 
 Quis vostrum tarn stultus est ut (qui) haec ignoret? 
 
 ovSeU av yh'OLTO ovrws dBafidvTLVOs os dv fxeivciev. 
 
 Plat. Bep. ii. 360 b. 
 No one would prove so steeled against temptation as to remain 
 firm, 
 dv fxdveuv is, of course, an Apodosis. For os see Soph. Phil. 
 409, 444, Ai 471. 
 
 § 244. LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVE 
 SENTENCES.^ 
 
 (0(TT6 {ware /jlt]), e</)' o), €(p core (jjlt]). 
 
 On condition that, on the understanding that. 
 
 ware (wcrre ^rj) with Infinitive. 
 
 e(^' w, ec/)' wre with Infinitive (Negative /xtJ), or Future 
 Indicative (Negative ov or ^r\). 
 
 e^rjv avTOL<; rcov aXkoyv ap'^eiv EWr}V(ov war avTov<^ 
 viraKoveuv rS ^aatXel, Dem. 6. 11. 
 
 It was in their power to rule the rest of the Greeks if 
 they themselves would ohey the King. 
 
 1 With &ffT€ Limitative compare the use of ut in Latin : 
 Bonis viris ita fides habetur ut nulla sit iis fraudis suspitio. 
 
 Cic. Off. ii. 33. 
 
 Good men are trusted only when there is no suspicion of dishotiesty 
 against them. 
 
LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVE SENTENCES. 275 
 
 acjiLe/juev ae eiri tovto) e^ core /jLrjKerc (fx-Xoaocpelv. 
 
 Plat. 
 We acquit you, on the understanding that you no 
 
 longer pursue philosophy (ita ut philosophari 
 
 desinas). 
 
 awe^r^crav e<f> (OTe e^tacrcv e/c TIe\o'irovvr]<TOV viro- 
 cnrov^OL (koI ^7]heiT0T€ eiTL^TjaovTat avrrj^). 
 
 Thtjc. 
 
 They surrendered on the condition that they should 
 leave the Peloponnese under truce (and never again 
 set foot on it). 
 
 Observe that the Future Indicative is used in Historic 
 Sequence. 
 
 Note. The Nominative Attraction is observed : — 
 
 irws av ovTOs kdkXot ra dWorpia diro(rT€p€iv €(fj' w KaKoSo^os 
 elvac. Xen. Ag. 4. 1. 
 
CHAPTEE VIL 
 §245. CAUSAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Causal sentences are expressed in a variety of ways. 
 
 A. By Causal Particles and a Finite Mood. 
 
 B. By Eelative Sentences. 
 
 C. By Participles. 
 
 D. "In various miscellaneous ways. 
 
 A. Causal Particles. 
 
 The common Causal Particles are also the Temporal 
 Particles, eVe/, eireihri, «? (cf. Latin cum). The negative 
 is oVf and the Indicative is the Mood. 
 
 Tidr^ixi ae o/jLoXoyovvra eTreL^rj ovk airoKpLvei. Pl. Ap. 
 I assume that you consent, since you do not answer. 
 
 eiret ovk eBvvavTo Xafji^dvecv to '^utpLov airievai tjBt] 
 
 eireyelpovv. Xen. Anah. v. 2. 5. 
 As they were not able to take the place they were new 
 trying to go away. 
 For eVet^T] with Imperfect, Thuc. i. 102. For lirel, see 
 Xen. An. v. 2. 5. For «9, Soph. Phil. 46, 914. 
 
 Note 1. When, however, the sentence is explanatory of what 
 has preceded, on,. Uon, ScoTrep are used. These particles 
 cannot introduce a Causal Sentence Hke eirei, etc. (cf. ot€ 
 Temporal). 
 
 TpLyjprjs Be crecraypevT] dvOpioTTiov 8id rt, dXXo (^ofiepov ecrrt 
 7] oTt ra^v 7rA.€t; Sid Se re aAAo dXvTroL dXXrjXois 01 
 c/x7rA€0VT€S '^ Blotl kv rd^€L KaOrjvrai ; XeN. Oec. viii. 8. 
 
 For what other reason is a trireme full of men dangerous, 
 except because it sails fast ? And for what other reason do 
 those who are on board occasion no alarm to one another, 
 except because they sit still in their ranks ? 
 
 276 
 
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 277 
 
 Note 2. A Causal Sentence in Historic Sequence is found 
 in the Optative when it expresses the indirect words or 
 thoughts (virtual oratio ohliqua). 
 
 rbv UepiKXea eKct/ct^oi/, ort (rTpaTrjyb<s &v ovk kirk^ayoi.. 
 
 Thuc. ii. 21. 
 
 They were abusing Pericles^ because, though general, he did not 
 lead them out into the field. 
 
 ort OVK €7r€^rjy€v would have been the simple explanation of 
 the historian. 
 
 In Periclem invehebantur quod, cum praetor esset, non 
 educeret. 
 
 Cf. Liv. ii. 7. Matronae annum ut parentem Brutum 
 luxerunt, quod tarn acer ultor violatae pudicitiae fuisset. 
 
 (OS occurs similarly in Xen. Symp. iv. 6, oTada iiraLvecravTa 
 avTov Tov 'Ayafiefjivova, to? /Saa-LXevs eirj dyaOos, because (as he 
 said) he was. Both oVt and a>s may, however, be regarded as 
 introducing an Oblique Statement, the verb of saying being 
 implied in eKaKi^ov and kiraivka-avTa. But in Xen. Mem. i. 4. 
 19, we have eVetVep riyyia-aivTo, which must be causal or ex- 
 planatory. And in Xen. Hell. vii. 1. 34, we have etx^ Aeyetv 
 (OS Stot rovTO TToXefx^creLav, on ovk kdeXrj&aiev, where we have a 
 real blending of on causal and on of the Oblique Statement. 
 
 Note 3. ore (just like cum in Latin) besides being Temporal, 
 is also Causal. 
 
 ore TOLvvv tovO^ out(os c^^ct, Trpocn^Kei 7rpodvix(x)<s edeXiLV 
 
 (XKoveLV. Dem. 01. i. 9. 3. 
 Since then this is so, it behoves you to be heartily willing io 
 
 listen. Quae* cum ita sint, etc. 
 
 Observe that this Causal ore, unlike the Temporal on, can 
 begin a sentence. 
 
 OT* ovv TOiov^e ^p-qcrpxiv elcr-qKOva-afiev. 
 
 Soph. El. 38, Phil. 427, Ant. 170, Ai, 1231. 
 Cum vero huiusmodi oraculum accepissemus. 
 
 Observe that on cannot be elided. 
 
 oTTon is similarly used. Thuc. ii. 60, Pl. Leg. 895 B. 
 
 €VT€ causal is poetical (Soph. Ai 715) : o-n-ov, causal only in" 
 Ionic. 
 
 odovv€Ka (oTov 'iv€Ka) in a causal sense occurs in SoPH. Ai. 
 123, 153. 
 
278 CAUSAL SENTENCES. 
 
 B. Causal sentences are also expressed by relatives 
 09, 09 76, o(7Tt9, 6VTt9 76, with the Indicative. 
 
 Latin qui or quijope qui with Subjunctive. 
 
 7ra)9 <f>ep€i<; yap o<; ye avTO<; oyel ; Ar. 
 
 Why how d'ye hear, when yoiire being carried yourself? 
 
 davfjiaaTov iroiei^ 09 r}iuv ovBev BiBcof;. Xen. 
 Tou are acting strangely in giving us nothing. 
 
 = on ovhev BlBco<;. 
 Mirum facis qui nobis nihil des. 
 
 TTWS OV KaKKTTOS OCTTIS TTC/Dt TtAcIOVOS TTOtCt TOVS KaKOVpyOV<i ', 
 
 Must you not he scoundrel since you are making much of 
 evildoers 'i Dem. 24. 107. 
 
 05 ye, Soph. El. 911. oo-ns, Soph. Ant. 696. 
 
 Note. Other relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are similarly 
 used. 
 
 r^v fxrjTcpa ifiaKapi^ov, ol(dv tckvwv CKvp-qcrc. HdT. i. 31. 
 They were counting the mother Imppy in having been blest 
 with such children. 
 
 = 6tL TOiOVTiOV €KVp)]Cr€V. 
 
 ivhaipuxiv fJLOL i(fiaLV€TO, ws dSews ereXevra. PlAT. Phaed. ii. 
 / deemed him hajpjpy, so fearlessly did he meet death. 
 
 — oTi ovTws dSews, not an uncommon use of m, 
 
 C. Participles are frequently used in a Causal Sense. The 
 Negative is ov. are (are Srj), ofov, oia Sij often accompany the 
 Participles in this use (also worre in Herodotus). 
 
 6 Kvpos, are Trats wv, i^Scto Ty (ttoXyj. XeN. Cyr. i. 3. 3. 
 Cyrus, boy-like, was charmed with the dress. 
 
 ovS' dv €VL vTreLKddoijXL ScLcras Bavarov. PlAT. Apol. XX. 
 There is not a mxin to whom I would yield through fear of 
 death. 
 
 Xkyiji §€ TOvS' €V€Ka, l3ovX6ix€vos So^ai (rot OTrep ifiot. 
 
 Plat. Fhaed. 102 d. 
 / speak for the following reason, because I want you to think 
 just as I do. 
 
 See also Genitive and Accusative Absolute. 
 
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 279 
 
 D. Causal Sentences are also often expressed by tw and 
 the Infinitive. . 
 
 ov TrXeove^ias <ev€Ka ravr' eirpa^ev dWa rw SiKaLorepa d^iovv 
 
 0i7^atov§ r/ -q/xas. DeM. ii. 13. 
 It was not for sake of greed that he did this, but because the 
 
 Thebans mcde a juster demand than we. 
 
 Causal Sentences are also very often and very simply 
 expressed by a Preposition and its case, sometimes by a 
 Preposition with the Infinitive, e.g. 
 
 Sto. TO ^tAou? avTovs elvat. 
 Because they are friends. 
 Cf. especially Bid and Kara. 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 § 246. EXPEESSIONS OF A WISH. 
 
 I. A Wish that refers to the Future, and which there- 
 fore may be fulfilled, is expressed — 
 
 A, By the Simple Optative. 
 
 B. By the Optative - with et^e, el yap (el and w?, ttw? 
 ap ; in poetry). 
 
 The Negative is always firj. 
 
 CO Trac, yevoio irarpo'^ evrv^earepo^;, 
 ra S' oXh! 6fjLo2o<i, koI yevoC av ov kc{ko<;, Soph. 
 Boy, may si thou prove more fortunate tham> thy father. 
 Like in all else, so shouldst thou prove not vile. 
 Observe that yevouo alone expresses a wish, yevoi av is 
 an Apodosis. 
 
 fiTj ^(prjv fiCT a/jLOV(rLa<;. EUK. 
 May I not live without culture ! 
 
 €L yap yevoipr^v, tckvov, olvtI (rov V€Kp6s. EUR. Hipp. 1410. 
 Would to God, my child, I were dead in thy stead. 
 
 eW vplv dfiffioiv vovs ycvoiro cnocfipovelv. SoPH. Ai. 1264. 
 Would that to you twain judgment were granted for discretion. 
 €L fjioi yeroiTO <f>06yyo<s h ppdxio(rt. EUR. Hec. 836. 
 Oh, that a voice were given me in these arms. 
 (09 6 raSe irop(ov oAotro. SoPH. El. 126. 
 Ah, that he who contrived this might perish. 
 Cf. EuR. Hipp, 407. 
 
 TTWS dv dvT kp.OV Tp€<f>OlT€ TrjvSi TYJV VOCTOV ; 
 
 Soph. Fhil. 794. 
 Would that in my stead ye might hug this plague. 
 
 prj TTWS eyw Too-avras 8tKas <f>vyoLpL. PlAT. Apol. iii. 
 May not I be indicted on charges so serious / 
 
EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. 281 
 
 11. A Wish which refers to the Past, and which there- 
 fore can no longer be fulfilled, is expressed — 
 
 /^Imperfect Indicative (of pre- 
 I sent time, continued or ha- 
 
 A, With elOe, e\ 'yap (/iTf)^ bitual actions). 
 
 I Aorist Indicative (of single 
 V. acts). 
 
 B, co^eXov (Aorist), sometimes w^eXXor (Imperfect), 
 from o(j)€c\(o, I owe, with the Infinitive (Present or Aorist). 
 
 etOe, el yap {jjurj) may accompany ax^eXov, sometimes «? 
 in poetry. 
 
 elO el^e?, w reKova-a, /SeXrtou? ^peva<;. 
 
 Eur. El. 1061. 
 Would that tliou hadst, mother , letter judgment (but 
 thou hast not). 
 
 €i6e oroi, 0) TIepLfc\6L<^y rore (rvveyevo/jLrjv. 
 
 Xen. Mem. i. 2. 46. 
 / wish I had been with you then, Pericles. 
 
 «<? c^(f)6\ov irapoidev eKXLirelv ^tov. SoPH. El. 1131. 
 Ah, would that I had first forsaken life. 
 
 €l9' (o(/)€A€<» TotaSe Trjv yv(^firjv Trar/aos 
 dvrjO-KovTOs dvai. SOPH. El. 1021. 
 Would thou hadst been thus minded on the da/y thy father 
 died. 
 
 rrjv ^Kdpov. Soph. Phil. 969. 
 
 Would that I ne'er had left 
 
 My Scyros I 
 
 a)S irplv StSd^aL y' wt^eAe? fiecros SLappayrjvai. 
 
 Arist. Ban. 955. 
 Pity, ere you taught 'em, that you didn't burst asunder in 
 the midst. 
 
282 EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH, 
 
 Note 1. A wish may be made to depend on a condition which 
 is expressed by ovrm. Instead of the sentence which logically 
 should follow " so may I . . . ^5," an Indicative or an Impera- 
 tive is substituted. 
 
 ovT(}i VLK-qcraLixi T* eyo) Kal vo/it^oi/ZTyv (T0(f>6<ij 
 (US vfxas 'qyovfxai ilvat Oearas Se^tovs. Ar. Nub. 520. 
 So may I win and be considered wise, as I hold you to be a 
 clever audience. 
 
 OVTIOS OVaiJX-qV TWV T€KV(Ji)V, /XtCTO) TOV avSp' €K€LVOV. 
 
 Ar. Th. 469. 
 So may I be blest in my children . . . I do hate that fellow. 
 
 ovTO)<s ovaicrde tovtcov, fxr] TrepuSrjre fxe. DeM. Aph. ii. 842. 9. 
 So may you enjoy this . . . do not neglect me. 
 
 Instead of saying — on this condition, namely, that you do not 
 neglect me. 
 
 This is exactly like the well-known Latin idiom : — 
 Sic te diva potens Cypri 
 
 Ventorumque regat pater 
 Navis ... 
 
 Finibus Atticis 
 Reddas incolumem precor. HoR. Od. 1. iii. 1. 
 
 Sic venias hodierne . . . tibi dem turis honores. 
 
 TiBULL. 1. vii. 33. 
 
 Note 2. Explanation of expressions of a wish. 
 
 (1) Optatives and Indicatives with d, d yap, etOe are clearly 
 Protases with suppressed Apodoses. 
 
 €L yap ravra yevoiro (sc. KaAws dv drj). 
 el yap ravra iycvero (sc. KaAws dv yv). 
 Latin is parallel — 
 
 O si haec ita fiant, fierent, facta essent. 
 With a»5 compare ut, utinam in Wishes. 
 
 (2) dxfieXov (/ ought, or had ought), on the other hand, is an 
 Apodosis with a suppressed Protasis; used like vpw, e^ci 
 without an dv. 
 
EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. 283 
 
 Latin again supplies a parallel — 
 
 (Eum) si ulla in te pietas esset, colere debehas. 
 
 Cic. Phil. ii. 38. 
 
 Tunc ego debueram capienda ad Pergama mitti : 
 
 Tunc poteram magni, si non superare, morari 
 
 Hectoris arma meis. Ov. Met. xii. 445. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 § 247. EELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Relative sentences are introduced by either (1) Relative 
 Pronouns, or (2) Particles of Relative origin, «<?, ore, el, 
 o(l)pa, etc. 
 
 The chief distinction between Relative Sentences is 
 that of Definite and Indefinite, a distinction explained in 
 §172. It applies to many Relative Particles as well as 
 Pronouns, e.g. 
 
 A. Definite — 
 
 care onrodev rJXto? dvccr'^eL, koI oirot Bverai. Xen. 
 
 You knew where (lit. whence) the sun rises, and where 
 (lit. whither) it sets. 
 
 CO yata 8ef at OavaaLfJuov fi , bircof; €^co. SoPH. 
 Earth ! receive me, as I am, in death. 
 Accipe me, ut sum. 
 
 B. Indefinite — 
 
 oiroL av crTpaT7]yov eKTre/JbyjrrjTe, ol e')(6poi Kara- 
 jeXcocri. Dem. 
 
 Whei'esoever you send out a general, your enemies 
 ridicule yov.. 
 
 e^ean ^PW^^'' ottco^ av /SovXaivrac. Xen. 
 You may make tvhatever use (of it) you please. 
 
 284 
 
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 285 
 
 Definite Relative sentences present no difficulty. In- 
 definite Eelative sentences freely form Subordinate sen- 
 tences of every kind, — Conditional, Temporal, Modal, 
 Consecutive, etc., and will be found under these several 
 heads. Some Relative Particles denote Place (otto*, 'Iva, 
 etc.), but a special chapter on Local Sentences is un- 
 necessary. 
 
 Other uses of the Relative will be seen by reference to 
 the Index. Especial attention should be paid to the 
 syntax of the Negatives with Relatives ; see chapter on 
 the Negatives, Part III. 
 
PART III. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO 
 OBLIQUA, AND FIGURES. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 §248. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Prepositions in Attic are particles which have a double 
 use. Either (1) they are joined in Composition with 
 Verbs; or (2) they serve as links between the oblique 
 case of Nouns or Pronouns and other words, especially 
 Verbs, in the sentence. As such links they denote Place, 
 Time, and various figurative relations, Agency, Cause, 
 Means, etc., more distinctly than could be done by the 
 oblique cases alone. Prepositions also help to form com- 
 pound adjectives and substantives. Philology and Epic 
 Poetry, however, enable us to trace the origin and usage 
 of Prepositions further back than their Attic uses, and to 
 account for those uses. 
 
 § 249. Introductory Note to Prepositions. 
 
 1. Prepositions appear to have been originally case- 
 forms. Thus vTTo (Ep. vTzal) was Locative, meaning on the 
 ufider side ; vircp (Sanskrit upari), on the upper side ; Sid (Ep. 
 and Poet. Stat), in the space between; dvri is Locative, avrd 
 Accusative (cf. dvr-rjv, coram) ; irept Locative ; 7r/)o? {Trport) 
 Locative ; Trapa. (Trapai) Locative ; irpo is Ablative. As cases 
 
INTRODUCTORY NOTE TO PREPOSITIONS. 287 
 
 they must all have been capable of taking a Genitive.^ 
 Thus vTral x^ovos, OKI the under side of the earth; Trap ttoSos 
 {irapaL), Pindar, P. 10. 97, on the near side of the foot ; avTi 
 ifielo, II. xxi. 481, on the opposite side of me. This is con- 
 firmed by the fact that all the quasi-prepositions, which are 
 cases of nouns, are joined to a Genitive, e.g. 6vpa(€, Eur. 
 Bacch. 331. This stage, however, is previous to all written 
 literature, and belongs to Philology rather than Syntax. 
 
 2. They were used as Adverbs ^ independently of Verb or 
 Noun. Instances still occur frequently in Homer, e.g. /xeAavcs 
 8' dva /Sorpves r]crav, hlack clusters were throughout, II. xviii. 512 : 
 irepl irpo yap eyx^*" ^^^^, around in front he was raging with his 
 spear, II. xi. 180 : a/z<^t Se ol Ppd^'e revx^^? ^^ either side for 
 him (or near him) dashed his arms : -n-epl Krjpi (j6tAe€o-Ke, exceeding 
 much at heart he loved him. The Adverb qualifies the Verb, 
 but stands apart from it. 
 
 3. A transitional period, that of the Homeric poems, suc- 
 ceeds. Originally the Noun went straight with the Verb; 
 the relation between the two might be more particularly 
 defined by an Adverb. Thus dyayeiv Sofxov, to lead home ; 
 ayayetv So/xov, to lead from home (Genitive of separation or 
 Ablative) : w/xots /8aA' atyiSa, on his shoulders (Locative) he cast 
 his shield. Compare these with ekrjyov Oeiov 86fxov, Od. iv. 43 ; 
 Ik 8' dyaye KXtarirj's, II. i. 346 : rjy^v h /cXicrtryv, II. i. 89 : d/x^i 
 Se x^t'^at a>ixoL<s dtara-ovrai. In the first two of these last four 
 examples the Adverbs et's and €k further define the direction of 
 the Verb, and form Compound Verbs which " govern " respec- 
 tively theAccusative and Genitive. But in the last two the 
 Adverb serves as a link between Noun and Verb, and becomes 
 a Preposition. 
 
 4. Prepositions thus come to furnish new analytic cases, 
 the old cases with their blunted and confused suffixes being 
 
 1 This is Curtius' view {Elucidations, Ch. xvii. ) It must apply to 
 Prepositions only when they do not denote separation (in which case 
 they would be joined to an Ablative). Such a connection between 
 Prepositions and the Genitive is said not to exist in Sanskrit, and on 
 this ground Delbruck (Syntaktische Forschungen, iv. ch. ix. p. 134) 
 only partially accepts Curtius' theory. 
 
 2 No distinction is here intended in speaking of Prepositions as case- 
 fonns and as Adverbs. All oblique cases are, of course, adverbial, 
 except the true Genitive, which is adjectival or attributive. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 insufficient to express all the new relations between Noun 
 and Verb which were suggested by the expansion of Greek 
 thought and knowledge. When a Preposition links a case to 
 any other word but a Verb, to an Adjective or Noun, a verbal 
 meaning is readily understood. In determining the force of 
 a Preposition we must carefully consider three points : the 
 meaning (1.) of the Preposition, (2.) of the Case, (3.) of the 
 Verb (or verbal word). In the stereotyped phrases with 
 Prepositions which have practically become Adverbs or Adjec- 
 tives, it will be easy enough to supply the verbal notion which 
 the phrase requires to complete it logically. 
 
 5. A few instances may elucidate the foregoing remarks. 
 
 a. The noun linked by a preposition to its case has a 
 verbal meaning. 
 
 StaAAayai zr/aos Ttva, reconciliation with any one, IsocR. 60 B, 
 compared with hLaX\a\9qvaL irpos rtva, to be reconciled with 
 any one. 
 
 To^oTrjs d(f>' iTTTTOv, compare with ro^cmiv d<f)' iTnrov. 
 
 h. The Preposition with its Case is a fuller expansion of 
 the Simple Case. 
 
 Thus we may say, xprja-Tov irpos dvSpos co-n, or XPW^^^ 
 dvSpos i(TTL, it is the part of a good man. 
 
 Lysias writes fivr^a-drjvat tivo<s : Thucydides, p.vr](r6rjvaL irepi 
 Tivos : Demosthenes, ixvy](x6r\vaL v-n-ep nvos. 
 
 So we may say, dprjcnTaL Trpos v/j^ds, or vfxLv, v^ dX-rjOeia, the 
 truth shall he told you; fxax^a-Oai tw Ai/zw Kal t^ BtxpcL, Xen., 
 to fight with hunger and thirst; fidx^a-BaL irpos €7rL$v/j.ias, Plat., 
 to fight against desires. 
 
 Similarly, 17 Trap' l/xov €vvoLa = r) evvoia fiov, my goodwill 
 (Subjective Gen.); to Trap' ifxov d8tKr]ixa = To dScKrjpid fiov, the 
 wrong done by me (Objective). 
 
 6. Improper or Spurious Prepositions are those which can 
 be joined with Cases, e.g. dvev, hcKa with Genitive, cus with 
 Accusative, but which are not compounded with Verbs. 
 
 7. Tmesis is a late Grammarians' term to denote the 
 separation between Preposition and Verb. The term is 
 unnecessary, for, as we have seen, in early Greek it is not the 
 separation, but the combination, which has to be accounted 
 for. Tmesis in Attic is but a survival of the earlier usage : 
 it is practically confined to poetry and a few colloquialisms,' 
 
PREPOSITIONS AND THE THREE CASES. 289 
 
 e.g. 81' a/D* oAwAa/xei/, EuR. I.T. 1371, ttTTo' o-' 0A.W. It is seldom 
 found except when a particle intervenes. Aesch. Sept. c. 
 Theh. 672 forms an exception. 
 
 8. DissyHabic Prepositions are oxytone. They become 
 Paroxytone (i.e. Barytone) in certain cases: (1.) When they 
 stand immediately after their Verb or Case, e.g. oAeo-a^ a7ro 
 TTarras kraLpovs, fJ-o-xV'^ irkpi. This is called Anastrophe. 
 'A/x<^i, dvTi, dvd, 8id are not liable to Anastrophe. Mono- 
 syllabic Prepositions take the acute accent by Anastrophe, 
 but only when they come at the end of a line. (2.) When 
 they are equivalent to a Compound Verb, generally a Sub- 
 stantive Verb, dva = dvd(rT')]di />i€Ta = /xerecrTt, similarly evi, 
 eVi, Trdpa, irkpi, and perhaps vivo. (3.) d-rro and irkpi when used 
 as Adverbs. 
 
 Oxytone Prepositions with elision lose their accent, e.g. 
 Trap' rjfxcpaVj eir avrw. 
 
 S 250. The Prepositions and the Three Cases. 
 
 The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object of the 
 Verb. This, however, implies direction to, or on, and thus 
 Prepositions with the Accusative denote motion to,^ extension 
 along or over. 
 
 The Genitive is the Case of Connexion and Separation. 
 Prepositions with the Genitive denote connexion with, or sepa- 
 ration from : in the former sense the true Genitive is used, 
 in the latter the old Ablative use has been handed on to the 
 Genitive. 
 
 The Dative is connected with Prepositions chiefly in its 
 locative sense. Prepositions with the Dative denote nearness 
 to, or rest at, hy, ivith, or near. 
 
 § 251. Collected usages of Prepositions. 
 
 1. The Agent is expressed by the following Prepositions: — ■' 
 vTTo with Gen. (the regular expression to 
 denote the Agent ; the others which 
 follow are special.) 
 
 ^ But it must be remembered that the notion of motion must origin- 
 ally have come from the combined signification of Verb, Preposition, 
 and Case. 
 
 T 
 
290 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Trpoq (in poetry and Ionic prose) with Gen. 
 
 irapd (the agent as the source) with Gen. 
 oLTTo (in some special prose uses) with Gen. 
 Slol (the intermediate agent) with Gen. 
 
 2. Means by — 
 
 Blci with Gen. (the regular expression to 
 denote the Means; the others are special). 
 
 ttTTO. 
 
 
 U with Gen. 
 
 €v with Dat. 
 
 ^vv with Dat. 
 
 3. The usages of certain Prepositions are closely parallel :— 
 
 UTTO 
 
 €K 
 
 dvTL 
 
 TT/OO 
 
 ^VV 
 
 /ACTa 
 
 dvd 
 
 — Kara 
 
 VTvkp 
 
 — irepi (in certain senses). 
 
 dfijii 
 
 — ire pi 
 
 kiri 
 
 — 7r/)os (in certain senses). 
 
 L The usages of 
 'asted : — 
 
 certain Prepositions are sharply con- 
 
 > 
 
 €K CV 
 
 vjrkp 
 
 VTTO 
 
 dvd 
 
 — Kara, etc. 
 
 5. Synonymous phrases are formed by different Preposi- 
 tions with Cases, e.g. : — 
 
 KaG* "qfiepav, fxed^ rjficpav, Trdp^ rjfiepav. 
 ol dfi<^l nXaTwva, ot rrepl IIAaTWva. 
 
 6. Verbs of rest are used with Prepositions expressing 
 motion. This is known as the Construdio Fraegnans. See 
 
 aTTO, €^, €tS, €»/. 
 
 7. Prepositions are used, (1) in their literal sense denoting 
 place, or time, (2) in a figurative sense denoting various moral 
 relations. 
 
 The Attic use of Prepositions is marked off from the Epic 
 chiefly in two ways : (1) by the disuse of the adverbial senses, 
 (2) by the development of figurative meanings. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 291 
 
 § 252. PREPOSITIONS AND THE CASES, 
 
 I. Prepositions with one Case. 
 
 a. Accusative : avd, eU (e?), &>? (dficpl practically in 
 prose). 
 
 h. Genitive : avrl, airo, ef (e/c), irpd {dvev, evexa, 
 
 eKari, %wpi9, d^piy /^expO- 
 e. Dative : ev, aw {a/jua, ofiov). 
 
 II. Prepositions with two Cases. 
 
 Accusative and Genitive : 8ta, Kara, virep, fierd. 
 
 III. Prepositions with all three Cases. 
 afKpi, 677 L, irapa, irepi, 7rpo<;, viro. 
 
 I.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE ONLY. 
 (a.) WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 
 
 § 253. 'A^a. 
 
 ^Avd, up to, through, opposed to Kara (compare the two 
 throughout), Eng. on, Gothic ana. Germ. an. 'Avd related 
 to evl {ev) as on and in. 
 
 Lat. an-helo, I breathe up, Curt. Etymol. i. 381. 
 
 Up along : 
 
 TO. ifKola dva rov iroraiMov ov hvvavTai irXeeLV. 
 
 Herod. 
 The boats cannot sail up the stream (cf. Kard). 
 
 Throughout or Among : 
 
 dolBLfio^ dvd TTjV *EX\dBa eyevero. Herod. 
 He became famous in song throughout all Greece. 
 oLKeiv dva rot opr), Xen. An. iii. 5. 16, to live in the hills. 
 
292 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Distrihutively : 
 
 eiropevOrjaav dva irevre irapacrawyya^ ri}? rip^epa^. 
 
 Xen. 
 Tliey marched at the rate of five parasangs a day. 
 
 So ava 'iKarov, in bodies of a hundred, in centuries. Cf. 
 S. Luke ix. 14, S. Matth. xx. 10. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 ava Kpdro^ ((ftevyeiv), with all one's might (cf. Kara Kpdro^ : 
 
 dva \6yov (^vo/xem ScvSpa), Plat. Phaed. lix. trees 
 
 growing) in proportion ; dva a-rofxa e^^etv, to have in one\s 
 
 mouth, at the tip of the tongue. 
 
 N.B. dva has the sense oi dvaa-r-qdi, up! arise/ sursuni f 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ai. dW dva (^ €8pdv(jiv, come, up from thy seat/ 
 
 Note, dva is also used in Homer, in Lyric poetry (Pindar), 
 and in Choruses of the Tragedians with the Dative {e.g. 
 Eur. /. A. 754). 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1.) Up, dvapX^TTO), I look up. (2.) Reverse action, hack, 
 dvavevo), / throw the head hack. (3.) Again, dvajSkcwoi^ 
 I recover sight. 
 
 § 254. Eis or e's. 
 
 EU or 69, into, to, opposed to ef, out of. Original form 
 perhaps ei^?, from evi-(;. In Pindar ev means in and into. 
 Cf. Latin in and inter with Accusative. 
 
 (1) Of Place :— 
 Motion to, into, for : 
 
 SiKeXol ef 'iraXta^ Bte^rjaav 69 St/ceXlav. Thuc. 
 The Sicels crossed over out of Italy into Sicily (pv for 
 Sicily). 
 
 With verbs of rest : 
 
 Kara/cAeietv h tyjv vrja-ov. ThUC. i. 109. 
 
 To shut up in the island. (Constructio praegnans.) 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 293 
 
 {To speak) he fore : 
 
 Xkyeiv €6S TO TrXrjBo's. 
 To speak before the people. 
 Cf. etcrtevat, crrr^vai Is. 
 
 Looking towards: 
 
 TO Is TiaXXrivqv Tilxo^. ThUC. i. 56. 
 The wall facing Pallene. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 €ts aKovTLov^ €ts So/)aTos TrXrjyrjv (d^iKvctcr^at). 
 To get within javelin's throw, spear thrust. 
 Opposed to 1^. 
 
 (2) Of Time:— 
 Up to, until : 
 
 eU Tr)v eco, till dawn ; e<; efxi, up to my time. 
 At such a time, hy such a date : 
 
 et's ka-Trepav, els rpLTTjv (with or without -qfiepav), iS t^v 
 va-repaiav {-i^Keiv), to come at even, on the third day (or 
 in three days), on the morrow. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 Is Katpov, in season ; €ts avpiov, on the morrow ; ct's tTr^ira, 
 henceforward ; et's a7ra£ (or eiVaTra^), once for all, etc. 
 
 (3) With Numbers : — 
 
 Denoting limit, up to, amounting to : 
 
 vav<; e? Ttt9 T6TpaKocrca<;, Thuc. 
 Ships to the number of four hundred. 
 
 €9 Bpa'^fjLJjv BiaBovvai. Thuc. 
 
 To pay each man itp to (i.e. as much as) a drachma. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 €is tVa, €ts 5vo, €is T€(r(rapas. 
 One, two, four deep. 
 
 els SvvaixLv, to the extent of one's ability ; els vTrep^oXi^v, in 
 excess. 
 
194 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 one. 
 
 (4) Of Eelation to : — 
 
 dfiaprdve^v eU tlpu, to do wrong to any 
 
 Purpose : 
 
 cs ToSe rJKOfiev, for this purpose we are come. 
 €is KttAAos (rjv, Xen., to live for show. 
 
 (5) Special Phrases : — 
 
 €S av8pa<s ("EXXrjva'i, etc.) reXdv, to come to maWs estate 
 
 {to he enrolled among, belong to Greeks). Cf. iyypdffxo. 
 Is TL (tovto) TfA-evTciv, to cnd in a certain way. 
 h Trav/ d(f>LK€a-6aL, to come to everything, i.e. to try every 
 
 means, 
 ek 'AttoAAwvo?, Atovvcrov, to Apollo's, Dionysus' temple, ad 
 
 Apollinis, ad Bacchi. So C6s StSao-KaAov, ei? kpavrov 
 
 {(fiOLTav), sc. oTkov or some such word. 
 
 KB. €ts is not used in Attic of motion to individual per- 
 sons ; TT/Dos or d)s must be employed. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 Into. Examples unnecessary. 
 
 § 255. 'n?. 
 
 «<?, to, with Persons only, not with things, 
 with 7r/)09, eU, eV/, and alone. 
 
 &)9 Ayiv eiTpea^evdavTo. Thuc. 
 They sent an embassy to Agis. 
 
 (b.) WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 
 
 § 256. 'KvtL 
 
 dvTL (original sense, over against, opposite to), instead of, 
 in exchange for ; dvrd. Epic adv. and prep, over against, 
 face to face ; avrrjv, Ep. adv. over against. Cf. ev-avrc-o^ 
 dvTL-Kpv. In Homer dvri is still an adverb rather than a 
 preposition. Lat. ante (orig. anted), cf. Germ, ant-wort. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 295 
 
 (1) Of Place, opposite to : 
 
 This sense is Epic. 
 
 (2) Instead of: 
 
 KaKCL TTparrec avr a'yaOcov. Plat. 
 He does evil instead of good. 
 
 So [xd^ov, ttXgov, dvTL, instead of Comparative and Simple 
 Genitive, Soph. Ant. 182, Tr. 577. 
 
 (3) In return for : 
 
 Bel TOL fiev avTL apyvpcov aWa^aaOac. Plat. 
 We must exchange some things for money. 
 dvO' S)v, wherefore (also because, cf. Soph, Antig. 1068). 
 Rarely like Trpos, for the sake of (lit. over against, in the 
 presence of), with verbs of entreaty, see Soph. 0. C. 1326. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 Many meanings, (1) Against, i.e. opposite or in opposition, 
 dvTt/?atVa>, I plant the foot against, also / resist. (2) 
 Reciprocity, substitution, or equality, dvTi/SorjOC), I help in 
 turn ; av^i^Traro?, proconsul ; dyrirvn-os, struck, or striking 
 back, corresponding ; dvrt^eos, godlike. 
 
 § 257. 'Atto'. 
 
 ^Airo, away, off, from. Sansk. apa, away, Lat. ab, Germ. , 
 ab, Eng. off, of 'Airo (Sansk. apa) connected with eirl 
 (Sansk. api, further, after). 
 (1) Of Place : — 
 Away from : 
 
 aTTO T^9 avTcov opfJbwvTai. Thuc. 
 They advance frorn their own country. 
 
 With verbs of rest {from the observer's point of view) : 
 
 c/^oacrev dxro Trerpas (rTaOeis. EUR. 
 
 Shouted from the rock, standing {on it). ' 
 Hence many phrases : ot aTro rtui/ irvpymv, the men on the 
 towers ; diro veiov, d<^' iTTTrtov p.dx€cr6aL, to fight on board ship, 
 on horseback. 
 
296 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 ttTTo (TKOTTOV, Katpov, Wide of the TTiark (cf. airh yvw/x?;?, 
 
 Soph. Tr. 389); ajro rpoTrov (Plat.), unsmtably, 
 
 opposed to TT/OOS rpOTTOV, KaTOL TpOTTOV. 
 
 aTTo 8€vSp(i)v KaraSetu (Xen.), to tie to trees. 
 
 (2) Of Time :— 
 After, since : 
 
 airo Twv (TCTCDV BiaTTOvelorOai. Xex. 
 To work after meals. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 TO ttTTo rovSe, henceforth ; d<f)' ov, ex quo, since ; d:rd 
 TraAatov, apyaiov, of old ; a.4> k(nrkpa<i (ThUC. vii. 29), 
 at even. 
 
 (3) Origin : — 
 
 oi fiev aire Bewv yeyovore^, ol 8' ef avrcov rwv Oewv. 
 
 Isoc. 
 Some descended (remotely) from gods, others begotten 
 (directly) ly the gods themselves. 
 Material : 
 
 Kpaa-is (XTTo T€ Trjs rj8ov7]<5 (TvyKiKpafxevr) ofxov Acat oltto ttJ? 
 
 ^"^V^: . Plat. Phaed. ii. 
 
 A combination consisting partly of pleasure and partly of 
 pain. 
 
 Means : 
 
 ^y\v ttTTo TroXe/xov (yeoipytas). ThuC. and XeN. 
 
 To live by war (husbandry). 
 
 UepiKXri^s aTTo Sta/coortwv veojv KaT€7roX€fx-q<rev Tr]v ^dfxov. 
 
 r, .-, Is. 15. 11. 
 
 Pericles with 200 67^*^5 reduced Samos. 
 
 Cf. ThUC. i. 91, aTTO Trapacr K€vrj<s. 
 
 Cause, in consequence of or for : 
 
 aTTO Tivos Oavfid^ea-Oai, kiraivilcrdaL, SLa/SdWecrdac. 
 
 To be admired, praised, slandered in consequence of any thing . 
 
 air avTiov tujv ipyuyv o-KOTrciTC. ThUC. i. 17. 
 
 Judge from facts themselves. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONE V. 297 
 Agent, less direct than vtto : 
 
 iirpd^diq avr' ai'rwy ov^\v. ThUC. i. 17. 
 Nothing was achieved by them. 
 See Poppo's note. 
 
 diro with a case is often a periphrasis for a case alone, e.g. 
 6 ttTTo Ttuv 8opo(f)6piDv (fio^os^ fcav of the body guard, Xen. Hier. 
 X. 3 ; rwv drro rwv Brj/xov ris, one of the people, ThUC. iv. 130. 
 Thucydides's partiality for a free use of diro is remarkable. 
 
 (4) Phrases : — 
 
 01 ttTTo Hxdayopov, nAarovo?, the school of Pythagoras, 
 Plato. 
 
 ol aTTo TTJs 'AKaSYjfiecag, Sroa?, the Academics, Stoics {the 
 Academy, the Porch). 
 
 ol dirb (TKTjvrjs, actors. 
 
 UTTO (TTrovSrj'?, earnestly ; drro rod tcrov (r-J^s icrrjs)^ dir tcrrjs, 
 equally; drrb tov 7rpo(f>avov'S, openly ; utto yXitxjcrrjq 
 elirelv, to state by word of mouth (Thuc. vii. 10), to 
 repeat by heart (Xen. Symp. iii. 5), from hearsay (Aesch. 
 Ag. 813); o/ufxariDv drro (EuR. 3Ied. 216), with one's 
 own eyes; diro tov avro/JbaTov (ravTO/xarcn;), spontaneously, 
 sponte, casu quodam ; diro o-qp^^iov, at a given signal. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Separation, hence completion, and ceasing, dTroXovio, I 
 wash off; dTrepyd^ofxat, I finish off, i.e. / complete; 
 dTToXrjyd), I leave off, desist. ^2) Restoration, d7ro5t8w/u,i, 
 / give back. 
 Separation also becomes practically privative, e.g. 
 d7rayop€v(i), I forbid ; d;rox/»i/xaTos, without money. 
 
 S258. 'E/c,'Ef. 
 
 *Efc, *E^, out of; opposed to eU, into, ck and dird run 
 parallel throughout. Lat. ex, e (ec). 
 
 (1) Of Place :— 
 
 Onto/: 
 
 €K ^7rapTr)<; (j)6vy€i. 
 
 He is banished from (out of) Sparta. 
 
298 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Denoting change ; (cf. avrl). 
 
 TToXw eK TToXeo)? aWarreiv. Plat. 
 To change city after city. 
 
 With verbs of rest : 
 
 €K SevSpiov airay^jicrOaL, ThUC. iii. 81. 
 To hang themselves on trees. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 Hence many phrases (observe that the first three or 
 four are instances of Constructio Praegnans) : tovs ck t7^s 
 vav/jLax'^a-s (ovk dveXofxevovs), Plat. Apol. XX., those in the seor 
 fight ; 01 Ik vTJcrwv KaKovpyoc, Thuc. 1. 8, the evil-doers in (of) the 
 islands ; ol €k tcov Trvpycov, those on the towers, Thuc. iii. 22 ; 
 TO e^'IaOfiov Te^xo^ (opposed to to k Uakkrivrjv), ThUC. i. 64, 
 the wall on the side of the Isthmus ; €k Se^tas, on the right ; e^ 
 dpi(TT€pa^, on the left ; U vofxoDv, in accordance with the laws ; 
 opdos 6^ opdojv 8l4>p(j}v, Soph. El. 742, erect in chariot erect ; 
 Ik t?]s xpvx^j'i (If dvjjiov, HoM.) with all one' s heart ; Ik a-avTTJs 
 (Aeyets), self -prompted, Soph. El. 344, cf. diro ; ck ttoXXov, at 
 a long distance, Xen. ; €k t6^ov pv/xaros, Xen., at how-shot; 
 Ik x«/>os H-^XV^ TToleLa-dai, Xen., to fight hand to hand. 
 
 (2) Of Time :— 
 Since, after : 
 
 ef ov {xp(^^(^^)> since, ex quo ; ck tov dplcrrov, after 
 breakfast. (So diro.) 
 
 €K TovTov, after this (ck tovto^v gen. in consequence of this). 
 €K TOV XoiTTov (tQv AotTTwv) for thc futurc, Xen. and Plat. 
 
 After, denoting change : 
 
 €fc BaKpvcov jeXav. Xen. 
 To laugh after tears (weeping). 
 
 TV</)AoS €K SiSopKOTOS Kttt TTTW^OS dvrl TrXoVCTLOV. 
 
 Soph. 0. T. 454. 
 Blind after seeing, and poor instead of (being) rich. 
 
 Ever since : 
 
 €K vkov, Ik TracSos, from youth, from childhood. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONlS^. C^^qTHR ^^ 
 
 fUKIVE ESI 
 
 (3) Origin : — Vv^^ ^^' 
 
 ayaOol fcal ef dyaOcov. ^^^i:^ ^^ ^ *v< ^^ 
 
 Plat. (Cf. Soph. 471^466.) 
 Good, and horn of good parents. 
 
 Material : 
 
 TO ay KL(TTpov €^ aSa/xai/TOS. PlAT. Eep. 616. 
 TAe Aoo^ is of adamant. 
 
 Agent (Herodot. and poetry, rare in Attic) : 
 
 €K rwvS' apxofxai. SoPH. El. 264. 
 By them am I ruled. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 957. 973, Thug. iii. 69, Xen. Eell. iii. 96. 
 Cause, Consequence, or Means : 
 
 €K TToAe/xov elpyjvrj /3e/3atouTat. ThuC. i. 120. 
 Peace is secured by means of war. (Cf. Sid.) 
 
 Dependence upon : 
 
 Trapprjorta i^ dk-rjOelas yjprrjTat. DeM. 1397. 1. 
 Plain speaking depends on truth (comes of). 
 Cf. d7rdyx€(T6aL €k, above. 
 
 Mixed Phrases : 
 
 ot €^ 'AKaSrjixelas, €k toG Ile/DtTraTOV (cf. avro). 
 The Academics, the Peripatetics. 
 
 So N Test, ol iK TTto-Tcws, the adherents of the Faith. 
 
 6 i^ vfxcov tt66o<s, Soph. Tr. 631, your desire (like a gen.), 
 so v/jLvos (^ 'Eptvvoiv, the song of the Erinyes. Aesch. 
 Eum. 344. 
 
 Adverbial Phrases : 
 
 Ik /3ias, by force ; e/c Tov (jiavepov (7rpo<f>avov<s), openly (cf. 
 ex improviso, ex consulto, etc., Latin) ; U tov*€Ik6to<s, 
 Thug. iv. 17, in all likelihood; a»s €k twv irapovriov, 
 Thug. iv. 1 7, so far as present circumstances alloiv ; cf 
 Iduiv (tov lorov) equally ; kK tov avro/xdrov, by chancCj or 
 accident, Xen. (less common than drro). 
 
300 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Periphrasis for a case : 
 
 at e^ 'A^ryi'wi/ irapOhoi, the maids of Athens. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Separation, removal, completion (cf. aTro), Upaivm, I go 
 out ; eKTTfpdw, I sack utterly, mif and out. 
 
 §259. Ilp6, 
 
 Upo, he/ore, in front of. Cf. tt/jo?. Lat. prod, pro. 
 
 (1) Of Place :— 
 Before, in front of : 
 
 Mivwa Tj vrj(jo<; Kelrai irpo Meyapcov. ThUC. ' 
 
 The island of Minoa lies off {in front of) Megara. 
 
 Hence in defence of, for the sake of. (Cf. virep) : 
 
 rjOeXe davelv irpo kccvov. EuR. Alc. IS. 
 She willed to die for him. 
 
 Phrase. 
 
 TT/oo 680V, forwards, onwards, 
 
 (2) Of Time :— 
 
 ol irpo r)fi(ov yeyovore^i. ISOC. 
 
 Those who were horn before us (pur forefathers). 
 
 6 TTpo Tou xpovos, the former time, aforetime. 
 
 (3) Of Eelation :— 
 
 In preference to, cf. avrl, irepl : 
 
 Trpo rwv /SeXTcarcov ra ^pa'^vrepa alpeiaOaL. Plat. 
 To choose more unimportant things in preference to 
 the highest things. 
 
 irpo TToXAov TTOULcrdai {ripiacrdat). 
 T'o esteem highly, (lit. in preference to much). 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Forth, forward, in front, of place and so oi pre-eminence, 
 of substitution or defence, irpo/SdWu), I put forward ; 
 irpodvpov, front door ; TrpoeSpos, president ; 7rp6p.axos, 
 champion. (2) Before, of time, TrpoauTOdvofiaL, I learn 
 beforehand. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 301 
 
 § 260. "Aj/ev. 
 
 "^ Avev, vjithoiit, opposed to avv. 
 
 (1) Without the help of, or order of: tl jSpoToh av(.v Atos tcA- 
 eiTat; Aesch. Ag. 1487, what comes to pass among jnen without 
 the will of Zeus ? (iniussu lovis, love nolente). Cf. Thuc. viii. 52. 
 In Plat. Gorg. 518 d, without reference to. (2) Except, besides 
 (like x^P^"^) '• T^^vra avev xp^^'ov, Plat. Crit. 112 c, all things 
 except gold, omnia praeter aurum. 
 
 In Soph. 0. C. 502 avev comes after its case. 
 
 § 261. ''Ej/e/ca, eveKev. 
 
 ' Eu6Ka, eveKev (Ion. elvtKa, elveKEv), Poet. ovveKu. 
 
 Generally after its case, sometimes separated from its case 
 (Ar. Ecc. 105-6). Lat. gratia, causa. 
 
 (1) For the sake of: KoXaK^veiv cVe/ca fiia-dov, Xen. Hell. v. 1. 
 17, to flatter for the sake of (in order to get) a reward. (2) So far 
 as concerns: e/xov ye eVcKa, so far as I am concerned ; €V€Ka rwr 
 6(^0a\fx(oy, Plat., so far as depends on the eyes. 
 
 Note. Sometimes pleonastically with other Prepositions : 
 ttTTo fSorj^ €veKa, ThUC. vii. 92 ; dfX({>l aov €V€Ka, SoPH. Phil. 
 534 ; TLvos 8r] X^P'-^ eVcKa ; PlAT. Leg. 701 D. 
 
 § 262. "EAcart. 
 
 ^'EKan (Ep. with the help of). 
 
 (1) Because of, on account of : dpeTrjs cKan., SoPH. Phil. 670, 
 on account of (i.e. as a reward for) valour. (2) So far as concerns 
 (like €V€Ka) : ttX/jOovs cKan, Aesch. Pers. 337, 50 far as num- 
 bers went. 
 
 § 263. Xcoyotg. 
 
 X(opL<;, tvithout. 
 
 (!) JFithout help of: ttovov tol x^pf-^ ovSev cvrvx^i, SoPH. 
 El. 945 ; without toil nothing prospers. (2) Far from : x^P*-*^ 
 dvOputiroiv (ttl/3ov, Soph. Phil. iST, far from track of men. (3) 
 IFithout considering, besides : x^P^^ So^rjs, apart from reputation 
 Plat. Apol. xxiv. (4) Different from, Plat. Lack 195 a. 
 
 Note, x^p'^'* is ^^^^ ^s®^ Adverbially. 
 
302 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 264. Besides the Prepositions, a greater number of 
 old Cases, which have become Adverbial, are used like 
 Prepositions with a Genitive. 
 
 I. /x€x/)t and o^x^pi, as far as. 
 
 (1) Of Place : /xexpt t^s ttoAcws, Thuc, as far as the city. 
 
 (2) Of Time : /acx/oi too-ovtov, tovtov, so far, up to this time. 
 
 (3) t^'^XP'' "^^^ SuKacov (SvvaTov), SO far as is light (possible). 
 
 II. x^P^- (1) For the sake of : tov xa/oiv;='''ov eveKa ; for 
 the sake of what, or wherefore? (2) Because of: x^P''^ X'^'^^5= 
 xXtSas cKart, because of pride, Soph. 0. T. 888. (3) So far as 
 concerns: SaKpviov x^P''^) if tears could avail, Soph. Fr. 501. 
 
 Note. €/xr)v x^P''^f ^V^ X^P'^^^fi'^ '^y ^^^^) ^^y ^^^^y ^0^ X^P''^ 
 ifiov, (TOV, mea, tua causa, gratia. 
 
 7r/)os x^P*-^ is also redundantly used, with reference to, for the 
 sake of, Soph. Ant. 30, 908. 
 
 III. Several old Accusatives adverbially used, meaning like, 
 after the fashion of: ScKrjv (lit. usage) ; rpoTvov {way) ; Se/xas 
 (Epic only, /orw or body). Cf. Lat. instar. 
 
 IV. aAts, aS-qv, enough; St'xa, apart; Xddpa, Kpv4>a., secretly. 
 
 V. Many old local cases. 
 
 eyy vs, near (also takes Dative) ; ua-w, ivros, within ; e^w, 
 €kt6<s, without; fxeTa^v, between; Trpoo-w, rn-oppu), airoOev, far 
 from; Trpocrdev, cfxTrpocrdev, in front of; oTTLaOev, koltottlv, be- 
 hind ; diJL(f>oT€pio6ev, eKaTepiodev, evOev /cat ivdev, on both sides 
 of ; TTcpa, Tvkpav, beyond, across ; avrtVc/Da?, KaTavTiirepas, dvTLKpv, 
 KaravTiKpv, opposite. 
 
 (c.) WITH DATIVE ONLY. 
 § 265. 'E^. 
 
 Ev (poet, eiv, evl, elvi), in, within, opposed to et9, into, 
 and ej, out of. Lat. in, Eng. in, Germ. in. Cf. avii ' 
 
 [The old Adverbial usage of tv still continues in the phrase 
 kv 8c, and among, and therein, and besides. Several instances 
 occur in Sophocles.] 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 303 
 
 (1) Of Place (see Dative of Place) : — 
 At, near, hy, on : 
 
 A6coTVxl^T]<; riyelro rcov ev Mv/cdXr) ^EWrjvcov. Thuc. 
 Leoty chides commanded the Greeks at Mycale. 
 Tpaire^ov^ oiKelraL ev tw Ev^elvo) ttovtco. Xen. 
 Trajpezus is built on the Euxine sea. 
 
 A mong : 
 
 vo/AOt €V TracTLv evSoKtfxoi TOts "EAAr^criv. PlAT. 
 Laws famous among all the Greeks. 
 
 Elliptically (supply olkco, or some such word), mostly 
 with proper names in Attic. Gi. eh. 
 
 €v At'Sov, in Hades. 
 
 €v'ApLcf>povo<;, Plat. Prot. 320 a, in the house ofAriphron; 
 €v AioviVov, in the temple 0/ Dionysus, Dem. 21. 8. 
 
 €v TratSoTpt/Sov, ev KidaptcrTov, at (the school) of the gym- 
 nastic master, the cithara-player. 
 
 Also an Epic use (the complete construction sometimes 
 occurs, e.g. elv AlSdo SopoLcri, Od. iv. 834). 
 
 With Verbs of Motion (Constructio Praegnans). Cf. 
 eU, converse construction. 
 
 01 €V T^ 'Hpaiw KaTaTr€<f>€vy6T€s. XeN. Hell. iv. 5. 5. 
 Those who had fled to (and were in) the chapel of Hera. 
 
 (2) Of Time (see Dative of Time) :— 
 Within a space of, during : 
 
 ev Tah (TTTovSalf;, during the armistice, Xen. 
 ev TovTa>, meanwhile / ev a>, ev oaa>, whilst. 
 
 (3) Of Eelation : — 
 
 Occupation, Condition : 
 
 ol ev T0t9 TTpdyfiaac, ol ev reXet. Thuc. 
 
 Those who are engaged in public affairs, those who are 
 
 in office, i.e. ministers of state, the authorities, the 
 
 government. 
 
304 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 kv ^ikofjo^i^, iv Aoyots, kv rfj rexvn eivai. 
 To be engaged in philosophy, in oratory, in an art. 
 eivai kv (ji6/3(a, kv ala-xvvrj, 'kv cncDTrrj, kv kXirlSi,. 
 To be in a state of fear, shame, silence, hope. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 kv opyfj ex^tv or Trouta-Oai, riva, to feel angry towards any one; 
 kv alri^ '^X^^^j lo blame ; kv rjSovy eivai ap^ovres, ThUC. 
 1. 99, to give satisfaction as rulers; kv /caAw dvai 
 ( = KaAco9 €X€iv), Eur. Heracl. 971, to be well ; kv SUrj 
 SiKatios, in justice ; kv Trapaa-Kevf) eivai, to be in a state 
 of preparation, Thuc. ii. 80 ; kv oVAots elvac, to be 
 under arms (so kv robots, equipped with arrows; kv 
 <f)opTLOL<s rpkx'^iv, to run ivith burdens on the back, Xen.). 
 
 Dependent on : 
 
 ev ral^ yvvat^cv eariv rj aoyrrjpca. Akist. 
 The safety {of Greece) depends on the ladies. 
 So, very often, ev j 6/jlol, ev croLye, etc., peius me, 
 quantum in me est, so far as lies, depends on me, thee. 
 
 kv T^ Bc(^ TO TeAo9 ^v, ovK kv kp.OL. DeM. 292. 21. 
 The issue rested with God, not with me. 
 Cf. Soph. 0. C. 1443, 0. T. 314. 
 
 With respect to or at : 
 
 ykXiOT h a-oL ycAw. SoPH. Ant. 551. 
 / laugh a laugh at thee. 
 A rare use, but found with Compounds, lyyeAw, kw- 
 PptCio. 
 
 histrument, Means, Manner (a special use, originally 
 denoting Place) : 
 
 kv o(^^aA/xots (o/x/xao-tv) opav, Hom. and Attic. 
 To see with the eye (in oculis). 
 Sophocles is fond of this kv. Cf. Phil. 60, 102, 1293, 
 Antig. 691. Cf. also EuR. Bacch. 277, Thuc. i. 77 (ro- 
 ftois), vii. 11 (cTTio-ToAais). 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) In, at, near, kfx(3dXXoi, I throw in ; eyycAw, / laugh 
 at. (2) Of inherent qualities, eficfiODvos, endowed uith 
 voice, cf. Ivvo/ios. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 305 
 
 § 266. tvv, 
 
 Xvv i^vvy old Attic form), with, together with, opposed 
 to avev. Lat. cum. Compare throughout with /iero. 
 Together with : 
 
 67rai86U€To aw tc3 aSeXc^w. Xen. 
 He luas being educated ivith his brother. 
 
 Conformity with (opp. to irapd), with the help of: 
 aw Tft> vofjicp 'y^Tj^ov riOevai. Xen. 
 To vote in accordance with the law {nrapa rbv vofiov, 
 contrary to law). 
 Phrases : 
 
 orvv dew, with God's blessing, or help, please God (deo 
 
 favente). {a-vv de(^ etVcti/, Plat., Arist.) 
 01 (Tvv TIV6, ones friends, party, followers. Xen. 
 crvv TivL {xayiaBaL [eTvai, yLyvecrOai), to fight on one's side 
 (/x€Ta Ttvos more usual). Xen. 
 
 Accompanying circumstances : 
 
 crvv vavart TrposTrXctv, Xen. ffell. u. 2. 7, to sail tvith sMps 
 (commoner in Epic than Attic). 
 
 Expletive use. Cf. Dative : 
 
 (TVV T$ o-cp aya^w, to your advantage, cum tuo commode, 
 Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 15. Cp. Soph. Ant. 172. 
 
 avv TYJ jSta, with violence (cf. Trpos /?iav,j8tai<os). 
 
 (TVV T<J) xP^^Vf ^^ length, Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 
 Old Adverbial use : 
 
 {XYj ^vv xaKCus TTOi€LV avTOVS. ThUC. iii. 13. 
 
 Not jointly (i.e. together with the Athenians) to injure them. 
 Cf. Soph. Ai 960, Aesch. Ag. 586 {= furthermore), 
 Soph. Ant. 85 (moreover), El. 299. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1.) Together with, crvv ay opevo), I speak with another. (2.) 
 Completely J (TVfnrXrjpio, I fill completely, cf. compleo. 
 With numerals, a distributive force is given, e.g. 
 avvTpeis, three taken together, i.e. three apiece. 
 U 
 
^o6 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 267. Note on avv and //-era. 
 
 o-vV, together with, denotes mere addition. 
 licTd, together with, in the midst of, in the company of, denotes 
 participation with, community of action. 
 
 Thus (in Homer) : 
 
 lAera Sfiioiav irive Kal 7](rdie. Od. X. 140. 
 
 He was drinking and eating in the company of the slaves. 
 
 rjXvOe (Tvv 8lo) MevcActw. //. iii. 206. 
 
 He came with god-like Menelaus (i.e. both came). 
 Cf. Soph. Antig. 115, 116. 
 So orvXXafjilSdvo), I take or get together (rot;? o-TpaTnoras, the 
 
 fi€TaXafx/3dvii), I take together mth others, i.e. I share. 
 crvvk\(x>, I hold together, comprise, contain. 
 fi€T€X(^, I have ivith others, partake, share. 
 eireadaL /Acra tlvmv, to follow in the midst of others. 
 iirea-dai avv ruri, to follow with (as well as) others. 
 
 In Attic, it is to be observed, that o-vv with the Dative is 
 used in Poetry where /xcra with the Genitive is used in Prose. 
 Xenophon, however, apparently following poetical, i.e. earlier 
 or Homeric, usage, is the one Attic prose writer who uses a-vv 
 with the Dative. 
 
 § 268. One or two old Adverbial Cases, afia and ofiov, 
 are joined like Prepositions to the Dative. 
 
 I. dfia, mostly Temporal : afxa cw, a/xa ew. yiyvo/JLivrj^ at 
 dawn, daybreak ; but also of accompaniment, ot a/xa Qoavn, 
 Hdt. vi. 138, those who ivere with Thoas. Cf. Thuc. vii. 57. 
 
 II. oiiov, together with ; vSc^p ofjiov r^ tttoX^, Thuc. vii. 84, 
 water together with the mud ; OeoU 6fxov = (rvv deots, SoPH. Ai. 
 767, with the help of the gods. 
 
 III. €yyv9 (see Genitive), near. 1. When used of Place is 
 chiefly Epic, and takes a Genitive, but, in Eur. Herac. 37, a 
 Dative. 2. Of Time or Numbers, eyyi;? evLavrov, Xen. Hell. 
 iii. 1. 28, near a year. In Thuc. vi. 5, eVeo-t ey-yvs eLKoan, near 
 twenty years; ey-yvs is Adverbial, as post may be in Latin, 
 viginti post annis. 
 
 IV. €</)€^t55: to. TovTois ^ff>€^rjs, Plat., what follows. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 307 
 
 W.— PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 
 WITH ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE. 
 
 § 269. Aia. 
 
 Aia (old and poetical form hiat), hetiveen, apart, through. 
 Cf. hvo, 8i?, St%a. 
 
 A. With Genitive. 
 
 1. Of Place : 
 
 Through {right through, and out of) : 
 67ropevOr](Tav Bta XaXv^cov. Xen. 
 They marched through the country of the Chalyhes. 
 
 A II through,^ along : 
 
 Oopv/Sov Tjicovae Bta rcov rd^ecov toWo?. Xen. 
 He heard a din passing all along the ranks. 
 
 Distrihutively, intervals of space : 
 
 hia SeKa eTraX^ecov Trvpyoc r]aav. Thuc. 
 
 At every ten battlements ivere towers. 
 
 So Sta TvoXXov, Sici TrXeicTTov, St cAao-Q-ovos, at a great dis- 
 tance, greatest distance, short distance. 
 Cf. Eur. Andr. 1251 (aAXov Be' akXov). 
 
 2. Of Time : 
 
 Throughout, cf irapd with Accusative : 
 
 ravra Bo okov rev aiwvo^ fjLO)(^0ovac. Thuc. 
 2'hus throughout their ivhole life they labour. 
 
 So 8ia VVKT09, 8l ry/^lpa?, etc., Sia Travro?, 5ta tcAovs^ 
 continually ; BC oXiyov, for a little while. 
 
 Of intervals after : 
 
 eoiK6 hid TToXXov ')(povov a ecopaKevai. AriST. 
 It seems that it is a long lohile since he has seen you. 
 
 Cf Soph. Phil. 285 {^povo^ Bid ')(^p6vov, of succession in 
 time) . 
 
3o8 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Distributively : 
 
 Slol ttc/xtttou €TovSy OT SiOL TTcvTc €Ti0Vj evBTy fifth year, 
 quinto quoque anno ; Sl €tovs, 8i' eviavTov, every year, 
 year by year. 
 
 3. Causal : 
 
 The notion is that of a coming between or intervening. 
 
 The intermediate agent, through the medium of, hy the 
 agency of : 
 
 eXeye Bl ep/JLTjvecof;. Xen. 
 
 He was speaking hy means of an interpreter. 
 
 St' kavTov TTOLeiv Tt, to do a thing by oneself, all alone, i.e. 
 without the intervention of another. 
 
 Cf. ttTTO, e^. 
 
 Means or instrument. Cf. the Dative (which denotes 
 more direct means) : 
 
 •Yj Slol Ttuv oyLfioLTiov <TKk\pLs. Plat. Phaed. 83. 
 
 Examination by means of the eyesight. 
 
 Sta x€t/oos e'xeiv, XafSelv ri, to hold, to take in the hand. 
 
 Adveebial Phrases : 
 
 A great number of Adverbial phrases are formed with 8ia 
 and the Genitive. In these Sta appears to be used sometimes 
 in its local, sometimes in its causal sense. 
 
 Stot fjidxy]s Ikvai, epx^crdai (tlvl), to go to, engage in battle 
 with; 8t' e'x^pas yiyvecrOaL (tlvl), to be hostile to ; Sta 
 ^tXtas tevat {tlvl), to be friendly ivith ; Slo. Aoywv levat 
 (rtvt), to converse with ; 8i' aWias e'x^ti', ayetv (rtj/a), to 
 Iwld guilty ; 8l' opyrjs, cfivXaKrjs, olktov e'xetj/ (rtra, rt), 
 to be angry with, keep in prison, feel ]oity for. 
 
 Slot a-rojxaros c'x^^^j fj-viqfirjs, (TT€pv(av, to have on one's lips, 
 in one's memory, in the breast. 
 
 8t' opyrjs, angrily ; 8ta o-ttovS^s, hastily ; Sta /Bpax^m', 
 shortly; Sta paKpQv, at length (e.g. rovs X6yov<i 
 TToteto-^at, to speak) ; Sta rdxovs, quickly, shortly. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 309 
 
 B. With Accusative — generally denotes close con- 
 tiguity. 
 
 1. Of Place and Time : 
 
 Throughout, during : 
 
 Epic and poetical only. Cf. Aesch. Stipp. 15, Soph. 0. T. 
 867. 
 
 2. Causal : 
 
 Of the Antecedent, not the Final Cause. Of the person 
 or thing whose intervention helps towards a result. 
 
 Owing to, because of, on account of, with the help of (see 
 note). 
 
 ol A6r]valoi hi aperrjv, aW ov Bia tv^tjv eviKijaav. 
 
 ISAE. 
 The Athenians conquered through valour, not through 
 chance. 
 
 8ia TOv<s ev fxa)(^Ofx^vovs at /xa^^at KplvovTai. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 35. 
 Battles are decided by {mving to the conduct of) those who 
 fight well. 
 Cf. Soph. 0. C. 1129 {Sida-e). 
 
 Through the fault of : 
 
 Sta Tovs dSifcws TToAtrevo/xevov? Iv ry oAtya/o^t^ rj h-qfxo- 
 Kparia ytyvcrai. Lys. 25. 27. 
 
 Owing to the unjust administration of rulers in an oligarchy, 
 democracy springs up. 
 
 el fir) Bed, had it not been for, but for : 
 
 €1 fir) Slol Toi/ UpvravLV €V€Tr€(T€U av. PlAT. Gorg. 516 E. 
 Had it not been for the President he would have been thrown 
 into prison. Cf. Thuc. ii. 1 8. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 Si evSeiav, because of owing to poverty (Xen. An. viii. 6) ; 
 St' ayvoLav, Sta Kavpa, 8ta \€ipQ>va, because of ignorance, 
 heat, winter ; Sta to ^vppayovs €.1vai, because they were 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 allies. Similarly the common expressions 5ta rt, why ? 
 wherefore ? Slo. ravra, on this account^ because of this ; 
 8l 6, Si' a, on which account. 
 
 Note. For the sake of this, denoting a final cause or purpose, 
 would be TOVTOV eVcKa, not Sea ravra. 
 
 For the sake of, in order to : 
 
 A very rare use of Sid with the Accusative. It occuk^ 
 seemingly four times in Thucydides, iv. 40, St' dxOrj- 
 Sova, in order to vex ; ii. 40, Sia T-qv a-^ikrepav So^av, 
 for their own glory ; iv. 102, Sta to Trepiex^tv avT-qv, in 
 order to enclose the city; v. 103, Sid tov Ov/xaTos t-^v 
 eW/oa^iv, in order to exact the sacrifice. 
 
 Note. It is difficult sometimes to distinguish between the 
 causal uses of Std with Genitive and Sid with Accusative. It 
 is extremely difficult to account for the causal use of 8td with 
 Accusative. Consult Eiddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms for 
 instances of Sta with Accusative in Plato and the Orators, 
 meaning udth the help of. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Through, and so throughly or thoroughly, Sta/JatVto, / 
 go through ; Sta</)€7jya>, / escape thoroughly. (2) Apart, 
 Siaa-KeSdvvvfXL, I scatter asunder. 
 
 § 270. Kara. 
 
 Kara, down, opposed to dvd. Old form Karal, cf. Karai- 
 ySari;?. 
 
 A. With Genitive. 
 
 Note. PrjvaL Kara Trer/or^s originally may have meant " to go 
 downwards with regard to the rock," i.e. either down from, or 
 doum upon. 
 
 h Of Place : 
 
 Down from : 
 
 aXofievoL Kara TQ79 irirpaf;. Xen. 
 Leaping down from the rock. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 311 
 
 Down upon or over : 
 
 (pepe TToi ra'x^eco^ Kara %et/309 vScop. Arist. 
 Gome boy, quickly, pour water on my hand. 
 Cf. Lucian's late use, Kara K6pp7]<5 Trard^ac, to hox on the head, 
 for the earlier Itti K6pprj<s. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Bep. 398 a. In Soph. El. 1433 (Kar' avTcdvpiMv, 
 towards the vestibule). 
 
 Down into, and under : 
 
 rj ArXavTi'S vrj(TO<s Kara tt^s 9aXa.rrr]S ^vcra rj<f>avLcr6r). 
 
 Plat. Tim. 25. 
 The isle of Atlantis sank under the sea and disappeared. 
 
 2. Figuratively : 
 Against : 
 
 ol Kad' rjficov \6<yoi, Dem. 15. 25, arguments against 
 
 us. Cf. Soph. Phil. 65. 
 Cf. KaTrjyopco, KarajiyvcocrKco nvo*;, 'yjrevBofiaL Kara 
 Tiz/09. 
 Concerning, with respect to : 
 
 TOVTO €Lpr]TaL KaraTraa-iov tcov TToXireLiov. Ar. Pol. V. 7. 11. 
 This has been asserted of all governments. 
 So CTKOTreiv, Aeyeiv, Cl'^eiv, Kara rcvos, often in PlATO (see 
 RiDDELL, Digest, 163). 
 Phrases : 
 
 Kar' aKpas, utterly (Ep. Kar' aKprjs, a culmine) ; Kara 
 T€KV(ji)v opvvvaL, Dem., to swear by one's children; KaB' 
 oXov (later KadoXov, see Lexicon), on the whole. 
 
 B. With the Accusative, Kara denotes close 
 proximity. 
 1. Of Place : 
 
 Motion down upon or after : 
 
 ol ^AOrjvaloL Kara 7roBa<; eifkeov twv AaKeBaifiovLWv, 
 
 Xen. 
 The Athenians were sailing in the wake of the Lacedae- 
 monians. 
 
 Kara poov, down stream (cf. ava fjoov). 
 
312 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 After, in search of : 
 
 e<TK€^acr[ievoL Ka& dpTrayrjv. Xen. 
 Scattered in qioest of plunder. 
 
 Over againsty opposite : 
 
 ol AdrjvaloL Kara AaKeBat/jLOVtov<; eyevovro. Xen. 
 The Athenians were posted opposite the Lacedae- 
 monians. 
 
 Extension throughout : 
 
 7) €v\a^€ia aKOTOV €')(ei Ka& *EXXdSa. EUR. 
 Discretion is under a cloud throughout Hellas. 
 
 Kara y^Jv Kal Kara ddXacrarav, hy land and sea. 
 
 In, connected with, belonging to : 
 
 Kar' dyopdv, in the market ; al Kara to aw/xa (t^v ^vxqv) 
 €7n6vfiLai, bodily (mental) desires; ra Kara ttjv ttoXlv, 
 public affairs, politics; rd Kara tov TroX^pov, military 
 matters. 
 
 Hence Tigueatively : 
 Of fitness, according to : 
 
 KaTa vovv X€y€L<;. Plat. 
 
 Yo7i speak to my liking. 
 
 Of. Aesch. Ag., Kar' dvSpa cr(x><f>pova, like a discreet mail 
 {with a man's discretion) ; Ar. Av. 1001, Kara ttv lyia, 
 like an oven; Kara cfiva-iVj agreeably to nature (opposed 
 to irapd <f>vcrLv) ; Kara rov aKpi/Sr] Xoyov, in strict state- 
 ment ; FLAT. Ap. i., ov Kara rovrovs p'^riop, an orator 
 of a different stamp from these men ; Kara ^vpfxaxitiVy by 
 virtue of an alliance. 
 
 Especially with Comparatives : 
 
 elBev veKplv /xel^co ^ kut dvOpcoTrov. Plat. 
 
 He saw a corpse of superhuman size. 
 
 Cf. ThUC. vii. 75, /x€if(u ri Kara SdKpva TreTrov^ora?. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 313 
 
 3. Of Time : 
 ContemporarTj with : 
 
 OefiKTTOKXrjs 6 tQv Kdd^ kavTuv airdvTCJV ei/So^OTaro?. 
 
 Dem. 20. 73. 
 
 Themistocles, the most illustrious man of all his con- 
 temporaries. 
 
 01 Kara HAaTcova, Plafo and his age; Kar' apx-qv, 
 originally ; Kar* elp-jvrjv, in time of peace. 
 
 4. DiSTRIBUTIVELY : 
 
 0/ Place, Time, Money, etc., a common use : 
 KaroLKovvTat ol MrjSoi Kara K(o/jLa<;. Herod. 
 
 The Medes live in separate villages. 
 
 KaO^ 'iva, one by one ; Kara fiCav Kat Kara Svo Xa/^elv, DeM. 
 
 20. 77, to take (ships) one and two at a time; Kar' 
 
 avSpa, man by man. 
 Kad' rjfxepav (in dies), day by day ; Kara p^rjva, Kar 
 
 iviavTov. 
 Kara rots ttcvtc kuI eiKoo-t p,va<s TrevTaKoata's 8paxfia<i 
 
 €lscf)€p€iv. Dem. 815. 11. 
 
 To contribute 500 drachmas on every 25 minae. 
 
 5. Miscellaneous Phrases, many adverbial : 
 
 KaO' lavTov, Ka6' avrovs, left to themselves, i.e. alone or 
 singly ; Kara pLovas, alone ; Kara p.iKp6v, Kar' oXiyov, 
 . little by little ; Kara 8vvap.tv, to the best of one's 
 ability; to Kar epe, SO far as concerns me ; Kara ravrd, 
 in the same way ; Kar AtcrxvXov, as Aeschylus has it ; 
 Kara x^/oav, in statu quo, ^^ as you were.'' 
 Kara rd^ps, quickly ; Kara Kpdros (per vim), by force ; 
 
 Kara (nrovSijv, hastily ; Kad' 'r](rv\Lav, quietly. 
 Kara rovro, on this ground ; Kara rl ; on what ground, 
 wherefore ? Kara rrjv dcrdcvcLav, on the ground of, by 
 reason of, weakness. 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Down, Kara 13a LVio, I go down. (2) Of isolation or 
 abandonment, KaraXeiTro), I leave behind or abandon. (3) 
 Against, Karrjyopio, I accuse ; Kar ay ly vuktko), I condemn. 
 (4) All over, i.e. completely, KaraKOTrru), I chop up in 
 pieces. 
 
314 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 S 271. 'TTTep. 
 
 'TTrep (poet, viretp), above, over, beyond. Sansk. upari 
 (above), Latin super, English over, German uber. 'Trrep 
 for virepi is a Comparative of viro. 
 
 A. With the Genitive. 
 
 1. Of Place : 
 
 Over, above : 
 
 6 6eo<; eOrjKe rov tjXlov virep 7179. Plat. 
 God placed the sun above the earth. 
 
 Motion over ; • 
 
 eKKV^tarav virep rwv ^i(f)a)v. XeN. 
 To turn a somersault over the swords. 
 
 In the interior of a country : 
 
 Tjp^aTo ef AidioTrLa^; r?}? virep Aiyvirrov. Thuc. 
 It began in Aethiopia which is beyond Aegypt, i.e. 
 higher up, further inland. 
 
 2. Figuratively: 
 
 To protect, in defence of, cf. irpo : 
 
 vvv virep Trdvrcov dycov. Aesch. 
 JS^ow is the contest ifi defence of our all. 
 
 Joined with Trpo, EuR. Ale. QdO. 
 
 In the i7iterest of : 
 
 ot virkp Tov P^Xtlcttov Aeyovres. DeM. 9. 63. 
 Those ivho speak in the cause of what is best. 
 
 On account of: 
 
 Kkavfiara PpaSxJTrjros hrep. SoPH. Jnt. 932. 
 Tears as a punishment for slowness. 
 
 Instead of: 
 
 airoKplvecrOai virkp rti/os, Plat. Rep. 590, to answer for 
 one. Cf. Thuc. i. Ul, virep lavrpil 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 315 
 
 With a view to : 
 
 vTrep Tov fXT] TrparrcLV to TrposraTTOfxevov, ISOC. 152 D, in 
 order not to do what was bidden. Cf. Riddell, Digest, 
 p. 167. 
 
 B. With Accusative. Chief signification figurative, 
 beyond, i.e. in excess of. 
 
 1. Of Place : 
 Beyond : 
 
 Ta>v ovpecov rwv virep Me/jLcfuv ttoXlv Kecfjuevoov to 
 fiera^v. Hdt. 
 
 The space between the hills which lie beyo7id the city 
 of Memphis. 
 
 2. Figuratively : 
 
 In excess of : 
 
 ovfc €(ttIv VTrep avdpwirov tovto. Plat. 
 
 This is not beyond the power of man. 
 virep lATTiSa, past, beyond hope; vnep rjp^as, beyond oxir 
 power ; virlp SvvapLv, beyond one's ability. 
 
 More than : 
 
 fTrecrov virkp recrcrepaKOVTa avSpas. HeROD. V. 64. 
 
 2'here fell over more than 40 men. 
 
 3. Of Time: 
 Before : 
 
 6 TT/oos TOV AlyLvrjTiov VTTip ra M.rj8iKa Tr6Xep.ov. 
 
 Thuc. i. 41. 
 The war with the Aeginetans before the Persian wars. 
 
 As an adverb : 
 
 Very rarely ; cf. EuR. Med. 627, St. Paul ad Cor. 11. xi. 
 
 23, virep kytii. 
 
 V In Composition : 
 
 (1) Across or beyond, hence of excess or transgression ^ 
 VTrep /3a LV(D, I go beyond, I transgress, omit, surpass. (2) 
 For, in defence of, virepaXyio, I grieve for (also exceedingly) 
 as by (1); vireppaxto, I fight for. 
 
316 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 272. Mera. 
 
 Merd, With, among, between, after. Compare with avu, 
 Cf. fjLera-^u, between, /jLera^e, afterwards. Sansk. mithas 
 (alternately), mithu [together), German mit. CuRTius 
 {Etym. i. p. 258) denies the direct relationship between 
 fieWi and yaecro?. In Attic, fierd is chiefly used with the 
 Genitive. Compare with aiv. 
 
 A. With Genitive. 
 
 With, among : 
 
 7] 'ylrv'^T] ael /juera twv decop Biayec. Plat. 
 
 The soul lives for ever with the gods (in their society). 
 
 fiera ^vfifxaxiov KLvSvvevetv, Thuc. viii. 23, to run risk in 
 common with allies. 
 
 On the side of: 
 
 ovK €iKos TO T^s TV^yjs o'UcrOai det /xe^' r/xtuv ea-eadai. 
 
 Thuc. iv. 18. 
 
 It is not reasonable to suppose that the influence of fortune 
 will ever be on your side. Cf. Plat. Apol. xxii., /xera 
 
 TOV VOflOV. 
 
 Joined to : 
 
 Icrxos T€ Kol KocAAo? jUCTot vyieitt?. PlAT. Bep. 591 B. 
 Strength and beauty joined to health. 
 
 Modal, cf. avvy and Dative alone : 
 
 LK€T€V(T€ TOVS SlKaCTTttS fX€Ta. TToXXitiV 8aKpV(i}V. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xxiii. 
 He besought the judges with many tears. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 /Acra TLvo^ elvai, to be on one's side ; ot /xera rtvos, oneh 
 companions ; fier' dXrj deias, truly. 
 
 B. With Accusative (rare in Attic). 
 
 Next in order to : 
 
 fierd deov^ i^vxv Oeiorarov. Plat. Leg. 726. 
 Next to the gods the soul is most divine. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 317 
 
 Other usages of /tcra with the Accusative, going ammig, 
 going in quest or search of, according to, are chiefly Epic. For 
 them the Lexicon should be consulted. 
 
 Note 1. With the Accusative /Acra denotes either (1) motion 
 to the midst of, or (2) extension over the midst of The idiomatic 
 phrases with ficrd and Accusative will fall under one of these 
 two heads. Thus (1) fxera ravra, next to, after this (lit. going 
 into the midst of, and so succeeding, or coming next to); (2) fxW 
 ■qfikpav, interdiu, in the daytime (during, extending over the day) ; 
 IJL€Ta x€ipa<5 '^x^'-^} ^^ have in hand. 
 
 Note. 2. In Homer and in poetry /^ttra is also used with the 
 Dative to denote presence among, one among others, without 
 the close connexion denoted by the Genitive. 
 
 /xera Se T/DtraTotcrtv avao-crev, II. i. 252, he was ruler among 
 {in the presence of) the third generation. 
 
 Cf. Eur. Erechth. 26. 
 
 As an adverb : 
 
 Among, amid, next, afterwards, often in Homer. 
 
 In Herod, also afterwards, fxera 5e, w7rA«re k.t.A., i. 128. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Together with, fxerexay, I have together with or share. 
 (2) Going to, among, or extending over, or in the midst of : 
 fxeraixfJi'i-ov, the space between armies ; fieOtrjixi, I let loose 
 (among). (3) Of succession, alternation, change, fX€Ta86p- 
 TTLoq, after dinner; /-lerayt-yi/coo-KO), / change my mind; 
 fierdvoLa, repentance. 
 
 N.B. Coming among implies following some, and so suc- 
 cession and alternation. Thus if a bead is put among 
 or between others in a necklace, it comes after, and 
 alternates with, other beads. 
 
 m.—FI^EFOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 
 § 273. 'A/.(^t. 
 
 ^AfjL(j)i, on loth sides (about, around). Cf. afMcfxo, afMcpo- 
 T6/)o?. Sansk. abhi, Lat. amb, (am-, an-), amb-o, amb-io. 
 'ApL<j)L related in form to d/jL(f)c<; as e/c to ef. Compare 
 throughout with irepL. 
 
31 8 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Note. In Attic Prose a/x<^i is practically used with tlie 
 Accusative only. 
 
 A. With Accusative. 
 
 About tlu time of, cf. irepi: 
 
 7)^7) r]v dfi(j)l dyopav ir\7)6ov<rav. Xen. 
 It was now already about full market time {forenoon), 
 dficfil TrevTiJKovTa Irr;, about 50 years. 
 (Employed) about ; 
 
 d(TKov<n TOL d/jLcJH TOP iToXejJLOv. Xen. 
 They practise the arts of war. 
 
 d/i^t Tt {e.g. iTTTTOvs, apfxara^ SeiTrvov, etc.) ^X^tv, etvaiy 
 SiaTpt/iciv, etc., to engage in, set about, be concerned with 
 anything. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 ot dfjL<f>l HpuiTayopav (HXdroyva), the school of ProtagOTOS 
 
 {of Plato). The phrase (especially in later writers) 
 
 is a periphrasis for Pythagoras himself. 
 So ol d[x(f>l Sep^ea, the army of Xerxes, Herod., but ot 
 
 a/A<^t Meya/)€as /cat ^Atao-iovs (HdT. ix. 69) the 
 
 Megarians and Phliasians. 
 
 Less common uses ; 
 
 (Epic and poetical) rJA^^? dfKJn AwSwvr/v, Aesch. P. V., 
 830, thou earnest nigh {about) Dodona, cf.- 419 ; ficpifjiva 8' 
 dp.4>\ tvoXlv, Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 843 {care about the 
 city). 
 
 B. With Genitive (the uses are very rare and wholly 
 Epic, Ionic, and Poetic). 
 
 Concerning, cf. Trepl : 
 
 dfjLcfil o-rjs Aeyw TraiSo's, EuR. Hec. 580 (/ tell thee of thy 
 child). Cf. Soph. Phil. 554. Aesch. Ag. 67, dp4>l 
 yvi'atKos {in the cause of). 
 
 Round about : 
 
 HdT. viii. 131 {afx^l TToAios oIk€ov(ti). 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 319 
 
 C. With Dative (wholly Epic, Ionic, and Poetic). 
 
 Among : 
 
 (^aificfn kXolSols e^o/x€va, EuR. Phoen. 1518 (seated among 
 branches). 
 
 Concerning : 
 
 d/x^' ijjLol cTTevets, SoPH. El. 1180 (thou sighest for, about 
 me). 
 
 Phrases, cf. Trept : 
 
 dfi<fil Tap/Set ((fi6p(^), prae pavore, for fear. In poetry. 
 As an adverb, on either side. Homeric use. 
 
 § 274. 'Etti. 
 
 'EttI, on the surface of, upon, by, to. Cf. eVe/, then. 
 Sansk. ajpi, further, after, Lat. ob. See airo. 
 
 A. With Genitive. 
 
 1. Of Place: 
 
 Upon, with verbs of rest : 
 
 7ra<? b T 67rl yrj<i koI vtto 7779 '■^pvao^. Plat. 
 All the gold on earth and under the earth. 
 So ec/)^ liTTTov, very often. 
 
 With verbs of motio7i : 
 
 eTrefjuylrav auTOv<; eirl Tptripov<i. Xen. 
 They sent them away on board a trireme. 
 
 And in Constructio Praegnans, dva^rjvai eirl irvpycou, 
 Xen., to climb up, and be on towers. 
 
 Towards (a common use) : 
 
 ol ^vfifia^oi av6')(^odprj(Tav eir olkou. Thuc. 
 The allies returned homewards. 
 Cf. i. 60, eirl OpaKrj^. 
 
320 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 In, b(/, near, at : 
 
 €7ri v-qo-ov, in the island ; y?* cttJ Jev7;s (SoPH. O.C.),ina 
 foreign land ; h dyopa cttI riou rpaire^iov, PlAT. Ap. 1, 
 in the market at (by) the tables of the banks ; kirl St- 
 Kao-T-qpLov, IsAE., in court. 
 
 Ttt cVt QpaKTjs, Thuc. (see Poppo and Kriiger) {the parts 
 in) the neighbourhood or the district of Thrace or Thrace- 
 wards. So €7rt T^? AaKwi/tK^S, V. 34. eVt ttJ? avTWv 
 juei/etv, ^0 remain in their oivn country, Thuc. iv. 118. 
 
 In presence of, coram. Cf. irapa. 
 
 k^eXkyyj^arOai kirl Travnav. DeM. 781. 4. 
 To be convicted in presence of all. 
 
 2. Of Time (very common) : 
 
 IttI Kvpov fiaaiXevovTo^, in the reign of Cyrus ; eVt 
 G€jjbi(TT0K\60V(; apy^ovTC^, in the archonship of 
 Themistocles ; eirl rcov irarepcov, in the time of our 
 fathers ; eir ejjiov, in my time ; w? eirl klvBvi'ov, 
 as in time of danger (Thuc. vi. 34). 
 
 3. Figuratively: 
 
 Set over, engaged in : 
 
 €/l€V€V eiTL Tt}? CUpX^^' ^EN. 
 
 He was continuing in command. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 So fiiveiv kivL Ttvos, to abide by a thing ; kirX rcov irpayixd- 
 T(i)v (rov TToXefxov) elvac, to be engaged in business, 
 in war; Itti yi/w/^i^s yiyv^crdai, to come to an opinion, 
 Dem. 42. 4. 
 
 6 €7rt Ttov oTrXtTwv (ottAcov), i-rrl r(Zv iTnreiov, the commander 
 of the infantry, cavalry ; 6 kirl t'^s 6iotK>ja-ea)s, the con- 
 troller of the treasury, paymaster-general. 
 
 Resting, dependent upon, e^' eavrov, etc. : 
 
 e<^' kavTov, of or by oneself, independently or separately, 
 spontaneously, is a common phrase ; i^' kavrov irXelv, 
 Thuc, to sail by oneself or alone; i(}>' eavrov otKdv, 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 321 
 
 Xen., to live apart, separately ; i<f> vfxioi' avTiov pdX- 
 Xea-Oat, Hdt., to consider by yourselves ; t^' Icovtwi/ Std- 
 Xkyovrat, Hdt., they speak a language or dialect oj their 
 own, a distinct dialect ; i-rr' dyKvpem', at anchor, Hdt. 
 i. 188. 
 
 In the case of : 
 
 With Aeyw, ala-ddvofiai, ctkotto) (/ examine or consider), 
 KpLvo), I decide or judge. 
 
 d iirl Twv dXX.o)V opdre, rarr' e^' v/xojv avrwi/ dyvnetrc. 
 
 Is. viii. 114. 
 
 WTiat you see in {the case of) others, that you are ignorant 
 of in your oivn case. 
 
 So ctt' e/xov Aeyeii/, Plat. Rep. 475, to speak in my own 
 case, to take myself as an instance ; iTrl 7rdvT0)v 6/xotws, 
 in all cases alike. 
 
 Called after : 
 
 KeKXTJcrdac, ovofJiacrOrjvai kiri tlvo^ (HdT.), to be namsd 
 after a person; 17 ilpi^vr] rj iirl 'AvraXKiSov, Dem., the 
 peace of Antalcidas. 
 
 iiTL ovoixaros elvac, to bear a name, Dem. 1000. 21. 
 
 Military phrases ; 
 
 €Ta\6ri(Tav irrl Terrdp^v. XeN. An. i. 2. 15. 
 They were drawn up four deep. 
 Generally of the depth, sometimes of the length, of a line. 
 €7rl TrevTT^KovTa dcnrtSajv (TVV€(TTpa{Mfx€voi. 
 
 Xen. Hell. vi. 4. 12. 
 Massed in column fifty shields deep. 
 TO fX€T(i}Trov €7rl TptaKoa-'niiV, TO Se fSddos e<^' eKUTOv. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 2. 
 The length of the line was four hundred, its depth one hundred. 
 
 i<fi' €v6<s, in single file; evr' oA,6ywi/ Tda-a-ea-OaL, to be drawn 
 up in a long line (or a shallow column) (Xen. and 
 Thug.). 
 
 irXciv €7ri K€p<i)<s (cf. Accus.), to sail in column (towards the 
 wing), {Kara /xtav eVt Kepws, Thuc. ii. 19, in single file). 
 X 
 
322 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Miscellaneous 'phrases : 
 
 CTTt TOV €V(i)VVfXOV, €776 TiaU TtAcI'/OWJ/, 071 the left, OU thc 
 
 flanks. 
 €7rt TTuvroiv, Dem., on all occasions; 6<^* Ikcco-tov, Plat., 
 
 on each occasion. 
 €Trl reXevTTJ?, at last; ctti axo^^-rj";, at leisure, leisurely; 
 
 ctt' L(Tr]S, equally (SoPH. Ul. 1061) ; e-nrl Trpocfidcrio'S, 
 
 Hdt., as a pretext ; eVi opKov, on oath (Hdt. ix. 11) ; 
 
 cTTt irposTToXov fitois, dependent on one handmaid. Soph. 
 
 0. a 746. 
 
 B. With the Dative. 
 
 [The uses should be compared with those of the Genitive. 
 They often run closely parallel. 'Etti with Dative, meaning 
 upon, is commoner in Prose than with the Genitive; the poets 
 use both cases indifferently. 'Etti with the Dative implies 
 closer connection than Itti with Genitive.] 
 
 1. Of Place : 
 
 '' Over, on : 
 
 01 0paK€<; aX(OTreKiha<; eirt ral^ K€<j}a\at<; (j)opovcru 
 
 Xen. 
 The Thracians wear fox-shin caps {fitted to) on their 
 heads. Cf. EuR. Bacch. 757. 
 N.B. e<^' iW<f) must not be used for €(/>' tWov. 
 Tovs OTrXiras ctti vavorXv oAtyats ev6v<i TrefXTrovcnv. 
 
 Thug. ii. 80 (cf. iv. 10). 
 They at once despatch the hoplites in {on hoard) a few ships. 
 
 Against : 
 
 at V7J€<s i<ji rjfiLv Teraxarat. ThUC. iii. 13 (cf. iv. 70). 
 The ships are drawn up against us. 
 Cf. Soph. Ai. 51, ctt' opfxaa-i fSdXXetv (Constr. Praegn.). 
 
 -' In, at, near, hy : 
 
 oLKeovT€<; 67rl Xrpvfiovi, Hdt., living on the shores 
 of, or near, the Strymon. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALI THREE CASES. 323 
 
 ot Twv dptcTTWV IIe/3(ra)v 7ra?8e? €7rt rats fSacnXcios dvpais 
 
 TraLSevovTai. XeN. ^?l. i. 9. 3. 
 The so7is of the noblest Persians are brought up at (close by) 
 
 the king's gate (at the " Sublime Porte "). 
 Cf. Soph. Tr. 1100, Phil 353. 
 
 Next after : 
 
 ra €7rc Tourot?, the next step. 
 Cf. HoM. Od. vii. 216, ov yap n arvyepr) enru yaarepL 
 KvvTepov aXko, naught more blatant next to (than) the belly. 
 ot Itti TracTLv, the rear; oXiyoi twv eirt TtaxTiv vtto twv 
 xpiXdv airkOavov, few of the rear were slain by the light- 
 armed, Xen. Hell. i. 1. 34. 
 
 2. Of Time (rarely) : 
 
 Generally of succession, after, or following : 
 
 €KTrj eiri SeKarrj or rrj eKry eirl ScKa. 
 
 Dem. 279. 18, 288. 29. 
 On the 1 Qth of the month (sixth after the tenth). 
 
 Near, about (very rare in Attic) : 
 
 ^v ^A.tos €7rt Sva-fxais. Xen. An. vii. 3. 34. 
 
 It was near sunset (the sun was at his setting). 
 
 3. Figuratively : 
 
 Set over and actively engaged in : 
 
 rovs €7rt roL<s Trpdyfxacnv ovras aiTtcoi/rat. DeM. 
 They accuse those who are engaged in public affairs. 
 So ot iirl rats p.'qxavalq, €7rt rots KafxrjXoLs, XeN., those in 
 guard of the engines, the cctmels, etc. 
 
 Generally at, in, of circumstances : 
 
 iirl Tw TrapovTi, Thuc. ii. 36, on the present occasion (to 
 speak) ; errt tw SetVi/o), Xen., at supper. 
 
 With : (by no means an infrequent use). 
 
 Cf. Eur. Bacch., iir' evda-fjiaa-L, withjoyous shouts (cf. 1368). 
 Cf. also Soph. Ant. 556, ctt' app-qrok Xoyots, with woi'ds 
 unspoken, i-n-^ i^etpyacrixevots, when a deed is done and 
 over, Aesch. Ag. 1379, Soph. Ai. 377, Eur. Bacch. 
 1039. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 324 
 
 In reference to, in case of, connected with : 
 
 v6aov TiSkva, k^i tlvi, Plat., to make a law for, in the 
 case of, a person (for or against him) ; so vo/xos K^trai 
 
 €7rt TLVl, DEM. 
 
 T^ iTvl T$ o-ti/xart Kc[AXo9, Plat., leauty of person. 
 Upon, i.e. accumulated on, added to : 
 
 ^T^fjLara eirl -K'n^aaiv nriiTTOVTa. SoPH. Ant. 595. 
 
 Woes falling on woes. 
 
 So eirl TouTot?, thereupon, on this, very frequently 
 
 in Attic. 
 Hence probably phrases connected with meals : tji t(? 
 o-iTi^ TTLveiv v8(op, Xen., ^0 drink water with ones food. 
 
 Dependent upon, in power of with elfii, and ylyvoiJ,aL : 
 
 el eirl rot? 7ro\efiloi<; eyevovro t/ av e'TraOov ; 
 
 Xen. An. v. 8. 17. 
 If they had fallen into the hands of the enemy, what 
 
 wcndd have been their fate ? 
 TO €7r' ifioL,To €7ri (TOL, SO far tts lu my, thy, power. 
 Cf. Ace. TO cTTt (Tcfias etvau 
 
 (Be named) after, on the ground of : 
 
 iwl rfi ixOpq. o-rao-is KUXrjrac, Plat. Bep. 470, see Stall- 
 baum and references there, sedition is so called from, 
 hatred. 
 
 Causal, with words of emotion, at, for, because of: 
 
 eiri TiVi fiaXtara dydXkr) ; XeN. 
 In what do you most take delight ? 
 
 So with x^^pwj ^ rejoice ; aefivvvofiai, I pride myself; 
 Sva-x^patvoi, I am vexed, etc., and corresponding adjec- 
 tives, and substantives such as cVatvos, cfaXorifXia, etc. 
 
 So (r)fj.Lov(rOaL IttI Ttvt, Dem., to he fined for a thing. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES, 325 
 
 Condition : 
 
 eirt TOVTO) vTre^LdrafMai Trj<; ap')(fj<;. HeroD. 
 On this condition I resign my command. 
 
 So very often eVt Tovr(:^, eVt Tovroi'i, k(j) <^ (re), Itt' ov^kvi, 
 IttI Tots elprjuevoLs, on the conditions expressed. 
 
 Motive : 
 
 -xlrevSerai, re Kai ein ry e/jurj Bta/Sdky Xeyec. 
 
 Plat. Apol. v. 
 
 He is lying, and is speaking with a view to prejudice 
 you against me. 
 
 €7ri KaKovpyi(^ Tiiuc. i. 37, for knavish purposes ; ovk iirl 
 v^pL^€crdaL dW iirl tw rjycpovcs etVat, ThUC. i. 38, not 
 in order to be insulted, but in m'der to be rulers ; lirl t^ 
 K€p8€i, Xen. for gain ; kirl o-o^ta, to get wisdom, Plat. 
 
 N.B. In Plat. Prot. 358 b, with Gen., kirX toO aAvTrws 
 ^r^v, with a view to living a painless life ; Liddell and 
 Scott. 
 
 The reward or price : 
 
 ^vyyevea-6aL ^Op-qpia eirl 7r6cr(p (sc. /xtcr^o>) av ns Be^aLTO ; 
 
 Plat. Apol. xxxii. 
 For what price would any of you be willing to meet Homer? 
 So €7rt Spaxpfj 8av€L^€iv, Dem. 816. 12. 
 To lend money at twelve per cent. See Diet, of Antiq. 
 eVt dv8pa7r68oi<s Bavei^CLV. DeM. 822. 8. 
 To lend money on the security of slaves (i.e. to hold a mort- 
 gage on the slaves). 
 
 .' Phrases : 
 
 Aeyetv eVt rtvt, to speak in any ons's praise {perhaps over 
 the body of). Aesch. Ag. 1400. 
 
 C. With Accusative (1) Direction to, or (2) Extension 
 over. 
 
 Direction : 
 
 Upon : 
 
 Bel ava^TjvaL evrt rev iTrirov. Xen. 
 He must mount {on) his horse. 
 
3-6 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 To: 
 
 7rpOTpe7r€T€ TOVS V€(aT€pOVS Itt' dp€TT}V. IS. 3. 57. 
 
 Urge the younger to {the pursuit of) virtue. 
 As far as : 
 
 V ^PXl V '08pva-(ov €7ri OdXacrcrav Kad-qKct, ThUC. ii 97. 
 The kingdom of the Odrysae stretches as far as the sea. 
 (See Phrases.) 
 
 Against : 
 
 ovK eLKOf} ap')(r)V eirt ap'^rjv arparevoraL. Thuc. 
 It is not likely that empire will advance against 
 empire. 
 
 For, for purpose of : 
 
 eifKeov ov^ «9 eirl vavfia'^iav. Thuc. 
 They were sailing not as though for the purpose 
 of a sea-fight. 
 
 To fetch: 
 
 TrefXTTOvcrLV gttI ArjjxocrOevrjv kol Itti tols eiKocn vav<s. 
 
 Thuc. iii. 105. 
 
 They send for Demosthenes and for the twenty ships. 
 So KaXelv eirl SeiTTvoi/, to summon to supper. 
 Extension : 
 
 Over, in space or time : 
 
 TO ofip.a Bvvarai, eiri iroWa ardhia e^c/c'veccrOaL, Xen. 
 The eye {sight) can reach over many stades. 
 eOvero eirl rpei^ r]fjL€pa<;. Xen. 
 He was sacrificing for the space of three days. 
 Phrases : (1) Direction. 
 
 cTTi Trdv kXOcLv, to come to an extremity, try every means ; 
 cTTi TO /A€t^ov KO(rfji€Lv, to cxaggcratc (he extravagant in 
 embellishing), Thuc. i. 21. (Cf. viii. 74.) 
 
 To produce (of a purpose) : 
 
 i-rrl rd ycAoiorepa, PlAT., to raise a laugh. So Itti rd 
 al(T\iova (KaAAtcu, to /SeXriov, to a/Aetvov), changing 
 to, resulting in, something worse (better, etc.). 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 327 
 
 TO eiTL : 
 
 TO €7rt Tiva, tovtt' e/x€, rovTrt trc, TV'fl^p'., as regards me, thee ; 
 TO €7rt o-</)as eo/at, Thuc. iv. 28, SO far as regards them. 
 
 Military Phrases : 
 
 67rt 86pv avacrTpk\pai, to face to the spear (tJie right) ; kir 
 ao-TTiSa ava(TTpkypai, to face to the shield {the left) ; kiri 
 TToSa avaxw/Detv, to retire on the foot {with the face to the 
 enemy) ; evrt Kc/oas ttAciv, to sail towards or on the wing 
 {in column). Cf. Gen. 
 
 cTTt Se^ta, €7r' dpLo-repd, to the right, to the left; ctti rdSe, 
 on this side; ctt' a/x<^oT€/)a, both ways; kir' cKelva 
 {kireKelva), on the yonder side, beyond, ultra ; Itti to. erepa, 
 €7rl ddrepa, on the other side. 
 
 Phrases : (2) Extension. 
 
 Up to, as far as to : 
 
 cTTt SirjKoa-La aTToStSovat, to yield two hundred fold, Hdt. i. 
 193 ; €^' ocrov Set, SO far as is necessary ; iirl a-puKpov, Itti 
 f3pa)(v, €7r' oXiyov, iirl ttXgov, etc., to a slight, to a greater 
 extent, a little way, etc. 
 
 iirl TToXv {iimrokv), over a large extent or space ; iirl 
 TrXda-Tov dv6p(o7ro)v {extending to or over) the greater 
 part of mankindj Thug. i. 1. Cf. eirl ttAcicttov 6/xiAov, 
 ii. 34. 
 
 cTTt TO TToXv, for thc most part, Aristot. 
 
 Time : 
 
 errl ttoXvv \p6vov, for a long time ; kizl xpovov Tivd, kir\ 
 Tpk, Act. Ap. X. 16. See Liddell and Scott, rpts and 
 e<s rpcs. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Upon, over, cTrtKct^ai, I lie upon; eimrXko), I sail over ; 
 cTToixo/Aat, / go over, survey. (2) TOy i.e. for, iTrivevw, 
 I nod assent to. (3) To, i.e. against, kiria-TpaTivto, I 
 march against. (4) In addition, cTnSiSojfXL, I give in 
 addition; kTrlrpiTos, with a third added to one, i.e. l;g^. 
 (5) Causally, over, at, kinxaipii), I rejoice at. (6) Of 
 time, after, kinytyvoiiaL, I am born after, succeed. (7) 
 From the joint notion of advancing and addition such 
 words as kinyafiLa, right of intermarriage ; cf. kTrivofxia, 
 eTrepyaata. 
 
328 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 275* Hapd. 
 
 TJapd {irapal, 'irdp), hy the side of, to the side of (the 
 primitive notion being that of going through or crossing). 
 Sansk. para, away and towards, Lat. per, Eng. frorifi (Goth. 
 fra, fram). Tlapd and irepi are related forms from the 
 root PAE, to fare or go through. 
 
 A. With Genitive/ coming or proceeding from (but 
 originally aside, at the side, or sideways from). 
 
 Coming from : 
 
 e^ekOelv irapa tlvo^, to come from a person's house, 
 or country, or court. 
 
 yiyvicrdai irapd tlvos, Pl. Symp. 179 B, to be hom of or 
 
 sprung from. 
 exeiv TTapd tlvos (DeM.), to receive from ; p^avddvuv irapd 
 
 (Eur.), to learn from. 
 
 The Agent with passive verbs : 
 
 TTapd TLVOS StSoa-Oai, XeyecrdaL, crvp/3ovXjevecrdaL, to be given, 
 
 said, advised by any one. 
 
 Periphrastically for the Genitive, etc. : 
 
 ai irapd rdv 8i^p(j)v Siopeai. DeM. 20. 15.' 
 The gifts of democracies. 
 
 So 97 irapd TLVOS cvvoLa, to irap kpov dSLKrjpa (the wrong 
 done by me), Xen. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 ot irapd Tivos, one's friends, dependants, messengers, etc., 
 IHUC. and Xen. ; to, irapd TLVOS, one^s commands, 
 purposes, opinions ; irap' kavTov StSoVat, to give of one's 
 resources, or spontaneously; Tra/o' c/xou, Pl. Prot. 322 D, 
 by my advice. 
 
 1 The Genitive with Trapd appears to represent the Ablative ; thus 
 wapaxc^peiv rov ^TJfiaTos would first have meant to move sideways from 
 the tribune. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 329 
 
 B. With Dative, by the side of, near, by, with. (Of 
 persons, seldom of places, irapd aoi, at your side) 
 
 Among, with : 
 
 irap vjMv 6Tpd(j)rjv, Aeschin., T was brought up among 
 
 you. 
 KaraXveLv irapd rcvi, Dem., to lodge with any one, 
 
 chez quelqu'un. 
 
 Belonging to : 
 
 TO fiev ^pva-iov Trapa TOVT(p, ot Se klv8vvoi Trap vpiv. 
 
 Aeschin. iii. 240. 
 This man gets the gold, you the dangers. 
 
 In presence of: 
 
 (.Is KpicTiv KadicndvaL tlvol irapd Ttvt. ThUC, DeM. 
 To bring any one to trial before another. 
 
 In the judgment of: 
 
 Trapa tol<s (jipovovanv ev^oKipeiv. Is. 9. 74. 
 
 To be in good repute with sensible people. 
 
 So Trap l/xoi, me iudice. Trapd a-avT<^, PlAT. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 ot Trap' kpoi {ri}uv)^ my OWn people; TO. Trap* epot, my 
 affairs. 
 
 1. Motion to (with per- 
 sons, Trapd cre, to your 
 side), with verbs of 
 motion. 
 
 C. With the Accusative : 
 
 2. Motion or extension 
 alongside, with verbs of 
 rest. 
 
 3. Parallelism and com- 
 parison, side by side, 
 
 ^ figuratively. 
 
330 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 I. Of Place : 
 
 1. Motion to : 
 
 eTre/juyfrav Trap* *A6rjvacov<; irpea^ec^. ThuC 
 They sent envoys to the Athenians, 
 ela-uvat, c^oirav irapd Ttva, to enter, go to any one's house. 
 Cf. Genitive and Dative. 
 
 2. Extension along or beside : 
 
 rj irapa Oakaaaav MaKeSovia. Thuc. 
 The seaboard of Macedonia. Cf. Xex. A71. iii. 5. 1, 
 Soph. £'/. 183. 
 
 3. Parallelism and Comparison : 
 
 Side hy side (with verbs of examining) : 
 Trap' a\Xr]\a earai ^avepwrara. Dem. 
 Set side hy side they will he most conspiciions. 
 Trap' ofxfxa, before one's eyes, EuR. Siipp. 484. 
 
 Compared with (often implying superiority) : 
 
 fieydXr) poTrrj rj rvxrj irapd irdvra rd rdv dvdpiOTnov 
 irpdyfiara. DeM. 2. 22. 
 
 Fortune is a mighty makeweight compared zvith all human 
 influences. Cf. Xen. AiM. i. 4. 14 (so used especially 
 with comparatives). 
 
 Beyond and contrary to, opposed to Kara : 
 
 Many phrases: Trapd SvvafiLv, beyond one's' strength. 
 Tvapd TO SiKatov, ras cnrovSds, tovs v6p.ovs, (fivcnv, yva>fJiy]v, 
 86 ^av (Aoyov), contrary to, or in violation of , justice, the 
 treaty, the laws, nature, opinion, expectation (praeter 
 opinionem, spem). 
 Note. Several peculiar and much debated constructions 
 occur with irapd and the Accusative. 
 
 Causal : 
 
 Owing to, in consequence of, cf. hud with Accusative. 
 
 (iKa(TTO<s ov Trapd rrjv eavrov dfieXeLav o'Urai ^Xaxpecv rrjv 
 ttoXlv, Thuc. i. 141, each man imagines that he ivill not 
 in consequence of his own neglect injure the state. Cf . 
 Dem. Phil. i. 41, Trapd rrjV kavTOv piojJLTjv. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 331 
 Besides, in addition to : 
 
 ovK ecTTi irapa ravr aAAa, ArIST. Nub. 698, there's 
 nothing else besides this; irapa ravTa Travra erepov ti, 
 Pl. Phaed. xix,, besides all this something quite different ; 
 TrXrjyrj irapa irXrjyrjv, Ar. Ran. 643, blow foT blow (im- 
 plying alternation). 
 
 11. Of Time : 
 
 During : 
 
 Tov BoXlov avhpa (f)evye irap oKov tov ^lov. 
 
 Menand. 
 
 Avoid a cunning man thy whole life long. 
 
 So Trapa Trdvra tov yjpovov, irapa irorov, AeSCHIN., inter 
 potandum. Cf. Lat. per totam vitam. 
 
 At the moment of : 
 
 irapa tolovtov Kaipov, DeM., at SUch a moment ; Trap' avTO, 
 TaStKij/zara, Dem. 21. 26, at the very m^oment of the 
 wrong-doing, flagrante delicto. Cf. ctt' avTo<\>u)pio, in 
 the very aci^ 
 
 Note 1. Trap' rj/x€pav is generally taken to mean on each alternate 
 day. See Soph. Ai. 475. Lobeck and Jebb consider that it 
 rather means day by day, as each day comes. The phrase occurs 
 in Dem. viii. 70. In Soph. 0. C. 1455, irap' ^p.ap avOts appears 
 to mean on the following day. irapa fxrjva rpirov, Aristot., every 
 third month. 
 
 Note 2. irapa (motion to), in certain phrases denoting the limit 
 reached, is used of excess or defect, and so describes the differ- 
 ence of two things. 
 
 irapa to(tovtov rj MvTLXtjvr) r\\6e klv^vvov. ThUC. iii. 49. 
 
 Mitylene came within such a distance of danger. 
 
 Cf. Thug. vii. 2, vi. 37 (irapa roa-ovrov yiyvwa-KU), SO much 
 within the mark is my opinion) ; iv. 106, irapa vvKra iyivero 
 Xafiietv, came within a night of taking, i.e. one night only stood in 
 the way of taking. 
 
 To this construction belong a great many phrases, e.g. irapa 
 jXiKpov, TToAv, oXiyov, f^pa^v kXdelv, yevecrOai, diro<f)€vy€Lv, vlkolv, 
 to come vnthin a little, to have a narrow etc. escape, to loin a narrow 
 
332 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 or a hollow victory. Similarly Tra/a' ovUv, ficKpov, oXiyoy Troieto-^at, 
 ay€iv^ dea-dai, etvai, to hold of no, little, account, be of little account. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Alongside, Trapia-rrjfiL, I set alongside; Trapaf^dWofiai, 
 I expose or stake ; TrapdXX-qXos, beside one another. Hence 
 (2) of alternation, irapaXXda-crw, I make alternate. (3) 
 Aside, beside the mark, amiss, Trapa/Saivo), I transgress. 
 
 §276. TIepL 
 
 Uepl, round about, beyond, over, very (cf. adverbial use). 
 Cf. TTepi-^, round about; Trepiaao^, excessive; — irep, how- 
 ever much. Sansk. pari, round about, Lat. per{magnus). 
 See irapa. 
 
 Compare throughout with a/xc^t. 
 
 A. With Genitive. 
 
 In prose the meanings are figurative : the local use is Epic 
 and poetical (cf. Eur. Tro. 818). 
 
 The Object for or about which : 
 
 aycovc^ecrOe 7ravT6<; irepL aperrj';. Xen. 
 Strive all of you after excellence. 
 
 So 6 dyiov (o KLvSvvos, etc.) Trepl ^u^^s (irepl twv /zeywrTwv) 
 eo-Tt, the struggle is for life (for the highest objects). 
 
 With verbs of caring, thinking, fearing, etc. : 
 
 fiiXei fJLOL, ^ovXivoixaL, cfioPovfiac irepc tlvos, I care etc. for 
 a thing. 
 
 Also of saying and hearing : 
 
 dyykXXu), Acyw, aKovo), pkp.vrip.ai irepi Ttvo?. 
 
 The use of these verbs with Trept should be compared 
 with the use of the simple Genitive in Epic and in Poetry. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 €p.7r€Lp(iis €X€tv TTepc Ttvos, Aeschin., to be experienced in a 
 thing. (Cf. Xen. An. vi. 2. 1. Genitive without Trepi) 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. Z2>Z 
 
 Periphrastically : 
 
 at irepi '^HpuKXeovs Trpd^ets, Plat., the deeds of Heracles. 
 
 TTOLetcrOaLj r^yeicrOai tl rrepl iroXXov (a-pLLKpov, ovSevo?, 
 TravTos), to esteem a thing highly, etc. Tre/at here contains 
 the old meaning beyond, cf. ireptyLyvofxaL, I get beyond, 
 i.e. / surpass, excel. 
 
 B. With Dative. 
 
 Comparatively rare in Prose : in a local sense the Dative 
 denotes a closer connexion than the Genitive, cf. eVt ■y\^ith 
 Genitive and Dative. 
 
 Close round, around and upon ; the literal meaning leads 
 on to the figurative : 
 
 eZSe irepl rr} ')(eipL rov veKpov '^pvaovv BaKrvXtov. 
 
 Plat. 
 He saw round the finger of the corpse a golden ring. 
 
 A good example in Xen. An. vii. 4. 4, -jrepl rot? o-repvots, etc. 
 KCLTai 8e veKpos Trepl veKpo). SoPH. Ant. 1244. 
 He lieth dead, clasping close the dead. 
 
 Transfixed hy a weapon : 
 Common in Homer (so a/^c^i, Od. xii. 395). 
 
 TrcTTTwra rwSe 7re/)t veoppdvTi^ ^t(f)€L. SOPH. Ai. 828. 
 
 Fallen upon this new-reeking sword. 
 
 The Object about which, very rare in Prose (cf. Gen.) : 
 
 Tr€p\ rrj StKcAtci eo-rat 6 dy(ov. ThUC. vi. 34. 
 The struggle will be for Sicily. 
 See Poppo. 
 
 Trepl T$ X^P*V eSeto-ai/. ThUC. i. 67. 
 
 They feared for (about) the place. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Prot. 314 a, Trepi rots (^lArarots: Phaed. 114 D, 
 
 Trept T^ (Tio/MaTL. 
 
 The cause (poetical). Cf. ayLt(/)/ ; 
 
 Trepl 4>6l3o}, Trepl TapfieL, irepl x^pp-art. (In Poetry.) 
 For fear, for terror, for joy. 
 
334 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 C. With Accusative. 
 [Motion round about, Epic] 
 
 1. Op Place, the literal meaning sometimes running into 
 
 the Figurative : 
 
 Rest round about, near, at, by, in : 
 
 01 ecfyrfffoc KOLjJbwvraL irepL ra ap'^eta, XeN". 
 The Ephebi sleep by (in the neighbourhood of) the 
 town-hall. 
 
 Koi T^<j K€c{)aXrj<s /careaye ttc/oc XWov Trecrwif. 
 
 Ar. Ach. 1180. 
 And he fell on a stone and has cracked his crown. 
 
 Cf. DeM. 21. 4, irepl avrd Karappelv. 
 
 Fall in ruins (lit. about themselves). 
 So ThUC. vii. 23, Trcpl dkXrjXas rapayOeurai. 
 Cf. the Dative, irepi ^i<f>€i, etc. 
 
 rj irepl Aco-^oi/ vavpaxioL. XeN. Hell ii. 3. 22. 
 The sea-fight off Lesbos. 
 
 2. Time: 
 
 About or near, vnth numbers : 
 
 TjSrf r]v Trepl irXriOovaav dyopdv. Xen. 
 It was now near full-market hour. 
 
 So irepl Tovrovs rov<s \p6vovs. ThUC. 
 About this period, or time. 
 irept l/SSop-JKovra, Thuc. i. 54, about seventy. 
 
 3. Figuratively : 
 
 Be busied abo^it, engaged in. Cf. a/x<^/ .• 
 
 With etVat, yiyvea-dai, SiaTpLJSeLV, cnrovSd^eLV. 
 
 ovTL avTi^ Trepl ravra 6 E^/av/xeSwv aTravT^. ThUC. vii. 31. 
 
 ff^hile lie was engaged in this Eurymedon m.et him. 
 
 See Phrases below. 
 
 Towards, i.e. with reference to : 
 
 Trepl Tov deov acre/Jo vo-t v. AntIPH. 
 They are impious with regard to {in their dealings with, or 
 duty towards) the god. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 335 
 With YerU : 
 
 So evcre^etv ^ 
 
 aaapTOLVCLV ( , 
 
 JL - >xept Tivtt, or ri. 
 
 (TlO(ppOV€LV I ^ ' 
 
 (nrov8a.^€LV ) 
 
 With Adjectives : 
 
 ayatfo<Sf >7rcpi n . > m trie matter of . 
 
 dyaOos Trepl ttjv ttoXlv. 
 ' Good as regards the state, i.e. a patriotic citizen. 
 
 With Substantives, Periphrasis for Genitive or Adjective : 
 
 ol vofioi ot irepl tov<s ydfxovs, PlAT. Crito, 50 D, the laws 
 which relate to marriage, marriage laws ; ol tr^pl Ava-iav 
 Xoyoi, Plat. Phaedr. 279 A, the speeches of Lysias ; y 
 irepl ^iXnnrov rvpavvk, Xen. Hell. V. 4. 2, Philip's 
 despotism ; rot ir^pX ras vavs, Thuc. i. 3, naval affairs ; 
 rd Trepl Kvpov, Hdt. i. 95, the deeds or history of Cyrus. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 ot TTepi TLva, a person's retinue or suite ; ol Trcpl 'H/oa/cAcirov, 
 Plat., the school of Heracleitus ; ol rrepl 'Apx^av rroAe/x- 
 apxot, Xen., Archias and his fellow-polemarchs. 
 'Ot Trepl fxov(TiK'qv, <f>tko(ro<pLav, ttjv TroLfja-LVj tov<s Xoyovs 
 
 OVT€S. 
 
 Those engaged in music, philosophy, poetry, oratory ; musi- 
 cians, philosophers, poets, orators. 
 
 6 nepl rbv tWov. XeN. 
 The groom. 
 
 Trepi, after its case (Anastrophe), is found in Thuc. and 
 Plat. Once in Plato, Leg. 809 e, it is put far from its case, 
 something like a German separable particle. (See Liddell and 
 Scott.) 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 Around, beyond, exceedingly, Trept/^aAAw, I put around; 
 TrepiTTLTrro), I fall around, embrace, fall foul of, into ; irepi- 
 yiyvoixai, I get beyond, excel, survive, escape; irepLxapi^s, 
 exceedingly glad. 
 
336 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 277. Iip6<;. 
 
 npo^ (Ep. and Dor. tt/jot/, ttot/), toivards, to, in front 
 of, before, opposite, beside. Sansk. prati, towards, Eng. 
 forth-with. Upo-TL is formed from irpo. 
 Cf. 7rp6cr-$€v, in front. 
 
 A. With Genitive/ generally of direction towards, or 
 with reference to, without implied motion. 
 Towards : 
 In presence or in sight of : 
 
 o n BtKatov ean kol 7rpo<; Oewv icai 7rpo<; avOpwircdv. 
 
 Xen. 
 Whatever is right in the sight of gods and men. 
 
 TO 7rpo<; ^LKVwvo<^ rel^o^ e^erelx^aav. Xen. 
 They completed the wall which faced Sicyon. 
 
 A very common usage in prose and poetry (the verb, such 
 as flvai or Kda-dat, is readily understood). 
 
 So in entreaties : 
 
 irpo^ vvv ae Trarpo^, 7rp6<q re firjrpof;, m reKvov. 
 LKeTr)<; iKvovfiai. SoPH. 
 
 Now by thy father, by thy mother, boy. 
 Suppliant I supplicate thee. 
 
 Note. A very common use. Observe (1) that o-e is often 
 inserted thus, tt/oos ere Trar/aos, cf. per te decs ore; (2) the 
 verb is often omitted, -n-pos Atos, -n-phs 6e(av, p.r] tt/jos yevetov, 
 1X7) TTpos (re yovviov. 
 
 On the side of : 
 
 AXKL^LaBrjf; Xeyerao Trpo^ irarpo^ ^AXK/jLacoiBcov 
 
 elvai. I) EM. 
 Alcibiades is said to have been descended from the 
 Alcmaeonidae on the father's side. 
 
 1 Observe that the Genitive with irpSs is a genuine Genitive and not 
 a representative of the lost Ablative,— connection, not separation, being 
 denoted. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 337 
 
 Cf. Soph. A%. 1305, tovs Trpos aifxaroSi blood relations, Cf. 
 Soph. EL 1125 and 1075 (ra irpos reKviov). 
 
 Belonging to (periphrastically for Genitive alone) : 
 
 ov TTpo^ tarpov cro(f)Ov 
 6p7)veiv €7ra)Ba^ Trpo? to/jlcovtl Trrj/jLaTt, SoPH. 
 'Tis not a wise physician's part 
 To mumble spells o'er sore that needs the knife. 
 So 7r/>os yvvatKos, like a woman, etc. 
 
 And with qualities, tt/oos SiKr^s, in accordance with justice. 
 Soph. 0. T. 1014; ov tt/sos t^s v/xerepa? So^t^s, Thug. iii. 
 59, it does not accord with your reputation. 
 
 In favour of : 
 
 TT/^o? Ta)v e-^ovTcov ^oiPe tov vofiov Tidrj^;, EUE. 
 Thou makest this law in favour of the rich, Phoebus. 
 
 On the part of, at the hand of: 
 
 eiraivov rev^erai, Trpa yovv e/xov, SoPH. 
 He shall meet with praise at least from me. 
 
 The agent with Verbs and Adjectives (very common in Ionic 
 and in poetry) : 
 
 Kvpos ofMoXoyeLTaL tt/oos irdvTwv Kparia-Tos yevkordai. 
 
 Xen. An. i. ix. 20. 
 Cyrus is admitted by all to have been most excellent. 
 Cf. Aesch. p. V. 650, Soph. An. 919 (^prjfios irpbs <^iAwv). 
 Cf. El 562 (with a Substantive). 
 
 In poetry also, rarely, of things. Soph. El. 1236. 
 
 B. With Dative. 
 
 I{ear or beside, in rest : 
 
 ol TTOTa/jLol TTpo^ TttU iTTjyal^ ov fjueyaXoi eiaiv, Xen. 
 Rivers near their sources are not big. 
 Soph. 0. T. 1169, tt/oos tw Secvw, on the brink of Jwrror. 
 
 In presence of: 
 
 In Demosthenes : Trpos rots KpiraU, in the presence of the 
 juryman: Trpos rols decrixoderals, etc. (Aeyeti^). 
 
 Y 
 
338 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Engaged in : 
 
 ^ " ^'^ - Flat. Phaed. XX.XY. Si G. 
 
 Socrates was absorbed in the conversation held. 
 Cf. totus erat in sermone. HoR. Sat. i. 9. 2. 
 Note. A frequent prose usage : etvai, yiyvea-Oai, haTpipeiv, 
 TY)V yv^jx-qv l^aiv irpos tlvl. 
 
 In addition to : 
 
 TTOO? T0t9 irapoixnv aWa irpo'fKapeLV oeKei^. 
 
 Aesch. 
 In addition to thy jpresent woes thou wouldst add 
 
 other woes. 
 TTpb^ Tot9 aXkoi^j in addition to the rest. 
 So constantly ttjoo? Tovroi^^, praeterea, in addition 
 to, besides this, seldom 77^09 tqvto). 
 C. With Accusative. 
 
 1. Direction towards, or to, implying motion. 
 
 2. Relation or connection with (a very free and 
 
 post-Epic usage). 
 Towards, to, literally and figuratively : 
 €(j)vyov 7rpo9 Tr)v <yr]v, Xen. 
 They fled to the shore. 
 
 7] (pikoTL/jila irapo^vvei irpo^ ra Ka\a. Xen. 
 Ambition spurs to noble aims. 
 
 With verbs of speaJdng : 
 
 eiprio-eTai irpo^ vfia^ iraaa r) aXrjdeia. Dem. 
 The whole truth shall be told you (spoken out he/ore 
 . you). 
 
 Very commonly, ctVetv, Xeyetv, (fypd^cLV, aTTOKpivea-OaL irpos 
 
 TLva. Soph. El. 640, tt^os </)ws (to proclaim), publicly, in 
 broad daylight, in luce. 
 
 A-eyeii/ tt/oos rtva, to speak in reply, advorsus aliquem. 
 
 Aeyetv Kara twos, to speak against (in accusation of), in 
 aliquem. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 339 
 
 With verhs of considering : 
 
 XoyLaaade Trpo? v/iia<; avrov^ rl (TV/ub/Sria-eTai. Dem. 
 Consider with yourselves what will hafjpen. 
 So €vdvfX€L(r6ai, dvafJLvrjcrOyjvaL Trept tlvo<5. Cf. SoPH. El. 285. 
 avTYj TT/oos avTrjv, alone by myself. 
 
 Of dealings with ; 
 
 a-'jTovBa<; (avvdrjKas;) iroiovfiai, Trpo^ riva, I make a 
 truce, treaty with. 
 So ^v/z/xa^^ta, cfaXta, eySpa, airia-riay TroXefxos Trpos nva, 
 TTpos Tovs StKoo-ras, in the presence of the jury. 
 
 irpos Tovs MyySoi'S kykvovTO ayadoi. ThUC. i. 86. 
 
 They proved themselves brave men against the Medes. 
 Cf. Xen. Cyr. ii. 3. 13. 
 
 TT/oos K€vrpa firj XaKTi^e. Prov. — Kick not against ihejprichs. 
 Generally y with reference to : 
 
 ov^lv avTW TT/Oos T'qv ttoXlv icTTi. Dem. 528. 16. 
 
 He has nothing to do with the city. 
 
 d(T<f>aXu}s '^x^iv TTpos ri. Xen., to feel safe or comfortable 
 about. 
 
 Miscellaneous Phrases: 
 
 With a pwyose : 
 
 ■^pr) 7rpo9 TO nrapov aec ^ovXeveaOac, ISOC. 
 We should ever deliberate with an eye to the present. 
 So iTOLfios, XPV^''H'^'^) ^'^cii'os Trpos Tt, ready, etc., for a purpose. 
 According to : 
 
 irpos aXXov ^rjv, Dem., to live according to the standard 
 
 of another. 
 TTobs TTjv Svvaixiv, according to one^s ability (pro viribus.) 
 Trpos ras r^xas (EuR. Hipp. 701), suited to one^s fortunes. 
 
 In consequence of, on hearing : 
 
 'X^aXeTralveiv tt/jo? tl. Thuc. To he annoyed on hearing. 
 a6vfico<; eyjELv irpo^ Tt. Xen. To be despondent, 
 irpofi Tavrrjv ttjv <f>r)pLriv, Hdt. Ad banc famam. 
 
340 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 'irpo<i ravra : 
 
 7r/)09 t/; wherefore? Trpo? ravra, there/ore. 
 
 Sometimes introducing a defiance or challenge, so then, 
 e.g. Soph. 0. T. 455. 
 
 Compared with : 
 
 TroXXrj av eirj aTTtcrTta tyJs Svvdfxeois irpos to kAcos avrwi/. 
 
 Thuc. i. 10. 
 There would he a strong disbelief in their power as compared 
 with their reputation. 
 Cf. Hdt. iii. 34 : also iii. 94 (implying superiority), and 
 iii. 94 (to fiecrov -rrpos, the mean between). 
 7r€VT€ TTpos T/)ta, Akistot. Five to three. 
 Exchange : 
 
 rjSovas 7r/3os rj8ova<s kol AvTra? 7rpo<s Xv7ra<s Kal <f)6^ov rrpos 
 
 (fio/Sov KaraXXaTTea-dai. PlAT. Phaed. xiii. 69 A. 
 To exchange pleasures with pleasures, pains with pains, and 
 fear vnth fear. 
 Cf. HoM. II. vi. 235. 
 
 2. Of Time (a rare use), towards, near, about : 
 
 TT/oos ka-irkpav, drawing towards evening : Trpos rjci, towards 
 daybreak. Plat, and Xen. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 Ta TTpos rov TToXefxov, res militares, military affairs. 
 
 rd TT/oos Tovs ^eovs (SoPH. Phil. 1441) ; duty to the gods. 
 
 ir/)os rj8ovr)v Aeyeiv, to speak with a view to gratify or 
 please ; so, tt/jos x^-P''^ hrjixr^yopdv, to make a popular 
 speech, talk clap-trap or " bunkum f' irpbs '^xOpav TTotetcr- 
 6ai Xoyov, Dem. {calculated to inspire dislike) ; a-jravra 
 TTpos '>)8ovr)v Cr)T€Lv, to make pleasure one's sole aim 
 (omnia ad voluptatem referre). 
 
 Adverbial phrases : 
 
 TT/50S IStav (TTpos TO jSiaLov, Aesch. Jg. 130), violently, by 
 
 force; Trpos dvdjKrjv, of necessity (cf. iutt' dvdyKi]s, Bl' 
 
 dvdyK-qv, k^ dvdyK-qs, crvv dvdyKrj). 
 rrpos pkpos proportionately, Dem. Tvpos cvo-e^emv, piously. 
 
 Soph, tt^os opy-qv, angrily, Soph, and Dem. Tvpos 
 
 Kaipov, seasonably, Soph. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 341 
 
 Trpo<s x'^P'-^ Ttvo?, alicuius gratia, for the sake of a person. 
 irpos l(rxvo<s x^piv^ EuR. Med. 538 {laws not made) in 
 
 support of violence ; cf. SoPH. Ant. 30, tt/oos x^P'^ /3opa?, 
 
 for the sake of food. In such phrases, tt/oos X"P*^ is 
 
 almost like eVeKa. 
 TTpoq avAoi/, Eur. Al. 346, ^0 the accompaniment of the 
 
 pipe. 
 
 As an Adverb : in addition, besides : 
 
 dXoyia Kal dfji,aOta ye tt/oos. Plat. Meno, 90 E, Absurdity 
 and unreasonableness to boot. Cf. EuR. Or. 622. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Towards, irpo^epxoiift^, I approach. (2) Near, beside, be- 
 sides, 7rp6sK€LfiaLj I lie near; TrposTidrjfjLi,, I apply, I add. 
 
 §278. 'TttoV 
 
 'Ttto (Epic viral) i under, = Sansk. upa (thither, to, with). 
 Lat. suh. 
 
 A. With Genitive. 
 1. Of Place. 
 Under : 
 ra VTTO 7?7? Bc/caarripta. PlaT. 
 The courts of justice under the earth. 
 
 From under : 
 
 V€0(T(rov Tov^^ viro irrepoiv (nraxraq. EUR, And. 441. 
 Drawing from under the wings this chick. 
 
 An Epic but rare Attic use. 
 
 1 virb like the Latin sub seems originally to have meant upwards, 
 from below towards a place above. Compare uTrrtos with supinus, facing 
 upwards, v\pL, aloft, surgo {i.e. sub-s-rigo), succedo. Hence vird means 
 goi7ig to meet {viravTid^u)), supporting, and so agency or cattse. More 
 generally vir6 comes to denote under the power or influence of, and even 
 accompanying circumstance, sometimes almost like eiri with a Dative, 
 e.g. Aesch. Sept. c. Theh. 821, virb <()bv(^. With the Genitive i'7r6 denot- 
 ing separation from, the Genitive must represent the Ablative ; on the 
 other hand when inrb means under, the true Genitive, denoting sphere 
 within which anything occurs, whether of place or time, etc., is em- 
 ployed. 
 
342 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 2. Figuratively ; under the influence of. 
 Of Persons : — the Agent, like Lat. a, ah : 
 With Passive Verbs : 
 
 ol Uepaai eviKriOrjaav vtto twv E\Xt]Vcov. 
 
 The Persians tvere defeated hy the Greeks. 
 
 Of Things : — the cause : 
 
 Trdvra vtto 8eou9 ^vvia-raTai. ThuC. 
 They all hold together through fear. 
 
 A very common use, vtto voaov, vcj) rj^ovrjf;, vir opyr]<;, 
 
 hy, in consequence of, from, for, disease, ^pleasure, 
 
 anger. 
 
 VTTO K-qpvKo<s evx^s €7roiovvTo. Thug. vi. 32. 
 At the direction of a herald they were offering prayers, 
 praeeunte praecone. 
 
 Hence of accompanying circumstances : 
 
 Frequently of music. 
 larpareveTO vtto crvpcyyiDV. HdT. i. 17. 
 He used to march to war to the sound of the pipe. 
 
 Cf. Soph. El. 711. Eur. Bacch. 156. 
 
 So TTiVeiv VTTO a-dXiriyyos, Ar. Ach. 1001, to drink to the 
 trumpets sound. vtt' €v<^ripov fSorjs ^Ovcrai, SoPH. 
 El. 630, to sacrifice with auspicious cry. vtto (fiavov 
 TTOpevea-dai, to march hy torchlight, vtto Tropirrjs, in 
 procession. Hdt. ii. 45. 
 
 Note. VTTO has this sense with the Dative in early and late 
 Greek, e.g. Hesiod and Lucian (see Liddell and Scott) ; also 
 rarely in Attic with the Accusative, Plat. Leg. 670 A, vtt' 
 op^-qcTiv KoX (^riv : Xen. Sym. 6. 3, vko avAov. 
 
 Phrases : 
 
 tx^' kavTov (ttoulv tl), to do anything spontaneously, of 07ie- 
 self, sua sponte. ■y^' lu/xwv avrwi/ Kal prj vtto to)v 
 TToXepLMv. Thug. iv. 64, of your own free-icill, and not 
 compelled hy the enemy, vtto here denotes the Agent. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 343 
 
 B. With Dative. 
 
 virq means under, in a local sense, less frequently 
 in Prose tlian in Poetry. 
 Under : 
 
 evK\67](; Oavel 
 yvvrj T apKTTrj rwv vcj)' rfkicp (jbaKpo). EuR. Al, 150. 
 
 Glorious thou wilt die, 
 The nohlest woman far heneath the sun. 
 Cf. Xen. An. i. 2. 8, viro ry aKpoiroXet elvai. 
 
 Covered hy : 
 
 ri e'xets viro tw i/xarto) ; PlAT. Phaedr. 228 D. 
 
 What have you concealed under your cloak ? 
 Cf. AeSCH. Ag. 1030, viro o-koto). 
 
 Under power of persons or things: 
 
 r)v €Ti VTTO vofjLot<; KUL TTaTpc. Plat. Rep. 574 E. 
 He was still in subjection to laws and to a father. 
 v(f> iavTM TroLetaOaL, to bring under one's power ; cf. 
 Hdt. vii. 157 ; Thuc. vii. 64 (and see Accusative). 
 
 Classed under : 
 
 TO, VTTO rals ye(i)fX€Tpiais Aeyets. PlAT. Bep. 511 A. 
 
 You are speaking of what comes under the head of geometri- 
 cal pursuits (various branches of geometry). 
 More rarely with Accusative, see Lexicon. 
 
 0. With Accusative. 
 
 Motion under : 
 
 avey^wpTjaav viro to Tel')(o<;, Xen. 
 
 They retired under the walls. 
 
 viro hiKacTTripLov, into (under control of) a law court. 
 
 Hdt. vi. 104. 
 Extension or position under : 
 
 TO IleAacrytKov to vtto rr^v aKpoTvoXiv i^tpK-qOr]. 
 
 Thuc. ii. 17. 
 
 The Pelasgicum which lies (extends) under the acropolis was 
 
 croivded. 
 Toi VTTO TTjv apKTov. Hdt. V. 10, tJic uorthem districts. 
 
344 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Subjection to : 
 
 et/to9 avTov<; iravra nreipaa-aaOai vtto cr(f>a<; iroLelaOai,, 
 
 Thuc. 
 It is likely they will try to hriTig all under their power. 
 ol VTTO Tcva, Xen., those who are in subjection to 
 any one, 
 
 Cf. Dative. 
 
 Of Time, near, about : 
 
 VTTO Tov aeia-fiov, ThuC. 
 At the time of the earthquake, 
 
 VTTO vvKTay towards night, at nightfall, sub noctem. 
 
 VTTO rrjv KardXva-iv tov 7ro\€fiov, just at the end of the war. 
 
 Xen. Mem. ii. 8. 1. 
 Phrases : 
 
 vtt' avyas opav rt, to hold up to the light (cf. Eur, Rec. 
 
 1154). 
 VTTO ri^ Plat, and Aristoph., to a certain degree^ ali- 
 quatenus. 
 
 In Composition : 
 
 (1) Up to, viravrid^io, I go up to meet, I face; and so of 
 accompaniment, V7ra.8<j), I accompany in song. (2) Under, 
 viretfiL, I am under. (3) Secretly, slightly, gradually, 
 vTTocfiatvo}, I show or shine a little ; v7ro/3dXXo), I suggest, 
 suborn, substitute ; virepvOpoSj reddish. 
 
CHAPTER 11. 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 Introductory Note. 
 § 279* Ov negat, Mrj ivfitiatur. 
 
 Ov contradicts or denies.'^ The following are typical instances 
 of its use : raOra ovk kykv^ro^ these things did not fake place ; 
 Tavra ovk av yhoiTo, these things would not fake place ; ov <^y}ixi, 
 I do not assert, i.e. / deny. The statement may take an in- 
 terrogative form, ov Tavra kykv€To ; did not these things fake place ? 
 where an affirmative answer is expected, the person addressed 
 being challenged or dared to say ovk kykv^ro. 
 
 MtJ on the other hand deprecates or repudiates. The following 
 instances taken from Homer are typical : firj c/xe Aa/Sot x^^^^^^j 
 may not anger seize me ! fjirj o-e Kix^to), let me not meet thee ! ^ jj-rj 
 TTov (fida-de ; what ! say ye ? {be it not that ye say !) a state- 
 ment put deprecatingly or repudiated : Surely no ! you don't 
 say, etc. =do you say ? 
 
 Hence firf naturally expresses a, prohibition,- /xtj />t' ipeOi^e, 
 provoke me not / It also naturally expresses /ecir, apprehension, 
 surmise : fx-q /le a-rip-q Safxda-rj, I fear (or perchance) the frost shall 
 overpower me. The surmise may be expressed independently, 
 as above, or it may be attached to a verb, and so pass into a 
 Subordinate Sentence : SetSw /xr) yei'to/zat, / fear that I may 
 become. Again the surmise, or result deprecated may prove 
 true : SetSw /xt) vqixeprea €L7rev, I fear she spake the truth.^ 
 
 ^ Ov denies, [i-q declines, Curtius. 0^ denies, ix-f] rejects: ov is the 
 negative of fact and statement, ix-f] of the will and thought, Goodwin in 
 Liddell and Scott. Ov denies a predication, fi-f] forbids or deprecates 
 (further on, disclaims), Monro, Homeric Grammar. 
 
 2 M77 is identical with the Sanskrit md. In Sanskrit md is used with 
 the Conjunctive, Optative of wishing, and Imperative like ixi} in Greek, 
 Curtius Etym. i. p. 415. For instances see Delbriick and Windisch, 
 Syntaktische Forschungen, Der Oehrauch des Conjunctiva und Optatws 
 im Sanskrit und Griechischen, p. 112 and following. Max Miiller, 
 Oxford Inaugural Lecture, Note C, gives an instance (from Wilson) 
 of the prohibitive md with what may be equally well called an Infini- 
 tive or Dative : md kdpaldya, lit. not for unsteadiness, i. e. do not act 
 unsteadily. This seems to trace back ixrj as far as we can go. 
 
 345 
 
346 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 In all the above instances ov contradicts downright a state- 
 ment of fact, whereas [x-l] deals with conceptions or thoughts. 
 A line is thus drawn between the two negatives— a line, on 
 the whole, clearly marked throughout Attic Greek, although 
 subsequently blurred. ^ M>i is thus used with Wishes^ Prohibi- 
 tions, Conditions, SiXidi Purposes. A negative consequence con- 
 ceived {(l)cn€ with the Infinitive) requires /x>j, a negative con- 
 sequence achieved as a fact {ioare with the Indicative) 
 requires ov. 
 
 M^ is used generally with abstract conceptions as opposed to 
 known and definite facts. Thus ol ov ina-TevovTes means those 
 particular (known) persons who do not believe ; ol fxrj iria-Tevovre^, 
 all or any persons who do not believe (if any do not believe) ; cTreiS?) 
 ovK rjXBov, when, or since (as a matter of fact), tliey did not 
 come ; eiretSr) firj 'iXdoiev, whenever (the number of times not 
 being specified) they did not come; ^ ovk e/x7ret/oia, the in- 
 experience (of some known person), the fact that some one is in- 
 experienced ; 7} fXTj €fjL7r€LpLa, inexperience in the abstract (without 
 predicating of any particular person) ; 6 ovk &v, he who is not 
 existing, the dead man ; ra [xr) oVra, all things whatsoever are not, 
 a vast limbo outside of our actual knowledge. 
 
 The construction of the sentence may change ov to ix-fj, yet 
 even so, if it is necessary to contradict point blank a word or 
 statement, ov may be used. See examples at the end of 
 this chapter. 
 
 Whatever applies to ov and fxr] applies equally to their com- 
 pounds, ovSets, /xrySeis ; ovSe, /x>^Se j ovre, jUiJTe, etc., etc. 
 
 § 280. Ov PRIVATIVE. 
 
 Ov prefixed to a word deprives that word of its affirma- 
 tive meaning and gives it exactly the opposite sense. 
 Hence it is called privative (privativum). 
 
 Especially noticeable under this head is the idiomatic 
 use of ov with verbs of saying and thinking : ov ^t^^l, ov 
 <f)aa-Kco, ov vofit^co, ovk olofiuL, ov Bokw, ovk eo). 
 
 1 As Lucian (second century a.d.) is sometimes read it may be 
 observed that he uses fiifi where Attic writers use ov : (1) with Parti- 
 ciples in a Causal sense, and after ws, 6ti, dion Causal, (2) after Verbs 
 of Saying and Thinking in Oratio Obliqua. 
 
oh PRIVATIVE. 347 
 
 By this idiom ov is used with the principal verb where 
 in English the negative is joined w^ith the following 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Ov in fact almost coalesces with its word. Compare 
 the use of the Latin negative {ne in nego {ne-ig-o), ne queo, 
 nescio) which has gone a stage further than ov in coalescing. 
 
 ov ^aai defjLLTOv elvat. PlaT. 
 
 They say it is not right. 
 
 negant fas esse. 
 
 ovK Qjero Secv Xeyeiv. Aeschin. 
 
 He thought that he need not speak. 
 
 ov fjLot BoKco. Plat. 
 
 / think not. 
 
 Note 1. This use of ov with the governing Verb seems more 
 ancient than with the Infinitive. See Monro's Homeric Gram- 
 mar, p. 262. 
 
 Note 2. This ov privative is sometimes retained where the 
 construction requires /^tJ. 
 
 eav ov 4>rJT€ lav re cfirjre. PlAT. Apol xii. 25 B. 
 Whether you say no m- yes. 
 
 €L fl€V OV TToXXol T^CTttV. LYS. 13. 72. 
 
 If they were few. 
 
 Cf. ThuC. i. 121 (et OVK OLTrepova-i) ; XeN. An. i. 7. 18 (el ov 
 ixaxdrai)', SoPH. Ai. 1131, 1242, 1268; El 244; EuR. 
 Med. 88. 
 
 But generally the fir} required by construction is used. 
 kav fxrj <f)fj 6 eVe/JOS rov 'drepov opOios Aeyetv. PlAT. Gorg. 457 D. 
 
 Note 3. Ov exerts this privative or contradictory force on 
 any word to which it is prefixed. 
 (a.) Verbs : — 
 
 ov 
 
 OVK 
 
 ov 
 
 o-re/ayo), I hate. ovk d^Lw, I consider that not 
 
 OK €M, ) ^,. , /. 7.7 (like OV 80 ko)), I require or ex- 
 
 ^ KexUc., 1 1 hinder Jorhd. ^^^^ ^J^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^ g^^^ 
 
 OVK vTno-xvovfxat, I refuse. I disdain or refuse (Aesch. 
 
 ov TTposTTOLovfiaL, dissiuiulo. P. V. 285). 
 
 ov crvfifSovXcvd), I advise one 
 not to, etc. Thuc. and Hdt. 
 
348 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 (b.) Other words : — 
 
 Tol ov KaXd, immorality. 
 
 ov KaAws, immorally ; ovk opOC^s, wrongly. 
 
 ovx CIS, OVK oXiyoi = TToXXoL, many. 
 
 OVK €Aa;(to-Tos = fxeyLO-TOS. 
 
 OVK rjKLarTa aXXa fxaXiarraj HdT. iv. 170. 
 
 rrjs AevKaSo? rj ov Tre/atreix^o-ts, Thuc. iii. 95., the non-investment 
 
 of Leucas. 
 t) OVK e^oxHTta, THtTC. V. 50 j ij ov StaAvo-fcs, i. 137 ; rj ovk 
 
 aTToSocris, V. 35. 
 €v ov Kaipo), unseasonably, EuR. Bacch. 1288. 
 
 Note. 4. In some of these cases the negative doubtless is 
 due to the Greek reserve and abatement of positive assertion 
 (litotes), e.g. ovx riKicna, not least, i.e. by implication, most. 
 
 § 281. Oi AND pLTi WITH ADJECTIVES, PARTI- 
 CIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, 
 AND SUBSTANTIVES 
 
 (For Infinitives used as Substantives see § 283.) 
 Ov. Mt;. 
 
 When definite and known When the members of a 
 individuals or members class are indefinite so 
 
 of a class are spoken of, that the expression is 
 
 so that a fact is stated, xuiudllj conditional : (or 
 
 ov is used. when certain attributes 
 
 are thought of so that it 
 is consecutive:) or when 
 the expression is a mere 
 vague conception, some- 
 thing thought of rather 
 than known, [xr] is used. 
 Instances with ^iri much outnumber those with ov. 
 OL OVK afyaOoL TroXlrac. 01 /jltj KaOapol Ta<; ')(^6ipa<;. 
 
 Those {particular) citizens Antiph. 
 
 who are not good, A II who are of impure hands. 
 
O^ AND M17 WITH ADJECTIVES, ETC, 
 
 349 
 
 01 ov TTLaTevovre^. 
 Those who do not believe. 
 (Special known persons 
 
 spoken of.) 
 ii qui non credunt. 
 
 at ou/c 
 
 aVTUL. 
 
 opOal iroXnelai 
 Plat. Uejp. 
 These wrong forms of govern- 
 ment. 
 
 Here, as in many such cases, 
 the ov is privative ; under 
 which rule are given ex- 
 amples of adverbs and 
 substantives. 
 
 OU fJLT] 7rL<7T6V0VT€<^. 
 
 Those, i.e. ani/ (all) who do 
 not believe = if any do not 
 believe. 
 
 = OLTLVe<i fXT] TTLCTTeVOVai. 
 
 oaoL av fiT] Tno-revcocTL. 
 si qui non credunt. 
 
 Tcov crTpaTiO}T03v ol fir] Bvvd- 
 fjLevoL Xen. 
 
 Such of the soldiers as are 
 unable. 
 
 Ttt opara Kac ra /jlyj (opard). 
 
 Plat. Phaed. 
 
 The things which are seen 
 
 and those which are not 
 
 seen. 
 
 fiT] caTpo<; aveincTTrifKov. 
 
 Plat. Gorg. 
 He who is not a physician 
 is inexperienced, 
 
 BeLVOV eGTLv Tj fMrj efjuireipta, 
 Ar. JEcc. 
 A sad thing is inexperience. 
 
 Here no statement is made 
 that any particular person 
 is inexperienced, but the 
 mere conception is spoken 
 of. 
 
 Note on Substantives. When ov is used with a Substantive, 
 the expression is equivalent to a negative objective sentence. 
 Thus 17 ovK k^ovcria = quod non licet, the fact that it is not per- 
 mitted. Whereas rj /xr) k^ova-ia simply means the not being able 
 as an abstract conception, non licere. Mrj however may be 
 said to be the usual Attic construction with Substantives. 
 
350 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 §282. 
 
 Oh, 
 
 Ou is used when the Par- 
 ticiple states a fact : 
 the Participle is often 
 Causal. 
 
 Ov AND fJLT] WITH PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Mj] is used when the An- 
 tecedent to the Partici- 
 ple is indefinite, so that 
 the Participle is Condi- 
 tional. 
 
 ov iriGTevwv. 
 
 Since (as, when, etc.) he 
 not believe. 
 
 fi7] irtarevoav. 
 
 If he does not helieve. 
 
 aia'^uvoybai ov ttolcov ravra. aLO-'^vpofiac fir) ttoicov rav- 
 I am ashamed because (that) ra. 
 
 I do not do this. I am ashamed if I do not 
 
 do this. 
 
 BrjXcoao) ov 7rapay€vofM€vo<i. 
 Antiph. 
 I will prove that I was not 
 
 ov/c av bvvaio, fir] Ka/jLcov, 
 evSai/jLovetv. EuE. 
 
 Thou couldst not be happy, 
 unless thou shouldst toil. 
 
 Kav &(f)X€ XiXias 8pa)(^ixa<s ov 
 fX€rakaf3(i)v to TreyUTTTOV jue^os 
 
 Plat. Apol xxv. 
 He woidd even have been con- 
 demned to pay a thousand 
 drachmae, because he had not 
 obtained a fifth of the votes. 
 
 Sof-er' 
 
 OVXL 
 
 OVK €VTVXOV(TaL 
 
 8vcrTV)(^eiv. 
 
 Eur. Bacch. 1263. 
 Although not fortunate, ye shall 
 seem not to be unfortunate. 
 Cf. 270, vovv OVK exoiv 
 as he is of sense). 
 
0^ AND Mri WITH THE INFINITIVE. 351 
 
 Note, ws (wo-Tre/o) ov is more usual with the Participle than 
 ws [i-r], ws ^-T] appears to be used when the construction of the 
 Sentence demands /^ly {e.g. when an Imperative or a Con- 
 ditional particle precedes), though even then ws ov may be 
 used when a plain statement of fact is intended. 
 
 eOopv^dre cos ov Trot-qcrovTCs ravTa. LyS. 12. 73 (cf. 27. 16, 
 tocnrcp ov). 
 
 Cf. Thuc. iv. 5 ; vi. 82. 2, Xen. An. iv. 4. 15. 
 
 For ws firj : — 
 (0? efxov fxy]8e7roT€ dfxeX'QcrovTO'Sf ovrw? e^e Tr]v yvt^fi-qv^ 
 
 Xen. C^r.i. 6. 11. ^^ 
 
 But, — d<jf)t€T€ fxe 7] fxrj d<fiUT€ ws ifxov ovk av TrotrycrovTos d\Xa. 
 
 Plat. /4^o/. xvii. 30 b; Thuc. i. 78. 1. /SpaSeojs povXema-de 
 
 d)S ov Trepl fipa^kiDV. 
 
 (OS iiri^ with the Participle, may denote several charac- 
 teristics, e.g. SiSaa-Ke fj/ ws fx-q etSora, as one who knows not, 
 Soph. 0. C. 1154. 
 
 § 283. Ov AND iLT^ WITH THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 Ov. Ml]. 
 
 Mr\ is the regular Negative with the Infinitive. 
 
 When ov is found with an Infinitive, it is chiefly in 
 Indirect Statements after verbs of Saying and Thinking, 
 ov being the proper construction in Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 An infinitive used as a Substantive with or without 
 the Article regularly takes //,rf. 
 
 €(^7] OVK eK^rjvac fie eK rov aLa')(^pov fir] aXrjOeveiv. 
 
 ifkoLov. Antiph. It is wrong not to sjpeah the 
 
 He stated that I did not truth. 
 
 leave the ship ^=. ovk €<j)7j 
 
 eK^rjvac. 
 
 eXeyov ovk elvai avTovofJLOC, y^prj fir) Kara<^poveLV rov 
 
 Thuc. irXr^Oov^. Isaeus. 
 
 l^ey were saying that they We should not despise the 
 were not independent, multitude. 
 
352 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 evoiitaev ovk av BvvaaOac to jurj BLKaL(o<; airoKeaaL. 
 
 tieveiv. Xen. Antiph. 
 
 He thought that they would An unjust sentence of death. 
 
 not remain. 
 
 6fji(0fJL0K€v ov '^apL6Lauai, 
 Plat. Ajpol. xxiv. 35 c. 
 
 A striking instance; verbs 
 of swearing usually are 
 followed by fxr;, see note 4 
 below. 
 
 For other instances, cf. 
 Soph. Ant. 378, 755 j Plat. 
 Apol. xvii. 29 B. 
 
 Note 1. When ov is exceptionally used with the Infinitive, 
 it is generally due either to the order of or emphasis on a word 
 or sentence. Sometimes ov is privative. A positive negation 
 is always made. 
 
 ovSci'os afiapT€LV BiKaios ecrriv. AnTIPH. iv. Tetr, T. a. 6. 
 There is nothing which he deserves to miss. 
 = ov8€V icTTiV OV afiapTiiv. 
 
 a^iw lyw S>v 6p(i}jx6KaT€ irapajSrjvaL ovBev. 
 
 Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 48. 
 / beg you to violate no single jooint of your oath. 
 
 Observe that ov is used although a Petition strictly requires 
 fjL^ Cf. Thug. i. 39. 2. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Phil 88, €</>vv ovScV=ov/c ^w. 
 
 KeXevei ovk kv ry kKKX-qa-ia. aAX' kv t$ dedrpo) rrjv dvdpprja-Lv 
 ytyvea-dai. AesCH. 3. 204. 
 
 {TJie law) requires the proclamation to be made, not in the 
 < Assembly, but in the Theatre. 
 
 Emphasis on the parenthesis. 
 
O^ AND Mt? with the infinitive. 353 
 
 ^OKa.% yaipr^CTiiv rj ovk aTroOaveLcrOaL ; AnDOK. i. 101. 
 Do you expect to rejoice, or escape death ? 
 OVK aT7o9avda-9ai is perhaps privative. 
 
 Note 2. xP'^ (XP^^i ^XPl^) ^^® followed by both fxrj and ov 
 with the Infinitive. xPl °^ ^^7 ^^ considered to stand for 
 01) XPV- 
 
 Soph. Phil. 1363, xPl^ M'^^ [loXelv, k.t.X. 
 
 And. 607, XPl^ H'! '^'^eiv. 
 Eur. Androm. 100, XPV ^' ovttot' eiTreiv, so 214. 
 
 Hipp. 507, XPl^ ®^ ^' afMaprdveuv. 
 Med. 294, XPV ^' ovttot' eKStSda-Kea-Oai. 
 
 Note 3. Mrj is not seldom found with the Infinitive in an 
 Indirect Statement. In some, but not all such instances, 
 the Statement is general, and bears the character of a 
 Conception. 
 
 aTreKptvaTO fxr^Sevos rJTToyv etvaL. XeN. Hell. ii. 3. 11. 
 He replied that he was inferior to none; cf. iii. 2. 31 ; iv. 
 4. 5 j Mem. i. 2. 39. 
 
 ot fxavreis Xkyovrai eavTOis p^r] irpoopav to kTviov. 
 
 Xen. Symp. iv. 5. 
 Prophets are said not to foresee the future for themselves. 
 
 This is not, however, the strict Attic use, and Xenophon is 
 often exceptional. See Xen. Mem. i. 2. 39. Ov and yar} 
 occur in co-ordinate clauses in Soph. Phil. 1058; Plat. Prot. 
 319 b. 
 
 Note 4. Many Verbs which employ an eff'ort of thought or 
 will prefer /zrj with the Infinitive. Such are Verbs of making 
 an admission, 6p.oXoyCd, Plat. Phaed. xlii. 98 D, avyx'^pfj^ '• cf. 
 conviction, Trio-revio, Xen. An. i. 9. 8 ; irkiriKr pat^ Plat. Apol. 
 xxvii. 37 A : of witnessing, swearing, op^vvpa, Ar. Vesp. 1047, 
 1281 (also an Epic usage), €p(o = 6piovp,aL, Xen. Cyr. vii. 1. 18; 
 kyyvQ>p.ai, Plat. Prot. 336 D. (For other constructions of 
 6p,vvpiL, see Lexicon.) 
 
 Verbs of Perception, irria-rapiat, are found with pt] and the 
 Infinitive in Soph. EL 908, 1092. 
 
 z 
 
354 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 284 DIRECT AND INDIRECT STATEMENT 
 Ov. Mt], 
 
 The Direct Statement 
 takes ov. 
 
 ovK e^e^rjv etc rod itXolov, 
 Antiph. 
 
 / did not leave the ship. 
 
 Indirect Statement with 
 oTi, or w9 takes ov. 
 
 For the Indirect State- 
 ment in the Infinitive, cf. 
 supra. 
 
 / / * » 
 
 irape'^ojiai fjLapTVpa<; co<; ovk 
 
 e^e^Tjv eK rov itXolov. 
 
 Antiph. 
 
 I produce witnesses (to prove) 
 
 that I did not leave the 
 
 ship ^ OVK e^e/Srjv. 
 
 elirev on ovBev avra. fxeKoi 
 
 Tov Oopv^ov. Lys. 
 
 He said he did not care 
 
 about the disturbance == 
 
 ovBev fJLot /jLeXec, 
 
 § 285. INDIRECT STATEMENT WITH 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Tjr^'yeCKe rrjv nrokiv ov iro- Note. But Verbs of Percep- 
 
 XiooKvdelaav. Xen *^^^ sometimes take /xrj. See 
 
 IT /^/7 //T. V 7 ^ Soph. ^71^. 1063-64, a C. 65; 
 
 He reported that the city had Thuc i 76 1- ii 17 2- 
 
 not been besieged. similarly after SeUwfii, Eur! 
 
 Eecta : ovk iiroXiopKridTj. Tro. 970. 
 
DIRECT QUESTIONS. 
 
 .^55 
 
 eyvQjaav ov TTpa')(d6laav ttju 
 ^v/JLfjuaxi'Civ. Thuc. 
 
 They discovered that the al- 
 liance had not been con- 
 cluded. 
 Recta : ouk eirpa'^drj. 
 
 Ov in both cases is regular, 
 going with an Oblique 
 Statement. 
 
 § 286. 
 
 DIRECT QUESTIONS. 
 
 Ov expects the answer " yes " (7wnne ?). MtJ expects 
 the answer " no " (nnm T). They are often associated 
 with other particles : ap ov ; apa firj ; ov/covv ; /jump (i.e. 
 fjurj ovv) ; ficov ov ; fjbwv firi ; /uucov ovv ; rj ov ; r) jjuri ; 
 
 ravT ov')(l «:aX«9 Xeyerat ; /Jirj croc SoKovfiev TTJSe Xet- 
 
 Kokcog. Plat. 
 
 Is not this rightly said ? 
 
 Yes, rightly. 
 (^779 rj ov ; iravv ye. PLAT. 
 Do you assent, or do you not 
 
 (assent) ? i.e. Yes or no ? 
 
 Certainly (/ do assent). 
 
 Ov interrogative with a 
 Future Indicative is equi- 
 valent to an Imperative. 
 ovK a^eu ft)? ra')(^taTa ; 
 
 Soph. Ant. 885. 
 Will you not lead her away 
 
 instantly ? (i.e. lead her 
 
 away). 
 Followed by an imperative 
 Ka\ acpere. 
 
 (f>Orjval fJba')(7] ; AeSCH. 
 Think'st thou we were in- 
 ferior in this fight 1 
 
 Note. fjLxi in an oblique ques- 
 tion, like num in Latin, loses 
 this force of expecting a ne- 
 gative answer. So Soph. Ant. 
 1253, Eur. Herac. 482. 
 
356 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 ovKovv KaOehel Brjr evOaSc, 
 ydarpayv ; Ar. Ran. 200. 
 Sit ye down there, Paunch. 
 Cf. Soph. Ant 244, Ai. 593, 
 Phil. 975, 0. C. 834. 
 
 Note. Similarly ovk av with 
 optative, ovk av cfipdareLas ; 
 which is a gentle <f>pd(rov, 
 Soph. PM. 122. But ov in 
 combination with ttov and Srj 
 (ov TTOU ; ov Tt TTOi; ; ov 617 ; 
 ov S-q TTov ;) means surely it is 
 not so ? Cf. Soph. Fhil. 900 ; 
 Ar. Ban. 522, 526; — the ques- 
 tion here is really outside the 
 words " surely not — eh ?" 
 
 § 287. DELIBERATIVE QUESTIONS. 
 
 Mr] is used in Delibera- 
 tive Questions. 
 
 fir] aTTOfcptvco/Jbai, ; Plat. 
 
 Am I not to ansvjer ? 
 
 Xejere, eicnco rj fir) ; Plat, 
 Speak, must I enter or no ? 
 
 Cf. Soph. ^z. 668, rt/x^'; 
 
 § 288. IN-DIRECT QUESTIONS. 
 
 (a.) Indirect Single Ques- 
 tion. The Negative is ov. 
 
 rfpcoTTjaa, Bta ri ovk e\6oL. 
 I asked him why he did not 
 come. 
 
INDIRECT PE TIT ION. 35 7 
 
 npcorayopa^ epoma ei ovk 
 
 aio-xyvofjuaL. PlaT. 
 
 Protagoras asks me if I am 
 
 not ashamed. 
 
 Ohs. el here is interroga- 
 tive, not conditional. 
 
 (6.) In Indirect Double Questions the usage varies, but ov 
 is commoner than fjurj. There is generally a reason for firj. 
 
 (TKOTTCOfMeV, €1, TTpeTTCl, 7] OV. 6 V€0<; 0V')(^ ol6<^ T€ KpLVetV 6 
 
 Plat. to re virovota koi o finr). 
 
 Let us consider whether it is Plat. 
 
 becoming or not. A child is incapable of de- 
 
 oirm lS7)<; ^^'^^^ '^^^^ ^^ allegory 
 
 elr 'ivhov elr' oU tviov. ^^^ ^^«^ '^^' 
 
 Soph. 
 That thou may'st see 
 Whether he be within or not 
 
 within. 
 
 Note. Ov rather than ii-q seems to represent simply the 
 original direct double question. Mrj seems to import a doubt 
 into the question, or to represent it as a conception. Professoiv 
 Jebb, in a note to Soph. Ai. 6, and Antiphon (Attic Orators, 
 p. 161), draws a subtle distinction in every case. Thus, he 
 says (TKOTrwixev €i irpeTT^t y) p-q means, let us consider the question 
 of abstract fitness : but a-KOTrojfiev et TrpcTret rj ov ; let us see whether 
 the matter in hand is fit or no. 
 
 In this passage of Antiphon, el yj pij — el rj ov occur in 
 sequent clauses. Similarly in Isaeus, viii. 9, we have, in 
 three sequent clauses, etVe etVe p-j — /cat el i^ ov — Kal el rj p-q. 
 
 § 289. INDIRECT PETITION. 
 
 fit] is always used whe- 
 ther the Petition is Direct 
 or Indirect. 
 pLTj KkeTTje or p,r] KXeyjrr)';. 
 
358 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 a. Direct. 
 
 ybi] a^Lovre fie ravra Spav. 
 Bo not require me to do this. 
 
 h. Indirect. 
 
 eXeyov avroh jubfj ahiKelv. 
 Thuc. 
 
 They were telling tliem not to 
 
 do wro'ng. 
 LKerevov firj arpe^XaydTjvat. 
 Andok. 
 They were begging not to he 
 
 tortured. 
 
 Note. For exceptions see 
 under ov and /at) with Infini- 
 tive. See also oVcos /irj with 
 Future Indicative (Index). 
 
 § 290. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Ov. M77. 
 
 . The Apodosis or Principal The Protasis or Subordin- 
 Sentence takes ov. ate Sentence takes /jlti. 
 
 For Examples see Conditional Sentences. 
 
 Note 1. Where ov is found 
 in a Protasis it is joined 
 privatively to some special 
 word. (Cf. supra, p. 347.) 
 
 Note 2. €1 interrogative, not 
 conditional, takes ov not fxrj. 
 
 Note 3. When et is used like 
 ort after verbs of emotion 
 (6^ar;/xa(o;, KarotKrei/oa), Setvov 
 to-Tt, and the like), ov, not fx-q, 
 follows, for we may either say 
 that a statement of fact is 
 
CONCESSIVE, CAUSAL. 
 
 359 
 
 made, or that d is virtually 
 causal. Cf. Isoc. 11 D. /a^ 
 Oavixaxrys et ov irpkirei, DeM. . 
 197 D. ovK alcTXpov el ov j 
 
 Note 4. Also sometimes et 
 ov is found when a direct 
 statement is quoted, el, ws 
 vvv (jiTJa-ec, ov TrapeaKevdcraro, 
 Dem. 1266. 2, so virtually 
 Eur. Ion, 347. 
 
 § 291. CONCESSIVE. 
 
 Ov. MtJ. 
 
 KaiTrep {kul, /cat Tavra, Et, edv (tjv, av), conces- 
 Kal rot), with a Parti- sive, take firi, being truly 
 
 ciple take ov. Conditional. 
 
 Kaiirep bvTe<; ov BeLvoc fJ^epu- 
 vrjdBah pbvr)pL0vev6T€. 
 
 Dem. 
 
 Though you are not quick at 
 remembering, yet remem- 
 ber. 
 Cf. Soph. Thil. 377 ; Eur. 
 Ale. 352 = even being. 
 
 § 292, 
 
 CAUSAL. 
 
 Ok 
 
 Mt/. 
 
 The regular Negative is ov. 
 
 eTrecBr} ovk eSvvavro \apb- 
 paveiv TO '^aiptov ainevah 
 rjBr} eirc'^eipovv. Xen. 
 
 Since they were unable to 
 take the fort they now 
 were trying to depart. 
 So BcoTc, Thuc. iv. 11. 2. 
 
 Note. See Introduction on 
 use of p^rj in Causal Sentences 
 in late Greek. 
 
360 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 293. CONSECUTIVE 
 Oh. 
 
 wcrre with the Indicative 
 takes ov. 
 
 ovTco BcaKeifieda ware ovSep 
 irpa^aL hwafxeda. Dem. 
 
 We are in such a mood that 
 we are unahle to do any- 
 thing. 
 
 Note, ov is found with an 
 Infinitive. 
 SiLv' €7rr/7r€tA€i xeAetv wctt' ovre 
 vvKTos VTTVOV ovt' €^ r^fxkpas 
 €fji€ crreya^eiv rjSvv. 
 
 Soph. El 782. 
 
 She threatened to fulfil a dread 
 
 revenge, so that, nor day, nor 
 
 night, did sweet sleep shroud 
 
 me. 
 
 Cf. Eur. Hel 107, Phoen. 
 
 1357, Thuc. v. 40. 2, viii. 
 
 70. 6, Plat. Ajpol. xiv. 26 d. 
 
 Note. It is very important 
 to distinguish between the 
 regular and the exceptional 
 use of (l>frT€ ov with the Infini- 
 tive. The regular use {e.g. 
 Plat. Apol. xiv.) is due to 
 Oratio Obliqua. The exam- 
 ple in Soph. El. 782 is excep- 
 
 AND RESTRICTIVE. 
 Mrf. 
 
 wcTTe with the Infinitive 
 takes 117). 
 ovT(o<^ aXoyLaTo<; eufiL coare 
 fiT] hvvaaOai Xoyl^€a6ai. 
 Plat. 
 So unreflecting am I that I 
 cannot reflect. 
 
 a(f>l€/jL6V (T€ e(f) ft) T6 fir]KeTL 
 
 (j)L\o(To(l)e2v. Plat. 
 
 We set you free on the under- 
 standing that you no 
 longer pursue 'philosophy. 
 Cf. Thuc. i. 103. 1. (Fut. 
 
 Indie.) 
 For the rule of e<^ o) re, 
 see p. 274. 
 
TEMPORAL, LOCAL, AND FINAL SENTENCES. 361 
 
 tional. But in all cases we 
 may perhaps say that there is 
 a negation of fact. 
 
 § 294. TEMPORAL AND LOCAL SENTENCES. 
 Ov. Mij. 
 
 When the Time or Place is When the Time or Place 
 definite ov is used. is indefinite /jltj is used 
 
 (^e.g. with oTav, oirorav, 
 eirethav, ottov av, etc., 
 with Subjunctive : or 
 ore, etc., with Optative). 
 
 ovKovv, OTav Se fir] crOevw, 
 TreTravoro/jLac. SoPH. 
 
 So, when I have no strength, 
 I vjill give o'er, 
 {prav denotes Indefinite 
 Futurity.) 
 
 OTTore fiT) (patev a7rayoi'T€<i 
 aireKTelvav. Thuc. 
 
 Whenever they said ^^ no" 
 they led them off and exe- 
 cuted them. 
 
 Obs. That ottotc changes ov 
 
 <fir]jXL to firj (jirjiMi. 
 
 €7r€tBr) 6 avjjp ovK ecpatvero 
 ct>')(pfji7]v irXiwv. Antiph. 
 
 When the man was not forth- 
 coming I went on my 
 voyage. 
 
 €(o<; fjuev OL avfifxa^oi ovk 
 el')(pv oTTOt airoaralev 
 
 eKpVTTTOV TTjV TTpO^i VfJiOL^ 
 
 e'xjdpav. Xen. Hell, 
 
 So long as the allies did not 
 know what side to revolt 
 to, they concealed their 
 dislike to you. 
 
 § 295. FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 
 
 (a.) Final Sentences. 
 (h) oiTG)<; with Future 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 (c.) Verbs of Fearing. 
 
 With these Constructions 
 
 the regular Construction 
 
 JS 
 
362 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 296. 
 
 Ou and M77 with Relatives. 
 
 Ou. 
 
 The Relative takes ov 
 when the Antecedent is 
 definite, so that a fact 
 is spoken of. 
 
 ^yrovaa ^ap/JLa')^ evpov ov^ 
 
 a 'ffov\o/ii7]v. Eur. 
 
 a '^ovXdfirjv, i.e. a e^ov- 
 
 In seeking drugs I found not 
 what I sought. 
 Cf Xen. An. ii. 2. 3. 
 
 Note. OvSels OCTTtS ov, OVK 
 
 fCTTtv oo-Tts OV take ov. Thuc. 
 iii. 39; vii. 87; Hdt. v. 97. 
 Plat. Frot. 323 c. 
 
 In Thuc. iii. 81, ot 8k 
 
 TToAAoi TtOV lK€TtOV 6(T0L OVK 
 
 €7r€i(r6r)(Tav, the actual fact is 
 perhaps emphasised. With a 
 negative preceding rotovros, 
 OV always follows (Madvig, 
 § 203, note) : 
 
 vofxov rWe/xev, otKrja-tv kol ra- 
 ToiovTOv, eis o ov iras /?ov- 
 
 Xo/MVOS €L(T€LCrLV. 
 
 Plat. Bep. iii. 416 d. 
 A treasury which not every one 
 who wishes shall enter. 
 
 Cf. S. Matt. vii. 21, ov ttSs 
 ctcreAcvo-crat. 
 
 Mt;. 
 
 The Relative takes /xtJ 
 when the Antecedent is 
 indefinite. The use of 
 fiTj with Relatives is the 
 same as its use with el. 
 
 a 1X7) oLOa ovoe OLOjJLai ei- 
 Sevai. Plat. 
 
 Whatever I know not I do 
 not think that I know. 
 
 01 e/xe fJLT] taaai. 
 
 Plat. 
 
 Any (all, such as) do not 
 know me. 
 
 6aTi<; 
 
 jjLT] avTapK7j<; eanv 
 ovTo<; y^aXenro^ (J)lXo<; ea- 
 rl. Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 2. 
 Whoever is not self-sufficient 
 
 is a dangerous friend. 
 Cf. Aesch. Eum. 618, 661, 
 Soph. 0. T. 281 (with 
 Subjunctive and Opta- 
 tive with av). 
 
 This indefinite or generic use 
 of fx-q shades off" into a Con- 
 secutive or Final use. 
 
 \l/r)cf>l<Tao-6e roiavra e^ wv fx-q- 
 ScTTOTC v/xtv ixeTafjLcXrjcrci. 
 
 Andok 3. 41. 
 
 Pass such a sentence that you 
 ivill never repent of. 
 
O^ AND M^ WITH RELATIVES. 
 
 3^3 
 
 /xeAAovcrt yap a' 
 ivravOa Trefi^etv 'ivda fxri tto^' 
 r]X.LOv cfieyyos Trpocro^ei. 
 
 Soph. ^/. 380. 
 
 They are purposing to send thee 
 
 » where thou never more shalt 
 
 see the glory of the sun. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ai. 359, 470; 
 
 Phil. 408, 588. 
 
 Cf . the Eestrictive ocrov /atj, 
 oVa /XT^, Ka^' ocrov />i^y, ort />ti^. 
 
 ou and jjLTi are both used with the Eelative in a Causal 
 Sense. The analogy of Causal Sentences seems to show 
 that ov must be the normal construction; ^r\ is used 
 where perhaps the fact is delicately put, as for instance 
 el is put for on after Oavfid^co. This use of /juri arises 
 from its generic use. 
 
 dav/juaarov iroiel^ b? ovhcv 
 
 Xen. Mem. ii. 7. 13. 
 You are acting strangely in 
 
 giving nothing. 
 So Ak. Nuh 692 (^Tt9 oi 
 (TTpaTeverat), EuR. Med. 
 589. 
 
 TaXaiTTCdpo^ TL<; av 76 av 
 6pa)7ro<; el o) /jLTjre 6eol 
 irarpSoo euai fjunqre lepa 
 K.T.X. Plat. Euth. 302. 
 
 Yotc are a miserahle sort 
 of being since you have 
 neither national gods nor 
 sacrifices. 
 
 7ra)9 av op6co<i efiov Kare- 
 ryiyvwaKere, (p to irapa- 
 irav 7rpo9 tovtovI jULfjBev 
 avjjb^oXaiov earlv ; 
 
 Dem. Apat. 903. 22. 
 
 How could you have rightly 
 condemned me, since I 
 have no contract at all 
 with this man ? 
 Cf. Ar. Ran. 1459. 
 
364 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 297. M77 is used in Expressions of a Wish. 
 
 Mt]K6tI' ^cprjv eyo). 
 
 Ar. Mtb. 1255. 
 May I no longer live ! 
 
 jjLTi TTOT axpeXov XiTTeiv 
 
 T7JV ^KVpOV. 
 
 Soph. Phil 969. 
 Would I ne'er had left 
 My Scyros. 
 = I ought never, fiiq like 
 fjuri after hel. 
 
 €y^ dpda-vs ovT^ elfil fx-qTG ye- 
 voifX7]v. Dem. 8. 68. 
 
 / am neither bold nor might I 
 become so. 
 
 lyo) 8' OTTWs (TV fJLrj Aeyeis 6pOQ>s 
 TaSe oi5t' av Swaifxr^v firjr 
 €Tr icrr at fir^v Xeyetv. SoPH. 
 
 Ant 685. 
 But that these words thou 
 speakest are not right I neither 
 could nor may I learn to say. 
 
 ovT av Svvaofxrjv is an Apo- 
 * dosis, and therefore ov is re- 
 
 quired : firjT i7ri(rTai[JLr]v is a 
 wish ; the /x-^ with ottws is far 
 more difficult to explain, for 
 it is an Indirect Statement. 
 
 But observe that ottws /xi} 
 depends on a verb of percep- 
 tion, iTTto-ra/Aac (see note 4 /xi7 
 with Infin.). Also oVws /aij 
 expresses doubt, and is much 
 less positive than on ov. 
 Moreover the wish firjS' kiria-- 
 Tai fxrjv may throw its shadow 
 over the previous line. 
 
Mt; and M,) oh WITH THE INFINITIVE. 365 
 
 § 298. M77 and [Ly] ov with the Infinitive. 
 
 A. After a Principal Sentence containing Verbs and 
 expressions of denying, hindering, forbidding, and avoid- 
 ing, jXTj is used with the Infinitive where in English we 
 use no negative. 
 
 <^r)<; 7} Karapvel /jlt) BeSpaKevai, raBe ; SoPH. 
 Dost own or dost deny that thou hast done this ? 
 
 r)vavTiw6r]v fjLTjBev TrpaTreiv irapa Tov<i vofiov;. 
 
 Plat. 
 / opposed your doing anything contrary to the laws. 
 
 wjrayopevco firj iroteiv eKicXr^aiav. ArisTOPH. 
 I forhid your calling an assemhly. 
 
 '^TTLo-Tovv /x-q eu/at tovs ra oVAa TrapaSovTas rots redveoya-iv 
 
 6/xotov?. Thuc. iv. 40. 
 They did not believe that those who had given up their arms 
 
 were like those who had fallen. 
 
 OvrjTovs y' €Trav(Ta pr) TrpoScpKicrdaL popov. 
 
 Aesch. F. V. 248. 
 Ay, I let mortals from foreseeing their doom. 
 
 Note 1. 
 Such verbs are : — 
 avriXiyd), \ exw (and compounds), 
 
 apvovpai (and com- >deny. etpyto (and compounds), Ihirtr 
 
 pounds), j ip7ro8(j)v eTvai, ( der. 
 
 I dispui 
 
 e, doubt. 
 
 KWAVO), 
 
 aTTayop^via 
 aTT^xopat, \ -Lf- aTretTTov 
 
 ^^ ^' ' hesitate, 
 
 "^^' \ forbid. 
 
 cfievy^ 
 
 (0, 
 
 avoid. 
 
 ivXdcra'opaL, 
 
 So also oLTroXvopaL, ThUC. i. 128; dTroKpvTTTopaL, ii. 53; 
 aTTOCTTpeifxi}, viii. 108 ; vireKTpaTr^a-daL, SoPH. 0. C. 565 ; 
 cfivXaa-ao), 0. C. 667. 
 
366 THE NEGA TI VES. 
 
 Note 2. 
 M^, however, as in the English idiom, is not seldom 
 omitted. 
 
 oi' Oavetv eppvtrdfxrjv. EUR. 
 Whom I from death delivered. 
 rovTo Tis etpyet Spav okvos. PlAT. 
 Some scruple prevents me from doing this. 
 
 Cf. Soph. 0. T. 129; Thug. i. 62; Plat. Phaed. 108 e. 
 
 Note 3. 
 
 Other constructions are (1) wsre [xv] with the Infinitive, 
 (2) TO ixy] with the Infinitive, (3) tov or tov fxr] with the 
 Infinitive. 
 
 (1.) ayyeAAwv ort ras vavs aTroa-Tpkxj/eic wcrre fxr] kXOeiv. 
 
 Thug. viii. 108. 1. 
 Announcing that he had diverted the ships from coming. 
 (2.) cf/oyov TO /xt) KaKovpyetv. ThUG. iii. 1. 
 They prevented them from inflicting damage. 
 Cf. Aesch. Eum. 691 ; Soph. Antig. 263. 
 
 (3.) €K(oXv(T€ TOV KaUiv €7n6vTa<5. XeN. An. i. 6. 2. 
 
 -Se kept them from advancing and burning. 
 €^€fc TOV fiTj KaTaSvvai. Xen. An. iii. 5. 11. 
 It will keep them from sinking. • 
 Cf. Thug. i. 76, ii. 49, iii. 75 ; Xen. Cyr. ii. iv. 23. 
 
 B. But when the Verbs themselves take a :Negative 
 or quasi-Negative, pL^ ov and not fjurj alone is used with 
 the Infinitive. 
 
 Here also in English we use no negative in the sub- 
 ordinate sentence. 
 
 Tiva oUi dTrapvYJaecrOaL fjurj oi'^t eirlaraaOaL ra 
 
 StKata ; Plat. 
 Who do you think will deny that he is acquainted 
 
 with justice 1 { = no one will deny). 
 ov Xr]^Q} fjLT} ov Traai irpocj^wvelv. SoPH. 
 I will not cease to publish unto all. 
 
M,^ AND Mt) oh WITH THE INFINITIVE. 367 
 
 Tt e/jLiroBcov fir] ov^o airoOavelv ; Xen. 
 What is there to hinder us from being put to death ? 
 (=:no hindrance). 
 
 Cf. Aesch. p. V. 627 (rt /AcAAets;); Soph. Al 540, 728; 
 Xen. Symp. iii. 3 (jo {xrj ov), 
 
 C. Also when the Principal Sentence is negative, fjuri 
 ov and the Infinitive is used after expressions denoting 
 what is impossible, wrong, repugnant, and the like. Here 
 in English we use a Negative. 
 
 dBuvara rjv /jlt] ov fj,eyaXa /SXaTrrecv. ThuC. 
 It was impossible not to infiict great harm. 
 
 ovBeh fjb av ireLaeiev to fXTj ov/c eXdelv. Akistoph. 
 No one shall persuade me not to go. 
 
 VTT&TXOV (r)T7](T€lV WS OU^ OCrLOV (TOL OV fJLYj OV ^Or)$€lV 
 
 StKatocrvvY). Plat. Bep. 427, E. 
 You promised to search, on the ground that it would be 
 impious for you not to assist justice. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Symp. 218 c (dvorjTov ixyj ov). 
 
 J), Sometimes nrj ov and the Infinitive follows a Principal 
 Sentence which is not Negative in form. 
 
 alcrxpov kcm crocfiLav firj ov)(l 7rdvT(i)v KpajTiarov <j6avai. 
 
 Plat. Prot. 352 d. 
 It is immoral not to assert that wisdom is the highest of all 
 possessions. 
 
 In these cases the alo-xpov is practically condemning, blaming, 
 dissuading from a course. 
 
 (xio-re TrdcTiv alarxyvqv etvat /at) (TV(T7rov8d^€iv. 
 
 Xen. An. ii 3. 11. 
 So that all were ashamed not to co-operate heartily. 
 
 Compare these two examples with Xen. Cyr. vii. 7. 16, 
 TtVa atcrxtov fir) cftiXdv tj tov dSekcj^ou ; where a quasi-Negative 
 Principal Sentence is followed by i^j only. 
 
 See Herod, i. 187, Seivov fxr) ov Xaf3eiv. 
 
368 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 299. Mi7 ov with the Participle. 
 
 M-^ ov is found with the Participle denoting circumstance 
 {conditionally, or restridively), after a Principal Sentence ex- 
 pressing what is impossible or repugnant. 
 
 My) ov is practically equal to el ju^j, except, unless. 
 
 OVK ap icTTL cfilXoV T^ (fiiXoVVTi OvSfV, fXY) OVK dvTfc^tAoVl/ ', 
 
 Plat. Lys. 212 d. 
 No creature then is a friend to a friend, unless it love in 
 return, {without loving). 
 
 T^Keis ya/> ov Kevq ye, tovt' lyw (ra^tos 
 
 e^otSa, 117] ovyl Setfi i/xol cjicpovara ri. SOPH. 0. C. 359. 
 
 TJlou comest not empty, this I know full well, 
 
 unless thou bring' st some horror to mine ears. 
 
 SvcrdXyrjTOS yap av 
 €LrjV, TOiavSe iirj ov KarotKretptov eSpav. SOPH. 0. T. 11. 
 
 hai^d of heart were I, 
 Compassionating not so sad a session. (Cf. 0. T. 220.) 
 
 Other instances will be found in Herod, ii. 110, vi. 9. and 
 106. IsocRAT. Laud. Hel. 47. 
 
 So entirely was p.r] ov eventually regarded as equivalent to 
 €t fiYj that in Dem. de Fals. Leg. 379. 7, we find it used with- 
 out a participle expressed : at re TroAets TroAAat ^ai xaXeTral 
 Aa/^etv fXT) ov XP^^^ '^^^ TroXiopKia,, the cities were numerous and 
 difficult to take except by long waiting and by siege (sc. XrjcjiOeLa-ai). 
 
 Variant Constructions of B. C. D. (pp. 336, 7). 
 
 After a Negative Principal Sentence are used sometimes 
 (1) the Infinitive alone ; (2) p; alone instead of fxrj ov with 
 the Infinitive ; (3) to pi-q ov ; (4) tov pLrj ov. 
 
 (1) ravra ovk e^apvovvrai Tvpamiv. AeSCHIN. iii. 250. 
 Timj do not deny that they so act. 
 
 ^lXlttttov TrapeXduv ovk ^SvvavTO KtoXva-ai. 
 
 Dem. de Pac. 62. 10. 
 They were not able to prevent Philip advancing. 
 
 (2) ov TTOAVV 
 
 Xpovov ju' eirea-xov p,r] /a€ vavo-roAeii/ Ta^v. SOPH. Phil. 348. 
 
 Not long while 
 they held me from quick setting sail. (Cf. Antig. 443.) 
 
M^ AND M^j ol WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 369 
 
 (3) ovK ivavTHoa-ofxat to firj ov yeywveti/ 7rai/. 
 
 Aesch. p. F. 786. 
 ni not refuse (lit. oppose thee) to declare the tvhole. 
 
 Xen. Symp. iii. 3. 
 
 (4) Tts M.rj8(i)v (Tov d-rreXeLffiOy] tov fx-j aKoXovdetv ; 
 
 Xen. Cyr. v. 1. 25. 
 Who of the Medes failed to follow you ? 
 
 Instances of omission of /^itJ and /x^ ov are said to be rare. 
 There are however a good many. 
 
 1. MIj omitted after an Affirmative Principal Sentence, 
 Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 4. and 7. Thuc. iii. 39. 3. Soph. AL 
 70, 0. T. 129. EuRiP. Or. 263. Arist. Ach. 127. Xen. Hell 
 V. 21. Plat. Apol. xix. 31 d, xxxi. 39 e. 
 
 2. MtJ for ixr) ov after a Negative Principal Sentence, 
 Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 3. Soph. Phil. 349. Thuc. iii. 39. 
 IsoCR. Laud. Hel. 47. (Infin. alone after a Negative Sentence.) 
 
 § 300. Mt7 and /xt) ou with the Subjunctive. 
 
 Mt] with the Subjanctive expresses anxiety, apprehen- 
 sion, suspicion, surmise, and so may often be translated 
 'perhaps. 
 
 fiT) Tovro a\rj6e(; fj. 
 
 Perhaps this is true. 
 
 fiT] aypoLKorepov 7) ro aX-T^^e? eiwelv. Plat. 
 Perhaps it is somewhat blunt to tell the truth. 
 
 The addition of ov gives the opposite or negative 
 meaning : 
 
 /jLj) ov TOVTO aXrj6e<; rj. 
 Perhaps this is not true. 
 
 aXka fJiT) ov TOVT 77 '^^aXeirov, Oavarov eK^vyelv. 
 
 Plat. Apol. 
 It looks as if this were not the real difficulty — to 
 escape death. 
 
 Cf. Grit. ix. 48 C. Phaed. xi. 67 B. 
 2 A 
 
370 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 Note 1. M^ ov is found graphically with the Indicative in 
 questions. 
 
 aAA' apa firj ovx VTToXafxpaveis ; PlAT. PtoL 312 A. 
 
 But perhaps then you do not suppose ? 
 
 Note 2. oTTws /xrj, oTTws /xt) ov Is similarly used with the Sub- 
 junctive and Indicative (Pres. and Future), Plat. Cmt. 430 I), 
 Meno 77 A, Phaedo 77 B; Kiddell's Digest, p. 140. 
 
 Note 3. The same constructions of fx-t] and /xr; ov occur even 
 more commonly after a Principal Verb like <^/oa(o/xat, opw, 
 (TKOTTio, dOpo), evvoovfxa.Lj alcrxyvofiai, okvo), klvSvvos ecm, (pof^ov- 
 /xat, etc. 
 
 (a.) With Subjunctive: 
 
 (f)povTt^<i) [xrj KpaTLdTOV y /xot cnyav. XeN. Mem. iv. 2. 39. 
 / am considering whether it is not best for. me to be silent. 
 
 ravra dina-TLav irapk^iL irepl rrjs xpv)(rjs p-rj ov8apLOv ert y. 
 
 Plat. Phaed. xiv. 70 A. 
 This causes a doubt about the soul that possibly it no longer 
 exists. 
 
 (b.) With Indicative : 
 
 a. Present Indicative : • ' 
 
 6pC)ii€V pLT) NtKtas oierat rt Aeyav. PlAT. Lach. 196. 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 1253; Eur. Tro. 178, Phoen. 92 (quoted p. 267). 
 
 b. Imperfect Indicative : 
 
 opa /xt) nat^iDv eXeyev. PlAT. Theaef. 145, 
 
 c. Future Indicative : 
 
 opa p,r) Scrjo-ei. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 27. 
 KJio/SovpiaL p.7] €vpri(Top.€v. Plat. Phileb. 13. A. 
 
 ScSotxa OTTWS /x^ T€V^0jU,at. ArLST. Eg. 112. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Crat. 393 c, Rep. 451 A. 
 
 d. Perfect Indicative : 
 
 <lio/Sovp.€9a fir] dpL<f>0T€p(av rjp,apTr)Kap.€V. ThUC. iii. 53. 
 
 e. Aorist Indicative : 
 
 Set'Sw p.rj irdvra vqpLeprea eiTrev. HOM. Od. V. 300. 
 
O^ fi^ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 371 
 
 § 301. Ov fJLTJ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 A. Ov fiT] with the Subjunctive (generally the Aorist, 
 but sometimes the Present) expresses an emphatic nega- 
 tive fature statement. 
 
 ov /JLT] TTavawjjbai. ^c\oao(j)ccv. Plat. Ajpol. xvii. 
 / will never give up 'philosophy. 
 
 ovTOL a ^A')(ai.oiv, olha, /jlt] tl<; v^piarj. 
 
 Soph. Ai. 560. 
 I^one of the Achaeans, I know it, shall ever insult 
 thee. 
 
 B. Ou firj with the Future Indicative has the same 
 meaning. 
 
 dXX! 6L(Tc6\ Qv aoi fjLTj [jbe6e'>^ro[Mai irore. 
 
 Soph. El. 1052. 
 Enter within. I ne'er will follow thee. 
 
 etrrrev otl 7) Xiraprrj ovSev firj kukiov oLKielrai, avrov 
 
 cLTToOavovTo^. Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32. 
 He said that Sparta would he governed not one whit 
 
 the worse after his death. 
 
 Observe that the example is in the Graphic Oratio 
 Obliqua. 
 
 C. 1. Ov firj Interrogative with the Future Indicative 
 (second person singular) expresses a strong prohibition. 
 
 TTOto? Zev<; ; ov /jlt] \7]pr]or6L<; ; ovB' earc Zev<;. 
 
 Arist. JS^ub. 367. 
 Zeus quotha ! dont talk twaddle. There's no Zeus. 
 
 w Ov'^ajepi ov firj fjuvdov et? ttoXXou? e/oet? ; 
 
 Eur. Supp. 1066. 
 Daughter, tell not the tale among the crowd. 
 
372 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 2. Ov yJ\ with the Future Indicative (second person) 
 in the first clause is followed by a second clause express- 
 ing (a.) an affirmative command (5.) a negative command 
 or prohibition. 
 
 (a.) ov fi7] Siarpt-ylrei';, aWa yevaeo ttJ? Ovpa^ ; 
 
 Arist. Ran. 462. 
 Do7i't shilly-shally, hut taste the door. 
 
 (b.) ov fit) TTpoaoiaei^ '^elpa, /jLtjS ay\rei ttcttXcov ; 
 
 Eur. Hipp. 606. 
 Bring not thy hand near, and touch not my rotes. 
 
 3. Ov with the Future Indicative (second person), de- 
 noting an affirmative command, is followed by a Future 
 Indicative (with Kai fin, firi^e) denoting a negative 
 command or prohibition. 
 
 ov^i' (TV^Kkrjcrei^ (TTOfJua, 
 Kau 1X1} fjbed7}a-6L<i avOi^; aiGyiaTov^ \dyov<; ; 
 
 EUK. Hipp. 499. 
 Set a seal upon thy lips, 
 and let not fail again most shameful words. 
 
 ov aly averse, firjSe Betklav dpeh ; SoPH. Ai. 75. 
 Keep silence, and awake not cowardice. (Lit. wilt thou 
 nA)t silently endure ?) 
 
 Some make these two separate questions, one with ov 
 {nonne ?), the other with /xtJ {mm ?), wilt thou not endure silently ? 
 and wilt thou play the coward ? 
 
 § 302. Further Examples of ov fitj. 
 
 A. ov fxri WITH Subjunctive. 
 
 0VK€Tt {xrj SvvqraL /^acriAcvg Yifias KaraXaf^dv. 
 
 Xen. An. ii. 2. 12. 
 There is no longer any likelihood of the King overtaking us. 
 Ohs. The Present Subjunctive is here used. So also in 
 
FURTHER EXAMPLES OF Ol> fi^. 373 
 
 Plat. Eep. 341 c. (ov fxr] oT6s re fj?) : and in Soph. 0. C. 1023, 
 
 (cTrevx^^i'TaS one MS. reads eirev^iovTat). 
 
 TO jxkyicrTOv KaKov €ko)v ovSels ft^ ttotc ^oLfSy. 
 
 Plat. Leg. 731 c. 
 No one is ever likely voluntarily to choose the greatest evil. 
 
 ov fXTj ere Kpvxpo) irpos ovTiva f^ovXofxai dcfuKecrOai. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. vii. 3. 13. 
 / will not conceal from you ivhom L wish to march against. 
 
 See further Soph. 0. C. 408, 450, 649, 1024, 1702 ; Thuc. v. 
 67 ; Xen. Hell iv. 2. 3 ; Plat. Bej). 499 b ; Ar. Av. 461. 
 
 ov fir) a-KMxfr]'?, fxrjSe TroL-qa-ys airep ol Tpvyo8atfxov€S ovtol, 
 
 aAA' €vcfiriix€L. Arist. Nub. 299. 
 Don't you flout, and don't behave like your jpoor comedy hacks, 
 but, hold your peace. 
 
 Elmsley changes a-KMif/ys of the MSS. to a-KOixpei, Put. Indie. 
 Mid. Similarly in Nub. 505, ov fxr) XaX-ifar)^ has been changed 
 to AaA/jo-ets. See Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, pp. 186, 187. 
 
 If (TKbixpys is right, this is you won't jest, a possible way of 
 saying don't jest : if o-Kioxp^c, 7rot7Jo-ets, the construction is in- 
 terrogative like that of C. 1 above, p. 371. 
 
 B. ov fXTj WITH Future Indicative. 
 
 ov [xrj a-' eyw Tvepioxpopiai ojreXdovra. ArIST. Ran. 508. 
 ni not suffer you to de])art. 
 
 ov rot /XTyTTore cr' eK rwv eBpdvtov, 
 
 & yepov, aKovrd ns a^et. SoPH. 0. C. 178. 
 
 No one, be sure, from these abodes, 
 Old Sir, shall drag thee hence. 
 
 2d person in the same meaning as the above, i.e. denoting 
 not a strong prohibition, but a negative statement. 
 
 ovKovv TTor' e/c tovtoiv y€ fxrj a-Kijirrpoiv In 
 
 68onToprja-€is (Schneidewin, oSotTro/orjo-T^s.) Soph. 0. C. 848. 
 
 Never henceforth, on these p-ojps leaning, tho2t 
 
 Shalt journey hence. 
 
 Tovs yap 7rovrjpov<s ov [lyj ttotc 7roLrj(r€T€ fSeXrLovs. 
 
 Aeschin. in Ctes. 177. 
 You will never make the bad better. 
 
374 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 The following example may denote either a prohibition or 
 a statement. 
 
 ov ytyvwo-KW o-e* ov \xr\ etcret ets t^v oiKiav. ISAEUS, viii. 24. 
 / do not know you, you shall not enter the house ; or ov yJq eio-et ; 
 drniH enter. 
 
 C, OVK €5 KopaKas ; ov fxrj Trpocrirov ; ArIST. Ran. 609. 
 To the crows with you. Be off! 
 
 Observe here that the 2d person dual is used. 
 
 (i)fXLapioTaT€,TL7roi€Ls; ov pLYj Karaf^rjcra; ArIST. Vesp. 397. 
 You scoundrel J what are you at.? don't come down. 
 
 ov firj '^eyepets rov vttv^ Koiroxov 
 KOLKKivrjo-eLS Kdvacrryja-ets 
 (fiOLTOiSa ScLvrjv 
 vocrov, w TCKvov ; SoPH. Tr. 978. 
 
 Observe that e/cKivi^Vets joined by Kat is prohibitive co-ordin- 
 ately with €^€yep€Ls. 
 
 ov /JLT) KaXels ix\ 
 u)vdp<07r\ LKeTiVio, firjSi KaTCpels rovvofxa ; ArIST. Ban. 298. 
 
 Don't call me, 
 Sirrah, I pray thee, nor hlab out my name. 
 
 ov fJLYj 8v(rfJL€Vr)S €Cr€L 
 
 <f>iXoLS, Travoret Se Ovfxov, Kal -jraXiv a-rpeipets Kapa . . 
 Se^ec 8e Siopa Kal Trapatrrfo-et Trarpos ; EUR. Med. 1151. 
 
 Be not wroth tvith friends. 
 Forbear displeasure, turn thy face again, 
 Accept these offerings, and entreat thy father. 
 
 ov firj 7rpo(Toi(rcts X^tpa, /SaKxevcrciS S'ltov, 
 
 fxrjd' e^ofx6p^€L {xoypiav ttjv arjv e/xot ; EuR. Bacch. 343. 
 
 Lay not thy hand on me, go play the hacclmnal. 
 Nor smudge me with thy folly. 
 
 ovKovv KaXeh avTov Kal fxr] d(f)yj(rei<s ; PlAT. Symp. 175 A. 
 Call him, and don't send him aicay. 
 
 ov daxTo-ov oicreLs, jji,r)8' d7narT7](r€L<s ifJLOt ; SoPH. Tr. 1183. 
 Give me thy hand quick, and distrust me not. 
 
REPETITION OF THE NEGATIVE. 375 
 
 3. Ov iiff\ is found in the Obliqua with a Future Optative 
 representing a Future Indicative of the Recta. 
 
 Tct t' aAAot -KavT Wecrincrev 
 Kal rdirl Tpolas Trepyafx ws ov fxrj ttotc 
 7r€p(TOL€v, €1 fiTj TovS' ay ovTo. Soph. Phil. 611. 
 
 In the Recta this would be ov firj ttotc Trepo-ere lav /xyj ayrjcrOe. 
 A striking instance, for here the 2d person of the Future 
 would clearly be a negative statement. 
 
 All the rest he prophesied, 
 And how they ne'er should sack the towers of Troy 
 Unless they brought him with them. 
 
 ov fxrj is also found with the Future Infinitive. 
 
 cra^ws yap etire Tetpea-Las ov fii^ TTore 
 
 crovTi]vSe yrjv otKOVv^ros ev irpd^eiv ttoXlv. EuR. Phoen. 1590. 
 Recta, ov fiij TTore €v Trpd^a rj ttoXls. 
 
 Cf. Plat. Lack. 197 D, Kal yap poi SoKeU ovSe fx-q ya-drjadaL, 
 unless for ov8e /xrj we substitute ov8a[xrj as has been suggested. 
 
 § 303. REPETITION OF THE NEGATIVE. 
 
 I. Where a simple Negative follows a Negative in the 
 same clause, two Negatives make one Affirmative, as in 
 English. 
 
 ofSet? ovK tiraaye. Xen. 
 
 No one was not suffering (i.e. every one was snffering)p 
 
 ov fiovov ov ireiOovrai. 
 
 Not only do they not obey. 
 
 ov hvvafiai /jLyj yeXav. Ar, 
 
 / am not able to keep from laughing. 
 
 II. But where a Compound Negative follows a Nega- 
 tive in the same clause the first Negation is continued 
 and strengthened. 
 
 aKovei S' ovhev ovhet^; ovBevo<;. EuR. Cycl. 120. 
 
 No one obeys anybody in anything. 
 
376 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 yJr) XavOavero) ae fjirjSe rovro. Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 36. 
 Let not even this escape you. 
 
 6eov<; (po/Bovfievoc /uLrjiror acr6l36<; fjbrjSev jjurjSe avocrcov 
 
 Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 22. 
 Fea7^ the gods, and never do or intend anything either 
 impious or unholy. 
 
 § 304. OvSefe MT^Set?, OvSeV, Mt^ScV, etc. 
 
 A. OvSei? and jxrj^€i<s are used as declinable Substantives 
 both in the Singular and Plural, with or without the Article, 
 of persons. 
 
 Much more rarely 6, 17, ovSev, 6, ry, ni-jSev. 
 
 B. OvSev and fiqSev are used as indeclinable neuter predi- 
 cates of persons. 
 
 C. TO fi-qSev, an indeclinable substantive, is very freely 
 used both of persons and things. 
 
 All these constructions are chiefly poetical with the excep- 
 tion of (B), which is also Platonic. Herodotus also uses (A) 
 and (B). 
 
 We ma3r observe with regard to them : — 
 
 (1.) That ovSets, ovSh denotes what is known or proved to 
 be actually non-existent or worthless. (Of. rj ovk i^ova-ia under 
 ov privative.) OvSev is actually 
 
 (2.) MrySeis, ixy)hkv denotes an indefinite conception of what 
 is anything non-existent or worthless. (Cf. i} fxy] i^ova-ia.) 
 MrjSiv is abstract nonentity, hence to i^-q^kv. 
 
 (3.) The two sets often seem to be used indifferently, but 
 though ovStts is plainer and blunter, yet /-ti^Seis may be really 
 more contemptuous, " as nothing;' " no better than a mere cipher.'' 
 
 (4.) The construction of the sentence (with et or an im- 
 per.ative) may favour /xrj rather than ov. 
 
 (5.) Both sets of phrases are the reverse of ns (n) dvai, to 
 be a somebody. 
 
OvdeU, M^dds, Ovdev, KrjdiP, ETC. 377 
 
 Examples : 
 
 6 vvv fxlv ovSets, avpLov 8' vTrepixeyas. AriST. Eq. 158. 
 Nobody now, exceeding great to-morroiv. 
 cfypovovcTL Si^ixGv jxei^ov ovres ovSeves. 
 
 Eur. Androm. 700 ; cf. /. ^. 371. 
 
 ayere fx acTroSwu 
 to;/ ovk ovra fxaXXov r/ firjSeva. SOPH. Ant 1326. 
 
 Lead me hence 
 Who am no more than him that is as nothing. 
 
 ov yap rj^tov rovs fxrj8€va<s. SoPH. Ai 1114. 
 
 Tovs ^Mvras ev 8pav KarOavMV Se Tra? dvrjp 
 yy^ kal (TKtd' to fxr)8ev els ov8lv peTrei. EUR. Meleager. 
 i.e. luhat was believed to be nothing now proves to be actually 
 nothing. 
 For the sentiment compare the Epitaph on Gay : 
 " Life is a jest, and all things show it ; 
 I thought so once, but now I know it." 
 
 (8aLpH)iv) rjfxiv 8' ajroppd Kain fir]8ev ep^eTai. SoPH. El. 1000. 
 
 Our future is at ebb, and comes to naught. 
 Compare the fxr]8€v here with ovSer in the Meleager. 
 
 av8p€S rjfxeTepoL elcrlv ovScv. PlAT. Eep. 556 D. ; cf. 562 D. 
 
 edv 8oKioart ri ehai ix'r)8lv oVtcs. PlAT. Apol. xxxiii. 41 E. 
 
 If they think they are something, ivhen they are nothing. 
 Here kdv favours ixTq8kv rather than ov8kv. ♦ 
 
 ot' ov8\v wv tov ixr]8ev dvrea-rrjs virip. 
 
 Soph. Ai. 1231; cf. 1275. 
 
 i)/jtas TO jxr]8ev ovTas iv Tpoirrj 8op6<s 
 
 kppva-aro. SoPH. Ai 121 i; cf. EuR. El. 369. 
 
 Ket TO [xr]8\v i^€po) cfipdcrio S' ^/>tws. SOPH. Ant. 234. 
 
 Toiyap (TV ^e'^at fx eg to (tov ToSe crreyos 
 
 Trjv iJLy]8ev et§ to firjSdv. SOPH. El. 1165. 
 
 Examples in Herodotus occur in i. 32, vi. 137, ix. 58, 79. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ov8€v (/xrySev) Aeyetv, to talk nonsense or idly. 
 TO ov8' ov8kv. Plat. Theaet. 190 a, the absolute nothing. 
 6 iJLrj8ev wu yovai(rL = 8v(ry€vijs^ SoPH, Ai. 1094. 
 ov8€v (fi-qSlv) eTvai, to be doomed to death, as good as dead, 
 Soph. El. 1166; Eur. Androm. 1077. 
 
378 
 
 THE NEGA TIVES. 
 
 § 305. MrJ with Oaths and Assertions. 
 
 Mt} is sometimes found with the Indicative after an oath or 
 a strong assertion. 
 
 aa T-nv ^AcbpoSiTTjv . . . firj 'yw cr' dcfirj(TO). 
 
 Arist. Ecc. 999, cf. Av. 195, Lysist. 917. 
 Cf. also II X. 330, xv. 41. 
 
 This use of /xtJ should be compared with firj and the Infini- 
 tive after verbs of swearing and testifying (see fxrj with Infin. 
 JSfote 4). ^ . ^ 
 
 The construction is Epic. In Homer 7x77 is found both with 
 the Infinitive and the Indicative after an oath or protestation. 
 M-^ repudiates the charge. 
 
 to-TW vvv ToSe yata, k.t.X., fi'n rt (tol Ka/cov BovXeva-efxev. 
 
 Od. V. 184. 
 Be witness earth to this— far from me he it to contrive harm 
 to thee. 
 
 to-TO) vvv Zevs avTos, k.t.X., ixri dvrjp eiroxijo'eTaL dXXo<5. 
 
 II. X. 329. 
 Be witness Zeus himself — no other man shall ride. 
 
 § 306. Mrj where ov might have been expected. 
 
 Mt7, Y^ere ov might otherwise have been expected, is used 
 where the structure of the sentence requires or has a natural 
 affinity with fir]. Such cases are where (1) an Imperative 
 precedes, (2) where the sentence is Conditional, (3) where 
 the whole cast of the sentence is of the nature of a concep- 
 tion, so that the statement denied is not real fact. 
 
 1. ifrjifiLa-aa-de tov ttoAc/xov, firj (jiofSyjOevTes to avriKa Setvov. 
 
 Thuc. i. 124. 
 Vote the war without fearing the immediate danger. 
 
 ravra a-KorretTe, on fxr) irpovota jjmXXov iytyvero r/ TV)(r). 
 
 Antiph. V. 21. 
 Consider this, that it happened not so much designedly as by 
 accident. 
 
 A very exceptional use of firj, hardly explained by the pre- 
 ceding Imperative. 
 
 Cf. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 37, Soph. Ant. 546, Dem. 27. 59. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES. 379 
 
 2. o Trats ciTrep Irrrws (fiavepos vfJiLV kcm [xr] ^X-qOeis, 8rjX.ovTai 
 
 Antiph. Tetr. B., c. 5. 
 As to the child, if it is proved to you that he was not struck 
 when he was standing still, it is evident that he was killed 
 by his oicn fault. 
 
 3. OLjxai fxr] av StKatw? tovtov Tv\(dv kiraivov rov fxrj elSora ri 
 
 kcrri vofxos. Xen. Mem. i. 2. 41. 
 
 / think that one who does not know the meaning of law would 
 not deservedly receive this praise. 
 
 The first jjirj is exceptional, but the example is from 
 Xenophon, an exceptional writer. 
 
 rj 8oK€L crot oiov re eTvat eVt €Ketvrjv rrjv ttoXlv cTvai kol /jlt] 
 dvareTpdcjiOaL, kv fj al yevo/xevat SiKac jmr^Sev ta-)(yov(rLV ; 
 
 Plat, Crit. xi. 50 b. 
 Do you really think it possible for a state to continue to exist 
 and not be overthrown, in which verdicts which have been 
 passed have no avail ? 
 
 This may be regarded as regular, the /xtJ coming after ohv 
 re and not after Sokcl. 
 
 Riddell, Digest 135, collects some extreme Platonic 
 instances. 
 
 § 307. Miscellaneous Instances showing the power 
 of ov to make a downright Negative 
 Statement. Cf. the use of ov in Emphasis, 
 p. 352. 
 
 This power is very marked in contrasts : 
 
 ^vfJi/SacveL yap ov rd pXv, rot 8' 015. AeSCH. Pers. 800. 
 
 , It is not that some things are happening, while others are net 
 
 (i.e. all things are being fulfilled), 
 rjv 6 TTora/xos Sdcrvs SevSpecrt ira^ka-L jxev ov, ttvkvols Sk. 
 
 Xen. An. iv. 8. 2. 
 The river was overgrown with trees which, though^ n/)t big, 
 
 tvere numerous. 
 aTTwAero 5' ovx't, aAA.' kXvdrj. LyS. vi. 27. 
 He was not condemned to death, but acquitted. 
 
38o 
 
 THE NEGA TIVES. 
 
 Of course the construction may change ov to firj : — 
 
 (TKOTrdre ixri tovto, d raXavrov eScoKe, dXXa rrjv irpoOvfiiav. 
 
 Dem. 470. 26. 
 Consider not this point, whether he gave a talent, but his will 
 Yet even in spite of the construction ov may assert itself : 
 €1 yvoja-O-qa-ofJLeda ^vveXdovres /xev, dfxvvecrOai Se ov 
 ToA/xwi'Tes. Thuc. i. 124. 
 
 If we shall be known to have met together, and yet not to be 
 venturing to protect ourselves. 
 This power of ov to assert itself under difficulties is seen 
 very strikingly in some passages : 
 
 ^y] 6 ye ov xpv t^oUl. Plat. Euthyd. 307 B. 
 DonH do what is actually wrong. 
 The generic /at] might be expected : 
 
 eyo) yo.p, et ju,ev iir] (J^lirjV yj^av irapa deovg, rjSLKOvv av ovk 
 dyavaKrQv tw 6avdT(i). Plat. Phaed. viii. 63 B. 
 
 i.e. / should be acting wrongly in not grieving, as in ideality I do 
 grieve. 
 In spite of the Conditional structure : 
 Cf. Soph. 0. T. 651, d vo/xif«ts o^x ^4^'^^^^^- 
 
 § 308. Note on ^xtj, fjur) ov, with the Infinitive and 
 Participle. 
 
 1. Mrj with the Infinitive. This construction is perfectly 
 natural and intelligible. Indeed the Infinitive without it, 
 though allowable in Greek as in English, may be somewhat 
 ambiguous. Thus 6V davelv eppva-dfxyjv would in itself mean 
 whom I rescued for dying. The addition of firj makes it per 
 fectly clear that the net result is negative. 
 
 The negative was thus used in our earlier English : 
 You may deny that you were not the cause. 
 
 Shakspere, Bich. III. i. 3. 
 First you denied you had in him no right. 
 
 Comedy of Errors, iv. 2, 
 Precisely parallel in Greek is the use of ov with 6tl and the 
 Indicative after verbs of denying : dvreXeyov on ovk eyxapolr] 
 XeN. Hell. ii. 3. 16 ; dpvyjdrjvat (OS OVK aTreScoKC, Lys. iv. 1. 
 
 ^ The double negative is uot unknown even in Ciceronian Latin 
 Cf. Cic. De Offic. iii. 102, 118. 
 
NOTE ON M,^, M^ oh WITH INFINITIVE, ETC. 381 
 
 2. Mr) ov with Infinitive. Here it is much more difficult to 
 see the force of each negative, especially as in translating the 
 Greek into English we make no difference between />t^ and 
 [i.r\ ov. Thus we translate ocrtov />tT) /SorjOetv, it is pious not to 
 help ; ovx oa-Lov fir] ov po-qddv, it is impious not to help. But 
 we may be sure that the force of each negative was, originally 
 at least, felt in Greek. Observe that the double negative is 
 only used with the Infinitive when there is a negative, actual 
 or virtual, in the principal clause. Thus there is an additional 
 negative over and above that in the preceding construction 
 (fx-q with Infinitive). Just as /xtj with the Infinitive repeats 
 and sums up the net negative result of the principal verb, so 
 when the principal clause is negative, this additional negative 
 is repeated with the Infinitive, and sums up the efi'ect of the 
 principal clause.^ 
 
 That this was not always felt to be necessary is shown by 
 the examples under B. C. D. 
 
 3. Mrj ov with Participle must be explained in the same 
 way. E.g. in Soph. 0. T. 12, (1) Affirmatively: I should 
 he kindly — (net result) — in refusing pity (fxr) KarotKret/owv). 
 (2) Negatively : / should be unkindly — (net result) — m 
 not refusing pity (/jltj ov KaTOLKreipaiv). The Participial con- 
 struction is required either because, as in the three instances 
 from Sophocles, the Participle agrees with the subject of the 
 principal sentence, or because (as in Herod, vii. 106) it is in 
 the Genitive Absolute. The Participle denotes circumstance 
 generally, and more specially condition, restriction, etc., which 
 are only kinds of circumstance. 
 
 Wiinder (Excursus to SoPH. 0. T. 12, 13), while pointing 
 out the above reason for the Participle, denies that it is con- 
 ditional, although in 0. T. 221 he translates />i7) ovk e'xwi', unless 
 I had. In SoPH. 0. T. 12, 13, he says that with an impersonal 
 construction we might write Setvov av etr] or ala-xvv^) o-v fxoi eir) 
 fjiYj ov KaTOLKT€ip€iv. It is true that we might thus give the 
 sense of this one passage, but we could not so analyse the 
 other passages, while the above explanation seems to suit this 
 as well as the others. 
 
 ^ Mr A. Sidgwick communicates the following note: Just as in 
 KUiXiu) fiT) dpav the negatived infinitive gives the total effect of hindrance, 
 viz. : the prevented act, so in ov kuXijio /xr; oii dpav the doubly negatived 
 infinitive gives the total effect, viz. the not prevented act. 
 
382 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 To this superfluous /x^j after verbs of hindering, etc., the 
 French offers an exact parallel : Emp^chez qu'il ne se mele 
 d'aucune affaire. Compare too the redundant ne after com- 
 paratives : — Ces fruits sont meilleurs que je ne le croyais. 
 With verbs of doubting, denying, etc., used positively, the 
 French idiom follows the English: — ^je doute qu'il soit ainsi; but 
 with such verbs used negatively the French ne corresponds to 
 the Greek /x^ ov : — je n'ai jamais ni6 qu'il ne soit ainsi. 
 
 § 309* Note on \Ly) and /at) ov with the Subjunctive. 
 
 The Attic construction is chiefly Platonic and Aristotelian 
 (cf. Eth. N. X. 9. 6, Fol. iv. 4. 11, ii. 2. 8). But the construc- 
 tion is as old as Homer, e.g. Od. v. 467, /xrj fte a-Ttl^r] re Kaxr) 
 /cat ByiXvs eepa-Yj Safxdcrrj, Perchance cruel rime and soft dew shall 
 blast me. We have here the original deprecatory force of /z^j, 
 let it not. In a writer like Plato this /xtj has become simply a 
 suggestion put politely, and with a delicate irony. Closely allied 
 to this is the interrogative use of /xrj in the example quoted 
 from the Protagoras (312 a). We need not call the construc- 
 tion elliptical any more than /x?) ykvoiro need be called ellip- 
 tical. When a Principal Verb (such as 6/)5) is expressed, the 
 thought is more logically and fully stated, and the clause with 
 /xrj has become subordinate: but the two constructions are par- 
 allel and synonymous. 
 
 M^ ov after a Principal Verb is also found in Homer, //. xv. 
 164, <f)pa^ecrd(j) ixr) fx/ ovSg KpaT€p6s irep €0)v kiriovTa raXdcrcry} 
 fj^elvai, Let him look to it whether, stout though he be, he endure not 
 to await my coming. Ov is strictly negative or privative here, 
 as in the Attic examples. Thus in the construction of /xtJ and 
 fMTj ov both particles exert their legitimate force. Mrf ov with 
 the Subjunctive occurs also in Herod, vi. 9. 
 
 § 310. Note on ov fit] with the Subjunctive and 
 the Future Indicative. 
 
 Both constructions are post-Homeric. It is impossible to 
 trace them with historical certainty, and therefore any explana- 
 tion suggested must be theoretical. 
 
 1. ov firi with the Subjunctive. This construction is found 
 both in Prose (Herodotus, Xenophon, Isaeus, Plato, Demo- 
 sthenes), and in Verse (Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, 
 Aristophanes). 
 
NOTE ON Ov ^77 WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 383 
 
 Both ov and />t/j appear to exert their proper force. The 
 construction seems to be the negative of /xi) with the Subjunc- 
 tive. (See note on that construction, § 309.) Thus /xr) TriO-qTac 
 would mean far be it that he obey ; ov negatives this apprehen- 
 sion : it is not a case of such surmise, there is no likelihood of 
 his obeying, he ivill not obey. Such a construction in the 
 second person is tantamount to a prohibition, as in the example 
 from the Clouds of Aristophanes. If this view is correct, we 
 need no more understand an ellipse of Seos or Setvoi/ between 
 the ov and the />irj here than in /x/j with the Subjunctive. 
 
 ov Seos, ov ^eivov fully expressed occur often enough (Hdt. i. 
 84 ; Plat. Ajpol. ch. xvi. 28 B, Phaed. 84 b, Rep. 465 b ; Xen. 
 Mem. ii. 1. 25 ; Arist. Ecc. 650). 
 
 2. ov /x/j with the Future Indicative is far more difficult. 
 In the first place the construction is almost wholly poetical. 
 It occurs in Hdt. iii. 162, Plato, Aeschines, as a rare 
 idiom in each. It is very common in Sophocles, Euripides, 
 Aristophanes. 
 
 {a) Is the phrase Interrogative ? ^ 
 
 In favour of ov fxij with 2d person of the Future being 
 interrogative are the following considerations : A positive 
 command is commonly expressed by ov interrogative with the 
 Future, e.g. Arist. Lys. 459, ovx eA^er', ovTrotrjo-er', k.t.A. ; fol- 
 lowed by imperatives iravea-de, k.t.X. Sometimes ov /xrj with 
 the Future (expressing a negative command) appears side 
 by side with ov and the Future (expressing a positive com- 
 mand). The juxtaposition is very striking in Arist. Ban. 
 200-2, a passage which shows that in the time of Aristophanes 
 the two idioms could be used as exact opposites. 
 
 Professor Goodwin's objection to the Future being inter- 
 rogative, derived from the single passage in the Clouds (296), 
 where an Imperative and not a Future is joined by dXXd to 
 ov fjiTj with a Subjunctive (v. I. a Future), is not convincing. 
 The inference (supposing that the Future is the true reading) 
 need only be that ov fxyj with the Future had become a stereo- 
 typed Imperative. And in Arist. Lys. 459 (above). Soph. Ant. 
 885 we have the Imperative immediately following ov with the 
 Future used interrogatively, though not joined by a conjunc- 
 tion to it. 
 
 * Mr. A. Sidgwick writes : '* It is to me quite clear that oi fiij with 
 the Future is usually interrogative ; when not, it is a form of oi ix-fj with 
 the Subjunctive." 
 
384 THE NEGATIVES, 
 
 Against the phrase being interrogative may be urged that 
 such a theory assigns a different origin not only to ov /xri with 
 the 2d person of the Future from ov ixtj with Subjunctive, but 
 also from ov fxrj with the 1st and 3d persons of Future. This 
 difficulty is increased by the fact that ov fjnj with the 2d person 
 of the Future may, though rarely, express a negative state- 
 ment, like ov firj with Subjunctive. 
 
 If, in spite of this, the Interrogative theory is maintained, 
 we should have to assign a different origin to this special 
 idiom ; doubtless a serious but not perhaps a fatal objection, 
 for the evolution of popular idioms is as manifold as it is 
 obscure. 
 
 (b) Ov and ov firj followed by kuC, dXXd, Kal /x>^, /x^yoe : 
 
 If ov fiYj is interrogative the explanation is simple. Ov 
 throws its force over each connected clause which follows. 
 The simplest case is Soph. Tr. 978, where Kal follows. The 
 most complex is EuR. Bacch. 343, where the process would be 
 ov /xr] 7rpoa-oia-€L<; ; — ov f3aK)(^eva-€L<s ; (joined by Si) — ov fxrj l^o- 
 fiop^et ; Will you not avoid bringing near ? Will you not play the 
 bacchanal ? and will you not avoid wiping off? 
 
 If oi) fiTj is not interrogative each subsequent clause will 
 have to be differently explained. EuR. Bacch. 343 would run 
 thus — Ov jxr] Trpoaroio-ets, you shall not bring near ; PaKyeva-ei^ 
 Be, but you shall play the bacchanal (like irpos Tavra Trpd^eis, 
 Soph. O.C. 956); /xr) l^o/xop^et could only be explained on the 
 assumption of fxyj with the Future being prohibitive, a con- 
 struction which has yet to be established. 
 
 The interrogative theory of ov pufj finds decided support 
 here, not only from the extreme abruptness of each clause 
 thus made independent, but from the grammatical difficulty 
 thus occasioned. 
 
 (c) Professor Goodwin {Moods and Tenses, § 89) considers 
 that in ov jxrj with the Future, ov is added (not interroga- 
 tively) to /x?i with the Future Indicative used as a Prohibition. 
 But (l) M with the Future Indicative thus used is a con- 
 struction of extreme rarity, if it exists at all. Some of the 
 instances quoted (Moods and Tenses, § 25, Note 5 (b) ), e.g. 
 Soph. Ai. 572, are probably not to the point, and in others, 
 assuming the Future Indicative to be the correct reading, a 
 different explanation seems possible. (2) Assuming the ex- 
 istence of firj with the Future Indicative as a Prohibition, it is 
 
NOTE ON Ol fxfj WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 385 
 
 difficult to see how a Prohibition can be got out of ov jxyj with 
 the Future as a statement. An analysis of the phrase ov (you 
 shall not) fifj 7rot?jo-€t5 (don't do) would land us in a meaning 
 precisely opposite to that required. On the other hand, we 
 get the right meaning if the phrase is interrogative, ov, won't 
 you, fiT] 7roi7]a-€is ; abstain from doing ? 
 
 In ov fir] with the Subjunctive Professor Goodwin does not 
 attempt to account for the fxrj. He considers the Subjunctive 
 as ''a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive used as a 
 weak Future." 
 
 (d) Mr. Eiddell (Digest of Platonic Idioms, p. 177) explains 
 the double use of the negative on the principle of " simul- 
 taneity of force;" i.e. both particles, like a double-barrelled 
 gun, concentrate their fire on one verb. It is quite true that 
 in course of time the two particles formed one strong redup- 
 licated negative, their origin being quite lost sight of. Such 
 cases as Soph. Fhil. 611, Eur. Fhoen. 1590, clearly show this. 
 Still the question remains, How is it that ov and /jltj, differing 
 as they do, combine their force 1 
 
 (e) Can ov and fxri be separately explained ? 
 
 It is firj which requires explanation, not ov. Ov on any 
 theory exerts its simple contradictory force. 
 
 If ov firj with the Future is interrogative, ov fxrj Trotijareis ; 
 must mean, Won't you abstain from or avoid doing"? It is 
 always objected that this explanation gives ixtj the privative 
 force of ov. Not so, for fxrj Troirjo-ets need not represent a 
 privative ov ttoiw, but rather a deprecated future act. The 
 use of fiTj with the Future Indicative would help us to un- 
 derstand how the idiom might arise. Now the independent 
 use of /x^ with the Future is extremely uncommon. It occurs, 
 rarely, in questions (e.g. Plat. Bep. 405 A., apa fiiq n 
 fxet^ov e^ets Aa/?€ti/ reKfi-qpLov). MtJ interrogative is simply 
 fjnj denoting an apprehension. It occurs after oaths and 
 similar assertions (II. x. 330, Arist. Ecc. 991). But the 
 Future Indicative, graphically substituted for the Subjunctive, 
 is fairly common (cfiof^ovixai pr) evprjo-oiJiev, Plat. Phileb. 13, 
 and the Future Indicative is joined co-ordinately to the Sub- 
 junctive in several places (e.g. Aesch. Pers. 124; Soph. El. 
 43 ; cf. Arist. Ecc. 495). 
 
 If ov /Arj is not interrogative then it will be a more vivid 
 and graphic substitution of ov /xvj for the Subjunctive. The 
 
 2b 
 
386 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 process would be ov [irj Trot-r'ja-rjs, it is not the case (ov) /xi) 
 TToi-qarrjs (of apprehending that you may do), or ov fxr) Trotvjo-et? 
 (that you really will do). This readily passes into a command 
 (cf. Eur. Med. 1320, x^^/^' ^' ^^ ^ava-ets ttotc, thou shall not 
 touch, i.e. touch not). 
 
 A list of passages in which ov /jlyj occurs with the Future is 
 given for reference. 
 
 HdT. ill. 162 (ov firj avapXaa-r-qa-ei). AeSCHIN. de CoT. 79. 12. 
 
 Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32. Isaeus, viii. 24. 
 
 Plat. Symp. 175 A. (ovkow koI fitj). 
 
 Soph, (a.) ov fxij, 1st or 3d person : 
 
 El. 1052; 0. a 177; Phil. 611 (Optative in Obliqua). 
 
 (b.) ov fit], 2d person : 
 0. T. 637 (ov . . . Kai 1X7]) ; 0. C. 847 (not a prohibition) ; 
 Ji. 75 (ov . . . fx'qSe); Track 978 (ov /atJ . . . Kat) ; 1183 
 (ov . . . [xrjSc). 
 
 EURIPID. Hipp. 213 ; lb. 496 (ovx^ . . . Kal /xtJ) ; lb. 1601 (ov 
 />t>} . . . fxrjSe); Androm. 797; /St^p;?. 1066; Bacch. 342 (ov 
 ftry . . . 8e . . . /xr/Se). 
 
 ArISTOPH. i^6l?l. 202 (ov [XYj . . . dXXd) ; 7Z>. 298 (ov /xrj . . . 
 /xrySe); /^>. 462 (ov fxr) . . . dXXd) ; Ach. 166; Fesp. 397; 
 iVw6. 296, 367, 505 (the subjunctive of the MSS. in these 
 passages has been changed by edrtors to the future 
 indicative). 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 Introductory. 
 
 § 3II« By Oratio Recta is meant the words or thoughts 
 of a person given at first-hand, as from his own lips, 6.g. — 
 
 / will give what I have. 
 
 By Oratio Obliqua is meant the words or thoughts of a 
 person given at second-hand by some one else, e.g. — 
 
 or 
 
 iXeyev on ((os) Swcrot 'a e^ofc. 
 He said he would give what he had. 
 
 If the words are reported in the following way : — 
 
 lAeyev oVt (ws) 8(oo"o> a e^w. 
 
 He said, " / will give what I have" 
 
 we have no Obliqua «,t all: e'Aeyev ort introduces the 
 original words just as in English we put them in inverted 
 commas, as a quotation in fact. 
 
 e.g. TrpoareXOovTes Se fiOL ry v(TTepaLf^ MeXrjTOS Kal ^vcf)LXr]TO<s 
 e'Aeyov ort, y^yei^i^rat, w 'AvSoklStj, kol Tr^TrpaKTac 'qjxlv 
 ravra. Andok. de Myst. 63. 
 Next day Meletus and Euphiletus came to me and said, 
 ^^ It has taken place, Andokides, we have done it." 
 
 But the reporter may give the words thus : — 
 
 €(f>r] 8lO(T€LV a ^X^'" 
 
 eXeyev ort (cus) Swcret a e^et. 
 
 Here we have a kind of Obliqua extremely common in 
 Greek, and often alternating in the same paragraph with 
 
388 O RATIO OB LI QUA. 
 
 the Obliqua given above. From a love of what is graphic and 
 vivid the Greeks keep the original mood while only changing 
 the person. Or we may say that they keep the mood which 
 would be used if the Obliqua were in Primary Sequence : 
 
 Observe then that in Oratio Obliqua — 
 
 1. The Jp^•507^, whatever it was in the Recta, becomes the 
 3d in the Obliqua. ^ 
 
 2. The tense of the Recta never changes. If it did, the 
 Obliqua would not represent faithfully the time and act of 
 the Recta. 
 
 3. The Mood may either 
 
 (a.) be changed to the Optative in the Obliqua (of 
 
 Historic Sequence)^ 
 (&.) be retained as it was in the Recta, or in Primary 
 
 Sequence. 
 
 By Oratio Obliqua is here meant reported speech in 
 Historic Sequence. Oratio Obliqua in Primary Sequence 
 involves (in Greek) no change of Mood in the Adverbial and 
 Relative Sentences, and therefore can at once be dismissed 
 w^ith one brief example by way of illustration. 
 
 Oratio Recta : 
 
 / will remain until they return whom I am sending. 
 
 Oratio Obliqua : 
 
 <f)-ncrt ) ^iaixevdv » >t > ^^n 'if 
 
 T; „ / 1 \ > <y ^ €to5 av cTraveAc^cocrtv ov<5 Tre/XTret. 
 
 Aeyet on (wsj j Ota/xcvet ' 
 
 He says that he will remain, until they return, whom he is 
 Ing. 
 
 vofxi^o), av Tovr' aKptf^Cis fxdOyjTe fxaXXov v/xas T0VT0L<i [xkv 
 d7^tc^Tryo■et^', e/xot Se f^oi^dqa-eiv. DeM. Onet. 870. 24. 
 
 / consider that, if you learn the truth of this, you will he more 
 likely to distrust them, and help me. 
 
 ^ Unless the speaker quotes his own words, or those of a person 
 whom he is addressing, e.g. "I told you that I knew nothing of the 
 matter ;" " You stated that you would lend me ten pounds." 
 
RULES FOR SUB-DIRECT CLAUSES. 389 
 
 Sub-direct and Sub-oblique. 
 
 When Eecta is changed to Obliqua, the Principal Sentence 
 {i.e. the Substantival Sentence, whether Oblique Statement, 
 Question, or Petition), becomes itself subordinate to the 
 reporter's verb (He said, asked, requested). Such a Sentence is 
 technically called Suh-direct, i.e. subordinate to Recta. 
 
 What were the subordinate sentences of the Recta, i.e. 
 Adverbial or Relative Sentences, become subordinate to a 
 Principal Sentence which itself is subordinate. They are now 
 technically called Suh-ohlique, i.e. subordinate to an Oblique 
 clause. For brevity's sake these terms, Sub-direct and Sub- 
 oblique {i.e. Adverbial and Relative Sentences in Oratio 
 Obliqua), will be used in this chapter. 
 
 The terms have been explained in the Introductory Chapter, 
 p. 11. 
 
 §312. Rules for Sub-direct Clauses in Oratio 
 Obliqua. 
 
 Such clauses are either (1) Oblique Statements with ort and 
 to?, or Oblique Questions. Oblique Petitions take an Infinitive, so 
 that their construction is just like an Oblique Statement in 
 the Infinitive after ^r]{xi. Sentences with ottcds and oVos //■•^ 
 (with Future Indicative or Subjunctive) follow the construc- 
 tion of the Oblique Question. The Oblique Statement in the 
 Participle presents no difficulty. 
 
 Co-ordinate Sentences follow the construction of those to 
 which they are joined. 
 
 A. In Primary Sequence, i.e. when the Principal Sentence 
 takes a Primary tense, the Mood and Tense of the Sub-direct 
 Sentence undergo no change. 
 
 B. In Historic Sequence the Sub-direct Sentence may either 
 
 (1.) be just what it was in Primary Sequence, under- 
 going no change — (this is called the Graphic 
 Construction) — or, 
 
 (2.) the Verb may be changed to the same tense of 
 the Optative. 
 But N.B. The Imperfect and Pluperfect Indica- 
 tive must remain in the Indicative, and not 
 
390 O RATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 be changed to the Optative. If they were 
 changed we could not distinguish them from 
 Present and Perfect Optatives. Historic Tenses 
 of the Indicative with civ must also remain in 
 the Indicative. 
 
 A few instances occur where the Present Optative represents 
 an Imperfect Indicative of the Eecta. In such cases however 
 no ambiguity exists. 
 
 TO, 7re7rpayfX€va SLrjyovvTO, on avrol fxkv TrXeoiev rrjv 8e 
 dvacpea-LV twV vavayiov Trpo(rr a^aiev. XeN. Hell. i. 7. 5. 
 
 They were describing the fads, explaining that they themselves 
 were sailing {against the enemy),, and that they had com- 
 missioned (proper ptersons) to p)ick up the shipwrecked 
 seamen. 
 
 Recta, avTol ^TrXeofiev Kcd Trpocr.erd^ajxiv. Of. vii. 1. 38, 
 iOeXoi, BovXevoLTO. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Tense of an Infinitive in a Sub-direct Clause is 
 the same as in the Recta, e.g. €ypa\pa, I wrote ; 'i(f>r) ypdipai, he 
 said that he had written ;■ Xkye, speak ; eKeXevcv avrbv Xkyeiv, he 
 was ordering him to speak. The time of the Infinitive Tense 
 may therefore be instantly discovered by turning it back to 
 the Recta. So with the time of a Participle. 
 
 Obs. 2. No verb takes av because of its conversion from 
 Recta to Obliqua. If in the Obliqua a Finite Verb, Infinitive, 
 or Participle takes av, it is because it had an dv in the Recta. 
 The tables of converted Conditional Sentences will show this. 
 
 § 313' Types of Sub-direct Clauses in Historic 
 Sequence. 
 
 A. I. Original Recta (Statement). 
 
 f 1. ravra fxavOdvo). 
 
 ^ 2. ravra ixaQy](jop.a.i. 
 
 ^ 3. ravra ixefxdOriKa. 
 VK( 4. ravra kfidvOavov. 
 v*? 5. ravra ifxefidOtjKrj. 
 vl 6. ravra efiaOov. 
 
S UB-DIRECT CLA USES IN HISTORIC SEQ UENCE. 39 1 
 
 II. Converted to Obliqua in Historic Sequence. 
 
 Principal. 
 cAe^ev oTi, (OS. 
 
 1. ravTa fiavOdvei. 
 ravra fxavOdvoL. 
 
 2. ravra fxad'qcrerai. 
 ravra fiaOijarotro. 
 
 3. ravra fiefidOTjKe. 
 ravra /xe/xa^i^Ktus €try. 
 
 4. ravra kfxdvdave. 
 
 5. ravra i/JLejxaOi^Kei. 
 
 6. ravra efxaOe. 
 ravra fidOoi. 
 
 Sub-direct. 
 Graphic. 
 Strict Sequence. 
 Graphic. 
 Strict Sequence. 
 Graphic. 
 Strict Sequence. 
 
 Graphic. 
 
 Strict Sequence. 
 
 B. I. Original Eecta (Question). 
 
 1. Tt fiavBdvets \ 
 
 2. Tfc fiadyjaei ; 
 
 3. Tt jxeixdOrfKas j 
 
 4. Tt efiavdaves ; 
 
 5. Tt ifiefxaO-qKeis ', 
 
 6. Tt efxaOe? ', 
 
 rjpero. 
 
 II. Converted to Obliqua. 
 
 1. oTt or Tt. 
 
 3. 
 
 fjLav6dv€L. Graphic. 
 fxavOdvot. Strict Sequence. 
 fjMdrjcreraL. Graphic. 
 fiaOrjo-oLro. Strict Sequence. 
 fjLc/jidOrjKe. Graphic. 
 fjiefjLadrjKios etr). Strict Sequence. 
 
 kixdvdavi. 
 ffJLCfiad'qKeL. 
 cfxaOe. Graphic. 
 fxddoL. Strict Sequence. 
 
 Note. The Aorist Indicative is preferable to the Optative 
 whenever it avoids ambiguity. Thus ovk cTxov on Spdaetav 
 might mean either they did not know what to do (Recta, Tt 
 Spdcruifiev ; a deliberative Subjunctive), or, they did not know 
 what they had done (Recta, Tt iSpda-a/xev ; ). Almost always the 
 first construction is intended. 
 
392 O RATIO OB LI QUA. 
 
 C. Similarly with ottws, ottw? /x?5 (a much rarer construction 
 after verbs of commanding, etc., than the Infinitive). 
 
 Recta : ottcos /xt) ccrea-Oe dvd^LOt eXevOeptas. 
 
 See that you be not unworthy of freedom. 
 
 .X ,, N eo-ovrat ) Graphic. 
 
 ^ ' ' ' ' ' ecroiVTo j btrict [Sequence. 
 
 D. With Deliberative Questions. 
 
 Recta, iroi ^uyw ; 
 
 Obliqua, 'qiropet TTOL (oTToi) (jivyy \ Graphic. 
 
 <f)vyoL j Strict Sequence. 
 
 § 3I4« Rules for Sub-oblique Clauses in the Oratio 
 
 Obliqua. 
 
 A. In Primary Sequence they undergo no change of Mood 
 or Tense in passing from the Eecta. 
 
 B. In Historic Sequence : 
 
 1. By the graphic construction they undergo no change, 
 
 continuing to be what they were in Primary 
 Sequence. 
 
 2. The verb is changed to the same tense in the Optative, 
 
 in Strict Sequence. 
 
 But N.B. The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative 
 must remain in the Indicative and not be changed to the 
 Optative. Exceptions will be noticed further on. 
 
 § 3I5* Note to accompany the following Tables. 
 
 The construction of Sub-oblique as well as Sub-direct 
 Clauses is shown in Conditional Sentences converted from the 
 Recta to the Obliqua. The Recta will be found by referring 
 to Conditional Sentences (page 198), and need not be repeated 
 here. The Apodosis is the Principal Sentence in the Recta 
 and the Sub-direct in the Obliqua. The Protasis is the Sub- 
 direct in the Recta, and the Sub-oblique in the Obliqua. The 
 Protasis may be taken as the type of any Adverbial Sub-oblique 
 Clause by S-ubstituting eTreiSyj, ore, ews, TrpLV, etc., for €t or edv. 
 It may equally well stand as the type of any Relative Sub- 
 oblique Clause, but for the sake of completeness a Relative 
 Conditional Table is given converted to the Obliqua. 
 
TYPES OF ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 393 
 
 Observe that in the Sub-oblique Clauses, Adverbial or 
 Relative, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative of 
 the Recta are not converted to the Optative but continue in 
 the Indicative. 
 
 The conversion of General Suppositions may be thus 
 shown : 
 
 Recta : r\v lyyvs eA.^77 davarro^ ovSets (SovXeraL Ovtictkclv. 
 
 aXX €t Tt fXY] (f)€pOlfX€V &TpVV€V cf>ep€iV. 
 
 Obliqua after yjv eXOy — fiovXerai — Graphic. 
 
 e'Ae^e on el cXOoi — fSovXoLTO. 
 
 €L Ti fJbTj cfispoiev — cjTpvvev. 
 
 €(f)r) rjv IXOrj — ov^kva ^ovXecrdai — Graphic. 
 
 el eXBoi — ov^eva fSovXecrOat. 
 et TL fxrj (pepotev — orpvveiv cfiepeiv. 
 He said that, if they were not fetching anything, he 
 was ordering them to fetch it. 
 
 § 316. Types of Oratio Obliqua, showing Sub-direct 
 
 and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua. 
 
 The Protasis is the Sub-oblique, the Apo- 
 
 dosis the Sub-direct Clause. 
 
 If you do this you are doing wrong becomes, when reported 
 by another person. He said that if he did it he was doing wrong. 
 
 I. With Xeyo) 
 
 on, and a finite mood : 
 
 
 1. Primary Sequence : 
 
 
 Sub-obhque (the Protasis). 
 
 Sub-direct (the Apodosis) 
 
 fel ravra Trotet 
 
 aoiKei 
 
 
 TreiroLr^Ke 
 
 
 
 el ravra eTToiei 
 
 ySiKei 
 
 
 eiroLr](Te 
 
 ySiKYjore 
 
 
 eav (rjv) ravra ttolt) 
 
 dSiK-jo-ei 
 
 Xeyec on (a)5)< TToiiqa-ri 
 
 
 
 €t ravra iroLotrj or 
 
 dSLKoiYj dv or 
 
 
 TTOLT^rrete 
 
 dSLKYjo-eiev dv 
 
 
 el ravra iroi-qa-ei 
 
 dhiKYjcrei 
 
 
 el ravra eTrotei 
 
 r]8iK€L dv 
 
 
 \el ravra e7roir]cre 
 
 "q^iKYjo-ev dv 
 
394 
 
 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 2. Historic Sequence : 
 
 f 
 
 lAe^e oTi (ws) 
 
 In the graphic construction the construction after e'Ae^e on 
 will be just the same as after Aeyet on. The Future and 
 Perfect Indicative (graphic) are commoner than their cor- 
 responding Optatives. 
 
 II. With <^ry/xi and an Infinitive : 
 1. Primary Sequence : 
 
 r A. Present d ravra Trotets 
 
 kiroUiS 
 eTroLrjcra? 
 
 el ravra ttoloitj 
 el ravra e-rroUt 
 
 dSLKOirj 
 rjStKeL 
 
 €7roir)(T€ 
 el ravra Troioir] 
 
 aoLKrjcrete 
 'qSiKrja-e dv 
 
 Troi-qa-ete 
 el ravra TroioLrj 
 
 dSiKOtr] dv 
 
 TTOi^crete 
 el ravra Troi-qcroL 
 el ravra eiroieL 
 
 dStK'qcreLev dv 
 dSiK-ja-oi 
 rj8LK€i dv 
 
 el ravra eTroi-qa-e 
 
 rjSiKrjo-ev dv 
 
 B. Past el ravra i 
 
 t^^^^^ <Te i C. Future a. kdv Ta{5ra [ ""'T 
 
 b. el ravra < 
 
 II. 
 
 { 
 
 aoiKetv 
 dSiKeiv 
 dSiKrja-ac 
 
 dSiKirja-eLv 
 
 dStKciv av 
 d8iKrj(TaL dv 
 dStKT^o-etv 
 dSiKelv dv 
 d8iKrj(TaL dv 
 
 OL-qa-ris 
 TTOLoirjs 
 TTOL-qa-iELas 
 [^ C. el ravra 7roiryo-€i5 
 
 A. Present et ravra iTrotets 
 
 B. Past el ravra e-n-otrjcras 
 Note. An Imperative in Apodosis would of course depend 
 
 on a Verb of commanding (Indirect Petition), 
 Ovpav, knock at the door ; elire Koirreiv rrjv dvpav, 
 knock at the door. 
 
 2. Strict Historic Sequence : 
 
 I A. Present et ravra iroLoirjs 
 
 B. Past et ravra { , , 
 
 eTTOirjcras 
 
 TTOiOir]^ 
 
 TTOtijcreias 
 
 7 5 r. I TTOlOL-nq 
 
 0. ei ravra < , ' 
 
 TTOLrja-etas 
 
 C. el ravra TroL-qa-ots 
 
 { 
 
 fw or ^^ ^ Q Future a. el ravra [ 
 
 { 
 
 e.g. KOTrre rr)v 
 he told him to 
 
 dSiKetv 
 dSiKetv 
 dSiKrjaai 
 
 dSiKT^a-etv 
 
 dSiKetv dv 
 dSiKyja-ai dv 
 dBiK'qcreiv 
 
THE APODQSIS IN THE PARTICIPLE. 393 
 
 f A. Present d ravra eiroUcs dSiKeLV av 
 
 ( B. Past el ravra eiroLr}cra<s aSiK^o-at av 
 
 Note. Et with the Optative in the Strict Historic Obliqua 
 stands for three distinct forms. Thus et 7rotoir;s may represent 
 (a) el TTotets, a present condition ; (b) edv 7rocr]<s, an ordinary 
 future condition ; (c) el ttololtjs, a less graphic future condition. 
 
 § 317- The Apodosis in the Participle. 
 
 1. Primary Sequence. 
 
 otSd (re, el ravra Trotct?, dScKovvra, and SO on, the Participle 
 in each case being in the same tense as the corresponding 
 Infinitive. 
 
 2. Historic Sequence. 
 
 ySrj (rCj ei ravra iroLotrjs, dScKOvvra, and SO on. 
 
 Note, el ravra Trotto aSt/cw becomes oiSa el ravra Trotw aSiKwy, 
 
 § 318. A Relative Sentence in the Sub-oblique 
 
 Clause. 
 
 Recta. 
 
 a. e'x^' StSwcrt 
 
 a el^e or ec^e eStSov or e8o)Ke 
 
 r*- a €)(0t SlSolt] av 
 
 t ^ a e^ei * Siocrei 
 
 ? C^' a eL)(ev eSiSov av 
 
 Cct^ a e(T)(€v eSiOKev av 
 
 Note. Observe that a dv exy becomes in the Obliqua a e^ot : 
 whereas a etxe remains a etxe, and is not converted into a exot. 
 a exoi represents three forms, a exec, a dv exy, d exot, but 
 the Apodosis is in each case sufficient to prevent ambiguity. 
 If, however, a etxe eSiSov were changed to a e'xot BiSotrj the 
 ambiguity would be real. 
 
396 
 
 O RAT 10 OB LI QUA. 
 
 Ohliqua. 
 
 Note. After cAeJe on or w?, by the Graphic Construction 
 the clauses would remain unchanged : but the real Obliqua 
 would be as follows : — 
 
 eXc^e OTi (ws) a €)(ot 
 
 BiSotY] 
 
 a e^xe or ecrxe 
 
 iSiSov or e8(OK€ (or, instead of 
 
 
 eScoKC, Sotrj) 
 
 a €Xoi 
 
 ScM-oL (more commonly Suxrei) 
 
 a e^ofc 
 
 StSotrj av 
 
 a e^ot 
 
 SaxroL (Swcrct) 
 
 a etx^v 
 
 eSiSov (XF 
 
 a ecrxev 
 
 eScDKcv av 
 
 Note. Observe the retention of the Aorist Indicative, which 
 is not changed to the Optative. If we were to write e'Ae^e on 
 Swcrot (Stuo-et) a XdjSoL, or ecfirj Siocreiv 6 n Xaf^ot, we should 
 rightly take this to mean, he said that he would give whatever he 
 took ; a Xd/SoL would represent a Recta d dv kdjSio, and not 
 a e\aj3ov, what I actually took. 
 
 § 319* Some real Examples analysed. 
 
 Principal. Sub-direct. Sub-oblique. 
 
 Ci n fJidx'rj'S Sojtrot. 
 
 1. e(f>r] Xr]7rT€ov eivat \ irapa- 
 
 eXeyei/ on (ws) X-qirreov ecrrt j (TTara? 
 
 Adapted from Xen. Cyr. viii. 1. 10. 
 He said that he must get comrades j if there should be 
 
 I need of a battle. 
 Recta : Xrjrrnov icrn Trapaa-Tdras ci n fidx^jS Ser^cret. 
 
 I must get comrades if there shall be need of a battle. 
 The Obliqua is partly Graphic, partly strict Historic. 
 
 2. c4>y] 
 
 e'Aeyev on 
 He said 
 
 (-') 
 
 ov^ev ai'Tw fiiXeiv 
 ov^ev avTM fxeXot 
 that he cared not 
 
 eTretSr} elSeirj. 
 
 Lys. xii. 74. 
 
 since he knew. 
 
 Recta : ovSh jxoi ixkXei eTraSr) 
 e/SovXevovTO oVws totev 
 
 They were con- 
 
 eTreiSrj yevoiVTO irapd 
 TO) 7roTa/xa>. 
 
 Adapted from Thuc. vii. 80. 
 
 how they should go I tvhen they came to 
 
 I the river. 
 
 Recta : ttws tw/xei/j €7retSav yeva>p,€6a ; a Deliberative 
 Question. 
 
REAL EXAMPLES ANALYSED. 
 
 397 
 
 Principal. 
 
 4. ia-KOTrei 
 
 He was consi- 
 dering. 
 
 Eecta : 
 
 5. "AVVTOS €<f>rj 
 
 Anytus said 
 that 
 
 Eecta : 
 
 Observe that 
 changed to 
 
 6. XeyovQ-L Se 
 
 Sub-Direct. 
 
 TTWS avTW ecroLTO 
 
 how he should find one 
 
 TTOJS fJ^OL ecrraL 
 
 ov)(^ 0101/ re etvai to firj 
 aTTOKTeivai fxe 
 
 it was impossible for you 
 not to sentence me to 
 death 
 
 Sub-oblique. 
 
 oVrts ddxj/oi, 
 
 ISAE. ii. 10. 
 to bury him. 
 
 ocTTLs Odij/^L ; 
 
 evretSr) elcryjXOov Sev- 
 po. 
 
 Plat. Jpol. xvii. 29 c. 
 
 when once I had been 
 brought into this 
 court. 
 
 ovx oTov T€ ia-rtv to fxi] I iireiSy) ela-yjXde Sevpo. 
 oLTroKreLvai ^oiKpdriq \ 
 
 the Aorist Indicative of the Recta is not 
 the Obliqua. 
 
 They say 
 
 0)5 €V T]] yrj air^uaviv o 
 dvrip, Kay it) XlOov avri^ 
 kvkfSaXov els rrjv Kecfta- 
 Xrjv, 
 
 Antiph. 
 
 that the deceased was 
 murdered ashore, and 
 that I struck him on the 
 head with a stone. 
 
 OS ovK i^e/Srjv to 
 irapdrrav Ik rov 
 
 irX 
 
 otov. 
 
 de Caed. Her. 26. 
 though as a matter 
 of fact I never left 
 the ship at all. 
 
 Observe here that the Aorist Indicative is kept in the Sub- 
 direct Clauses, and also (of course) in the Sub-oblique 
 Clause. 
 
 7. €(f>r] 
 
 He said 
 
 p^eyjpi TovTov ^eiv p.av- 
 Bdvuv 
 
 that it was necessary to 
 go on learning for so 
 long a time 
 
 Recta : p-eyjpi tovtov Sec fxavOdvetv, ews av ykvqrai^ kdv ttotc 
 ^erjo-rf. 
 
 €(os LKavo<s Tts ye- 
 voiTO, etTTore Serjo-ete, 
 K.r.X. 
 
 Xen. Mem. iv. 7. 2. 
 until one became cap- 
 able, if ever it should 
 be necessary, etc. 
 
398 ORATIO OB LI QUA. 
 
 § 320. The Infinitive, and on (w?) with Finite 
 
 Moods in the Sub-direct Sentences. 
 
 Both these Constructions occur in the Sub-direct Sentence, 
 i.e. in the Principal Sentence of the Original Recta. But the 
 Infinitive is unquestionably the most common, as it is the 
 most natural, simple, and easy mode of expression. Greek 
 writers seem unconsciously to slide into it, even after an 
 Obliqua has been introduced in the first instance by on or ws. 
 In consequence of this love for the Infinitive, one or two 
 peculiarities should be observed. 
 
 1. An Obliqua (indirect words or thoughts) is often 
 suddenly introduced without any introductory Principal 
 Verb. A Particle is the only warning given, said he, he 
 thought, it was said, or some such expression was in the 
 writer's mind and can be easily supplied. And in such a 
 case it should be noticed that the Predicate in the Nomina- 
 tive accompanies the Infinitive when referring to the Subject 
 of the Infinitive and of the chief Verb. 
 
 Latin and English have the same free and natural usage. 
 
 (a.) ^Ayts rovs Trpecr/SeLs Is AaKeSaCfxova iK^Xcvcrev^vai' ov 
 yap €Lvai Kvpio'S avTos, k.t.X. XeN. Helli U. 2. 12. 
 Agis recommended the envoys to go to Laceddejnon (ex- 
 plaining that) he was not himself competent, e)cr^^ 
 
 (b.) UXoLTiov Se o8e, t5 avSp€<s 'AOrjvaLoi, /cat Kptriov Kal 
 K-piTofSoyXos Kal 'AttoAXoSw/jos KeXevovac fxe Tpid- 
 Kovra fxvojv Tif-cqaraa-dai, avroi 8' kyyvacrdai. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xxviii. 38 b. 
 
 Plato here, and Crito, and Critobulus, and Apollodorm, 
 wish me to propose thirty minae (desiring me to say 
 that) they themselves are the securities. 
 
 hvoLV \pr](riixoLV ov StafxapTrjorea-daL rrjv rroXiv 'qyovfi-qv irXev- 
 aavTiov rjfx(t}v' i] yap ^lXlttttov, a fxev eiX-qf^ei rrjs ttoAco)?, 
 d7ro8(0(r€tv, twv Se Xolttcov a</)e^ecr^at, 7], {xr) ttoiovvtos 
 Tavra, aTrayyeActv i^/xas evdeios Sevpo, k.t.X. DeM. 388. 15. 
 
 One of two useful ends I considered the state would not lose. 
 Either Philip would restore the possessions of the state 
 
 1 English expresses this just as neatly, with still less warning : 
 * ' Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon. He himself was 
 not competent, etc. " 
 
INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB -DIRECT SENTENCES. 399 
 
 which he had taken, and would hold his hand from the 
 remainder, or, if he were not to do this, we should at once 
 bring back word here, etc. 
 
 2. In the same way, but not nearly so often as an Infini- 
 tive, an Optative may be introduced by an explanatory yap. 
 
 (a.) e'Aeyov otl 7ra vtos a^ta Aeyec 'EevdrjS' xeifiuiv yap etrj, 
 K.T.X. Xen. An. vii. 313. 
 They said that what Seuthes said was quite right : f(yr it 
 was winter, etc. 
 
 The whole paragraph 13 is very instructive, and should be 
 carefully read. Observe that the Obliqua ends with a direct 
 indicative of the writer, k^oK^i. 
 
 (b.) Or the Optative continues the Obliqua after a preceding 
 Optative with oVt or w?. 
 
 direKpLvavTO avrca, otl aS^Ji/ara orcfiicnv etrj iroulv a TrpoKa- 
 
 Xelrab avev ' KdrjvaLtav' TratSe? yap (T(f>iov Kal yvi/ai/ces 
 
 Trap' €KeLvots etr^crav SeSuvat 8e Kac, k.t.A. ThUC. ii. 72. 
 
 Obs. That after the Optative the writer slides naturally into 
 
 the Infinitive SeSievat. 
 
 They answered him that it was impossible for them to comply 
 with their proposals without consulting the Athenians, for 
 their wives and children were with them; moreover they 
 were afraid, etc. 
 
 (c.) In Soph. Phil. 615, an Optative is still more abruptly 
 introduced. 
 
 evdeo)^ VTrkcr\ero 
 Tov avSp' 'A)(^aLOiS rovSe SrjXcocreLV ayoyv 
 OLOLTO fiev fxaXicrd^ €KOvcrLov Aa^wi/. 
 €t fir) BkXoi S', OLKOVra' [xai tovt(i)v Kapa 
 
 T€JJ,V€LV e(ji€iTO T(u OiXoVTi [XT] TV^Wv]. 
 
 Straightway he promised 
 To bring and show this man to the Achaeans. 
 Most like with his consent he thought to take him. 
 Should he refuse, then in his spite, etc. 
 
 Out of virea-x^To is to be supplied {eXe^ev ws) before ololto. 
 And observe, as in the preceding passage of Xenophon, the 
 Direct Indicative i^eiro is resorted to, relieving the artificial 
 strain of the Optative. Of. also Plat. Phaed. 95 d, ^wq 
 . . . oLTToXXvono: Rep. 420 C, evaAt^Xi/A/xei/ot etev. With the last 
 
400 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 instance compare Soph. 0. T. 1245, v<^' mv Odvoc . . . AtVot. 
 Here, although in a Eelative Sentence, the Optative crops 
 up; it is equal to eXe^ev on vtto rovnov ddvot, SO that the 
 clause is virtually Sub- direct rather than Sub-oblique, being 
 introduced by fivrifi-qv e'xovo-'. The passage is discussed in 
 Madvig's Syntax, p. 116, note 2, and Goodwin, Moods and 
 Tenses, § 77, 1 (e). 
 
 3. The Infinitive and 6tl (J)s) with a Finite Mood alternate 
 in the same Obliqua. 
 
 ol AaKeSacfiovLOi eTirov, on cr<f>L(TL fxev SoKolev dBiKeiv ol 
 'A6r]vaiOL, f^ovXecrSai Se koI Tov<i Travras ^vjxixd^ovs 
 irapaKaXecravres xlyrj(fiOV cTraya-yeiv. ThuC. i. 87. 
 Obs. on fiev SoKotev co-ordinate with PovXea-Oal 8e. 
 
 The Lacedaemonians told them that their own judgment was 
 that the Athenians were in the wrong : they wished, how- 
 ever, to summon all the allies as well as themselves, and to 
 put the matter to the vote. 
 
 Xey€L<s (TV, (3 Trdrep, ws l/xot SoKei, on, iocnrcp ovB\ yewpyou 
 dpyov ovBlv o^eAo?, ovrws ovSe crTpaTrjyov dpyov ovdev 
 64>eXo^ elvat. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 18. ^-^^ 
 
 You say, father, as I understand you, that, just as an idle 
 husbandman is of no use, so an idle soldier is of no use. 
 Observe that the verb eo-rt is omitted in the sentence 
 introduced by loairep, and the finite construction with on is 
 not carried out at all. 
 
 4. And this is the greatest peculiarity. Such is the natural 
 Greek yearning for the Infinitive, that Sub-oblique clauses, 
 both Adverbial and Eelative, instead of taking a Finite Mood, 
 are actually followed by an Infinitive. In some cases the 
 writer, after beginning with if, since, when, which, etc., seems 
 mentally to throw in a "said he," "it was said," "it was 
 agreed or' thought," and passes to an Infinitive: in others the 
 preceding Infinitive seems to exercise an assimilating influence 
 over the Sub-oblique Verb. 
 
 {a.) icfjr) Se, €7r€iSr) ov eKJSrj vac rrjv ^v)(t^u, iropevecrOaL fxera 
 
 TToXXQv. Plat. Eep. 614 b. 
 He said that wheji his soul had gone out of him (i.e. his 
 body), he was journeying with many. 
 Several similar instances occur from 614 to end of the book 
 after Iv w, ovs, ore, ei's o, ov, ws. 
 
INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES. 401 
 
 (&.) Aeyerat Koi 'AAK/xatwvt tw 'AfMcfudpeo), ore 8r) dXacrOat 
 avTov fJLerd tov (ftovov Trjs fxrjTpos, rov 'AttoXXih 
 TavTy]V TTjV yrjv \py]crai oIk€lv. ThUC. ii. 102. 
 There is a tradition moreover that Apollo by oracle 
 directed Alcmaeon, the son of Anvphiaraus, ivhen he 
 was a wanderer after the murder of his mother, to 
 inhabit this district. 
 Strictly ore ■v^A.arq. 
 
 (c.) Fvyryv cfiacrlv tSovra to yacrixa koX OavfidcravTa Kara- 
 f^rjvat, Kal iSeiv dX\a re Oavfiaa-Ta Kal I'mrov 
 )(aXKOvv KOiXov, 6vpi8a<s e^ovra, Kad' as iyKvxj/avTa 
 IBetv evovra ve/cpov, ws <^atv€cr^at, fiel^ui ^ Kar' 
 avOp(D7rov' rovTov 8e dXXo /xev e;^etv ovSev, rrepl 
 6e rrj X^'^P^ XP^'^^^^ SaKrvXiov, ov TT€puX6p.€V0V 
 
 €K/3^vaL. Plat. Bep. ii. 359 d. 
 Gyges, the story runs, seeing the abyss and marvelling at 
 it, descended aTid saw, among many other marvellous 
 things, a hollow brazen horse, fitted with windows, 
 through which he peeped and saw inside a corpse, so 
 it seemed, of more than human stature. It had 
 jiothing but a golden ring on its finger, ivhich Gyges 
 took off, and so made his way out. 
 
 KaO' as etSev — ws l<^aiV€TO — aAA,o fxev €L)(e — ov TrepieXonevos 
 
 Though Latin has the same construction of the Eelative 
 with the Infinitive, yet Cicero in translating this does not 
 avail himself of the identity of idiom (see De Offic. iii. 38). 
 
 Note. Latin has, though very rarely, this idiom of the 
 Relative with the Infinitive : the often quoted instance from 
 Liv. xxiv. 3 appears to rest on an incorrect reading, but in 
 Liv. XXX. 42 an undoubted example occurs. 
 
 Quorum oratio varia fuit, partim purgantium, quae questi 
 erant missi ad regem legati, partim ultro accusantium 
 socios populi Romani, sed multo infestius M. Aurelium, 
 quern ex tribus ad se missis legatis, dilectu habito, 
 substitisse et se bello lacessisse contra foedus, et saepe 
 cum praefectis suis signis conlatis pugnasse. 
 
 They spoke on a variety of topics. At one time they endeavoured 
 to clear themselves of the charges brought by the commis- 
 sioners sent to the king ; at another time they were bringing 
 2 C 
 
402 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 counter charges against the allies of the Roman peojjle, with 
 much greater rancour however against M. Aurelius, ivho 
 (they said), out of the three commissioners sent to them, had 
 levied troops, stayed behind, and had commenced hostilities 
 against them contrary to treaty, and had fought several 
 downright battles with their officers. 
 
 § 321. Assimilation of Optatives. 
 
 A, After an Optative in a Principal Sentence it is usual 
 for another Optative to follow in an Adverbial or a Relative 
 Sentence as if in Historic Sequence. As the Optative is not 
 in itself past, but on the contrary almost invariably refers to 
 future time, we can only explain /mis ""on the principle of 
 assimilation. \ 
 
 (ft.) Te6vaLr}v ore fioi aqKin rav'tuixkXoL. 
 
 \-^ MiMNERMTJS, i. 2. 
 Then might I die whensoever this is no longer my care. 
 For oTttv fj^iXy. 
 
 (b.) TTtos av Tt?, a ye /x-q kiricnaiTO, (TO<f>os av eirj ', 
 
 Xen. Mem. iv. 6, 7. 
 How could one be wise in what he does not know for 
 certain ? 
 Instead of a iTTio-Tarai, or a av /xt) ii7L(JTi]rai. 
 
 (c.) €t aTro6vr](TKOi fxev iravra ocra rov ^rjv fxeraXafSoi, 
 CTTCtS?) Sk aiToOdvoL, jjiivoi ev tovtoj tm (rx^rj/JiaTL Kat 
 jXYj irdXiv dvaf^iiocTKOtTO, dp' ov TroXXr) dvdyKT], 
 TeXevTOJVTa Trdvra reOvdvau Kal firjSev ^rjv ; 
 
 Plat. Fhaed. xvii. 1. 72. ' 
 If all things whatsoever partake of life should die, and 
 when they die, abide in this condition and not come 
 to life again, does it not inevitably follow that in the 
 end all things will be dead and nothing living ? 
 For ocra dv fieTaXdfSrj — eTretSdv aTroddvrj. 
 
 But TLS ovK dv fXLO-qcreuv ^lXlttttov, el cfidivotTO roijTOis ^ttl- 
 ^ovXeimv, virep S>v 6 rrpoyovos avrov TrpoeiXero 
 Kiv^vveveiv ] Isoc. Phil. 77. 
 Because TrpoetXero was Aorist Indicative in the Recta. 
 
 Wlio would not detest Philip if he shoidd be proved to be 
 conspiring against those in whose behalf his ancestor 
 deliberately decided to face danger ? 
 
ASSIMILA TION OF OPTA TIVES. 403 
 
 Note. After an Optative denoting a wish, the sentence may- 
 be assimilated. 
 
 Ovixov ykvoLTO X^^'P'' TA?ypwo-at ttotc 
 
 tV ai M-VKYJvaL yvot€V rj ^TrdpTr] 6' on 
 
 X'q ^Kvpo<s duSpojv dXKtjxojv p-'^T-qp ecfiv. SoPH. Phil. 324. 
 
 For Lva yvMCTL. It is generally stated that a Final Sentence 
 is never assimilated. See Soph. Phil. 961, an often quoted 
 instance. See also Soph. Track 955; Eur. Bacch. 1252 (and 
 consult the note in Sandys' edition). 
 
 In Eur. Bacch. 1384, we get both constructions. Assimila- 
 tion and non- Assimilation combined : 
 
 eXdoLfJLL 8' OTTOV 
 
 firJTf. Kt^atpwv fJiLapos fi i(ri8oL 
 fJLrJTe K^idaipcov' ocrcroLcrLv eyw, 
 /Jii]6' o9i Ovpcrov fivrjfx ai/aKetraf 
 B(XK^a6s 8' aAAatcrt fxeXotev. 
 
 § 322. B. 1. Occasionally this Assimilation does not take 
 place. 
 
 (a.) Ills dv 8lk7]V Kptvetev 1^ yvotrj Xoyov 
 
 irplv dv Trap' dp.<^olv fivdos ^Kfiddrj aracfiioq ; 
 
 Eur. Her. 179. 
 
 Trplv dv €KixdOrj, and not rrplv eKfJidOoi. Cf. Hel. 176, 
 Ion 672, Plat. Bep. ii. 359 c (o n dv /SovXrjTat). 
 
 (h.) Kv/)OS 7rpo(TKaXQ)v tovs (piXovs lo-TTOvSaioAoyetro, ws 
 8rjXoir), ovs Ti/Act. Xen. All. L 9. 28. 
 
 ovs TLixd, and not rt/xw?;. 
 
 2. An Indirect Statement with oVt or ms, an Indirect Ques- 
 tion, or a Sentence with oVws when following an Optative, is 
 not so assimilated, nor usually a Final Sentence. 
 
 (a.) ov 8' dv efs dvT€LT70L ws ov (rvp.<fi€p€L ry ttoXcl. 
 
 Dem. 202. 23. 
 Not even one would reply that it is not expedient to the 
 state. 
 
 Here dv avTeLiroi is a Principal Sentence in Primary Time. 
 
404 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 (h.) et Tt? Aeyot avdpoiirov ecTTrjKora, Ktvovvra 8e ras )(et/9a? 
 T€ Kal rrjv KccfyaXi^v, otl 6 avros ecTTrjKe re /cat Kivetrai, 
 ovK av d^LOLiJiev ovt(d Xeyeiv 8eiv. 
 
 Plat. Eep. iv. 436 d. 
 
 If one should say of a man who is standing still, but is 
 
 moving his hands and his head, that the same man 
 
 is both stationary and in motion, we should not allow 
 
 this to be a correct mode of expression. 
 
 (c.) 6 Trpo)pev<s rrjs vews . . . Kal olttiov av eiTroi, ottov eKao"Ta 
 KetraL Kal oTTOcra tp^rtv, XeN. Oec. viii. 14. 
 
 (c?.) OKvotrjv av els ra irXota e/x^aiveiv, a Kvpos rifxcv Soltj, 
 jA,rj rjiias avrals rdis TpiT^peai KaTaSvcrrj. 
 
 \^ Xen! An. i. 3. 17. 
 
 § 323. Examples of Mixed Graphic and Strict 
 Obliqua. 
 
 (a.) irpoeiTTOv v/XLV otl el jxr] TrapecroixeOa a-vcrTpacrevcTOfievoL, 
 eKeivoi ecfi rjfxas loiev. XeN. Hell. V. 2. 13. 
 
 / told you beforehand that if we should (shall) not be present 
 to join them, they would march against us. 
 (&.) ecfiof^etro firj 01 AaKeSaLfiovtoi or^as, oiroTe cracfiMS aKovcreLav, 
 ovKeri d<{)(Ji}(TLV. ThuC. i. 91. 
 
 He was afraid that the Lacedaemonians would no longer let 
 them go, whenever they heard of it. 
 (c.) elirov Trj /3ovXfj ore elSet-qv rovs TroLT^cravra's, Kal e^^^Aey^a 
 TO, yevoiieva on elcrrjyqa-aTO jjcev ttivovtcov rjpiov ravrrju 
 rrjv (3ov\r]v Ev<^iA>;tos, avreiTrov 8e eyw, Kal rare pXv ov 
 yevoiro 8C e/Jie. AnDOK. de Myst. 61. 
 
 / told the Council that I knew who had committed the act, and 
 I established the facts that Euphiletus had suggested this 
 scheme, and that I had opposed it, and that on that occasion 
 it was not executed owing to my opposition. 
 , , . el(Tr]yrj(raTO Ev^iAryros, avretTrov 8e eyw, ovk lyevero. 
 
 § 324. Virtual Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 Virtual Oratio Obliqua occurs when the words, thoughts, 
 and motives, not of the writer, but of the subject of the 
 sentence, are given rather by implication or allusion than 
 directly introduced. 
 
PAST TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 405 
 
 Ul.) Tov Ile/JiKAea eKctKi^ov oTt CTTpaTTjyos cov ovk iTr^^dyoi. 
 
 Thuc. ii. 21. 
 (The Athenians, 01 ttoXXol, grumbled thus : a-TpaTrjyos oiv ovk 
 
 (h.) ol 5' MKTeipov, €t aXiiicroivro. XeN. -^?l. i. 4. 7. 
 
 0//ier5 v;er^ pitying them if they were to he captured (felt pity 
 at the thought). 
 
 The thought was oiKrpoi la-ovrat d aXaxrovTai. 
 
 (c.) OLcrOa i7raLV€(ravTa"OpLrjpov tov 'Ayafxe/xvova tos /Saa-tXevs 
 itrj dyaOos. Xen. Symp. iv. 6. 
 
 You know that Homer praises Agamemnon as being a good 
 king. 
 
 Cf. laudat Africanum Panaetius quod fuerit abstinens. 
 Cic. Be Offic. ii. 76. 
 
 (d.) rdXXa, r]v ert vav/xa;(€tv et *AOy]vaioL ToXfi-qa-iacri, irap- 
 eo-K€va(ovro. ThUC. vii. 59. 
 
 They were making all other preparations in case the 
 Athenians should venture on a battle. 
 
 Here, observe, the graphic rjy ToXpujo-uxri is used instead of 
 et ToXfi^cretav. 
 
 (e.) Compare 
 
 TT/oos T>)v TToXiv, €L €7r L f^orj 6 oUv, kyutpovv. Thuc. vii. 100. 
 
 They were advancing on the city in case the citizens should 
 
 march out against them. . 
 
 Et and eai/ often allude in this way to a thought. See SoPH. 
 0. C. 1770, edv TTOiS 8iaK(uAiJcrw/x€v : SoPH. Ai. 313, et fxtj (fiavott]V. 
 
 § 325* Past Tenses of the Indicative in 
 Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 I. For instances of the Imperfect and Pluperfect Indicative 
 in Sub-direct Clauses, see Xen. An. i. 2. 21, Hell. vii. 1. 34. 
 
 II. For instances of the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist 
 Indicative in Sub-oblique Clauses, see Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 13; 
 Thuc. vii. 80 (ovs pLerkTrep^xfav) ; Dem. 869. 9 (wv aTreSoo-av) ; 
 Xen. An. i. 9. 10 (eVet eyevero); Cyr. ii. 2. 9 (riv eypa^a). 
 
4o6 '0 RATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 The Indicative may be accounted for on the same or ana- 
 logous principles in the following passages : 
 
 (a.) ^XPV^ '^^'^'^ dX\ov<s fxrj TTporepov Trepl rwv ofJLoXoyovfx^vojv 
 ^vfji^ovXeveiv, irplv irepl rtov dix(f>i(r/3T]Tovjji.ev(x>v rjixas 
 tStSa^ai/. Isoc. Panegyr. 19. 
 Here Trplv SiSa^eiav would represent irplv av StSd^ioa-L. 
 
 (b.) T]5ews av KaXAiKAet en 8 leXey 6 firju, ews avrc^ rrjv tov 
 . 'AfXffiLOVO's d7re8(jiKa[p7J(riv dvrl rrjs tov ZyjOov. 
 
 \ Plat. Gorg. 506 b. 
 
 ews aTreSwKa and not ea)§ o^roSotryv, which would represent 
 €ws dv aTToSu). ^ 
 
 § 326. Apparently Abnormal Obliqua. 
 
 Sometimes, but rarely, instead of either the Graphic or the 
 real Obliqua, we get an Indicative. An examination of 
 passages seems to show that the writer throws in the mood 
 and tense from his own point of view instead of giving the 
 mood which would be required if he were quoting words or 
 thoughts. 
 
 ((t.) K.vpo<s v7rk(T\€T0 TOLS M.iXrjcrioiS (fivyaanv^ ei^KaAws Kara- 
 
 ,cpd^€L€V, k<\i d icrrpaTev€TO, p.r] TrpocrOev 7rav€(rOat, Trplv 
 
 avTovs Karaydyoi oiKaSe. Xen. An. i. 2. 2. 
 
 The Recta would be •^r KaraTrpd^w, ccf)' d a-TpaTevofxai ov 
 
 TvavcrofJiai Trplv dv Karaydyio. 'i(f)' d icrrpaTemTO is really a bit 
 
 of the writer's narrative. 
 
 « 
 
 (6.) Xeyerat 8' avrov (HavcravLav^ fieXXovra ^vXX7](f)9^(rea-dat 
 . . . yvojvaL €(fi w ky^(x)pei. ThUC. i. 134. 
 It is said that Pausanias, when on the point of being arrested^ 
 knew for what purpose he {the ephor) ivas coming. 
 !</)' w xiapoL'T) or x^P^^ would be the usual construction ; ix<op€i 
 is the mood and tense of the writer rather than of the subject 
 Pausanias. 
 
 (c.) 'iXeyov ov KaXCys TrjV 'EAAaSa eXevOepovv avrov, el dv8pas 
 8ie(fi0eLpev, k.t.A. ThUC. iii. 32. 
 They told him that he was not liberating Greece in the right 
 way, if he was destroying men, etc. 
 
 Obliqua would require el 8ia(^9eipei, or 8ta(f)9€Lpot. Cf. Thuc. 
 vi. 29, eipyaa-To (taking 8Le<fid€Lpev as Imperfect. It may be 
 Aorist). 
 
LONG SPEECHES IN OBL/Q^^XI'S I Y fpE 31 ' 
 
 iin rer'fli^ wntei-' J^i 
 
 Precisely in the same way it is open in Latin 
 to employ an Indicative or a Subjunctive. Thus we might 
 say, legati, mirante consule, quod morahantur, venerunt (or quod 
 morarentur) ; morabantur would give the writer's statement 
 {morarentur would express the consul's feelings). 
 
 {d.) The most peculiar instance perhaps is in Arist. Vesp. 
 283, Xiyoiv (I)? cf)iX.a6ijvaL0's "^v kol KaretTTOi, where the Xeyojv 
 ws seems to necessitate a quotation of words (ws eo-rt or €t>/). 
 
 § 327. ZONTG SPEECHES IN OB LI QUA, 
 
 Long Speeches in the Oratio Obliqua, such as we find in 
 Livy, are rare in Greek. Greek is too lively, too anxious 
 constantly to recur to the present, and cannot bind itself to 
 the formal regularity which characterises a Eoman Obliqua. 
 The introductory verb e(^->^, 4'Ae^e, rj/Dero, eiTrei^, is repeated, or 
 the writer breaks away suddenly into the Eecta. 
 
 For longer specimens of the Obliqua see Plat. Symj). 189, 
 Bep. 614 B, Thuc. vi. 49, Xen. Cyr. viii. 1. 10, 11. 
 
 A very instructive example .occurs in Andokides de 
 Mysteriis, 38, etc., which is here given at length : — 
 
 €<fir) yap AiOKXetSyjs eTvat jxev Diokleides stated that he 
 
 oLvSpoLTToSov ot cTTt Aavpcco, 8dv had a slave at Laurium, and 
 
 Se KofiLcraa-Oat dirocfiopdv. dva- that he had occasion to fetch 
 
 o-ras Se tt/sw ^evadeh rrj<i topas a payment due. Rising early 
 
 fSaSi^cLv efvat Se Travo-eAryi/oj/. he mistook thfe time and 
 
 eTTct 81 irapd to TrpoTrvAatov tov started : there was a full moon. 
 
 Alovvctov ■^]v, opdv dvOpioTTovs When he was by the gateway 
 
 TToXkovs drro tov (jjSccov Kara- of Dionysus, he saw several 
 
 fSaivovras et's rrjv 6p\ri(Trpav' persons coming down from 
 
 Seio-as Se avrom, ela-eXdiov viro the Odeum into the Orchestra. 
 
 rriv oTKLav Kade^ecrOat fxera^h Afraid of them, he withdrew 
 
 TOV Kiovos Kal rrjs o-rrJA-j^s e</)' into the shade and crouched 
 
 y 6 (TTpaTTiyos ecrTiv 6 x(^Xkov<s. down between the column and 
 
 opdv Be dvdpu>7rovs tov fxh the pedestal on which stands 
 
 dpidfxov /xaAtcTTa rpiaKocrcovg, the Bronze General. He saw 
 
 €<TTavai 81 KVK Ao) dvd ttcvtc ko.I some three hundred men 
 
 8€Ka dv8pa<s, tov<s 8e dvd standing round about in 
 
 €iK0(rLV 6/otoi/ Se avT(ov irpbs groups of fifteen and twenty 
 
 TTjv a-€X'qvr]v TO, TTpoa-oiira twv each. As he looked he recog- 
 
4o8 
 
 OR ATI O OB LI QUA. 
 
 TTAeicrTOJv yiyvwcTKetv. K-at Trpco- 
 rov fikvj w av8p€S, tovO^ vireOero 
 SeivoTaTov vrpay/xa, olfiai^ ottws 
 €1/ eK€LV(i) Hy] ovTiva (SovXoito 
 *A6Y)vcu(av (pdvai rwi/ av8p(av 
 TovToyv €LvaL, ovTLva Se /x^ 
 /3ovX.OLTO, Aeyetv ort ovk: r)v. 
 tSwy 8e ravr' €^7; errl Aavpiov 
 t€vat, Ktti T^ varepaia aKovetv ort 
 
 01 'E/3/Xat €l€V TTepLKCKOjJLIXeVOt' 
 
 yvwvai ovv evOvs on tovto)v eirj 
 TO)v av8p(}}v TO kpyov. tJkojv Si 
 els acTTV ^iqriqras re 'r]8r] yprfp^e- 
 vovs KaraXapf^aveiv kol pr^- 
 vvrpa K€KYipvypeva e/carov pvas. 
 
 ISmv 8h EiJ^r^jUov rov KaXXiov 
 rov Ty]\€k\€ovs aSeA^ov Iv, tw 
 ■^aXKai^ Ka6Y)fi€vov, dvayay(x)v 
 avTov eis to 'Hc^atorretov Aeyeti/ 
 dtrep vplv eyw eiprjKa^ o)s tSot 
 1^/xas €v^ €K€Lvrj rfi vvkti ovkovv 
 SeoiTo Trapd rqs TroAews ^-qpara 
 XafSelv pdWov rj Trap" rjpuyVy 
 t^xrO' Yjpas €;>(eiv (JhXovs. 
 
 eiTreiv ovv rov l^v(}irjpov on 
 KaAws TTOtT^creiei/ cittwi/, Kat vvv 
 7Jk€lv KeXevcrai ol els rrjv Aew- 
 yopov olntav, tV ckci ^'^yj^vrj 
 yuer' eyaov 'AvSokiSt^ /cat ercpois 
 ots Sei. r/KCtv €<^r/ T17 varepaia^ 
 KOL 8r) KOTTTCIV Tr]V OvpaVy TOV 
 
 Be TTaripa tov kpov rv^eiv 
 k^iovra, KOL eiTreiv avrov dpd 
 ye ere o'lSe 7Tepipkvov(ri ; ^prj 
 
 nised most of their faces by 
 the moonlight. Now in the 
 first place, gentlemen, this 
 story on which he bases his 
 evi^fence is a most extraordin- 
 ary thing; his object, I take it, 
 being that it might rest with 
 hin^ to include in this list 
 any'Athenian he wished, or to 
 exclude any he did not wish. 
 After seeing this he stated 
 that he went on to Laurium, 
 and next day heard of the 
 mutilation of the Hermae. 
 So he knew it was the work 
 of these persons. Returning 
 to town he found the com- 
 missioners of inquiry chosen 
 and a reward of a hundred 
 minae offered for information. 
 
 Seeing Euphemus the son 
 of Kallias and brother of 
 Telekles sitting in his forge, 
 he brought him up to the 
 Hephaesteum, and told him 
 exactly what I have said to 
 you, how he had seen us that 
 night. Now he- did not (so 
 he said) desire to receive 
 money from the state more 
 than from us, if we would be 
 his friends. 
 
 Euphemus then told him 
 that he had acted rightly in 
 telling him, and noAv he asked 
 him to come to the house of 
 Leogoras, to meet me there, 
 said he, with one Andokides 
 and other needful persons. He 
 said that he went next day, 
 and just as he was knocking 
 at the door my father hap- 
 
LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA. 
 
 409 
 
 fxevTOL fxrj air biO €.1(7 6 at roiovrovi 
 (f)i\ovs' eiTTovTa 8e avrov ravra 
 OLX^crdaL. 
 
 Kai tovtcj) fiev tw Tpoirco tov 
 Trarepa fiov OTrioXXve, a-vveiSora 
 aTTOcfiaiVMV. eliretv Be rjfxas on 
 SeSoyfxcvov rj/JLiv eir] Svo fxkv 
 rdXavra apyvptov StSovat 01 
 
 aVTi TWI/ €KaTOV fXViiiV TWV Ik 
 
 rov SrjpLooTLOV, lav Se /caracrxw- 
 fxev T^jLtets a /SovXafxeda, €va 
 avTov rjfiMv cij/at, ttlcttlv Se 
 rovT(x)v Sovvai re koI Se^acrOaL. 
 mroKplvaa-daL Se avros irpos 
 ravTa on /3ovXevcroiTO. o^/xas 
 Se KeXevcLV avTov 'rjKeiv eis 
 KaAAtov Tov TrjXeKXcovs, tVa 
 Ka/ceii/os Trapetr). tov 8' av 
 KTjSecTT'qv fjiov ovT(ji)<S (XTrcuAAvev. 
 'iJKCtv i(^y] ets KaAAtov, /<ai 
 KadofJLoXoyi^(ra<s r]}xiv manv 
 Sovvai ev aKpoTroXet, Kal rjfJLas 
 (TwOefxeuovs ol to apyvptov els 
 TOV eTTLOVTa fxrjva Sixxreiv Sia- 
 \pev8ea-6ai Kal ov SiSovaL' yJKetv 
 ovv ixrjvv(T(DV TO, yevofxeva. 
 
 pened to be going out, and 
 said, "Oh, is it you these 
 people are expecting 1 Well, 
 one ought not to reject such 
 friends." So saying, he was 
 off. 
 
 In this way he tried to ruin 
 my father by denouncing him 
 as an accomplice. (According 
 to him) we said that we pro- 
 posed to give him two talents 
 of silver instead of the hun- 
 dred minae offered by the 
 Treasury, and that if we 
 gained our object he was 
 (should be) one of our num- 
 ber, and that we exchanged 
 pledges of this. His own 
 reply to this was that he 
 would think it over : we, how- 
 ever, told him to come to the 
 house of Kallias son of 
 Telekles whose presence we 
 desired. Again in this he 
 tried to ruin my relation. 
 He came, so he said, to the 
 house of Kallias, and accord- 
 ing to agreement he gave us 
 pledges on the Akropolis, and 
 we, after stipulating to give 
 him the money by the next 
 month, break our promise and 
 refuse to give it. Conse- 
 quently he is present to in- 
 form of the facts. 
 
CHAPTEE 
 FIGUEES OF EHETOEIC, Etc. 
 
 § 328. Alliteration. 
 
 Alliteration, or the repetition of the same letter. 
 
 e.g. Who shall ^^ecide when doctors, c^isagree ] 
 
 Subdola cum ridet placidi pellacia ponti. Luc. ii. 559. 
 
 Tympana tenta tonant palmis et cymbala circum 
 Concava, raucisonoque minantur cornua cantu. 
 
 Id. ii. 618. 
 
 OavaTOV Oarrov 6d. PlAT. Apol. xxix. 39 A. 
 
 It {wickedness) fleeth faster than fate. 
 
 ri rw TravwAet iraTpl riav jxlv i^ ifiov 
 TraiSiov TToOos Trapeiro ; SoPH. El. 544. 
 
 Or hy thy felon father, for the family 
 
 I bore him, was all fondness flung aiuay ?' 
 
 Tov 8' dypiois oacroLcn TraTrr-qvas 6 irats 
 TTTVcras TrpoorwTTOi. SoPH. Ant. 1231. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ant. 50, where an initial a occurs seven times. 
 
 Instances may easily be collected. Ours is the most alli- 
 terative of languages. Shakspere abounds with natural 
 and beautiful examples. As is well known. Early English 
 alliterative poetry consisted of couplets, in which each section 
 contained two or more accented words beginning with the 
 same letter. 
 
 In a somer seson, whan soft was the sonne, 
 
 I shope me in shroudes, as I a shepe were, 
 
 In habite as an heremite, unholy of workes, 
 
 Went wyde in fis world, wondres to here. 
 
 Fiers the Plowman.. 
 
 410 
 
ANAKOLUTHIA. 411 
 
 Shakspere ridicules the abuse of Alliteration : 
 
 Whereat, with blade, with bloody blameful blame, 
 He bravely broached his boiling bloody breast. 
 
 " Hortatur me frater, ut meos malis miser mandarem natos " 
 of Accius (Cic. Tusc. iv. 77) is little better. 
 
 § 329. Anakoluthia. 
 
 Anakoluthia or Anakoluthon is the term used where the 
 structure of the sentence is not grammatically followed out. 
 It is either natural and unstudied, or artificial and rhetorical. 
 It is natural and unstudied in Herodotus, whose irregular 
 constructions arise from his writing just as if he were talking. 
 It is natural and unstudied again in Aeschylus, whose 
 thoughts and emotions are too big for his words, and in 
 Thucydides, who thinks more of matter than manner. It is 
 rhetorical in Plato, who purposely imitates the easy freedom 
 of ordinary conversation. Sometimes Anakoluthia arises 
 from mere slovenliness, as in Andokides. 
 
 During the progress of a sentence a new idea strikes the 
 writer ; a new expression is thus introduced and becomes a 
 disturbing influence. Or an explanation may be necessary ; 
 and a parenthesis, more or less long, is inserted. The 
 sentence thus may wander far away from its original con- 
 struction. Generally the writer is aware that he has gone 
 astray, and goes back, not to the grammar, but to the sense 
 of the passage, resuming often in a diff'erent construction with 
 a particle 8e, Stj, ovv, so, then, as I was saying. 
 
 There are many kinds of Anakoluthia, and the figure is 
 constantly recurring. One or two specimens are given just 
 to show what is meant : 
 
 dvSpOLV 8' o/xatfMOLV OdvaTO<s wS' avroKTOvos, — 
 ovK ecTTt yyjpas rovSe rov fJLtda-jJLaTos. 
 
 Aesch. S. c. Theh. 681. 
 
 Here Odvaros, the subject, has no verb (yrjpda-K^i). Instead 
 of the verb the writer solemnly pauses, and substitutes a 
 second sentence nearly complete in itself. 
 
 \ 
 
 But blood of brothers shed by fellowly hands, 
 There is no age for such pollution. 
 
412 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. 
 
 TO, Travra ya/j rts ly;;(€as dv^' a^aros 
 €vd<j, fxaTrjv 6 ixoxOos. AeSCH. iJh. 521. 
 Powr all the atoning offerings in tJk world 
 For one life spilt — vain were thy toil 
 
 Grammatically : fxdrrjv av [xoxOoLrj^. 
 ot 'A6r]vaiOL vocro) eine^ovTo Kar' dfxcfiOTepa, rrj^ re copas rod 
 iViavTOV ravTYjS ovcrrjs, ev fj dcrOevova-LV dvOpio-iroi [xdXicrTa^ 
 Kat TO \<j)piov a/xa, Iv w ecrr/jaTOTreSevovTO, lAwSes ^at 
 XaAeTTOV r]i/. ThUC. vii. 47. 
 Grammatically it should have been tov x^P^^v lAwSors Kat 
 ^aAcTTov oVtos. 
 
 jTAe Athenians were suffering from sickness arising from two 
 
 causes, first, because this was the time of year when sickness 
 
 is 7nost prevalent, and next, the ground on which they were 
 
 encamped was swampy and unhealthy. 
 
 Cf. iv. 23, Kat TTcpl IltjAov — T$ retxet. HdT. vii. 74, Kat 
 
 TToAAa — dfivvacrOat, 
 
 One simple instance from Plato may suffice to show how he 
 imitates the freedom of ordinary talk : — 
 
 •^XOov CTTt Ttva TWi/ SoKovvTO)v CTo^wv efvai . . . Kat SiaAeyo- 
 fievo<s avTM, eSo^e fxoi ovtos 6 dvrjp Sok^lv fxev etvat cro^o?, 
 
 K.T.A., elvai 8' ov. Plat. Apol. vi. 21 b. 
 / went to see one of those who had the reputation of being 
 wise. And talking with him, this man seemed to me to be 
 considered wise, without being really so. 
 As if it were SiaAeyd/xevos avTM c'Sd^ao-a, conversing ivith him 
 I thought. 
 
 § 330. Antiptosis. 
 
 Antiptosis. The Subject of the Subordinate Clause is 
 the object of the Principal Clause. 
 
 The stock instance is "nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit" 
 for " nosti quam tardus sit Marcellus." " I know you not, 
 whence ye are." 
 
 This is a common construction in Greek, Latin, and 
 English. 
 
 It€ov ovv (TKOTTovvTi TOV XPWH-^^ '^^ Acyet. Plat. Apol. vii. 
 
 21 E. 
 / must go on then examining the oracle, what it means (i.e. 
 examining what the oracle means, or the meaning of the 
 oracle). 
 
ASYNDETON AND BINARY STRUCTURE. 413 
 
 otiSe /x€V ovScis Tov ddvarov ov8' et rvyxa^'ct iravTOiV fxeyicTTOV 
 6v Twv dya^wv. PlAT. ^^o/. xvii. 29 A. 
 
 No one knows {with regard to) death, even whether it is (not) 
 the greatest possible blessing. 
 
 We may say that the Accusative and the Subordinate 
 Sentence together become the object of the principal Verb. 
 
 Antiptosis is commonly explained as above, but the simpler 
 and more rational account is that the Subordinate Clause ex- 
 pands and explains the Object or Accusative of the Principal 
 Clause. 
 
 § 331. Asyndeton. 
 
 Asyndeton, or the omission of Conjunctions, the stock 
 instances of which are Shakspere's 
 
 Unhousel'd, disappointed, unanel'd ; 
 
 and Cicero's Abiit, excessit, evasit, erupit. 
 
 Cf. Milton's Unrespited, unpitied, unreprieved. 
 Unshaken, unseduced, unterrified. 
 Exhaustless, spiritless, afflicted, fallen. 
 
 aKXav(Tro<s, a<f>L\os, avvficvatos. SOPH. Ant. 877. 
 Unwept, unloved, unhymned. 
 
 (icjiiXov, eprjfiov, airoXiv, iv {wcriv vcKpov. SoPH. Phil. 1018. 
 Friendless, lone, citiless, midst the living dead. 
 
 The use of the figure is to set forth each idea separately, 
 and pointedly. It is so common that further instances are 
 unnecessary. 
 
 § 332. Binary Structure. 
 
 One conception is stated twice over, so that two aspects of 
 it are given. This double presentment enables the reader 
 to obtain a fuller view of the conception as a whole. 
 Mr. Riddell aptly describes this artifice as giving a rhetorical 
 *' binocular vision." It is commonly employed in Similes. 
 
 civ 8' ^Kya}x€ixviiiv 
 Lcrraro SaKpvx^iiov, coo-re Kp-qvrj fX€X(xvv8po<s . . . 
 cos o f3apvaT€vdx(j)v iTze' Kpyeioidi fxerrjitSa. II. ix. 13. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Ai. 840, 0. C. 1239. 
 
414 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. 
 
 Tavra k-yiii ^oKisi d/covetv, locnrep ot Kopvf^avTidvres twv 
 avXdv SoKovcTiV oLKOvecv . . . kal ev efiol avrrj rj rj^rj . . . 
 
 /So/x/Set Plat. Crito, 54 d. 
 
 ov TavTov TOVTO TrcTTOv^acrtv, . . . aKoXaaic^ tlvI (T(i)(f>poves 
 
 eio-iv ; Plat. Pliaed. 67 e. 
 
 ovTwcrt crot ^okC^^ ov^kva vo/jll^(d Ocov itvai j 
 
 Plat. A;pol. xiv. 26 e. 
 
 Binary Structure in giving two descriptions of the same 
 object differs from Apposition, which gives but one descrip- 
 tion, though in certain forms there is a resemblance between 
 the figures. Asyndeta and Anakoluthia often occur in this 
 structure. The artifice is used by all Greek writers, but it is 
 employed in an almost endless variety of subtle forms by 
 Plato. See Eiddell, pp. 196-209, whence the above examples 
 are taken. 
 
 Antiptosis is a form of Binary Structure. 
 
 § 333* Brachylogy or Abbreviated Construction. 
 
 (Including Zeugma, Constructio Praegnans, Brachylogy of 
 Comparison.) 
 
 Brachylogy is a kind of Ellipse ; but where Ellipse actually 
 suppresses a word or sentence altogether, Brachylogy leaves 
 them to be supplied from some corresponding expression in 
 the context. Brachylogy is thus more essentially artificial 
 than Ellipse. 
 
 €cfipacra<g vTreprepav Trj<s t6t€ x^/otTO? (sc. VTreprepav X'^P^^i ^^^ 
 
 Xct/otv supplied from x^P^'^^^)- Soph. El. 1265. 
 
 A Substantive, an Adjective, a Pronoun, a Conjunction, or 
 a Verb may thus be supplied from the context. 
 
 TO, pkv aAAa, oa-aTvep Kal Trdvres v/xeis CTrotetre. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. iv. 1. 3. 
 
 i.e. TO, pev aA,Xa (sc. k-nroUi, supplied from CTTOieiTe). 
 
 In the common phrases ov^lv aXXo yj, rl aXXo r/, aXXo n r|, a 
 different verb of more general meaning is supplied from a 
 special verb in the context. 
 
 ot AaKeSatpLOVLOi aXXo ovBev •)) Ik t-^s yi^s lvavp.a\ovv. 
 
 Thuc. iv. 14. 
 
 i.e. aXXo ovSlv kitoiovv rj. PlAT. Apol. 19 D. 
 
 ravra Kal Troielv Kal Tracrxciv a irda-x^t'. PlAT. Phaed. 98 A, 
 
 supply Kal TTOUL, 
 
CONSTRUCTIO PRAEGNANS. 415 
 
 § 334. Zeugma and Syllepsis. 
 
 Zeugma is another form of Brachylogy. There is only one 
 verb in the sentence, but more than one noun. The verb 
 strictly applies only to one of the nouns, but suggests the verb 
 required by the other. 
 
 d/\A,' rj TiVOOMTiv r\ fSaOva-KacjiCL Kovet 
 
 Kpvxfov ViV. 
 
 Soph. El. 435 ; cf. El. 72, Ai. 632, EuR. Bacch. 142. 
 No, or to the winds (sc. /ae^es) or in the deep-dug soil bury 
 them. 
 A violent instance of Zeugma : 
 
 ecrdrjra 8e (popeovo't rrj 'HiKvOlkyj ofxottjv, yXQxrcrav Se ISi-qv. 
 
 Hdt. iv. 106. 
 They wear a dress like the Scythian, but (speak) a language 
 of their own. 
 Cf. the old Tyne ballad : " He wears a blue bonnet, wi' a 
 dimple on his chin." 
 
 7rpo6vfxt<^ Xpat/JLevoL /cat irapaKeXevor/xM. ThUC. iv. 11. 
 W'ith energy and with mutual exhortation. 
 X/)tu/xevofc goes with both nouns not quite in the same sense. 
 This sort of Zeugma is sometimes distinguished as Syllepsis. 
 
 1 Cor. iii. 2, yaAa vfjLois liroTta-a ov fSpiopia, is a stock instance 
 from the New Testament, eirona-a suiting ydXa only. Cf. L. 
 i. 64. 
 
 § 335« Constructio Praegnans. 
 
 Constructio Praegnans is a form of Brachylogy. Two 
 Sentences are compressed into one. 
 
 ov eSet KaKOTraOeiv rw crMpan IvTavOoi ov^kv fie (i)(j)€Xrj(T€v y) 
 
 ip-n-eipia. Antiph. de Caed. Her. 2. 
 Where I ought to have endured personal ill-treatment hither 
 
 (i.e. here, whither they have brought me), my experience 
 
 proved no help to me. 
 
 It is common with certain Prepositions {ds, iv, i^) and with 
 Relative Adverbs. 
 
 e.g. rats iv r-Q yy KaTair€<f>€vyvLaL<; (sc. vavcrt). 
 
 The ships which had fled to the shore, and were on tJie shore. 
 
4i6 FIGURES OF RHETQRIC, ETC. 
 
 K€Lvo<s 8' oTTov Pe/SrjKev, ovSet? ofSe. SOPH. Tr. 10. 
 WTiere {for tvhither) he is gone none knowetk 
 OTTOV for oTTOi. Cf. Phil. 256. 
 
 Constructio Praegnans is very common in the New Testa- 
 ment. A stock instance is ^lXlttttos evpWrj els "A^wtov. Act. 
 Ap. viii. 40. See 2 Tim. iv. 18, Matt. v. 22, evoxos els rijv 
 
 •yeevvav. 
 
 § 336. Brachylogy of Comparison. 
 
 Brachylogy of Comparison, or Comparatio Compendiaria. 
 The stock example is from 11. xvii. 51, Ko/Aat xapiTea-iriv 
 ofxoiai, i.e. Kofiat 6/xotat ^apirinv Ko/xattrt, hair like the (hair of) 
 the Graces. 
 
 *H(^ata-Tov 8' tKave Sofxov Qens dpyvpoTre^a 
 a(f)9tT0v darepoevra, ixeTairpeTre ddavdrotcnv. HOM. II. xviii. 
 i.e. fxerairpeTrea So/jlolo-lv dOavdriov. [368. 
 
 Silverfooted Thetis came unto the house of Hephaestus 
 Incorruptible^ starry^ conspicuous among the Immortals. 
 
 Xetpov dpa-eviov vocrov ravry^v vocrov/jLev. EUR. Androm. 220. 
 I.e. ^(eLpova ap(Tev(av vocrov vocrov voaovfxev. 
 
 Worse than men this plague we are plagued withal, 
 ofxotav rais SovAats el-^e rrjv ia-OyJTa. XeN. Cyr, V. 1. 3. 
 Cf. Rev. xiii. 11, eT^e Kepara 8vo ofioia dpvLM. 
 
 § 337' Catachresis. 
 
 The use of a word not in its strict meaning. 
 
 vTTOTTTevo), / expect; Saiixovios, extraordinary ; Oavfiaa-Tos 
 Oavfxda-iosy strange, eccentric, funny, capital, excellent ; /.uyas (sc. 
 Xoyos, Plat. Phaed. 62 b), puzzling ; V7r€p(f)vu)s ws (o^oAoyw), 
 I decidedly do (assent) ; dixy]\avQ>s ye ws a-<f>68pa, most decidedly. 
 
 See Eiddell, Digest, p. 240. 
 
 § 338. Ellipse and Aposiopesis. 
 
 The suppression of a word or sentence. 
 e.g. 17 avpiov (sc. rjfiepa). 
 
 is KopaKas (sc. fSdWere, eppere, ot'x^ecrde). 
 To the crows ! 
 
EUPHEMISM. 417 
 
 The suppressed word or sentence can, of course, be easily 
 supplied. The figure is mechanically and unconsciously em- 
 ployed in many common every-day phrases. The object of 
 its artificial use is to give brevity and pith to the expression. 
 
 ^lilv fi€V evx^s rdcrSe (sc. ev'xo/xat). AeSCH. CIlO. 142. 
 For us these prayers — 
 
 The omission of the Subject with its Verb, of the copula ia-n, 
 of the substantive with its epithet or genitive (ol dyaOoc, 6 
 ^iXtTrTTov), are common instances of unconscious Ellipse. 
 
 Instances of unconscious Ellipse of Sentences occur in the 
 phrases ovx on, fxr] on, ovx ottws, etc., and more or less so in 
 the suppression of a Protasis, or of an Apodosis. 
 
 Aposiopesis is a form of Ellipse. ^ In animated and excited 
 expressions the speaker breaks off abruptly, leaving the rest 
 of the sentence to be understood. 
 
 fjL-qSev TT/oos opyrjv Trpos Oecov (sc. Spdcrrj's). SOPH. El. 369. 
 By Heaven ! naught in anger. 
 
 fx-q rpLJSds eV (sc. TTopL^ere or some such verb). Antig. 577. 
 No longer tarrying ! 
 
 /xtJ iioi Trp6<fia(jiv. Ar. Ach. 345. 
 No shuffling ! 
 
 fxrj jxoi ye fivOov^. Ar. Vesp. 1179. 
 Come ! no tales I 
 
 Vergil's " quos ego : sed motos praestat componere 
 fluctus," is Quintilian's stock instance. " Quid multa % " 
 " quid plura % " are common cases. 
 
 § 339* Euphemism. 
 
 The substitution of a colourless or an agreeable expression 
 for a strong or disagreeable one. It is the reverse of " calling 
 a spade a spade." The Greeks carefully avoid the mention of 
 death especially, e.g. en-pa^' oVws errpa^e. 
 
 e.g. dX,Xo n Tra^eti/. Plat. Crito, iv. 44 e, to suffer something 
 
 ^ 'ArrocidsTTTjais. Reticentia, Cic. Obticentia, Celsus. Interruptio al. 
 Quint.' Inst. ix. 2. 
 
 2 D 
 
4i8 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC, 
 
 So we say " in the event of anything happening." 
 cyo) yap etix eKetcr' oVot Tropevreov. SoPH. Ai. 690. 
 For I shall go thither where all must go. 
 
 Spoken by Aias when contemplating suicide. 
 
 SeSoiK eyw 
 fx-q fxoL ^c/SrjKrj. SOPH. Fhil. 494. 
 
 Where Philoktetes fears that his father may no longer be 
 alive. 
 
 § 340- Hypallage. 
 
 A change of case, so that a word does not agree with the 
 case which logically it qualifies. In such constructions the 
 word agrees with a compound expression, so that the figure 
 is a form of Synesis rather than Hyperbaton. The stock 
 instance is from Horace — 
 
 Nee purpurarum sidere clarior 
 Delenit usus, 
 
 where the adjective clarior, instead of agreeing with pur- 
 purarum (purple robes) agrees with the compound substantive 
 usus purpurarum. 
 
 to TraTp^ov ecTTtas fSdOpov. SOPH. Ai. 860. 
 
 Seat of r)iy father's hearth. 
 For Trarpcoas ccrrtas /Sddpov. 
 
 So Antig. 794, vciko? avSptuv ^vvaufiov, where vet/cos dvSpuyv 
 forms one word : Trach. 817, SyKov ovo/xaro? jx-qrp^ov. 
 
 Tov 8' dOXL(i)<s davovTa JJoXwclkovs v€kvv. Soph. Ant. 26. 
 
 For 6av6vTO<3 TloXvV€LKOVS. 
 
 In Lucretius, i. 474, we have an instance of true Hypal- 
 lage : Ignis Alexandri Fhrygio sub pectore gliscens. Mr. Munro, 
 in his note on the line, collects some striking parallels from 
 other writers. 
 
 § 341. Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hysteron-Proteron. 
 
 The displacement of the natural order of words. Its chief 
 use is to give emphasis to a word. It also enables language 
 to represent the rapidity of thought, one word instantly 
 catching up another word. 
 
LITOTES. 419 
 
 Easy and familiar instances are — 
 
 ciVe, w Trpos Aios, MeATjrc. PlAT. ^j:;o/. xiii. 25 C. 
 Like the Latin 
 
 Fer te Deos oro. 
 
 Certain words in particular are thus displaced, especially ye, 
 fxevTOi, aVj Ixi, io-cos, ovk in ov (firjixi, etc. 
 
 ap' ovv av fxe oiecrOe rocravra erfj BtayevearOaL ; 
 
 Plat. AjpoL xxi. 32 e. 
 
 Tts ^v ev y fxaTTOfxeOa fxdvToc raX(f>LTa ; AriST. Nub. 788. 
 rax' av opdios tcrws /xe^^otro. PlAT. Xe^. 640 D. 
 
 Chiasmus is a form of Hyperbaton. Chiasmus is the In- 
 verse Parallelism of Clauses and Sentences : 
 
 Trav fiev ipyov ttolv B' eVos Xeyovras re Kal TrpdrTOvras, — 
 
 where the outside epyov belongs to the outside it pdrTovr as, 
 and the inside cVos to the inside Xeyovras. 
 
 ovT dStKct, out' dSiKetrat, ovd^ vtto Oeov, ovre deov. 
 
 Hysteron Proteron (vcmpov rrporepov) reverses the order in 
 which events occur, e.g. Tpd<fi€v -^S' eyevovro. 
 
 e'xets Tt Kela-rJKovcras ; SOPH. Ant. 9. 
 
 dXXijXovs StSdcTKeiv re Kal <f>pd^€LV. PlAT. Apol. iii. 19 D. 
 
 atcr^avo/xevos pXv KaX Xvirovixevos Kal SeSiws on dnr])^- 
 
 davofxrjv. Plat. A^ol. vi. 21 e. 
 On the Hyperbaton and its forms see Eiddell, p. 228. 
 
 § 342. Litotes. 
 
 Litotes or Meiosis, smoothing or diminishing a stronger 
 conception by a weaker statement. A common enough figure 
 in all languages, but especially suited to Greek taste, e.g. ovx 
 ^(Tcrov, not less, i.e. more; ov fxdXXov, not so much. 
 
 €L fiev yap tovto Xeyovcriv, ofxoXoyoirjv dv eywye ov Kara 
 TOVTOvs eivai p-qrwp. PlAT. Apol. i. 17 B. 
 
 If this is what they mean, I must admit that I am an orator, 
 not as they are orators (i.e. an orator of a far higher order 
 than they). 
 
420 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. 
 
 ^(aipOVO-LV €^€Ta^OfJL€l'Oi<S rOL<S olofJi€VOl<S €LVai (robots, O^CTL 8' 
 
 ov- ecTTL yap ovK drjSk. Plat. Apol. xxii. 33 C. 
 
 They enjoy the cross-examination of those who think they are 
 wise, without really being so. It really is not disagreeable 
 (i.e. it is extremely amusing). 
 
 Kelrat Oavo)v SetXauos, ov jxdX' cvtv^ws. AeSCH. Fers. 327. 
 Lies low in death unhappy, not all fortunately (i.e. all in- 
 gloriously, because unburied : an euphemism also). 
 
 § 343. Oxymoron. 
 
 Oxymoron is the contrast by juxtaposition of opposite 
 conceptions, e.g. from the Paradise Lost : 
 
 Our final hope is flat despair. 
 
 Dishonest shame 
 Of Nature's works, honour dishonourable. 
 
 A universe of death . . . 
 Where all life dies, death lives. 
 
 In King John the despairing and passionate Constance cries : 
 
 Death, death ; amiable, lovely death ! 
 Thou odoriferous stench ! sound rottenness ! 
 
 t-)(9p(av dSojpa Swpa. SoPH. Ai. 665. . 
 Giftless the gifts of foes. 
 
 fxatveTaL 6' vcf)' rj8ov7Js 
 
 P-y]T"^P dpi'qTutp. Soph. El. 1154. 
 
 She is mad for joy^ 
 A mother, yet no mother. 
 
 ocria Travovpy-qcrao-a. SoPH. Ant. 74. 
 Daring a holy crime. 
 
 €^€(fidLv6' at rpiCTKaXixoL 
 vae? avaes avaes. AeSCH. Pers. 680. 
 
 They are destroyed those three-banked 
 ships, ships no more, ships no more. 
 
 Cf. Catullus : funera ne funera. 
 
 Cf. Aesch. p. V. 545, x«P^? axa/jis. Soph. 0. T. 1214, 
 
 ya/AOS dyafios. 
 
PERIPHRASIS AND PLEONASM. 421 
 
 Oxymoron is well caricatured by Shakespeare : 
 
 A tedious brief scene of young Pyramus 
 And his love Thisbe, very tragical mirth. 
 
 Merry and tragical, tedious and brief ! 
 
 That is, hot ice, and wonderous strange snow. 
 
 How shall we find the concord of this discord ? 
 
 § 344* Periphrasis. 
 
 Periphrasis or Circumlocution is a roundabout way of using 
 two or more words instead of one, e.g. 'I<TfjLrjvrj<s ndpa, head of 
 Ismene, for 'la-ix^vq \ dpkjxixara ^dXov (Plat. Leg. 953), children 
 of the Nile, i.e. Egy^ptians (cf. the Hebrew, children of Israel, 
 sons of Belial, son of peace, etc. ). The word XPW^ occurs in 
 one or two phrases : vos jxeya ^pr^iia, Hdt. ; to xPVH'^ '''^^ 
 vvKTiov, Ar. Nub. 2. 
 
 Very often the Substantive is used for an Adjective or an 
 apposition, e.g. nooretSwi/os Kpdros, the might of Poseidon, for 
 the mighty Poseidon (Aesch. Eum. 27); irapdevia Tous, the virgin 
 To (Aesch. P. V. 898); firjTpos a-e^as, a revered mother (P. V. 
 1090). So in Latin, mitis sapientia Laeli, prisci Catonis 
 virtus (Horace). 
 
 Periphrasis is employed in the use of Tenses, e.g. /xeAAw 
 TTot^o-etv, fxeXXo) reOvdvai (Plat. Apol. xviii. 30 C and xix. 
 32 a), dTifjLda-a<s e^et, periturus sum, fore or futurum esse with 
 a Subjunctive mood. 
 
 Very often, again, both in Greek and Latin, a periphrasis 
 is used for a simple verb, especially with e'xw, e.g. ev vo> e'xw 
 = Siavoovfxai : (^yaovi/xws €)(0J = c^povQi : dappaXeois e^w = Oappoi 
 
 (all in Plat. Apol.): AvTn^/ow? e'xw = XvTvovp.aL (Soph. El. 766) : 
 
 ■qSovrjv (fiepetv = rkpireiv (SoPH. El. 286) : (^(jovqv Xa/Seiv = 
 cficovelv, etc. 
 
 In fact these periphrastic verbs are of constant use both in 
 prose and poetry. 
 
 § 345« Pleonasm. 
 
 Pleonasm or Redundancy is the employment of words 
 apparently superfluous. Apparently, for a second expression 
 may often define or amplify a pt-evions expression, e.g. 6 
 CTTpaTTjyos T^s a-Tpanas, /:iovov Kad' avrbv KovSev^ dXXov. 
 
422 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. 
 
 A cognate accusative is a sort of pleonasm, fj^o-x^^ jxax^a-Oai : 
 or an adverb with its adjective, fxkyas /xeyaAtoo-Tt (k€lto). II. 
 xvi. 776, {he lay outstretched) huge ivith his huge length. 
 
 Adverbs are often thus combined : to? dXrjOios to) ovtl : 
 TrdXiv av^t9, av ttolXlv avdis : eVetTa /xera ravra. The repeti- 
 tion of the negative and of dv are cases of Pleonasm. 
 Tt Srj Aeyovres StejSaXXov ol SiafSaXXovre^ ; 
 
 Plat. Apol. iii. 19 b. 
 
 €7rL€LK7J dv fxoL SoKOj XeycLV Aeywv. PlAT. ApoL xxii. 34 D. 
 Periphrasis is a form of Pleonasm. 
 
 § 346. Prolepsis or Anticipation. 
 
 What is intended, or expected to take place, as spoken of, 
 by anticipation, as having already taken place. 
 
 It occurs most commonly with a predicative adjective. A 
 good instance is found in Juvenal : 
 
 Paullatim caluerunt mollia saxa. 
 i.e. caluerunt ita ut mollia fierent. 
 A stock instance is — 
 
 €V<j>Y]ixov, w TaAatva, KOtfJiyjcrov crro/xa. AeSCH. Ag. 1258. 
 
 i.e. wcrre cvcfirjfjiov eTvai. 
 €^a KLV€i (hOeyixar SpvtOoiv cracfirj. SoPH. El. 18. 
 Awakes to shrillness the birds' matin songs. 
 
 See V. 14, rt/xwpov. 
 yoveo)v 
 eKTifiovs to-)(0 vera irrepvyas 
 
 o^vTovtov y6(x)v. Soph. El. 242. 
 
 Restraining the wings of shrill-voiced waitings 
 So that they honour not a parent. Cf. Antig. 1200. 
 
 Cf. Eur. Bacck. 70, 183. 
 
 § 347- Puns. 
 
 (Paronomasia, Annominatio.) 
 
 Occasionally Greek writers indulge in them. 
 
 dAXot yap, 5 McXr^TC . . . (ra^al§ a7ro<^atv€t5 rr^v cravrov 
 dfxeXeiav, oVt ovSev croL /xe/xeAr/Ke irepl &v l/xe eicrayet?. 
 
 Plat. Apol. xii. 25 c. 
 (See xiv. where the pun is repeated.) 
 
PUNS. 423 
 
 Riddell, p. 242, collects many instances from Plato. 
 
 d7r€(TT€prjKas rov fStov rot to^' eXiov. SOPH. Fhil. 931. 
 
 where there is clearly a play on ^tov (bow) and jStov (life). 
 
 The grandest instance of punning or playing on words at a 
 solemn moment is in Shakespeare {Richard IL, Act ii.), where 
 the dying Gaunt dwells on his name : 
 
 Old Gaunt indeed, and gaunt in being old, etc. 
 So of Helen : 
 
 eAems, e'AavS/Dos, eAcTTToAt?. AesCH. Ag. 689. 
 
 Helen, the Hell of ships, the Hell of men, the Hell of towns. 
 
 Compare the pun made on the rock-built Assus recorded in 
 Athenaeus viii. 352. 
 
 "k-crcTov W\ io<5 K€v Oacrcrov oXeOpov iretpaO' LKr]ai. II. vi. 143. 
 
 Paronomasia is the combination of words of similar sound 
 or cognate form. 
 
 utrum propter oves an propter aves; Varro, B. R. iii. 2. 13. 
 Traume sind Schaume (lit. dreams are bubbles). 
 Socrtv KaKav KaKWV KaKOts. AeSCH. Pers. 1041. 
 djpOovd^ 6 TXrjfiiov 6p6o<s 1^ opBQiv SL(fip(av. SoPH. El. 742. 
 
 Avtos cavTov, avTos v<f)' eavrov, etc., would be familiar 
 instances. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Reference is only made to subjects which are not easily found in the 
 Table of Contents. 
 
 The numbers refer to the pages of the book. 
 
 Ablative represented by 
 Genitive, 78-9. 
 
 Accusative, see Table of 
 Contents, 66-78. 
 
 Absolute, 95. 
 
 with Infinitive,! 13, 
 
 158; 179. 
 
 with Infinitive instead 
 
 of Nominative, 180. 
 
 in Apposition to Sen- 
 tence, 25, 74. 
 
 with Prepositions, 289. 
 
 Active Voice, 120. 
 
 Adjectives which take a 
 Genitive, 100. 
 
 which take a Dative, 
 
 119. 
 
 Adverbs which take a 
 Genitive, 100. 
 
 which take a Dative, 
 
 119. 
 
 Adverbial sentences, 9. 
 
 Agent, how denoted, 131. 
 
 ;- denoted by Preposi- 
 tions, 289-90. 
 
 — — Genitive of, loi ; 
 Dative of, iii. 
 
 Anastrophe, 289. 
 
 Aorist, uses of, 145-9. 
 
 Sometimes the equival- 
 ent of the English, 
 Present, Perfect, or 
 Pluperfect, 147. 
 
 Apodosis, meaning of the 
 term, 195, footnote. 
 
 without av, 217-9. 
 
 Apposition, 5 ; Peculiarities 
 of, 24-26. 
 
 Article,2 5.?,?_Table of Con- 
 tents, ch. ii., 27-46. 
 
 as Personal, Demon- 
 strative, and Relative 
 in Attic, 28. 
 
 Article, for Possessive, 30. 
 
 with words used ma- 
 
 terialiter, 35. 
 
 not repeated with a 
 
 second noun, 35. 
 
 Asyndeton, 24. 
 
 Attraction, 58. 
 
 Attributive or Epithet, 5 ; 
 Peculiarities in Construc- 
 tion, 23-4. 
 
 Cases, Preliminary Note 
 
 on, 64. 
 Causal Sentences, see Table 
 
 of Contents, 276-9. 
 Causative Active Voice, 
 
 125 ; do. Middle, 127. 
 Collective Noun with Plural 
 
 Predicate, 19. 
 Comparative and Super- 
 lative, 120-3. 
 denoting too great 
 
 a degree, 97, 120, 121. 
 Concessive Sentences, see 
 
 Table of Contents, 249- 
 
 251. . 
 Conditional Sentences, see 
 
 Table of Contents, 193- 
 
 231- 
 Sentences, examples 
 
 of, 209-231. 
 Consecutive Sentences, see 
 
 Table of Contents, 269- 
 
 275- . 
 Co-ordinate Sentences, 7. 
 Copula, I ; Verbs used as, 
 
 12 ; omitted, 13. 
 Construction Kara <rvve<Tiv, 
 
 24. 
 
 Dative, see Table of Con- 
 tents, 104-119. 
 
 Dative of interest in Par- 
 ticipial phrases, 107. 
 
 of circumstance used 
 
 adverbially (^.^. <Ti.yrj), 
 114.^ 
 
 with Infinitive, 13, 158. 
 
 as an Oblique Pre- 
 dicate, 45. 
 
 Dawes' Canon, note on, 267. 
 
 Deliberative or Dubitative, 
 see Questions. 
 
 Definite and Indefinite 
 Sentences, 194-5. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns as 
 Subjects and Predicates, 
 18. 
 
 Pronouns preceding a 
 
 sentence in Apposition, 
 
 25- 
 
 Deponent Verbs, 131. 
 Dual Number, 19, 20. 
 
 Emotion, Verbs of, with 
 
 Participles, 170. 
 — — Verbs of, with el for 
 
 OTt, 186. 
 Epithet, see Attributive. 
 
 Fearing, Verbs of, with 
 fj.ri, |u,T) ov, 262-8. 
 
 (i) With Subj. or Opt, 
 262. 
 
 (2) With Fut. Indie, 
 264. 
 
 (3) With oTTw? ju-rj and 
 Fut. Indie. Subj. or 
 Opt., 265. 
 
 (4) With ws and Fut. 
 Indie, 265. 
 
 (5) With Infin., 265. 
 
 (6) With ei Interroga- 
 tive, 266. 
 
 1 For an explanation of this construction, see Monro's Homeric Gramtnar, p. 158. 
 
 2 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, where the uses of the Article are arranged under 
 three heads. 
 
 425 
 
426 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Figures of Rhetoric, see 
 Part III., ch. iv., Table 
 of Contents. 
 
 Final Sentences, 252, 259. 
 
 (1) With IVa, cos, OTTO)?, i 
 
 and Subj. or Opt., | 
 
 ^53-. . „ „ : 
 
 (2) With W9, OTTO)? av \ 
 and Subj. (not Opt.), 
 255- 
 
 (3) Rarely with Fut. 
 Indie, 256. 
 
 Frequentative, see Itera- 
 tive. 
 
 Future Middle as Passive, 
 125. 
 
 Perfect, 150. 
 
 Indicative, with ottws 
 
 Final, 256, n. 4 ; Fut. 
 Opt., as Obliqua of 
 above, 256. 
 
 Genitive, see Table of Con- 
 tents, 78-104. 
 
 Absolute, 1 96, 165-7. 
 
 with Infinitive, 13, 
 
 158. 
 
 as Oblique Predicate, 
 
 45-. 
 
 in Apposition to an- 
 other Genitive supplied 
 in the Possessive, 26, 49. 
 
 Gnomic Tenses, 151. | 
 
 Graphic (or Vivid) con- 
 struction, i.e. the Sub- 
 stitution, in a Subordinate 
 Clause in Historic Se- 
 quence of the Mood 
 used in the Primary 
 Sequence, 138, 182, etc. 
 
 see also Oratio Obliqua 
 
 passim, esp. 386, 404. 
 
 H 
 
 Hoping and Promising, 
 Verbs of, with Pres. and 
 Aor. Infin., 180-1. 
 
 Imperative Mood, 136-7. 
 Imperfect Tense, uses of, 
 
 143-4- 
 
 Indicative Mood — 
 
 states facts or asks 
 
 questions, 132. 
 
 in the Indirect State- 
 ment, 181, etc. 
 
 Indicative Mood — 
 
 in the Indirect Ques- 
 tion, 188. 
 
 in the Indirect Petition 
 
 (Fut. Indie), 192. 
 
 in Definite Sentences, 
 
 194-5- 
 
 in Conditional Sen- 
 tences, see Part II. ch. ii. 
 {a) Present Conditions. 
 (b) Future Conditions. 
 {c) Past Conditions. 
 Id) Unfulfilled Past or 
 Present Conditions. 
 
 in Temporal Sentences 
 
 to denote Definite Time, 
 see Part II. ch. iii. 
 
 in Concessive Sen- 
 tences, see Part II. ch. iv. 
 
 in Final Sentences of 
 
 Past Purpose, 257. 
 
 in Relative Final Sen- 
 tences, 258. 
 
 with oTTws Modal (Fut. 
 
 Indie), 259, etc., 262. 
 
 with Verbs of Fearing, 
 
 263. 
 
 with Consecutive Sen- 
 tences, see Part II. ch. vi. 
 
 with Limitative or Re- 
 strictive Sentences, 274. 
 
 with Causal Sentences, 
 
 see Part II. ch. vii. 
 
 with Expressions of 
 
 Wishes, see Part II. ch. 
 viii. 
 
 with Relative Sen- 
 tences, see Part II. ch. 
 ix. 
 
 substituted for the 
 
 Optative by the Graphic 
 or Vivid Construction in 
 Historic Sequence where- 
 ever the Recta or the 
 Primary Sequence took 
 an Indicative. 
 
 Infinitive, see Table of 
 Contents, 153-162. 
 
 Epexegetical, 155-6. 
 
 compared with Latin 
 
 Supine, 155. 
 
 after a Comparative 
 
 with 7) or aisTe, 156. 
 
 with to)9, ois ye, Limi- 
 tative, 156. 
 
 for Imperative, 2 159. 
 
 denoting surprise, 160. 
 
 personal and im- 
 personal passive con- 
 struction, 159. 
 
 1 Infinitive, with toG denot 
 
 ing a purpose, 162. 
 in Indirect Statement 
 
 178, etc. 
 in Indirect Petition 
 
 191. 
 with Verbs of Fearing 
 
 265. _ 
 with T<p, used caus 
 
 ally, 279. 
 in Oratio Obliqua 
 
 introduced without a 
 
 Principal Verb, 398. 
 and Finite Mood 
 
 alternating in Orat. 
 
 Obliqua, 400. 
 with Adverbial and 
 
 Relative Sentences in 
 
 Orat. Obliqua, 400. 
 in Latin Orat. Obliqua, 
 
 401. 
 Indefinite Tenses, see 
 
 Definite. 
 Time, three kinds of, 
 
 232. 
 Iterative (Frequentative) 
 
 Tenses, 151. 
 See Temporal Sen- 
 tences. 
 
 Limitative or Restrictive 
 
 Sentences, 274-5. 
 Locative Case, 64-5, 116. 
 
 M 
 
 Middle Voice, 3 125-130. 
 
 (and Active) Verbs. 
 
 Alphabetical List, 127- 
 130. 
 Modal Sentences with ottw? 
 oTTtb? uri, 259-262. 
 (i) Fut. Indie, or Fut 
 Opt., 260. 
 
 (2) Subj. or Opt., 260. 
 
 (3) OTTt], OT(f) TpOTTOJ, e^ 
 OT&) TpOTTO) for OTTO)?, 
 
 261. 
 
 (4) oTTws with av and 
 Subj., 261. 
 
 (5) With /Ajj for OTTO)? 
 /oiTj, 261. 
 
 Moods, see Table of Con- 
 tents, 132, 137. 
 
 N. 
 
 Negatives, see Part III., 
 Ch. ii., Table of Contents. 
 
 1 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 167. 
 
 ' On the Infinitive as an Imperative see Monro's Hotneric Grainmar, p. 162. The 
 whole of the chapter (see especially the Infin. as Subject, 157, Accus. with Infin., 158, 
 Origin and History of Infinitive, 163), is worth careful perusal. 
 
 3 For the Middle and its uses, see Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 7. The Passive 
 has grown out of the Middle, in fact was originally one of the uses of the Middle. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 427 
 
 Neuter Plural, with Verb 
 
 Singular, 15. 
 Plural, with Verb Plu- 
 
 ral, 15. 
 Singular Predicate, 
 
 with Plural Subject, 15. 
 Pronoun, (Adj. or Adv.) 
 
 with Gen. (like Lat. paul- 
 
 lum sapientiae), 85. 
 Nominative Case, 65. 
 with Infinitive, 13, 158, 
 
 179. 
 with Participle, 187. 
 
 Object, Direct and Remote 
 
 5- 
 Sentence, 252, foot 
 
 note. 
 Optative Mood— 
 
 Introductory Note, 132 
 
 in Independent Sen 
 
 tences, 135, etc. 
 
 A. Denoting a Wish 
 (an Exhortation 
 Command, or Pro 
 hibition). 
 
 B. Deliberative Ques 
 
 tions. 
 in the Indirect State 
 
 ment, 181. 
 in the Indirect Ques 
 
 tion, 188. 
 in Deliberative In 
 
 direct Questions. 190. 
 in the Indirect Peti 
 
 tion (Fut. Opt.), 191, 262, 
 in Conditional Sen 
 
 tences, see Part II. ch. ii 
 (a.) In Future Condi 
 
 tions. 
 {b.') In General or Fre 
 quentative Past Con 
 ditions. 
 in Temporal Sentences 
 
 denoting Indefinite Time 
 
 (which is of three kinds) 
 
 see Part II. ch. iii. 
 in Concessive Sen 
 
 tences with el /cai, Kai el 
 
 250. 
 in Final Sentences, 
 
 252, etc. 
 in Relative Final Sen 
 
 tences, 259. 
 with oTTws Modal (Fut 
 
 Opt.), 259. 
 with Causal Sentences 
 
 in Virtual Oratio Obliqua 
 
 =77- . ^ . ^ 
 
 with expressions of a 
 
 Wish, 280. 
 used in Primary Se- 
 quence, 256. 
 
 Optative Mood— 
 
 the Optative with av, 
 
 found in other Sentences, 
 is always an Apodosis 
 used subordinately. 
 
 Optative in Oratio 
 
 Obliqna introduced with- 
 out a Principal Verb, 399. 
 
 Assimilation and Non- 
 Assimilation of Optatives, 
 402-3. 
 
 Oratio Recta and 
 
 Obliqua, 10. Virtual Ob- 
 liqua, II, 240, 243, 277, 
 etc. 
 
 see Chapter on Oratio 
 
 Obliqua. 
 
 Oratio Obliqua, see 
 
 Part III., ch. iii. (Table 
 of Contents). 
 
 Participle, see Table of 
 
 Contents, 162-177. 
 Fut. Part, with Article, 
 
 163. 
 
 Neuter or Substan- 
 tive, 164. 
 
 with Verbs of Percep- 
 tion, Emotion, etc., 170, 
 etc. 
 
 in Indirect Statement, 
 
 187, etc. 
 
 Conditional Protasis, 
 
 224. 
 
 Conditional Apodosis, 
 
 227. 
 
 Temporal, 247-8. 
 
 Concessive, 249. 
 
 Final, 258. 
 
 Causal, 278. 
 
 Passive Voice, 130-1. 
 
 Voice, in Greek and 
 
 Latin, 130. 
 Perception, Verbs of, with 
 
 Participle, 186. 
 
 Verbs with on, or a>s, 
 
 187. 
 
 Verbs with Ace. and 
 
 Gen., 88. 
 
 Verbs with Preposi- 
 tion, 89. 
 
 Verbs with Adjectives 
 
 and Adverbs denoting 
 Perception in Gen., 100. 
 
 Verbs with juirj, and 
 
 Infin., 353. 
 
 Verbs with ju,>7, and 
 
 Particip. , 354. See 364. 
 
 Perfect Tense, uses of, 144. 
 Person, 2d pers. sing., used 
 
 impersonally, 22. 
 Petition Indirect, 191-2. 
 Plural for Singular, 21-2. 
 
 Predicate, i, 13, contrasted 
 with Attributive, and Ap- 
 position, 5. Supplemen- 
 tary, 2, 22 ; Oblique or 
 Dependent, 43-5. 
 
 agreement of, with 
 
 several Subjects, 16-18. 
 
 with Article, 37. 
 
 Prepositions, see Table of 
 
 Contents, Part III., 286, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Quasi Prepositions 
 
 288, 301-2, 306. 
 
 Present Tense, uses of, 142 
 Principal and Subordinate 
 
 see Sentence. 
 Promising, ste Hoping. 
 Pronouns, see Table of Con 
 
 tents, Part I. ch. iii.. 
 
 47-63. 
 
 Personal, for Reflex 
 
 ive, 48. 
 
 • Possessive, for a Geni 
 
 tive Subjective, or Objec 
 tive, 49. 
 
 in Gen., agreeing with 
 
 a Personal Pronoun im 
 plied in the Possessive 
 49. 
 
 Reflexive, for Recipro 
 
 cal, 50. 
 
 as antecedent to the 
 
 Relative, 52, n. 4, 55, «. i. 
 
 Protasis and Apodosis, 
 , meanings of, 195, footnote. 
 
 Questions, Indirect, 188. 
 Indirect, Deliberative, 
 
 190-1. 
 Deliberative, in Subj. 
 
 and Opt., 134-6. 
 
 Recta and Obliqua, 10. 
 Relative Sentences,9, 284-5. 1 
 Restrictive, see Limitative. 
 
 Schema Pindaricum, 16. 
 
 Sentence, parts of, i. 
 
 Simple and Compound, 
 
 Principal and Sub- 
 ordinate, 6. 
 
 Co-ordinate, 7. 
 
 Subordinate classified, 
 
 7-10. 
 
 Sequence of Moods, 138. 
 
 Singular for Plural, 18. 
 
 Statement, Indirect, see 
 Table of Contents, 178, 
 187. 
 
 1 On Relative Sentences, see Monro's Homeric Grammar. 
 
428 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 Subdirect and Suboblique, 
 II, 389 (and Orat. Obi., 
 passim). 
 
 Subjunctive 1 — 
 
 Introductory Note, 132. 
 
 in Independent Sen- 
 tences, 134, 135. 
 
 A. In Exhortations. 
 
 B. In Prohibitions. 
 
 C. In Deliberative 
 
 Questions. 
 
 D. Denoting a future 
 possibility (a very 
 rare Attic construc- 
 tion). 
 
 in Deliberative Indirect 
 
 Questions. 190. 
 
 ■ in Indefinite Sentences 
 
 with a.v, 194. 
 in Conditional Ques- 
 tions {see Part II. ch. 
 ii.). 
 (a.) In Future Condi- 
 tions. 
 {b.') In General or Fre- 
 quentative Present 
 Conditions. 
 in Temporal Sentences 
 
 denoting Indefinite Time 
 (which is of three kinds), 
 {see Part II. ch. iii.). 
 
 Subjunctive, in Concessive 
 Sentences with eav /cat, 
 (cat kav. 250. 
 
 in Final Sentences of 
 
 Primary Sequence {see 
 Part II. ch. V.) 
 
 in Modal Sentences 
 
 with oTTcds, etc., as a rarer 
 and variant construction, 
 260. 
 
 with Verbs of Fearing, 
 
 etc., 263, etc. 
 
 alternating with Opta- 
 tive, 182-184 {see Com- 
 pound Sentence and 
 Oratio Obliqua passim, 
 and 254, «. i). 
 
 Substituted, by the 
 Graphic or Vivid Construc- 
 tion, for the Optative in 
 Historic Sequence where- 
 ever the Recta or the Pri- 
 mary Sequence took a Sub- 
 junctive, see Graphic. 
 
 Substantive used as Adjec- 
 tive or Attributive, 23. 
 
 Superlative and Compara- 
 tive, 120-123. 
 
 Swearing and Witnessing, 
 Verbs of, take /iatj, 353, 
 n. 4, {see 352). 
 
 Temporal Sentences, see 
 Table of Contents, Part 
 II., ch. iii., 232-248. 
 
 Tenses, see Table of Con- 
 tents, Part I. ch. vii., 
 138-152. 
 
 Time in the Moods, 139. 
 
 Tmesis, 288. 
 
 Transitive Verbs become 
 Intransitive, 124. 
 
 V. 
 Vocative, 80. 
 
 Voices, see Table of Con- 
 tents, 124-131. 
 
 W. 
 Wish, expressions of. 280-3. 
 
 1 On the Subjunctive and Optative see Monro' .<; Homeric Grammar (Subjunctive 
 in Principal Clauses, 196 ; in Subordinate Clauses, 201 ; Optative in Simple Sentences, 
 215 ; in Subordinate, 219 ; History of Subjunctive and Optative, 229, etc.). 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 The numbers refer to the pages of the book. 
 
 A privative, Adjectives 
 compounded with, take 
 a Gen., e.g: aiJ.vi^fX(ov, 
 avTjKOO?, 98, 103. 
 
 aya66v (eu, KaKov, etc.), 
 Xeyo), SpCi, etc., with 
 double Ace, 72 (for Pas- 
 sive forms, see 73, n. 2). 
 
 aydWofjiai, with Dat., 112. 
 
 ayajuat, with Gen., 94. 
 
 ayavaKTS>, with Dat., 117. 
 
 ayeiv xeipos, 87. 
 
 ayvo?, with Gen., 103. 
 
 a.Se\<f>6^, with Gen. or Dat., 
 
 dSt/cto, with double Ace, 
 
 A9r)V(x>v 7roA.t?, 81. 
 aOvfjib), with Dat., 112. 
 aiSoiifxai, with Ace, 75. 
 
 atpto, with Gen. of Charge, 
 
 at(Txvvo/u.at, with Acc, 75. 
 
 — with Dat., 112. 
 
 — with Infin., 155, 172. 
 
 — with /u.r], 264. 
 alcrOavofJiai, with Gen., 86. 
 
 — with Particip., 169, 175, 
 _i86. 
 
 atTtto/utat, with Gen. of | 
 
 Charge, 95. _ [ 
 
 aKo\ov66<;, with Gen. or 
 
 Dat., 119. 
 oLKoKovOoi, with Dat., 118. j 
 OLKOvoi, a.Kpott)fX.aL, with 
 
 Gen., 86. 
 aAt?, with Gen., 82. 
 a\CcrKOfj.a(., with Gen. of 1 
 
 charge, 95. _ j 
 
 aAAos, dAAoios, with Gen., I 
 
 ., ^°3- . . i 
 
 dAAos, meaning besides, 62. j 
 
 6 dXXoj, meaning in general, 
 
 aAAo? oaos, aAAo? etrt?, 60. 
 dAAdrpios, Dat. or Gen., 
 
 , 79, 119- . 
 'Ajaa, quasi-Prep., 306. 
 ct^ta, with Dat., 119. 
 aixapTavu), with Gen., 86. 
 ajxei^oixaL, with Gen., 93. 
 d/ieXto, with Gen., 87. 
 afivvM, with Dat., 116. 
 dju,ui/o|aat, with Acc, 76. 
 aixvvu} and afjLvvo fxai, 129. 
 a^^t. Prep., 317-319. 
 afiKfyteuvvfjil, with double 
 
 Acc, 72. 
 a/n</)tcr/3rjTc3, with Gen. and 
 
 Dat, 117, 118. 
 — with joiTj, /lATj ov, 365. 
 "Av, .see Part II., ch. ii., 
 
 Table of Contents, 193- 
 
 231. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 429 
 
 "Av, with Iraperf. and Aor. 
 Indie, denoting a re- 
 peated act, 151. 
 
 — with Aor. rSfin., after 
 Verbs of hoping, etc., 
 181. 
 
 — with Infin., in Indirect 
 Statement, 181. 
 
 — with Optat. , in Indirect 
 Statement, 185. 
 
 — with Particip. , in In- 
 direct Statement, 187. 
 
 — with Aor. Indie, not 
 denoting an unfulfilled 
 condition, 216. 
 
 — omitted with the Subj. 
 in Subordinate Sentences, 
 245- . 
 
 — retained with the Qptat. 
 in Subordinate Sentences, 
 246. 
 
 — with Final Sentences, 
 255- „ 
 
 — with oTTws Modal, 261, 
 n. 4. 
 
 — with uiCFTi Consecutive, 
 272, n. 2. 
 
 'Ava, Prep., 291, 292. 
 a.va.'^Ko.Cfii, with double Ace. , 
 
 . 73- , 
 
 avay/caios, construction of, 
 
 ava/u,iju.v7jcr/c<o riva. ri and 
 
 Tiva Tivos, 73, n. 3. 
 Avev, 301. 
 
 dvi7p=Tis, with Gen., 83. 
 dvTexw, with Dat., 118. 
 dvTexojaai, with Gen., 86. 
 'AvTi, Prep., 294. 
 dvTiXeYW firj and jiatj ov, 
 
 , 365- 
 
 avTiTTOiw, with double Ace, 
 
 72. ! 
 
 dvTt'crTpo(|)09, with Gen. or j 
 Dat., 119. _ _ I 
 
 dvvTti), with Particip., 172. 1 
 
 dftos, construction of, 159. ! 
 
 a^tw, with Gen., 93, 103. | 
 
 anayopevo) (dtTreiTrov) fxri, fii] 
 ov, 365. 
 
 anaWdaa-ix), -o/xai, with 
 Gen., 99. 
 
 anavrCii, with Dat., 118. 
 
 aneiOSi, with Dat., 116. 
 
 anex96ivo(iai, with Dat., 
 
 . V7- 
 
 aiTe\ui, with Gen., 99. 
 d7rexOju.at /utr), fx-rf ov, 363. 
 a.nt.<xrla, with Dat., 116. 
 
 — (dn-itrTiaj/ rra.pix'^'-) fJ^V, 
 fx-T) ov, 264, 365. 
 
 'Atto, Prep., 295-297. 
 diroSexofxai ravTo. rtvo?, 88. 
 diToSiSpda-Kia, with Ace, 75. 
 airoSt'6o/xai, with Gen., 93. 
 dnoKdfivu), with Particip., 
 172. 
 
 diroKpyTTTOfiaL firj, jiirj ov, 
 
 , 365. , , 
 
 anoKavM n Ttvo?, 85, 86. 
 dnoKvop.aL fj.rj, jixtj ov, 365. 
 dnopCa, with Gen., 82. 
 dnoarepio, with double 
 
 Ace, 72. 
 a.TroaTpe(f)ix) fxr), yJr] ov, 365. 
 dirorpiTtbi, with Gen., 100. 
 d7roTvyx«*'<«>> with Gen., 
 ^ 86. 
 
 otTro^evyw, with Gen. (of 
 ^ charge), ^5. 
 anTOfjLai, with Gen., 86. 
 dpT^yoi, (poet.), with Dat., 
 
 . "^• 
 
 dp/co), dpKel, construction, 
 
 173- 
 dpvovfjiai 1X7] and /ht) ov, 365. 
 dpri, with Present, 143. 
 a.px<o, dpxojaat, with Gen., 
 
 86, 88, 98. 
 
 — with Infin. and Particip., 
 „ ^71- 
 
 are, Causal. 
 
 a.vroKpa.T(ap, with Gen., 103. 
 avTos, various uses of, 53- 
 55-. 
 
 — with Dat. of Circum- 
 stance, 114. 
 
 — strengthens Reflexives, 
 49. 
 
 — subject to Infinitive, 179. 
 avTO-8iKa.io(Tvvi}, etc. (Plat- 
 onic idioms), 26, 55. 
 
 avTOs and 6 avr6<;, 42, 53-4. 
 6 avTOf, constructions of, 
 
 no. 
 d^atpoO/aat Ttvd Ti, and 
 
 TLvd. Ttvos, 72, 73, n. 3. 
 d(f)Criij.t, with Gen. (of 
 
 charge), 95. 
 d<^i<mjju.t, with Gen., 99. 
 dx^o/Atti, with Dat., 112, 
 
 "7- 
 dxpeios, dxprf<7T0<;, with 
 
 Dat., 119. 
 "Axpt, quasi-Prep., 302. 
 
 — temporal Conjunction 
 (see /xe'xpO- 
 
 B 
 
 PaCvu) noSa, 77. 
 /Sapews <f>ep(i), with Dat. 117. 
 /SaortAevu), with Gen., 98. 
 ^id^o/utai, with Ace, 78. 
 ^AdTTTto, with double Ace, 
 
 72- 
 /SXacrreiv, with Gen., 80. 
 jBAeVw vSttv, etc., 78. 
 /SoTj^w, with Dat., 116. 
 /SovAevo) oTTw?, with Fut. 
 
 Indie, etc., 261-2. 
 
 yeku, with Ace, 76. 
 
 yevoi, with Gen., 84, 86. 
 yripoTpofjxS, with Ace, 76. 
 •ypd<f)0|uat, with Gen. of 
 
 charge, 95. 
 — with double Ace, 73. 
 yvp.v6?, with Gen., 82, 98, 
 
 103. 
 
 SaKpvto, with Ace, 76. 
 SeSoLKa, with Infin., 155.. 
 SepKO/jiaL nvp, 'Aprjv, etc., 
 
 ,78- , . 
 Sr], SrjTTOTe, Sijirorovv, as 
 
 Suffixes, 58. 
 SrjAos, SrjAo), constructions, 
 
 J72, 174. 
 oet, constructions, 117. 
 Sel oTTojs, 261, n. 8. 
 Sevrepos, SevrepaTo?, with 
 
 Gen., 97. 
 Atd, Prep., 307-310. 
 Sia/BdAAo), with double Ace , 
 
 72. ^ 
 otaAAacra'a) Tiva. tivi, 105. 
 5^aAe'70/u,a^, with Dat., 109, 
 
 118. 
 Siavefiui, with Ace and 
 
 Dat., 105. 
 StaTrAe'w, with Ace, 75. 
 S(.a<j)ep(a, with Gen., 97. 
 dta(f,epofx.ai, with Dat., 98, 
 
 109. 
 SLa<f,ep6vr<ag exw, with Gen. , 
 
 97, 103. _ 
 ota(/)opo9, with Gen., 97, 
 
 with Dat. or Gen., 109, 
 
 119. 
 SiSda-Kui, with double Ace, 
 
 72. 
 Ste'xw, with Gen., 99. 
 St/catos, construction of, 
 . ^59- 
 ot;rAacrio?, etc., with Gen., 
 
 97- 
 6n//w, with Gen., 87. 
 SiiOKia, with Gen. of charge 
 
 (6 Siu>K(jiv), 95. 
 SoKel, SoKU), construction of, 
 
 IJ7, 159- 
 Svolv OaT^pov, etc., 26. 
 Svo-epw?, with Gen., 103. 
 Sva-vovi, with Dat., 119. 
 
 edv, see Conditional and 
 Concessive Sentences. 
 
 — never Interrogative, 191, 
 footnote, 207. 
 
 eavTov, for ist and 2dpers., 
 50- 
 
 — Reciprocal, 50. 
 
 e-yyvs, with Gen and Dat., 
 
 t.yyvuip.o.1, with ju.^ and 
 Infin., 353. 
 
430 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 iyta ((Tv) for avTog, as Sub- | 
 
 ject of Infin., i8o. 
 eyKoXS), vrith Dat. , 117. 
 eyKpa-nj?, with Gen., 103. 
 eSei, without ap, 144, 218. 
 €t. See Conditional and 
 
 Concessive Sentences. 
 
 — Interrogative. See In- 
 direct Question. _ 
 
 — Interrogative, with Subj. , 
 291. 
 
 — Interrogative, with Verbs 
 of Fearing, 266. 
 
 — for oTi with Verbs of 
 Emotion, 186. 
 
 — with Subj., 245. 
 
 ei (edv) KaC, Koi el (eav), 
 
 250. 
 ei, ct yap, et0e, with Wishes, 
 
 _ 280-283. 
 et fie jU,TJ, 208. 
 ei (eav)=si forte, 208. 
 el eav, in Virtual Obliqua, 
 
 ei ov, 347, 358, 359. _ 
 
 etn-ep (eavrre'p), quasi con- 
 cessive, 250. 
 
 el»cbs ^v (without av), see 
 e"5ti. 
 
 elicuj, with Gen., 99, Gen. or 
 Dat., 106. 
 
 eljoti, with Gen., 90. 
 
 elpyui, with Gen., 99. 
 
 — fJ-V, I^V ov, 365. 
 Els, Prep. 292. 
 
 els 5i5ao-»caA.ov, Ai5ou, etc., 
 
 79. 
 els dvijp, with Superlative, 
 
 133. 
 eicret/xt, with Ace, 75. 
 'E/c, 'E^, Prep., 297. 
 eKttTi, 301. 
 
 eKStSpacTKw, with Ace, 75. 
 eKpaCvu), with Gen., 100. 
 e/ceti'os, uses of, 52. 
 eKTrAjjiraofxat, etc. , with 
 
 Ace, 75. 
 eAttTTw, eA.aTTOvp.at, with 
 
 Gen., 98. ^ 
 eA.ev0epos, eKevOepto, with 
 
 Gen., 98; 99, 103. 
 cAAtTT^s, with Gen., 113. 
 e'AKOs ovTacrat, etc., 69.^ , 
 ep.p,o;'Os(epp.eVco), with Dat., j 
 
 119. 
 ep,7rAeco?, with Gen., 82. • 
 
 e'p.Tetpos (aTretpos), with 
 
 Gen., 103. ^ I 
 
 ep,7ro5t^op.ai(ep.7ro6wi'eii'ai), 1 
 
 Dat. 116. 
 
 — p.17, p-T) oy, 365. 
 e'p.(|)VTos, with Dat., 119. 
 'Ev, Prep., 302. 
 
 iv, when used with Dat. of 
 Time, 115. ' 
 
 evavTios, with Gen. or Dat. , 
 
 103. 
 iySvui (f/cSvo)), with double 
 
 Ace, 72. 
 epeKa, eveKcv, 301. 
 epyoiii fxr), p.T) ov, 264. 
 ei'TpeVopat, with Gen., 87. 
 evTvy)(^dvi)i, with Dat. , 109, 
 
 1^18. 
 
 e^ OTOV TpOTTOV, 261. 
 
 e^icmqfjii, with Ace, 75, 
 with Gen., 100. 
 
 eot/ca, with Dat, 117, con- 
 structions of, 159. 
 
 enaivoi, with double Ace, 
 72. 
 
 e7raipop.ai, with Dat., 112. 
 
 eTTc'^ecpi, with Gen. of 
 charge, 95. 
 
 eTre'pxopai, with Dat., 118. 
 
 eTTjjjSoAos, with Gen., 90, 
 103. 
 
 eTrTjpea^tu, with Dat., 117. 
 
 'Etti, Prep., 318-327. 
 
 — Verbs compounded with, 
 take a Dat., 118. 
 
 eTTiSe'rjs, with Gen., 103. 
 eTnSeCKvvfj.L, with Partie, 
 
 187 (see 174 A.). 
 enCSo^o^, constructions of, 
 
 159- 
 eTTiKovpos, with Gen., 103. 
 eniKOvpta, with Dat. ii6. 
 e;n.p,eA^?, eTTiAijcrpwv, with 
 
 Gen., 103. 
 e7ripeAovp,ai, with ottws. 
 
 Modal, 260-1. 
 
 — with Infin., 261, «. 6. 
 eTrtcTTapat, with Partie, 175. 
 
 — with Partie, and with 
 Infin. 
 
 — with p^ and Infin., 353. 
 €7rtTi0ep,at, with Dat., 117. 
 eTTiTTjSeios, with Dat., 119, 
 
 constructions of, 159. 
 iTTLTvyxo-voi, with Dat., 87. 
 eVopat, with Dat., 109, see 
 
 also 118. 
 epi7p.os, with Gen., 82, 103. 
 ep/^oj, with Dat., 117. 
 epw, with Gen., 87. 
 
 — with p.jj and Infin., 353. 
 eptuTw (r)p6fi.r]v), with double 
 
 Ace, 72. 
 ecrOCui, with Gen., 84. 
 ecTTLv o'l, e'lCTiv o'l, eviot,, 60. 
 eVepos, with Gen. , 97, 103. 
 evSaifjiovL^ui, with Gen., 94. 
 ev'Aaj3ovp.ai, with Ace, 76. 
 
 — with Infin., 155. 
 
 — with oTTws, 260, with p.^, 
 p.7j ov, 264, 365. 
 
 evAoyw, with double Ace, 
 
 „72- 
 evi/ovs, with Dat., 119. 
 
 «(^e^Tjs, with Dat., 119. 
 
 6<if>' w (cj> Te), Limitative, 274. 
 
 i(j)iKPovixaL, with Gen., 86, 
 
 . 87. 
 
 exOpo?, with Dat., 119. 
 
 e;j(opat, with Gen., 86; 
 
 Meanings of, 90. 
 expi^v (xPVi'), without av, 
 
 144, 218. 
 ex(^, with Gen., 90. 
 
 — as a Copulative Verb, 43. 
 
 — My,M ov, 365. 
 
 exmv, in colloquialisms, 165. 
 
 ^rjAw, with Ace , 76 ; with 
 Gen., 94. 
 
 H 
 
 rjSrj, with Present, 143. 
 
 Tj Tts Yj ovSets, 62. 
 
 rj Kara, fj &)? (ai<rTe), with 
 
 Comparative, 121. 
 r/Sop-at, with Dat., 112. 
 rjp.t(rvs (6) Tov xpovov, etc., 
 . 8-5. . . 
 i9p.a)j/ (vp,ai^') avriav, Parti- 
 
 tively, 51. 
 i)TTa)p.ai, with Gen. , 97-98 ; 
 
 with Dat., III. 
 
 © 
 
 Qappu), with Acc, 75. 
 Oavfid^o}, with Gen. , 94. 
 flavp-ao-TOs otTos, etc., 59. 
 fliy-yai'w, with Gen., 86. 
 
 tStos, with Gen. or Dat., 79, 
 
 tepos, with Gen., 79. 
 iKavos, Constructions of, 
 „ ^73-. 
 
 iva, Final Conjunction, 253. 
 'iva dv, not Final, 255. 
 Itropotpos, with Gen., 84. 
 IcroppoTTOs, with Gen. or 
 
 Dat., 119. 
 to-os, Constructions of, no, 
 ^ 119. 
 lo-w, with Acc. and Dat., 
 
 117. 
 
 K 
 
 KaOapos, with Gen., 82, 98, 
 
 103. , 
 Kai, Kanrep, KaC ravra, see 
 
 Concessive Sentences, 
 
 242. 
 Kat, joining two Adjectives, 
 
 24. 
 
 1 See Monro's Homeric Grajiunar, p. 93. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 431 
 
 Kav, Ka.v et, 209. 
 (coKOvpyo?, with Gen., 103. 
 KaAbs Acayaflos, 24. 
 AcaAw, with double Ace, 71. 
 Kara, Prep., 310-313. 
 Acara tovto eivat, 157. 
 KaTOLKpCvo), KOLTayiyvuiO-Kia, 
 
 etc., with Gen., 95. 
 KaranoKeixCi, with Acc, 76. 
 Kara^povoi, with Gen., 87. 
 Keipea-Oai, with Dat., 107. 
 /ceA.evcu, with Acc. and Dat. 
 
 also with Acc. and Inf., 
 
 116. 
 «v6s, with Gen., 82. 
 Ke<|)dAatov {dtnique, ad 
 
 summam), 26. 
 
 /CtV5uv6s eCTTl /A^, jtAT) OV, 264. 
 
 Kt^ai'to, with Acc, 86. 
 AcXvto ravTo. <rou, 88. 
 KOivos, with Gen. or Dat., 
 
 79' "9- . ^. . 
 
 -/COS, Adjectives ending in, 
 
 with Gen., 113. 
 Koivwvaj, with Gen. and 
 
 Dat. 84. 
 Kpa.T(a, with Acc. and Gen., 
 
 87, 97, 98. 
 KpvTTTtti, with double Acc, 
 
 /cvptos, with Gen., 103. 
 Kvpw. with Gen., 86, 87 ; 
 
 with Particip. (poet.), 
 
 173- 
 Kiokvo), with double Acc, 
 
 72. 
 — ti.ri, M OV, 365. 
 
 \ayxav(a, with Gen., with 
 Acc, 85 «. I ; with Acc. 
 and Dat, 116. 
 
 A.afxj3ava>, with Gen. and 
 Acc. , 87. 
 
 A.aju,/3avoju,at, with Gen., 86. 
 
 Aav^ctvo/ixat (and Compds. ), 
 with Gen., 86. 
 
 kavGdvio, with Acc, 76. 
 
 kavddvoj, Ka0(ov construc- 
 tions, 173, 174. 
 
 Xarpevu), with Dat., 116. 
 
 AetVo/xat, with Gen., 98. 
 
 XrjYco, with Gen.. 99. 
 
 AoiSopto, with Acc, 73, «. 3. 
 
 A.oi5opo{}jaai, with Dat. 73, 
 H. 3, and 117. 
 
 \v(TiTeKel, with Dat., 117. 
 
 M 
 
 fid, and similar words, with 
 
 Acc, 77. 
 IxaKapi^txi, with Gen. (and 
 
 Aoc), 94. 
 jjidWov rj, with Compar. 
 
 and Positive, 121. 
 
 /xaxoju.ai, with Dat., 109, 
 
 fjLeioveKTw, with Gen. , 98. 
 
 ju.eAet ju,ot tovtou, 87. 
 
 lj.eX.eL, /AeTaju.eA.et, Construc- 
 tions of, 89, 117. 
 
 ju.eA.ei /xot, jaeAerw, with 
 OTTws Modal, 260, 261. 
 
 fieWbi, forming Periphras- 
 tic Future, 140. 
 
 — iris (rt) OV ixeWui ; 150. 
 
 — fi'?. M OV, 365. 
 fj.efx.<i)Qfj.ai, with Acc. and 
 
 Dat., 73, «. 3, and 117. 
 
 — also Acc, also Gen., 
 117- 
 
 ju.e'o-0?, with Gen. , 103. 
 /u.e(rr6?, with Gen., 82. 
 Mera, Prep., 316-317. 
 /u.eTfli5t6wju.t, with Gen. and 
 
 Dat., 84, 105. 
 fieraKafipdvui, with Gen., 
 
 84- , . 
 fxera^v, with Particip., 165. 
 jaeTaTTOiovjLtai, with Gen., 
 
 84. 
 fiereL^L, with Acc, 75. 
 /u,eTe'p;^Oju.at, with Acc, 75. 
 IxerecTTL, with Gen. and 
 
 Dat., 84, 117. 
 jaeTe'xw, with Gen., 84 : with 
 
 Acc, 85, «. I. 
 jneVoxos (a/u-eVoxos), with 
 
 Gen., 84. 
 /ae'xpi, Conjunction, 238 ; 
 
 quasi-Prep., 302. 
 M»j, j^^ Chapter on Nega- 
 tives. 
 jxr] pufi for jurj ov, 264. 
 ju,r; for oTTius/u.!?, Modal, 261. 
 jJLrj, omitted after Verbs of 
 
 denying, and fj-rj for jutj 
 
 ov, 369. 
 /xTjSe' ju.Tj6e'j76p, Concessive, 
 
 249-, 
 
 fAT/S' el, jLnjfi' ectv. Conces- 
 sive, 250. 
 
 ixr)vvui, with Dat. and Acc, 
 ii6._ 
 
 fjir)\av(ii)ixai ottwj, etc., 260, 
 a6i. 
 
 fLiKpov, 83. 
 
 f/.ilJivri<TKOfjiai, with Gen., 86. 
 
 ju-icrw, with Acc, 117. 
 
 fxp-qfjitav (dfjLvrjixojv), with 
 Gen., 103. 
 
 N 
 
 vol ij.d {vT)), with Acc, 77. 
 ve'/Aw, with double Acc, 71. 
 vLKUifjiai, with Gen., 97 ; 
 
 Dat., III. 
 vofii^(x), with Dat., iii. 
 
 ^wiTj/xt, with Gen., 86. 
 
 6 /SovAojuevo? (6 tuxw*'), 31, 
 
 o (orrep) \ey<o, 60. 
 
 o5e, 661, uses of, 51, 53. 
 
 o^w, with Gen., 86. 
 
 oGovveKa, for ort in state- 
 ments, 185 ; Causal, 277. 
 
 ol5a {^vvoiSa), with Partic. 
 with Infin., 175. 
 
 otKeios, with Gen., 79. 
 
 oiKTeipu), with Acc. and 
 Gen., 94. 
 
 oi'/aot, with Gen., 94. 
 
 olov, with Superlative, 123. 
 
 olo?, in Attraction, 60. 
 
 oios re, 60. 
 
 olo?. Consecutive, 275 ; 
 Causal, 278. 
 
 oicrd' 6 8pdarov ; 137. 
 
 ot;;^Ojaat, with Partic, 174. 
 
 bkiyov, bkCyov Sel, 82 ; oAt- 
 ■yow Seiv, 157. 
 
 oAiyoDpu), with Gen., 87. 
 
 6ju,iXaj, with Dat., 109, 118. 
 
 oiJLvvfjLL, with firi and Infin., 
 
 " ^"- r> ' ^ 
 
 0/u.oios (avojiAOios), 119. 
 
 — Constructions of, no. 
 
 b/jLoio), with Acc. and Dat., 
 117- 
 
 OjuoAoyw, with Dat., 117, 
 119 ; with Partic, 187. 
 
 o/aoo'e xwpoJ, with Dat., 117. 
 
 ojiAov, With Dat., 119. 
 
 6ju,iovvju,o?, with Dat., iig. 
 
 0/u.tos, .y^^ Concessive Sen- 
 tences, 249. 
 
 ovofid^w, with double Acc. , 
 
 OTrrj for oirws, with Fut. , 
 
 261. 
 oTTore, Causal, 277. 
 oirw?, Final, 253 ; Modal 
 
 with Fut., 259, etc. ; in 
 
 Indirect Petition, 262 ; 
 
 for oTi in Statements, 
 
 185 ; Temporal, 235 ; 
 
 oTTws dv, with Opt. not 
 
 final, 255. 
 op-yi'^ojaai, with Dat. and 
 
 Gen., 94, 117. 
 bpeyoixat, with Gen,, 86. 
 bp<})av6s, with Gen., 98. 
 bpiii jarj, ixrj ov, 264 ', OITWS, 
 
 260, 261. 
 OS, Personal, 29 ; Relative, 
 
 57 ; Interrogative, 56 ; 
 
 Conditional, 225, 226 ; 
 
 Consecutive, 274 ; Causal, 
 
 278. 
 OS ye Causal, 278. 
 o<ros, see olos- 
 ocroi' "ye jui' elSevai, 157. 
 OS Tre'p, 57. 
 ocrrts, Relative, 57 ; In- 
 
432 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 terrogative, 56 ; Condi- 
 tional, 225, 226 ; Con- 
 secutive, 274 ; Causal, 
 278. 
 
 h(T(^pcLivo(ji.at,, with Gen., 86. 
 
 ore, Temporal, 234 ; Causal, 
 277, n. 3. 
 
 oTi (and ojs), in Statements, 
 178, etc. ; difference be- 
 tween, 184. 
 
 Causal, 276 ; with Verbs of 
 Fearing, 265. 
 
 oTi, with Superlative, 123. 
 
 OTOJ TpOTTO) for 0770)9, 261. 
 
 Ov, ovK, ovyt, see Part III. 
 ch. ii. (Table of Con- 
 tents), 345, etc. 
 
 ov fxa, with Ace, 79. 
 
 ov /lATj, with Fut. Opt. and 
 Infin., 375. 
 
 0116' el (eav), Concessive, 
 250. 
 
 oiifie (Trep), Concessive, 249. 
 
 o5, ot, e. Reflexives, 50. 
 
 ov8el? osTts ov, 59. 
 
 ov/c 016' av 61, 203. 
 
 o5v, as a Suffix, 58. 
 
 ovvsKa for ort, 185. 
 
 oStos, ovTocrC, Relatives, 
 ^57- 
 
 ovTOs, keus tu ! 66. 
 
 ovTw, in Wishes {sic — ut), 
 282. 
 
 o(^pa (Epic and Lyric), 
 final, 253. 
 
 o^LfjiaGT^';, with Gen.* 103. 
 
 n 
 
 7ra\ai, with Present, 143. 
 Tzav^quidlibet ^ 63. 
 trdvTa elvat. 16. 
 Ilapa, Prep. 318-332. 
 
 — Verbs compounded with, 
 take Dat., 118. 
 
 TrapajSaAAto, Constructions 
 
 of, 118. 
 TrapaTrArjcrio?, with Dat., 
 
 119 ; Constructions of, 
 
 no. 
 TrapaaKevao-TiKoSjwithGen. , 
 
 103. 
 napacrKeva^o) ottws, etc., 
 
 260, 261. 
 TrapaTaa-a-Ofxai, with Dat., 
 
 118. 
 Trapa^wpw, with Gen., 99. 
 TTttvco (Ace), and Gen., 99 ; 
 
 7ravo/u,at, Gen., 99 ; Travw 
 
 and Travo/aat, with Par- 
 
 ticip., 163, 170. 
 TrevTjg, with Gen., 82, 103. 
 TTeidofx-aL, with Dat., 116. 
 ireidov and tti^ov (n-ot), 116. 
 Trep, as a Suffix, 57. 
 TLepi, Prep., 332-335- 
 
 — Verbs compounded with. 
 
 take a Dat. of reference, 
 
 118. 
 7rept^aAXoju,at, with double 
 
 Ace, 72 ; Constructions 
 
 of, 118. 
 TrepLyLypofxai., with Gen., 
 
 97- . , ^ 
 
 TrepteijiAt, with Gen., 97. 
 Trepiepxofj.ai,, with Ace, 
 
 75- 
 TreptTrXew, with Ace, 75. 
 TrCfj.Tr\riixL, with Gen., 82 ; 
 
 Dat. , 82. 
 TTtVw, with Gen., 84 ; Ace, 
 
 85. 
 Tricrrevw, with Dat., 116. 
 TTLcrTevu) (Trenei<rfj.ai), with 
 
 /lAij and Infin., 353. 
 771'crvvos, with Dat., 119. 
 nXeoveKTcj, with Gen., 98. 
 TrAeto?, with Gen., 103. 
 TrArjprj?, with Gen., 82. 
 7rAovo-to9, with Gen., 82. 
 TTOiov/jiai, with Gen., 79. 
 TTOios ; Tro^ei' ; in Repeti- 
 tions, 56. 
 TTOios and ttoctos (indefinite), 
 
 61. 
 TToAe'jaio?, TroAejao), with 
 
 Dat., 119, 109. 
 ttoAAt) t^5 x'^P"^?" 85 • 
 TToAAoo-To?, etc., with Gen., 
 
 97- „ 
 TToAAov Set (Sew), 83. 
 TTorepo? ; and Trorepos, 61. 
 TTOv yrjs ; etc., 85, n. 3. 
 irpaKTtKo?, with Gen., 103. 
 Trpdcraw (Trpdcraofiai), with 
 
 double Ace, 72 ; Trpda-croi 
 
 oirws, etc. 260, 261. 
 TTpeVei, with Dat., 117. 
 IIpo, Prep., 300. 
 TTpoOv^ovfxaL, with Ace, 
 
 76; oTvoiq. etc., 260, 261. 
 irpoKaKovp-aL, with Gen. of 
 
 charge, 95.^ 
 TrpoKeijLiai, with Gen., 100. 
 7rpos(|)tA^?, with Dat., 119. 
 ■n-poTLfxw, with (Ace) and 
 
 Gen., 100. 
 IIpo?, Prep., 336. 
 — Verbs compounded with, 
 
 take a Dat., 118. 
 TTposayopevw, with double 
 
 Ace, 71. 
 Trposeiju-i, with Dat., 118. 
 Trposepxc/Ltat, with Dat., 
 
 109. 
 7rp6sTj/cei /moi tovtov, 117. 
 Trpos/cpovw, with Dat., 118, 
 
 119. 
 7rposTV7x**''^> with Dat., 
 
 87, log, ii 8._ ^ 
 7rpoTtpatos,/u^gien., 97. 
 
 TTwAw, with Gen., 93. 
 TTws yap df ; 209. 
 
 TTws du ; in Wishes, 215, 
 280, etc. 
 
 cnjjaetov Se, 26. 
 <riw7raj, with Ace, 76. 
 o-KOTTw et, Interrog., 261 ; 
 
 OTTws, etc. 260, 261 ; /u.^, 
 
 jarj ov, 264. 
 cTTTOvSd^w oTrioj, etc., 260, 
 ■ 261.^ 
 
 aracnd^co, with Dat., 117. 
 (TTepia-KOfJiaL, with Gen., 99. 
 crrec^ai'oviaai, with Dat., 
 
 117. 
 (TToxd^ofxaL, with Gen., 86. 
 (TTpa-nqyio, with Gen., 98. 
 <ruyyiyi'io<rK(o, with Dat. 
 
 and Gen., 95. 
 (TvyyvbJfjiUiv, with Gen., 103. 
 crvyxiopui, with /u.>j and In- 
 fin., 353. 
 <jvKO(jiavTU), with Ace, 76. 
 crvWafi^dvui, Construction, 
 
 118. 
 o-vja^ovAevw, with Ace and 
 
 Dat., 116. 
 (rv/u./u.axos, with Dat., 119. 
 (7Vju.(|)epov, o^v/x(/)opos (acrv/A- 
 
 (jbopo?), with Dat., 119. 
 <rvp.^ovw, with Dat., 117. 
 Svv, Prep., 305. 
 
 — with Dat. of Circum- 
 stance, 114. 
 
 a~vv 0e(3 elneiv, 157. 
 l,vvea-i?, see Construction 
 
 Kara avveaiv (English 
 
 Index). 
 
 — Verbs compounded with, 
 take a Dat., 118. 
 
 (TvvdSui (Sta'Sw), with Dat., 
 
 117- 
 a-vvaWdaao}, with Ace and 
 
 Dat., 117. 
 <Tvveifj.i, with Dat., 118. 
 a-vvekovTi (crvvTeVi'ovTt) el- 
 
 nelv, 107. 
 o-vvoiSa, Construction, 118, 
 
 175- 
 cr^xxAAoju-ai, v/ith Gen., 86. 
 axeSov elirelv, 157. 
 crxT^M* i^"-^' oAov Kat /xe'prj, 
 
 24. 
 
 ra TTpHora eivai, 16. 
 
 rdSe, TotSe TrdrTa, 52. 
 
 Tda-aro, with Gen., 93. 
 
 TeKfxripiov Se, 26. 
 
 Tepivoi, with double Ace, 71. 
 
 T195 avTTJs riixepd? and t?? 
 
 avTT^' rjixepa, 92. 
 Tt p.a6u)V ; Tt Tra^wv ; (rt' 
 
 exwi', Tt /SovAo/xevos), 164. 
 Tiju.to?, with Gen., 103. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 433 
 
 Tiju-w, TiixCifjiai., with Gen., 
 
 93- 
 Ti/Lnopov/ota^ with Acc, 76 ; 
 
 see 129. 
 Ti/Awpo), with Dat., 116. 
 Tis, idiomatic uses of, 26. 
 TO /oi>7 (/xr; ov), Tov or tov 
 
 fur) (/xrj ov), with Infin., 
 
 after Verbs of denying, 
 
 etc., 366, 367, 368. 
 
 TO TTOloV, TO Tl ; 56 ; TO 
 
 noLov, TO iTOcrov, 63. 
 ToiovTos, followed by ov, 
 
 362. 
 Tofevw, with Gen., 87. 
 TOV, with Infin. Final, 94, 
 
 see 366. 
 TOV A01770V and to Kolttov, 
 
 92. 
 rvy^dpta, with Gen., 86 ; 
 
 with Particip. , 173. 
 tovt' e/cetvo, 52. 
 Tpa^rji'at, with Gen., 80. 
 TpC^tav, with Gen., 103. 
 Tvpavi'eva), Tvpavvu), with 
 
 Gen., 98. 
 TV</)A6?, with Gen., 103. 
 
 v^pi^oi, with double Acc, 
 
 UTraxovw, with Gen. and 
 
 with Dat., 116. 
 iijrapxw, with Particip., 171. 
 VTreKTpaireaOai. fjnij, fxr} ov, 
 , 365. 
 
 Yirep, Prep., 314. 
 vnepaKySi, with Gen., 100. 
 virep^akkio, with Acc, 75. 
 vnepexio, with Gen., 97. 
 VTrepc^vrj? oao?, etc., 59. 
 UTrev^ufos, with Gen. and 
 
 Dat., 103. 
 vmqpeToj, with Dat., 116. 
 VTrto-;(i'ovju.at, with Dat. and 
 
 with Acc, 116. 
 'Ytto, Prep., 341. 
 
 VTTo^aAAw, with Dat., 116. 
 vTToSvojixat, with Acc, 75. 
 
 V7707rT€VCU JUI7, fXYf OV , 264. 
 
 vTTOTcA^s, with Gen., 103. 
 VTTOTiOeixai, with Dat., 116. 
 vno^evyui, with Acc, 75. 
 va-repoi, vaTepC^w, with 
 
 Gen., 98. 
 vo-Tepo?, vcTTepalo^, with 
 
 Gen., 97. 
 v4>C<rTafj.aL, with Acc, 75. 
 
 $ 
 
 <})avep6<;, (jjavepov, i^taivofi-at., 
 Constructions, 173, 174. 
 
 (/)ei6oju.ai ((/)eiSu)A.6s), with 
 Gen., 99, 103. 
 
 <^ei), with Gen. , 94. 
 
 <j!)ev-ya) St/crjv, 81 ; with Gen. 
 of charge, 95 ; 6 ^evyoiv, 
 
 95- , . , 
 
 (}>evy(0 fir], ju,rj ov, 365. 
 
 <l)9dvo), with Acc, 76 ; with 
 Particip., 171. 
 
 (})0opu), with Gen., 94 ; with 
 Dat., 117. 
 
 (/)tAtKws Sta/ceiju-ai, etc, with 
 Dat. 
 
 (^iA.66(opos, with Gen., 103. 
 
 4>iKofJia9yf<;, with Gen., 113. 
 
 ^o/3ovju,ai, with Acc, 76 : 
 with Infin., 155 ; with/otij, 
 joiT) ov and variant con- 
 structions, 266, etc. 
 
 4>pi(T(r<a, with Acc, 75. 
 
 (fypovrC^io orrw?, etc., 260, 
 261 ; jury, ju-rj ov, 264. 
 
 </)vA.d<7-crw, -Oju.at on-ws, etc., 
 260, 261 ; 1X7], jixij ov, 264, 
 365- 
 
 (^vAdo-CTo/itat, with Acc. 76 ; 
 
 <|>vi'ac, with Gen., 8: 
 
 X 
 
 Xat'pw, with Particip., 170. 
 
 XaAeTraiVw, ^''^^^'''ws <f)ep<a, 
 with Dat., 112-117. 
 
 Xapt^ojoiat, with Dat., 116. 
 
 Xdpii/, quasi-Prep., 302. 
 
 Xopevu) Oeov, 72. 
 
 Xpr? {XPW, ^XP^v), with /x^ 
 and ov, 353. 
 
 XP^v, 5^^ expi]!'. 
 
 XPW^MO?, XP'J'^'ros (aXP*?*^- 
 Tos), with Dat., 119. 
 
 Xp(>>fio.L, with Dat., iii. 
 
 Xwpi^w, with Gen., 99. 
 
 Xwpi's, quasi-Prep. 301. 
 
 tl/evSofxai, with Gen., 86 
 with double Acc, 72. 
 
 \j/iA6<: with Gen., 98, 103 
 xIjiKw, with Gen., 99. 
 
 a 
 
 wi/rjTos, with Gen., 103 ; 
 (ovovjLtat, with Gen., 93 : 
 with oTrws, etc., 260, 261. 
 
 wpatos, with Gen., 93, 103. 
 
 ws. Modal, 253 ; for ottws 
 Modal, 261, n. 3 ; Final, 
 253 ; with Final Particip., 
 258 ; for ojsTe, Consecu- 
 tive, 275 ; ojs av. Final, 
 255 ; in Wishes, 280, etc. ; 
 Comparative (also (o^irep) 
 with Particip., 165, 167. 
 
 ws, with Superlative, 123. 
 
 ws (oisrrep) ov and fii], 357. 
 
 tos eVos einelv, and similar 
 phrases, 157. 
 
 (uSTrep ap el, 20Q. 
 
 w9Te, Consecutive, 269-273 ; 
 Limitative, 274. 
 
 uisTe fj.rj, with Infin. after 
 Verbs of denying, etc., 
 
 . 366. 
 
 w(/)eAov, without av, see 
 eSet; in Wishes, 281-283. 
 
TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 Aeschines, B.C. 389-314 (?) 
 
 Aeschylus, B.C. 525-456. 
 
 Andocides, B.C. 440 (?) — last speech 390. 
 
 Antiphon, B.C. 48o(?)-4io(?). 
 
 Aristophanes, B.C. 450 (?) — last play 388. 
 
 Demosthenes, B.C. 384(?)-322. 
 
 Euripides, B.C. 480-406. 
 
 Isaeus, dates of speeches B.C. 389-352. 
 
 Isocrates, B.C. 436-338. 
 
 Lysias, B.C. 435 (?)-378. 
 
 Plato, B.C. 429(?)-347. 
 
 Sophocles, B.C. 496-406. 
 
 Thucydides, B.C. 471 (?)-40i (?). 
 
 Xenophon, B.C. 429 (?)-356 (?). 
 
 The reference to the mithor is on the left hand, that to the page of the 
 Grammar on the right hand. 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 AESCHINES. 
 
 Choephorae 
 
 
 366, . 
 
 
 
 239 
 
 
 142, 
 
 417 
 
 384, 
 
 
 
 77 
 
 III. In Ctesiphontem. 
 
 200 
 
 74 
 
 431, 
 
 
 
 204 
 
 86, . . . 39 
 
 257, 
 
 265 
 
 460. 
 
 
 
 272 
 
 177. • • • 373 
 
 262, 
 
 43 
 
 465. 
 
 
 
 90 
 
 204, ... 352 
 
 290, 
 
 251 
 
 466; 
 
 
 
 239 
 
 333. • • -49. 122 
 
 392, 
 
 136 
 
 529, 
 
 
 
 210 
 
 
 521, 
 
 412 
 
 680, 
 
 
 
 420 
 
 AESCHYLUS. 
 
 705, 
 
 92 
 
 761, 
 793, 
 
 
 
 69 
 
 237 
 
 87 
 
 Agamemnon. 
 
 Etwte7iides 
 
 
 
 
 37, • • • 212 
 
 256, 
 
 21 
 
 800, 
 
 
 
 379 
 
 67, 
 
 
 
 318 
 
 344, 
 
 299 
 
 1041, 
 
 
 
 423 
 
 130. 
 200, 
 
 
 
 340 
 218 
 
 618, 
 661, . 
 
 362 
 
 Prometheus Vinctus. 
 
 225, 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 
 
 10, . . . 255 
 
 
 
 
 305 
 
 Persae. 
 
 
 T2, 
 
 
 
 107 
 
 642, 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 10, 
 
 255 
 
 152, 
 
 
 
 257 
 
 689, 
 
 
 
 423 
 
 49, 
 
 16 
 
 165, 
 
 
 
 243 
 
 788, 
 
 
 
 77 
 
 100, 
 
 82 
 
 248, 
 
 
 
 365 
 
 813, 
 
 
 
 297 
 
 112, 
 
 265 
 
 285, 
 
 
 
 347 
 
 930, 
 
 
 
 206 
 
 124, 
 
 385 
 
 419, 
 
 
 
 318 
 
 1030, 
 
 
 
 343 
 
 162, . 
 
 26 
 
 481, 
 
 
 
 242 
 
 1067, 
 
 
 
 244 
 
 164, . . 
 
 102 
 
 627, 
 
 
 
 367 
 
 1358, 
 
 
 
 422 
 
 182, 
 
 92 
 
 650, 
 
 
 
 337 
 
 1379, 
 
 
 
 327 
 
 297, 
 
 251 
 
 786, 
 
 
 
 369 
 
 1400, 
 
 
 
 325 
 
 319, 
 
 III 
 
 830, 
 
 
 
 318 
 
 1438, 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 327, 
 
 420 
 
 l^l^ 
 
 
 
 154 
 
 1439. 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 331, 
 
 74 
 
 898, 
 
 
 
 431 
 
 1487, 
 
 
 
 301 
 
 337, 
 
 301 
 
 904, 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 434 
 
7 ABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 435 
 
 LINE 
 987, 
 1047, 
 
 PAGE 
 
 93 
 136 
 
 Septem ad Thebas. 
 
 513. 
 553, 
 672, 
 681, 
 821, 
 843, 
 
 IS, 
 594. 
 
 62 
 206 
 778 
 289 
 411 
 note 341 
 . 318 
 
 Supplices. 
 
 309 
 74 
 
 ANDOCIDES. 
 I. De Mysteriis. 
 
 30, 
 
 38, 
 
 43, 
 
 50, 
 
 54. 
 
 57, 
 
 58, 59. 
 
 61, 
 
 63, 
 
 lOI, 
 
 180 
 
 • 50, 407 
 
 244, 256 
 
 41 
 
 223 
 
 224 
 
 218 
 
 404 
 
 . 387 
 
 353 
 
 II. De Reditu. 
 10, . . . 41 
 12, . . . 223 
 
 III. De Pace. 
 41, • • • 362 
 
 ANTIPHON. 
 III. Tetral. B. /3. 
 
 I 
 
 4,6, 
 5, 
 5. 
 6, 
 10, II, 
 
 63 
 41, 48 
 
 369 
 225 
 
 379 
 214 
 
 45 
 
 IV. Tetral. T. a. 
 
 223 
 
 352 
 
 K De Caede Herodis. 
 I and passim, . 45 
 
 415 
 122 
 50 
 217, 219 
 357 
 205 
 223 
 
 LINE 
 17, 
 19, 
 21, 
 
 24, 
 25, 
 26, 
 90, 
 
 91, 
 92, 
 
 PAGE 
 
 122, 225 
 
 225 
 
 • 378 
 
 2l8 
 
 244, 250 
 
 397 
 213 
 225 
 225 
 
 VI. De Choreuta. 
 
 209 
 214 
 206 
 
 ARISTOPHANES. 
 Achartiians. 
 
 57, 
 94, 
 106, 
 166, 
 196, 
 364, 
 384, 
 418, 
 466, 
 474, 
 562, 
 
 675. 
 761, 
 959, 
 991, 
 1000, 
 
 ICX)I, 
 
 1048, 
 1055, 
 1078, 
 1180, 
 
 54, 
 195, 
 461, 
 964, 
 
 Aves. 
 
 Ecclesiazusae 
 
 105, 
 115, 
 236, 
 493, 
 495, 
 650, 
 991, 
 999, 
 
 112, 
 158, 
 926, 
 
 Equites. 
 
 41 
 
 41 
 250 
 
 78 
 
 56 
 386 
 
 88 
 
 58 
 123 
 
 56 
 225 
 
 58 
 219 
 120 
 213 
 
 56 
 215 
 160 
 312, 342 
 
 52 
 214 
 122 
 334 
 
 137 
 378 
 373 
 244 
 
 301 
 349 
 16 
 265 
 256 
 383 
 385 
 378 
 
 26s, 370 
 377 
 261 
 
 459, 
 917, 
 
 5, 
 77, 
 118, 
 
 153, 
 296, 
 299, 
 341, 
 345, 
 367, 
 490, 
 50s, 
 
 520, 
 
 692, 
 
 698, 
 788, 
 792, 
 819, 
 876, 
 
 1027, 
 1301, 
 
 1368, 
 
 438, 
 1133, 
 II5I, 
 
 23, 
 
 200, 
 202, 
 
 298, 
 456, 
 
 462, 
 
 504, 
 522, 
 526, 
 
 6og, 
 636, 
 643, 
 830, 
 866, 
 955, 
 1459, 
 
 469, 
 
 283, 
 397, 
 774, 
 1 179, 
 
 Lysistr. 
 
 Nubes. 
 
 Plutus. 
 
 Ranae. 
 
 Thesr,i. 
 Vespae. 
 
 DEMOSTHENES. 
 Olynthiac i. 
 
 15, 25, 
 
 3" 
 
 \ 
 
 *.The references are to the pages of Reiske's edition, 1770. The numbers in brackets 
 are the references as given in the text of this Grammar, in compiling which different 
 editions of Demosthenes have been used. Some of the examples, about eighteen, bor- 
 rowed from other books, have not been verified in Reiske. They are omitted in this 
 list, but not in the text, as they are evidently authentic, and useful. 
 
436 
 
 TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Olynthiac ii. 
 24, 14 [2, 22], 
 
 330 
 
 381, 5, • . • 
 
 381, 10, . 
 
 143 
 160 
 
 
 EURIPIDES. 
 
 
 
 388, 15, . 
 
 398 
 
 
 A Ices t is. 
 
 
 Olynthiac in. 
 
 
 391, 9 [11], 
 
 219 
 
 18, 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 29, 22 [same construction 
 
 395, 8 [§ 190], . . 
 
 206 
 
 150, 
 
 
 
 
 jOO 
 
 343 
 341 
 172 
 221 
 314 
 94 
 221 
 
 as in text], 
 
 Philippic I. 
 40, I [Phil. i. I], . 
 
 70 
 239 
 
 418, 13, . 
 
 434, 6, . . . 
 
 In Lepiinem. 
 
 75 
 266 
 
 346, 
 662, 
 671, 
 690, 
 
 
 
 
 44,' 12 [Phil. i'. 44],' 
 
 320 
 224 
 
 460, 2 [20, 10], 
 470, 26, . 
 
 sS 
 
 741, 
 
 755, 
 
 
 
 
 45, I [Phil. i. 18], . 
 
 206 
 
 478, 25 [20, 73], 
 
 313 
 
 
 
 
 45, II [iv. 39], 
 
 49, i4[Phil. i. 9], . 
 
 108 
 
 43 
 
 In Midiam. 
 
 
 134, 
 
 168, 
 
 Andfotnache. 
 
 51, 27 [Phil. i. 10], 
 
 90 
 
 527, 3. • • • 
 
 321 
 
 
 
 
 . 18,52 
 416 
 
 54, 20 [Phil. i. 54], 
 
 150 
 
 528, 16 . . 
 
 339 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 530, 21 [21, 51], 
 
 209 
 
 220, 
 
 
 
 
 De Pace. 
 
 
 582, 25, . 
 
 206 
 
 441, 
 
 
 
 
 341 
 
 6i, 17 [de Pace iv.] 
 
 76 
 
 In Ajidrotionein. 
 
 
 700, 
 797, 
 
 
 
 
 377 
 386 
 
 Philippic II. 
 
 
 596, 17, . 
 
 257 
 
 946, 
 1077, 
 
 
 
 
 114 
 377 
 
 66, 12 [Phil. ii. 66], 
 
 255 
 
 In Aristocratetn. 
 
 
 1251, 
 
 
 
 
 307 
 
 De Chersoneso. 
 
 
 660, 7 [23, 120], 
 
 16 
 
 
 Bacchae. 
 
 
 107, 8 (viii. 70), 
 
 331 
 
 In Timocratem. 
 
 
 I, 
 
 
 71 
 
 Philippic III. 
 
 
 734, 2 [24, 107], 
 
 278 
 
 5, 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 734, 5 [37, 28], 
 
 34 
 
 29, 
 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 112, 7, . . . 
 
 219 
 
 763, 15 [24, 203], . 
 
 76 
 
 70, 
 
 
 
 
 422 
 
 119, 8 [9, 31], . . 23 
 124, 19 [same construction 
 
 In Aristogit. i. 
 
 
 142, 
 156, 
 
 
 
 
 415 
 342 
 
 as in text]. 
 
 314 
 
 773, I, . . . 
 
 261 
 
 183, 
 
 
 
 
 422 
 
 129, 19 [129, 72], . 
 
 17 
 
 In Aphohnn i. 
 
 
 250, 
 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 130, 14, . 
 
 265 
 
 
 270, 
 
 
 
 
 350 
 
 Philippic IV. 
 
 
 815, II, . 
 
 816, 12, . 
 
 313 
 325 
 
 277, 
 331, 
 
 
 
 
 304 
 287 
 
 141, 3 [i, 141], 
 
 265 
 
 822, 8, . . . 
 
 325 
 
 342, 
 
 
 
 
 386 
 
 De Rhod. Libertat. 
 
 834,23, . 
 
 229 
 
 343, 
 757, 
 
 
 
 
 374 
 322 
 
 197,8, . . 
 
 359 
 
 In Aphobum 11. 
 
 
 847, 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 Pro Megalop. 
 
 
 837, 13 [11], . 
 841, IT, . 
 
 572 
 230 
 
 1039, 
 "34, 
 
 
 
 
 323 
 114 
 
 202, 23, . 
 
 403 
 
 842,9, . 
 
 282 
 
 1263, 
 
 
 
 
 350 
 
 207, 4, . . . 
 
 261 
 
 
 
 1288, 
 
 
 
 
 348 
 218 
 
 
 
 Pro Phano in Aphob. 
 
 1312, 
 
 
 
 
 De Corona. 
 
 
 {Aphob. HI.) 
 
 
 1353, 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 229, 16 [21, 26], 
 
 33^ 
 
 849, V4, . 
 
 257 
 
 1368, 
 
 
 
 
 323 
 
 236, 10 [12], 
 
 260 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 242, 10 [242], . 
 
 224 
 
 In Onetor. A, 
 
 
 
 Cyclops. 
 
 
 243, 17, . 
 
 115 
 
 86s, 24, . . 
 
 246 
 
 120, 
 
 
 375 
 
 246, 10, . 
 
 41 
 
 869,9, . . 
 
 405 
 
 131, 
 
 
 137 
 
 268, 28 [18, 124], . 
 
 135 
 
 870, 24, . 
 
 388 
 
 595, 
 
 
 262 
 
 269, 19 [18, 127] 
 274,28, . 
 
 ,s 
 
 In Stephanurn. 
 
 
 
 Electra. 
 
 
 278, 15 [21, 117], . 
 
 24 
 
 "13, 4 [45, 38], 
 
 164 
 
 231, 
 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 288, 29, . 
 
 323 
 
 323 
 
 In Polyclem. 
 
 
 369, 
 939, 
 
 
 
 
 377 
 62 
 
 292, 21, . 
 
 304 
 
 1206, 12 [Meid.], 
 
 206 
 
 1035, 
 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 301, I, . . 
 301, 27 [18, 220] 
 313,6, . . . 
 
 39 
 261 
 
 In Cononent. 
 1266,2, . 
 
 359 
 
 1061, 
 1 165, 
 
 
 Hecu 
 
 ba. 
 
 281 
 377 
 
 De Pals. Legat. 
 
 
 In Neaerarn. 
 1360, 20 [viii. 70], . 
 
 
 580, 
 
 
 318 
 
 343, 19 [19, 8], 
 
 106 
 
 331 
 
 730, 
 
 
 272 
 
 372, I, . . . 
 
 267 
 
 Epitaphium, 
 
 
 836, 
 
 
 280 
 
 379, 7, • ■ • 
 
 368 
 
 1397, I, . . . 
 
 299 
 
 1085, 
 
 
 
 
 III 
 
TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 437 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 ac;e 
 
 I-INE 
 
 I 
 
 AGE , 
 
 LINE V 
 
 AGE 
 
 nil, 
 
 
 218 
 
 
 Orestes. 
 
 
 V Pkilippus. 
 
 
 1 138, 
 
 
 257 
 
 263, 
 
 . 
 
 369 
 
 77, • . • 
 
 402 
 
 1154, 
 1275, 
 
 
 344 
 147 
 
 374, 
 418, 
 
 
 
 
 \t 
 
 VI. Archidamus. 
 
 
 
 Helena. 
 
 
 497, 
 529, 
 
 
 
 
 lOI 
 23 
 
 13, • • • 
 
 24 . 
 
 269 
 122 
 
 107, 
 
 
 360 
 
 622, 
 
 
 
 
 341 
 
 25 [120J, 
 
 206 
 
 176, 
 
 
 . 
 
 403 
 
 680, 
 
 
 
 
 249 
 
 26, . . . 
 
 242 
 
 825, 
 
 
 . 
 
 206 
 
 936, 
 
 
 
 
 172 
 
 89, • ' . 
 
 26 
 
 88s, 
 
 
 
 93 
 
 1098, 
 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 107 [138 A], . 
 
 212 
 
 1358, 
 
 • 
 
 16 
 
 1320, 
 1593, 
 
 
 211 
 
 .;f8 
 
 VII. Areopagitiais. 
 
 
 
 Heracleidae. 
 
 
 
 
 64 [152 d], . 
 
 315 
 
 37, 
 130, 
 
 
 306 
 24 
 
 
 Phoeiiissae. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 92, 
 
 . . 267 
 
 , 370 
 
 VIII. De Pace. 
 
 
 179, 
 
 
 
 243 
 
 .403 
 
 518, 
 
 
 
 319 
 
 114, 
 
 321 
 
 248, 
 482, 
 
 
 
 
 265 
 355 
 
 710, 
 838, 
 
 
 
 
 169 
 23 
 
 IX. Evagoras. 
 
 
 699, 
 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 1215, 
 
 
 
 
 211 
 
 74, • • • 
 
 329 
 
 800, 
 971, 
 
 
 
 
 23 
 304 
 
 1216, 
 1357, 
 
 
 
 
 228 
 360 
 
 X. Heleuae Lmid 
 
 
 Hercules Furens. 
 
 
 1590, 
 1621, 
 
 
 
 
 375 
 212 
 
 28, . . . 
 47, • • • 
 
 sli 
 
 1054, 
 1435, 
 
 . 
 
 265 
 250 
 
 1624, 
 
 
 Rltesus. 
 
 
 249 
 
 XII. Panathenaiciii 
 97, . . ■ 
 
 20 
 
 
 mppolytus. 
 
 
 5, 
 415, 
 
 
 131 
 25 
 
 
 213, 
 407, 
 
 
 
 
 386 
 280 
 
 
 
 XV. Antid. s. ve de Permii- 
 tatio7ic. 
 
 496, 
 
 
 
 
 386 
 
 
 .S 
 
 'iipplices. 
 
 
 33, ■ • • 
 
 251^ 
 
 499, 
 
 
 
 
 372 
 
 484. 
 
 
 
 330 
 
 
 
 606, 
 
 
 
 
 372 
 
 ^97' 
 
 
 
 836 
 
 LYSIAS. 
 
 
 659, 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 1066, 
 
 
 371 
 
 ,386 
 
 
 
 701, 
 "03, 
 
 
 
 
 339 
 22 
 
 
 
 Troades. 
 
 
 i. 4, 
 21, 
 
 
 49 
 262 
 
 1410, 
 
 
 
 
 280 
 
 178, 
 
 
 
 370 
 
 IV. I, 
 
 
 380 
 
 1425, 
 
 
 
 
 107 
 
 214, 
 
 
 
 
 254 
 
 vii. 27, 
 
 
 270 
 
 1601, 
 
 
 
 
 386 
 
 662, 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 xii. 44, 
 
 
 261 
 
 
 Ion. 
 
 
 III; 
 
 
 
 
 24 
 332 
 
 48, 
 
 
 250 
 351 
 
 15?, : ■. : 
 
 1074, 
 1523, 
 
 fphisenia in A id. 
 
 359 
 
 403 
 
 75 
 
 267 
 
 905, 
 970, 
 
 ] 
 
 SAEUS. 
 
 
 176 
 354 
 
 74, 
 xiii. 83, 
 xix. 39, 
 
 .. 49, 
 x.xii. 4, 
 
 
 97 
 
 59 
 
 245 
 
 436, 
 489, 
 
 
 
 171 
 244 
 
 32, 
 
 De Pyrrhi Hered. 
 
 107 
 
 18, 
 xxv. 27, 
 xxvii. 16, 
 
 
 180 
 30 
 3!;i 
 
 754, 
 1025, 
 
 
 
 292 
 55 
 
 V. 
 
 De Dicaeoff. Hered. 
 
 x.xx. 13, 
 
 
 62 
 
 1047, 
 
 
 77 
 
 26, 
 
 
 74 
 
 PLATO. 
 
 
 Ipkigenia i7i Taur 
 
 
 VI. 
 
 De Philoct. Hered. 
 
 Apology. 
 
 
 534. 
 
 
 71 
 
 6, 
 
 
 20 
 
 i. 17 A, . 
 
 184 
 
 1203, 
 1371, 
 
 Medea. 
 
 137 
 289 
 
 Vli 
 
 9. 
 24- 
 
 . De Cirott. Hered. 
 
 357 
 
 1715,62 
 
 222, 312 
 216 
 
 ,419 
 320 
 320 
 
 88, 
 
 . 
 
 347 
 
 
 o/t 
 
 ii. 18 A, 
 
 • 95 
 
 159 
 
 216, 
 
 
 
 
 297 
 
 
 
 
 18 B, 
 
 
 74 
 
 233, 
 
 
 
 
 93 
 
 
 ISOCRATES. 
 
 
 18 c, 
 
 
 37 
 
 334, 
 627, 
 
 
 
 
 82 
 315 
 
 I 
 
 Ad DemoJikutn 
 
 
 18 D, 
 
 iii. 19 IS, 
 
 44 
 
 210 
 422 
 
 753, 
 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 15, 
 
 
 60 
 
 19 c, 
 
 
 2S0 
 
 1018, 
 
 
 
 
 112 
 
 
 
 
 19 u. 
 
 210, 414 
 
 419 
 
 1151, 
 
 
 
 
 374 
 
 
 \. Panegyricns. 
 
 
 iv, 19 E, 
 
 
 22 
 
 1271, 
 
 
 
 
 135 
 
 19. 
 
 242 
 
 ,406 
 
 20 A, 
 
 
 109 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 E 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
438 
 
 TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 MNE 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINR 
 
 
 
 >AGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 I'AGK 
 
 20 15, 
 
 . 29 
 
 215, 223 
 
 xxxii. 40 
 
 0, 
 
 204 
 
 835 D, 
 
 
 17 
 
 20 C, 
 
 
 216 
 
 40 E, . 
 
 209 
 
 895 B, 
 
 
 277 
 
 V. 20 E, 
 
 ■ 44 
 
 250, 325 
 
 ... 41 A, . 
 
 32s 
 
 948 c, 
 
 . 
 
 19 
 
 21 A, 
 
 
 68 
 
 XXXIU. 
 
 42 
 
 A (in text xxxu.), 
 
 942 C, 
 
 
 135 
 
 vi. «I B, 
 
 
 187, 412 
 
 
 
 
 258 
 
 
 
 
 21 I), 
 21 E, 
 
 
 225, 249 
 419 
 
 
 Cratylus. 
 
 
 212 D, 
 
 Lysis. 
 
 368 
 
 vii. 22 A, 
 
 
 68 
 
 393 c, 
 
 
 
 370 
 
 216 C, 
 
 
 267 
 
 22 B (in text 
 
 vfiii.), 151 
 
 430 D, 
 
 
 
 370 
 
 218 D, 
 
 . 
 
 267 
 
 22 c (in text 
 
 vi.), 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 viii. 22 D, 
 
 
 , 18? 
 
 
 
 Crito. 
 
 
 
 Meno. 
 
 
 22 E, 
 
 
 270 
 
 iii. 44 
 
 D> 
 
 
 257 
 
 70 A, 
 
 
 370 
 
 ix. 23 A, 
 
 
 209 
 
 IV. 44 
 
 E, 
 
 
 417 
 
 70 c, 
 
 . 
 
 59 
 
 2315, 
 
 
 221 
 
 45 
 
 A, 
 
 
 159 
 
 73 B, 
 
 
 70 
 
 XU. 25 B, 
 
 203, 
 
 250, 347 
 
 45 
 
 B, 
 
 191 
 
 , 270 
 
 90 E, 
 
 
 341 
 
 ... 25 c, 
 
 xui. 25 c, 
 
 
 422 
 
 419 
 
 .V. 45 
 IX. 48 
 
 ^1 
 C, 
 
 2C8 
 
 129 
 369 
 
 
 Phaedo. 
 
 
 25 D, 
 
 
 270 
 
 xi. 50 
 
 B, 
 
 
 379 
 
 s8e, 
 
 . 
 
 278 
 
 xiv. 26 D, 
 
 
 . 360 
 
 XU. 50 c, 
 
 211 
 
 228 
 
 60 c, 
 
 
 148 
 
 26 E, 
 
 
 414 
 
 50 
 
 D, 
 
 
 335 
 
 61 B, 
 
 
 369 
 
 XV. 27 D, 
 
 
 214 
 
 51 
 
 A, 
 
 
 174 
 
 62 B, 
 
 
 416 
 
 xvi. 28 B (in text 
 
 XV.), 
 
 XV. 53 
 
 E>, 
 
 
 205 
 
 68 b, 
 
 
 211 
 
 
 
 264, 383 
 
 xvi. 54 
 
 B, 
 
 
 120 
 
 69 A, 
 
 . 
 
 340 
 
 28 c, 
 
 
 . 236 
 
 
 
 
 
 70 A, 
 
 
 264, 370 
 
 xvii. 28 D, 
 
 
 2T2, 224 
 
 
 Euthydemus. 
 
 
 72 c, 
 
 
 402 
 
 28 E, 
 
 
 234. 259 
 
 299 B, 
 
 
 
 228 
 
 77 b( 
 
 in text 77 -6), 
 
 242, 
 
 29 A, 
 
 
 413 
 
 302 c. 
 
 
 _ 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 251, 370 
 
 29 B, 
 
 100, 
 
 i6s, 352 
 
 304 E, 
 
 
 
 257 
 
 84 b, 
 
 
 383 
 
 29 c, 
 
 
 205, 211 
 
 307 B, 
 
 
 
 380 
 
 84 c, 
 
 
 338 
 
 29 D (in 
 
 text xviii.), 26 
 
 
 
 
 
 84 E, 
 
 
 267 
 
 30 B, 
 
 
 351 
 
 
 Ejithyphro. 
 
 
 85 A, 
 
 . 
 
 91, 100 
 
 30 c, 
 
 . 
 
 205 
 
 12 D, 
 
 
 
 216 
 
 87 E, 
 
 . 
 
 136 
 
 30 c (in 
 
 text 
 
 XXIX.), 25 
 
 14 C, 
 
 
 
 217 
 
 88 A, 
 
 
 38, 242 
 
 xviii. 30 A, 
 
 
 251 
 
 
 
 
 
 93 B 
 
 (Phaedr. in 
 
 30 c, 
 
 
 421 
 
 
 
 Gorgias. 
 
 
 
 text), . 
 
 25 
 
 30 D, 
 
 
 105, 156 
 
 457 D, 
 
 
 274 
 
 , 347 
 
 95 A, 
 
 
 399 
 
 31 A, 
 
 
 204, 210 
 
 457 E, 
 
 
 
 265 
 
 98 A, 
 
 . 
 
 414 
 
 xix. 31 D, 
 
 
 369 
 
 4591^, 
 
 
 
 349 
 
 98 D, 
 
 
 353 
 
 32 A, 
 
 251 
 
 278, 421 
 
 477, 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 .102 D, 
 
 
 278 
 
 XX. 32 A, 
 
 
 68 
 
 479 c, 
 
 
 
 271 
 
 108 E, 
 
 
 366 
 
 32 B (in text 
 
 xxiii.), 
 298, 316 
 
 479 D, 
 489, . 
 
 
 • 
 
 91 
 90 
 
 
 Phaedrus. 
 
 
 xxi. 32 D, 
 
 
 203 
 
 495 D, 
 
 
 
 262 
 
 227 H, 
 
 
 205 
 
 33 A, 
 
 
 210 
 
 499> 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 228 D, 
 
 
 343 
 
 33 B, 
 
 
 221 
 
 506 B, 
 
 
 
 406 
 
 229 A, 
 
 . 
 
 40 
 
 xxii. 33 c, 
 
 
 420 
 
 514 A, 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 239 D, 
 
 
 75 
 
 33 D, 
 
 
 219 
 
 516 E, 
 
 
 . 
 
 309 
 
 242 c [Phaedo], 
 
 16 
 
 33 E, 
 
 34 A, 
 
 
 40 
 219 
 
 
 
 Laches. 
 
 
 260 b, 
 279 A, 
 
 : : 
 
 23 
 335 
 
 34 D, 
 xxiii. 34 c, 
 
 
 422 
 
 250, 316 
 
 180 c, 
 
 180 E, 
 
 
 
 251 
 24 
 
 
 Philebns. 
 
 
 34 D. 
 
 
 203 
 
 195 A, 
 
 
 
 301 
 
 13 A, 
 
 
 264, 370 
 
 35 A, 
 
 
 . 236 
 
 196, 
 
 
 
 370 
 
 27 E, 
 
 • 
 
 42 
 
 xxiv. 35 B, 
 
 35 c, 
 
 
 301 
 352 
 
 
 
 Leges. 
 
 
 
 Politicns. 
 
 
 XXV. 36 A, 
 
 
 350 
 
 640 D, 
 
 
 
 419 
 
 276 c I 
 
 ical el], . 
 
 251 
 
 xxvi. 36 C, 
 
 
 243 
 
 679 C, 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 303 A, 
 
 
 103 
 
 xxvii. 37 D, 
 
 
 88 
 
 698 C, 
 
 
 
 
 113 
 
 303 D, 
 
 
 32 
 
 xxviii. 38 A, 
 38 B, 
 
 
 : 3^' 
 
 701 D, 
 715 E, 
 
 
 
 
 301 
 122 
 
 
 Protagoras 
 
 
 xxix. 39 A, 
 
 225 
 
 , 272, 410 
 
 719 E, 
 
 
 
 
 205 
 
 30915, 
 
 
 r 
 
 39 c (el Kal, 
 
 ntext 
 
 721 A, 
 
 
 
 
 81 
 
 313 c. 
 
 
 262 
 
 
 icai el 
 
 , 251 
 
 726 A, 
 
 
 
 
 316 
 
 320 A, 
 
 
 303 
 
 xxxi. 39 E, 
 
 
 237, 369 
 
 731 c, 
 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 321 A, 
 
 ■ 
 
 261 
 
 40 B, 
 
 
 234 
 
 737 E, 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 322 D, 
 
 . 
 
 328 
 
 41 E, 
 
 
 377 
 
 809 E, 
 
 
 
 
 335 
 
 323 c, 
 
 
 362 
 
TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 439 
 
 Li.NK 
 326 D, 
 
 329 B, . 
 
 336 13, . 
 352 1), • 
 358 I-., . 
 
 Reptihlii 
 
 329 I', 
 
 337 E, 
 
 338 D, 
 
 339 E, 
 
 344 D, 
 
 345 E, 
 348 E, 
 352 c, 
 354 A and B, 
 
 358 B, 
 
 359 c, 
 
 360 B, 
 360 D, 
 362 D, 
 
 362 D (O in text), 
 393 E, 
 398 A, 
 
 404 B, 
 
 405 A, 
 
 406 C, 
 
 408 c, 
 
 412 A, 
 416 D, 
 424 R, 
 
 427 E, 
 
 428 c, 
 
 434 B, 
 
 436 D, 
 
 451 A, 
 
 459 B, 
 
 461 B, 
 463 D, 
 465 B, 
 470 A, 
 470 B, 
 
 472 B and 
 475 A, 
 478 B, 
 494 B, 
 499 B, 
 511 A, 
 
 517 A, 
 
 518 c, 
 539 A, . 
 545 A (in text 535), 
 549 E, 
 562 c, 
 567 A, 
 574 E, 
 579 B, 
 579 B, 
 
 590 A, 
 
 591 B, 
 
 606 B, 
 
 607 C, 
 
 610 A, 
 612 B, 
 
 614 B, 
 
 615 B, 
 
 24 
 206 
 
 353 
 367 
 325 
 
 100 
 192 
 
 24 
 192 
 
 45 
 177 
 186 
 136 
 
 32 
 208 
 
 . 403 
 274 
 121 
 
 55 
 •136 
 256 
 3" 
 250 
 385 
 
 25 
 211 
 150 
 362 
 
 86 
 363 
 
 25 
 
 112 
 404 
 265, 370 
 10 1 
 75 
 102 
 383 
 
 lOI 
 
 3-'J4 
 38 
 
 321 
 21 
 
 229 
 02, 373 
 
 343 
 229, 230 
 
 180 
 
 261 
 38 
 
 192 
 89 
 
 255 
 
 343 
 82 
 85 
 
 314 
 
 316 
 25 
 20 
 
 229 
 , 228 
 
 400 
 
 407 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 615 D, 
 
 
 205 
 
 586, 
 
 616 C, 
 
 
 299 
 
 593, 
 632, 
 659, 
 
 
 Soj>histes. 
 
 
 235 A, 
 
 
 . 267 
 
 66s 
 
 254 A, 
 
 
 38 
 
 674, 
 680, 
 
 
 Sy^nposium 
 
 
 690, 
 
 175 A, 
 
 
 374 
 
 692, 
 
 179 B, 
 
 
 
 
 . 328 
 
 715, 
 
 185 E, 
 
 
 
 
 251 
 
 725, 
 
 186 B, 
 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 728, 
 
 187 D, 
 
 
 
 
 255 
 
 767, 
 
 189, 
 
 
 
 
 407 
 
 803, 
 
 213 D, 
 
 
 
 
 261 
 
 807, 
 
 222 A, 
 
 
 
 
 205 
 
 816, 
 828, 
 840, 
 
 
 Theaetetics 
 
 
 145, 
 
 
 370 
 
 960, 
 
 145 B, 
 
 
 
 
 . 267 
 
 1094, 
 
 155 A, 
 
 
 
 
 . 238 
 
 1114, 
 
 169 B, 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 1121, 
 
 183 E, 
 
 
 
 
 2i4 
 
 1131, 
 
 190 A, 
 
 
 
 
 377 
 
 1231, 
 
 
 
 Tiinaeiis. 
 
 
 1242, 
 1264, 
 
 25 D, 
 
 
 
 311 
 
 1268, 
 
 l\^' 
 
 
 
 145 
 
 1274, 
 
 86 D, 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 1275, 
 
 
 
 
 ^340, 
 
 
 SOPHOCLI 
 
 :s. 
 
 1418, 
 
 
 Aias. 
 
 
 
 6, 
 
 
 357 
 
 9. 
 
 27. 
 
 
 
 
 114 
 
 20, 
 
 42, 
 
 
 
 
 49 
 
 25, 
 
 44, 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 26, 
 
 51, 
 
 
 
 
 322 
 
 28, 
 
 70, 
 
 
 
 
 369 
 
 30, 
 
 75, 
 
 
 
 
 372 
 
 41. 
 
 122, 
 
 
 
 
 249 
 
 42, 
 
 123, 
 
 
 
 
 277 
 
 43, 
 
 153, 
 
 
 
 
 112, 277 
 
 48, 
 
 263, 
 
 
 
 
 226 
 
 50, 
 
 271, 
 
 
 
 
 237 
 
 69, 
 
 272, 
 
 
 
 
 234 
 
 74, 
 
 275, 
 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 85, 
 
 285, 
 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 91, 
 
 313, 
 
 
 
 
 405 
 
 97, 
 
 318, 
 
 
 
 
 89 
 
 100, 
 
 359, 
 
 
 
 
 363 
 
 115, 
 
 367, 
 
 
 
 
 94 
 
 152, 
 
 377, 
 
 
 
 
 323 
 
 170, 
 
 403, 
 
 
 
 
 135 
 
 172, 
 
 434, 
 
 
 
 
 250 
 
 182, 
 
 470, 
 
 
 
 
 363 
 
 212, 
 
 474, 
 
 
 
 
 113, 171 
 
 223, 
 
 475, 
 
 
 
 
 331 
 
 234, 
 
 496, 
 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 239, 
 
 536, 
 
 
 
 
 204 
 
 242, 
 
 540, 
 
 
 
 
 367 
 
 244, 
 
 557, 
 
 
 
 
 189 
 
 260, 
 
 560, 
 
 
 
 
 371 
 
 263, 
 
 564, 
 
 
 
 
 91, 251 
 
 '265, 
 
 567, 
 
 
 
 
 192 
 
 323, 
 
 572, 
 
 
 
 
 384 
 
 378, 
 
 PAGE 
 147, 148 
 356 
 415 
 85 
 420 
 151 
 418 
 
 4x8 
 147 
 277 
 59 
 367 
 114, 306 
 100 
 
 106 
 335 
 413 
 305 
 377 
 337 
 44 
 347 
 377 
 347 
 280 
 347 
 377 
 377 
 123 
 
 244 
 
 277: 
 
 Antigone. 
 
 419 
 171 
 106 
 
 418 
 82 
 
 302 
 
 261 
 85 
 40, 52 
 154 
 410 
 204 
 420 
 305 
 235 
 271 
 122 
 114 
 
 71 
 277 
 
 305 
 
 20, 295 
 
 77 
 
 185 
 
 51, 377 
 
 189 
 
 172 
 
 356 
 
 177 
 
 366 
 
 155 
 
 245 
 
 352 
 
440 
 
 TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 267, 
 
 i'AGE 
 
 LINK 
 
 159 
 
 
 25 
 
 1 9. 
 
 • 238 
 
 ; 14. 
 
 • 368 
 
 ! 18, 
 
 214 
 
 j 24, 
 
 . 176 
 
 25, 
 
 204, 209 
 
 32, 
 
 106 
 
 38, 
 
 213 
 
 ! 43, 
 
 90 
 
 49> 
 
 73 
 
 : 58, 
 
 • 378 
 
 66, 
 
 173 
 
 1 72, 
 
 304 
 
 i ^4, 
 
 45, 323 
 
 1 85, 
 
 .113 
 
 121, etc 
 
 324 
 
 123, 
 
 ■ 136 
 
 141, 
 
 T06 
 
 174, 
 
 246 
 
 183, 
 
 102 
 
 188, 
 
 6s 
 
 193, 
 
 22, 204 
 
 225, 
 
 • 185 
 
 244, 
 
 304 
 
 248, 
 
 278 
 
 264, 
 
 245 
 
 267, 
 
 106 
 
 269, 
 
 62 
 
 272, 
 
 352 
 
 285, 
 
 74 
 
 286, 
 
 418 
 
 293. 
 
 413 
 
 299. 
 
 204 
 
 305. 
 
 .^"■S 
 
 317. 
 337. 
 
 302 
 
 338, 
 
 337 
 
 344' 
 
 314 
 
 360, 
 
 • , 299 
 
 364. 
 
 • 69, 299 
 
 369- 
 
 76 
 
 372. 
 
 75 
 
 380, 
 
 245 
 
 381, 
 
 87 
 
 384, 
 
 354 
 
 386, 
 
 88 
 
 390. 
 
 295 
 
 399. 
 
 160 
 
 404, 
 
 87 
 
 415. 
 
 n 
 
 423, 
 
 306 
 
 424, 
 
 24 
 
 435' 
 
 45 
 
 447' 
 
 102 
 
 478, 
 
 189 
 
 479> 
 
 29 1 
 
 496, 
 
 422 
 
 547' 
 
 81 
 
 549' 
 
 122 
 
 555- 
 
 85 
 
 556, 
 
 410 
 
 562, 
 
 333 
 
 57I' 
 
 355' 370 
 
 580, 
 
 44 
 
 604, 
 
 377 
 
 612, 
 
 Electra. 
 
 I'AGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 
 627, 
 
 160 
 
 630, 
 
 422 
 
 640, 
 
 422 
 
 668, 
 
 173 
 
 676, 
 
 250 
 
 677, 
 
 89, 234 
 
 679, 
 
 „ 277 
 
 682, 
 
 84, 385 
 
 690, 
 
 "5 
 
 705' 
 
 257 
 
 707, 
 
 106 
 
 711. 
 
 415 
 
 736, 
 
 104 
 
 742, 
 
 104 
 
 749, 
 
 77 
 
 766, 
 
 69. lOI 
 
 771, 
 
 87 
 
 782, 
 
 115 
 
 811, 
 
 330 
 
 817' 
 
 100 
 
 875, 
 
 115 
 
 908, 
 
 245 
 
 920, 
 
 347 
 
 945, 
 
 147 
 
 950, 
 
 299 
 
 955, 
 
 236 
 
 956, 
 
 no 
 
 974, 
 
 108 
 
 977, 
 
 339 
 
 979. 
 
 421 
 
 996, 
 
 236 
 
 1000, 
 
 305 
 
 1022, 
 
 62 
 
 1038, 
 
 32, 177 
 
 1052, 
 
 63 
 
 1054, 
 
 80 
 
 io59> 
 
 31, 298 
 
 1061, 
 
 250 
 
 1092, 
 
 156 
 
 1095, 
 
 417 
 
 1117, 
 
 104 
 
 1122, 
 
 363 
 
 1131, 
 
 268 
 
 II34' 
 
 99 
 
 "54, 
 
 236 
 
 1165, 
 
 85 
 
 1166, 
 
 22 
 
 1172, 
 
 85 
 
 n8o, 
 
 67 
 
 1195, 
 
 234 
 
 1210, 
 
 88 
 
 1214, 
 
 415 
 
 1236, 
 
 99 
 
 1262, 
 
 92 
 
 1265, 
 
 99 
 
 1274, 
 
 106 
 
 1308, 
 
 251 
 
 1309, 
 
 112 
 
 1334, 
 
 246 
 
 1343, 
 
 77 
 
 1348, 
 
 337 
 
 1433' 
 
 93 
 
 145I' 
 
 267 
 
 1460, 
 
 215 
 
 1476, 
 
 83! 
 
 1496, 
 
TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 441 
 
 LINE PAGE 
 
 LINE PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Oed. Col. 
 
 65, . . . 311 
 
 10, 
 
 • 31. 340 
 
 38, 
 
 
 
 79 
 
 88, 
 
 
 352 
 
 12, 
 
 175 
 
 65, 
 
 
 
 354 
 
 102, 
 
 
 304 
 
 17, 
 
 296, 297 
 
 118, 
 
 
 
 261 
 
 122, 
 
 
 356 
 
 21, 
 
 • 326 
 
 178, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 169. 
 
 
 185 
 
 23, 
 
 120 
 
 305, 
 
 
 
 62 
 
 197. 
 
 
 94 
 
 24, 
 
 107 
 
 317, 
 
 
 
 162 
 
 244. 
 
 
 71 
 
 36, 
 
 lOI 
 
 337, 
 
 
 
 \l 
 
 285, 
 
 
 307 
 
 37, 
 
 325 
 
 359. 
 
 
 
 368 
 
 289, 
 
 
 151 
 
 38, 
 
 218, 244, 325 
 
 408, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 348. 
 
 
 368 
 
 39, 
 
 • , 352 
 
 450, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 349. 
 
 
 369 
 
 41. 
 
 161, 3IS 
 
 502, 
 
 
 
 301 
 
 353. 
 
 
 323 
 
 44, 
 
 115 
 
 509. 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 377. 
 
 
 359 
 
 45, 
 
 120 
 
 556, 
 
 
 
 171 
 
 408, 
 
 
 363 
 
 54, 
 
 334 
 
 565. 
 
 
 
 365 
 
 409, 
 
 
 274 
 
 56, . 
 
 293 
 
 595. 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 427. 
 
 
 277 
 
 58, . 
 
 15 
 
 649, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 444, 
 
 
 274 
 
 60, . 
 
 319 
 
 667, 
 
 
 
 . 365 
 
 487, 
 
 
 301 
 
 62, 
 
 . 366 
 
 707, 
 
 
 
 62 
 
 494, 
 
 
 418 
 
 64. . 
 
 . 298 
 
 746, 
 
 
 
 322 
 
 523, 
 
 
 68 
 
 65, . 
 
 . 261 
 
 761, 
 
 
 
 227 
 
 534, 
 
 
 301 
 
 67, 
 
 333 
 
 ^34. 
 
 
 
 356 
 
 554. 
 
 
 • 318 
 
 68, 
 
 244 
 
 848, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 588, 
 
 
 363 
 
 70, 
 
 221 
 
 956, 
 
 
 
 149. 384 
 
 611, 
 
 
 375, 385 
 
 71, 
 
 145 
 
 969, 
 
 
 
 271 
 
 674. 
 
 
 164 
 
 73, 
 
 268 
 
 996, 
 
 
 
 73 
 
 764, 
 
 
 246 
 
 74, 
 
 166 
 
 1023, 
 
 
 
 372 
 
 825, 
 
 
 255 
 
 76, . 
 
 354, 366 
 
 1024, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 900, 
 
 
 356 
 
 ^v • 
 
 304 
 
 "54. 
 
 
 
 351 
 
 914, 
 
 
 276 
 
 78, 
 
 351 
 
 1239, 
 
 
 
 413 
 
 917, 
 
 
 245 
 
 86, 
 
 339 
 
 1441, 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 931, 
 
 
 423 
 
 87, . 
 
 400 
 
 1443, 
 
 
 
 304 
 
 961, 
 
 
 243 
 
 89, • 
 
 59 
 
 1455, 
 
 
 
 331 
 
 969, 
 
 
 281 
 
 91, 
 
 13, 296, 404 
 
 1513. 
 
 
 
 39 
 
 975, 
 
 
 356 
 
 95, 
 
 112 
 
 1702, 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 1030, 
 
 
 107 
 
 96, . 
 
 . 60, 91 
 
 Oed. Tyr. 
 
 1079, 
 1171, 
 
 
 19 
 122 
 
 97, 
 99. 
 
 45 
 236 
 
 II. 
 
 
 368, 381 
 
 1224, 
 
 
 70 
 
 ICX>, 
 
 99 
 
 129, 
 
 
 366, 369 
 
 1289, 
 
 
 147 
 
 102, 
 
 . . 276 
 
 198, 
 
 
 
 ^il 
 
 1293, 
 
 
 304 
 
 103. 
 
 . . 360 
 
 220, 
 
 
 
 368 
 
 1314, 
 
 
 147 
 
 104, 
 
 29 
 
 255, 
 
 
 
 144 
 
 1363, 
 
 
 353 
 
 107, 
 
 170 
 
 281, 
 
 
 
 362 
 
 1441 
 
 
 340 
 
 109, 
 
 238, 292 
 
 302, 
 
 
 
 251 
 
 
 
 112, 
 
 . 68 
 
 314, 
 
 
 
 304 
 
 Trachiniae 
 
 
 116, 
 
 166 
 
 442, 
 
 
 
 154 
 
 389, . . 
 
 296 
 
 118, . 
 
 . 85, 244 
 
 446, 
 
 
 
 208 
 
 545, 
 
 
 154 
 
 120, 
 
 299 
 
 544, 
 
 
 
 . - 410 
 
 577, 
 
 
 295 
 
 121, 
 
 121, 347 
 
 551, 
 
 
 
 380 
 
 631. 
 
 
 256, 299 
 
 123, 
 
 23 
 
 454, 
 
 
 
 298 
 
 687, 
 
 
 246 
 
 124, 
 
 373. 380 
 
 ^^2' 
 
 
 
 309 
 
 817. 
 
 
 418 
 
 125, 
 
 168 
 
 888, 
 
 
 
 302 
 
 978. 
 
 
 374, 384 
 
 126, 
 
 131, 168 
 
 1129, 
 
 
 
 309 
 
 1 100, 
 
 
 323 
 
 128, 
 
 115,365 
 
 1214, 
 
 
 
 420 
 
 1122, 
 
 
 102 
 
 131, 
 
 99 
 
 1267, 
 
 
 
 207 
 
 1129. 
 
 
 264 
 
 132, 
 
 242 
 
 1326, 
 
 
 
 295 
 
 1183, 
 
 
 374 
 
 134, 
 
 406 
 
 1380, 
 
 
 
 123 
 
 1342. 
 
 
 211 
 
 137, 
 
 246, 348 
 
 1387, 
 
 
 
 257 
 
 
 140, 
 
 91 
 
 1391, 
 
 
 
 257 
 
 THUCYDIDES. 
 
 141, 
 
 314, 330 
 
 1437. 
 1770, 
 
 
 
 lOI 
 
 405 
 
 Book I. 
 
 Book 
 
 n. 
 
 Philoctetes. 
 
 I, 
 2, 
 
 . 36 
 
 85, 3^7 
 8S, 273 
 
 3, 
 4. 
 
 • 8s. 191 
 
 26, . . . 44 
 
 3. 
 
 
 335 
 
 5, 
 
 23 
 
 46, . . . 276 
 
 4, 
 
 
 94, 162 
 
 15, 
 
 • 19, 321 
 
 60, . 
 
 
 
 304 
 
 8, 
 
 
 293 
 
 17, 
 
 343, 354 
 
442 
 
 TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 l8, . . 
 
 309 
 
 38, . . . 83 
 
 50, 
 
 123, 244 
 
 20, 
 
 115 
 
 40, 
 
 
 
 310 
 
 57, 
 
 
 306 
 
 21, 
 
 277, 405 
 
 41, 
 
 
 
 246 
 
 59. 
 
 
 405 
 
 32, 
 
 162 
 
 47. 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 64, 
 
 
 343 
 
 36, . . 
 
 323 
 
 60, 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 70, 
 
 
 255 
 
 38, . 
 
 III 
 
 64, 
 
 
 
 342 
 
 71, 
 
 
 151, 222, 244 
 
 40, 
 
 310 
 
 66, 
 
 
 
 268 
 
 74, 
 
 
 55 
 
 41, 
 
 18 
 
 70, 
 
 
 
 322 
 
 75, 
 
 
 121, 312 
 
 49, • 
 
 107, 366 
 
 90, 
 
 
 
 237 
 
 V' 
 
 
 • ^ ^^ 
 
 52, 
 
 226 
 
 102, 
 
 
 
 310 
 
 80, 
 
 
 396, 405 
 
 53. 
 
 365 
 
 106, 
 
 
 
 331 
 
 81, 
 
 
 34 
 
 60, . 
 
 277 
 
 118, 
 
 
 
 320 
 
 87, 
 
 
 . 362 
 
 61, . 
 
 121 
 
 125, 
 
 
 
 168 
 
 92, 
 
 
 301 
 
 72, 
 
 399 
 
 128, 
 
 
 
 261 
 
 100, 
 
 
 405 
 
 t, : . 
 
 45 
 304, 322 
 
 130, . . .85, 297 
 
 Book 
 
 VIII. 
 
 89, . 
 
 347 
 
 Book V. 
 
 I, 
 
 3^ 
 
 92, 
 
 147 
 
 9, . . . 160 
 
 23, 
 
 
 316 
 
 93, 
 
 . 256 
 
 10, 
 
 
 
 244 
 
 36, 
 
 
 39 
 
 95, 
 
 105 
 
 17, 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 40, 
 
 
 . 237 
 
 97, . • 
 
 . 326 
 
 32, 
 
 
 
 175 
 
 66, 
 
 
 196, 221 
 
 102, 
 
 401 
 
 33. 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 70, 
 
 
 360 
 
 5^^/^ 
 
 III. 
 
 34, 
 35. 
 
 
 
 320 
 348 
 
 72, 
 
 74, 
 
 
 : ^l 
 
 I, 
 
 . 366 
 
 37, 
 
 
 
 131 
 
 85. 
 
 
 39 
 
 10, 
 
 237, 322 
 
 40, 
 
 
 
 360 
 
 86, 
 
 
 • 34, 51 
 
 12, 
 
 121 
 
 46, 
 
 
 
 90 
 
 89, 
 
 
 • • . 11 
 
 13, 
 
 305, 322 
 
 50, 
 
 
 
 348 
 
 108, 
 
 
 36s. 366 
 
 14, 
 
 271 
 
 55. 
 
 
 
 109 
 
 
 
 15, 
 
 31 
 
 67. 
 
 
 
 373 
 
 XENOPHON. 
 
 22, 
 29, 
 
 254 
 107, 244 
 
 74, 
 103, 
 
 
 
 20 
 310 
 
 Anabasis. 
 
 32, 
 
 . 406 
 
 105, 
 
 
 
 265 
 
 i. I, I, . 
 
 20 
 
 37> 
 
 120 
 
 III, 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 I, 3, • 
 
 147, 184 
 
 39, 
 
 362, 369 
 
 
 I, 10, 
 
 227 
 
 40, 
 
 224 
 
 Book VI. 
 
 2, 2, . 
 
 . 406 
 
 41, 
 
 . 246 
 
 4, . . . 245 
 
 2, 5, • 
 
 255 
 
 46, . 
 
 123 
 
 5, 
 
 
 
 306 
 
 2, 8,. 
 
 343 
 
 49, 
 
 ■ ^ 273 
 
 21, 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 2, IS, 
 
 ' • 0. 321 
 
 53, 
 
 264, 267, 370 
 
 32, 
 
 
 
 342 
 
 2, 21,, 
 
 186, 405 
 
 54, 
 
 . 51, 210 
 
 34. 
 
 
 160, 
 
 320, 333 
 
 2, 23, 
 
 15 
 
 55, 
 
 209 
 
 37. 
 
 
 
 • 331 
 
 2, 31, 
 
 21 
 
 59, 
 
 337 
 
 39. 
 
 
 
 . 58, 105 
 
 3, 17, 
 
 404 
 
 64, • 
 
 III 
 
 49. 
 
 
 
 407 
 
 4,7.- 
 
 405 
 
 69, • 
 
 299 
 
 50, 
 
 
 
 259 
 
 4. 20, 
 
 226, 272 
 
 74. 
 
 219 
 
 54- 
 
 
 
 261 
 
 5. 5,- 
 
 62 
 
 75, 
 
 . . 366 
 
 58, 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 5. 13, 
 
 272 
 
 81, 
 
 298, 362 
 
 62, 
 
 
 
 114, 238 
 
 6,-2, . 
 
 . . 366 
 
 88, . 
 
 . . 184 
 
 76, 
 
 
 
 75 
 
 6, 10, 
 
 87 
 
 95, 
 
 • . 348 
 
 77, 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 7,18, 
 
 347 
 
 96, . 
 
 299 
 
 82, 
 
 
 
 351 
 
 8, 12, 
 
 ISO 
 
 103, 
 
 271 
 
 100, 
 
 
 
 208 
 
 9, 3, • 
 
 323 
 
 105, 
 
 . 326 
 
 
 9, 10, 
 
 405 
 
 Book 
 
 IV. 
 
 Book VII. 
 2, . . . 331 
 
 9, 20, 
 ii. I, 4. . 
 
 337 
 217 
 
 i» 
 
 . 76, 104 
 
 10, 
 
 
 
 297 
 
 1,6,. 
 
 19 
 
 4, 
 
 . . 238 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 304 
 
 I, 15, 
 
 25 
 
 5, 
 
 • . 351 
 
 17. 
 
 
 
 255 
 
 1,16, 
 
 17 
 
 II, 
 
 264, 359. 415 
 
 21, 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 2, 3, • 
 
 . 362 
 
 14, 
 
 414 
 
 22, 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 3, II, 
 
 . . 367 
 
 16, . 
 
 242 
 
 23. 
 
 
 
 334 
 
 3. 13, 
 
 273 
 
 17, . 3f 
 
 5, 43. 245, 299 
 
 29, 
 
 
 
 296 
 
 3. 25, 
 
 . 270 
 
 18, . 
 
 . . 316 
 
 31. 
 
 
 
 334 
 
 4, 22, 
 
 163 
 
 28, . 
 
 327 
 
 34. 
 
 
 
 91 
 
 ... 5. 13, 
 
 205 
 
 29, 
 
 39 
 
 42, 
 
 
 
 227 
 
 111. I, 19, 
 
 237 
 
 33, 
 
 192 
 
 47. 
 
 
 
 412 
 
 2,6, 
 
 
 2S9 
 
TABLE OF REFERENCES. 
 
 443 
 
 LINE PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 2, 29, . . 242 
 
 3, 9. • 
 
 74 
 
 V. I, 17, 
 
 301 
 
 3,18, 
 
 
 240 
 
 3, 18, . 
 
 240 
 
 2, 13, 
 
 404 
 
 4,9,- 
 
 
 81 
 
 3, 35, 
 
 206, 270 
 
 4, 2, . 
 
 335 
 
 5. I. • 
 
 
 330 
 
 3, 51, 
 
 121 
 
 vi. 4, 12, 
 
 34 
 
 5, 7.- 
 
 
 273 
 
 iv. I, 3, . 
 
 414 
 
 vii. 1,8,. 
 
 251 
 
 5, II, 
 
 
 366 
 
 I, 18, 
 
 261 
 
 I, 34, • 277 
 
 ,405 
 
 5,16, 
 
 
 291 
 
 I, 21, 
 
 180 
 
 
 
 5,18, 
 
 
 247 
 
 2, 25, 
 
 257 
 
 Memorabilia. 
 
 
 IV. 2, 6, . 
 
 
 272 
 
 40 
 
 3, II, 
 
 4, 21, 
 
 271 
 59 
 
 i^ApotriHeumata). 
 
 
 4, 15, 
 
 
 351 
 
 5, 15, 
 
 272 
 
 i. I, 4, . 
 
 277 
 
 4, 23, 
 
 
 75 
 
 5, 37, 
 
 239 
 
 I, 5, • 
 
 216 
 
 4, 24, 
 
 
 24 
 
 6, 8, . 
 
 93 
 
 2, 6, . 
 
 246 
 
 8,2,. 
 
 
 379 
 
 V. I, 25, 
 
 369 
 
 2, 7, • 
 
 264 
 
 8,4,. 
 
 
 18 
 
 2, 12, 
 
 265 
 
 2, 35, 
 
 121 
 
 8,5,. 
 
 
 96 
 
 2, 35, 
 
 • 309 
 
 2, 39, 
 
 353 
 
 V. I, 10, 
 
 
 219 
 
 2, 36, 
 
 376 
 
 2, 41, 
 
 379 
 
 2, 5, . 
 
 
 276 
 
 vi. 2, 30, 
 
 265 
 
 2, 46, . . 
 
 281 
 
 3,35, 
 
 
 81 
 
 3. 19, 
 
 271 
 
 4, 14, 
 
 336 
 
 4,16, 
 
 
 166 
 
 .. 4, 16, 
 
 156 
 
 ii. I, 8, . 
 
 344 
 
 4,30, 
 
 
 92 
 
 vii. I, 18, 
 
 358 
 
 I, 25, 
 
 383 
 
 7, 5,. 
 
 
 242 
 
 3, 13, 
 
 373 
 
 2, 39, 
 
 ^ft 
 
 8,17. 
 
 
 324 
 
 4, 4. . 
 
 333 
 
 3, 3, . • 
 
 168 
 
 vi. I, 21, 
 
 
 55 
 
 5, 13, 
 
 71 
 
 3, 18, 
 
 220 
 
 2, I, . 
 
 
 232 
 
 5, 49, 
 
 246 
 
 6, 2, . 
 
 362 
 
 3, 17, 
 
 
 90 
 
 . 7,16, . 
 
 367 
 
 7, II, 
 
 104 
 
 3, 20, 
 
 
 177 
 
 viu. I, 10, 
 
 396 
 
 7, 13, 
 
 363 
 
 3,26, 
 
 
 ^t 
 
 I, 10, II, . 
 
 407 
 
 ...9,8,. . . 
 
 109 
 
 vii. I, 4> • 
 
 
 248 
 
 I, 48, 
 
 22 
 
 111. I, 6, . 
 
 177 
 
 3, 13, 
 
 
 399 
 
 3, 40, 
 
 113 
 
 5,1,. 
 
 '37 
 
 3, 34, 
 
 
 323 
 
 4, 16, . 
 
 191 
 
 5, 17, . 121 
 
 ,156 
 
 6.4,. 
 
 
 76 
 
 6,3,. 
 
 258 
 
 11, I, . 
 
 97 
 
 *8, 6, . 
 
 
 309 
 
 6, 13, . 
 
 48 
 
 . 13, 3,. • 121, 
 
 t272 
 
 8,22, 
 
 
 54 
 
 7, 19, 
 
 152 
 
 IV. 1,3,. 
 
 38 
 
 Cyropaedia 
 
 
 7, 22, 
 
 376 
 
 2, 36, . . 
 
 2, 39. 
 
 4, 12, . . 
 
 17 
 370 
 207 
 
 i. 2, I, . 
 
 80 
 
 Hellenica. 
 
 
 2, 5, . 
 
 
 255 
 
 i. I, 16, . 
 
 166 
 
 6,7,. . . 
 
 402 
 
 2, II, 
 
 
 20 
 
 I, 28, 
 
 306 
 
 7, 2, . 
 
 397 
 
 3,3,. 
 
 
 278 
 
 I, 34, 
 
 323 
 
 
 
 3,9,. 
 
 
 29 
 
 6, 32, . 
 
 371 
 
 Agesilans. 
 
 
 4,14, 
 
 
 ^il 
 
 .. 7, 5, . 
 
 390 
 
 ii. 15, . 
 
 107 
 
 4,18, 
 
 
 166 
 
 11. I, 2, . 
 
 254 
 
 iv. I, . 
 
 275 
 
 4,20, 
 
 
 272 
 
 I, 25, 
 
 75 
 
 
 
 4,25, 
 
 
 254 
 
 2, 7, . 
 
 305 
 
 Hiero. 
 
 
 5, II, 
 
 6, 4, . 
 
 
 273 
 94 
 
 2, 13, 
 
 3, II, 
 
 353 
 
 X. 3, • 
 
 297 
 
 6, 18, 
 
 
 400 
 
 3, 16, . 
 
 380 
 
 Oeconomicus. 
 
 
 ii. 1, 4, . 
 
 
 255 
 
 3, 22, 
 
 334 
 
 
 261 
 
 I, 21, 
 
 
 256 
 
 lii. I, 28, 
 
 306 
 
 ii. 9, . . . 
 
 2,9,. 
 
 
 114, 405 
 
 2, 31, 
 
 353 
 
 23, • 
 
 13 
 
 2, 22, 
 
 
 83 
 
 3, 9, • 
 
 260 
 
 iii. 5, • . . 
 
 59 
 
 3, 13, 
 
 
 339 
 
 3, 19, 
 
 168 
 
 vii. 3, . 
 
 ^ 
 
 4,2,. 
 
 
 321 
 
 5, 10, 
 
 265 
 
 viii. 8, • 
 
 4,7,. 
 
 
 147 
 
 iv. I, 33, 
 
 207 
 
 X. I, . 
 
 41 
 
 4, 23, 
 
 
 . 366 
 
 I, 41, 
 
 S8 
 
 
 
 in. I, 15, 
 
 
 305 
 
 2, 3, . 
 
 373 
 
 Symposium. 
 
 
 1,37, 
 
 
 378 
 
 4, 5, • 
 
 353 
 
 ii. 3, . . . 
 
 367 
 
 1,41. 
 
 
 ^o^ 
 
 5, 5, • 
 
 303 
 
 ill. 5, • • • 
 
 297 
 
 2, 3, • 
 
 
 85 
 
 8, 4, • . 
 
 13 
 
 iv. 5, . . . 
 
 353 
 
 2,37, 
 
 
 136 
 
 8, 16, 
 
 256 
 
 6, . . 277 
 
 , 405 
 
 * Misprinf, viii 
 
 6. + 
 
 On 272, 
 
 read Ap. for An. 
 
 
 EDINBURGH : T. AND A. CONSTABLE, PRINTERS TO HER MAJESTY. 
 
^ 
 
U]> 
 
 Thi 
 
 14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 RENEWALS ONLr - Tel. No. 642-3406 
 
 Nov2: 
 
 REC- 
 
 JlOi^gT-gKI 
 
 s ^ 
 
 
 DEC < 
 
 r subie|Y|°^;ip^cKS 
 
 3»L 2gffi 7n,^jj 
 
 4^iJiz 
 
 vasii^ 
 
 'BOC} Wff end of FALt. Qua4r nrn , -, - 
 3!^tS »ub|6a to recal l alter- ^ t^ t^l ^ 7l 
 
 LD 21-1001 
 
 BtCDLD Dtt^ 
 
 m^"^^ 
 
 ^' 
 
 JftN9 70 
 
 DLJlAaBTO^llAM 
 
 6 1972 7 9 
 
 .-iC 
 
 -/ 
 
 ^gL— ^ ^al^V o ;/^ 
 
 LD 21A-I0m-1,'68 
 (H7452sl0)476B 
 
 irfr 
 
 University c 
 BerkeK 
 
 67 5 
 
lili«;BiBK."="»i£! 
 
 L03lfl01qpu 
 
 "■